PC 1109 
.V38 
1827 
-spy 1 




FASTEST TRAIN 
BETWEEN N EW YO R K AND THE 

OHIO AND MISSISSIPPI VALLEYS 





CHAS E.PUGH. 




-v9— - 


J.R.WOOD 




GENl MANAGER. 






gen'l pass, agt . 


<* - 




Jl 





_._. 



■ 







Glass. 
Book, 



COMPLETE 
ITALIAN MASTER: 

CONTAINING 

THE BEST AND EASIEST RULES FOR ATTAINING 
THAT LANGUAGE. 



TO WHICH ARE ADDED, 



AN INTRODUCTION TO ITALIAN VERSIFICATION ; 
EXTRACTS FROM THE ITALIAN POETS ; &c. &c. 

THE WHOLE PROPERLY ACCENTED, TO FACILITATE THE 
PRONUNCIATION OF LEARNERS. 



By SIGNOR VENERONI, 

ITALIAN SECRETARY TO THE FRENCH KING. 



A NEW EDITION, 

CAREFULLY REVISED, CORRECTED, AND IMPROVED, 

By A. RONNA. 



LONDON: 

Printed for 

J. COLLING WOOD ; LONGMAN & CO.; T. BOOSEY & SONS; 

J. BOOKER; G. B. WHITTAKER ; SIMPKIN & MARSHALL; 

HAMILTON, ADAMS, & CO.; DULAU & CO.; AND J. SOUTER. 



1827. 












T. C. Hansard, 

Printer, 

Paternoster-row- Press. 



PREFACE. 



W HEN we reflect on the number of great men whom 
Italy has produced since the glorious age of Leo X ; as well 
• as on the pleasure and instruction to be obtained by visiting 
that beautiful country ; and consequently the necessity of 
understanding the Italian language, to make such visit 
profitable ; and farther, when it is considered, that the 
authors of Italy constitute a fund of every kind of elegant 
and polite literature ; it is not surprising that the Gram- 
mars, &c, written to promote the knowledge of this lan- 
guage, have so greatly multiplied : for without a proper 
acquaintance with its idiom, all the treasurer of Italian 
learning and literature ; all the discoveries and inventions 
of genius and industry in that nation, would be lost to the 
rest of mankind. 

For these reasons, the editor originally undertook to 
present to the English student, and in an English dress, 
Veneroni's Italian Grammar ; a work then, as now, 
justly considered as far surpassing all other introductions 
to that elegant language ; but with such corrections, im- 
provements, and additions as were necessary to render it 
conformable to the English idiom : these improvements 
consisted of an Introduction to Syntax ; an Essay on Italian 
Poetry, or Versification ; the different Compositions in 
Verse, and Poetical Licences ; a Treatise on compound 
Words, Capitals, and Punctuation : and finally, a Discourse 
on Expletives, the energy and beauty of which constitute 
a great part of the merit of most languages. 

But, non omnia possumus omnes. Such is the very high 
reputation of Veneroni's Grammar on the Continent, and 
so great the number of those who wish to be able not only 
to understand, but to speak the Italian language, with cor- 
rectness 



iv PREFACE. 

rectness andjDurity, that very material additions and obser- 
vations upon that work have been published since our first 
edition of it. This consideration has induced us to com- 
bine in every succeeding edition the fruits of our own 
inquiries and studies, with those of learned foreigners* 
We have likewise added some new Grammatical observa- 
tions on the Italian language ; with Remarks on the Letters 
of the Alphabet ; new Dialogues, Phrases, &c. &c. ; and 
the Italian words are also properly accented, to facili- 
tate the pronunciation to learners. After all, we must 
not take upon us to say that it is impossible any better 
edition of this Work should ever appear ; but this we may 
safely affirm, that it will be long before Veneroni's 
Grammar of the Italian language can be carried to a 
higher degree of perfection than that in which we now 
give it, with our strongest recommendation, to the English 
student. 



ADVERTISEMENT TO THIS NEW EDITION. 

The greatest attention with regard to correctness has been 
bestowed upon this new edition of Veneroni's very highly esteemed 
Italian Grammar : and the Editor believes it will be found in every 
respect much superior to any which have preceded it. The chapters 
relative to Pronunciation have been particularly improved, and 
this important branch of the Italian language most copiously eluci- 
dated. All the treatises on the Italian Grammar have been cor- 
rected and improved, without changing the order fixed by Mr. 
Veneroni. The Selections in Prose have been greatly improved. 
A sketch of the Origin of the Italian language and Poetry has 
been added, and with it, many elegant Extracts from the most 
celebrated Italian Poets. 

The Editor also begs leave to observe, that hehas just finished 
the revision of a new edition. o/Mr. Bottarelli's Italian Exer- 
cises, referring to the Rules of this Grammar ; together with its 
Key ; also of his Italian, French, and English Dictionary, in 
three volumes ; which works hi confidently trusts will be found 
exceedingly correct, and very materially improved. 



Intro- 



INTRODUCTION 

TO THE 

ITALIAN TONGUE 



THE most expeditious, and certainly the only sure 
way to understand, write, and speak, the Italian 
and indeed all other languages, is, to acquire the 
knowledge of them on the principles of Grammar. — 
In order, therefore, to facilitate this acquirement, more 
especially as it respects Ladies, and those persons un- 
acquainted with the Latin, I shall first, in this Intro- 
duction, explain the necessary Terms and Defini- 
tions of Grammar in general : — this being thoroughly 
studied and understood, I shall then proceed to ex- 
plain, in the best manner I am able, the Rules of the 
Italian Grammar in particular. 



An Explanation of the Terms of Grammar. 

THE first terms of Grammar are the Letters. 
There are twenty-two letters in the Italian tongue, 
viz. a, b, c,d, e,f g, h, i,j, I, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, z. 

The Italians do not make use of k, w, x, y. 

The letters are divided into vowels and consonants. 

The vowels are, a, e, i, o, u. They are called vowels, 
from their forming a perfect sound without the assist- 
ance of any other letter, as a is pronounced single : e f 
the same ; and in like manner the other vowels. 

The consonants are the remaining letters, b, c, d, f y 

g,j, I, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, v, z. We give them the name; 

B of 



2 INTRODUCTION to the 

of consonants, because we cannot pronounce them 
without the help of a vowel, either before or after 
them : example, b is pronounced as if there were a b 
and e together, or be ; f, as ef, and so of the rest. 

H, especially at the beginning of a word, is not con- 
sidered properly a letter, and therefore is never pro- 
nounced in Italian ; yet the use made of it in the 
middle of words, is greater than most people imagine. 
See what we say of it in treating of the pronunciation 
of consonants. 

It is the mixture of the letters, that generally forms 
the different words which every language is capable of 
producing ; and that some order may be observed in 
the infinite number of words, they have been reduced 
to ten parts of speech, though most Italians reckon no 
more than eight. 

A speech is composed of sentences. 

Sentences are composed of words. 

Words of syllables. 

Syllables of letters. 

Letters are certain marks ordiaracters, which serve 
to form the syllables and words, as a, b, c, d, e, §-c. 

A syllable is a word, or part of a word pronounced 
with a single sound, and composed of one, two, or 
three letters, as, astrologo, an astrologer, is composed 
of four syllables, as-tro-lo-go, the second of which is 
composed of three letters, and the rest of two. A-mo, 
J love, is composed of two syllables, the former of a 
^single letter, and the latter of two. 

Sometimes a word contains but one syllable, and 
then we call it a monosyllable (a term of Greek deri- 
vation), that is to say, having but one syllable ; as, re, 
a king ; me 7 me ; te, thee, &c. 

A word consists either of one or more syllables ; as, 
re, amore. 

A sentence is composed of several words, forming a 
complete sense ; as., per ben parldre Italiano, bisogna 
parldre Toscdno, e pronuncidre come i Romani; to 
speak good Italian, we must speak as they do in Tus- 
cany, and pronounce as they do at Rome. 

A speech, or discourse, is composed of ten parts : 
these are —the Article, Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, 

Verb, 



ITALIAN TONGUE. 3 

Verb, Participle, Adverb, Preposition, Conj unction, 
and Interjection. Every word is reducible to either 
one or other of these parts of speech, the particulars 
of which will be found in the following; explanation. 
Those who admit but eight parts of speech, reject the 
Article and Adjective. 



An Explanation of the Parts of Speech, 

In order easily to understand a language, we 
should endeavour to obtain a perfect knowledge of the 
parts of speech, and their meaning; otherwise it is im- 
possible ever to understand, or speak it correctly. 
According to the preceding order, I should begin with 
the article ; but, that I may be the better understood, 
I shall commence with the Noun. 

Of NOUNS. 

A Noun is a word which serves to name and dis- 
tinguish some thing : us, Dio, God ; angelo, an angel ; 
uorno, a man ; ciclo, heaven ; terra, earth ; cavdllo, a 
horse ; libro, a book ; cappello, a hat ; iavola, a table ; 
peine, bread; vino, wine, <!v r c. 

There are two sorts of nouns ; one is called a noun- 
substantive, and the other a noun-adjective. 

The noun-substantive is that which subsists by itself, 
or which by itself nlone so clearly expresses the thing 
named, that we immediately understand it; as, heaven, 
earth, the king, a horse, a book ; we know the mean- 
ing of the words heaven, earth, the king, &c. 

The noun-adjective is a word which denotes the 
qualities of the substantive ; as, great, grande ; fine, 
bello ; little, piccolo; red, rosso: we know not what 
is great, fair, little, or red, unless we join a substantive 
to it ; as, a great book, un gran libro ; a fine book,, uti 
bel libro ; a little book, un piccolo libro ; .a red book, 
un libro rosso ; a great hat, un gran cappello ; a fine 
hat, un bel cappello ; a little hat, un piccolo cappello ; 
a red hat, un cappello rosso. 

Every noun is either of the masculine or the femi- 
nine gender, there being no neuter in Italian. 

b 2 . The 



4 INTRODUCTION to the 

The masculine gender is marked by the article il, or 
Jo, in English, the. 

The feminine gender is marked by the article la, in 
English also by the* 

All nouns, before which we may place il or lo, are of 
the masculine gender; and those before which we 
place la, are of the feminine gender ; example, il libro, 
-the book ; il fuoco, the fire ; lo specchio, the looking- 
glass ; are of the masculine gender; la terra, the 
earth ; la cdmera, the room ; la penna, the pen ; are of 
vthe feminine gender. 

* m * Observe, that the noun-substantive is but of 
-one gender ; that is to say, either masculine or femi- 
nine ; as, Dio, God ; cielo, heaven ; giardino, garden ; 
are always of the masculine gender, and never of the 
feminine. Terra, the earth, cdmera, a room, are femi- 
nine, and never masculine. 

The noun-adjective ought to agree with the substan- 
tive ; when it terminates in o, it is masculine ; and when 
it terminates in a, it is feminine. Take notice, that all 
nouns-adjective masculine, ending in o, may become 
.feminine, by changing o into a. 

hello, bella, handsome. 

piccolo, piccola, little. 

buono, buona, good. 

sdnto* sdnta, holy. 

There are some nouns-adjective, which, without 
/changing their termination, are of both genders ; and 
they are those which in Italian end in e in the singular 
number, as, illdstre, ammirdbile, facile, &c. One may 

sa y> 

un ubmo illustre, an illustrious man. 

una donna illitstre, an illustrious woman. 

uno spirito ammirdbile, a wonderful wit. 

una bellezza ammirdbile, a wonderful beauty. 

un libro fdcile, an easy book. 

una lezione fdcile, an easy lesson. 

*^* Observe, that all nouns-adjective which end in e 
in Italian, are of the common gender. 

All nouns before which il or lo, and la (the) may be 
placed indifferently, are adjectives : as, il prudente, la 
prudente, prudent ; il dotto, la dotta, learned. 

The 



ITALIAN TONGUE. 5- 

The nouns before which il or to, and la (the) must 
not be placed indifferently, but only one of them, are 
nouns-substantive; as, il sole, the sun ; la lima, the^ 
moon ; il giardino, the garden ; il.frutto, the fruit ; la 
virtu, virtue ; la prudenza, prudence. 

^ Nouns that can change o into a are also adjectives r 
thus of dotto, learned, you may form dotta, learned ; 
but of luna, giardino, terra, &c. which are nouns sub- 
stantive, you cannot form luno, giardina, thro, &c. 

A noun is also of the singular or the plural number. 

The singular number is used where we speak of one 
thing only : as, the prince, il principe ; the body, il 
corpo ; the horse, il cavdllo ; where we speak but of 
one prince, of one body, and of one horse. 

The plural number is used when we speak of more 
than one ; as, the princes, i principi ; the bodies, 
i corpi; the horses, i cavalli ; here we speak of several 
princes, several bodies, and several horses. 

The little words of two or three letters, as il or lo> 
la, in English, the ; i, gli, and le which signify the in the 
plural, and are placed before nouns to mark the gender, 
number, and case, are called Articles. 



Of the ARTICLES. 

The Article is a declinable word, of one, two, or 
three letters, which is put before the nouns to show 
their gender and number. 

The gender and number have been explained 
already. 

But not to perplex the memory, I have inserted the 
explanation of the cases after the parts of speech, as it 
will be time enough then to learn them, and it is 
sufficient, at present, to know that the English article 
is the, and it is used both in the singular and plural 
number. 

You cannot always know the gender, number, or 
case of nouns, except by the article which precedes- 
them. If one should ask, for instance, what gender 
the word piede, a foot, is of, it would be impossible to 
know, without prefixing an article to it : the articles il 

and 



6 INTRODUCTION to the 

and lo denote the masculine, and la the feminine; so 
that in saying il piede, the foot, the article il shows it 
is of the masculine gender. 

In like manner, if a person should ask of what num- 
ber any other word is, the question could not always be 
resolved, without putting the articles il, lo, i, or gli, 
before it, to mark the singular or the plural number 

*** Observe, that when an article comes before a 
word beginning with a vowel, the last letter of the 
article must be cut off; that is to say, you retrench the 
vowel at the end of the article, and in the place of it 
you put an apostrophe, which is made thus ('). 
Example ; in prefixing an article to amove, onove, 
dnima, you must not pronounce or write lo amove, lo 
onove, la dnima; but V amove, V onove, Vdnima, &c. 

In this manner you retrench the vowel in other 
cases ; delV amove, delV onove, delV dnima ; alV amove, 
aW onove, alV dnima ; dalV amove, dalV onove, dalV 
anima. 



Of PRONOUNS. 

A Pronoun, which the Italians call Pvonome, 
or Vicenome, is a declinable part of speech ; so named, 
because it is used instead of a noun. There are seven 
sorts of pronouns ; namely, 

Pronouns 

Personal, Interrogative, 

Conjunctive, Relative, 

Possessive, Improper. 
Demonstrative, 

Of Pvonouns Pevsonal. 

The pronoun personal marks the three persons ; 
namely, the first, second, and third, as well in the 
singular as plural. 

The first person is he, or she, who speaks ; and it is 
expressed by I, 10 ; we, not. 

The 



ITALIAN TONGUE. 7 

The pronoun personal io, marks the first person 
singular ; as, I speak, to pdrlo ; I sing-, io cdnto ; I 
believe, io credo; noi marks the first person plural; as, 
we speak, noi parliumo, &c. 

The pronouns personal I, to; we, noi ; belong as 
well to the masculine gender as to the feminine ; so 
that a woman as well as a man says, I sing, io cdnto ; 
I see, io v'edo : we sing, noi cantidmo ; we see, noi 
vedidmo, &c. 

The second person is that to whom we speak ; and it 
serves also for the masculine and feminine; viz. thou, 
tu, in the singular number ; you, voi, in the plural ; 
example, thou speakest, tic pdrli; thou dost, sing, tu 
cdnti : you speak, voi parldte ; you sing, voi cantdte, 
&c. 

The third person is that of whom we speak ; namely, 
he, egli, for the masculine. ; she, clla, or essa, for the 
feminine : and, in the plural, the masculine makes 
iglino, they ; the feminine, elleno ; as, he speaks, egli 
pdrla ; he sings, egli cdnta : she speaks, rfla pdrla ; 
they speak, eglino pdrlano, m. elUno, or esse pdrlano, f. 

*#* Observe, that there are only / and we for the first 
person : there are also only thou and you for the second ; 
consequently, every sentence in which there is neither 
/, tve> thou, nor you, must be of the third person ; as, 
the king is willing, il re vudle ; the master teaches, il 
maestro insegna, fccu; both these sentences belong to 
the third person, because they have neither /, we, 
thou, nor you. 

Of Pronouns Conjunctive. 

Although conjunctive pronouns are only an inflex- 
ion of the personal pronouns, and ought not to be 
treated of separately, we will, however, make a separate 
class of them, to follow the general custom of 
grammarians, which we are far from approving. 

The pronouns conjunctive in Italian are mi, 
me or to me ; ti, thee or to thee ; si, himself or to 
himself, herself, or to herself; ci, us, or to us ; vi, you, 
or to vou ; loro, them, or to them. 

The 



8 INTRODUCTION to the 

■■' The pronouns conjunctive have a very great resem- 
blance and affinity with the pronouns personal, as they 
are always put before the verb, except loro ; but with 
this difference, that the pronouns personal make the 
action of the verb, before which they are placed, and 
the pronouns conjunctive receive it; example, 10 canto,. 
I sing ; voi parldte, you speak; it is the pronouns /and 
you which make the action of the verbs sing and speak, 
before which they are placed ; and consequently they 
are pronouns personal. But when we say, Dio mi vede r 
God sees me, it is God constitutes the action of the 
word sees, and me receives it. In like manner, when 
we say, to viprego,! pray you; voi ci consider foe, you 
consider us ; I wish to know which are the words in 
these two phrases that constitute the action of the 
verbs pray and consider? It is / that pray ; therefore 
to, I, is the pronoun personal ; and vi, you, is the pro- 
noun conjunctive. 

In the second phrase, voi ci considerate, you consider 
ns; it is ^oz, you, that is the pronoun personal, and 
causes the action of the verb consider', but the word ci, 
ns, that receives it, is the pronoun conjunctive, &c. 

Of Pronouns Possessive. 

Pronouns possessive mark the possession of a thing ; 
the pronouns possessive are my, thy, his or her, their, 
our, your: example, my horse; thy hat ; his or her 
hook; my room; thy daughter ; his house; our judg- 
ment ; our intention; your zuit ; your pen; my chil- 
dren; my land; thy pleasures ; thy actions; his glass ; 
his chaise ; our horses ; our towns ; your clothes ; your 
hands; their father; their kindred. Properly speaking, 
possessive pronouns are only those which are employed 
instead of, and without the substantive ; as, this is my 
book ; here my is not a possessive pronoun, but a pos- 
sessive adjective. Whose book is this? mine : here mine 
is a pronoun. In Italian we have no different words 
to express the possessive pronouns and possessive 
adjectives, as in French and English ; consequently, as 
they have the same sound, care must be taken not to 
confound them. 

Of 



ITALIAN TONGUE. $ 

Of Pronouns Demonstrative. 

The pronouns demonstrative serve to point out, .as 
it were, a particular person or thing, or persons or 
things ; as, this and that ; these and those : exampLe, 
this coach ; this woman ; that man ; these books ; those 
pictures, &c. 

Of Pronouns Interrogative. 

The pronoun interrogative is used in asking a ques- 
tion ; there are but three in English, namely, who?' 
what? tuhich? example, what would you have? who is 
there ? what woman is that ? ivhat do you mean? which 
man do you mean ? 

Of Pronouns Relative. 

A pronoun relative has reference to a thing or person, 
spoken of before ; as, ivhich, who, that, when they are 
not interrogates ; example, the book that I read ; the 
master icho teaches ; the lesson which I study. 

Of Pronouns Improper. 

The pronouns improper are, every, every one, all, 
any ; or nobody, none, several, some other, &c. They 
are called improper, because, strictly speaking, they 
are not pronouns. 

%* Note, that these pronouns improper are very, 
much like adjectives, being most of them both of the, 
masculine and feminine gender in Italian; but as there 
is no such distinction as masculine and feminine in the, 
English pronouns improper, there can be no example 
of them given here : so that I refer beginners to the 
third chapter concerning pronouns, where it will be 
rendered more intelligible. 

The pronouns improper have also their distinction 
of singular and plural number; but this, as well as the 
gender, cannot be explained here by examples ; it shall 
be done with more convenience and perspicuity in its 
proper place. 

b 5 Of 



10 INTRODUCTION to the 



Of VERBS. 

The Verb and the Noun are the two principal parts 
of Speech. 

The Noun serves to name any thing. 

The Verb serves to denote every action that may be 
performed, by expressing- the person performing, and the 
tense or time when performed ; as, to laugh ; to love ; 
to sleep ; to run ; to nourish ; to die ; to sing ; to teach ; 
I love, we love ; I laugh, we laugh, &c. : / will love, 
we will love ; I will laugh, ive will laugh, &c. 

The verb has neither masculine nor feminine gender; 
but is distinguished by three times or tenses, viz. the 
present i the preterperfect, or time past ; the future, or 
the time to come. Generally before the verb, there is 
a pronoun personal ; as, / sing, he sings, we sing ; you, 
dance ; they sing ; I sang, I sung, I will si?ig, ye shall 
sing. In which examples, the difference of the time of 
performing the action is obvious. 

The change of time or tense is, in the grammatical 
phrase, known by the name of conjugation. 

The conjugation of verbs is composed of four parts, 
viz. of moods, tenses, persons, and number. 



Of MOODS. 

A Mood is a grammatical term, used to express 
the internal operation of the mind and will, and the 
different ways and manners of acting. 

Now this may be done after five manners or moods, 
and these moods are called indicative, imperative, 
optative, subjunctive, and infinitive. 

The indicative, or demonstrative, as others call it, is 
the first mood : it shows and declares simply and abso- 
lutely, and without any condition, the thing signified by 
the verb ; as when I say, I sing, I have sung, I will 
dug, one may plainly perceive that there are, in these 
three examples, the time present, past, and to come : 
without our being obliged to inquire, whether this verb 
depends on some particle, or mark, as that, provided 

that, 



ITALIAN TONGUE. 11 

that, &c. in which case, the verb would not be in the 
indicative, but in the subjunctive. 

The Imperative marks the action of the verb in com- 
manding and forbidding : example, sing you, do not 
sing ; go thou, do not go. It is obvious that, in the 
foregoing- examples, the person speaks either in the 
way of command or prohibition ; and, of course, in the 
imperative. 

The Optative expresses the action of the verb by 
wishing and desiring ; as, would I had Jive hundred 
pounds a year ; could I but go to Rome ; had I but that, 
hoxo happy should I be ! 

The Subjunctive or conjunctive, is so called, because 
it is generally used with conjunctions before it; such as, 
that, although, to the end that, provided that: example, 
my master is willing that I do my duty ; although he 
says that I may ivrite; provided that he come ; he desires 
that I may sing. The verbs, do, say, ivrite, come, and 
sing, which follow the conjunctions, are of the subjunc- 
tive mood. 

The manner of applying conjunctions to verbs will 
be illustrated when we come to speak of the syntax of 
verbs, in the second part of this Grammar, to which we 
refer the reader. 

The Infinitive represents the action of the verb, 
without marking either the number or person ; as, to 
love, to write; one cannot tell by what number of per- 
sons this action, to love, or to write, is to be done, nor 
who is to do it. 



Of TENSES. 

Verbs have properly but three tenses ; the present, 
the preter, and the future. 

The Present denotes a thing done at the very time 
we are speaking ; as, / sing, you sing, &c. 

The Preter, or time past, denotes an action which is 
no longer present ; as, 1. I was singing : 2. I sung : 
3. / have simg : 4. / had sung. 

These four examples plainly show that an action may 
be passed in four different maimers, which is the reason 

that 



12 INTRODUCTION to the 

that there are four different tenses which mark the time 
past ; they are, 

1. The preterimperfect | 3. The preterperfect. 

2. The preterperfect definite, j 4. The preterpluperfect. 

The Preterimperfect serves for the actions which 
were present at a certain time ; example, I was singing 
when you came in: the word, / was singing , shows that 
the action of singing was doing when you came in. 

The English language has'not a proper and exclusive 
form corresponding to the Italian or Latin preterim- 
perfect, but in the phrase, I was singing when you came 
in : although the expression i" ivas singing, may be 
employed also in other instances besides this, it does, 
liowever, in this instance convey the idea of the im- 
perfect Italian present ; that is, the English definite 
sense must be translated into the Italian imperfect, 
when it conveys, as to time, the same idea as the ex- 
pression, I was singing, does in the above-quotedinstance. 

The Preterperfect definite marks and defines the 
lime, the year, or the day, when the action was done ; 
as, / sung yesterday ; I spoke to the king last year. 

We also make use of this tense, in telling or relating 
any action: example, last year the king took the field; 
he made himself master of several towns, and conquered 
whole provinces; he defeated the enemy, who made a 
.•vigorous defence ; he struck a terror into his neighbours, 
and at last forced them to accept of such a peace as he 
pleased to prescribe. All the verbs of this example are 
in the preterperfect definite. 

Those who do not understand Latin, have some 
difficulty to distinguish the preterimperfect from the 
preterperfect definite : in order to comprehend this 
matter, attend to the two following observations. 

fj* 1. That the preterimperfect may be applied to 
a time past, or to that which is still in being. By the 
time still in being, or not quite past, we are to under- 
stand a day, a night, a week, a month, a year, the age 
we live in. 

By the time past, or that which is no more, we under- 
stand yesterday, the day before yesterday, last week, 
last month, last year, last century. Hence we may use 

the 



ITALIAN TONGUE. 13 

the preterimperfect thus : / was writing to-day, I was 
singing this week, I was reading this month. On the 
contrary, the preterperfect definite is applied to the 
time past, and never to that still in being : we may say, 
I wrote yesterday ; I read last week ; but we must not 
say, / wrote to-day, I read to-day. 

2. But, to make the difference between the preterim- 
perfect and the preterperfect definite, more plain and 
intelligible to ladies, it is sufficient to know that the first 
person of the preterimperfect is always terminated in 
vo, or va, in Italian ; as, amdva, I was loving ; cantdva, 
I was singing ; godeva, I was enjoying, &c. The pre- 
terperfect definite never has that termination : as, amdi, 
I loved ; godti, I enjoyed, &c. 

The Preterperfect expresses actions perfectly past ; 
as, I have sung, ho cantato ; I have enjoyed, ho 
goduto. 

Observe, that we always make use of a verb and 
participle to express the preterperfect or compound 
tense ; as, I have written, ho scritto. It is obvious, that 
ho is the verb, and scritto the participle. These are 
expressed in Italian as well as in English ; but in Latin 
they make use of a single verb only. 

We generally use the preterperfect to express an 
action done at a time which is still in being, and not 
entirely elapsed, as, / have given ; I have written ; I have 
spoken to-day, this morning, this week, this month, in my 
life-time, &c. ; and not as some people, who confound 
the preterperfect definite with the preterperfect, saying, 
I gave, I spoke to-day, this month, Sec, because to-day, 
this month, &c. are times still in being, which we ought 
to express by the preterperfect, / have given, I have 
spoken, &c. to-day, this month, &c. 

The Preterpluperfect denotes not only an action 
perfectly past, but likewise shows that it was over, 
before another action of which we are speaking, began ; 
example, i" hud supped, when you were singing ; I had 
done writing, when you entered. 

Here it appears plainly that there are four preterites, 
or past tenses ; viz. two simple, and two compound. 

The simple are the preterimperfect and the preter- 
perfect definite, which in Italian are expressed by a 

single 



14 INTRODUCTION to the 

single verb, with a pronoun personal before it ; as, 
leggSva, I did read, or was reading; leggevi, thou didst 
read ; leggeva, he did read ; lessi, I read ; leggesti, thou 
jead'st ; lesse ; he read. In these examples, there is 
no more than one verb. 

The two compound preterites are the preterperfect 
and the preterplaperfect ; which are always expressed 
by a verb and a participle, as, I have written, ho scritto; 
thou hast written, hai scritto ; he has written, ha 
scritto., &c. ; I had given, io, aveva daio ; thou hadst 
given, tu avevi dato ; he had given, egli aveva dato, &c. 

The future is a tense that signifies something to 
come ; as, I will sing, canterb ; I will speak, parlerb, 
&c. It is either simple or compound; simple in the 
examples above mentioned ; compound when I say, I 
shall have read, avrb letto ; I shall have written, avrb 
scritto, &c. 



Of PERSONS. 

The tenses of verbs are composed of three Persons. 

The first is always expressed by I in the singular 
number, and by we in the plural ; as, / sing, we sing. 

The second person is marked by thou in the singular, 
and you in the plural .; as, thou sing est, you sing. 

The third is he or she in the singular, and they in 
the plural ; as, he speaks, she speaks, they speak. 



Of NUMBERS. 

The tenses of the verbs have also two Numbers, 
the singular and the plural ; singular, / love, thou lovest, 
he loveth ; plural, we love, ye or you love, they love. 

Of PARTICIPLES. 

The Participles are so called, because, although 
they are verbs, they partake of the nature and quality 
of adjectives ; as, amdto, amdta, loved ; orndto, ornata, 
adorned: one may say, / loved, and / have loved; I 

adored 



ITALIAN TONGUE. 15 

adored, I have adored ; whieh are verbs ; we also 
say, a man beloved, a woman loved, a God adored; 
then those words, loved, beloved, adored, &c. are 
nouns adjective, and consequently participles, from 
their partaking of the nature of adjectives and verbs, 
and from their serving- to form the preterperfect. 

*3* Observe, that whenever two verbs follow one 
another in the same phrase, and that the first is one of 
the tenses of the verbs to have or to be, the second is a 
participle, as, I have seen, you have spoken, he has written, 
I am loved, we are commended : the words seen, spoken, 
written, loved, commended, are participles. 



The former five parts of speech, namely, the Article, 
Noun, Pronoun, Verb, and Participle, change their 
terminations in Italian : example, il cavullo del principe £ 
bello, the prince's horse is handsome ; i cavalUdeip/r.i- 
cipi sono belli, the princes' horses are nandsone. By 
these two examples, you may see the change of the 
articles, nouns, and verbs. By the two following you 
will observe a change of the pronouns and participles : 

Lavostra Uttera e scritta Your letter is written in 
in una, ??ianicra affetuusa an affectionate and familiar 
efamigliarc. style. 

Le vbstre Icttere sono Your letters are written 
scritte in termini affetuosi in affectionate ana familiar 
efamiglidri. terms. 

The other four parts of speech admit of no alteration : 
as, bene, well, which is an adverb ; con. with, a preposi- 
tion ; che, that, a conjunction ; oime, alas, an interjec- 
tion : these are constantly pronounced and written in 
the same manner ; and it may be observed, that these 
words have neither gender, number, case, nor time. 



Of ADVERBS. 
Adverbs are words that help to express in a bet- 
ter manner what the verb denotes, and add more or 
less force and significancy to it: as, well, ill, more, 
plainly, better, hardly : example, when I say, / teach, 
this expression shows what I do, that is, I ie.ich; but 



16 INTRODUCTION to the 

it does not point out the manner how I teach. To 
convey this meaning, I add an adverb, thus, / teach 
•plainly. We have already observed, that adverbs have 
neither gender, number, nor case. 

There are a great many kinds of adverbs ; but I shall 
here only give examples of two or three of the most 
common. 

Adverbs of time : such as, when, yesterday, to-night, 
to day, to-morrow, late, soon, along while, always, never, 
&c. 

Adverbs of place : as, where, here, there, above, below ^ 
towards, far, near, &c. 

Adverbs of quantity : as, how much, how many, much, 
as much, little, &c. 

Of PREPOSITIONS. 

Prepositions, like Adverbs, have neither gen- 
der, number, nor case ; they are always prefixed to 
nouns, articles, and verbs, and therefore are called 
prepositions, from the Latin word, prceponere, to set 
before ; as, upon, near, before, without, out, in, against, 
for; as, upon the house, near the palace, in the garden, 
against reason, in court, before the king, &c. 

*J* Observe that there is a great difference between 
the adverb and preposition; for the adverb requires 
nothing after it, but the sense of it is complete without 
the addition of another word : example, he teaches well, 
you speak learnedly, you write fast. But on the con- 
trary, the preposition always requires some word to 
follow it; for example, you are before me, it is upon the 
table, they are in the garden, &c. 

*i* Observe also, that the prepositions sometimes 
become adverbs, when we speak absolutely, and there 
is neither article, noun, nor pronoun, after the preposi- 
tions; for instance, my brother walks before, he will come 
after, they are behind, she is near. 

In these four exampLes, before, after, behind, and near, 
are adverbs ; but if we said, my brother walks before his 
company, he will come after us, the servant is behind us, 
she is near us ; then, before, after, behind, near, are 
prepositions. 

Of 



ITALIAN TONGUE. 17 

Of CONJUNCTIONS. 

The Conjunctions serve to join and connect words 
and sentences together ; such as, and, or, but, though, 
that, as, 'provided that, in short, &c. example, Peter or 
Paul, black or white; I promised it to you, but you 
must give it me again. 

Of INTERJECTIONS. 

The Interjections are words that make sense of 
themselves, and serve to express any violent emotion ; 
as, alas ! fie 1 courage ! halt ! hush ! 

An Explanation of the CASES.* 

We have already taken notice that there are five parts 
of speech which never change, viz. Adverbs, Adjectives, 
Conjunctions, Prepositions, and Interjections ; for ex- 
ample, prudently, prudent, and, upon, alas ! These 
words are always written and pronounced in the same 
manner, and have neither masculine nor feminine 
gender ; neither singular nor plural number. 

The five others, which are, the Article, the Noun,, 
the Pronoun, the Verb, and the Participle, alter their 
termination ; as, the day ; I, we; I love, I loved. 

The variation of articles, nouns, and pronouns, is 
called a Declension. 

The change of verbs is called a Conjugation. 

A declension has six variations, which are called 
Cases; viz. nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, 
vocative, and ablative. 

The case, or variation of nouns, is known only by 
the article. 

* A great part of this Treatise of Cases is applicable 
only to the learned, and to some foreign languages, such 
as French, Italian, Sec; for the English have no varia- 
tion in the noun, except the genitive, as, man, man's, 
and none at all in the article, since they only make use of 
the little signs, or particles, to distinguish the cases ; as 
of, to, for, from, &c. 

I must 



18 INTRODUCTION to the 

I must here repeat what I have before observed 
when treating of the articles, viz. when an article hap- 
pens to precede a word beginning with a vowel, the 
vowel at the end of the article is retrenched, and an 
apostrophe is placed in its stead. 

The articles of the nominative are, the, both in the 
singular and plural in English ; as, the sun, the earth, 
the ladies. 

This case is called the nominative, from nominare, to 
name ; because it declares the name of any thing with 
the article the, and this article, with the following noun, 
makes the nominative ; as, the sun, the moon, the earth, 
the horses, the men, the women. 

The articles of the genitive are, of the, and of : for 
instance, of the sun, of the moon, of the earth, of London. 

We give the name of the genitive to this case, be- 
cause it shows the author or cause of the noun of 
which we speak ; an example will make it clearer. 

When we say, the heat of the sun ; in this example, of 
the sun is the genitive case, because the sun is the author 
and the cause that produced the name heat ; and so, in 
the following example, the length of the street, the 
father's son, the fruit of the tree, the beauty of Paris. 

The word genitive comes from gignere, which signi- 
fies to produce. 

The dative is marked by the articles to the and to, 
for the singular and plural ; example, to the sun, to the 
prince, to London, to the men, to the houses, &c. 

The dative serves to make known to whom, or to 
what, we give or address the thing spoken of: as to 
give alms to the poor ; to write to the king, to the queen, 
to London, to Rome. The word dative comes from 
dare, to give. 

The accusative is like the nominative, and the arti- 
cles are the same : as the sun, the earth, the women. 

The word accusative is derived from the Latin 
accusdre, to accuse. 

The only difference between these two cases is, that 
the nominative is before the verb, and the accusative 
after it. 

To distinguish the nominative from the accusative, 
you have only to remember, that the nominative names 

the 



ITALIAN TONGUE. 19 

the person or thing that makes the action of the verb, 
and the accusative accuses or names that which receives 
it : example, the king loves the queen. 

The king is the nominative case, because it is the 
king that makes the action of loving: and the queen is 
the accusative, because it is the queen that receives 
the action of loving from the king. 

* # * Note, that the accusative is generally put after 
verbs active, and prepositions ; as, / behold the sun, 
with the princes, for the king, &c. 

The vocative is always distinguished by the interjec- 
tion o : it is used in calling out to a person : example, G 
Peter, Paul, &c. Most commonly we put no article 
at all to express the vocative ; as, Sir, Madam, Mary, 
Peter, &c. 

The word vocative comes from vocare, to call. 

The ablative, in English, is expressed by the articles 
from the, from, and by. 

The ablative is generally put after the verbs passive. 
Now, the ladies, and those who do not understand 
Latin, will easily know what a verb passive is, being 
always composed of two verbs ; the first of which is 
some tense of the verb issere, to be, and the ether a 
participle ; so that these two together make a verb 
passive, after which the ablative case is put: example, 
/ am esteemed by the king. 

The ablative is also used after the following verbs ; 
to take away, to receive, to obtain, to separate, &c. 

Examples : 

To take from the . . hands. "} r™ i . i 

r , ■ jr ,j • / lhe last words 

/ have received from the prince. [ ., ul 

tt ■ . j r L > are in the abla- 

He is separated from . . me. I ,. 

t s r t i \ tlve case. 

1 camejrom .... Italy, j 

The word ablative derives its origin from the Latin 
ablatum, which signifies taken away ; / am beloved by 
the prince. I have received a hundred pounds from the 
prince. 

This is the same thing as if I should say, / have 
received from the prince, his love, and a hundred 



pounds. 



When 



20 INTRODUCTION to the 

When the pupil is sufficiently versed in the foregoing 
particulars, and understands the meaning of tenses, 
genders, numbers, and persons*. he may then be exer- 
cised in the parts of speech contained therein : 

For example, 

The soldiers who fight bravely for their king, are es- 
teemed and praised by the whole kingdom. 

The, is a definite article of the plural number, of the 
masculine gender, and the nominative case. 

Soldiers, is a noun substantive, of the same number, 
gender, and case. 

Who, a pronoun relative of the plural number, and 
nominative case. 

Fight, a verb of the present indicative, and third 
person plural. 

Bravely, an adverb. 

For, a preposition. 

Their, a pronoun possessive. 

King, a noun substantive, masculine, in the accusa- 
tive singular. 

Are, a verb in the third person plural, and present 
indicative. 

Esteemed, a participle. 

Are esteemed, a verb passive, of the third person 
plural, and present indicative. 

And, a conjunction. 

Praised, a participle. 

Are praised, a. verb passive, of the third person plural, 
and present indicative. 

By, a preposition. 

All, a pronoun improper. 

The, an article definite. 

Kingdom, a noun substantive, masculine. 

By the whole, in the ablative ; because are esteemed, 
and are praised, are both verbs passive, and require an 
ablative case after them. 

It will be found extremely difficult for those who do 
not understand Latin, to speak or write Italian correctly, 
without perusing this short Introduction ; the study of 
it, therefore, will not only be of great assistance to 

them, 



ITALIAN TONGUE. 21 

them, but also, in the end, save them much time and 
trouble. 

When this Introduction is perfectly understood, the 
next thing; is, to acquire the method of finding out 
the words in a Dictionary, in which they are all placed 
in alphabetical order. 

Observe, 

Nouns substantive are to be found by their singular 
number, and not by their plural : therefore you must 
not look for heavens, horses, &c. but, heaven, horse, &c. 

Nouns adjective are sought for by the masculine, and 
not by the feminine : for example, to know the Italian 
oijine, you must look for bello, and not btlla. 

The method of fiuding out verbs in a Dictionary, is 
by their infinitives. In English, the infinitive is known 
by the particle to placed before the verb, as to love, to 
sing. In Italian, the infinitives terminate in dre, ere, 
or ire. So that if I want to know the infinitive of 
amidmo, credidmo, sentidmo, I must not look for dmo, 
credo, sento, but for amare, credere, sentire, and so 
form them according to the rules of each conjugation. 

The Augmentatives and Diminutives, or nouns in- 
creased or diminished in their signification, are very 
rarely given in Dictionaries ; the Rules, therefore, for 
their formation, will be found explained where the noun 
is treated of. 



End of the Introduction. 



THE 



22 



THE 



ITALIAN MASTER. 



PART I. 

I HE first thing necessary to be acquired is, the Ita- 
lian Pronunciation ; this is confined to some syl- 
lables which the Italians pronounce differently from 
the English, as may be seen at the end of this dis- 
course, where the whole difficulty of the Italian pro- 
nunciation is included in a period of seven lines. 



Of the Italian Pronunciation. 

The Italian language contains twenty -two letters^ 
which are pronounced by the Tuscans in the following 
manner : in some other parts of Italy, they pronounce 
the letters b, c, d, g, p, t, z, as with a single e after 
them, saying be, tche, de, &c. : but the pronunciation 
of Tuscany, which is now the most approved and 
fashionable, is, as nearly as can be expressed in writ- 
ing, as follows : 

[emmay, 
ennay, 
o, 

pee, 
coo, 
erray, 
essay, 
tee, 
oo, 



Al 




r aa, or ar 


B 




bee, 


C 




tehee, 


D 


-a 


dee, 


E 


o 

R 


a, 


F 


*2-i 


effay, 


G 


R 

o 


dgge, 


H 


(Li 


acca, 


I 




e, 


J 




ee, consonant 


L- 




\*ellay, 



M*| 


r 


N 


i 







P 


T3 


Q 


o 
R 


R 


f" o -{ 


S 


R 

O 


T 


£ 


U 




V 




Z - 





I dsaita. 



Hence 



PRONUNCIATION. 23 

Hence it appears, that the Italian pronunciation is 
very different from the English, and we must be care- 
ful to sound the letters, as nearly as possible, as they 
are marked in the preceding alphabet. 

The Italians have no such letters as k, w, x, or y ; at 
least they never make use of them, except in writing 
foreign names, as, Stockholm, Xenocrate, &c. and 
then they pronounce the former word as if it were a c 
instead of k ; and the latter, as if it were an S instead 
of the letter X. You are also at liberty to write Stocobn 
and Senocrate. 

The letters are divided into vowels and consonants, 
as has been already remarked in the Introduction. 



VOWELS. 

Of the Pronunciation of the Voweh. 

The vowels, whichare a, e, i, o, u, are pronounced 
ar, a, e, o, oo. 

A is always sounded open and broad, like ar in the 
English word arm, art, thus amo, I love, pronounce 
armo, &c. ; when a is accented at the end of a word, a, 
it has a quicker, louder, and sharper tone than other- 
wise ; thus in calamita, calamity, the a must be pro- 
nounced sharper and louder than in calamita, a load- 
stone. 

E is never mute in Italian, as it often is in French, 
but it has two sounds, one close and one open; 
it is close as in the English words mellow, bent, bet, 
pet, &c. ; thus, bene, good; bezzi, money; pezzo, a 
piece, &c. ; it is generally close in Italian words derived 
from the Latin, in which the i in Latin was changed into 
e in Italian ; as selva, from sijlva, wood ; phce, from 
pisch, fish, &c. &c. ; e is always close at the end of 
words of more than one syllable ; example, Arse di 
speme, e perde il cor dolente ; he was inflamed with 
hope, and his heart is overwhelmed with grief. 

J? has an open sound, like a in tape, faith, &c; as, 
tema, a theme, pronounce tamar ; Mazeppa, &c. &c. 

Eh 



24 PRONUNCIATION. 

E is open before st, in nouns substantive, as festa, a 
festival ; veste, a garment ; arresto, an arrest. 

N. B. Exceptions to the above rule are, cesto, a tuft 
of grass ; destino, destiny ; destrezza, dexterity ; wes- 
tizia, sadness. 

Mele, with an open e, pronounced malay, signifies 
honey ; and with e close, pron. melley, signifies apples, 

I is pronounced like ee in the English word feet; 
as diritto, direct, pronounce deereeto ; cimittrio, a 
church-yard, pronounce tcheemetareo. 

O has two sounds, one close, as in the words vol, 
doly don, cord, torn-; as>, volere, to be willing, &c. : and 
the other open and broad, as in dore, store, more, &c. 
as povero, poor; morte, death, &c. 
Of— O— close. 

(like E) is generally close in Italian words de- 
rived from the Latin, in which the u of the Latin word 
was changed into o in the Italian ; as, dolce, from the 
Latin dulcis, sweet ; molto, from multum, many; volgo, 
from vulgus, vulgar, &c. &c. which words pronounce, 
softening the o a little, doltche, molto, volgo. 

is close when accented, in words ending in one, 
Sra, ore, 6so ; as, orazione, prayer; qualora, when- 
ever ; Signore, Sir ; amoroso, amorous. 

is also close before I, m, n, r ; as volere, to be 
willing; tomba, a grave ; barone, baron; corte, a court. 

(N. B. Except when preceded by i or u.) 

is close before, gn; as, Bologna, which pronounce 
Bolonnia ; bisogno, want, pronounce bisonno, &c. &c. ; 
and it is also close before s in adjectives ; as amoroso, 
amorous, &c. 

Of—O — open. 

is pronounced open when preceded by i or u ; 
as, chioma, head of hair, pronounce Keomar ; Giove, 
Jove, pronounce Jove ; cuore, a heart, pronounce core. 
The final o, when accented, is likewise open, as amb, 
parlb, &c. ; and so it is in all monosyllables, asyb, so, 
vo, &c. 

is also open before s in substantives ; as, rosa, a 
rose ; sposa, a spouse. 

U is pronounced like oo in English ; example, 
publicazione, pronounce pooblecatseonay. 

Observe, 



PRONUNCIATION. 25 

Observe, that this example gives the pronunciation 
of the five vowels. 

Diphthongs are the union of two vowels : Triph- 
thongs of three. They are pronounced distinctly, and 
yet form but one syllable : as, mdi, never ; i miei, 
miner i tubi, thine; i sitoi, his: but to pronounce 
them properly, we should hear them sounded by a 
master. See the collection of syllables, and words of 
most difficult pronunciation, where we speak of u 
before o, after treating of the pronunciation of conso- 
nants. 



CONSONANT S. 
Of the Pronunciation of Consonants. 

The consonants b,d,f I, m, n, p, r, are pronounced 
as in English. 

Some of the consonants vary from the English pro- 
nunciation, especially c, g, z, to which may be added 
A, t, and s, and upon each of which there are several 
particulars to be observed. 

C, before the vowels a, o, u, and before the conso- 
nants /, r, is pronounced the same as in English ; for 
instance, ciisa, a house; cello, a neck, cura, care ; 
Cristo, Christ; clemenza, clemency ; crudcle, cruel. 

C, before the vowels e or i, sounds like die and 
chi in the English words cherry and chick ; examples : 

Pronounce 
Cesare, Csesar, Chtsare. 

Cecitd, blindness, checheetd. 

Citta, a city, chitta. 

If two cc's come before the vowels e or i, the former 
is sounded as t, and the latter like che in cherry : 
example, accento, an accent, pronounce atchento; brae- 
cio, an arm, pronounce br&tcheo. 

When, after ci, there is a vowel : as, cia, tie, cio, 

ciu, it must be pronounced as one syllable, so as to 

C lose 



26 PRONUNCIATION. 

lose, in some measure, the sound of the vowel i; 
examples, Frdncia, cielo, bdcio, pronounce Frdnckea, 
cheay'lo, bdcheo. 

The syllables see, sci, are pronounced sha, she : ex- 
ample, scemdre, to diminish, pronounce shaymdre ; 
lascidre, to leave, pronounce lashedre. 

Ch is used instead of, and pronounced like, the let- 
ter k, which the Italians never use but in foreign 
names ; as, Bochsa, pronounce Boksa, 

The syllables che, chi, whether in the beginning or at 
the ending of a word, are pronounced ha, he : example, 
cherubino, a cherubim ; chiodo, a nail ; giovenchi, hei- 
fers : pronounce kayrubeeno, keodo, giovenkee. 

F is used by the Italians instead of ph, as, Efeso, 
Ephesus ; Jilosofo, philosopher; frase, phrase. 

G before the vowels a, o, u, and before consonants, 
is pronounced as in English : example, gdbbia, a cage ; 
gobboy hunchbacked ; gusto, taste ; grddo, a degree ; 
grido, a cry. 

G before e, i, is pronounced as in the English 
words geography, gin. 

When two gg's precede the vowels e, i, the first g is 
pronounced as a d, and the last as a g : for example, 
oggetto, an object; oggi, to-day; read odgetto, odgi. 
But as well in gelo and giro, as in oggetto and oggi, 
&c. we must not dwell much on the d, but pronounce 
it so smoothly, as to render it almost imperceptible to 
the ear. 

When after the syllable gi, there is a vowel, as gia, 
gio, gin, the g must not be sounded at all, and the i is 
pronounced like an English j ; for instance, giardino, 
giorno, giudice, pronounce jardino,jorno 9 juditehay. 

G before ii is pronounced like 11 in the French 
word fille, or like the ZZ,inthe Spanish word camarilla, 
first in the different inflexions of the article and pronoun 
il, lo; secondly, in the pronoun, egli,eglino; thirdly, when 
it'is followed by a vowel, and forms a diphthong, as in 
vaglio, maglio. 

The syllables gna, gne, gni, gno, gnu, are pro- 
nounced something like nniar, nnie, nni, nnio, nniu : 
for example, guadagndre, to gain ; agnello, a lamb ; 
ignudo, naked ; incognito, unknown ; read guadannidre, 

anniello 



PRONUNCIATION. 27 

anniello, inniudo, inconnieeto. In short gn, before a 
vowel, retains the same sound, as in the French words 
Allemagne, Espagne, montagne. 

The syllables ghe, ghi, are pronounced like gue, and 
gui, in the English words guest and guinea; zsbotteghe, 
shops, sound bottegue ; luoghi, places, sound luogui. 
. The letter h is never aspirated, nor pronounced at the 
beginning of words ; as, ho, I have, &c. But accord- 
ing to the modern orthography, all words are written 
without an h, except the three persons singular, and 
the third person plural of the present indicative of the 
verb avere ; and this in order to distinguish the verb 
ho from the sign of the vocative o, or from o the con- 
junction : as likewise hdi from di, the article, in the 
dative plural masculine gender, di signori, to the lords 
or gentlemen ; and lastly, ha from the dative indefi- 
nite, a Pictro, to Peter ; and hdnno from anno, which 
signifies a year. 

The Italians never pronounce the letter h, and in 
their present practice they even omit it in writing, ex- 
cept when it happens to be preceded by a c or g, as 
in the words chidro, clear ; chidve, a key ; pidghe, 
wounds, &c. 

The letter j is considered sometimes as a consonant 
and sometimes as a vowel ; as a consonant, when it 
makes a syllable with a vowel, as in ajuto,jeri; 
though, according to the present orthography, they 
write indiscriminately ajuto or aiuto,jeri or ieri. 

It is considered as a vowel when it makes a sylla- 
ble with a consonant, as in the plural of the names 
ending in io short, in the singular, which take a j in 
the plural ; as principj, tempj ; where it is pronounced 
long, almost as a double i. 

S, in the beginning of words, is pronounced as in 
English : for example, salute, sole, sale, singoldre, servo, 
sopra. 

Sa, in these words, cosa, a thing ; rosa, gnawed, 
must be pronounced like the first syllable of salute, 
that is to say, strong. 

The same may be said of all adjectives ending in 

vso; as, glorioso, glorious; vittoribso, victorious; as 

c 2 well 



28 PRONUNCIATION. 

well in the singular as in the plural, masculine and 
feminine. 

With regard to adjectives terminating in ese, and to . 
words in uso, the letter s must be pronounced as in the 
English words misery, desire, &c. except, fuso, a spin- 
dle, where the s must be sounded, as in salute. 

Cost, in like manner, is pronounced cossi, that is, 
with a strong hissing sound, as if there were two ss's, 
and dwelling upon the last. 

Pronounce, then, the letter s, between two vowels, 
like a z; as, set, se, si, so, read and pronounce them as 
if they were written za, ze, zi, zo; but in all words 
that have si added to them, as scrivesi, they write, s 
preserves its natural sound. 

In the following words, the syllable ti is pronounced 
hard ; as simpatia, sympathy ; natio, native, or ge- 
nuine ; malattia, illness ; questione, question ; molestia, 
trouble ; and a few verbs, as tiene, poii&te, palidmo, 
patidte, which are to be acquired only by practice. 

V, in Italian, is pronounced as in English. 

*^* Observe, that when two vv's come between two 
vowels, we must pronounce only one of them. The 
Italians make use of two, to indicate that those verbs 
are derived from the Latin. You must also mind to 
dwell somewhat longer upon the syllable compounded 
of the v and the vowel preceding it. Thus it ought to be 
pronounced as if it were detached from the remainder 
of the word, or as if they wrote av-enire, av-entizio, 
instead of avvenire, avventizio. We meet with some 
Italian words which are written with two vv's, although 
not of Latin origin ; as, for instance, avvantaggio, 
avveriire, &c. 

Of Z, and Zz. 

Z single and double, are pronounced two ways ; 
like dz, and like ts : the general rules are as follow — 
to pronounce it like dz in all words in which the z is 
used both in Italian and English. 

. . 

a &d$ fbidw 
Examples. 



PRONUNCIATION, 



29 





Examples. 


Pronounce 


gazetta, 


gazette, 


gadzetta 


Lazzaro, 


Lazarus, 


Lddzaro 


zeffiro, 


zephir, 


dzeffero 


zodiaco, 


zodiac 


dzodearco 


zona, 


zone 


dzona, &c. &c. 



Z is also pronounced like dz, when it stands either 
before or after the vowels e or o open. 





Examples. 


Pronounce 


grezzo 


clownish 


gredzzo 


Mazeppa 


Mazeppa 


Madzeppa 


gazza 


magpie 


gadza 


mezzo 


middle 


medzzo 


rizza 


gauze 


redzza 


zeba 


goad 


dzaba 


zelo 


zeal 


dzalo 


Zenofonte 


Xenophon 


Dzenofontay 


zeta 


Z 


dzata 


zendado 


tiffany 


dzend&do 


zenzero 


ginger 


dzenzaro 


ziffera 


cypher 


dzeffara 


zigrino 


chagreen 


dzegreeno 



Z (single as well as double) is pronounced like is 
in all words in which it is followed by two vowels, the 
first being i, as F&zio ; grdzia, grace ; sp6zio, space ; 
azione, action ; zio, uncle ; &c. &c. : pronounce Fatsio, 
gratsia, spatsio, atsionay, tsio. It is also pronounced 
as ts f when preceded by I or r; as, 





Examples. 


Pronounce 


calza 


stocking 


caltsa 


forza 


force 


fortsa 


sbalzo 


a jump 


sbaltso 


scorza 


bark 


scortsa 


terzo 


third 


tertso f &c. &c 



Exceptions— garzone, a boy; and orzo, barleys in 
which the z has rather a softer sound. 

All 



30 



PRONUNCIATION. 



All the other 2"'s (single and double) are pronounced 
like ts, when before or after an e or o close. 





, Examples. 


Pronounce 


Arezzo 


Arezzo 


Aretso 


avvezzo 


accustomed 


avvetso 


hellezza 
hezzo 


beauty 

a small coin 


helletsa 
betso 


disprezzo 
fazzoletto 
gentiUzza 
nozze 


contempt 
handkerchief 
gentility 
a wedding 


dispretso 
fatsoletto 
gentiletsa 
notse 


pezzo 
pbzzo 


a piece 
a well 


petso 
pot so 


prezzo 
rihrezzo 


prize 
fear 


pretso 
ribretso 


zeppo 


block 


tseppo 



Observe, that all words with z,. pronounced either 
like dz or ts, require a slight pause or stress on the d 
or t, thus mezzo, gentiUzza, nozze, pronounce med-zo, 
gentilet-sa, ?iot-se, &c. 



A Collection of Words and Syllables, most difficult 
to he pronounced. 

Before you proceed to this collection, attend to the 
pronunciation of the syllables, cia, cie, do, ciu ; see, 
sci, scio, sciu, gia, gie, gio, giu ; gli, glia, glio. 
Ce, ci, pronounce as che, chi, in cherry and chick. 

Cicerone, ceci, cecitd, cenere, cina, ceniire, cerchio, 
cibo, citta, citdre, accento, bdcio, ciascheduno, cielo, 
cioe, ciurma. 

Che, chi, pronounce ka, kee. 

Che dite? che fate? che volete? chi ceredte t chi 
volete ? chi domanddte ? 

Ge, gi, gli, pronounce dge, dgi, lit, as in million, 
William, &c. 

GestOr 



PRONUNCIATION. 31 

Gesto, gcnio, gelo, gente, giro, giudice, maggiore, 
leggiddro, giorno, giovane. Giugno, figlio, piglidre ; 
gionchiglia. foglio, orgoglio, sdggio, Mdggio. 

Gna, gne, gni, gno, gnu, pronounce nniar, nnia, nniee y 
nnio, nnioo, in one syllable, as we have already ob- 
served when treating of the pronunciation of conso- 
nants. 

Bagndre, guadagndre, legna, ingegnero, magnijico, 
pegno, Ugno, signore, ingegno, ignudo. 
Scia, see, sci, scio, sciu, pronounce shea, ska, she, sho, 

shiu. Scidtica, scegliere, discifrdre, discibgliere^ 

asciuito. 

Sa, se si, so. 

Attend to the pronunciation of salute, cosa, rosa, 
(participle), roso, sposa, edsa, virtuoso, cost. 
U, pronounce oo. 

Tu, virtu, pugndre, pugno, maturo, funesto, muro, 
bruno. 

U, before o. 

When those two vowels form but one syllable, thew 
must be pronounced almost insensibly. 

Bu6no,fuoco, giu6co,Jigliu6lo,Jigliu6la. 

Except from this rule tuo, siio, suocero, suocera, vir- 
tuoso, &c. because the u and o are two syllables. 

The Florentines, in the words bu6no,fuoco, &c. pro- 
nounce the u rather stronger than the Romans, who 
indeed sound those words in such a manner as if 
there were no u at all. 

V v, pronounce v. 

Avvenire, inavvertenza, avvezzo, avvento. 
Remember what has been said of the pronunciation 
of the consonant v. 

Z, or zz, pronounce ts. 

In the words nozze, fazzoletto, pozzo, pazzia, pdzzo, 
&c. 

Z,or 



32 PRONUNCIATION. 

Z, or am. pronounce dz. 
In the words mezzo, Ldzzaro, zona, zodiaco, zigrino, 
rozzo, &Ci 

Z, pronounce s. 

In words ending in anza, enza, onza ; example, igno- 
rdnza, diligenza, MagSnza. 

To acquire the true Italian accent, it will be necessary 
attentively to read over the following lines, in which 
all the difficulties lie in the syllables marked with a 
star : whoever has learned to pronounce these pro- 
perly, -will soon be master of the Italian pronunciation. 

An Exercise for Italian Pronunciation. 

Ciascheduno, sa che come non v'e cosa, che[piih diS' 

pidccia a Dio, che I ingratitudine ed inosservdnza de* 

* . ■ • / • *v >\ •/ * * * 

suoi precctti ; cost non v e niente che cagioni maggior- 

* 

mente la desolazione delV universo, che la cecitd, e sm- 

perbia degli uomini, la pazzia de Gentili, V ignordnza 

* *. * * 

ed ostinazione de* Giudei e scismdticu 

" Every one knows, that as there is nothing which 
displeases God more than ingratitude, and the neglect 
of his commandments : so there is nothing that occa- 
sions the desolation of this world more than the blind- 
ness and pride of men, the folly of the Gentiles, the 
ignorance and obstinacy of Jews and schismatics." 



PRONUNCIATION. 



33 



A Recapitulation of the Italian Pronunciation, 



Pronounce. 


Example. 


Pronounce. 


A 


ar 


arte 


arte 


Cca 


car 


edsa 


Kasa 


cc 


tche 


accento 


attchento 


ce 
che 


che* 
ka 


km f hena 

che 


chi 


kee 


chi 


ke ; 


ci 


chif 


citttl 


chitta. 


cia 


chia 


ciascuno 


chiascoono 


cie 


chie 


cielo 


chielo 


cio 


tchio 


bacio 


batcheo 


cru 


cru 


crudele 


crudaylay 


E (close J 


bet 


bezzi 


bets-e 


(open) 


ta 


tema 


tama 


G ga 


gar 


gdbbia 


gabbia 


M 


dge 


genio 


dgaynio 


ghe 


gue 


botteghe 


bottegey 


gki 


gui 


luoghi 


luogui 


9* 


dgi 


giro ' 


dgeero 


gia 


ja 


giardino 


jardino 


gie 


je 


Gesil 


Jaysoo 


gio 


jo 


Giove 


Jovay 


gin 


joo 


giusto 


joosto 


gto 


gio 


gloria 


gloria 


all 


in 


pig liar e 


pilliare 


gna 


nniar 


regndre 


renniare 


(close J 


vol 


volere 


volere 


( open ) 


po 


povero 


povero 


S (strong) 


san 


sdnto 


san to 


(soft) 


sa 


guisa 


gwesa 


see 


she 


scena 


shana 


sci 


shi 


lascidre 


lashearay 


* As 


in che-rish. 


t As 


in chi-valry. 



c 5 



U 



34 


ARTICLES. 




Pronounce. Example. 


Pronounce 


V QO 


virtil 


veretoo 


before o o 


buono 


bono 


V viv 


vivere 


vivere 


vv 


avvemre 


a-venire 



Z as s sa diligenza diligensa 

ts fats Fazio Fatsio 

dz dze Zefiro dzef'ero 

ffl. B. Notwithstanding the foregoing copious illus- 
tration of this essential part of the Italian language, a 
natural and correct pronunciation can only be acquired 
by an attentive ear to the lessons and accentuation of 
an experienced Master. 

~r ■ ~~ 

CHAP. I. 

Of ARTICLES in general* 

THERE are two sorts of article, one Definite, the 
other Indefinite. 

The Definite marks the gender, number, and case,, 
of the nouns which it precedes, as, 

The prince, il principe. 

Of the prince, del principe. 

To the prince, al principe. 

From or by the prince, dal principe. 

The princes, i principi. 

Of the princes, dei principi. 

To the princes, di principi. 

From or by the princes, ddi principi. 

The earth, land, or ground, la terra. 

Of the earth, delta terra. 

To the earth, dlla terra. 

From or by the earth, ddlla terra. 

The earths, le terre. 

Of the earths, delle terre. 

To the earths, dlle terre. 

From or by the earths, ddlle terre. 



* See Bottarelli's Exercises, p. 14. 



The 



ARTICLES. 35 

The articles il or lo, la, del, dello, delta, al, alio, alia, 
dal, dallo, dalla, i, gli, le, are called definite articles, 
because they mark and define the masculine or femi- 
nine gender, and the singular or plural number of 
nouns to which they are prefixed. 

The Definite articles have six cases, the nominative, 
genitive, dative, accusative, vocative and ablative. 

The Indefinite article may be put before the mascu- 
line as well as the feminine gender, before the singular 
as well as the plural number. 

The indefinite articles (or more properly prepositions) 
in Italian are the following monosyllables ; 
di, a, or ad before a vowel, da. 

Although it would be more proper to call these 
monosyllables prepositions, we shall adopt the 
name used by other grammarians in conformity with 
custom. 

Di may be put before a noun masculine as well as 
feminine ; as una corona di re, a king's crown ; una 
libbra di pdne, a pound of bread : the words re and 
pdne are masculine : un cappello dipdglia, a straw hat ; 
tre Vibbre di cdrne, three pounds of meat : the words 
pdglia and came are of the feminine gender. 

The indefinite article di is also put before the plural 
as well as the singular number : example, una corona 
di fori, a crown of flowers ; un tondo di cdpperi, a 
plate of capers. 

The indefinite article has but three cases, the geni- 
tive, dative, and ablative. 

Of is expressed in Italian by di ; to by a or ad be- 
fore a vowel ; from by da. 

Of the Definite Articles. 

The English Language has but one definite article, 
namely, the, which serves for both numbers. 

The Italian has three, viz. il and lo for the mascu- 
line, and la for the feminine. 

The article il is prefixed to masculine nouns begin- 
ning with a consonant, and makes i in the plural ; as, 
il pddre, i pddri ; il fratello, i fratHli; il Ubro, i libri ; 
il ciilo, i cieli. 

The 



36 



ARTICLES. 



The article to makes the plural gli and is put before 
two sorts of nouns, viz. before masculine nouns begin- 
ning with s and followed by a consonont ; as lo st&dio, 
lo spirito, lo scoldre ; glistudj, gli spiriti, gli scoldri ; 
la specchio, gli specchj. 

If the letter s be followed by a vowel, we must make 
use of the article il and not lo ; as il solddto f il sacra- 
mento, il signore, il secolo, il supirbo; and not lo sol- 
ddto, &c. 

When the article lo stands before nouns beginning 
with a vowel, we then retrench the vowel, and insert 
an apostrophe: examples, Vamore, VonSre, Vingegno, 
and not lo amore, lo onore, lo ingegno ; gli amori, 
gli onori, gV ingegni, in the plural. The same may be 
said in regard to the article la for the feminine. We 
have touched upon this subject in the Introduction to 
the Italian tongue, in which are given some rules 
concerning the articles. 

The article la serves for the feminine, and makes le 
in the plural ; as, 



la cdsa 


le cdse 


the houses 


la mess a 


le messe 


the masses 


la camera 


le cdmere 


the rooms 


la strdda 


le strdde 


the streets 


la chiesa 


le chiese 


the churches 


la terra 


le tSrre 


the earths 


la porta 


le porte 


the doors 


la Stella 


le stelle 


the stars 



Declension of the Masculine Articles il and lo. 

I do not put the accusative, because it is the same 
as the nominative ; nor the vocative, because it is ex- 
pressed by o in both languages. 



Sing. Nom. 




il 


lo 


the 


Gen. 




del 


dello 


of the 


Dat. 




al 


alio 


to the 


Abl. 




dal 


dallo 


from, and by the 


Plur. Nom. 




i 


gli 


the 


Gen. 


del 


de 


degli 


of the 


Dat. 


ai, a* 


a gli 


to the 


Abl. 


dai ? 


da' 


ddgli 


from, or by the 
We 



ARTICLES. 37 

We do not use in the plural the articles li, delli, 
alli t dalli, as the ancients did. Yet they may be used 
in verse. 

\*- Note, To write correctly, we must not abridge 
the article lo in the plural, unless the following noun 
begins with an i ; therefore you must write gV ingegni, 
c/l'.incendjt with an apostrophe, and gli amori, glionori, 
without one. Nevertheless you are to make but one 
syllable of the article and the subsequent vowel : so 
that you must pronounce glia-mori, glio-nori, and not 
gli-a-mori, gli-o-nori. In this respect the Italian lan- 
guage is extremely delicate. 



Declension 


of 


the Feminine 


Article la. 


Sing. Nom. 




la 


the 


Gen. 




delta 


of the 


Dat. 




alia 


to the 


Abl. 




ddlla 


from the 


Plur. Nom. 




le 


the 


Gen. 




delle 


of the 


Dat. 




Idle 


to the 


Abl. 




dalle 


from and by the 



*** You must not abridge la in the plural, unless 
the following word begins with an e; and therefore we 
write V eminenze, V esecuzioni, with an apostrophe, and 
le dnime, le invenzioni, le ombre, le idtime, without one. 
And yet we write le effigie in the plural, to distinguish 
it from the singular, because this noun has the same 
termination in both numbers : you are to observe the 
same in regard to the word escquie. 



Declension of the Article il with a masculine noun, 
whose first letter is a consonant. 

Sing. Nom. il libro the book 

Gen. del libro of the book 

Dat. al libro to the book 

Abl. dal libro from o?*bv the book 

" Plur. 



38 ARTICLES. 

Plur. Nom. i libri the books 

Gen. dei libri of the books 

Bat. ai libri to the books 

Abl. dai libri from or by the books 



The Declension of the Article lo before a masculine 
noun, whose first letter is an s, followed by a consonant. 



Sin*. Nora. 


lo specchio 


the glass (mirror) 


Gen. 


dello specchio 


of the glass 


Dat. 


alio specchio 


to the glass 


Abl. 


ddllo specchio 


from the glass 


Plur. Nom. 


gli specchj 


the glasses 


Gen. 


degli specchj 


of the glasses 


Dat. 


dgli specchj 


to the glasses 


Abl. 


ddgli specchj 


from the glasses 



The Declension of the Article la before a feminine noun 
beginning with a consonant. 

Sing. Nom. la cdsa the house 

Gen. delta cdsa of the house 

Dat. dlla cdsa to the house 

Abl. ddlla cdsa from the house 

Plur. Nom. le cdse the houses 

Gen. delle cdse of the houses 

Dat. dlle cdse to the houses 

Abl. dalle cdse from the houses 

The article la is also prefixed to feminine nouns be- 
ginning with an s, followed by a consonant ; as, la 
strdda, le strdde, the street, &c. 



The Declension of the Article lo, with an apostrophe, 
or elision. 

Sing. Nom. V amore the love 

Gen. delV amore of the love 

Dat. alV amore to the love 

Abl, dalV am6re from the love 

Plur. 



ARTICLES. 39 

Plur. Nom. gli amori the loves 

Gen. degli amori of the loves 

Dat. dgli amori to the loves 

Abl. ddgli amori from the loves 



The Declension of the Article la, with an apostrophe. 

Sing. Nom. Vdnima the soul 

Gen. delV dnima of the soul 

Dat. all 7 dnima to the soul 

Abl. dalV dnima from the soul 

Plur. Nom. le dnime the souls 

Gen. delle dnime of the souls 

Dat. dlle dnime to the souls 

Abl. ddlle dnime from the souls 

* # * Observe, that the English have no variation in 
their articles for the plural ; they say, the men, the 
women : the Italians have an article for each gender in 
the plural, gli ubmini, le donne, i libri, le stelle. 

Of the Indefinite Article. 

Th e Indefinite article has but three cases, or, to speak 
more properly, the prepositions which are most com- 
monly placed before articles are three, and serve, as 
we have already mentioned, for the singular and plural, 
for the masculine and feminine. 

Gen. di of 

Dat. a, or ad before a vowel, to 

Abl. da from, or by. 



The following example will show, that nount declined by 
the Indefinite Article have no article in the nomina- 
tive, accusative, or vocative. 

Nom. Roma Rome 

Gen. di Roma of Rome 

Dat. a Roma to Rome 

Ace. Roma Rome 

Voc. o Roma ! o Rome ! 

Abl. da Roma from Rome 

The 



40 ARTICLES. 

The Indefinite article is used in declining the nouns 
that have no article in the nominative; such as the 
names of angels, oV dngeli ; of men, d' uomini; of cities, 
di cittd ; of months, di Mesi; as also the Pronouns per- 
sonal, demonstrative, interrogative, and relative ; for 
example, London, January, February, March, April, 
-me, thee, him, we, you, this, that, those* these, who, &c. 

Who or which, in Italian qudle, may be declined by 
the Definite articles : for we say, il qudle and la quale, 
del qudle and della quale. 

The Indefinite article may also be prefixed to all 
other sorts of nouns, as I have already observed : for 
we say, una libbra dipdne, a pound of bread ; un cap- 
pello di pdglia, a straw hat ; una tdzza d' argento, a 
silver cup ; un vestito di pdnno, a cloth suit. 

If the Indefinite article di or da precedes a noun 
beginning with a vowel, we must make an elision in 
the genitive, and use ad in the dative ; as, nomina- 
tive, A ntonio ; genitive, d' Antonio ; dative, ad Anto- 
nio ; accusative, Antonio ; ablative, da Antonio. 

* # * Observe, that in speaking of any part of the 
body, it is more elegant to make use of the indefinite 
than the definite article : hence we say, mi irarrd, 
V dnima di corpo, he will tear my soul from my body ; 
mi toglie il libro di mdno, &c. he takes the book out of 
my hand, &c. 

The Indefinite article is also put before infinitives, 
and signifies to ; as, it is time to speak, to sleep, to read, 
to study, to write, to love, to go ; e tempo di parldre, di 
dormire, di leggere, di studidre, di scrivere, d y amdre, 
d' anddre ; but we make an elision when the verbs 
begin with a vowel ; as, oV amdre, d' anddre. 

* # * Note. Whenever you meet with of and to in 
English, remember they are the indefinite articles ; 
and then you must make use of the indefinite article a 
or ad in Italian. 

■ 
■ : : nl 
Remarks 



ARTICLES. 41 

Remark on. th* Articles. 

First, Him or it before a verb is always expressed 
by lo ; as, I see him or it, io lo vedo ; we know it, noi 
to s.appidmo ; I know it, io lo so. 

Secondly, Her or it before a verb is expressed by 
la : example, I know her, io la conosco ; I do not know 
her, non la conosco. 

Thirdly, Them before a verb is expressed by li for 
the masculine, and by le for the feminine : example, 
io li vedo, or io le vedo, according to the gender. 

Fourthly, The words lo, la, li, le, must be always 
put after the adverb ecco, and also after the infinitives 
and gerunds; as, there he is, cccolo; there she is, eccola; 
there they are, eccoli for the masculine, and eccole for 
the feminine ; to see him, we must say, per vederlo, 
because vedere is in the infinitive : in like manner, 
to express seeing him, we must not say, lo vedendo, 
as is done in French, but vedendolo, because vedendo 
is a gerund, and the Italian rule requires that these 
words, lo, la, li, le, should always follow the infinitive 
and gerund, as also the word ecco, as in English, but 
never precede them as in Freuch. 

*** Remember, that we have been speaking of the 
words lo, la, li, le, and not of the articles lo, la, li, le, 
and that a little above, we said also the words lo, la, li, 
le, because these words lo, la, li, le, when they precede 
verbs, are not articles, but relative pronouns. They 
are articles only when they precede nouns or pronouns. 

Fifthly, The preposition in is sometimes expressed in 
Italian by in ; as, in Paris, in Parigi ; in France, in 
Frdncia ; in a room, in una camera ; in a fire, in un 
fuoco; in all the earth, in tutta la terra; in a (drinking) 
glass, in un bicchiere; in a bottle, in una bottiglia. 

When the preposition in is followed by the article 
the, or by a pronoun possessive, as, in the, in my, in 
thy, in his ; we must render it by nel, nello, nella, nei, 
negli, nel mio, nel tuo, nel suo: example, in the garden, 
nel giardino, and not in il giardino. 

In the spirit, nello spirito, and not in lo sptrito : the 
ancients made use of in lo and in la. 

We 



42 ARTICLES. 

We say, nello spirito, because spirito begins with an 
5 followed by a consonant. 

In the house, nella cdsa 

In the gardens, nei giardini 

In the fires, ! neifuochi 

In the spirits, negli spiriti 

In the houses, nelle case 

In my garden, nel mio giardino 

In thy book, nel tuo libro 

In his or her bed, nel suo letto 

In his or her room, nella sua camera 

In his or her books, ne f suoi libri 

In his or her rooms, nelle sue cdmere 

When in precedes the pronoun possessive of the mas- 
culine gender, in the plural it is expressed by we' with 
an apostrophe, and not by nei ; as, in my book, ne* 
miei libri ; which is practised to avoid a harshness of 
sound. 

Sixthly, You see, by these examples, that in the is 
expressed in Italian by nel or nello; in the feminine, 
by nella. 

Nel is placed before the same nouns that we put the 
article il, and in the plural it makes nei or ne% in the. 

Nello is put before the same nouns that we put the 
article lo, and in the plural it makes negli. 

Nella is put before the same nouns as the article la,. 
and in the plural it makes nelle. 

We may express in by in, when it is before a pro- 
noun possessive feminine, by transposing the pronoun 
possessive at the end of the phrase ; as, in my room, 
in cdrnera mia ; in your house, in cdsa vostra ; in his 
or her shop, in bottega sua ; but this rule is only for 
feminine nouns, and not masculine. 

Seventhly, When after the preposition with, which 
in Italian is expressed by con, we find the article the, 
or a pronoun possessive, as, with the, with my, with 
thy, with his, we must not say, con il, con lo, con la, 
but col, colla, co'i, con gli, colle : example, with the 
prince, col principe, and not con il principe. 

With the hand, colla mdno 

With the scholar, collo scoldre 

With 



ARTICLES. 43 

With the princes, coi principi 

With the princesses, colle principesse 

With the scholars, con gli scoldri 

With ray book, col. mio libro 

With my pen, colla mia penna 

With your friends, co' vostri amid 

With my books, co J miei libri 

Col makes in the plural, coi and co\ 

Collo makes con gli; colla makes colle. 

Nevertheless, when the following words begin with 
the letter s and another consonant, it is more elegant 
to write con lo and con gli; thus you will say, con lo 
strdle, con lo scoldre, con gli studj ; and col or colV, 
when the word begins with a single consonant, or with 
a vowel. 

Eighthly, When the preposition with is followed by 
a pronoun possessive, and this by a noun of quality, or 
kindred ; as, with your majesty, with your highness, 
with your excellency, with his brother, with her mo- 
ther, with her sister ; with must then be rendered by 
con, as, con vostra maestcl, con sua altezza, con vostra 
eccelUnza, con suo fralello, con sua mddre, con sua so- 
rella, without using the article. 

* % * Observe, we may also make use of col and colla, 
by transposing the pronouns possessive after the noun, 
and say, colla maesta vostra, colV eccelUnza sua, col 
fratello suo, colla madre sua, &c. 

Ninthly, If the pronouns possessive are in the plural, 
then we must express with by co' for the masculine, 
and by colle for the feminine ; example, with my bro- 
thers, co y miei fratelli, and not con miei fratelli ; with 
my sisters, colle mie sorelle, and not con mie sorelle ; if 
you choose to insert the article, you must use the same 
transposition, and say, coi fratelli miei, coi parcnti 
vostri, colle sorelle tue, colle madri nostre, &c. 

*** Note, The ancient authors, and some few mo- 
dern ones, say con U, con la, &c. 



CHAP. 



44 NOUNS. 

. . ' ' ' "■ -' 

n o a r> tt 
CHAP. II. 

Of NO UNS. 

ITALIAN Nouns have but five terminations, viz. 
those of the five vowels, a, e, i, o, u. 

They have but two genders, the masculine and the 
feminine. 

Italian nouns have no variation of cases like the 
Latin ; and it is the article only that distinguishes the 
case ; example, nom. il signore ; gen. del signore ; dat. 
-al signore ; ace. il signore ; voc. 6 signore ; abl. dal 
signore. Nbm. plur. isignori; gen. deisignori; dat. 
ai signori, &c. 

*£* Take notice, as a general rule, that all masculine 
nouns make their plural in i; example, il pdpa, the 
pope, i pdpi ; il pddre, the father, i pddri ; il libra, the 
book, i libriy &c. 



Of Nouns ending in a. 

Nouns ending in a are feminine, and form their 
plural in e; as, la edsa, the house; le edse, the houses; 
la chiesa, the church ; le chicse, the churches ; la car- 
rozza, the coach ; le carrozze, the coaches. 

Exceptions. — First, All nouns ending in ca and ga, 
have an h in the plural between the c or g and the final 
vowel, to avoid the change of sound ; as, la mdnica, 
the sleeve, le mdniche; la piaga, the wound, le pidghe. 

Secondly, Nouns ending in Italian in ta, and in 
English in ty, never change their Italian terminations 
in the plural ; as, la calamita, calamity ; le calamity, 
calamities: Vautoritd, authority ; le autoritd, authori- 
ties : la caritd, charity ; le caritd, charities. 

* 4 * Yet observe, that those nouns are syncopated or 
shortened, and their real termination is in ade or ate, 
according to the most ancient poets. In the plural 

they 



NOUNS. 45 

they change their termination into i ; thus we say, 
beltade or beltdte, in the singular, and beltddi or beltdti 
in the plural. I do not remember ever to have seen 
these nouns written in the plural with a t. Though, 
the Italians sometimes make use of the termination in 
ade, yet it is better and more usual to say bonta than 
bont6.de, and generositd than generositdde, &c. 

Thirdly, Nouns masculine ending in a, form their 
plural in i ; as, papa, pdpi ; prof Ha, profeti. 



Of Nouns ending in e. 

All Nouns ending in e, whether masculine or femi- 
nine, substantive or adjective, form their plural in i ; 
example, il padre, the father ; i pddri, fathers ; la 
mddre, a mother ; le mddri, the mothers ; prudente, 
prudenti, prudent. 

Exceptions. — First, Mille, a thousand, which makes 
in the plural mila. 

Secondly, the five following nouns, re, a king ; spe- 
cie, a sort; superficie, a superficies; effigie, an effigy; 
V esequie, the funeral ; which have no change of termi- 
nation in the plural ; for we say, il re, i re ; la specie, 
le specie ; la superficie, le superficie ; V effigie, le 
effigie; V esequie, le escquie : without curtailing the 
article of the two last nouns in the plural to distin- 
guish it from the singular V effigie, V esequie. 

Observe, that we seldom make use of the word 
esequie in the singular. 

I have taken no notice here of the noun requie, re- 
pose, coming from the Latin word requies, because I 
never saw an instance in which it was used in the 
plural. However, it would admit of no variation in 
the plural, any more than re, &c. 

Moglie, wife, makes mogli in the plural. 

- 
: 

lsiu\ . as Uom oib oJ gci< 

Rules 



m NOUNS. 



Rules for finding the Gender of Nouns in e. 

First, Nouns ending in me are masculine ; example, 
il costume, the custom ; ilfiume, the river ; il rdme, the 
copper ; il verme, the worm. 

There are two nouns in me, feminine, viz. la fame, 
hunger ; and la speme, hope. 

Secondly, there are but four nouns in re, feminine ; 
viz. la febbre, the fever ; la mddre, the mother ; la 
torre, the tower ; la pblvere, the dust. 

All the nouns in ore are masculine ; as, il fore, the 
flower ; il colore, heat ; il furore, rage ; lo splendore, 
splendor ; il cuore 7 the heart ; il predicatore, the 
preacher. 

There are four nouns in re of both genders, viz. il 
and la cdrcere, the prison ; il and la cenere, the ashes ; 
il and lafolgore, the lightning; il and la lepre, the hare. 

Thirdly, Of the Italian nouns ending in ine, tone, 
and one ; some are masculine and some feminine ; as, 
V ordine, the order ; la grdndine, hail ; la prigione, the 
prison ; il bastone, the stick ; we say, il fine, when we 
take it for aim or design ; and la fine, when we mean 
the end ; though in the latter signification, it is usual 
also to say, il fine and la fine. 

Fourthly, the following nouns in nte, are feminine ; 
namely, la gente, the people ; la patente, the patent ; la 
sorgente, the source ; la corrente, the current; la mente, 
the mind, and perhaps some few more ; all the other 
nouns ending in nte are masculine, as il dente, the 
tooth ; il ponte, the bridge ; il mdnte, the mount ; il 
gigdnte, the giant, &c. We are speaking here only of 
nouns-substantive, not of adjectives. 

There are three nouns in nte which have two gen- 
ders, viz. il and la fdnte, a servant ; il and la fronte, 
the forehead ; and il and la fonte, a fountain. 

Fifthly, The other different terminations in e keep 
the same gender, as in French and Latin : example, il 
pesce, the fish ; la voce, the voice ; la crbce, the cross ; 
il Idtte, the milk ; la lode, the praise: except, 

La gregge, a flock or herd. We say likewise, il 
gregqe, masculine in poetry. 

Of 



NOUNS. 



47 



Of Nouns in i. 

The Italian language has but few nouns termi- 
nating in i ; they are the same in the plural as in 
the singular, and are distinguished by the articles ; 
namely, 

Singular. Plural 

il di, the day, i di, the days 

il Luned), Monday, i Lunedi 

UMartedi, Tuesday, i Mar ted i 

il Mercoledi, Wednesday, i Mercoledl 

il Giovedi, Thursday, i Giovedi 

il Venerdi, Friday, i Venerdi 

la diocesi, a diocese, le diocesi 

il barbagidnni, an owl, i barbagidnni 

V ecclissi, an eclipse, le ecclissi 
Vestasi, an ecstacy, le estasi 

la perifrasi, a periphrasis, le perifrasi 

V enfasi, an emphasis, le enjasi 

la metamorfosi, a metamorphosis, le metamorfosi 

la crisi, a crisis, le crisi 

la tesi, a thesis, le tcsi 

la Genesi, Genesis, 

un pdri, such a one, i fy le pari 

The last noun is of all genders and numbers ; and 
we say un pari vostro, such a man as you ; una pdri 
vostra, such a woman as you ; implying respect. 

Genesi has no plural, and is of* all genders. In 
Dante we meet with lo Genesi, but the generality of 
good writers say la Genesi. 

There are also some proper names in i, as Giovdiwii, 
Parigi, Ndpoli; and the numeral nouns, as died, 
undid, dodid, tredid, quattordid, quindid, stdid, 
venti. 



Of Nouns in o. 

Nouns ending in o are masculine, except, first, nouns 
of women, as Saffo, Elo. Second, the word mano, which 

is 



48 



NOUNS. 



is feminine, and makes its plural in i ; for example, il 
fratello, the brother ; i fratelli, brothers ; ilfazzoletto, 
the handkerchief, i fazzoletti; la mdno, the hand, le 
mdni ; uomo, man, makes uomini in the plural. 

* # * Note, that nouns-substantive in aro, more ele- 
gantly change their termination into ajo ; thus we say,, 

Genndro and Genndjo, January. 

Febbrdro and Febbrdjo, February. 

Calzoldro and calzoldjo, a shoemaker. 

Mortdro and mortdjo, a mortar. 

There are some nouns in o which terminate in the 
plural more elegantly in a than in i, and then they be- 
come feminine in the plural ; they are as follow : 



V anello, 


le anella, 


the rings 


il brdccio, 


le brdccia, 


the arms 


il budello, 


le budella, 


the bowels 


il calcdgno, 


le calcdgna, 


the heels 


il cerchio 


le cerchia, 


the circles, hoops 


il ciglio, 


le ciglia, 


the eyebrows 


il corno, 


le coma, 


the horns 


il dito, 


le dita, 


the fingers 


il ditellOf 


le ditella, 


the armpits 


ilfilo, 


lefila, 


the threads 


ilfrutto, 


lefrutta, 


the fruit • 


il gesto, 


le gist a, 


the actions, feats 


il grido, 


le grida, 


the cries 


il guscio, 


le guscia, 


the shells 


il ginocchio f 


le ginocchia, 


the knees 


il labbro, 


le Idbbra, 


the lips 


il lenzuoloy 


le lenzuola, 


the sheets (of a bed) 


il leg no, 


le legna, 


the sticks 


il melo, 


le me la, 


the apples 


il membrOf 


le membra, 


the limbs 


il muro, 


le mura, 


the walls 


il miglidjo, 


le miglidja, 


the thousands 


il m'iglio, 


le miglia, 


the miles 


V orecchio f 


le oreechia, 


the ears 


V osso, 


le ossa, 


the bones 


ilpdjo, 


le pdja, 


the pairs 

il porno 



NOUNS. 




le poma, 
le pugna, 
le stdja, 
le risa, 


the apples 
the fists 
the bushels- 

the laughters- 


le nova, 


the eggs 


le rubbia, 


the measures^ 


le vestigia, 


the footsteps 



49 



il porno, 
il pitgno, 
lo st&jo, 
il riso, 
V novo, 
il rubbio, 
il vestigio, 

Nouns of two syllables ending in co and go, take 
an h in the plural, in order to avoid a change of pronun- 
ciation : examples, ilfuoco, the fire, i fitochi, the fires ; 
il luogo, the place, i luoghi, the places. 
Two are excepted. 
77 pcrco, the pig ; i porci, the pigs. 
II Greco, Greek ; i Greci, Greeks. 

The other nouns in co and go, of more than twc 
syllables, do not take an h in the plural ; as, amico, 
amid, friends ; domestico, domtstici, domestics ; cano-> 
nico, canonici, canons ; cattolico, cattolici, catholics ; 
mtdico, medici, physicians ; mendico, mendici, beggars. 

The following are exceptions : 
Albcrgo, alberghi, dwellings 

Antico, antichi, ancients 

Astrologo, astrologer, makes astrologhi and astrologi. 
In like manner, monaco, a monk, forms in the plural 
monachi and monad. 



Antico, 

Beccafico, 

Bifolco, 

Catafdlco, 

Did logo, 

Fia7?iingo, 

Reciproco, 

Siniscdlco, 

Tedesco, 

Trdffico, 

Nouns ending 



antichi, 
beccafichi, 
bifolchi, 
catafdlchi, 
didloghi, 
Fiaminghi, 
riciprochi, 
siniscdlchi, 
Tedeschi, 
trdffichi, 
in io form theii 



the ancients 
fig-peckers 
labourers 
scaffolds 
dialogues 
Flemings- 
reciprocals 
high-stewards 
Germans 
tradings 
plural in ii, j, or i f 



observing the two following rules 

1st. Those in which the io is long, the i of io being 
accented, and making a dissyllable, retain the two syl- 
lables in the plural, changing o into i; thus, natio, pio f 
zio, mormorio, make in the plural natii. pii, zii, mormorn, 
D 2nd, 



50 



NOUNS. 



2nd. Those in which the io is short, the io making 
but one syllable, change io into j or i omitting the 
final o as follows : 
Singular. Plural. Examples. 



chit 



glio, 



chi. 



9 l h 



cio and ccio, ci and cci, 



yio, 
ajo, 



ojo, 



9h 



C tempio, 


tempj. 


J necessario, 


necessarj 


{ principio, 


principj. 


$ occhio, 


occhi. 


j> vecchio, 


vecchu 


Ifoglio, 


fogli. 


Ifiglio, 


JiglL 


I consiglio, 


consigli. 


C bacio, 


bdci. 


. j laccio, 


lacci. 


' J impaccio, 


impacci. 


(^fantoccio, 


fantocci. 


\ raggio, 
I saggio, 


raggi. 


saggi. 


( mugnajo, 
I librajo, 


mugnai. 


librai. 


J rasojo, 


rasoi. 


£ vasojo, 


vasoi. 


Nouns in u. 





Of 

The Italian language has but few nouns in u; 
and they do not change their termination in the plural : 
examples : 



la gru, 


a crane, 


le gril 


la gioventil, 


youth, 


le gioventib 


la servitib y 


servitude, 


le servitk 


la tribil, 


a tribe., 


le tribu 


la virth, 


virtue, 


le virtib 


la schiavitit, 


slavery, 


le schiavitil 



Remarks on some Nouns. 

%* When the letter I is found in Latin and French 
after/, b, p, we must change I into i. Examples, fleur, 
fibre ; blanc, bianco ; blanche, bianca ; plein, pieno ; 
temple, tempio; plomb, piombo. 

V Note > 



NOUNS. 51 

*£* Note, the Italians never put a c or p before a £, 
but the p or c are changed into t : examples, doctus, 
dotto; doctor, dottore; act, dtto; aptitude, attitudine; 
adoption, adozione. 

Ph is changed into f; example, philosopher, filo- 
sofo ; Ephesus, Efeso : x is changed into s or ss, and 
sometimes into c; as, Xerxes, Serse; Alexander, Ales- 
sdndro ; excellent, eccellhite. 



Of the Augment atives. 

The Italians, more than other nations, have this 
peculiarity in their language, that they can augment 
or diminish the signification of the nouns, by only 
adding certain syllables to the end of them, which 
they call augmentatives or diminutives. 

Augmentatives are words which, by the increase of 
a syllable, increase also in their signification. 

There are two sorts of augmentatives ; the first ter- 
minates in one, to express any thing great and large ; 
as, capptllo, a hat, which, by changing o into one, 
makes cappellone, a large hat ; sdla, a hall ; change 
a into one, and you make salone, a large hall ; 
frate, a friar ; fr atone, a fat overgrown friar : casa, a. 
house ; casone, a great house : I'tbro, a book ; librone, 
a large book : and so of the rest. 

*^* Observe, that the augmentatives ending in one 
are alwavs masculine, though the nouns from whence 
they are formed be feminine ; example, una porta, un 
portone ; la camera, il camtrone. 

The other augmentatives are formed by changing the 
last letter of the word into accio, for the masculine, 
and into accia, for the feminine ; but then these aug- 
mentatives declare the thing somewhat contemptible ; 
as, capptllo, a hat ; cappellaccio, a great ugly hat. 
Sala, a hall ; Saldccia, a great dirty hall. 
Cdsa, a house ; casdccia, a great dirty house. 

Nouns terminating in ame, denote plenty or abun- 
dance of any thing common; as. gentdme, abundance 
of people ; ossdme, abundance of bones. 

Observe, nevertheless, that in those terminations 
d 2 there 



52 NOUNS. 

there are nouns which are not augmentatives ; for in- 
stance, in one, we find bastone, a stick : in dme, stdme, 
worstead ; in dccio, and in dccia, Idccio, a halter ; 
fdccia, a face, &c. 



Of Diminutives. 

Although the diminutives are increased by the 
addition of one or more syllables, yet the addition 
lessens the signification of their primitives. 

There are two sorts of diminutives, one of kindness 
and flattery, another of compassion. 

The diminutives of kindness and flattery have their 
terminations in ino, etto, ello, for the masculine ; and in 
ina, etta, clla, for the feminine ; examples, from povero, 
poor, come poverino, poveretto, poverello, a poor little 
man, poverina, poveretta, poverella, a poor little woman. 

The diminutives of compassion end in uccio, uzzo, 
icciuolo, for the masculine, and in uccia, uzza, icciuola, 
for the feminine ; example, from uovio, a man, is formed 
uomuccio, uomuzzo, uomicciuolo, a poor little man. 

* # * Note, the diminutives convey no meaning of 
contempt like the augmentatives ; so that to express a 
little old man, you may use indifferently vecchietto, 
vecchino, vecchiettino, vecchiarello, vecchiarellino, ex- 
cept the termination uccio and uzzo; as, vecchiuzzo, cas- 
succia; as also cdsina, casttta, to express a small house. 
*** Observe also, that the diminutives in ino and 
ina, have something of tenderness and persuasive flat- 
tery in them ; examples, the pretty little prince, il 
principino ; the pretty little princess, la pri?icipes$ina. 
In her pretty little room, nel suo bel camerino. 
Cdne, a dog, has its diminutive cagnuolino, a pretty 
little dog. 

Tdvola, ' makes tavolino, a little table. 

Cdsa, a house, casino, a small house. 

Camera, a room, earner mo, a little room. 

Berretta, berrettino, a little cap (for men); which 
show that several feminine nouns in a make their dimi- 
nutives in ino. 

Of 



NOUNS. 53 

Of Nouns Adjective. 

The adjectives always agree with their substantives 
in gender, number, and case. 

There are two sorts of adjectives, one terminated in 
o, the other in e. The adjectives in o serve for the 
masculine ; example, bello, sdnto, dotto, ricco, povero : 
these adjectives, and all others ending in o, form their 
plural in i; as, belli, sdnti, dotti, ricchi, poveri. 

To make these adjectives of the feminine gender, 
you must change o into a, as bello, bella; dotto, dotta ; 
ricco, ricca : and in the plural you must change a into 
e; as, belle, dotte, ricche. 

The other adjectives ending in e are of the mascu- 
line and feminine gender, without changing their ter- 
mination, and they form their plural in i, as well for 
the masculine as feminine : examples, un ubmo pru- 
dente, una donna prudente ; due uomini prudenti, due 
donne prudenti. 

From the adjectives we may form comparatives and 
superlatives. 



Of Comparatives* 

The English comparatives are adjectives, before 
which are put the particles, more, less, better, worse, 
&c. 

The Italian comparatives have before them, piil, 
vitno, or meglio : as, piu dotto, more learned ; meno 
dotto, less learned ; piu bella, more handsome ; meno 
bella, less handsome. 

The comparatives serve to compare one thing with 
another : the sun is larger than the earth,; your sister 
is better dressed than your niece. In these examples 
we compare the sun with the earth, the sister with the 
niece. 

There are four Italian comparatives, which end in 
ore : they may also be expressed by piu, except mi- 

gliore, 

* See Exercises, p. 16. 



54 



NOUNS. 



gliore, or meglio, which are comparatives without the 
help of the particle piil. 



maggiore, 


greater, 


piil grdnde 


minore, 


less, 


piu piccolo 


peggiore, 


worse, 


piil cattivo 


migliore. 


better, 


meglio, or piil buono 



To which may be added superiore, superior, and 
inferiore, inferior, or lower. 

Observe, that the Italians never make use of the 
words peggio and meglio, but when they want to express 
the French words pire and mieux, that is, worse and 
better, taken as adverbs. When the comparative is to 
agree with the substantive, they say peggibre and mi- 
gliore, 

*£* Observe also, that there can be no comparison 
made without the word than, and that this word is not 
expressed in Italian by che, but by the articles of the 
genitive di 9 del, dello, delta, dei, degli, delle. 

When the word than, placed after the compara- 
tive, is followed by an article, or a pronoun possessive, 
as, than the, than my, than thy, than his, than ours> 
than yours, than theirs, &c. the word than is expressed 
by the definite articles, del, dello, della, dei f degli, delle. 
Examples : 



Clearer than the sun, 
Whiter than the snow, 
Mere learned than the 

scholar, 
Longer than the days, 
More beautiful than the 

stars, 
Clearer than the glasses, 
Larger than my book, 
Broader than my hand, 
Richer than your relations, 



piu chidro del sole, 
piu bianco della neve, 
piil dotto dello scoldre. 

piu liinghi dei giorni. 
piil belle delle stelle. 

piil chiari degli specchj, 
piil grdnde del mio libro. 
piil largo della mia mdno. 
piil ricchi dei vostriparentL 



$£ But if the word than is not followed by an article 
©r a pronoun possessive, then it is expressed by the in- 
definite article di. Examples : 

More 



NOUNS. 55 

More learned than Cicero, piil dotto di Cicerone. 
More esteemed than I, piu stimato di me. 

Larger than the whole earth, piil grdnde di tutta la terra. 
Richer than this man, piil ricco di quest' uomo. 

If after than there happen to be a pronoun posses- 
sive, followed by a noun of quality or kindred in the 
singular, than is expressed by the indefinite article di : 
example : 

Handsomer than my brother, my sister, your ex- 
cellency, &c. piil hello di miofratello, di mia sorella, di 
vostra eccellenza, &c. We may likewise make use of 
the definite article, but in that case we must place the 
pronoun and the noun substantive, according to what 
has been observed at the end of the first chapter ; and 
we must say, piil hello del fratello mio, della sorella mia, 
dell y eccellenza vostra, &c. 

* # * If the pronoun possessive be in the plural num- 
ber, as, my brothers, their aunts, their highnesses, we 
must use the definite articles de y and delle ; example, 
more powerful than my brothers, piil potenti de y miei 
fratelli, delle mie zie, delle altezze loro. 

*y* If the word than is followed by an adjective, or 
by a verb, an adverb, or a preposition, it is rendered 
by die : examples : 

More white than yellow, piil hidnco che giallo. 

More poor than rich, piil povero che ricco. 

He writes more than he speaks, scrive piu che nonparla. 
It is better late than never, e meglio tdrdi che mdi. 

When the Italians require to heighten their compari- 
sons, they make use of via piil, assai piil, molto piil, a 
great deal or much more ; as also of via meno, assai 
meno, mblto meno, a great deal or much less. 

Examples— Csesar is much more esteemed than 
Pompey. 

Cesar e e via piu stimato di Pompeo. 
Cesar e e assai piil stimato di Pompeo. 
Cesar e e molto piil stimato di Pompeo. 
Pompey was much less happy than Csesar. 

Pompeo e stato via meno, assai meno, molto meno 
felice di Cesare. 

When both the objects are in the nominative case, 
the comparative than cannot be expressed by che before 

the 



56 NOUNS. 

the last without repeating the verb, but by di, &e. ; but 
when the objects compared are in the accusative case, 
that is to say, after an active verb, then the comparative 
ilian must be expressed by che before the last object : 
example, I esteem you more than your brother ; stimo 
piic voi che vostro fratello. 

* # * See the Second Part of this Grammar, in the 
chapter of the concord of nouns, _the rule concerning 
the comparison, when it is made by as much as, so, &c. 



Of Superlatives.* 

The English superlative is only a noun adjective, to 
which is prefixed the article most, in order to heighten 
the sense ; as, most learned, most honoured. 

The Italian superlative is formed from the noun. ad- 
jective, by changing the last letter into issimo for the 
masculine, and into issima for the feminine ; thus from 
grdnde, great, you form grandissimo, greatest ; from 
bella, handsome, bellissima, handsomest. 

The most, is expressed by il piii, la piil ; as, the 
fairest, or most fair, il piil hello, la piit bella, i piil belli, 
Je piil belle ; the largest, il piil grande. 

* # * Observe, that by changing the last letter of ad- 
jectives in issimamente, the superlative adverbs are 
composed; as, from dbtto, learned, dottissimamente, most 
learnedly ; from ricco, rich, ricchissimamente, most 
richly ; from prudente, prudent, prudentissimamente, 
most prudently. 

You are also to take notice, that the positive is 
sometimes used in the Italian language, instead of the 
superlative ; as, e la bella delle belle ; as if one were to 
say, she is the fairest of the fair. 

There is also another sort of superlative ; for we say, 
un uomo dotto dotto, to signify a very learned man. 



Observations on some Nouns. 
Observe that the six following words, uno, hello, 
grdnde, sdnto, quello, buono, are abridged or retrenched 

before 

* See Exercises, p. 23. 



NOUNS 



57 



before masculine nouns beginning with a consonant, 
and we only write, 

Un, bel, gran, san, quel, buon ; as, un libro, bel cane, 
granfuoco, san Michele, quel bastone, buon fgliuolo. 

Before the feminine nouns we write, 

Una, bella, gran, sdnta, quella, buona. 

None but gran is shortened before feminines. 

*** See, in the Second Part, the chapter concerning 
words which are to be abridged. 

Frdte signifies a friar, or brother of a religious 
order. 

In this sense we abridge the word frdte before the 
proper names of men, and only use fra; as, fra Pie- 
tro, brother Peter ; fra Paolo, brother Paul ;fra Ago- 
stino, brother Augustine; fra Giovdnni, brother John. 

We must remember also, that fra, before numeral 
nouns, signifies in : example, fra un dnno, in a year ; 
fra due mesi, in two months ; fra quindici giorni t in 
fifteen da vs. 





Numeral Noutis 


One, 


Un, uno, una 


Two, 


due 


Three, 


tre 


Four, 


qudttro 


Five, 


cinque 


Six, 


sei 


Seven, 


sette 


Eight, 


otto 


Nine, 


nove 


Ten, 


died 


Eleven, 


undid 


Twelve, 


dodici 


Thirteen, 


tredici 


Fourteen, 


quattordici 


Fifteen, 


quindici 


Sixteen, 


sedici 


Seventeen, 


diciasette 


Eighteen, 


diciotto 


Nineteen, 


diciannove 


Twenty, 


venti 




d 5 Twenty-one, 



m 



& NOl 


m 


Twenty-one, 


ventuno 


Twenty- two, 


venti-due 


Twenty-three, &c. 


venti-tre, <^c. 


Thirty, 


trenta 


Forty, 


quardnta 


Fifty, 


cinqudnta 


Sixty, 


sessdnta 


Seventy, 


settdnta 


Eighty, 


ottdnta 


Ninety, 


novdnta 


Hundred, 


cento 


Two hundred, 


dug into 


Three hundred, 


trecento 


Thousand, 


mille 


Two thousand, 


due mila 


Million, 


milione 


A score, 


una ventina 


Half a score, 


una decina 


A dozen, 


una dozzma 


A score and a half, 


una trentina 


Ordinal Nouns. 


First, 


Primo 


Second, 


secondo 


Third, 


terzo 


Fourth, 


quarto, 


Fifth, 


quinto 


Sixth, 


sesto * 


Seventh, 


settimo 


Eighth, 


ottdvo 


Ninth, 


nono 


Tenth, 


decimo " 


Eleventh, 


undecimo 


Twelfth, 


duodecimo 


Thirteenth, 


decimoterzo 


Fourteenth, 


decimoqudrto 


Fifteenth, 


decimoquinto 


Sixteenth, 


decimosesto 


Seventeenth, 


decimosettimo 


Eighteenth, 


decimottdvo 




Nineteenth 



NOUNS. 59 

Nineteenth, decimonono 

Twentieth, ventesimo 

One-and-twentieth, ventesimo primo 

Thirtieth, trentesimo 

Fortieth, quarantesimo 

Fiftieth, cinquantesimo 

Sixtieth, sessantesimo 

Seventieth, settantesimo 

Eightieth, ottantesimo 

Ninetieth, novanthimo 

Hundredth, centesimo 

Thousandth, millesimo 

Last, ultimo 

The proportional numbers are, semplice, doppio, 
triplicdto, quadruplicate, centuplicdto, single, double, 
threefold, fourfold, a hundredfold. 

The distributive nouns are, ad uno ad uno, one by 
one ; a due a due, two by two. 

In French and English all ordinal numbers may be 
formed into adverbs, but in Italian they have only pri- 
mieramente and secondariamente. 

To express thirdly, fourthly, &c. they say in ttrzo 
luogo, in qudrto luogo, &c. in the third place, in the 
fourth place, &c. 



A Method by which those who understand French may 
learn a great many Italian words in a short time. 

Though Italian is said to be a corruption of the 
Latin, yet it has a greater conformity and resemblance 
with the French than with any other language ; for 
French words, with a little variation, are all Italian, 
as may be seen by the following examples ; only we 
must observe that the French syllable cha is already 
expressed in Italian by ca, rejecting h : example, 
{Jharbon, charite, chastete, chapon, charette, chandelle, 
chapeau, the Italians say, Carbone, caritd, castitti, 
cappone, caretta, candela, cappello. 

To acquaire a great number of Italian words in a 
short time, observe the following rules : 

French 



60 



NOUNS. 



French Terminations which in Italian end in a. 
French words ending in ance, as Constance, vigi- 
lance, &c. in Italian end in anza ; costdnza, vigildnza, 

Ml 

Those in ence in French ; as, clemence, diligence, 
prudence, end in Italian in enza; clemenza, diligenza, 
prudenza, 



Agne makes agna. 

montagne, montdgna 

campagne, campdgna 

Ogne makes ogna. 
Catalogne, Catalogna 

charogne, carogna 

Ie makes ia. 
comedie, commedia 

Here the accent is placed 
upon the e, and not upon 
the i, as in French, 
tragedie, tragedia 



Oire makes oria. 

gloire, gloria 

victoire, vittoria 

Te' makes tti. 
purete purita 

liberalite, liberdlitd. 

See what has been said 
in the exceptions of nouns 
terminating in a. 

Ure makes ura. 
aventure, vtntura 

imposture, impostura 



French Terminations which in Italian end in e. 



Al makes ale. 
cardinal, cardindle 

mal, male 

Able makes evole. 
charitable, caritatevole 
honorable, onorevole 

louable, lodtvole 

Ais, names of nations, ese. 
Francais, Francese 

Anglais, Inglese 

Hollandais, Olandese 

Ant makes ante. 
yigilant, vigilante 

amant, amdnte 

Ent, adjective, ente. 
prudent, prudente 

diligent, diligente 

Eur makes ore. 
honneur, onore 

chaleur, colore 



Ier makes tire. 

cavalier, cavaliere 

piquier, picchiere 

Ion makes ione. 
union, unione 

portion, porzione 

Ison makes gione. 
raison, ragione 

prison, prigione 

On makes one. 
charbon, carbone 

canon, cannone 

baron, bar one 

Ont makes onte. 
front, fronte 

pont, ponte 

Ude makes udine. 
inquietude, inquietudine 

Ulier makes oldre. 
regulier, regoldre 

particulier, particoldre 
French 



NOUNS. 



61 



French Terminations which in Italian end mo. 



Age makes aggio. 
page, •p&ggio 

equipage, equipdggio 

Ain makes ano. 
vilain, villdno 

humain, umdno 

Ain and Ien, names of 
nations, make ano and ino. 
Romain, Romano 

Italien, Italidno 

Napolitain, Napoletdno 
Parisien, Parigino 

Aire makes ario. 
salaire, saldrio 

temeraire temerdrio 

Eau makes ello. 
chape au, cappello 

manteau, mantello 



Ent, substantive, ento. 
sacrement, sacramento 

Eux makes oso. 
genereux, generoso 

gracieux, grazioso 

In makes ino, 
vin, vino 

jardin, giardino 

If makes ivo. 
actif, attivo 

passif, passivo 

C makes co. 
pore, 
Turc, 
Grec, 

escroc, scrocco, doubling 
the letter c. 



porco 
Turco 



Change of Terminations of Verbs and Participles. 



rendre, rendere 

Ir makes ire. 
partir, partire 

sentire 



sentir, 



Er makes are. 
aimer, amdre 

parler, parldre 

Endre makes endere. 
prendre, prendere 

The participles in e make ato; aime, amdto ; orne, 
orndto; chante, cantdto ; parle, parldto. 

The participles in i make ito ; dormi, dormito ; senti, 
sentito ; pati, pat'ito ; menti, mentito. 

There are a great many Italian words which have no 
kind of analogy or resemblance with the French ; 
as, le ciglia, the eyebrows ;fazzoletto,di handkerchief; 
gobbo, crook-backed ; chiamdre, to call ; scherzdre t to 
joke ; and many others, which prevent these rules 
from being general. 



Other Terminations of the Italian Nouns, derived 
from the Latin. 
The Latin ablative generally makes the Italian no- 
minative ; as, colore, onbre, pettine, vergine. 

The 



62 PRONOUNS. 

The natural nominatives change their last syllable 
into o: as, sacerdotium, sacerdozio, &c. But if the 
last syllable of the nominative begins with a consonant, 
the consonant continues, and the vowel o is added to 
it: examples, tempus, say tempo; cornu, c6rno; re- 
taining the p and n, which are the first letters of the 
last syllable of the nominative tempus, tempo, and the 
nominative cornu, corno. 

The neutral nominatives in en drop the letter n ; as, 
nomen, nome ; flumen, fume; changing also the letter 
I into i, as has been already observed, when we treated 
of nouns ending in u. 

The greatest part of the Latin infinitives, of the se- 
cond and third conjugation, make the Italian infini- 
tives ; as dolere, tenere, solere, temere, vedere, credere? 
leggere, difendere ; but the e, in those words which are 
accented, is pronounced in a different manner, being 
the close e, like that in the French word malgre. 

CHAP. HI. 
Of the PRONOUNS. 
THE pronouns are either personal, conjunctive, pos- 
sessive, demonstrative, interrogative, relative, or im- 
proper. 

Of Pronouns Personal.* 

The pronouns personal are io and not for the first 
person, and they serve for the masculine and feminine. 

Tu and voi, for the second, and these serve also for 
the masculine and feminine. 

Egli for the third person of the masculine gender, 
and makes eg lino, in the plural. 

Ella or essa (because lui for the masculine, and lei 
for the feminine, are never used in the nominative), for 
the third person in the feminine gender, form in the 
plural elleno ; but esse is preferable. Hence we seldom 
say lui or lei mi dia una presa di tobacco, give me a 
pinch of snuff; but signore V. S. or ella mi dia una 
presa di tabdcco. 

* See Exercises, p. 24, 82, &c. 

The 



pronouns. m 

The pronouns personal are declined by the article 
indefinite, di, a, da, 



Sing. 



Plur. 



With me, is rendered by con me, or meco ; me after 
the imperatives, is expressed by mi ; as, speak to me> 
parldtemi; tell me, ditemi ; send me, manddtemi; 
write to me, scrivetemi. 

Us, after the imperative, is rendered by ci : example, 
tell us, diteci; give us, dated; show us, mostrdteci. 
In these examples, us is not a pronoun personal, but 
conjunctive, as will be shown hereafter. 



The Declension of 


Pronouns Personal. 




First Person. 


Nom. I, 




io. 


Gen. of me. 




di me. 


Dat. to me, 




a me, or mi. 


Ace. me, 




me, or mi. 


Abl. from me, 


da me. 


Nom. we, 




not. 


Gen. of us, 




di noi. 


Dat. to us, 




a noi, or ci. 


Ace. us, 




noi, or ci. 


Abl. from 


or by us 


, da noi. 



Sing. 



Plur. 





Second Person. 


Nom 


thou, 


tu. 


Gen. 


of thee, 


di te. 


Dat. 


to thee, 


a te or ti. 


Ace. 


thee, 


te or ti. 


Abl. 


from thee. 


da te. 


Nom 


you or ye, 


voL 


Gen. 


of you, 


di voi. 


Dat. 


to you, 


a vci or v 


Ace. 


you, 


voi or vi. 


Abl. 


from you, 


da voi. 



With thee, is* rendered by con te, or teco ; you, 
after imperatives, by vi, and not by noi, as, be con- 
tented, 



64 PRONOUNS. 

tented, contentdtevi f show yourself, mostrdievi ; hide 
yourself, nascondetevi ; dress yourself, vestitevi ; thee, 
or thyself, is expressed after imperatives by ti ; as, 
mostrati, show thyself. 



Third Person. 


For the masculine. 


Sing. Nom. he, 

Gen. of him, 
Dat. to him, 
Ace. him, 
Abl. from him, 


egli. 

di lui. 

a lui, or gli. 

lui, or lo and il. 

da lui. 


Plur. Nom. they, 

Gen. of them, 
Dat. to them, 
Ace. them, 
Abl. from them, 


eg lino. 

di loro. 

a loro, or loro, and gh 

loro, or gli. 

da loro. 



*** Remember that the pronoun him, or to him, 
when joined to a verb, is always rendered in Italian by 
gli, and her by le, as you will see in the pronouns con- 
junctive. 



Sing. 





Third Person. 


Feminine. 


Nom. 


she, 




ella, or essa. 


Gen. 


of her, 




di lei. 


Dat. 


to her, 




a lei, or le. 


Ace. 


her, 




lei, or la. 


Abl. 


from or by 


her, 


da lei. 


Nom 


. they, 




elleno or esse. 


Gen. 


of them, 




di loro. 


Dat. 


to them, 




a loro, or loro. 


Ace. 


them, 




loro, or le. 



Plur. 



Abl. from, or by them, da loro. 
Though there are instances of lui, lei, and loro, 
being used in the nominative, yet it is better to say 
egli pdrla, ella cdnta, than lui pdrla, lei cdnta ; because 
lui is not to be used in the nominative, but in the other 
cases, in which it is better to make use of lui, lei, and 

loro, 



PRONOUNS. 65 

loro, than of egli, ella, eglino, elleno. We therefore 
say, for him, per lui; for her, per lei; for them, per 
loro; with him, con lui, or seco; with her, con lei, or 
seco ; with them, con loro. 



Of the Pronoun se, one's self, himself or herself 
There is another personal pronoun, which serves in- 
differently for the masculine and feminine : it is, se, 

one's self; it has no nominative. 

Gen. of one's self, himself, or herself, di se. 

Dat. to one's self, &c. a se, or si. 

Ace. one's self, &c. se, or si. 

Abl. from or by one's self, &c. da se. 

It is often joined with the pronoun stesso, or stessa, 

and in that case it is more elegant; per se stesso, by, 

or for himself ; per se stessa, for herself. 



Of Conjunctive Pronouns. 

The conjunctive pronouns bear a great resemblance 
to the personal pronouns ; the personal pronouns are, 
7, thou, he, she ; we, ye, they. 

There are seven pronouns conjunctive, viz. to me, or 
me ; to thee, or thee ; to himself, or himself; to herself, 
or herself; to him, or him ; to us, or us; to you or yov ; 
to them, or them. 

They are expressed in Italian by 

mi, ti, si, gli, or le, ci, vi, loro. 

It is easy to remember that the pronouns conjunc- 
tive, me, thee, one*s self, himself or herself ; to him, 
them, or to them, fyc. are always rendered in Italian 
by mi, ti, si, gli, or le, loro ; example, this pleases me, 
questo mi pidce. 

God sees thee, Dio ti vede. The sun rises, il sole si 
leva. I will tell him, io gli dirb. I will tell her, io le 
dirb. 

I promise them, prometto loro; as well for the mas- 
culine as the feminine. 

%* The pronoun conjunctive loro is always put after 
the verb in Italian ; as it is in English, for instance, 
you will tell them, direte loro. 

The 



If PRONOUNS. 

The pronoun conjunctive, to him, is expressed in 
Italian by gli, and to her, by le : example, I speak to 
him, io gli pdrlo ; I speak to her, io le pdrlo. We like- 
wise make use of gli, or li, in the plural, to signify 
loro; but observe, we must put gli before the finite 
mood; as, io gli ho inteso dire cose mirdbili-; and 
loro after the infinitive mood, as, ho veduto far loro 
cose mirdbili. N. B. But gli for loro is seldom used in 
prose. 

The pronouns we and ye are expressed in Italian by 
noi and voi, when they precede the verbs whose action 
they make, and to which they are nominatives ; as, we 
pray, no i preghidmo ; you sing, voi cdntate. We is the 
nominative of to pray, of which it makes the action ; 
and so ye is the nominative of to sing ; then we and ye 
are pronouns personal. 

When we and ye, in Italian noi and voi, precede 
verbs to which they are not the nominative, and there 
is some other word which goes before, and makes the 
action of the verb, then they are pronouns conjunc- 
tive, and must be expressed by ci and vi, in English 
us and you : example, the master speaks to us, il maes- 
tro ci pdrla, and not noi pdrla : because the master 
makes the action, and is the nominative to the verb. 
In like manner, to render in Italian, we speak to you, 
we must say, noi vi parlidmo, and not noi voi parlidmo ; 
because w e is the nominative, and makes the action of 
the verb, and not you, which, instead of making it, 
receives it. Yet we may say, il maestro pdrla a noi, 
noi parlidmo a voi. 

*** One of the chief difficulties to learners of the 
Italian language is, to express the pronouns conjunc- 
tive mi, ti, ci, gli, ci, vi, when they are followed by the 
particles lo, la, li, le, or ne. 

But to explain this, observe you must express them 
here as follows, changing the letter i of the pronoun 
conjunctive into e ; as to say, to me of it, instead of 
mine, you must say mene ; in like manner, instead of 
mi lo, you are to say, melo, pronouncing the two syl- 
lables short. And the same is to be observed in all 
the following conjunctive pronouns. 

Me, 



pronouns. m 

at ~( it, to me, melo, mas. 

Me, mi ; me of 1 / , 7 7 r- 

'.. ^ it, tome, mela, fern. 

(them, to me, -wie/i, mefe, m. & f. 

„,, .. ., r.(it, to thee, telo, mas. 

Thee, h; thee of) it ; tQ thee ; ^ fem> 

it, te^e. (them, to thee, teli, tele, m. & f. 

„. 1V . ,. tit, to himself,sefo, mas. 
Himself, si ; him- V. ... u? i r 
lf p. < it, to mmseli,seta, fern, 

sell ot it, serce. £ them ^ to himself,seft, sete, m. & f. 

m 1 • 7 . , C it, to him, qlielo, mas. 

To him, c&, to).,' , ,. ' f™ 7 ff 

1" ft 7 i ' to him, gcieia, tern. 

? ^ ' C them, to him, gliela,gliele,m.&L 

jr *• f "t S **» t0 us > c ^ ' mas * 

' l ' ' < it, to us, cefa, fern. 

1 them, to us, ce/i, cefe, m. & f. 

v • f > it, to you, veto, mas. 

You, vi ; you of ) . ' . •> 9 7 ' c 

it ve/ie ) rt ' t0 Y ou » ^a, fern. 

C them, to you, ^e/z, vefe, m. & f. 

To them, loro ; to them of it, ne loro; putting always 
loro after the verb. 

If the verbs are in the infinitive, or the gerund, the 
pronoun conjunctive must be transposed; as, to tell me, 
per dirmi ; to tell me of it, per dirmene ; to give it to 
me, per darmelo ; in telling it me, dicendomelo ; to give 
it to us, per ddrcelo; so as to make, as it were, but 
one word of it, remembering that we must always 
pronounce short, melo, mene, telo, tene, celo, cell, cele, 
and the rest after the same manner. 

Other examples concerning the pronoun conjunctive 
loro, them. 

I promise them, prometto loro. 

To promise them some, per prometterne loro. 

In promising them some, prometttndone loro. 

After imperatives, and before infinitives and gerunds, 
the pronouns are never personal, but conjunctive ; 
example, give us, dated; to see you, per vedervi; in 
speaking to you, parldndovi. 

After verbs, when a question is asked, the pronouns 
are personal, and not conjunctive ; example, have you ; 
avete voi ? shall we sing ; canteremo not ? 

The poets always iise ne, instead of ci, to express 

the 



68 PRONOUNS. 

the pronoun conjunctive us, as in Guarini's Pastor 
Fido. 

Perche, crudo, destin, ne disunisci tu, s'amor ne 
stringe ? E tu -perche ne stringi, se ne parte il destin, 
perfido amore ? 

Why, cruel fate, dost thou part us, if love unites us ? 
And thou, treacherous love, why dost thou unite us, if 
fate parts us. 



Of Pronouns Possessive.* 

The English have no article in the nominative be- 
fore pronouns possessive, but the Italians have ; as, 
my, U mio, la mia, fern. Plur. i miei, le mie, fern. 

There are six pronouns possessive, viz. il mio, il tuo, 
il suo, il nostro, il vostro, il loro: my, thy, his, our, 
your, their : in the plural they make i miei, i tuoi, i 
suoi; i nostri, i vostri, i loro. 

The feminine pronouns possessive are, la mia, la 
tua, la sua, la nostra, la vbstra, la loro ; in the plural, 
le mie, le tue, le sue, le nostre, le vostre, le loro. 

Loro, as you see, never changes, but is always loro ; 
it is put before the masculine, as well as the feminine ; 
before the singular, as well as the plural number. 

The pronouns possessive are declined by the definite 
article il for the masculine, and by la for the feminine. 
To render them easy to decline, I shall give the fol- 
lowing example : 

Sing. Nom. my book, il mio libro. 

Gen. of my book, del 7nio libro, 

Dat. to my book, al mio libro. 

Abl. from or by my book, dal mio libro. 
Plur. Nom. my books, i miei libri. 

Gen. of my books, de' miei libri. 

Dat. to my books, a miei libri. 

Abl. from or by my books, da 9 miei libri. 
Decline all the other masculines in the same 
manner, and the feminines by the article la; as, la 
mia serva, delta mia serva, alia mia serva, dalla mia 

* See Bottarelli's Exercises, p. 26. 



PRONOUNS. 69 

serva ; le mie serve, delle mie serve, alle mie serve, ddlle 
mie serve. 

*£* Note, you must not use the definite article when 
the pronouns possessive precede nouns of quality, but 
the indefinite articles di, a, da : examples, 

Your majesty, vostra maesta. 

Of your majesty, di vostra maesta. 

To your majesty, a vostra maestc). 

From your majesty, da vostra maesta. 

*^ * Remember also, that names of kindred conform 
to this rule ; thus we say, mio padre, di mio padre, a 
mio padre, da mio pddre ; mia mddre, di mia mddre, a 
mia mddre ; da mia mddre ; mio fratello, di mio fratello, 
a mio fratello, da mio fratello ; mia sorella, di mia 
sorella, a mia sorella, da mia sorella ; mio marito, &c. 

If the nouns of quality or relation be in the plural, 
we must make use of the definite article i or le, de* or 
delle : examples. 

Your brothers, i vostri fratelli, or i fratHli 

vostri. 

Of your brothers, de 9 vostri fratelli, or de fra- 

telli vostri. 

To your brothers, a vostri fratelli. 

From your brothers, da' vostri fratelli. 

Your sisters, le vostre sorelle, or le sorelle 

vostre. 

Of your sisters, delle vostre sorelle. 

To your sisters, alle vostre sorelle. 

From your sisters, dalle vostre sorelle. 

Their highnesses, le altezzeloro, or leloro altezze. 

Of their highnesses, delle altezze loro. 

To their bignesses, alle altezze loro. 

From their highnesses, dalle altezze loro. 

Though the definite article sometimes occurs in an- 
cient and modern authors before nouns of kindred in 
the singular number, yet we ought not to imitate them ; 
according to the old proverb, tu vivendo bonos, scri- 
bendo secjuere peritos. 

Observe, 



m PRONOUNS. 

Observe, that when the pronoun possessive is ac- 
companied by a pronoun demonstrative, we do not 
put the article in the nominative. We do not say, il 
questo mio libro, but questo mio libro. In all other 
cases, we make use of the indefinite article ; thus we 
say, di questo vostro libro, a quella nostra cdsa, &c. 



Of Pronouns Demonstrative. 

The pronouns demonstrative are as follow : 
This, that, these, those. 

They are called pronouns demonstrative, because 
they serve to point out or demonstrate any thing or 
person : as, this book, that man, that woman, &c. 

We make use of questo, questi, questa, queste, in 
showing a thing near at hand : and quel, quello, quelli, 
quei, quella, quelle, in showing or speaking of a thing 
at a distance. 

Costui, colui, costei, colei, are also pronouns demon- 
strative, and never used but in speaking of a rational 
being ; as, of a boy, a man, a woman, &c. and not of a 
horse, a dog, &c, example ; it is for this man, do not 
give it to that, t; per costui, non lo date a colui : pay this 
woman, and send away that, pagdte costei, e rimanddte 
colei : you may also say, e per questo, non lo ddte a 
quello ; pagdte questa, rimanddte quella. 

Colui, costui, colei, costei are used (in prose) to 
imply contempt. 

Costui and costei, form in the plural costoro, these 
men or women : colui and colei make in the plural 
coloro, they or those men or women. 

We seldom make use of coloro or costoro, either in 
the feminine or in the masculine for the nominative. 

We make use of costui, colui, costei, colei, costoro, 
coloro, when they are the last words of a sentence, but 
seldom in the beginning or middle of it. 

We frequently meet with cotesto and cotesta, and 
they signify that man or thing, that woman or thing ; 
but you are to observe, that there is a difference between 
questo and cotesto. Foreigners, and sometimes the 

Italians 



PRONOUNS. 71 

Italians themselves, are mistaken in the use of these 
two pronouns. We ought never to use cotesto, and 
cotesta, but in speaking of a thing which concerns the 
person who hears us. Therefore you must not say, 
cotesto mio dbito, but questo mio dbito, this coat of 
mine. / 

*£* Observe, guesliand quegli are often used for the 
singular number ; as, this man was happy, that unfor- 
tunate, questifufelice, quegli sfortundto ; but it is used 
only in speaking of a rational substance, as of a man, a 
woman, an angel, &c. and not in speaking of an animal, 
or any inanimate thing for then we are to make use of 
questo and quel or quello. 

*^* Note, what, is often expressed by il che ; but in 
that case it must refer to some antecedent phrase : ex- 
ample ; my father is dead, which obliges me to go, mio 
padre e morto, il che mi bbbliga a par tire. In the be- 
ginning of a sentence we must say, cib che: example ; 
that which pleases me, I have not, cib che mi pidce, 
non V ho. 



Of Pronouns Interrogative, 

The pronouns interrogative serve to ask questions, 
and are as follow : who ? what ? which ? chi ? che ? 
quale ? Examples. 

Who is it ? chi e? 

Who told you so ? chi v ha detto cib ? 

What will you have ? che volete ? 

What are you doing ? che fate f 

What book is it ? che libro e ? 

What house is it 1 che casa e ? 

W r hat? che? of what? di che? to what? a che? 
from what ? da che ? 

%* Che is often used for quale ? and then the phrase 
is more elegant: example; what man is that? che 
uomo e ? what business have you ? che affdri avete ? 
instead of saying, qual uomo e ? qudli affdri avete ? 

Of 



72 PRONOUNS. 

Of Pronouns Relative. * 

There are three pronouns relative in English, 
That, who, tmd which. 

That, when it is a relative pronoun, is expressed in 
Italian by che, or by il qudle in the masculine, and by 
la qudle in the feminine : example, il libro che io leggo, 
the book that I read. 

La.casa che ho, the house that I have. 

I said when it is a pronoun relative, because when 
it is a conjunction or adverb, it is rendered by che ; 
you must therefore say, credo che andrb, &c. I believe 
I shall go, &c. 

Who, except it be interrogative, is also expressed by 
che ; example ; the master who teaches, il maestro che 
insegna : the fools who laugh, gli sciocchi che ridono. 
But if it be interrogative, it is rendered by chi. 

Of whom or whose is expressed by di chi or di cui. 

To whom is expressed by a chi or a cui. 

From whom, by da chi, or da cui. 

Which, masc. is expressed by il qudle ; of which, del 
qudle; to which, al quale; from which, dal quale; 
which, plural, i qy,&li; of which, dei qudli; to which, 
ai qudli ; from which, dai qudli. 

Which, feminine, la qudle, delta qudle, alia qudle, 
dalla qudle; in the plural, le qudli, &c. 

* * Observe, that the pronouns relative, that, who, 
which, are also expressed by che; thus, instead of 
saying qudle, qudli, il qudle, i qudli, la quale, le qudli; 
we may say and write che, which is more received. 

* # * The purest authors place the pronoun cz« between 
the definite article and the noun. See the following 
examples ; but observe, that you will never find this 
pronoun in the nominative. 

Whose fair face, il cui bel viso, or il di cui bel viso, 
for il bel viso di cui. 

Whose beauties, le cui bellezze, or le di cui bellezze, 
for le bellezze di cui. 

To whose father, al cui pddre, or al di cui padre, for 
al pddre di cui. 

From whose brother I have received, dal cui, or dal 

* See Bottarelli's Exercises, p. 27. 

di 



PRONOUNS. 7£ 

di cui fratello ho ricevuto. See Bocc&ccio, Lodovico r 
Dolce, Menzini, Ddvila, and cardinal Bentivoglio, wha 
frequently use these expressions. 

The French relative, dont, of xohich or of whom* is 
rendered in Italian by di cui. 

Dont le, it di cui, or il cui. 

Dont la, la di cui, or la cui. 

Dont les, i di cui, or i cui, for the masculine. 

Dont les, le di cui, or le cui, for the feminine. 

\* Lo, la, li, le, are pronouns conjunctive, when 
before verbs. 

Him, as we have already observed in the chapter of 
articles, is rendered by lo ; example, I see him, iq- li- 
vedo ; you know him, voi lo conoscete. 

If the verb begins with a vowel, there must be an 
elision : as, I caress him, io I 9 accarezzo. 

Her, is expressed by la ; example, I know her, io la> 
conosco ; you want her, voi la volet e. 

Them is expressed by li for the masculine, and for 
le for the feminine ; as, I see them, li vedo or le vedo. 

%* Remember that the conjunctive pronouns, lo, lo 
li, le, must be transposed after infinitives, gerunds, and 
the word ecco, here (or) there is, and not put before, 
as in French. 

Esso, he, himself, or it ; is a personal pronoun which 
can be constructed also as a demonstrative : it makes 
in the plural, essi, themselves ; essa, she, herself, or t& 
makes esse, themselves, fern. 



Of Improper Pronouns. 

These pronouns are called improper, because, in 
fact, they are not properly pronouns, but have a great 
resemblance to adjectives as well as to pronouns* 
They are the following : 

Tutto, tidti, m. tutta, tutte, f. all or every ; ogni, each 
or every ; dltro, altra, dltri, dllre, other, others ; qudlcke^ 
some: chiunque, whosoever; qualcheduno, qualcheduna^ 
some one; alcuno, some one, man or thing; alcuna r 
some one, woman or thing ; ciaschedu.no, ciascheduni? 
masc. ciascheduna, ciaschedune, fern, every one ; nissuno^ 
E nobody ; 



74. PRONOUNS. 

nobody ; il medesimo, il medemo, lo stesso, mas. la me- 
d£sima 9 la medema, la stessa, V istessa, fem. the same ; 
ciascuno, masc. ciascuna, fem. each or every one; 
altrui, altri, others, &c. 

Veruno, veruna, not one man or woman, is used for 
the affirmative as well as for the negative. 

Tutto, comprehends a totality, and agrees with the 
thing spoken of; example, all the world, tutto il mondo, 
or tutto H mondo ; all the men, tutti gli uomini. 

The whole earth, tutta la terra. 

All the women, tutte le donne, 

*#* We must use tutto and tutta, when the word all 
is followed by an article or a numeral noun : as, all the 
world, tutto 7 mondo ; all the earth, tutta la terra : all 
three, tutti tre. 

But if after -the word all, there be no article, we 
must useo^m: example, all men who say so, speak 
wrong, ogni uomo che dice questo, parla male: all 
women who, ogni donna che. 

Observe, nevertheless, that this pronoun (tutte) is 
used without the article ; and is of great elegance, 
especially in verse. 

Che tutte altre bellezze indietro vdnno. 
Sciolii da tutte qualitadi umdne. 

*** Ogni is put with the singular number, and never 
with the plural ; and it is indeclinable. It is used be- 
fore masculines as well as feminines, and especially 
when the pronoun all may be rendered by each or 
every: examples, all or every scholar, ogni scolare ; 
for all or every thing, per ogni cosa. 

There are some examples of ogni in the plural. 
Cres. 236, says, appresso la festa d'ogni s&nti, after the 
feast of All Saints. Fiam. 29, * miei qffdnni ogni altri 
trapdssano. But such examples are so uncommon, 
that they hardly deserve notice. 

Allro makes in the plural altri; altra, feminine, 
makes altre. Oblique cases can be constructed by 
altrui ; as, gen. altrui, or d* a Itrui ; dat. alt r id or ad 
aiirui ; ace. altrui ; abl. altrui, or da altrui. 

Altro, when it is not followed by a noun, signifies 
another thing. 

Altri 



VERBS. 15 

Altri is sometimes put for the singular number ; as, 
altri pidnge, altri ride., one weeps, another laughs. 

%* Qudlcke is only placed before the singular, and 
never with the plural : it is not right to say, qualche 
signori, qualche signore, some gentlemen, some ladies ; 
you must say, alcuui signori, alcune signore. 

Qualsivoglia, whatever, is likewise used as an im- 
proper noun ; qualsivoglia libro, whatever book ; 
qualsivoglia cera, whatever wax. 



CHAP. IV. 

Of the VERBS.* 

WHATEVER, relates to the verbs will be rendered 
much easier to learn by attending to the following 
remarks : 

Important Remarks on the Conjugations. 

Before you begin to learn the conjugations, it will be 
proper to observe, that all the verbs may be conjugated 
without the pronouns personal, io, tu, egli, noi, voi, 
eglino ; you are therefore at liberty to form them with or 
without the pronouns ; and it will be right in you to 
follow the Latin rule, 

Supprimit orator, quce rusticus edit inepte. 

*^.* You must also observe, that the tenses marked 
with a star, in the conjugation of the verb avere, to 
have, are terminated and conjugated after the same 
manner in all the other verbs ; thus, we say in the 
preterimperfect of the verb avere. 

■\ Avevo, or aveva, avevi, aveva, avevdmo, &c. 

* See Bottarelli's Exercises on the Verbs, 
p. 33, et seq. 

t The best writers in the Italian language terminate 
the first person of the preterimperfect of all verbs in a ; 
aveva, not avevo ; amdva, not amdvo ; the latter termi- 
nation being used only by the vulgar. 

e2 All 



70 VERBS. 

All verbs follow the same rule : examples, 
Amavo, or amava, amdvi, amdva, amavamo, &c. 
Credevo, or credeva, credevi, credeva, credevdmo, &c. 
SentivOf or sentiva, senlivi, sentiva, sentivdmo, &c. 
And in like manner all other tenses that are distin- 
guished by a star, except the single verb essere, to be. 
Note. In the Italian language, as in Latin, we do 
not make use of any personal pronouns before verbs, 
except when two or three different persons are expressed 
by the same word ; — as the subject of the third person 
both of the singular and plural, may be a man, or a 
woman, two men, or two women, it admits very fre- 
quently of the pronoun, when there is no antecedent 
which points clearly to the subject. 



Conjugation 


of the auxiliary verb avere 


i to have, 




INDICATIVE. 


" 




Present. 






Singular. 




I have. 


io ho, or 


ho. 


Thou hast, 


tu hdi 


hai. 


He has, 


egli ha, 
Plural. 


ha. 


We have, 


noi abbidmo, 


abbidmo* 


You have, 


voi avete, 


avete. 


They have, 


eglino hdnno, 
Preterimperfect. 


hdnno. 


I had, 


Ho aveva f or avevo. 


Thou hadst, 


tu avevi. 




He had, 


egli aveva. 




We had, 


noi avevdmo. 




You had, 


voi avevdte. 




They had, 


eglino avevano. 




PreTerperfect Definite. 




I had, 


io ebbi. 




Thou hadst, 


tu avesti. 





He 



verbs. n 

He had, egli ebbe. 

We had, noi avemmo. 

You had, voi aveste. 

They had eglino ebbero. 

Preterperfect. 

I have had, io ho avuto. 

Thou hast had, tu hdi avuto. 

He has had, egli ha avuto. 

We have had, noi abbidmo avuto. 

You have had, voi avete avuto. 

They have had, eglino hdnno avuto. 

Preterpluperfect. 

I had had, io aveva avuto. 

Thou hadst had, tu avevi avuto. 

He had had, egli aveva avuto. 

We had had, noi avevdmo avuto. 

You had had, voi avevdte avuto. 

They had had, eglino avtvano avuto. 

Future. 

I shall or will have, * io avro. 

Thou shalt have, tu avrdi. 

He shall have, , egli avra. 

We shall have, noi avremo. 

You shall have, voi avrete. 

They shall have, eglino avrdnno. 



IMPERATIVE. 

The imperative has no first person singular in. Italian. 

Have thou, dbbi tu. 

Let him have, dbbia egli. 

Let us have, abbidmo noi. 

Have you, abbiate voi. 

Let them have, abbiano eglino. 

OPTATIVE. 



78 VERBS. 

OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 
I join them together, because their tenses are similar. 

Present. 

That I may have,. ck' io dbbia. 

That thou mayest have, che tu dbbi, or abbia. 

That he may have, ch' egli dbbia. 

That we may have, che noi abbidmo. 

That you may have, che voi abbidte. 

That they may have, ch* eglino dbbiano. 

First Preterimperfect. 

That I had, * di io avessi. 

That thou hadst, che tu avessi. 

That he had, ch' egli avesse. 

That we had, che noi avessimo. 

That you had, che voi aveste. 

That they had, ch 9 eglino avessero. 

Second Preterimperfect. 

I should have, io avrei. 

Thou shouldst have, tu avresti. 

He should have, egli avrebbe. 

We should have, noi avremmo. 

You should have, voi avreste. 

They should have, eglino avrebbero. 

Preterperfect. 

That I have had, ch 9 io dbbia avvAo* 

Thou hast had, che tu dbbi avuto. 

He has had, ch 9 egli dbbia avuto. 

We have had, che noi abbidmo avuto. 

You have had, che voi abbidte avuto. 

They have had, ch 9 eglino dbbiano avutOi 

Preterpluperfect. 

It is compounded of the first preterimperfect sub~ 
junctive and the participle. 

If I had had, se io avessi avuto. 

If thou hadst had, se tu avessi avuto. 

If 



VERBS. 79 

If he had had, s 9 egli avesse avuto. 

If we had had, se noi avessimo avuto. 

If you had had, se voi aveste avuto. 

If they had had, $' eglino avessero avut&* 

Second Preterimperfect. 

It is compounded of the second preterimperfect sub- 
junctive and the participle. 

I should have had, io avrei avuto. 

Thou shouldst have had, tu avresti avuto. 

He should have had, egli avrebbe avuto. 

We should have had, noi avremmo avuto. 

You should have had, voi avreste avuto. 

They should have had, eglino avrebbero avuto. 

Future. 

It is compounded of the future of the indicative and 
the participle. 

When I shall have had, quancV io avrb avuto* 
Thou shalt have had, quando tu avrdi avuto. 
He shall have had, quanoV egli avra avuto. 
We shall have had, quando noi avremo avuto* 
You shall have had, voi avrete avuto. 

They shall have had, eglino avrdnno avuto. 



INFINITIVE. 
Present. 
To have, avere. 

Preterperfect. 
To have had, aver avuto. 

Participles. 

Had, avuto, avuta ; plural, avuti, ovule. 

Gerunds, 



SO VERBS. 

Gerunds. 

C avendo. 

*t • • l i coll* avere, 

Having, or in having, < ,,, ; 

° b \ J nell avere. 

t in avere. 

Having had, avendo avuto. 

%* We often use the verb avere, with the particle 
da or, a, instead of the verb dovere ; example, I ought 
to do, ho da fire ; being to speak, avendo a dire ; in- 
stead of devofdre, dovendo dire. 

By the generality of tenses of the verb avere, you 
plainly perceive ho w necessary it is to be perfectly 
acquainted with them in order to attain a speedy 
knowledge of all the rest, since there is such an entire 
conformity between them, except in the present, pre- 
terperfect definite, and the subjunctive. 

%* Upon first learning the Italian language, the 
interrogation creates some difficulty ; and we are at a 
Joss how to express shall I have ; have ive? hast thou? 
has he ? yet there is nothing more easy ; for it is merely 
by putting the pronouns personal after the verbs, as in 
English, and we shall never mistake in saying avrb io ? 
abbi&mo noif hai tu? ha egli? And if we would ex- 
press ourselves with greater elegance and ease, we 
ought not to mention the pronouns at all; examples, 
shall I have this ? avrb questo ? does he do well ? fa 
bene? shall we sing? canteremo? 

When we speak negatively, we must use the word 
non : examples, I have not, non ho : you must not 
know, non dovete conoscere ; thou has not, non hai : 
he has not, non ha. 

In the like manner to express, I have some, thou 
hast some, he has some, say, ne ho, ne hai, ne ha, &c. 

And to express, I have none, thou hast none, he 
lias none, ice. you may say, non ne ho, non ne hai, non 
ne ha. 

But to express, have I none? hast thou none ? we 
say, non ne no io ? non ne hai tu ? 

Conjugation. 



VERBS. 



81 



Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb essere, to be. 





indicative- 




Present. 




I am, 
Thou art, 
He is, 
We are, 
You are, 
They are, 


io sono 9 or 
tu sei, 
egli e, 
noi sidmo, 
voi siete, 
eglino sono, 


sono. 

set. 

e. 

sidmo. 

siete. 

sono 




Preterimperfect. 


I was, 
Thou wert, 
He was, 


io ira t or ero, 
tu eri, 
egli era, 


era, iro. 

erL 

era. 


We were, 
You were, 
They were, 


noi eravamo. 
voi eravdte, 
eglino erano, 


eravamo, 

eravdte. 

erano. 




PRETERPERFECT DEFINITE. 


I was, 

Thou wert, 
He was, 
We were, 
You were, 
They were, 


iofui, 

tufosti, 

eglifu, 

noifummo\ 

voifoste, 

eglino Jurono, 


fui. 
Josti. 

Jummo, 

foste. 

Jurono. 




Preterperfect. 



It is compounded of the present indicative, io sono, 
and its own participle stdto or stdta. 



I have been, 
Thou hast been, 
He has been, 
We have been, 
You have been, 
They have been, 



io sono stato, or stata. 
tu set stato. 
egli e stdto. 

noi sidmo stdti, or state, 
voi siete stdti. 
egliyio sono stdti. 
e5 If 



m 



VERBS. 



If we speak in the feminine, we must say, sono stdta, 
sei stdta, e stdta ; sidmo state, si'ete state, sono state } 
and so on in all the compound tenses. 



Preterpluperfect. 



I had been, 
Thou hadst been, 
He had been, 
We had been, 
You had been, 
They had been,. 



I shall or will be, 
Thou shalt be, 
He shall be, 
We shall or will be, 
You shall be, 
They shall be, 



io era stdto, or stdta. 

tu eri stdto, 

egli era stdto. 

not eravdmo stdti, or state. 

voi eravdte stdti. i&j^ 

eglino erano stdti. 



Future. 



to saro. 
tu sardi. 
egli sara. 
noi sarSmo, 
voi sarete. 
eglino sardnno. 



Be thou, 
Let him be, 
Let us be, 
Be you, 
Let them be, 



IMPERATIVE. 



sii tu, or sia tu. 

sia egli, 

sidmo noi. 

state voi. 

sieno, or siano eglino. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 



That I may be, 

Thou mayest be, 
He may be, 
We may be, 
You may be, 
They may be, 



ch'io sia. 
che tu sii, or sia. 
cK egli sin. 
che noi sidmo. 
che voi sidte. 

ch' eglino sieno, or siano. 
First 



VERBS. 



83 



First Preterimperfect. 



That I were or might be, 
Thou wert, 
He were, 
We were, 
You were, 
They were, 



chHofossi. 
che tujossi. 
cli egli fosse, 
che noffossimo* 
che voifoste. 
ch' eglinofossero. 



Second Preterimperfect. 



I should or would be, 
Thou shouldst be, 
He should be, 
We should be, 
You should be, 
They should be, 



to sarei. 

tu saresti. 

egli sarebbe. 

noi saremmo. 

vol sareste. [bono, 

tglino sarebbero, or sareb- 



Preterperfect. 



It is compounded of the present conjunctive io sia, 
and the participle stdto or stdta, of the same verb. 



That I have been, 

Thou hast been, 
He has been, 
We have been, 
You have been, 
They have been, 



chHo sia stdto, or stdia. 
che tu sii, or sia stdto, 
cli* egli sia stdto, 
che noi sidmo stdti, or sidle,. 
che voi sidte stdti. 
cfieglino siano statu 



Preterpluperfect. 

It is compounded of the first preterimperfect sub- 
junctive, and the participle. 



If I had been, 
Thou hadst been, 
He had been, 
We had been, 
You had been, 
They had been, 



se iojossi stdto. 
se tu fossi stdto. 
s' eglijosse stdto. 
se noifossimo stdti* 
se voijoste statu 
s 9 eglinofossero statu 

Second 



U VERBS. 



Second Preterpluperfect. 

It is compounded of the second preterimperfect 
subjunctive and the participle* 

I should or would have been, id sarei stdto. 
Thou shouldst have been, tu saresti stdto. 
He should have been, egli sarebbe stato. 

We should have been, noi saremmo stdti. 

You should have been, voi sareste stdti. 

They should have been, eglino sarebbero stdti. 

Future. 

When I shall have been, qaand' io saro stdto. 
Thou shalt have been, tu sardi stdto. 

He shall have been, egli sara stdto. 

We shall have been, noi saremo stdti. 

You shall have been, voi sarete stdti. 

They shall have been, eglino sar anno stdti. 



INFINITIVE. 

To be, essere. 

Preterperfect. 
To have been, essere stdto. 

Participles. 

Been, stdto 9 for the masculine ; sidta, for the feminine. 
Plural, stdti, state. 

Gerunds. 

C essendo, or sendo ; or coll* essere, 
Being, or in being, 1 ndV essere. 

{ in essere. 
Having been, essendo stato. 

The verb essere has no need of any other auxiliary 
verb ; and we must never put any of the tenses of the 
verbavtre before the participle tf«fo; as, for, Ihavebeen, 

you 



VERBS. 85 

you must say, sono stato, and not ho sldto ; I had been, 
era stdto, and not aveva stdto. And this rule should be 
particularly attended to, because herein it is, that fo- 
reigners are apt to commit mistakes. 



Of Conjugations. 

The Italian verbs have three different terminations 
in the infinitive ; that is to say, 

( are ; 1 Camdre, cantare, salt&re. 

In < ere ; > as, < temere, credere, godere. 

[ire ; 3 [sentire, dormire, menl'ire. 

For which reason I shall give but three conjugations. 
Amare, will serve as a rule for the verbs in are. 
Credere, for the verbs in ere. 
Se?itire, for the verbs in ire. 

It is proper here to observe, that the infinitives of 
verbs derived from the Latin, retain the same quantity 
as they have in Latin. For instance, the verb cantdre, 
in Latin, has the second syllable long ; and it has also 
the same syllable long in Italian. On the contrary, 
credere, crescere, having the second syllable short in 
Latin, have it also short in Italian. If you observe this 
rule in pronouncing infinitives, you will avoid the mis- 
takes which most learners of the Italian language are 
apt to commit. The rule, however, has some excep- 
tions. 

* # * Note, many Italian grammarians give four con- 
jugations instead of three ; they make two sorts of verbs 
in ere, viz. in ere short, and in ere long. 



An easy method of learning to conjugate the Verbs. 

I have reduced all the tenses of the verbs to seven : 
four of which are general, and have the same termina- 
tions in all the verbs ; and the other three, by changing 
the one letter in the third person, may be likewise made 
general, and all conjugations reduced to one. 

The 



86 VERBS. 

The general tenses are the preterimperfect, the 
future, the first and second preterimperfect subjunctive. 

The preterimperfect is terminated in all the verbs, in 
va or vo, vi 9 va ; vdmo, vdte, vano. 

The future indicative is terminated in 
rb, rid, rd ; remo, rete, rdnno. 

The imperfect subjunctive in 
ssi, ssi, sse ; ssimo, ste, ssero t 

The second imperfect, or conditional, in 
rei, resti, rebbe ; remmo, reste, rebbero. 

Change re of the verbs amare, credere, sentire (and 
generally of all the other verbs) into va or vo ; and rb 
into ssi and re\, &c. and you will find the imperfect, 
the future indicative, the first and second imperfect 
subjunctive of all the other verbs, without any excep- 
tion ; which will greatly assist the learner. 

* # * Note, the future, and the second imperfect, of 
the verbs in are, are terminated in erb and erei, and not 
in arb and arei. Therefore in these tenses, after having 
made the change of re into rb for the future, and into 
rei for the second imperfect, you must also change the 
vowel that precedes rb and rei, and say amerb, amerei ■; 
and so of the other verbs terminated in dre. 

From this rule must be excepted the verbs in are of 
only two syllables, as dare, stare, Jure, which retain 
the letter a, and make darb, &c. instead of derb, &c. 

The present indicative, the present definite, and the 
present subjunctive, are the only tenses necessary to be 
learned ; for the other four, given above, are general. 

In order to form those three tenses, you must cut off 
the last syllable of the infinitive, and then change the 
last vowel which remains. For the present indicative, 
change it into o, through all the conjugations, thus of 
amdre, credere, sentire \ you make, dmo, credo, sento. For 
the preterperfect definite of the indicatives change it 
into ai in the first conjugation ; thus of a?ndre, you form 
amai; but when you come to words of the second conju- 
gation, 



VERBS. 8T 

gation, you must change it into ei; thus of credere, you 
make credei ; verbs of the third conjugation have it 
changed into ii ; thus, sentire makes sentii. As for 
the present subjunctive, the vowel that remains is 
changed into i in the first conjugation, and into a in 
the others : thus, ami, creda, senta. 

Present. 

are, o, i, a, iamo, dte, ono, 
ere, o, i, e, idmo, ete, ono. 
ire, 0, i, e, idmo, ite, ono, 

*^* Take notice, that in the singular you are to 
change the letter in the third person only. 

Preterperfect definite indicative. 

are, ai, dsti, o 9 ammo, dste, drono, 
ere, ei, esti, e, emmo, este, erono, 
ire, ii, isti, 1, immo, iste, irono. 

Present subjunctive. 

are, i, i, i, idmo, iate, ino. 
ere, a, a, a, idmo, idte, ano. 
ire, a, a, a, idmo, idle, ano, 

* # * Observe, that through each of the conjugations 
there is no change made in the singular. 

The Participles are, 

are, dto, dta, ati, dte, 
ere, uto, uta, uti, iite. 
ire, ito, ita, iti, ite. 

Change the termination, are, ere, ire, with the letters 
and syllables opposite to them, and you will find the 
present, the preterperfect definite, and the present of 
the subjunctive, of all the regular verbs. 



First 



88 VERBS. 

First Conjugation, of the Verbs in are. 



INDICATIVE. 

%* I shall hereafter omit the personal pronouns io } 
lit, eglif &c. 

Present. 

I love, dm-o. 

Thou lovest, dm-i. 

He loves, dm-a, 

We love, am-iamo. 

You love, am-ate. 

They love, dm-ano. 
Preterimperfect. 

I did love, am-dva, or am-dvo. 

Thou didst love, am-dvz. 

He did love, am-dva* 

We did love, am-avamo. 

You did love, am-avdte. 

They did love, am-dvano. 

Preterperfect Definite. 

I loved, am~di. 

Thou lovedst, am-dsti. 

He loved, am-o. 

We loved, am-ammo. 

You loved, am-dste, 

They loved, am-drono. 

The poets frequently use cwzdr and amaro, for cwa- 
7-0H0 ; and so all the verbs in are, 

Preterperfect. 

This tense is composed of the participle amdto, and 
the present indicative of the auxiliary verb avere. 

I have loved, ho am-dto. 

Thou hast loved, hdi am-dto. 

He has loved, ha am-dto. 

We have loved, abbidmo am-dto. 

You have loved, avete am-dto. 

They have loved, hanno am-dto. 

Preterplu- 



VERBS. 89 

Preterpluperfect. 

This tense is composed of the participle amdto, and 
the imperfect of the auxiliary verb avSre. 

I had loved, aveva am-dto. 

Thou hadst loved, avevi am-dto. 

He had loved, aveva am-dto. 

We had loved, avevdmo am-dto. 

You had loved, avevdte am-dto. 

They had loved, avevano am-dto. 

Future. 



I shall or will love, 


am-ero. 


Thou shalt love, 


am-erdi. 


He shall love, 


am-era. 


We shall love, 


am-eremo. 


You shall love, 


a?n-erete. 


They shall love, 


am-erdnno 



Formerly amaro was used ; but it is now the practice 
to write amero, and so of all the verbs in are. 



IMPERATIVE. 

Love thou, dm-a tit. 

Let him love, dm-i egli. 

Let us love, am-iamo noi. 

Love you, am-dte vol. 

Let them love, dm-ino ez,lino. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

That I may love. ch y io dm-i. 

Thou mayest love, eke tu dm-i. 

He may love, ch* egli dm-i. 

We may love, che am-idmo. 

You may love, che am-idte. 

They may love, che dm-ino. 



N. B. 



90 VERBS. 

N. B. You may put the pronouns personal in the sin- 
gular of this tense, io, tu, egli, in order to distinguish the 
persons, which are all terminated in the same manner ; 
but it is superfluous to put them in the plural, the per- 
sons being sufficiently distinguished by their termi- 
nations. The same rule is applicable to. the following 
preterimperfect, and to the present optative and sub- 
junctive of the second and third conjugation. 

First Preterimperfect. 

That I might or could love, ch'io am-dssi. 

Thou mightest love, che tu am-dssi, 

He might love, che am-dsse. 

We might love, che am-dssimo. 

You might love, che am-aste. 

They might love* che am-dssero. 

When the conjunction si, in French, governs the in- 
dicative imperfect, it governs the same tense of the sub- 
junctive in Italian: as,sivous m^amieZfjevous payerais 
d'un parfait retour ; if you loved me, &c. se vol mamaste, 
&c. and not se voi m'amavate j and so in all the verbs* 
because, when we speak by way of wish or desire, we 
would make use of the subjunctive or optative. Young 
beginners are apt to mistake in this rule. 

Second Preterimperfect. 

I should or would love, am-erei. 

Thou shouldst love, am-cresti. 

He should love, am-erebbe. 

We should love, am-eremmo. 

You should love, am-ereste. 

They should love, am-erebbero. 

Preterperfect. 

It is composed of the participle amdto, and the pre- 
sent subjunctive of the auxiliary verb avere. 

That I have loved, cliio dbbia am-dto. 

Thou hast loved, che dbbi am-dto. 

He has loved, ch'cgli dbbia am-dto* 

That 



VERBS. 91 

That we have loved, die abbidmo am-dto. 

You have loved, che abbidte am-dto. 

They have loved, che dbbiano am-dto. 

Preterpluperfect. 

It is composed of the participle amdto, and the first 
preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb avere. 

If I had loved, se io avessi am-dto. 

Thou hadst loved, se tu avessi am-dto, 

He had loved, se avesse am-dto. 

We had loved, se avessimo am-ato. 

You had loved, se aveste am-dto. 

They had loved,, se avessero am-dto. 

Second Preterpluperfect. 

It is composed of the participle amdto, and the second 
preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb avere. 

I should have loved, avrei am-dto* 

Thou shouldst have loved, avresti am-dto. 

He should have loved, avrebbe am-dto. 

We should have loved, avremmo am-dto. 

You should have loved, avreste am-dto. 

They should have loved, avrebbero am-ato. 

Future. 

It is composed of the participle amdto, and the future 
indicative of the auxiliary verb avere. 

When I shall have loved, quand' avrb am~dto. 
Thou shalt have loved, avrdi am-dto. 

He shall have loved, avrd am-dto. 

We shall have loved, avremo am-dto. 

You shall have loved, avrete um-dto. 

They shall have loved, avrdnno am-dtOo 



INFINITIVE. 

To love, am-are~ 

To have loved, avere am-dto. 

Participles. 



92 VERBS. 

Participles. 

Loved, am-dto, masculine. Loved, am-dta, feminine. 

Gerunds: 

Loving or in lov'ns I am-dndo, coll* am-dre, con am-are* 

° 9 °\ nell' am-dre ; in am-dre. 

Having loved, agendo am-dto. 



Remarks on the Verbs in are. 

All the verbs ending in are, are conjugated in the 
same manner as amdre ; except four, which only 
deviate from this rule in some of their tenses; they 
are anddre, dare, fare, stare, 

You will find their conjugations afterthe regular verbs. 

* # * Note, the verbs terminating in the infinitives in 
care, and gdre, take an h in those tenses where the c 
and g would otherwise meet with the vowels e or i ; 
that is to say, in the present indicative, imperative, 
optative, future indicative, and the second preterim- 
perfect subjunctive ; which are the tenses I shall give 
as examples, in the verbs peccdre, and pagdre. 

Peccdre, to sin : present, pecc-o, pecc-hi (and not 
peccij,pecc-a, pecc-hidmo, pecc-dte, pecc-ano, I sin &c. 

Future, pecc-herb, I shall sin ; pecc-herdi, pecc-herh, 
pecc-heremo, pecc-herete, pecc-herdnno, and not pecc-erb, 
pecc-erdi, &c. 

Imperative, pecc-a, pecc-hi; pecc-hidmo, pecc-dte, 
pecc-hino, sin thou, let him sin, &c. 

Optative, che pecc-hi, pecc-hi, pecc-hi; pecc-hidmo, 
pecc-hidte, pecc-hino, that I may sin, &c. 

Pecc-herei, I should sin; pecc-heresti, pecc-herebbe, 
pecc-heremmo, pecc-hereste, pecc-herebbero, 

Pagdre, to pay, present, pdg-o, pdg-hi, pdg-a ; pagh- 
idmo, pag-dte, pdg-ano, I pay, &c. 

Future, pag-hero, pag-herdi, pag-herd ; pag-heremo, 
pag-herete, pag-herdnno, I shall or will pay, &c. 

Imperative, pdg-a, pdg-hi; pag-hidmo, pag-dte, 
pdg-hino, pay thou, let him pay, &c. 

Optative, 



VERBS. 93 

Optative, che pdg-hi, pag-hi, pdg-hi ; pag-hidmo, 
pag-hidte, pdg-hino, that I may pay, &c. 

The second preterimperfect, pag-herei, pag-heresti, 
pag-herSbbe ; pag-heremmo t pag-hereste, pag-herebbero y 
&c. that I should pay, &c. 

The other tenses are conjugated like amdre. 

Conjugation of the verbs passive. 

Before we proceed to the second conjugation, it is 
necessary to know, that the verbs passive are merely 
the participles of verbs active, conjugated with the 
verb essere : example, 

Conjugation of the verb passive, essere amato, to be loved. 



INDICATIVE, 

Present. 

I am loved, souo am-dto. 

Thou art loved, sei am-dto. 

He is loved, e am-dto. 

We are loved, sidmo am-dti. 

You are loved, siite am-dti. 

They are loved, sono am-dti. 

Preterimperfect. 

I was loved, era or ero am-dto. 

Thou wert loved, eri am-dto 

He was loved, era am-dto. 

We were loved, # eravdmo am>dti. 

You were loved, eravdte am-dti. 

They were loved, erano am-dti. 

Preterperfect Definite. 
I was loved, fui am-dto. 

Thou wert loved, Josti am-dto. 

He was loved, fit am-dto. 

We were loved, fummo am-dti. 

You were loved, foste am-dti. 

They were loved, furono am-dti. 

Preter- 



94 VERBS. 

PRETERPERFECT. 

I have been loved, sono stdto am-dto. 

Thou hadst been loved, ski stdto am-dto. 

He has been loved, e stdto am-dto. 

We have been loved, sidmo stdti am-dti. 

You have been loved, siete stdti am-dti. 

They have been loved, sono stati am-dti. 

Preterpluperfect. 

I had been loved, era stdto am-dto. 

Thou hadst been loved, eri stdto am-dto. 

He had been loved, era stdto am-dto. 

We had been loved, eravdmo stdti am-dti. 

You had been loved, eravdte stdti am-dti. 

They had been loved, krano stdti am-dti. 

Puture. 

I shall or will be loved, sarb am-dto. 

Thou shall be loved, sardi am-dto. 

He shall be loved, sara am-dto. 

We shall be loved, saremo am-dti. 

You shall be loved, sarete am-dti. 

They shall be loved, sardnno am-dti. 

I shall proceed no farther with the conjugation, be- 
cause it is merely a repetition of the verb sono 9 joined 
to the participle, am-dto. 

\* Observe, that the participles and adjectives 
change their gender and number after the tenses of the 
verb essere, examples, 



j I , tsonoam-dto, for the masculine") • i 
' \sono am-dta, for the feminine j b ° 

c *? plural. 



ttr , i S siamo am-dti, for the masc, 

We are loved, I ., ,. ' ~ . c 

7 / siamo am-ate, tor the rem, 



"■ siete dotto, 



\ -'4. j'-u £ for the singular. 

•v i j ; siete dotta, \ 

You are learned, < .,, 
: j sielt 

( siett 

Observe, that in the construction of the passive, the 

Italians make use of da or dal, and per (by), which 

answer 



\ siete dotti, 7 c *i i i 
! net? dotte \ for the P lufaL 



VERBS. 



95 



answer to the French du and par ; with this difference, 
that the French use du, when the verb expresses an 
operation of the mind, and par, when it expresses an 
operation of the body, or of the mind and body: 
whereas the Italians always put da or dal: thus they 
say, Pietro e amdto dal principe, and not per il prin- 
cipe ; which French learners are apt to confound. 
N. B. Dal signifies, by the; and per il, for the. 



Second Conjugation of the Verbs in ere. 



I believe, 
Thou believest, 
He believes, 
We believe, 
You believe, 
They believe, 



INDICATIVE. 

Present. 

cred-o. 
cred-i. 
cred-e. 
cred-i dmo. 
cred-ete. 
cred-ono. 
Preterimperfect. 



I did believe, 
Thou didst believe, 
He did believe, 
We did believe, 
You did believe, 
They did believe, 



cred-eva, 

cred-evi. 

cred-eva. 

cred-evdmo. 

cred-evate. 

cred-evano. 



Preterperfect Definite. 



I believed, 
Thou believedst, 
He believed, 
We believed, 
You believed, 
They believed, 



cred-ei. 
cred-esti. 
crede. 
cred-e mmo, 
cred-este. 
cred-ercmo. 
Preterperfect. 



I have believed, 
Thou hast believed, 
He has believed, 
We have believed, 
You have believed, 
They have believed, 



ho cred-uto. 
hdi cred-uto. 
ha cred-uto. 
abbidmo cred-uto. 
avete cred-uto. 
hdnno cred-uto, 

Preterplu- 



96 



VERBS. 



Preterpluperfect. 



I had believed, 
Thou hadst believed, 
He had believed, 
We had believed, 
You had believed, 
They had believed, 

I shall or will believe, 
Thou shalt believe, 
He shall believe, 
We shall believe, 
You shall believe, 
They shall believe, 



aveva cred-uto. 
avevi cred-uto. 
aveva cred-uto. 
avevdmo cred-uto 
avevdte cred-uto. 
avevano cred-uto. 



Future. 



cred-ero. 

cred-erdi. 

cred-era. 

cred-eremo . 

cred-erete. 

cred-erdnno. 



IMPERATIVE. 

Believe thou, cred-i. 

Let him believe, cred-a. 

Let us believe, cred-idmo. 

Believe you, cred-ele. 

Let them believe, cred-ano. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Present. 



That I may believe, 

Thou mayest believe, 
He may believe, 
We may believe, 
You may believe, 
They may believe, 



cKio crcd-a. 
eke tu cred-a. 
ch'egli cred-a. 
che cred-idmo 
che cred-idte. 
che cred-ano. 



Preterimperfect. 



That I might or could believe, 
Thou mightest believe, 
He might believe, 
We might believe, 
You might believe, 
They might believe, 



che cred-essi. 
che tu cred-essi. 
che cred-esse. 
che cred-essimo. 
che cred-este. 
che cred-essero. 



VERBS. 97 



Second Preterimperfect, 

I should believe, cred-erei. 

Thou shouldst believe, cred-eresti. 

He should believe, cred-erebhe. 

We should believe, cred-eremmo. 

You should believe, cred-eresie. 

They should believe, cred-erebbero. 

Preterperfect. 

That I have believed, chHo abbia cred-uto. 

Thou hast believed, che tu abbi cred-uto. 

He has believed, ciiegli abbia cred-uto. 

We have believed, che abbidmo cred-uto, 

You have believed, che obbiate cred-zito, 

They have believed, che ubbiano cred-uto. 

Preterpluperfect. 

If I had believed, se io avessl cred-uto. 

Thou hadst believed, se tu avessi cred-uto. 

He had believed, se avcsse cred-uto. 

We had believed, se ovessimo cred-uto. 

You had believed, se aveste cred-uto. 

They had believed, se avessero cred-uto. 

Second Preterpluperfect. 

I should have believed, avrei cred-uto. 

Thou shouldst have believed, avresti cred-uto. 
He should have believed, avrebbe cred-uto. 
We should have believed, avremmo cred-uto. 
You should have believed, avresle cred-uto. 
They should have believed, avrebbero cred-uto. 



Future. 




When I shall have believed, 
Thou shalt have believed, 
He shall have believed, 
We shall have believed, 
You shall have believed, 
They shall have believed, 


qua) 


id' avrb cred-uto. 
avrai cred-uto. 
avrei cred-uto. 
avremo cred-uto. 
avrete cred- (do. 
avrunno cred-uto. 


F 




INFINITIVE 



98 VERBS. 

INFINITIVE. 
To believe, credere. 

Gerund. 
Believing, or in believing, cr,ed-endo, col cred-ere, &c. 

Participle. 
Believed, cred-uto, masc. Believed, cred-uta, fern. 

Conjugate in like manner the following verbs, which 
are the only verbs in ere that follow the rule of cred~ere. 

%* Note, that all the regular verbs in ere have two 
terminations in the preterperfect definite, as they make 

ei 3 esii, c ; etnmo, este, erono, 

or, 

etti, esii, ette ; emmo, este, ettero. 

Infinitive. Preterp. Def. Participle. 



To 



beat, 


battere, 


ei 




uto-. 


drink, 


bevere or bere ei 


or etti 


uto. 


yield, 


cedere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


cleave, 


fender e 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


fret, 


Jremere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


groan, 


gemere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


enjoy, 


godere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


reap, 


mietere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


feed, 


pdscere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


hang, 


pendere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


retch, 


recere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


receive, 


ricevere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


shine again 


, rilucere 


ei without a participle 


sit down, 


sedere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


shine, 


splendere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


glide, 


serpere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


creak, 


stridere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


fear, 


tern ere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 


sell, 


vendere 


ei 


etti 


uto. 



All 



VERBS. 99 

All the other verbs in ere are irregular. 

The regular verbs end with two vowels in the pre- 
terperfect definite : as am-ai, cred~ei t sent-ii. 

AH the regular verbs, in the same tense, end with the 
vowel i ; and this vowel i is preceded by a consonant; 
as, ebbi, credetti, scrissi. Thus credere, which makes 
credei and credetti, is both regular and irregular. 

You will find, in the chapter of the irregular verbs 
in ere short (p. 124) a very easy method of learning 
the irregularity of the verbs, which I have reduced ta 
one general rule. 



Third Conjugation of the Verbs in ire. 





INDICATIVE. 




Present. 


I hear, 


sent-o. 


Thou hearest, 


sent-i. 


He hears, 


sent-e. 


We hear, 


sent-i dmo. 


You hear, 


sent-ite. 


They hear, 


sent-ono. 




Preterimperfect. 


I did hear, 


sent-iva. 


Thou didst hear, 


sent-ivi. 


He did hear, 


sent-iva. 


We did hear, 


sent-ivdmo. 


You did hear, 


sent -iv ate. 


They did hear, 


senUvoano. 



Preterperfect Definite. 

I heard, sent-ii. 
Thou heardst, sent-isti. 

He heard, sent-i. 

We heard, sent-immo. 

You heard, seni-iste. 

They heard, sent-irono. 

i 2 Preter- 



100 



VERBS. 



Preterperfect. 

1 have heard, ho sent-ito. 

Thou hast heard. Mi sent-ito. 

He has heard, ha sent-ito. 

"We have heard, abbidmo sent-ito. 

You have heard, avete sent-ito. 



They have heard, 


hanno sent-ito. 


Preterpluperfect. 


I had heard, 


aveva sent-ito. 


Thou hadst heard, 


avevi sent-ito. 


He had heard, 


aveva sent-ito. 


We had heard, 


- avevdmo sent-Uo 


You had heard, 


avevdtc sent-ito. 


They had heard, 


avevdno sent-ito. 




Future. 


I shall or will hear^ 


sent-iro. 


Thou shalt hear, 


sent-irdi. 


He shall hear, 


sent-ira. 


We shall hear, 


sent-iremo. 


You shall hear, 


sent-irete. 


They shall hear, 


sent-iranno. 




IMPERATIVE. 


Hear thou, 


sent-i. 


!Let him hear, 


sent-a. 


X.et us hear, 


sent-idmq. 


Hear you, 


sent -it e. 


Let them hear, 


sent-ano. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 



That I may hear, 

Thou mayest hear, 
He may hear, 
We may hear, 
You may hear, 
They may hear, 



ctiio sent-a. 
che tn sent-a. 
ch 1 egli sent-a. 
che sent-idmo. 
che sent-ifite. 
che sent-ano. 



Preteriao. 



VERBS. 



101 



Preterimperfect. 



That I could or might hear, 
Thou mightest hear, 
He might hear, 
We might hear, 
You might hear, 
They might hear, 



che sent-issi. 
che tu sent-issi. 
che sent-isse. 
che sent-issimo. 
che sent- isle, 
che sent-issero. 



Second Preterimperfect. 



I should hear, 
Thou shouldst hear, 
He should hear, 
We should hear, 
You should hear, 
They should hear, 



sent-irbi. 

sent-iresti. 

sent-irebhe. 

scnt-iremmo. 

sent-ireste. 

sent-irebbero. 



Preterimperfect. 



That I have heard, 

Thou hast heard, 
He has heard, 
We have heard, 
You have heard, 
They have heard, 



ctfio abbia sent-ito. 
che dbbi sent-ito. 
che cgli dbbia sent- ito, 
che abbidmo sent-ito. 
che abbidte sent-ito. 
che dbbiano sent-ito* 



Preterpluperfect. 



If I had heard, 
Thou hadst heard, 
He had heard, 
We had heard, 
You had heard, 
They had heard, 



se io avessi sent-ito. 
se tu avessi sent-ito. 
se avesse sent-ito. 
se avessimo sent-ito. 
se aveste sent-ito. 
se avessero sent-ito* 



Second Preterpluperfect. 

If I should have heard, avrei sent-ito. 

Thou shouldst have heard, avresti sent-ito. 
He should have heard, avrebbe sent-ito. 
We should have heard, avremmo sent-ito. 
You should have heard, ameste sent-ito. 
They should have heard, avrebbero sent-ito. 



Future, 



102 



VERBS. 



Future. 



When I shall have heard, 
Thou shalt have heard, 
He shall have heard, 
We shall have heard, 
You shall have heard, 
They shall have heard, 



quand' avrb sent-ito. 
avrdi sent-ito. 
avra sent-ito. 
avrcmo sent-ito. 
avrete sent-ito, 
avrdnno sent-ito. 



INFINITIVE. 

To hear, or to feel, sent-ire. Participle, heard, 
sent-ito. Gerund, in hearing, sent-endo. 

Conjugate in the same manner the following verbs, 
which are the only verbs in ire, that conform to the 
rule of sent-ire. 



To 



Infinitive. 


Pres. 


Pret. def. 


Particip. 


"open, 


aprire 


dpro 


aprii 


aperto. 


boil, 


bollire 


hollo 


bollii 


bolliio. 


consent, 


conseniire xonsento consentU 


conseniito. 


convert, 


convertire convertoconvertii 


convertito. 


cover, 


coprire 


copro 


coprii 


coperto. 


sow, 


cucire 


cucio 


cucii 


cucito. 


sleep, 


dormire 


dor mo 


dormii 


dormito. 


%> 


fuggire 


fuggo 


fnggii 


fuggito. 


lie, 


mentire 


mento 


mentii 


mentito. 


die, 


morire 


vioro 


morii 


morto. 


depart, 


partire 


pctrto 


partii 


partito. 


repent, 


pentirsi 


mipeni 


omipentii 
salii 


pentitosi. 


ascend, 


satire 


sdlgo 


salito. 


follow, 


seguire 


segno 


seguii 


seguito. 


serve, 


servire 


servo 


servii 


servito. 


suffer, 


sojfrire 


soffro 


soffrii 


sqfferto. 


come or 
go out, 
dress, 


> sortire 


sorto 


sortii 


sortito. 


vestire 


vesto 


vestii 


vestito. 


come or 


} 










> uscire 


esco 


USCll 


uscito. 


go out, 


$ 








hear, 


udire 


odo 


udii 


udito. 



All 



VERBS. 103 

All the other verbs in ire are regular in the present 
tense, which they make in isco ; as you will observe in 
the Chapter of Irregulars in ire ; example, 

diger-ire diger-isco diger-ii diger-ito, &c. 

langu-ire langu-isco langu-ii langu-ito^ &c. 

N. B. When you have learned to conjugate these 
five verbs, avere, essere, amdre, credere, sentire, you may 
be said to be master of almost all the rest ; the termina- 
tion of the tenses and persons being the same, especially 
in the irregular verbs ; but in order to be perfect in 
your conjugations, it is not sufficient to know those verbs 
in the order of the tenses, that is, beginning with the 
present indicative, and proceeding to the preterimper- 
fect, as children do; but it is necessary to know each 
tense of the indicative, and optative, &c. b}^ heart. 
Your teacher will instruct you upon this head ; but 
should he not, or if you learn Italian without a master, 
your method must be, to conjugate two or three 
of those verbs, or all five, at the same time. This will 
enable you to learn them with greater ease ; to retain 
them better in your memory, and to express yourself 
more readily. In order to conjugate the two auxiliary 
verbs together, you may, for instance, repeat, 

Ho un cavallo, e ne sono contento. 

1 have a horse, and am satisfied with it. 

And thus you may exercise yourself through every 
tense and person of the whole conjugation. 

With regard to the other three, you will receive much 
benefit, if you conjugate them by other similar verbs. 
For instance, I buy my goods, sell them cheap, and 
serve my friends faithfully ; com pro le mie mercanzie, le 
vendo a buon mercdto, e servo con f delta i miei amid. 
The verb comprdre is conjugated like anidre : vendere, 
like credere ; servire like sentire. If you practise this 
mode of conjugation, you will find that in a very little 
time you will be able to speak and write with great 
ease ; for in the Italian language, they write as they 
speak, and speak as they write ; here however you will 
find a Book of Exercises* highly necessary and useful. 

* See Bottarelli's Exercises, tvilh references to 
the rules of this Grammar. 

Qf 



'-104. VERBS, 

Of the IRREGULAR VERBS in are. 

There are in each conjugation some verbs which do 
not conform to the common rule, and on that account 
are called irregulars. 

There are but four verbs of the first conjugation, 
which in some of the tenses depart from the rule of the 
verb amdre, viz. 

Anddre, dare 9 fdre y stare. 

The verb fare is, properly speaking, an irregular of 
the second conjugation, since it is only the Latin verb 
facere syncopated or abridged. Yet I place it here in 
compliance with the method of other grammarians. 

Observe, that these verbs are irregular ; some in the 
present, some in the preterperfect-derinite, and others 
in the future tense. 

%* Remember also, that when a verb is irregular in 
the present of the indicative, it retains its irregularity 
in the imperative and present of the subjunctive. 

%f Observe farther, that the first and second person 
plural of the present tense are always regular. 



Of the Verb andare. 
The verb andare is irregular only in the present 

tense.* 

INDICATIVE. 
Present. 
I go, vado or vo. 

Thou goest, vdi. 

He goes, va. 

We go, andiamo. 

You go, anddte. 

They go, vdhno. 

Preterimperfect. 

I did go, thou didst go, he did go; we did go, you 
did go, they did go. 

Anddva, ajiddvi, anddva ; andavdmo, andavdte, an- 
ddvano. 

* In the subsequent pages, the tenses which have a star 
are the only irregular ones ; the others are regular. 

Preter- 



VERBS. 105 

Preterperfect Definite. 
I went, thou wentest, he went ; we went, you went, 
they went. 
Anddi, anddsti, ando ; anddmmo, anddste, anddrono. 

Preterperfect. 

I have gone, sono andato. 

Thou hast gone, sei andato. 

He has gone, e andato. 

We have gone, siumo anddti. 

You have gone, siete anddti. 

They have gone, sono anddti. 

If we are to speak in the feminine, we should say, 
sono anddta, sei anddta^ e and at a, sidmo anddte, siUe 
anddte, sono anddte. 

I was gone, thou wast gone, he was gone ; we were 
gone, you were gone, they were gone. 

Preterpluperfect. 

I had gone, thou hadst gone, he had gone ; we had 
gone, you had gone, they had gone. 

Era andato, eri andato, era andato ; eravdmo anddti, 
eravdte anddti, erano anddti. 

Future. 
I shall or will go, thou shalt go, he shall go ; we 
shall go, you shall go, they shall go. 

*Andro, andrdi, andra ; andrhno, andrete, andrdnno* 



IMPERATIVE. 

Go thou, let him go ; let us go, go ye, let them go. 

Va f vdda ; andidmo, anddte, vddano. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 

That I may go, cli io vdda. 

Thou mayest go, die tu vdda. 

He may go, cli egli vdda. 

We may go, che andidmo. 

You may go, die andidte. 

They may go, che vadano. 

f 5 Preter- 



106 VERBS. 

Preterperfect. 

That I might or could go, thou mightest go, he 
might go ; we might go, you might go, they might go. 

Che anddssi, anddssi, anddsse ; anddssinw, anddste, 
andassero. 

Second Preterimperfect. 

I should go, thou shouldst go, he should go; we 
should go, you should go, they should go. 

* Andrei^ andresti, andrebbe ; andremmo, andreste, 
andrebbero. 

Preterp. That I have gone, die sia andato. 

Preterpl. If I had gone, sejossi andato. 

Future. When I shall be gone, qudndo sa% andato. 



INFINITIVE. 

To go, anddre. Participle, gone, andato. Gerund, 
in going, anddndo. 

* 4 * Note, that the preposition a or ad, must be put 
after the verb anddre, and all the other verbs of motion, 
when they precede an infinitive : example, 

Let us go and see, andiamo a vedere. 

Go to supper, anddte a cenare. 

You shall go, and expect me, andrete ad aspettdrmi. 

Let us send to tell, mandidmo a dire. 

The French are frequently mistaken in this respect, 
because they are accustomed to put the infinitive, with- 
out a preposition after the verbs of motion. 



Of the Verb dare. 

DA'RE is irregular only in the present and preter- 
perfect definite. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. 
* I give, thou givest, he gives; we give, you give, 
they give : do, ddi, da ; didmo, ddte, ddnno. 

Preterimperf. I did give, thou didst give, he did 
give ; we did give, you did give, they did give : ddva, 
ddvi, ddva ; davamo, davate, ddvano. 

Preter- 



VERBS. 



107 



Preterperfect Definite. 

* I gave, diedi, or detti. 
Thou gavest, desti, 

He gave, diede, or dette, die 

We gave, demmo, 

You gave, deste, 

They gave, diedero, or dettero. 

The poets use dier, dieron and dierono, instead of 
diedero. 

Perfect comp. I have given, ho ddto. 

Preterplup. I had given, aveva ddto. 

* Future. I shall give, daro. 



IMPERATIVE. 



* Give thou, let him give ; let us give, give you, 
them give : da , dia ; didmo, date, diano. 



let 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 

* Present. That I may give, &c. che dia, eke tu 
; dia, cli egli dia ; che diamo, che diate, che diano. 

* Preterimp. That I might give, that thou mightest 
give, that he might giv^, &c. che dessi, tu dessi, desse ; 
dessimo, deste, dessero. 

* Second Imperf. I should give, &c. darei, daresti, 
darebbe, daremmo, dareste, darebbero. 



INFINITIVE. 



Present, 
Gerund, 
Participle, 



To give, 
In giving 
given, 



dare. 

dando. 

ddto. 



Of 



108 VERBS. 

Of the Verb fare. 
FA' RE, formerly facere, has its irregularity in the 
present, and the preterperfect definite ; and requires 
the t to be doubled in the participle. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. 

* I do, thou dost, he does ; we do 9 you do, they do ; 
fo,fdi,fa ; faccidmo,fdte,fdnno. 

Freterimp. I did, &c.faceva,facevi,faceva, &c. 
Preter-def. I did, thou didst, he did; we did, 
* you did, they did : feci, facesti, fece ; facemmo, 
faceste,fecero. 

Preterp. I have done, hofdtto, 
Preterplup. I had done, avevafatto. 

* Future. I shall do,&cfarb,fardi,fara;faremo t 
fareie,fardnno. 

IMPERATIVE. 

* Do thou, let him do ; let us do, do you, let them 

do : fa, faccia ; faccidmo,fate,fdcciano. 



OPTATIVE. 

Present. 

* That I may do, or that I do, thou mayest do, he 
may do ; we may do, you may do, they may do ; die 

faccia, eke tu faccia , ch' egli faccia ; die faccidmo, die 

faccidte, chefdeciano. 

Preterimp. That I may do, thou mightest do, he 
might do ; we might do, you might do, they might 
* do : die facessi, facessi, facesse ; facessimo, faceste, 

facessero. 

* Second Imp. I should do, thou shouldst do, he 
should do; we shoulddo, you should do, theyshould do: 

farci,faresti,farebbe ; faremmo,fareste,farebbero. 



INFINITIVE. 

* To do, fare. Gerund, in doing, facendo. Parti- 
ciple, done,j^0. 

Of 



VERBS. 109 

Of the Verb stare. 

ST A' RE signifies to be, to dwell, to stand, to stay ; 
it is irregular in the present and preterperfect definite. 

INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

*I stand, or I am, sto ; thou standest, stdi ; he 
stands, sta ; stidmo, state, stdnno. 
Imperf. I did stand, &c. stdva. 

* Preter-def. I stood, thou stoodest, he stood, &c. 
stettiy stesti, st.ette ; stemmo, steste, stettero. 

Preterp. I have stood, &c. sono stdto. 
Preterpl. I had stood, &c. era stdto. 

* Future. I shall or will stand, &c. starb, stardi, 
stara, staremo, starete, stardnno. 



IMPERATIVE. 

* Stand thou, sta; let him stand, stia ; let us stand, 
stidmo; stand you, stdte ; let them stand, stiano, or 
stieno. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 
That I may stand, thou mayest stand, he may stand, 
&c. ck' ia stia, che tu stia, ck y egli stia ; che stidmo, eke 
stiate, che stidno, or stieno. 

* Imperfect. That I might or could stand, che stessi ; 
thou mightest stand, che tu stessi ; he might stand, che 
stesse ; we might stand, che stessimo ; you might stand, 
che steste ; they might stand, che stessero. 

* Second Preterimp. I should stand, thou shouldst 
stand, he should stand, &c. starei, staresti, starebbe ; 
staremmo, starcste, starebbero. 



INFINITIVE. 

To stand, stare. Gerund, standing, stando. Parti- 
ciple, stood or been, stdto. 

Observations 



110 VERBS. 

Observations on the four Irregular Verbs. 
ANDARE, DARE, FARE, STARE. 

These four verbs form the second person of the 
present tense in ai ; as, vdi, ddi,fdi, sidi ; and the third 
person plural in anno, and not in ana, like the regulars : 
example, vdnno, ddnno, fdnno, stdnno / the regular 
verbs make it in dno ; as, dmano, cdntano, pdrlano, &c. 

The future indicative does not terminate in erb, but 
in aro; we must therefore &?t.y,farb 9 darb, starb; except 
the verb anddre, which makes andro. Observe, never- 
theless, that the verb stdre and dare become regular, 
when they are compounded; as, accostdre, sovrastdre, 
seconddre, comand&re. We say in the second person 
of the present tense, accosti, sovrdsti, secondly comdndi r 
and not accosldi, sovrastdi, seconddi, comanddi, this 
being the first person singular of the preterperfect de- 
finite of those verbs. In a word, they follow the rule 
of the regular verbs through all its tenses. The same 
cannot be said of the verb fdre, which continues its 
irregularity, though compounded ; therefore we must 
say, difo, disfaccidmo, disfeci, disfacesti, &c. 

The regular verbs in are -make their subjunctive in 
i; as, ami, par li, canti,sdlti. The four irregulars form 
theirs in a ; as, vdda, dia,fdccia, stia. 

Dare and stdre make the preterimperfect subjunctive 
dessi and sthsi, and not ddssi and sidssi. 

In the second preterimperfect they make andrti? 
darUfarei, starei. 

Note, the verb dare is conjugated like the verb 
stdre, only by changing the st into d; do, sto, ddva, 
stdva, &c. 



Of the Irregular Verbs w ere. 
There are two sorts of verbs in ere, one of which 
has the penultima, or the last syllable but one, long; as ? 
Cadere, dovere, sapere, volere. 
The other the penultima short; a?, 
Credere, ledger e, scrivere, perdere. 

There 



VERBS. 



Ill 



There are no more than twenty-two verbs which 
have the infinitives in ere long, viz. 

Infinitive. Pres. Pret. def. Part. 

115 Cadere To fall, cddo, caddi, caduto. 



1 , J cal'ere - care for, 
\ caper e - contain. 


a verb im 


personal. 










116 dovere - owe, 


devo, 


dovei, 


dovuto. 


117 dolersi - grieve, 


mi dolgo, mi dolsi 


, dolutosi. 


118 giacere - lie down, 


gidecio, 


gidequi, 


giacciuto* 


* godere - enjoy, 


godo, 


godei, 


goduto. 


76 avere - have, 


ho, 


ebbi, 


avuto. 


120 parere - appear, 


pajo, 


pdrvi, 


pariito. 


119 piacere- please 


pidecio, 


pidequi, 


piaciuto. 


121 persuader e t . persuade 


, persuddo 


,persudsi, 


persudso. 


113 poiere - be able, 


posso, 


potei, 


potuto. 


121 rimanere remain, 


rim an go 


, rim a si, 


rimdso. 


112 sapere - know, 


so, 


seppi, 
sedei, 


sdputo. 
seduto. 


* seder e - sit 


sedo, 


122 solere . be accustomed sovlio, 


solei, 


soiito. 






very 


little used. 


119 tacere - be silent, 


taccio, 


tdequi, 


tacciuto. 


122 tenere - hold, 


tcngo, 


ten.ni, 


teniito. 


* iemere - fear 


temo, 


temei, 


temuto. 


123 valere - be worth, 


vdglio, 


valsi, 


valuto. 


123 vedere - see, 


vedo, 


vidi, 


yeduto. 


114> volere - be willing, 


vdglio, 


vulli, 


voluto. 



* The three verbs marked with a star are regular ; 
the figures in the margin refer to the pages in which 
the other verbs are found conjugated at full length. 

The compounds of these verbs make ere long also; 
as, ricadere, riavere,&c. 

Of these twenty-two verbs, there are but three re- 
gular, viz. godere, sedere, and temere ; and they are 
conjugated like credere. 

Of the other verbs which make their infinitive in ere 
long, some are irregular in the present, others in the 
preter-definite and future, and some in the participle. 

The conjugation of the verb avere has been given 
already ; calere and caper e are little in use* 

Conjugation 



112 VERBS. 

Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs in ere, long, 
I begin with sapere, potere, and volere, because they 
i requently occur in discourse. 

SAPE'RE, to knoio. 

* Present, So, sdi, sa ; sappidmo, sap'ete, sdnno : I 
know, thou knowest, he knows ; we know, you know, 
they know. 

Imper. Sapeva, sapevi, sapeva ; sapevdmo, sapevdte t 
sapevano : I did know, thou didst know, he did know; 
we did know, 3 t ou did know, they did know. 

* Preter-def. Seppi, sapesti, seppe : sapemmo, sa- 
peste, seppero : I knew, thou knewest, he knew ; we 
knew, you knew, they knew. 

Preterperfect. Ho saputo, haisaputo, ha saputo, &c. 

* Future. Saprb, saprdi, sapra ; sapremo, saprete, 
saprdnno : I shall know, thou shalt know, he shall 
know ; we shall know, you shall know, they shall know, 



IMPERATIVE. 

* Sdppi, sdppia ; sappidmo, sappiate, sdppiano ; know 
thou, let him know; let us know, know you, let them 
know. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 

* Che sdppia, sdppia, sdppia ; sappidmo, sappiate, 
sdppiano : that I may know, thou mayestknow, he may 
know; we may know, you may know, they may know. 

* Imperfect. Che sapessi, sapessi, sapesse ; sapessimo, 
sapeste, sapessero : that I might know, thou mightest 
know, they might know. 

* Second Imp. Saprei, sapresti, saprebbe ; sapremmo, 
sapreste, saprebbero : I should or would know, thou 
shouldst know, he shouldst know ; we should know, you 
should know, they should know. 



INFINITIVE. 

Sapere, to know. Gerund, Sapcndo, knowing. Par- 
ticiple, Saputo, known. 

POTE'RE, 



VERBS. 113 

POTE'RE, to be able. 
INDICATIVE. 

* Present. Posso, puoi, pub ; possidmo, potete, pos- 
sono : I can or am able, thou canst, he can ; we can, 
you can, they can. 

Imperf. Poteva> potevi, &c. I could, &c. 

Pret. def. Potei, potesii, pote ; potemmo, poteste, 
poterono ; I could, thou couldst, he could ; we could, 
you could, they could. 

Preterp. Ho potuto, I have been able. 

* Future. Putrb, I shall be able. 
There is no imperative. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 

* Che possa, possa, possa ; possidmo, possidte, pos- 
sano : that I may be able, thou mayst be able, he may 
be able ; we may be able, you may be able, they may 
be able. 

Imp. Che pattern, potessi, potSsse ; potessimo, po- 
teste, potessero : that I might be able ; thou mi gilt est be 
able, he might be able ; we might be able, you might 
be able, they might be able. 

* Second Imp. Potrei, pot r est i, potrebbe, &c. 

N. B. In conjugating the verb potere, to be able, 
we do not say in the future poterbt and in the second 
preterimperfect^ofem; because poterb and poterei are 
the future and second preterimperfect of the verb po- 
tdre, to prune. 

The vowel e is frequently dropt between a mute, and 
a liquid consonant : thus, instead of caderei, saperei, 
cedero, we say, cadrei, saprei % cedrb : this, however, 
is only used when the e is short; but we never say 
madra for madera, anacorta for anacoreta, &c. 



INFINITIVE. 

Potkre. Gerund, Potaido. Participle, Potuto. 

VOLE'RE 



in VERBS. 

VOLE'RE, to be billing. 

*' Present. Voglio, vuoi, vuole ; vogliamo, volete, vo- 
gliono : I will or am willing, thou art willing, he is wil- 
ling ; we are willing, you are willing, they are willing. 

Imperf". Voleva, volevi, voleva ; volevamo, volevdte^ 
volevano: I was willing, thou wast willing, &c. 

* t^t Preter-def. Volli, volesti, voile ; volemmo, 
voleste, vbllero : I was willing, thou wast willing, &c. 

Preterperf. Ho voluto, I have been willing, &c. 

* Future. Vorrb, vorrdi, vorrd ; vorremo, vorrete, 
vorranno : I shall be willing, thou shalt be willing, he 
shall be willing, we shall be willing, &c. 

It has no imperative. 



OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 

* Che voorlia, voglia, voglia ; vogliamo, voglidte, vo- 
gliano : that I may be willing, thou mayst be willing, 
he may be willing ; we may be willing, you may be 
willing, they may be willing. 

Imperf. Volessi, volessi, volesse ; volessimo, voleste, 
volessero: that I were willing, thou wert willing, he 
were willing ; we were willing, you were willing, they 
were willing. 

i * Second Imp. Vorrei, vorresti, vorrebbe ; vorremmo, 
vorreste, vorrebbero* I should or would be willing,, 
thou shouldest or wouldest be willing, &c. 



Volere. Gerund, Volendo. Participle, Voluto. 



Remarks on the Verbs terminating in ere long. 
%* 1. Remember that volere makes in the preterper- 
fect definite, volli, volesti, voile ; volemmo, voleste, vol' 
lero ; and not volsi, voleste, volse ; volemmo, voleste, 
volsero ; because vUsi, volse, volsero, comes from the 
verb vblgere, to turn. Yet we £nd volsi, volse, and 
volsero, in several authors, which can only be consi- 
dered as a poetical licence. 

* # * Observe, 



VERBS. 11-5" 

*3* Observe, that it is sometimes an elegance to 
use the verb volere, instead of dovere. For instance, 
ma cio rion si vuol con tiltri ragiondre, for non si deve, 
ought not. 

2. The verbs terminated in the infinitive in lere, as 
volere, dolere, solere, valere, and their compounds, have 
&g before the letter /. in the first person singular; in 
the first and third plural, and in all the persons of the 
present subjunctive; in the present, as, 

Voglio, vuoi, vuole ; voglidmo, volete, vogliono. 
Ddglio, duoli, duole ; doglidmo, dolete, dogliono. 
Soglio, s\wli, suole ; soglidmo, solete, sogliono. 
Vdglio, vdli, vdle ; vaglidmo 9 valete, vdgliono. 

3. The verbs terminated in the infinitive in nere and 
rare ; as, rimdnere, tenure, ventre, have also a g in the 
first person singular, and in the third plural ; but not 
in the first person plural; as, 

Tengo, tietii, tiene ; tenidmo, tenete, tengono. 
JRimdngo, rimdni, rimdne ; rimanidmo, rimanete, ri- 

mdngono. 
Vhigo, vieni, viene ; veniamo, ven'itG, vengono. 

They have also a g in the first, second, and third 
person of the present subjunctive in the singular, and 
in the third of the plural. 

4. All the verbs ending in lere, nere, nire, require 
double r in the future, and in the second imperfect 
tenses. 



samples. 


Volere, 
Ten ere, 


voglio, 
tengo, 


vorrb, 
terrb, 


vorrei. 
terreL 


And not 


Venire, 
Volerb, 


vengo, 
tenerb, 


verro, 
venirb, 


verrei. 



* # * Except Ji m 'r e, punire, svellere, to root up ; which 
follow the common rule, and make Jinirb, punirb, svel- 
lerb j and in the present, j£«foco, piiuisco, svello. 

CADE'RE, to fall. 

Cddo, cadi, cade; cadiamo, cadete, cddono : I fall, 
thou fallest, he falls : we fall, you fall, they fall. 

Imperf. 



316 VERBS. 

Imperf. Cadeva, cadevi, cadeva; cadevdmo, cade- 
vdte, cadevdno : I did fall, &c. 

* Preter-def. Cdddi, cadesti, eddde ; cademmo, ca- 
deste, edddero : I fell, thou didst fall, he fell ; we fell, 
you fell, they fell. 

Preterf. Sono caduto, sei caduto, e caduto ; sidmo, 
caduti, siete caduti, sono caduti : I have or am fallen, 
thou hast or art fallen, &c. 

Preterpl. Era caduto, eri caduto, era caduto ; era- 
vdmo caduti, eravdte caduti, erano cadiiti : I had or I 
was fallen, thou hadst or wast fallen, &c. 

Future. Caderb, caderai, cadera- ; caderemo, cade- 
rete, caderdnno or cadrb, &c. I shall fall, thou shalt 
fall, he shall fall, &c. 

Imperative. Cadi, fall thou ; edda, let him fall ; ca- 
didmo, let us fall ; cadete, fall you ; eddano, let them 
fall. 

Optative. Che edda, edda, cada; cadidmo, cadidte, 
eddano : that I may fall, that thou mayst fall, &c. 

Imperf. Cadessi, cadfosi, cadesse ; cadessimo, cadeste, 
cadessero ; that I might fall, thou mightest fall, &c. 

Second Imperf. Caderei, caderesii, or cadrei, &c. 
I should fall. 

Infinitive. Cadere. Gerund, cadendo. Participle, 
caduto. 

DOVE'itE, to owe. 

Dover e is conjugated through all its tenses like cre- 
dere. It is irregular only in the present, by putting an 
e for an o ; % devo, devi, deve ; dobbidmo, dovete, devono, 
and debbono : I owe, thou owest, he owes ; we owe, 
you owe, they owe. 

Imperf. Doveva, dovevi, &c. I did owe, &c. 

Preter-def. Dovetti, dovesti, dovette ; dovem?no 9 do- 
veste t dovettero : I owe, &c. 

Preterpl. Ho dovuto, hai dovuto, ha dovuto : I have 
owed, &c. 

* Future. Dovrb, dovrdi, dovra, I shall or will owe, 
&c. 

* Imperative. Devi, debba, dobbidmo, dobbidte, 
debbano : owe thou, let him owe ; let us owe, owe you, 
let them owe. 

* Optative 



VERBS. 117 

9 Optative and Subjunctive. Che debba, debba, 
debba; dobbidno, dobbidtc, debbano : that I may owe, 
thou mayest owe, he may owe, &c. 

Imperf. Dovessi, that I may owe, &c. 

* Second Imp. Dovrei, dovresti, dovrebbe ; dovrem- 
mo, dovreste, dovrebbero : I should owe, &c. 

Infinitive. Dovere. Gerund, dovendo. Part, dovuto, 

DOLE'RSI, to grieve, to complain. 

Dolersi is a reciprocal verb, conjugated with the 
pronouns conjunctive, mi, ti, si, in the singular num- 
ber, and with ci, vi, si, in the plural. 

All verbs having the particle si after the infinitive, 
must be conjugated like dolere ; as, pentirsi, to repent ; 
ricordarsi, to remember, &c. 

INDICATIVE. 

* I grieve, to mi dolgO) or doglio. 
Thou grievest, tu ti duoii. 

He grieves, cgli si duole. 

We grieve, noi ci dogliamo. 

You grieve, voi vi dolete, 

They grieve, eglinosidolgono,ox dogliono 

Imper. Mi doleva, ti dolevi, si doleva, ci dolevamo, 
vi dolevdte, si dolevano ; I did grieve. 

Preter Definite. 

* I grieved, mi dolsi. 
Thou grievedst, ti dole&ii. 
He grieved, si dolse. 
We grieved, ci dolemmo. 
You grieved, vi doleste. 
They grieved, si dolsero. 

Preterperf. Mi sono dolido, I have grieved, &c. 
Preter pi uperf. Mi era dolido, I had grieved, &c. 

* Future. Mi dorro, ti dorrai, sidorra ; cidorremo, 
vi dorrete, si dorrdnno ; I shall grieve, &c. 



* Duoliti, grieve thou, dolgasi, let him grieve, doglid- 
mod, doletevi, dolgansi, let us grieve, &c. 

OPTATIVE 



118 VERBS. 

OPTATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE. 

* Present. Che mi dolga, ii dolga, si dolga, or do- 
glia ; ci dogliamo> vi doglidte, si dblgano ; that I may 
grieve, thou mayst grieve, &c. 

Imperf. Che mi dolhsi, that I might grieve, &c. 

* Second Imperf. Mi dorrei, I should or would 
grieve, &c. 



INFINITIVE. 

Dolersi, to grieve. Gerund, Dolaidosi, grieving. 
Participle, Dolutosi, grieved. 

* # * Remember that dolere signifies also to be ill ; 
and then it is a verb impersonal, having only the third 
person singular; as, 

I have the. headach, mi duole la testa. 

Thou hadst the headach, ti duole la testa. 
He has the headach, gli duole la testa. 

-She has the headach, le duole la testa. 

We have the headach, ci duole la testa. 

You have the headach, vi duole la testa. 

They have the headach, duole loro la testa. 

GIACE'RE, PIACE'RE, TACE'RE, to lie down, to 
please, to hold one's tongue. 

These three verbs are conjugated alike. 

%*In the tenses of these three verbs, where there 
are two vowels after the c, the c must be doubled, but 
if there is only one, then there must be but a single c. 

* Indicative. Present tense. Gi dccio , gidci, gidce ; 
giaccidmo, giacete, giacciono ; I lie down, &c. 

Imperf. Giaceva, I did lie down, &c. 

* Preter-def. Gidcqui, giacfoti, gidcque ; giacemmo, 
giaceste, gidcquero : I lay down, &c. 

Preterperf. We do not say, sono stdto giaciuto, I 
have laid down ; but sono stdto a giacere, &c. 
Future. Giacerb, I shall lie down, &c. 

* Imperative. Gidci, gidccia ; giaccidmo, giacete, 
gidcciano ; lie thou down, let him lie down, &c. 

* Optative, 



VERBS. 119 

* Optative and Subjunctive. Che gidccia, gidccia, 
gidccia ; giaccidmo, giaccidie, gidcciano : that I may 
lie down, &c. 

Imperf. Che giacessi, that I might lie down. 

Second Imperf. Giacerei, I should or would lie 
down. 

Infinitive. Giaeere. Gerund, giacendo. Participle, 
slafo a giaeere. 



* PI A CERE. Pidccio, pidci, pidce; piaccidmo, 
placet e t pideciono : I please, thou pleasest, he pleases ; 
we please, you please, they please. 

Imp. Piaceva, vi, va ; vamo, vaie, vano : I did 
please, &c. 

* Preter-def. Pidcqui, piacesti, pideque ; piacemrno, 
piaceste, pidequero : I pleased, thou pleasedst, he 
pleased ; we pleased, you pleased, they pleased. 

Preterperf. Ho piaciuto, &c. I have pleased. 

Future. Piacero, &c. I shall please. 

Imp. Pidci pidecia, piaccidmo ; piacete, pideciano : 
please thou, &c. 

Subjunctive. Che pidecia, a, a; idmo, idte, idno : 
that I may please. 

Imp. Che piacessi, that I might please, &c. 

Second Imperf. Piacerei, I should please. 

Infin. Piacere. Gerund, piacendo. Participle, piac- 
ciuto. 



* TACE'RE. Tdccio, tdci, idee; taccidmo, tacete, 
tdeciono: I hold my tongue, thou holdest thy tongue, 
he holds his tongue ; we hold our tongues, &c. 

Imp. Taceva, vi, va; vdmo, vdte 9 vano: I did hold 
my tongue, thou didst, &c. 

* Preter-def. Tdcqui, tacesti, tdeque ; tacemmo, &c. 
I held my tongue, &c. 

Preterperf. Ho iaciuto, I have held my tongue. 

Future. Tacero, tacerdi, tacera ; tacercmo, tacerete, 
tacerdnno : I shall hold my tongue, &c. 

Imperative. Tdci, Tdccia ; taccidmo, tacete) tdeciano ; 
hold thy tongue, let him hold his tongue, &c. 

* Subjunctive. 



120 VERBS. 

,* Subjunctive. Che taccia, a, a; taccldmo, iaccidte, 
tdcciano ; that I may hold my tongue, &c. 

Imperf. Che tacessi., tacessi, tacisse ; that I might 
hold my tongue, &c. 

Second Imp, Tacerei, taceresti t tacerebbe : I should 
hold my tongue, &c. 

Infinitive. Tacere, to hold one's tongue. Gerund, ta- 
cendo t holding one's tongue, &c. Participle, * tacciuto. 



PARE'RE, to seem. 

* Indicative, Present. Pdjo, pdri, pare; _pajdmo > 
parete, pdjono : I seem or appear, thou seemest, he 
seems ; we seem, &c. 

Imp. Pareva, I did seem, &c. 

*Preter-def. Pdrvi, paresti, pdrve ; paremmo, pa- 
reste, pdrvero : I seemed, &c. 

* Future. Parro,parrdi, parrd ; I shall seem, &c. 

* Imperfect. Pari, pdja ; pajdmo, pareie, pdjano : 
seem thou, let him seem; let us seem, seem you, let 
them seem. 

f # * Remember what has been already remarked, 
that when a verb has any irregularity in the present of 
the indicative, it has the same in the present of the im- 
perative and subjunctive. 

* Optative and subjunctive. Che paja, pdja, pdja ; 
pajdmo, pajaie, pdjano : that I may seem, thou mayest 
seem, he may seem. 

Imp. Che paressi, paressi, sse ; ssimo, ste, ssero : 
that I might seem, &c. 

Second Imp. Parrel, I should or would seem, &c. 

infinitive. Parere, to seem. Gerund, parendo, seem- 
ing. * Participle, parido, seemed. 

Parere, is also an impersonal reciprocal verb, that 
has only the third person singular, when it signifies it 
seems ; as it seems to me, mi pdre, or parmi. 

"to thee, ii pare. 

| to him or her, gli pare, or le pare. 
It seems <^tous, cipare. 

) to you, vi pare, 

v to them, pdre loro, 

Io 



VERBS. 121 

In like manner through all the tenses : it did seem to 
me, mipareva,; it seemed to me\ mi pdrve. 

%* Remember that no more than four verbs in ere 
long, are irregular in the participle ; namely, parere, 
pdrso ; persuadere, persufiso ; rimanire, rimdso ; solere, 
solito ; all the other verbs are regular, making it in uto 
as well as paruto. 



PERSUADE'RE, to persuade. 

Indicative, Present. Persuddo, persuddi, persuade ; 
persuadidmo, persuadete, persuddono : I persuade, &c. 

Imperf. Persuadeva, vi, va ; vdmo, &c. I did per. 
suade, &c. 

* Preter-def. Persudsi, persuadesti, persuase ; per- 
suademmo, persuadeste,persudsero, I persuaded, &c. 

Future. Persuaderb, rai, ra ; remo, rete, rdnno. 

Imperative. Persuddi, a ; idmo, ete, ano : persuade 
thou, &c. 

Optative. Che persuada, a, a ; idmo, idte, ano : that 
I may persuade, &c. 

Imperf. Che persuadessi, that I might persuade. 

Second Imp. Persuaderei I should or would per- 
suade. 

Infinitive. Persuadere, to persuade. Gerund, per- 
suadeado, persuading. * Participle, persudso, per- 
suaded. 



RIMANE'RE, to remain. 

\* Remember the rules of the verbs in lire, nere > 
nzre. 

* Indicative, Present. Ri?ndngo, rimdni, rimdne $ 
rimanidmo, rimanete, rim&ngono : I remain, thou re- 
mainest, &c. 

ImperF. Rimaneva, I did remain. 

* Preter-def. Rimdsi, r'manesti, rimdse ; rhvanhn- 
moi rimanesle, rimdsero : I remained, &c. 

Preterperf. Ho rimdso, or sono rimdso, I have re- 
mained. 

G * Future. 



122 VERBS. 

* Future. Rimarro, rimarrdi, rimarra, I shall re- 
main, &c. 

* Imperative. Rimdni, rimanga ; rimaniamo, rima- 
nete>, rimangano : remain thou, let him remain. 

* Optative. Che rimanga, rimanga, rimanga ; rima- 
niamo, rimanidte, rimdngano : that I may-remain. 

Imperf. Che rimanessi, that I might remain, 

* Second Imp. Rimarrei, rimarresti, I should or 
would remain. 

Infinitive. Rimanere, to remain. Gerund, rimanendo, 
remaining. Participle,* rimdso, remained. 



SOLE'RE, to be wont, or used to, 

* Indicative, Present. Soglio, suoli, suole ; soglidmo, 
solete, sogliono, I am wont, &c. 

Or Sono solito, I am wont ; sii solito, thou art wont ; 
e solito, he is wont ; sidmo soliti, we are wont ; sieie so- 
liti, you are wont; sono soliti, they are wont. 

And in like manner through all the tenses ; as, era 
Solito, I was wont ; non era sotito, I ivas not wont, &c. 

Imp. Soleva, &c. I was accustomed, &c. 

Preterperf-def. Fui solito, &c. 

* Imperative. Suoli, soglia ; soglidmo, solete, so- 
gliano : be thou wont, let him be wont, &c. F 

* Optative and Subjunctive. Che soglia, soglia, sog- 
lia ,• soglidmo, sogliate, sogliano : that I may be wont, 
&c. 

Che solessi, that I might be wont, &c. 

Second Preterimperf. Sarei solito, I should or would 
be wont, &c. 

Infinitive. Solere, to be wont. Gerund, solendo, 
wonted. Participle, solito, wont. Another Gerund, 
essindo solito, being wont. 



TENE'RE, to hold. 

* Indicativej Present. Tengo, tieni,tiene; tenidmo, 
tenete, tengond : I hold, thou holdest, he holds ; we 
Bold, you hold, they hold. 

Imp. 



VERBS. 123 

Imp. Teneva. I did hold. 

* Preter-def. Tenni, tenesti, tenne ; tenemmo, teneste, 
tenner o : I held, thou heldest, he held ; we held, you 
held, they held. 

Preterperf. Ho tenuto, &c. 

a Future. Terro terrdi, terra ; terremo, terrete, ter- 
ranno : I shall hold, thou shalt hold, he shall hold, &c. 

* Imperative. Tieni, tenga ; tenidmo, tenete, tenga- 
no : bold thou, &c. 

* Optative and Subjunctive. Che tenga, tSnga, ten- 
ga; tenidmo, tenidte, tengano: that I may hold, &c. 

Imper. Che ienessi, tenessi, tenesse ; ssimo, ste t 
ssero ; I might hold, thou rnight'st hold, &c. 

* Second Imp. Terrei, terresii, terrebbe ; I should 
or would hold. 

Infinitive. Tenere, to hold. Gerund, tenendo, holding. 
Participle, tenuto, held. 



VALE'RE, to be 'worth. 

* Indicative, Present. Vdglio, vdli, vale ; vaglidmo, 
valete, vdgliono : I am worth, thou art worth, he is 
worth ; we are worth, you are worth, they are worth. 

* Imperf, Valeva t valevi, valeva, &c. I was worth, 
thou wast worth, he was worth, &c. 

* Preter-def. Valsi, valesti, valse ; valemmo, valeste, 
vdlsero : I was worth, thou wast worth, he was worth, 
&c. 

Preterpluperf. Ho valuto. 

* Future. Varro, varrdi, &c. I shall be worth, &c. 
Imperative. Vdli, vdglia ; vaglidmo, &c. be thou 

worth, let him be worth ; let us be worth, &c. 

* Optative. Che vaglia, vdglia, vdglia ; vaglidmo, 
vaglidte, vdgliano : that I may be worth, &c. 

Imperf. Che vaUssi, &c. 
Second Imp. Varrei, &c. 
Infinit. V alive* Gerund, valendo. Participle, valuto. 



VEDE'RE, to see* 
Indicative, Present. Vedo, vedi, vede ; vedidmo, vedete, 



vedono ; 



124 VERBS. 

vedorio : I see, thou seest, he sees ; we see, you see, 
they see. 

Imper. Vedeva, vi, va ; vdmo, vdte, vdno : I did 
see, &c. 

* Preter-def. Vidi, vedesti, vide ; vedemmo, vedeste, 
*mdero ; I saw, thou sawest, he saw ; we saw, you saw, 

,they saw. 

Preterperf. Ho veduto, or vlsto, &c I have seen, &c. 

* Future. Vedrb, rdi, ra ; remo, rete, rdnno s I shall 
see, thou shalt see, he shall see, &c. 

Imperative. Vedi, veda ; vedidmo, vedete, vedano : see 
thou, let him see ; let us see, see you, let them see. 

Optative. Che vegga, vegga, vegga ; vedidmo, vedidte, 
yeggano : that I may see, that thou mayest see, that he 
may see, &c. 

Imperf. Che vedessi, that I might see, &c. 

* Second Imperf. Vedrei, I should see, &c. 
Infinitive. Vedere. Gerund, vedendo. Participle, 

veduto, or * visto, seen. They say also veggo, veggiamo, 
and vegendo instead of vedo, vediamo, vedendo. 



Of the Verbs in ere short. 

OF all the verbs in ere short, there are none regular, 
except those which I have put just after the verb cre- 
dere. 

All the rest, of which there is a great number, are 
irregular ; some in the present tense, most of them in 
the preterperfect-definite, some in the future, and al- 
most all in the participle. 

A new and general Rule, to learn in a short time all 
the Irregular Verbs in ere short. 

We are taught by an axiom in philosophy, that 
Jrustra Jit per plura, quod potest fieri per pauciora. 
And it is in conformity with this maxim, that I have 
reduced ail the irregular verbs in ere short, to one 
single rule. 

These five verbs, conoscere, to know ; crescere, to 
grow ; nascere, to be born; nuocere, to hurt, (morally J* 

rompere 



VERBS. 125 

rompere, to break ; form the preterperfect definite, and 
the participles, as follow : 

Preter-def. Participle. 

conobbi conosciuto. 

crebbi cresciuto. 

ndcqui ndto. 

nocqui nocivto. 

ruppi rotto. 

Generally speaking, all the other verbs ending in the 
infinitive in ere short, form the preterperfect-definite in 
si, and the participle in so, to, or sto. 

•tyt Though this rule might suffice for all the preter- 
perfect definites of verbs terminated in ere short ; yet 
we may also observe that the same verbs may be ter- 
minated in thirteen different ways, which will make 
however but one and the same rule. 

*** You will see in the terminations, which are 
placed in direct lines, that there is a star at the end of 
some of them, and there are others without that mark.. 
The star at the end is intended to show that those verbs 
make the participle in to ; the verbs that have no star, 
make the participle in so, or in esso. 



Terminations of the Verbs in ere short. 

The verbs in ere, short, are terminated in the infi- 
nitive. 

* 128 1. In cere: as, vincerey torcere, cuocere. * 

131 2. In dere: as, drdere, chiudere, rider e. 

132 3. In gere : as, pidngere, spingere, leggere. * 

1 33 4. In gliere : as, cogliere, sciogliere, togliere* * 

134 5. In ere ; as, trdere, obs. now trdrre, &c. * 

135 6. In lerei as svellere, * 



* The figures in the margin refer to the pages 
where the verbs of a similar termination are conju- 

7.1a 



126 VERBS. 

135 7. In mere: as, imprimere, opprimere. Preteiv 

def. impressi, oppress!. Participle, im- 
presso ; oppresso. 

136 8. In nere : as, ponere, obs. now porre, riponere, 

obs. riporre. Participle, riposto. 

137 9. In ndere ; as, prendere, rendere, rispondere, 

nascondere. Participle, preso, reso, or 
renduto, risposto, nascoso, or nascosto. 
( 10. In ^ere: as, rompere, makes in the perfect 
T38 J defin. ruppi, in the participle, r<5fto. 

j 11. In rere: as, correre, concorrere. . 
[ 12. In fere: as mettere, misi, messo. 
139 13. In wre: as, scrivere, vivere. 

*^* Change all these terminations into si, and you 
will find the preterperfect definite of them all, in which 
consists the greatest irregularity : example ; to find the 
preter°definite, of mncere, torcere, drdere, prendere, 
pidngere, rispondere, only change their terminations, 
cere, dere, gere, ndere, into si, and you will find, vinsi, 
i6rsi 9 drsi, presi, pidnsi, risposL 

* # * Observe, that the verbs written with two gg's 
before the penultima, drop them, and double the s in 
the preterperfect definite, and the t in the participle ; 
example, leggere, reggere, &c. To form the preterper- 
fect definite, we must change the termination ggere into 
ssi, and for the participle into tto, and we shall find 
Ussi, ressi, letto, retto, &c. 

Take notice likewise, that the verbs terminating in 
gliere, always retain the /, and only lose giere in the 
preterperfect definite ; the same rule serves for the par- 
ticiple: example, cogliere, sciogliere, scegliere, togliere, 
&c. take from those words giere, there remains col, sciol, 
seel, tul ; and by adding si to them in the preterperfect 
definite, and in the participle to, we shall find, colsiy. 
sciolsi, scelsi, tolsi, colio, sciolto, scelto, tolto, &c. 

%* To conjugate these verbs with ease, remember 
that there are always three irregular, and three regular 
persons, in the preter-definite^ 

The three irregular persons are the first and third 
singular, and the third plural, which are very easy to- 
be formed, if we only observe, that the first person is 

always 



verbs. m 

always terminated in i ; vinsi, drsi, pidnsi ; change i 

into e, and it is the third singular; vinse, arse, pianse ; 

and by adding ro to the latter it becomes the third 

plural, vhisero, drsero, piansero ; and so of the rest. 

Example, 

presi, scrissi | prese, scrisse, I presero, scrissero, 

resi, lessi, \ rese, lesse. J resero, lessero. 

The three regular persons are, the second singular, 
and the first and second plural. There is frequently 
more difficulty in finding but these than the irregular 
persons, because we confound one with the other. 
Now the true way to avoid being mistaken in this 
point is, to remember that the second person singular 
of the preter-definite in all verbs, as well regular as 
irregular, is formed from the infinitive, by changing 
re into sti ; as,vincere, vincesti, drdere, ardesti ; pian- 
gere, piangesti ; except the verb essere. 

The first person plural is also formed from the infi- 
nitive by changing re into mmo ; as, am&re, amdmmo ; 
vedere, vedemmo ; logger e t leggemmo. 

The second person plural of the preterperfect defi- 
nite is formed in all the verbs from the second of the 
singular, by changing its final i into e ; as vincesti, vi?i~ 
ceste ; ardesti, ardeste ; piangesti, pianghte. Thus we 
shall find, vinsi, vincesti, vinse ; vincemmo, vi?iceste t 
i)insero ; drsi, ardesti, arse ; ardemmo, ardeste, drsero. 

These observations should be carefully remembered, 
as being very necessary for conjugating the irregular 
verbs. 

%* We must also remember, that the verbs termi- 
nated in ere and vere y as, trdere, scrivere, double the 
letter s in the preterperfect definite, and the letter t 
in the participle : example ; trassi, scrissi, trdtto, scritto. 

The above rule would be sufficient for learning the 
irregularity of the verbs in ere short ; yet, for the 
greater conveniency of learners, I have thought proper 
to explain these thirteen terminations more at large, 
in order to obviate all the difficulties that may occur. 



Of 



128 VERBS. 



Of the Verbs terminated in cere. 

The verbs in cere form the preterperfect definite, 
by changing cere into si, and the participle into to : as, 

Cuocere, to bake, to cook. Present, cuoco, cuoci, 
ciifice ; cuocidmo, cuocete, cuocono : I bake, thou bakest, 
he bakes : we bake, you bake, they bake. 

Imp. Cuoceva, tit, va ; vdmo, vote, vano : I did bake, 
thou didst bake, he did bake, &c. 

* Preter-def. Cossi, cnocesti, cosse ; cuocemmo, cuo- 
ceste, cossero : I baked, thou didst bake, he baked, &c. 

Preterp. Ho cotto I have baked. 

Preterp. Aveva cotto, I had baked. 

Future. Cuocerb, rdi, rd ; remo, rete, r&nno : I 
shall bake, thou shalt bake, he shall bake, &c. 

Imper. Cuoci, cuoca ; cuocidmo, cuocete, cuocano : 
bake thou, let him bake, &c. 

Opt. Che cuoca. Imperf. che cuocessi. Second 
Imp. cuocerei. Infinitive, cuocere. Participle, * cotto. 
Gerund, cuocendo. 



Condu'cere, obs. Condurre, to conduct. Present, 
conduco, conduci, conduce ; conducidmo, conducete, con- 
ducono ; I conduct, thou conductest, he conducts ; we 
conduct, &c. 

Imperf. Conduceva, vi, w, &c. I did conduct. 

Preter-definite. Condussi, conducesti, condusse ; con» 
ducemmo, conduceste, condussero : I conducted, thou 
didst conduct, he conducted, &c. 

* Future. Condurrb, rdi, rh ; remo, &c. I shall or 
will conduct, &c. 

Imperative. Conduci, conduca, &c, conduct thou, &c. 

Optative. Che conduca. Imperf. che conducessi. Se- 
cond Imperfect, * condurrei. Participle, * condofto* 
Gerund, conducendo. 



Rilu'cere, to shine. Present, riluco, riluci, riluce ; 
riluciamo, rilucete, rilucono : I shine, thou shinest, he 
shines, &c. Imperfect, riluceva, &c. I did shine, &c. 

Preter- 



VERBS. 129 

Preter-definite. Rilussi, rilucesti, rilusse; rilucemmo f 
riluccste, rilussero : I shined, thou didst shine, he 
shined, &c. Future, rilucerb, I shall shine, &c. 

Imperative. Riluci, riluca ; rilucidmo, rilucete, rilu- 
cano ; shine thou, let him shine, &c. 

It has no Optative. Subjunctive. Che riluca, riluca t 
riluca ; rilucidmo, rilucidte, rilucano : that I may shine> 
&c. Imperfect, rilucessi, &c. that I might shine, &c. 
Second Imperfect, rilucerei, &c. I should shine, &c 
It has no Participle. Gerund, rilucendo, shining. 



Vi'ncere, to win. Present, vinco, vinci, xnnce ; vin~ 
cidmo, vincete, vincono : I win, thou winnest, he wins, 
&c. Imperfect, vinceva, I did win. * Preter-definite, 
vinsi, vincesti, xanse ; vincemmo, vinceste, vinsero : I 
won, &c. Preter-perfect, ho vinto, I have won. 
Future, vincerb, I shall win. Imperative, vinci, vinca, 
&c. win thou, let him win, &c. 

Optative and Subjunctive. Che vinca. Imperfect, 
che vincessi. Second Imperfect, vincerei. Participle, 
* vinto. 



Torcere, to twist. Present, torco, torci, torce / 
iorcidmo, torcete, torcono : I twist, thou twistest, he 
twists ; we twist, <Src. Imperfect, torceva, I did twist. 
*Preter-definite, torsi, torcesti, torse ; torcemvio, torceste r 
iorsero. Future, torcerb. 

Imperative. Torci, torca, &c. twist thou, let him 
twist, &c. 

Optative. Che torca. Imperfect, che torcessi. Se- 
cond Imperfect, torcerei. Participle, *torto. Gerund, 
torcendo. 



Conoscere and Cre'scere, change scere into bbi, 
to form the preter-definite, and make the participle in. 
sciuto : as, 

Conosco, conosci, conosce ; conosciamo, conoscite, co- 

noscono. I know, &c; Imperfect, conosceva, Preter- 

g 5 definite. 



ISO VERBS. 

definite, conobbi, conoscesti, conobbe; corioscemmo, conos- 
ceste, conobbero : I knew, &c. Future, conoscerb, &cv 
Imperative, conosci, conosca, &c. know thou, let him 
know, &c. 

Optative. Che conosca. Imperfect, che conosce&sh 
Second Imperfect, conoscerei. Participle, * conosciuto. 

Cre'sco, cresci, cresce ; crescidmo, crescete, criscono : 
I grow, thou growest, he grows ; we grow, you grow, 
they grow. Imperfect, crescha, I did grow. Preter- 
definite, crebbi, crescesti, crebbe. Future, crescerb, I 
shall grow. 

Imperative. Cresci, cresca, &c. grow thou, let him 
grow, &c. 

Optative. Che cresca. Imperf. che cresces&u Second 
Imperf. crescerei, I should grow, &c. Participle, *cres- 
ciuto. 



Na'scere and Niiqcere make the preterperfect de- 
finite in qui. 

Na'scere, to be born. Present, nasco, ndsci. ndsce / 
nascidmo, nascete, ndscono : I am born, thou art born,, 
he is born ; we are born, you are born, they are born. 
Imperfect, nasceva, I was born. Preter-definite, ndcqui, 
nascesti, ndcque ; nascemmo, nasceste, nacquero ; I was 
born. Future, nascerb, I shall be born. 

Optative. Che nasca. Imperfect, che naschsi. Second 
Imperfect, nascerei. Participle, *nato. Gerund, nas- 
cendo. 

Nuocere, to hurt (morally). Present, nuoco, nuoci,. 
nuoce ; nocidmo, nocete, nuocono : I hurt, &c. Imper- 
fect, mwceva, I did hurt. Preter-definite, * nocqui, nuo- 
cesti, nocque ; nuocemmo, noceste, nuocquero : I did hurt, 
or I hurt, &c. Future. Nuocerb, &c. 

Imperative. Nuoci, nuoca, &c. hurt thou, let him 
hurt, &c. 

Optative. Che nuoca. Imperfect, che nocessL Se- 
cond Imperf. nuocerei. Participle, * nociuto. Gerund, 
nocendo. 



Of 



VERBS. 131 

Of the Verbs in dere. 

THE verbs in dere form the preterperfect definite in 
si, and the participle in so : as, 

A'rdere, to burn. Present, Ardo, drdi, drde: ardi- 
dmo, ardete, drdono ; I burn, thou burnest, &c. 

Imperfect. Ardeva, I did burn. * Preter-definite, 
arsi, ardesti, arse ; ardcmmo, ardeste, drsero ; I burnt, 
he burnt, &c. Future, arderb, I shall burn, &c. 

Imperative. Ardi, arda ; ardidmo, ardete, drdano ; 
burn thou, let him burn, &c. 

Optative. Che dr da, arda, arda; ardidmo, ardidte, 
drdano : that I may burn, &c. Imperfect, che ardessi. 
Second Imperfect, arderei. Participle, * drso, burnt. 
Gerund, ardendo, burning, or in burning. 

I shall put no more tenses of the verbs than the pre- 
sent, the preterperfect definite, and the participles, 
none but these being irregular. 



Chitj'dere, to shut ; chiudo, * chiusi, chiuso. 

And so of the rest ; except, 
Chie'dere, to ask ; which makes in the preter-def. 
*chiesi, and the participle, * chiesto, and not chieso. 

Pe'rdere, makes in the preter-definite, perdei, or 
perdelti and * persi : in the participle, perduto, and 
* per so. 

Ri'dere, to laugh ; rido, * risi, * riso. 
«R.6dere, to gnaw : rodo, *rosi, * roso. 



Observe, that all these verbs have the preter-definite 
in ei and etti. It is more elegant to say, chiudei, 
perdei, &c. than chiusi, persi, &c. This is to avoid the 
ambiguity that might arise between chiusi, persi, &c. 
the first person of the preter-definite, and chiusi, persi, 
&c. nouns adjective. 

The participle of the verbs in dere, short, is always 
terminated in so. Except the verbs chiedere and per- 
dere, which make chiesi, and persi, chieduto, or chiesto, 
and perduto. 

*** You 



132 VERBS. 

%* You perceived, after the conjugation of the verb 
credere, that cedere is a regular verb ; its compounds 
are not ; for they form the preter-definite in essi, and 
the participle in esso. Example : 

Succe'dere, to succeed, succedo, * successi, * suc- 
cesso. 

Conce'dere, to agree, to grant, or yield to ; con- 
cedo, * concessi, * concesso. 

I apprehend that those two verbs, as well as perdere, 
to lose, are regular and irregular, since we may like- 
wise say, succedei, succedetti, succeduto ; concedei, con-> 
cedetti, conceduto : perdei, perdetti, perduto ; and in 
like manner all the compounds of the verbs cedere and 
perdere. 



Of the Verbs in endere. 

THE verbs in endere form the preter-definite in ei 
and si, and the participle in esso : example, 

Atte'ndere, to attend; attendei, * attesi, * atteso. 

Pre'ndere, to take ; prendei, * presi, * preso. 

Re'ndere, to render ; rendei, resi, reso. 

This verb also forms the participle in uto, as renduto. 
The latter is better than reso. 

Fendere, to cleave, and pendere, to hang, are re- 
gular. In the preter-definite they make fendei or Jen- 
detti,\pendei 9 or pendetti, in the participle, fenduto and 
penduto. 

Take notice nevertheless, that the compounds of 
those two verbs are irregular, and they make the pre- 
ter-definite in est, the participle in eso, like difendere, 
to defend, * difesi, * difeso : appendere, to hang, or fix 
up, * appesiy * appeso, &c. 



Of the Verbs in gere. 

THE verbs in gere make the preter-definite in si, 
and the participle in to; as, 

Ci'ngere, to gird ; cingo, preter-definite, * cinsi, 
cingesti, cinse. Participle, * cinto. 

Spi'ngere, 



VERBS. 13S 

, Spi'ngere, to push ; * spingo, spinsi, * spinto. 

Pqrgere, to offer ; porgo, *porsi, * porta. 

U'ngere, to anoint ; ungo, * unsi, * unto. 

Sfa'rgere, to shed. Present, spdrgo, Preter-de- 
finite, spdrsi. Participle, * spdrso. 
■ To which we may also add estinguere, estinguo, * es- 
Unsi, * estinto. 

E'rgere, to erect ; ergo, * em, * erto. 

All these verbs have the preter-definite in ei and 
etti ; but regularly their participle is in to. Immergere, 
dispergere, tergere, an obsolete verb (but poetical), 
and some others of the like sort, have it in so. Both 
those participles are formed of the first syllable of the 
present indicative joined to the syllable to or so. For 
instance, of cingere we make cinto, of spdrgere, spdrso. 
If the infinitives of those verbs are accented on the 
second syllable, the participle is then formed on the 
two first syllables added to to or so. 

Thus from immergere is formed immerso, of disgiun- 
gere, disgiunto, &c. 

N *^* Remember that the participle of the verb spdr- 
gere, is spdrto, and spdrso, not spargiuto, except in 
poetry for the sake of rhyme, or to serve the measure 
of the verse, and even there we ought to use it as little 
as possible. 

Observe, that verbs which have a vowel before gere 
must be written with two gg J s, and that they double 
the letter s in the preter-definite ; as, 

Friggere, to fry ; Jriggo, frissi, friggesti, &c. frilto. 

Leggere, to read ; leggo, lessi, leggesti, &c. Participle, 
letto. 

Take care not to say, frigiuto, or leggiuto. 



# # # Of the Verbs in gliere. 
Observe that besides the irregularity in the preter- 
definite, and the participles of verbs ending in gliere, 
they are also contracted or abridged in the infinitive, 
and in the future and second imperfect tenses ; as, 

Cogliere, or Corre, and Cor, to gather. Future, 
corro. Second Imperfect, correi. 

The 



134 VERBS. 

The verbs in gliere, change their terminations into 
hi, to form the preter-definite ; and in Ito, to make the 
participle. The conjugating of cogliere, colsi, colfo, will 
serve as a rule for those verbs that are of the same 
termination. 

* # * Indicative, Present, colgo % and coglio, I gather ; 
cogli, eoglie ; coglidmo, cogliete, colgono. Imperfect, 
coglieva, I did gather. * Preterperfect-definite, colsi, 
cogliesti, coke, cogliimmo, &c. I gathered. Future, 
corrb, &c. I will or shall gather. 

* Imperative. Cogli, colga, or cdglicr^ coglidmo, 
cogliete, cogliano, or colgano : let him gather. 

Optative. Che coglia, or colga, &c. Imperfect, * che 
cogliessi. Second Imperfect, * correl. Participle, 
* colio. 



Togliere, or Torre. Present, *iolgo t or toglio* 
Preter-definite, *tolsi, togliesti, &c. Future, *torrb. 

Optative. * Tolga. Imperfect, togliessi. * Second- 
Imperfect, torrei. Participle, tolto. 



Sciogliere, or Sciorre, to loosen. Present, 

* sciolgo, or scioglio. Preterperfect-definite, * sciolsi, 
sciogliestL Participle, sciolto. 

Sce'gliere, to choose, is not abridged in the infini- 
tive, like the above verbs : it forms in the present, 
scelgo, scegli, sceglie ,• sceglidmo, scegliete, scelgono* 

* Preterperfect-definite, scelsi. * Participle, scelto. 



# # # Qf the Verbs in here. 

IF there were any such thing in the Italian language- 
as a verb terminated in here, it would be trdhere, to 
draw, with its several compounds. But the present 
orthography is to write them without an h- 

This verb is also contracted in the infinitive. 

Of iraere, we form trdrre or trar. Trdssi is the 
preter-definite, and tratto, the participle. 

* Indicative, 



VERBS. 135 

* Indicative, Present. Trdggo, trdi, trde; trajdmo y 
traete, trdggono, I draw, &c. Imperfect, traeva. 
* Preterperfect-definite, tr&ssi, traesti, &c. * Future, 
trarro. 

* Imperative. Trdi, tragga ; trojamo or traggidmo 9 . 
iraete, trdggano. 

* Optative. Che tragga. Imperfect, che traessL 

* Sec. Imp. Trarrei. Participle, trdtto. Gerund, 
traendo. 

Observe the same rule in its compounds. Contrdere, 
attrdere, distrdere, &c. which make contrdrre, attrdrre r 
distrarre, &c. They form the preter-definite in ssi, as 
coiitrdssi, attrdssi, distrdssi, and the participle in to, as, 
contralto, attrdtto, distrdtto, &c. 



Of the Verbs in lere. 

OF all the verbs in lere, there is only the verb 
svellere, to pluck, that change e into si, to form the 
preterperfect-definite, and into to, for the participle. 
Present, * svelsi, svellesti. Future, svellerb. Participle^ 
svelto. 



Of the Verbs in mere. 

PRE'MERE, Su'mere, and their compounds, are 
the only regular verbs for this rule. 

Premere, to press. Present* premo. Preterperfect- 
definite, * pressi and premei, or premetti. Participle, 
premuto. 

Its compounds in imere make the preterperfect- 
definite in ssi, and the participle in sso ; as, 

Opprimere, * oppressi, oppresso. 

Imprimere, * imprSssi, imprksso. 

Sumere is obsolete : its compounds make * sunsi, 
sunto, as Assumere, * assunsi, assunto ; consumere, (now 
consumdre), consunsi, consunto, and consumdto. 

O 



336 VERBS. 



Of the Verbs in nere. 

PO'NERE, obs. is also irregular, with its compounds. 
It changes the infinitive into 6rre 9 so that we say, porre, 
to put ; disporre, to dispose, &c. instead of, ponere, and 
disponere. We may change nere or erre, into si, for 
the preter-definite, and into sto for the participle ; 
saying, * posi, disposi, posto, disposto, &c. 

The preter-definite may also terminate in ei, as ponei, 
disponei, &c. But the participle always makes sto. 
Nay it would be very wrong to say, esposdto, disposdto, 
and this should be carefully minded, because foreigners 
are apt to commit this error. The French are led into 
it by the turn of their language ; and other nations, by 
frequently meeting with the word posdto in printed 
books. But you are to take notice, that this word is 
derived from the verb posdre, and not from ponere 
or porre. For the same reason we do not say, posdi, 
for posi, or ponei, this word being used only for the 
first person of the preter-definite of the same verb 
posdre. Consequently, we must never say disposal, 
esposui, &c. for the verbs are the compounds of ponere 
and not posdre. 

*3* Remember the two remarks made on the verbs 
ending in lere, nere, nire, which take the letter g in the 
present, and change le, ne, ni, into r in the future, &c. 

* Present. Pongo, poni, pone ; ponidmo, ponete, pbn~ 
gono : I put, &c. Imperfect, poneva. 

* Preterperfect- definite. Posi, or ponei, ponesti, pose; 
ponemmo, poneste, posero. Future, porro. 

* Imperative. Poni, ponga ; poni&mo, ponete, pon- 
gano. 

Optative. Che ponga, a, a ; ponidmo, ponwte, pon- 
gano. 

Imperfect. Che ponessi. Second Imperfect, porrei, 
* Participle, posto. Gerund, ponendo. 

Conjugate its compounds after the same manner. 



Of 



VERBS. 137 



Of the Verbs in ondere. 

BY changing ondere into si, or re into i, as in the 
case of regular verbs, you form the preterperfect defi- 
nite. The participle is in osto, uso, or oso. 

Rispqndere, to answer. Present, rispondo, ris- 
<pondi, risponde ; rispondidmo, rispondete, rispondono. 
Imperfect, rispondeva. *Preterperfect-definite, ris- 
posi, rispondesti, rispose ; rispondemmo , rispondeste, ris- 
posero. Future, rispondero. 

Imperative. Rispondi, risponda ; rispondidmo, rispon- 
dete, risfonda.no. 

Optative. Che risponda, da, da ; rispondidmo, rispon- 
diMe, rispondano. Imperfect, die rispondessu Second 
Imperfect, rispondereu * Participle, risposto* 



Nascondere, to hide. Present, nascondo. *Pre- 
terperfect'definite, nascosi. Participle, nascosto. 

The verb F6ndere, to melt, does not make the 
preter-definite, in osi, but in usi or ei. You must 
therefore say fondei, or fusi, fondesti, fonae, or fuse ; 
fondenimo,fondeste, fonderono, or fiisero. 

%* Note, that fusi, fuse, &c. is not used at present, 
except in compounds; as in the verb conf ondere, diffen- 
-dere, &c. which in the preter-definite makes conf mi, 
and conj ondei ; diffusi, diffbndei, &c. and in the parti- 
ciple, coif mo, diffuso, &c. 

Though in the preter-definite we meet with conf usi, 
and diffusi, yet it is more advisable to make use of 
confondei, and diffondei. This is on account of the 
ambiguity in those words, when they form the first 
person of the preter-definite, and when they are nouns 
adjective, as we have observed of chiesi and persi. 

The participle of the verb fondere, makes fuao and 
fonduto. The last is the best ; the other is used only 
for compound verbs. 

Tondere, to shear, does not make tbsi, but tondei, 
tondesti, tonde. Participle, tonduto, and not toso, the 
latter being abridged from tosdto, which comes from 
Jthe verb tosdre. 

Of 



138 VERBS. 



Of the Verbs in pere. 

RO'MPERE, to break, is, with its compounds, the* 
only irregular verb of this termination ; in the present 
it forms rompo, rompi, rbmpe ; rompidmo, rompcte, rom* 
pono. Imperfect, rompeva. *Preterperfect-definite, 
ruppi, rompesti, ruppe ; rompemmo, rompesle, ruppero. 
Future, rompero, * Participle, rotto. 



Of the Verbs in rere. 

CO'RRERE, with its compounds, to run, is also the 
only verb that ends in rere short ; it makes the preter- 
definite in si, and the participle in so ; as, 

Correre, to run. Present, corro, corri, corre ; 
corridmo, correte, corrono. Imperfect, correva, Pre- 
terperfect definite, Pret. corsi, corresti, corse; cor- 
remmo, correste, corsero. Future, correro* Imperative, 
corri, corra, &c. 

Optative. Che corra, corra, corra ; corridmo, corridte, 
corrano. Imperfect, corressi. Second Imperfect cor~ 
rerei, correresti, &c. * Participle, corso. Gerund, 
correndo. 

Accorere, to run to. Preter-defin. accorsi. Partii 
ciple, accorso ; and all the other compounds in the 
same manner. 



Of the Verbs in tere. 

ME'TTERE, to put, does not make in the pre- 
ter-definite messi, but misi, mettesti, mise ; mettemmo, 
metteste, misero: I put, thou puttest, &c. Participle, 
messo ; we sometimes meet with messero, promessero ; 
but it is more in verse than in prose. 

Prome'ttere to promise, makes promessi and pro- 
misi. Participle, promcsso. 

Rifle'ttere, to reflect, is irregular only in the 
participle. We do not say in the preter-dehnite rifiessi, 

but 



VERBS. 139 

but rifleltei. The participle makes riflettuto : but this 
word is grown obsolete. It is customary now to use 
the participle of the verb fare, joined to the word 
riflessione. As, having reflected, avendo fdtto rifles- 
sione ; I have reflected upon that, to. hofatto riflessione 
sopra cio, &c. 

Riscuotere, riscossi, riscosso, to receive, 
Scuotere, to shake, makes *scossi, scosso. 
Percuotere, to strike, makes, percossi, percuotei, 
percosso. 



Of the Verbs in ucere. 

THE verbs producere, addiicere, riducere, inducere, 
seducere, conducere, deducere, traducere, which mean, 
to produce, to allege, to reduce, to induce, to 
seduce, to conduct, to deduct, to translate, are also 
contracted, in the infinitive. We say, produrre, 
addurre, &c. Their preter-definite is produssi, addussi, 
and their participle is terminated in otto, as prodotto, 
addotto, &c. 

* # * Note, That we likewise say, addur, produr, &c. 
which makes a third infinitive. But in prose, we must 
make use of that in urre. The other two are proper 
only for verse, though some authors of reputation have 
used them in prose. 

The other verbs, terminating in ucere, do not change 
the infinitive. Therefore we must take care to say 
rilucere, but never rilurre, and so of the rest. 



Of the Verbs in vere. 

TO form the preterperfect definite of verbs in vere, 
you must change vere into ssi, or si. The participles 
are different. 

Muovere, to move. Preter-definite mossi. Parti- 
ciple, rnosso. All the compound verbs form the preter- 
definite in ei 9 as promuovei, commuovei, &c. 

Scri'vere, to write ; scrissi, part, scritto. 

Vi'vere, 



HO VERBS. 

Vi'vere, to live; *vissi, vivesti, visse. Participle, 
vissuto, or nwuto. 

Ass6lvere, to absolve, having a consonant before 
vere, makes in the preterperfect-definite assolsi, assol- 
vesti, assolse, &c Participle, assolto, assoluto. 

Risolvere, to resolve. Present, risolvo. Preter- 
perfect-definite, % risolsi, risolvesti ; or risolvei, or 
risolvetti. Participle, risoluto. 

* m * Remember that the optative of verbs ending in 
ere and in ire, is formed of the first person indicative, 
by changing o into a ; as, vedere, vedo, veda ; scrivere, 
scrivo, scriva ; cbgliere, cblgo, colga ; credere, credo, 
credo, ; dormire, dormo, dorma ; sentire, sento, senta ; 
finire, Jinisco, jinisca ; dire, dico, dica. And so of all 
the other verbs, except essere, sapere, avere, and dovere. 



Irregulars of the Third Conjugation* 

IN the third conjugation there are six verbs more 
irregular than the rest, viz. dire, to say ; morire, to 
die ; satire, to ascend ; udire, to hear ; ventre, to come ; 
ascire, to go out. 



DI'RE, to say. 

I apprehend the verb dire, is only an abridgment 
of dicere, which was used by the ancients. I give it 
however a place among the irregulars of the third 
conjugation, in order to comply with the custom of 
other grammarians. 

* Present. Dico, diet, dice ; dicidmo, dite, dicono, I 
say, thou sayest, he says ; we say, you say, they say. 

Imperfect. Diceva, vi, vz ; vdmo, vdtc, vano. 

*Preterperfect-definite. Dissi, dicesti, disse ; di- 
cemmo, diceste, dissero ; I said, thou didst say, he said ; 
we said, you said, they said. 

Preterperfect. Ho detto, I have said. 

Future. Diro, I shall say. 

^Imperative. Di, dica ; dicidmo, dite, dicano ; say 
thou, let him say ; let us say, say you, let them say. 

*Optative. 



VERBS. 141 

*Optative. Che dica, dica, dica; dicidmo, dictate, 
dicano : thdt 1 may say, thou may'st say, he may 
say, &c. 

Imperfect. Che dicessi. Second Imperfect, direi. 

*Participle. Detto. Gerund, dicendo. 



MORI'RE, to die. 

Morire has no irregularity, but by making the pre- 
sent tense in two different manners. 

* Indicative, Present. Muojo, muori, mubre ; 
muojdmo, morite, muojono ; or moro, mori, more, &c. I 
die, thou diest, he dies ; we die, you die, they die. 

Imperfect. Moriva, vi, va ; vdmo, vdte, vano. 

Preterperfect-definite. Morii moristi, mori ,• mo- 
rimmo, moriste, morirono, and not morsi, which comes 
from mordere. 

Preterperfect. Sono morto, I am dead. 

Future. Morro, and moriro, I shall or will die. 

* Imperative. Muori, muoja ; muojdmo, morite, 
muojano; die thou, let him die, &c 

* Optative and Subjunctive. Che muoja, muoja, 
muoja ; mojdmo, ?nojdte, muojano. 

Imperfect. Che morissi. Second Imperfect, morrei, 
and morirei. 

Participle. Morto. Gerund, morendo. 



SALI'RE, to come or go up. 

' Satire, is irregular, like morire ; because its present 
tense is formed two ways. 

* Indicative, Present. Sdlgo, or sdglio, sdli, sale ; 
saglidmo or salghiamo, salite, sdlgono, or sdgliono ; I go 
up, &c. Imperfect, saliva, &c. 

Preter-definite. Salii, salisti, sail; salimmo, saliste, 
salirono : I went up. Future, saliro, I shall go up. 

* Imperative. Sdli, sdlga ; sagliamo, salite, sdlgano ; 
go up thou, let him go up, &c. 

* Optative. Che sdlga, saiga, sdlga, &c. 
Imperfect. Che salissi, salissi, salisse. 
Second Imperfect. Salirei, saliresti. 

Participle, 



142 VERBS. 

Participle. Salito. Gerund, salendo. 

Be particularly careful not to say sali and salidmo, in- 
stead of sdlghi and saglidmo, or salghidmo ; because the 
former words come from the verb salare, to salt, and 
not from satire, to mount. 



UDFRE, to hear. 

The irregularity of udire is only in the present tense, 
by changing u into o, in the first, second, and third 
person singular, and in the third person plural. 

** Indicative, Present. Odo 9 6di 9 ode ; udidmo, udite, 
odono : 1 hear, thou nearest, he hears; we hear, you 
hear, they hear. 

Imperfect. Udiva t vi, va ; vdmo, vdte, vano. 

Preterperfect-def. Udii,udisti t udi; udimmo, udiste, 
udirono : I heard, &c. 

Future. Udirb, rdi, rd ; remo, rete, rdnno ; I shall 
or will hear, thou shalt hear, he shall hear. 

* Imperative. O'di, oda; udidmo, udite, odano. 

* Optative. Che oda, that I may hear. 

* Imperfect. Che udissi, that I might hear. 
Second imperfect, udirei. Participle, udito. Ge- 
rund, udendo. 



VENIRE, to come. 

* Indicative, Present. Vengo, vieni, viene ; venidmo, 
venite, vengono : I come, thou comest, he comes ; we 
come, you come, they come. 

Imperfect. Veniva, I did come. 

* Preterperfect-def. Venni, venisti, venne; venimmo, 
veniste, vennero : I came, thou earnest, he came ; we 
came, you came, they came. 

Preterperfect. Sonovenuto. Future, verrb, I shall come. 

* Imperative. Vieni, venga ; ve?iidmo, venite, ven- 
gano ; come thou, let him come ; let us come, &c. 

* Optative, Present. Chevenga. Imperfect, che venissi. 
Second Imperfect. Verrei. Participle, venuto. Ge- 
rund, venhido. 

All 



VERBS. 143 

All the compounds of venire, as pervenire, rivenire, 
<&c. are conjugated in the same manner; and so are all 
the other compounded verbs. 



USCI'RE, to come or go out. 

Usrire is irregular, only by changing u into e in the 
present, viz. in the first, second, and third person 
singular, and the third plural. 

* Indicative, Present. E'sco, esci, esce ; uscidmo, 
write, escono : I come or go out, Ihou comest or goest 
out, he comes or goes out ; we come or go out, you 
come or go out, they come or go out. 

Imperfect. Usciva. 

Preterperfect-def. Uscii, uscisti, usci ; uscimmo, 
iisciste, uscirono : I came or went out, thou earnest or 
wentest out, he came or went out ; we came or went 
out, &c. 

Preterperfect. Sono uscito, I am come or gone out. 

Future. Uscirb, uscirdi, uscira, &c. 

* Imperative. Esci, esca ; uscidmo, uscile, escano. 
♦Optative. Che esca, esca, esca; uscidmo, uscidte, 

escano. Imperfect, che uscissi. 

Second Imperfect. Uscirei. Participle, uscito. Ge- 
rund, uscendo. 

Aprire to open, makes in the preterperfect-definite, 
aprii, or apersi. Participle, aperto. 

Coprire, to cover, makes in the preterperfect-definite, 
coprii, or coper si. Participle, coperto. 

The third conjugation of the verbs terminated in the 
infinitive in ire has another sort of verbs irregular only 
in the present, which are formed from the infinitive, by 
changing ire into isco ; as, ardire, to dare, of which I 
have given the following conjugations, to serve as a 
rule for the rest. 



Of the Verbs in isco. 
IN order to lay down a general rule for the verbs 
that have the termination in isco in the present tense, 
observe, that some of them do not follow ardisco and 

thev 



144 



VERBS. 



they differ only from the verb sentire, in the preterper- 
feet-definite, and in the participle. They are as follow : 



Present. 

Apr'ire, dpro, 

Apparire, apparisco, 

Coprire, copro, 

Comparire. comparisco, 

r\rc ' S offerisco,& } 
Offerzre, ^ oJ ™, \ 

Prqferire, prqferisco, 
Soffrire, soffro, 
Seppellire, seppelVisco, 



Preterperf. 

aprii, 8$ apersi, 
fapparii, fy ap-1 
I par si, ' j 
coprii,8$ coper si, 

J comparii,8fcom- 

I pdrsi, 

offerii,8$qffersi, 

C prqferii, 3f pro* 
\ fersi, 
sqffrii, sqffrersi 

seppellii, 



Particip. 

aperlo. 
ajjparso. 
coperto, 
compdrso, 

offerio, 

prqferto* 

sofferto. 
\ sepblto, fy 
I seppellito, 

I have made a collection of the regular verbs in ire, 
which are conjugated like sentire, as you have already 
seen in this chapter, page 102, where we treated of 
the third conjugation of verbs. All the other verbs 
not contained in that and the preceding collection, 
form the present in isco, and ought to be conjugated 
like ardisco. In this collection there are even some 
verbs that are also irregular; as, consentire* mentire, 
partire, when the latter signifies, to divide. We meet 
with consentisco, mentisco, and partisco. When the 
latter signifies to share, I should prefer partisco to 
pdrto. On the contrary, when it denotes to go away, 
you must say pdrto, and not partisco. Bollire : conver- 
tire, soffrire, also make the first person of the present 
indicative in isco. 

* # * Before you read over words terminating in 
isco, remember the two remarks concerning the 
irregularity of the present tense. 

The first teaches you that the irregularity of the 
present indicative is continued in the present imperative 
and subjunctive. 

By the second you learn, that the first and second 
persons plural of the present tense are never irregular. 

ARDIRE, 



VERBS. 



146 



ARDI'RE, to dare. 

Indicative, Present. Ardisco, ardisci, ardisce ; ar~ 
didmo,ardite, ardiscono : I dare. 

Imperfect. Ardiva, I did dare ; ardivi, va, &c. 

Preterperfect-def. Ardii, ardisti, ardl ; ardimmo* 
ardiste, ardirono : I durst, &c. 

Preterperf. Ho ardito. Future, Ardiro. 

Imperative. Ardisci, ardisca ; abbidmo ardire r 
ardite, ardiscano : dare thou, let him dare, let us 
dare, &c. 

Optative. Che ardisca, ardisca, ardisca ; die ab- 
biamo ardire, die abbidte ardire, ardiscano : that I may- 
dare, thou mayest dare, he may dare, &c. 

Imperfect, ardissi. Second imperil ardirei. 

Participle, ardito. Gerund, avcndo ardire. 

Conjugate the following words after the same 
manner. 



Abborr'ire, 


tsco ii 


ito" 




'abhor. 


Abolire, 


isco ii 


ito 




abolish. 


Arricchirc, 


isco ii 


ito 




enrich. 


Arrossire, 


isco ' ii 


ito 




blush. 


Bandire, 


isco ii 


ito 




banish. 


Bianchire, 


isco ii 


ito 




whiten. 


Capire, 


isco ii 


ito 




comprehend. 


Colpire, 


isco ii 


ito 




strike. 


Compatire, 


isco ii 


ito 




excuse or bear with. 


Concepire, 


isco ii 


ito 




conceive. 


Digerire, 


isco ii 


ito 




digest. 


JEseguire, 
Finire, 


isco ii 
tsco ii 


ito 

ito 


- to - 


execute, 
finish. 


Fiorire, 


isco ii 


ito 




blossom or bloom. 


Gradire, 


isco ii 


ito 




approve of. 


Impazzire, 


isco ii 


ito 




grow mad. 


Incrudelire 


i isco ii 


ito 




grow cruel. 


Languire, 


isco ii 


ito 




languish. 


Obbedire, 


isco ii 


ito 




obey. 


Patire, 


tsco ii 


ito 




suffer. 


Spedire, 


isco ii 


ito 




make haste. 


Tradire, 


isco ii 


ito 




betray. 


Ubbidire, 


tsco ii 


ito 




obey. 


Vnire, 


isco ii 


ito ^ 




[ unite. 








H 


Note, 



US VERBS. 

* # * Note, that the Italian poets do not always observe 

this irregularity, for they say indifferently offro and qffe- 

risco ; mugge, and muggisce; Idngue, and languisce ; 

fere and ferisce ; as may be seen in Pastor Fido, and 

in Tasso's Aminta. 

Mugge in mdndraV armento. Pastor Fido. 
Qual drme fera, qual dia vita, quale 
Sani e ritorni in vita. 
There are also some verbs that end in are, and in 
ire ; as, 

Colorare, colorire, to colour. 

Inanimate, inanimire, to animate. 
Inacerbare, inacerbire, to sharpen. 
Indurdre, indurire, to harden. 

Poets also frequently use the verbs ire and gire, 
instead of anddre. This is all that need be remarked 
in regard to irregular verbs. 



Of the Verb ire. 

The following tenses are all that occur in good 
writers : 

Indicative, Imperfect. I'va, he did go ; ivano, or 
ivan, they did go. Future, iro, irdi, ira ; iremo, irete, 
iranno, or iran. 

Imperative, I'te, go you. 

Infinitive, Ire, or ir, to go. 

Participle, Ito, gone. 

The other tenses are not used. 



Of the Verb gire. 
There are no more than the following tenses in use : 
Present, .Gite, you go. 

Imperfect, Givo, givi, giva, or gia ; givdmo, givdie r 
glvano : I did go, &c. 

Preter-def. Gisti, gi, or gio ; gimmo, gzsie, girono. 
Imperative, Gite, go you. 

^ Optative, Imperfect. Che gissi, gissi, gisse ; gissimo, 
giste, gissero : that I might go. 

Infinitive, Gire, or gir, Participle, gito. 

There 



VERBS. 147 

There is still something to be said in regard to verbs 
neuter, reciprocal, and impersonal. 



Of the Verbs Neuter, 

The Verbs Neuter are those which, in their com- 
pound tenses, are never or seldom conjugated with the 
verb tssere, to be ; as, I speak, I sleep, I tremble, &c. we 
may indeed say, / have spoken, I have slept, I have 
trembled ; but not, / am spoken, &c. But to express 
myself more properly, verbs neuter are those which 
make a complete sense of themselves, and do not 
govern any case after them like the verbs active ; for 
instance, I enter, I tremble; io entro, io tremo. Ob- 
serve, however, that we meet with some verbs neuter 
which may govern an accusative ; as io vivo una lunga 
vita, io dormo tin lungo sonno, io corro un lungo corso, &c. 

It is necessary to be acquainted with the nature of 
a verb neuter, in order to avoid mistakes or errors in 
the participles, as may be seen in the Second Part, 
where we treat of the Syntax of Participles. 



Of Reciprocal Verbs. 

The name of Reciprocal Verbs is given to such as 
are conjugated through all their tenses with the pro- 
nouns conjunctive mi, ti, si, ci, vi, si, in the same 
manner that dolere is conjugated in the irregulars of 
the second conjugation : example, 

Indicative, Present. Mi pento, ti penti, si pente ; ci 
pentidmo, vi pentiie, si pentono : I repent. &c. 

Imperf. Mi pentiva, ti pentivi, si pentiva ; ci pen- 
tivdmo, vi peniivdte, si pentivano : I did repent, &c. 

Preterperfect-def. Mi pentii, ti pentisti, si penti, ci 
pentimmo, vi pentiste, si pentirono : 1 repented, &c. 

Preterperfect-def, Mi sono pentiio, I have repented. 

Future. Mipentirb, I shall repent. 

Imperative. Penliti tu, pentasi egli ; pentidmoci noi, 
peniitevi voi, pentansi eglino. 

Subjunctive. Che mipenta, that I may repent, &c. 
h 2 Indicative, 



148 VERBS. 

Indicative, Present. Mi ricordo, ti ricordi, si 
ricorda ; and so of the rest. 

*** Note, all the verbs active may become recipro- 
cals : example, 

I love myself, io mi amo. 

Thou lovest thyself, tu ti ami. 
He loves himself, egli si dma. 

We love ourselves, noi ci amiamo. 

You love yourselves, voi vi amdte. 
They love tliemselves, eglino si dmano. 
And so of all the other tenses, and all the other verbs. 
Yet we are to observe, that the pronouns mi, ti, 
si, vi, which gave the reciprocality to the verbs, may 
be placed either before or after it ; but in the impera- 
tive, infinitive, gerund, and participle, they ought to 
b^e placed after the verb : example, dmami, love me : 
amdndomi, loving me : amarsi, to love oneself: amdtosi, 
loved by qneself ; and so in all the other verbs. 



Of Impersonal Verbs. 

There are three sorts of impersonal verbs, which 
have only the third person singular. 

The first are properly impersonals of themselves; as, 

Accdde, it happens. 

Bdsta, it is enough, or it suffices. 

Bisogna, it must, or it is necessary. 

Piove, it rains. 

Tuona, it thunders. 

The second are derived from verbs active, preceded 
by the particle si, which renders them impersonals ; 
as, si ama, they love ; si dice, they say. 

The third, which have a great affinity with reciprocal 
verbs, are conjugated with the pronouns conjunctive, 
mi, ti, gli, or le, ci, vi, loro ; as mi dude, ti duole, gli 
duole, &c. 

The impersonal verbs of themselves are, 
Accade, it happens. Nevica, it snows. 

Avviene, it falls out. Nonoccore, it is not necessary. 

Bdsta, it is enough. Pare, it seems. 

Bisogna, it must. Piove, it rains. 

Grandina, it hails. Lampeggia, it lightens. 

Tuona, 



VERBS. 149 

Tuona, it thunders ; and the like, which are conju- 
gated with the third person singular of each tense ; as, 

Indicative, Present. Bisog?ia, it must, or one must. 

Imperfect, Bisogndva, it was needful. 

Preterperfect-def. Bisogno, it was necessary. 

Future, Bisognera, it shall or will be needful. 

Optative. Che bisogni, that it may be necessary. 

Imperfect. Che bisugndsse, that it might be needful. 

Second Imperfect. Bisognerebbe, it should be ne» 
cessary. 

Infinitive. Bisogndre, to be needful. 

The particle si, which composes the second sort of 
impersonal verbs, is placed indifferently before or after 
the verbs ; as si t dice, or dicesi, they say ; si ama, or 
amasi, they love. In the like manner all the verbs 
active may become impersonal. They are conjugated 
with the third person singular and plural ; as, 

Present. A'masi, or si ama; si dmano, or dma?isi 9 
they love. 

Imperfect. Si amava t or amdvasi ; si amdvano, or 
amdvansi, they did love. 

f 4-f With respect to these verbs, observe, that 
when the noun that follows them is in the singular 
number, you must put the verb in the singular; if the 
noun be in the plural, you put the verb in the plural ; 
example, 

They praise the captain, si loda il capitdno. 
They praise the captains, si lodano i capitani. 
They see a man, si vede un uomo. 

They see men, si vedono iiomini. 

*g* We must also take notice, when the particle si 
is put after a verb that is accented, the letter s is 
doubled, and the accent dropped : example, 

Fdssi, for si fa, they do. 

Dirdssi, for si dird, they will say. 

The third sort of impersonal verbs are such as are 
conjugated with the pronouns personal, mi, ti, gli, or 
le ci,vi, loro, with the third person singular : example, 

Indicative, present. Mi dispiace, 1 am displeased, 
or sorry. 

Ti displace, thou art displeased. 

Gli or le dispiace, he or she is displeased. 

Ci 



150 VERBS. 

Ci displace, we are displeased. 
Vi dispidce, you are displeased. 
Displace toro, they are displeased. 
Imperfect. Mi dispiaceva, I was displeased. 
Preter-def. Mi dispidcque, I was displeased. 
Future. Mi dispiacera, I shall be displeased. 
Optative. Che mi dispidccia, that I may be displeased. 
Imperfect. Chemidispidcesse, That I were displeased. 
Second Imperfect. Mi dispiacerebbe, I should be 
displeased. 

Conjugate after the same manner, 

Mi accdde, it happens to me. 

Mi aggrada, it agrees with me. 

Mi avvime, it happens to me. 

Mi bisogna, it behoves me. 

Mi duole, I am ill, or it grieves me. 

Mi occorre, it happens to me. 

Mi pare, it seems to me. 

Mi pidce y it pleases me. 

Mi rincresce, it displeases me, or I am sorry. 

Mi sovviene, I remember. 
Many of those impersonal verbs have the third 
person singular and plural; as, 

My leg pains me, la gdmba mi duole. 
My eyes are painful, mi dolgono gli occhi. 
Your coat appears new to me, il vostro vestito mi 
pdre nuovo. 

Your, shoes seem to me too long, le vostre scdrpe mi 
pdjono troppo limghe. 



Hotv to express there is, there was. 

THERE is, there was, are expressed by the help of 
the Italian particle ci 9 which answers to the French 
particle y, and is sometimes an adverb that denotes the 
place where we are; as, 

Since I am here, I will dine here ; giacche sdno qui, 
ci pranzerb. 

But, when naming a place where we are not, we must 
use vi ; as, I have been in Holland, but I will never go 

there 



VERBS. 



151 



there again ; sono stdto in Olanda, ma non m tornero 
piu. 

There is, however, this difference between the Ita- 
lian ci, and the French y ; that as the French y is used 
in speaking of time, as, il y a un an, it is a year since ; 
the Italian ci is not ; as e un anno, or un anno fa ; sono 
due 7nesi, or due mesija. And so of all the tenses, 
putting the verb essere, to be, in the third person sin- 
gular or plural, according to the number in which we 
express ourselves. 

For the benefit of beginners, I will conjugate the 
impersonal verb c'e c'era, &c. there is, there was, &c. 
through all its tenses, and point out its use in men- 
tioning a place : 

Conjugation of the Impersonal Verb essere. 

Ci is changed into vi when you speak of different 
places ; but mentioning time, you must drop the ci 
and vu 



Singular. 

Ind. Pres. There is, ce 
or tfe. 

Imperfect. There was, 
c' era. 

Preter-def. There was, 
cifu. 

Preterp. There has been, 
c 9 e stdto. 

Preterplup. There had 
been, c'era stdto. 

Future. There shall be, 
ci sard 

Imperat. Let there be, 
ci sia, or siaci. 

Opt. That there maybe, 
che ci sia. 

Imperf. That there were, 
che ci fosse. 

Sec. Imp. There would 
be, ci sarebbe. 



Plural. 

There are, ci sono, or vi 
sono. 

There were, c' erano. 

There were, cifurono. 

There have been, ci sono 
stdti. 

The same, c' erano siati. 

The same, ci sardnno. 

The same, sidnci. 

The same, che ci sidno. 

The same, che cifossero 

The same, ci sarebbero. 

PreterperfV 



152 VERBS. 

Preterperf. That there had been, che ci or vi sia 
stdto ok che ci sidno stdti, or vi siano stdti. 

Preterpluperf. If there had been, se ci, or vi fosse 
stdto, or ci or vifossero stdti. That there had been, che 
vi fosse stdto, or che vifossero stdti. There would have 
been, ci sarebbe sldto, or vi sarebbero statu 

Future. When there had or shall have been, quando 
vi sard stdto, or quando vi sardnno stdti, 

Infin. To have been there, esservi stdto. Gerund, in 
having been there, essendovi stdto* 

*£* Note, in speaking of the feminine gender, we 
are to use statu, state, instead of stdto, stdti, 

*£* Remember, that if after the adverb ci or vi, you 
find the verb to have, and the tenses of the verb to have 
are followed by a participle, asAe has dined there, then 
the tenses of the verb to have, must be expressed by 
those of avere, and not by those of essere : examples, 

I have dined there, ci or vi ho pranzdto. 

Thou hast dined there, ci or vi hai pranzdto. 

He has lain there, ci or vi ha dormtto. 

We have read in it, ci or vi abbidmo letto. 

You have said to it, ci or vi avete detto. 

They have drank there, ci or vi hanno beviito. 

Observe the same rule throughout all the tenses ex- 
cept the participle stdto, which is never joined with the 
tenses of the verb avere : example, 

I have been there, ci or vi sono stdto or sidta. 

Thou hast been there, ci or vi sei stdto or stdta. 

And in like manner through all the tenses and per- 
sons. 

\* Observe, the particles ci and vi are sometimes 
omitted in the present tense ; thus we say, e un uomo, 
instead of ci e un uomo; sono ubmini, instead of ci sono 
uomini. 

*^* Learners of the Italian language are greatly at 
a loss how to render the following expressions, there is 
of it or them ; there is not of it ; is there of it ? is there 
not of it f there was of it ; there voas not of it, #c. And 
as many find these expressions difficult, I will explain, 
them at large for their greater ease, in the following 
conjugation: 

Conjugation 



VERBS. 153 



Conjugation of the verb impersonal there is of it, 
when it marks the place, through all its tenses. 

m, • r •* *u S ce n 'e } $ ce ne sono. 

There is of it or them, < ,*. } or «> 

<r ' £ ve n e ) [ ve ne sono. 

There is not of it, non ce n'e ; non ce ne sono. 

Is there of it ? ce ne ? ce ne sono ? 

Is there not of it ? non ce n'e ? non ce ne sono ? 

There was of it, ve tfera ; ve n" erano. 

There was not of it, non ve n* era ; non ve n* erano? 

Was there of it ? ve n* era ? ve n' erano ? 

Was there not of it ? non ve n* era ? non ve 71 erano ? 

There was of it, ve nefu ? ve nefiirono ? 

There was not of it, non ve nefu ; non ve ne fiirono? 

Was there of it ? ve nefu ? ve nefurono ? 

Was there not of it ? non ve nefu ? non ve nefurono ? 

There shall be of it, ve ne sara / ve ne sardnno. 
There shall not be of it, non venesara; nonvenesaranno. 
Shall there be of it ? ve ne sara ? ve ne sardnno ? 
Shall there not be of it ? nonvenesara? nonvenesaranno? 

That there may be of it, che ve ne sia : die ve ne siano. 
That there may not be of it, che non ve ne sia ; che non 

ve ne siano. 
That there were of it, che ve ne fosse ; che ve nefossero. 
That there were not of it, che non ve ne fosse j che non 

ve nefossero. 

There would be of it, ve ne sarebbe ; ve ne sarcbbero. 
There would not be of it, non ve ne sarebbe ; non vene 

sarcbbero. 
Would there not be of it ? non vene sarebbe? non ve ne 

sarebbero ? 

If there had been of it, se ve ne fosse stdto or statu ; se 

ve nefossero stdti or state. 
If there had not been of it, se non ve ne fosse stdto ; se 

non ve nefossero stdti, 

h5 Had 



154 VERBS. 

Had there been of it ? ve ne sarebbe stdto ? ve ne sareb~ 

bero stdti ? 
Had there not been of it ? non ve ne sarebbe stdto % or 

non ve ne sarebbero stdti f 

If there had been of it, se ve ne fosse stdto ; or se ve ne 

fossero stdti. 
If there had not been of it, se non ve ne fosse stdto ; se 
non ve ne fossero stdti. 

There would have been of it, ve ne sarebbe stato ; ve ne 

sarebbero stdti. 
There would not have been of it, non ve ne sarebbe stdto ; 

non ve ne sarebbero stdti. 

Would there have been of it ? ve ne sarebbe stdto ? ve ne 

sarebbero stdti ? 
Would there not have been of it ? non ve ne sarebbe 

stdto ? non ve ne sarebbero stdti f 

There will have been of it, ve ne sara stato ; ve ne sardn- 

no stdti. 
There will not have been of it, non venesara stato, non 

ve ne sardnno stdti. 

Shall there have been of it ? ve ne sara stato ? ve ne 

sardnno stati ? 
Shall there not have been of it ? non vene sara stdto f 

non ve ne sardnno stati ? 

For there having been too much of it, per esservene 

stdto troppo. 
In there having been too little of it, essendovene stdto 

troppo poco. 

•J* But if you express yourself in the feminine 
gender, you must say stdta, state, instead of stdto, 
stdti. 

We must also render, there is of it or them, by ce ne, 
in speaking of a place where we are ; and by ve ne, 
in mentioning a place where we are not ; but it often 

happens, 



PARTICIPLES. 15S 

happens, and especially in speaking of time, that they 
leave out the ce entirely : example, 

How many months is it? it is ten at least: qudnti- 
mesi sono f sono died almeno. 

Sometimes the phrase, there is of it or them, is ex- 
pressed by ne only ; as, how many months is it ; ten of 
them are past : qudnti mesi sono ? ne sono passdti died. 

Sometimes the whole is expressed ; as, how many 
months are there from this, to new-year's day ? there 
are ten of them : qudnti mesi sono di qui alP anno 
nuovo ? ce ne sono died, 

*^* When, after the pronouns conjunctive, mi, t% 
ci, vi, me, thee, us, you, you find the particle ci 
followed by a verb, there is no occasion to express it : 
Examples, 

He will see me there, mi vedra : he will give thee 
there, ti dara. 

We shall see you there, vi vedremo ; you will write 
to us there, ci scriverete* 



CHAP. V. 
Of PARTICIPLES. 

THE Participle (which ought to be called a supine) 
is a tense of the infinitive, which serves to form the 
preterperfects and preterpluperfects of all the verbs ; 
as, ho amdto, avcva amdto, 

Amdto, is a participle, and all the verbs in are form 
the participle in ato : as, amdto, cantdto, parldto, anddto, 
ddto, confessdto, adordto, studidto, &c. 

Of all the verbs in are, the verb fare alone has two 
fPs in the participle, where it makes fdtto, to distin- 
guish it from fdto, signifyingjfe. 

Amdto, is likewise a noun-adjective : example, uomo r 
amdto, donna amdia, libri amdii, Icttere amdte. 

Some participles of the first conjugation are fre- 
quently abridged ; as, 

AcconciO) 



156 



PARTICIPLES. 



[acconcidto, fitted. 

adorndtOf adorned. 

asciugdto, orasciuttdto, dried. 



Acconcio 
Ado? no 
Asciulto 
Avvezzo 
Cdrko 
Desto 
Fermo 
Gonfio 
Gudsio 
Ldcero 
Mdcero 
Manifesto 
Mozzo 

Netto y for 

Pago 
Pesto 
Privo 
Scemo 
Sconciq 
S&cco 
Stdnco 
Tocco 
Tronco 
Trovo 
Volto 
Voto 

And several others 
oat. 

The regular verbs ending in ere, form the participle 
in uto ; as creduto, ricevuto, temiito, goduto. 

The irregulars in ere have the participle in so or to : 
as, prendere, prho ; rendere, reso ; pidngere, pidnto ;. 
pungere, punto ; leggere, Utto ; scrivere, scritto. 

The verbs terminated in ire, in the infinitive, make 
their participles in ito ; as, sentrre, sentito ^nireijimto. 
Except apparire, which makes appdrso ; applaudire,- 
applduso ; aprire, aperto ; comparire, compdrso ; dire 9 
ditto ; morire, morto ; offrire, cfferto ; venire, venuto. 

* # * There are three sorts of participles, namely, ac- 
tive, passive and absolute. 

The active participles are composed of the verb avere r 



avvezzdto, 


accustomed 


caricdto, 


loaded. 


destdto, 


awaked. 


jfermdto 9 


stopt. 


gorrfidto, 


swelled. 


gitastdto, 


spoiled. 


lacerdto, 


torn. 


maeerdto, 


bruised. 


ma?iifestdto, 


manifested. 


mozzdtOf 


cut off. 


nettdto, 


cleaned. 


pagdto, 


paid. 


pesidto, 


pounded. 


privdto, 


deprived. 


scemdto, 


lessened. 


sconcidtOy 


disordered. 


seccdto, 


dried. 


stanedtv, 


wearied. 


toccdto, 


touched. 


troncdtOf 


cut off. 


trovdto, 


found. 


voltdto, 


turned. 


ivotato, 


emptied. 



which the use of authors will point 



ADVERBS. 157 

as, ho amato, aveva amdto ; ho ditto, hdi detto ; ho ere* 
duio ; ho sentito. 

The passive participles are preceded by the verb 
e'ssere ; as, sono amato, essendo crediito, &c. 

The absolute participles are of the same nature as 
those called absolute in Latin, and are composed of the 
gerund of the two auxiliary verbs having and being ; 
as, having loved, avendo amdto ; being loved, essendo 
amato ; being believed, essendo crediito. 

Having and being are often left out in Italian ; ex- 
ample, 

Having done that, Jatto quelh. 

Having said so, detto questo. 

That being done, fdtto quello. 

The sermon being done, jinita la predion. 

*** Observe that the Italians have a peculiar way 
of rendering the adverb after, by turning the ex- 
pression : examples, 

After he had done, Jatto cli ebbe. 

After he had spoken, parldto ch y ebbe. 

After he has written his scritto che avrd la sua lettera. 
letter. 

After they had supped, cendto ch f ebbero. 

See, in the Second Part, the Concord of Participles, 
where will be found a full solution of the several diffi- 
culties relating to that part of speech. 



CHAP. VI. 
Of ADVERBS. 

THE adverb is that part of speech, which gives 
more or less force to a word. The adverb has the same 
effect with the verb, as the adjective with the substan- 
tive ; it explains the accidents and circumstances of 
the action of the verb. 

There are many sorts ; as, adverbs of time, place, 
quantity, &c. 

Adverbs of time ; as, at present, noin, yesterday, to- 
day, never, always, in the mean time. 

Adverbs 



158 



ADVERBS. 



formed from adjectives, 

holily. 
richly. 
learnedly, 
highly. 



Adverbs of place ; as, where, here, from •whence, 
there, from hence, above, below, far, near. 

Adverbs of quantity ; as, how much, how many, so 
much, much, little, too much. 
* # * Many adverbs are 
changing o into amente ; as, 
Santo, santamente, 
Ricco, riccamente, 
Dotto, dottamente t 
A'llo, altamente, 
From adjectives in e, we likewise form adverbs, by 
adding mente to them : as, 

Costdnte, cost ant emente, constantly. 
JDiligente, diligent emente, diligently. 
Priidente, prudentemente, prudently. 
%t* But if the adjectives happen to end in le, we 
must remove the e, and put mente in its stead. 
Fedele, fedelmente, faithfully . 

U'mile, umilmente, humbly. 

Tale, talmente, such. 

In order to assist the memory of learners, I have 
here collected a number of adverbs, which by frequent 
repetition, may be easily retained, especially those 
terminating in mente. 

A Collection of Adverbs. 



1. 

Abbondantemente, abun- 
dantly 
Con ragione, meritamente, 
justly 
A capo,, at the end, or at 
the head 
A briglia sciolta, full speed 
Assolutamente, absolutely 
A cavalcioni, a-straddle 
A dirotte Idgrime, with 
downright crying 
Adesso, ora, or, at this time 
Adesso adesso, or' ora, now, 
immediately 



A pie zoppo, lamely 

A pdtti, upon condition 
Con pdtto die, upon condi- 
tion that 
Mai volentieri, against 

one's will 
Da parte, da banda, aside 
Attualmente actually 

Apposta, purposely 

Con pensiero di, in order to 
Addio, farewell 

Mirabilme\nte, a maraviglia,- 

admirably 
Accortamente, sagacemente 

cunningly 

In ginoccchioni, kneeling 

Alia 



ADVERBS. 



159 



Alia smaseelldta, with open 
mouth 
Leggiadramente, agreeably 
Altrove, elsewhere 

Cost, 

Cosi sia, so be it 

Agevolmente, easily 

Al coperto, al ripdro, under 
shelter 
AW oscuro, in the dark 
In som ma , a llafin e, in t h e e n d 
Infretta, in haste 

A lungo, at long run 

Amichevolmente, amicably 
A discrezione, at discretion 
Supino, on one's back 

Tacitamente, silently 

In dispart e, apart 

Per il dritto, the right way 
Per il rovescio, the wrong 
side outward 
A gdra, in emulation 

A prova, proof against 

AW improvviso, at unawares 
Senza la sapiita unknow 
ingly 
Su su, or via via, come 
away, away 
Con tempo, con dgio, at lei- 
sure 
Allora, then 

Anticamente, anciently 

Quasi, pretty near 

Apphnto, giusto, just so 
Posdomdni, dimdn V dltro, 
after to-morrow 
Adesso, ora, now 

Alia rovescia, against the 
grain 
In dietro, backward 

Malvolontieri, con rincresci- 
mento, with regret 



Cioe to wit 

Abbastdnza, enough 

Brancolone, tentone, grop- 
ing along 
V dltro jeriijeriV dltro, the 
day before yesterday 
Prima di, before that 

Al bdlzo, at the rebound 
Da capo, at the beginning 
In maniera alcuna, by no 
means 
Alia sprovvista, at una- 
wares 
Di sopra, above 

Oggi, to-day 

in vece, instead of 

Prima, before 

Qudnto prima, as soon as 
possible 
A'nche, also 

Si, cosi as, so 

Tdnto, cosi, as, as much as 
Grande qudnto, as much as 
Subito die, as soon as 

Nel resto, moreover 

Tdnto, as much as 

Qudnto, as much as 

Altre volte, formerly 

Attrimenti, se non, other- 



Altrove, 



wise 
somewhere else 



Laggiu below there 

Motto, much 

Assdipiie, molto piii much 

more 

Rene, well 

Presto,. quickly 

Via piu presto very soon, 

much sooner or quicker 

Rigidamente, 



160 



ADVERBS. 



Rigidamente, aspramente, 

rudel) 

Bestialmente, brutishly 



Or sit, via, come away 

Via dunque, come along 
Sta mattina, this morning 
Sta notte, this night 

Sta sera, questa sera, this 

evening 
Fin a tanto, till 

In tdnto, in the mean time 
Certo, sicuro, certainly' 
Sdsta, it is enough 

Cioe that is to say 

Per cid, it is therefore 

Culdamente, warmly 

Cdro, molto cdro dear, 

very dear 
Chiaramente, clearly 

Quanto, how much 

Quanto, quanta, quanti, 
qudnte, how many 
Come, siccome, as, since 
Come, how ? 

JDi continuo, continuamente, 
continually 
Correttamente, correctly 
Questa volt a , adesso, now 
JDi primo Idncio, all of a 

sudden 
Animosamente, coraggiosa 
mente, courageously 

Sordidamente, sordidly 
Cradelmente, cruelly 

Di poi t di qua inndnzi, 
hereafter 
Per I 9 addietro, qui avunti^ 
heretofore 
Di sotto, qui sotto, here- 
under 



Di sopra, qui sopra, here- 
upon 

4. 
Subito, di bella prima, at 
first 
D'altra parte, from another 
place 
Pericolosamente, danger- 
ously 
DavvantdggJOf di piu, over 
and above 
A cdso, by chance 

Tdnto meno, so much the 
less 
Tdnto piu che, so much 
the more 
Imperocche, whereas 

Sinceramente, sincerely 
Per tempo, a buon ora, 
early 

Di qua a died dnni, in ten 
years 

Di gran lunga, by far 

Su, in piedi, up, up 

Per tenia che, for fear that 
Sin ddifondamenti, qffatto, 
from top to bottom 
Fuori, abroad 

Gia, diggid already 

Quindi, from hence 

Domani, dimdni, to-mor- 
row 
Domattina, to-morrow 

morning 
Delia medesima onaniera, 
just so 
DalV una e dalV dltra parte, 
on both sides 
Di sdlto, at one jump 

In oltre, di piu, oltraccio, 
moreover 
Dopo, 



ADVERBS. 



161 



Dopo, since 

Dajeri in qua, since yes- 
terday 
Da chetempo ? dopo quando ? 
since when ? 
Da quel tempo in qu&, since 
that time 
Dacche, dopo che, since 
Di che sorte? in che ma 
niera ? after what manner? 
TJltimamente, lastly or lately 
Dictro, behind 

In dietro, backward 

Fin adesso till no 

Subito che, as soon as 

Ormdi, hereafte 

Solto, di sotto, under 

Sopra, di sopra, upon 

Di seguito, in continuance 
Di quando in quando, from 
time to time 
Avdnti, inndnzi, before 
Per Vawenire, hencefor- 
wards 
A schiena d 1 dsino, sharply 
ridged 
Dbnde, from whence 

Doppiamente, Jalsamente, 
doubly 
Da parte a pdrte, through 
and through 
Almeno, at least 

5. 

Sfacciatamhite, impudently 
Egualmhite, equally 

Ancbra, dnche, again, yet, 
already 
Hotolone, rolling along 
Insieme, together 

Dipoi, dopo, afterwards 



All 9 improvviso, unawares 
In sospeso, in dubbio, in 
suspense 
Intieramenie, qffatto, en- 
tirely 
Indarno, in vain 

lntorno, circa, about 

Capricciosamente, perduta- 
mente, all' eccesso, des- 
perately 
Spaventevolmente, dread- 
fully 
Giustamente, justly 

Stranamente, strangely 
A posta, a bella posta, a 
bello studio, on purpose 

6, 

Facilrnente, agevolmente, 
easily 
Per mancanza di, for want 
of 
Fissamente, stedfastly 

Pazzamente, madly 

Molto, very 

Liberamente, freely 

7. 

Via via, a voi a voi r 
make way, out of the 
way 
Gratis, gratis 

Poco, little 

Di cdso pmsdto, wilfully 



Arditamente, boldly 

Altamente, highly 

Felicemenie, 



162 



ADVERBS. 



Felicemente, happily 

Jeri, yesterdax 

Jer sera, last night 

Vergognosamente, shame- 
fully 
Fuori, out 



Mai, nevei 

Qui, qud, here, there 

Subito, immediately 

Appunto, exactly 

Sin,Ji?i, inshi} infin, until 
Fin dove ? how far ? 

10. 

Li, Id ; Non Ionian o di la, 
there ; not far from hence 
Vilmente, basely 

LonidnO) lungi, far 

E* uhpizzo f it is a great 
while 

11. 

Adesso, ora, now 

Male, ill 

Malgrddo mio, in spite of 

me 

Gudi a, woe be to 

A'nche, ancbra, eziandio, 

also 

Net medesimo tempo, at the 

same time 

Meglio, better 

Medidnte, provided that 

Minore, least 



12. 



Non, 



Nondimeno, 7iulladimeno 9 
nevertheless 
Liberamente, freely 

Ne, neither ; ne dncJie, nor 
also 
No, signor no, no, sir 

Nonostdnte, notwithstand- 
ing 

13. 

Si, yes 

Dove, 6ve, where 

Oltre, besides 

Scopertamente, apertamente, 
openly 

14. 

Zitto ! zitto, hush ! not a 
word 

A cdso, by chance 

A mente, by heart 

Di qud on this side 

Di la, on that side 

Verbi grdzia, per esempio, 
for example 
Pero, however, therefore 
PocOf a little ; ogni poco, urt 
tantino, ever so little 
Forse, perhaps 

Piu, more 

In quanta, as for 

Quasi, almost 

15. 

Qudndo, when 

In qudnt' a me, as for me 

Alle volte, sometimes 

Alqudnto, somewhat 

Pace, pari, quits 

Comunque sia, however 
16. Di 



PREPOSITIONS. 



163 



16. 

Di rado, 
Scambievolmente, 

In somma, 
Niente, 

17. 

Saviamente, 
Senza dubbio, 



seldom 
recipro- 
cally 
in short 
nothing 



wisely 

without 

doubt 

Secondo, according 

Sossopra, alia rinfusa, con- 

Jusamente, topsy-turvy 

Verso la sera, towards the 

evening 

Sta sera, questa sera, this 

evening 

Abbastanza, sufficiently 

18. 
Tdnto, so much 

Ognipoco, un tantino, never 
so little 



Adesso, poco fa, or* ora, 
presently 
Or questo, or quello, some- 
times one and sometimes 
the other 
Tdrdi, late 

Troppo, too much 

Presto, quick, soon ; cost 
presto, so soon 

Sempre, always 

Afdtto, altogether 

Ad un trdtto, all of a sudden 
Adagio, softly ! softly ! 

19. 



Presto, 


quick 


Ecco, 


behind 


Volentieri, 


willingly 


Veramente t 


truly 



20. 
Ci, or vi, here, to it, &c. 



CHAP. VII. 

Of PREPOSITIONS.* 

THE Preposition is a part of speech prefixed to the 
articles, nouns, pronouns, and verbs, as has been men- 
tioned in the introduction. 

Every preposition requires some case after it, as you 
will observe in the following^ collection : 
Gen. Per rispetto di, because of. 

Per rispetto vostro, or di vof, on your account. 
Per rispetto mio, or di me, on my account. 
Dat. In quanta a', alV or Alio, with respect to. 

J)' intorno, a. Gen. all* intomo di, round the. 
Gen. Ace. dopo, after. 
Gen. Dietro, behind. 
Gen. and Dat. Di dietro, behind. Gen 



See Exercises, p. 62. 



164. PREPOSITIONS. 

Gen. Alldto, vicmo di, by the side of; ore Dative. 
Gen. and Abl. Di la del or dal, on that side of. 
Gen. and Abl. Di qua del or dal, on this side of. 
Ace. Avdnti, Gen. prima, before. 
Gen. Prima di me, before me. 

Avdnti voi, prima di voi, before you. 
Ace. Con, with. 

Gen. Dat. In mezzo del, in mezzo al, in the middle of. 
Gen. Appie della, at the feet of the. 

Appresso di, near to. 
Gen. and Dat. AW intorno del, intorno al, round the. 

Da, in casa di, at. 
Gen. and Abl. Dal, ddllo, in casa del, at the. 

Ddlla, in casa della, at the. 
Gen. and Ace. Contra del, contra il, against the. 

Contra me, contra di me, against me. 
Ace. In, In. 

Nel, nello, nella, in the. 
Fra due giorni, in two days. 
Abl. Di qua dal, on this side of the. 

Di la dal, on that side of the. 
Dat. and Ace. Dentro al or nel, within the. 
Gen. Fuoridel, without the. 
Dat. and Ace. Dietro al, dittro il, behind the. 
Gen. and Dat. Sotto del, solto al, under the. 
Gen. and Ace. Sopra del, sopra il, upon the. 

In, before, a noun, is expressed in Italian by in. 

Dat. Di nascosto al suo padre, unknown to his father. 

Ace. Fra, trd, between. 

Gen. and Ace. Verso di me, or me, towards me. 

Ace. Incirca, round about, thereabout. 

Ace. Eccetto il, except the. 

Gen. Fuori del, without the. 

Gen. A lato della mia casa, close to my house ; or, a lato 

a casa mia, Dat. 
Gen. Dat. Ace. Itasente del, al, il muro, close to the 

wall. 
Dat. Sin, Jin, insin, ivfin, until. 

Gen. Abl. Lontdno della casa, or ddlla edsa, far 
from the house. 

Lontano, 



CONJUNCTIONS. 



165 



Gen. Dat. Ace, 

Ace. 

Gen. pat. Ace. 

Gen. Ace. 

Gen. Ace. 

Dat. Ace. 

Ace. 

Gen. and Ace. 

Gen. Dat. Ace, 



Lontdno, lungi, far. 

Lungo del, til, il,fume, along the river: 

Per, by or for. 

Presso, vicino, near. 

Senza, senza di, del, or della, without. 

Secondo il, according to. 

Sotto la tdvola, or delta, under the table. 

Sopra, upon or on. 

Circa all' affdre, V affdre, concerning 

the business. 
In qudnto al, concerning the. 
Verso il, verso del, towards the. 
Dirimpetto del, al, il, over against the. 



CHAP. VHI. 
. Of CONJUNCTIONS.* 
CONJUNCTIONS serve to connect phrases to- 
gether ; most of the words terminating in che and que 
are conjunctions; as, benche, dnche,adunque. There are 
others of a different sort, as you will observe in the 
following collection : 

Con pdtto che, upon con- 
dition that 
A'nzi, at contrdrio, on the 

contrary 
Accib che, accioche to the 

end that 
Con tutto cib, notwith- 
standing all that 
A'nche, also 

Benche although 

Perche, imperocche, for 
Siccome, whereas 

Dunque, then 

Perciocche, forasmuch, as 
Ancora still, yet 

Quantunque, although 

In somma, at last 



so that 

as 

and 

but 

neverthe- 
less 



In oltre, besides, over and 
above 
Di maniera che, 
In qudnto, 
E 4 ed, 
Ma, 

Nientedirncno, 
Nondimeno, 
Nulladimeno, 

Ne, nor 

A T e dncliio, nemmen'io, nor 
I neither 
Nemineno, neither 

Nonostdnte che, notwith- 
standing that 
0, ovviro, oppure, or 

Perche, because 

In 



* See Exercises, on the Conjunction, p. 89. 



166 



INTERJECTIONS. 



In cdso chd, 
Perb 
Datoche, 
Perche ? 
Purche 



in case that 

therefore 

suppose that 

why 

provided that 



Piuttosto che, rather than 



Qudndo dnche, though 

Benche, sebbene, con tutfo 
che, although that 
Se, if 

Stdnte che, seeing that 



CHAP. IX. 
Of INTERJECTIONS. 

The last Part of Speech. 

AN Interjection is an expression of affection or pas- 
sion, introduced among the other parts of speech. 



Example. 

Ajuto ! ajuto ! help ! help ! A vol ! a voi ! stand away ! 

Bravo ! brdvo ! well done ! A'lto ! halt I 

fire ! fire ! Ahimc! Ohime ! dhi lasso \ 
to arms ! alas i 



Alfuoco_ 
All drmi ! 



luono ! buono ! 



good ! 
good 



alas ! 

Zitto ! zitto ! hush ! peace ! 

guuu : Silenzio ! silence ! 

jt'nimo, cordggio ! come Via, via ! away ! away ! 

cheer up ! Ah ! ahi ! Ah ! 

Oh ! uh ! puh ! fie ! fie ! Oh ! Oh ! 

Vergogna ! for shame ! 



THE END OF THE FIRST PART. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 167 



PART II. 



THE Second Part contains Eight Treatises, extracted 
from the best authors, and particularly from those who 
have written on the purity of the Italian language. 

TREATISE. 
I. Of the Italian Orthography. 
II. Of the Italian accent. 

III. Of the Italian Syntax. 

IV. Remarks on some Verbs and Prepositions. 

V. Of Composition; and the Rules for writing and 

speaking Italian correctly. 
VI. Of Poetical Licences, and of the different Syn- 
onymous Names of the Heathen GodSi 
VII. Of Improper and Obsolete Words. 
VIII. Of Expletives, Compound Words, Capitals, and 
Punctuation. 



FIRST TREATISE. 

CHAP. I. 
Of ORTHOGRAPHY. 

THE Italian Orthography has this advantage, that 
all the words are written as they are pronounced. 

%* Observe as a general rule, that you must double 
the consonants at the beginning of compound words; 
as, abbdttere, affanndre, appoggidre, oppresso, difficile, 
differire, offendere, raccogliere, rassettdre, raddoppidre. 

* # * They write diffendere, and difendere, but difesa 
ought to be written with a single f. See Lod. Dolce, 
del raddoppiamento delle consondnti. 

You must also double the g, when the vowels io and 
ia, which come after it, make but one syllable ; as, 

appoggio, 



168 ORTHOGRAPHY. 

appdggio, loggia, pwggia t Mdggio, rdggio ; a support, 
a lodge, rain, May, a ray. When the vowels io and ia 
constitute two syllables, or when the letter i is pro- 
nounced harder than in the preceding examples, you 
must not double the g ; as, dgio, easy ; privilegio, pri- 
vilege ; malvdgio, bad. See Dolce, Buommattei, and 
BdrtolL 

i The letter g is also doubled in the infinitive of verbs, 
and in all their tenses, when they have a vowel before 
gere ; as, leggere, reggere, friggere ; but if there be a 
consonant before g, then g remains single ; a.s,fingere, 
pingere, porgere. 

Those words which the English begin with a j con- 
sonant, that is, when it is followed by a vowel ; as 
Jesus, just, judge, are written with a g by the Italians, 
in order to render their pronunciation more delicate ; 
as, Gesu, giusto, giudice. 

Captllo, with a single p, signifies hair. 

Cappello, with a double pp, signifies a hat. 

There is also another difference between these two 
words ; that in the former the letter e has a close 
sound, and in the latter, open. 

jSbMias two significations : when it is a substantive, 
it signifies the sun ; il sol, del sol, al sol, for il sole, del 
sole, al sole. 

Sol, when it is an adjective, signifies alone, or 
sometimes only. 

Suol has likewise two significations : when it is a 
noun, it signifies the earth ; as, il suol, or suolo, &c. 

Suol, a verb, signifies he is used ; as, suol venire, he 
is used to come. 

Z is put single, when preceded by a consonant ; as, 
sperdnza, licenza; but it must be doubled between two 
vowels ; as, Bellezza, pezzo, nozze, except Lazdro, 
Fazio, and a few other words. 

N. B. The Italians never make use of the grave 
accent, but where it is necessary to distinguish words, 
and to fix the pronunciation : therefore we have 
placed it only on words marked in the Introduction, 
and on some others which you will find in the second 
treatise, on the Italian accent. 

We 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 169 

The Italians do not double the letter z, when stand- 
ing with three vowels, the first of which immediately 
following the z, is an i; therefore it would be wrong- 
to write azzione, action, &c. ; but azione, &c. 

Piazza, a square, is spelled, like a great many others 
of the like quality, with a double z. 

The letter x of Latin words, used often in Italian 
before c, is changed into c: example, to excite, eccitdre; 
excellency, eccellenza; and when it does not happen to 
be before the c, it is sometimes changed into a double 
s, and sometimes into a single s ; as, to exalt, esaltdre; 
graciously to hear, esaudire, &c. ; the maxim, la mds- 
sima ; Alexander, Alessdndro, &c. The x is changed 
into a simple s when the vowel with which it forms a 
syllable is followed by a consonant, or another vowel 
which belongs to the same syllable: example, exaurire 
in Latin, is transformed into esaurire in Italian; but 
axis is transformed into asse, because the i which fol- 
lows x is followed by the consonant s, which, together 
with the i and the x, forms but one syllable : asis is 
spelt axis. 

A great many of the Academicians of La Crusca, 
put the letter z before the vowel i, where the common 
orthography uses the letter c ; for instance, instead 
of pronouncing and writing Francese, French ; pro- 
nuncidre, to pronounce, &c. they write and pronounce 
Franztse, pronunzidre, &c. 

The masculine relative plural li is written with a g 
when followed by a vowel ; example, I have some 
books, and I purchased them at Frankfort fair : Ho 
dei libri, e gli ho comprdti alia fiera di Frdncoforte. 

It is better to write cherico than chierico ; cirusico, 
than cerusico or chirurgo, a surgeon. 

The syllables de and re, in the beginning of English 
words, generally become di and ri in the beginning of 
Italian ; as, to destroy> distriiggere ; to renew, rinno- 
vdre, &c. 

It was formerly the custom to write several adverbs 
and prepositions separately, which now make but one 
word ; but they double the first consonant of the latter 
word, which is joined to the former, when this ends by 
a vowel : for instance, gid che, since, giacche ; in tdnto, 
I fra 



170 Of the ITALIAN 

fra tdnto, in the mean while ; intanto, fratt&nto ; a cib 
che, a Jin che, to the end that ; accioche, affinche ; si 
come, as, siccome; adossoil suo nemico, upon his enemy, 
adosso al suo nemico ; oltra a cib, besides, oltraccib : di 
nanzi al giudice, before the judge, dinanzi al giudice ; 
ubmo da bene, an honest man, uomo dabbene. 

After is expressed by dippoi with, the verbs, and by 
dopo, with a single p, before the nouns. 

It is true nevertheless, is elegantly rendered in Ita- 
lian by egli e non per tanto vero. 

Non v' e scuse, signifies there is no room for excuse ; 
and this is an ellipsis, instead of non v e luogo a scuse. 

We express several by parecchi for the masculine, 
and by parecchie for the feminine : example, several 
masters of languages, parecchi maestri di lingua ; se- 
veral women, parecchie donne. 

For which, or wherefore, is expressed in Italian by 
per lo che, or per la cjual cosa, or per cib. 

Ne', with an apostrophe, signifies in the in the plural, 
when we are speaking of the masculine gender : ex- 
ample, in the gardens, ?ze' or nei giardini. 

As there is no future tense, no second preterimper- 
fect in the Italian language, that terminates in arb and 
arei, except sarb, I shall be, and sarei, I should be ; 
starb, I shall remain ; starei, I should remain ; faro, I 
will do ; farei, I should do ; darb, I shall or will give ; 
darM, I should or would give; saprb, I shall or will 
know ; saprei, I should know ; hence we neither say nor 
write amarb and amarei, &c, but arnerb and amerei. 

The Italians usually place the particles si, vi, 
or the relative ne, and such like, after the persons of 
Terbs marked with a grave accent; but then they drop 
that grave accent, and repeat the consonant of those 
particles ; for instance, my brother will repent, mio 
fratello pentirassi; I will give you an inkstand, da- 
rovvi fan calamdjo. 

Th e ^ m £ ^ ias &i yen an A re ha dato cento mila 

hundred thousand livres lire (ilia cittd di Parigi, 

to the city of Paris, and e daranne cinqu&nta a 

he will give fifty to the cjuilla di Lione, 



town of Lyons. 



CHAP. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 171 

CHAP. II. 
Of the APOSTROPHE. 

THE Apostrophe is a mark made like a comma, in- 
serted between two letters, to denote the retrenchment 
of a vowel ; as, V amore, V ammo, V onore, V uomo. 

The Italians still observe the rule of old authors, 
never to make use of the apostrophe but when it 
renders the pronunciation more delicate ; and not so 
frequently as those who have but a superficial know- 
ledge of the language. 

The apostrophe is generally placed after the articles, 
if they precede a word commencing with a vowel ; as, 
Vdnime, delVanime; Vdnima, delVdnima; V onore, delV 
onore, &c. 

See what we have said concerning the apostrophe, 
treating of the articles, p. 6, and 38. 

We sometimes meet with lo'mpero, for Vimpero ; 
le'nsidie for Vinsidie ; but this ought rather to be 
avoided than imitated. 

%* Sometimes there is an elision of the article il, by 
cutting oft" its first letter, which is quite the reverse of 
other elisions, by which we drop the vowel at the end 
of words ; and when the article il happens to follow a 
word terminating in a vowel, the i of the article il is 
cut off, and the preceding word continues entire, with- 
out any abbreviation ; as, sopral tetto, for sopra il tetto, 

E"l piu garbdto, e Hpiu cortese, for il, 

Tuttol mondo sa, for tutto il mondo sa. 

Fral si el no, for fra il, &c. 

Sul mezzo di, for su il, &c. 

Sel capitdno comdnda, e ragionevole che'l solddlo ob- 
bedisca, for se il, and che il, 

N. B. Observe, in regard to this elision of the ar- 
ticle il, that the best modern authors constantly make 
use of it ; and the reason they allege is, that the i has 
a harsher sound than any of the other vowels. 

Sometimes we make an elision of the article lo, even 
i 2 before 



172 Op the ITALIAN 

before words beginning with a consonant, and the two> 
words coalesce into one ; as, 

nol so, "1 f non lo so. 

sel crede, > for ■< se lo crede. 

vel prometto, J five lo pron 



The apostrophe is also put after mi, ti, ci, vi, di, si, 
ne, when they precede a vowel or the letter h ; as, 
rnamdte, Vascblto, Vintendo, simpbrta, m'avete, s'in- 
tende, vHngdnna, Vdnima, d' Antonio, narde, n'avro, 
Tihiii, nhdnno. 

Words abbreviated are written with an apostrophe ; 
as, de signbri, for dei signbri ; pie' for piede ; me' for 
meglio, in poetry ; co y for cbi or colli. 

CHAP. III. 

Of the Words that must he retrenched. 

THE last syllable of the subsequent five words, 
uno, hello, grande, sdnto, quello, hubno, must be re- 
trenched when they precede a word beginning- with a 
consonant; example, un gibrno, hel giardmo, san Pietro, 
quel pane, bubn libro ; and not uno gibrno, hello giar- 
dino, &c. 

Before masculine nouns, if the subsequent word com- 
mences with a vowel, or an h, you only cut off the 
final vowel, and put an apostrophe when there are two 
consonants ; example, un amico, helV aspetto, gran 
ingegno, sant' Antonio, quell' ubmo, bubn aspetto. 

Before the feminine nouns beginning with a conso- 
nant, grande is the only one of those words that we 
abridge, both in the singular and the plural ; as, una 
edsa, bella cdmera, gran famiglia, santa Maria, quelle 
signbra, belle edse, gran ricchezze, sdnte ckiese, quUle 
virtil. 

The masculine plurals of the six preceding words 
are, uni, belli, grdndi or gran, sdnti, quelli, babni. 

The feminine plurals are, une, belle, grdn or grandly 
sdnte, quelle, bubne, without any other abbreviation 
than of grdn ; and even this sometimes makes grdndi 
with nouns commencing with a vowel ; as, grdndi 
dnime, or dnime grdndi. 

You 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 173 

You may also retrench the final vowel of the words 
that have one of these four letters. /, m, n, r, for their 
penultima; as, 

II carnovdl passdto, qudl signore, instead of il car- 
novdle and quale. 

Andidm presto, for andidmo presto. 

Aman per Vonde i velbci delfini, instead of dmano. 

Fior gratOy cubr generoso, instead ofjiore and cuore. 

N. B. When the retrenchment falls upon a word 
with two final consonants, you must put an apos- 
trophe ; as, crederann* allora, instead of crederanno 
allora ; vedemm' altri venir, for vedemmo altri venir. 
But in the modern orthography they write indifferently, 
vedemmo altri, or vedemm altri, and more generally 
vedem altri, with only one m, and without apostrophe. 

The words that have m or n for the penultima, are 
not so frequently retrenched as those that have I or r. 
If we should be directed by the opinion of the best 
authors, the following chapter would be sufficient for 
our purpose. 



CHAP. IV. 

Of the Words that must not be retrenched. 

THE vowel which terminates a sentence, or which 
precedes a comma, or any other stop, must never be re- 
trenched ; therefore we ought not to write v. s. ha una 
bella man, chi e quel signor ? quelVuomo e gran ; but 
v. s. ha una bella mdno, chi e quel signore? quelVuomo h 
grdnde ; and so of the rest. 

Neither must the words terminated in a, when they are 
before a consonant, be retrenched, except bra, ancora, 
Jinora, allora, talora ; for we may write, or su signori, 
ancor non viene; but it would be wrong to write, una 
picciol cdsa, una bel mdno, instead of una bella mdno, 
una picciola cdsa. 

Accented words must never be abbreviated : such, 
for example, as, faro, dirb. 

In not retrenching in the plural, the words which 
have an I before the last letter, you are warranted by 

the 



174 Of the ITALIAN 

the authority of the best authors ; therefore, you must 
write amdbili persone, fdvole ben trovdte, parole scelte? 
nobili cavalieri. The singular number is more apt to 
admit of this abbreviation. 

To write correctly, you must never abridge Apollo, 
affdnno, tdllo, duro, ingdnno, pegno, oscuro, sostegno, 
strdno, vello ; therefore you must not write Apol, affdn, 
tdl, dur, &c. 

* # * The words beginning with an s, followed by a 
consonant, oblige the preceding word to terminate in a 
vowel ; as, bello studio, grdnde stdto, quello spirito, 
essere stdto\; and not bel studio, grdn stdto, quel spi- 
rito, esser stdto. 

*£* Observe, that if the preceding word cannot ter- 
minate in a vowel, that which commences with an s, 
followed by a consonant, takes an i before it ; as, per 
isdegno, in iscuola, instead of per sdegno, in scuola. See 
Ferrdnte Longobdrdi, Lod. Dolce, and Bentivoglio. 

N. B. In the beginning of a period, or when the 
sense is interrupted by a colon, or semicolon, we may 
omit the insertion of the vowel i. 

We never retrench the e of se, signifying if, except it 
be followed by another e ; for instance, we do not say 
s'dmo lo studio, if I love study, but se dmo lo studio. 
On the contrary, we do not say, se esercitasse Vdrte, 
if he exercised the art, but s'esercitdsse Vdrte, by reason 
that esercitdsse begins with an e; example, I have seen 
my mother, and given her a gold snuff-box, ho veduto 
mia mddre, e le ho ddto una scdtola d'oro: or, he loves 
Antony, dma Antonio, If we were to cut off the e 
from le, in the former sentence, we should not know 
whether this V was in the accusative or dative, in the 
singular or plural ; and if we were to retrench the 
final a from the word dma, we should not be able to 
tell whether it was the first or third person of the 
present indicative, or the subjunctive, or the third 
person of the preter-definite. You must therefore 
write, without any elision of the vowel, ho veduto mia 
mddre, e le ho ddto, &c. dma Antonio, and the rest in 
the same manner. 

You must not retrench the e in che, when the follow- 
ing word begins with an i, for it is the i that ought 

rather 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 17-5 

rather to be retrenched : but when this i is the plural 
of the definite article, which does not admit of this 
elision, then you are to pronounce the che and i both 
together, as if it were only one word : example, God 
grant the times may be good, and the winds be not 
very high next winter ; then, if my brother i^nthony 
is well, and my cousin Harry is in town, I will go to 
Paris : Dio voglia che' I tempo sia buono, e eke i venti 
non 8ie.no gaglidrdi 7 verno prossimo ; allora, se Anto- 
nio mio fratello stara bene, e s Enrico mio cugino sara 
in cittci, andrb a Parigi. 

We never retrench the i from ci, us, before the 
vowels a and o ; because it would render the pronun- 
ciation too harsh : hence we do not say, il principe 
c aveva promesso cento scudi, the prince had promised 
us a hundred crowns, but ci aveva; V. S. c' onora, 
you do us honour, but ci onora. 

It would be extremely proper, if, before words be- 
ginning with the letter z, we were not to retrench the 
vowel, so as not to say, buon zucchero, good sugar ; 
gran zdzzera, a large head of hair : but buono zuc- 
chero, grdnde zdzzera. 

In Dante, Petrarch, Ariosto, Guarini, Tasso, Marini, 
and all the poets, we find several tenses of the verbs 
abridged. See farther on this head, in the treatise of 
Poetic Licences, where I have arranged them in alpha- 
betical order. 



SECOND 



176 Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 

SECOND TREATISE. 
Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 

THE accent, which is the very soul of pronunciation, 
is the stronger or weaker elevation of the voice on 
particular syllables, and the manner of pronouncing 
them, shorter or longer. 

I intend to speak here only of the accent which the 
Italians make use of in writing, and which we find in 
their printed books. 

The Italians, indeed, are acquainted with two ac- 
cents, but they make use of one only, namely, the 
grave, which is figured by an oblique stroke from the 
left to the right, after this manner ( v ). It is put only 
in the last syllable of some words ; as, amb, when it 
happens to be a verb, as, parlerb. 

N. B. The other accent, called acute, is a contrary 
mark to that of the grave, as may be seen in the fol- 
lowing words, dmano, amavano, &c. The Italians never 
note it down ; so that if we sometimes meet with it in 
books that teach the principles of their language, as is 
now the case in this grammar, it is with a view of 
conveying thereby a just idea of the Italian accentua- 
tion. 

CHAP. I. 

Of the Grave Accent. 

THE Italian nouns in td, which in English termi- 
nate in ty, and in Latin in tas, are marked with a 
grave accent ; as, puritd, castitd, santitd, maestd, gra- 
vitd, &c. These words form the plural in td, without 
any alteration. 

But they do not place an accent on the a in visita, 
because it does not come from a Latin word in tas; 
neither are we to dwell upon the last syllable; and, 
moreover, it makes the plural visite and not visita. 

The 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 177 

The Italians also place a grave accent on nouns ter- 
minating" in u; as, virtu, servitu, &c. 

Monosyllables ending in o or a, according to some 
grammarians, are accented ; as, do, da; fb, fa ; pub, 
sd ; stb, std. But I should prefer the opinion of those 
who do not accent them, because a monosyllable ever 
preserves the same quantity, whether it be accented 
or not ; so that the accent, in that case, only serves to 
distinguish one word from another ; as, da, he gives, 
from the indefinite article da, from. 

They likewise put the grave accent on the first and 
third person singular of the future tense ; as, canterb, 
goderb, darb, canter d, goderd, dara. 

*J* Observe, that we may transpose the monosylla- 
bles which we happen to find before verbs accented on 
the last ; and then we must double the first letter of 
the monosyllable, and drop the accent of the verb; as, 
I have them, holle, for le ho ; I will do it, farbllo, for 
lo faro ; he showed me, mostrommi, for mi mostrb ; he 
heard me, sentimmi, for mi senii. 

The manner of transposition, after the tenses of ac- 
cented verbs, is very common in poetry. 

The verbs are marked with a grave accent in the 
third person singular of the preter-definite, whenever 
the first person terminates in two vowels ; as, amdi, 
amb credei, crede; dormii, dormi. 

If the first person of the preter-definite does not ter- 
minate in two vowels, there is no accent on the third. 

For which reason we put no accent on the last syl- 
lable of vinse, arse, prese, diede, fece, stette, which, in 
the first person, make vinsi, or si, prhi, diedi, feci, 
stetti. 

N. B. The Italians also put a grave accent on di, a 
day ; and on di, the imperative of the verb dire, to say; 
on ^, it is; on li and Id, there; to show that these words 
are to be pronounced with greatet emphasis, and with 
a somewhat longer pause ; as also to distinguish the 
above-said two dl's from di, the genitive indefinite, which 
is sounded without a pause at all; they likewise mark a 
grave accent on U, there, to distinguish it from li, the 
relative masculine plural ; as, I promise three crowns, 
and I give them, prometto tre scudi, e li do : and on Id, 
i 5 to 



178 Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 

to distinguish it from la, the relative feminine singu- 
lar ; as, the princess writes a letter, and causes it to 
be put in the post : la principessa scrive una lettera 9 
e la fa metter alia posta. 

The grave accent is also put on qui and qua, here ; 
on costi and costd, there ; giil, below, down ; sii, up ; 
piu, more ; cos?, so, or thus ; si, yes ; because those 
words are to be sounded somewhat stronger, and, in 
some measure, with a greater pause ; but, on the other 
monosyllables, they do not mark a grave accent, for it 
would be entirely superfluous, as they are always pro- 
nounced in the same manner. 

We therefore do not accent da from the ablative in- 
definite : a, to; ma, but ; ne, of it, of them, or us ; re > 
king ; o, or ; and others of the like nature ; because 
no confusion or obscurity can arise from thence, as you 
will perceive by the following example : particularly 
with respect to da and a, the two monosyllables which 
seem to be somewhat equivocal, but by no means are so. 

Ne, when it means neither or not, is accented, to 
distinguish it from ne, a pronoun conjunctive. 

Alexander gives his word as an honest man, and he 
has no difficulty to give it to Peter and Paul, or to 
any other person. 

Aless&ndro da la sua parola da galantuomo, e non 
ha veruna difficoltd di dcirla a Pietro ed a Paolo? o a 
chi si sia. 

You see, therefore, very clearly, that in this exam- 
ple, the first del is the verb, the second is the ablative 
definite ; and that the first ha is in like manner a verb, 
being particularly written with an h, and that the other 
a's are datives indefinite. 



CHAP. II. 

Of the Pronunciation of Nouns. 

WE have mentioned, in the preceding chapter, that 
the Italians sometimes make use of the grave accent, 
and particularly in the examples above given ; but as 
to what concerns the acute accent, we may venture to 
affirm, that it is used by no modern Italian, at least 

who 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 179 

%vho understands his own language : because without 
insisting that it would be impossible for the printer, 
though ever so exact, to mark it wherever it might be 
wanting, it would occasion such a strange embarrass- 
ment and confusion in the letters, that it would be 
scarcely possible to read them. In order, therefore, 
to avoid the frequent repetition of the grave and acute 
accents, I have discovered a method which to me ap- 
pears very easy and clear, and which will be of great 
use to such as are desirous of learning this language, 
and even to the Italians themselves. But before I 
enter upon an explanation of the particular rules ar- 
ranged here in an alphabetical order, it will be neces- 
sary to give your attention to t\i&> general rules con- 
tained in the five following numbers. 
No. I. 

All nouns must be pronounced either short or long ; 
and their short or long sound depends entirely on their 
penultima syllables, that is, the last but one ; for all 
the other syllables are to be pronounced steadily and 
uniformly, that is, without making use of any brevity, 
except these two nouns, dugure, an augur; cl&usola, a 
clause ; which have the antepenultima (that is, the 
last but two) short; and some others mentioned in 
the exception of the letter c. 

In order to know in what manner you are to sound 
this penultima syllable, observe the penultima letter 
of the noun you want to pronounce, and look for that 
letter in the following arrangement, where you will 
see the rule with its exceptions ; as, for example, if you 
want to know whether the noun rammdrico, regret ; 
ought to be pronounced short or long, you must look 
for the letter c, which is the penultima letter of the 
noun rdmmarico, marked in the alphabetical order ; 
you must also examine the exception ; and if you do 
not find it there, then you are to conform to the rule 
which says, all nouns that have the letter c for their 
penultima, are pronounced short. 

No. II. 

Nouns of two syllables have no rule at all, because 
they are subject to neither brevity nor length : except 

a very 



180 Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 

a very small number, which will be found in their 
proper places of exception. I shall give you here, as a 
general rule, all such nouns as have two consonants 
before the filial vowel, as maciltnte, cangiamento, make 
the penultima syllable long, of whatever number of 
syllables they consist ; except a few, which you will 
find under the letters r and t. 

No. III. 

Neither is there any need of a rule for nouns which 
have a grave accent marked on the last vowel; it is 
sufficient to know how to pronounce one of them pro- 
perly ; for example, carita ; and you will be able to 
pronounce calamitd, veritd, virtil, bonta, and all others 
of the same kind, because you are to sound them all 
with the same degree of quickness. 
No. IV. 

All feminine nouns follow the rule of the masculines, 
from which they are derived. All the plurals follow 
the rule of their singulars, and compound nouns those 
of their simples. 

No. V. 

There are some nouns which the Italians pronounce 
as they please, that is, either long or short; and of 
these I have mentioned some in the exceptions to the 
rules. With regard to poetic nouns, we must be di- 
rected by the measure of the verse ; for poets have a 
licence to abbreviate and lengthen a great many words. 
You pronounce according to the custom of the coun- 
try, when they happen to be barbarous and foreign 
names, and all of Hebrew and Greek derivations. 
Likewise the proper names of persons, families, towns, 
provinces, &c. Remember the proverb, In paese ove 
vaiy usa cib che trovi. 

Let us now proceed to the particular rules. 

A. 

Nouns having the letter a for the penultima, are 
very few among the Tuscans, and you must pronounce 
them long ; as, Archelao, Nicoldo, Sta,7iisl&o. 

B. Nouns 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



181 



B. 

Nouns that have the letter b for their pen ultima, 
are also very few, and must be pronounced short ; as, 
A'rabo, Bdmaba, Celibe, I'ncubo, succubo; but pro- 
nounce Carobba, a Carob bean, long. 



C. 

All nouns whose pen ultima is the letter c, are short; 
as, Rammdrico. 



Alice, 

Amico, 

Aniico, 

Appendice, 

Apr ico, 

Arciduca, 

Atrbce, 

Beatrice, 

Beccafico, 

Berenice, 

Biblioteca, 

Caduco, 

Capifuoco, 

Cervice, 

Ciridco, 

Cloaca, 

Cornice^ 

Coiurnice, 

Dappoco, 

Enrico, 

Fanfaliico, 

Fatica, 

Federico, 

Felice, 

Fenice, 



Except 

Feroce, 

Festuca, 

Filuca,QT Felucca, 

Imbridco, 

Intrico, 

Lattuca, 

Lettica, 

Lombrico, 

Lorica, 

Ludovico, 

Lumtica, 

Mammalucco, 

Manttca, 

Matrice, 

Mendlco, 

Molica, 

Morice, 

Narice, 

Nemico, 

Opdco, 

Orico, gum 

Arabic. 
Ortica, 
Pagluca, 



Pampaluca, a kind 

of sea-fish. 
Panico, panic, a 

sort of grain. 
Pappafico 
Pendice, 
Per nice, 
Pudico, 
Rubrica, a rubric 

of a missal or 

other book. 
Sambuco, 
Sommdco, 
Tamerice, 
Tarlice, 
Tar tardea, 
Teridca or tridca, 
Veloce, 
Vernice, 
Verruca, 
Vescica, 
Ubbridco, 
Ulderico, 
Umbilico, 

lico. 



bel- 



And all nouns terminated in ace ; as, auddce,forndce, 
spindce. Likewise such as express female qualities, and 
end in ice ; as, meretrice. posseditrice, vendicatrice, &c. 

D. Nouns 



182 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



D. 

Nouns which have the letter d for their penultima are 
short. 



Alcide, 

Arredo, 

Belgrddo, 

Canicida, 

Congedo, 

Contddo, 

Contrdda, 

Corrddo, 

Corredo, equipa; 

Cupido, Cupid. 

Custode, 



Except, 
Diomede, 
Disfida, 
Erede, 
Erode, 
Fratricida, 
Ganimede, 
GoffredOy 
Ignudo, 
re.Lampreda, 
Mercede, 
Nicomede, 



Omicida, 

Palude, 

Parentddo, 

Parenticida, 

Parricida, 

Rugidda, 

Squassacoda, 

Tancredi, 

Toledo, 

Treppiede, 

Zenddo. 



Nouns ending in the syllable de, and formed from 
other nouns which have a grave accent on their final 
vowel, are also pronounced long ; as, cittdde, povertdde, 
virtude, formed of cittd, povertd, virtu. N. B. This 
manner of writing is used only by poets, and very 
rarely occurs in prose. 

E. 

All nouns that have the letter e for their penultima, 
are long. 

Except 

Aculeo, Borea, Cesdrea (title of majesty; but when 
it signifies a city, it is pronounced long) Ceruleo, 
Coetdneo, Collatdneo, Empireo, Etereo, Linea, Medi- 
terrdneo, purpureo, Tartdrea, tempordneo. Some pro- 
nounce the two names Teseo and Tirnoteo, long ; and 
they seem to be in the right. All nouns adjective 
derived from substantives are also short ; as, ferreo 
from ferro, iron ; marmoreo, from mdrmo, marble ; 
venereo, from Verier e } Venus. In all nouns of this ter- 
mination, where the letter u alone forms their ante- 
penultima syllable, this letter is pronounced short, 
as well as the syllable that follows ; as, dureo, ndusea, 
&c. 

F. You 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



183 



You are to pronounce all nouns short, whose penul- 
tima is the letter f; except the three following, Mar~ 
tufo, Pardfo, Tartufo, which are long. 

G. 

You must pronounce all nouns short, that have the 
letter g for their penultima, 

Except 

Areopdgo, Bottega, Castiga, Collega (Congrega, 
though long, is sometimes pronounced short), Dionigi, 
Gonzdga, Impiego, Intrigo, Lattuga, Lettiga, Luigi, 
Lupdgo, Origo, Parigi, Pedagogo, Presdgo (several 
pronounce proroga short), Ripiego, sanguisuga, selvdgo, 
sinagoga, sossiego, or sussiego, tartarvga. 

I. 

In some nouns where the letter i happens to be the 
penultima, it forms one syllable with the following let- 
ter, as they are pronounced jointly. 

In others, it is formed separately, forming a dis- 
tinct syllable by itself. 

The letter i therefore forms but one syllable with the 
subsequent vowel, in all nouns not contained in the fol- 
lowing catalogue. It forms two syllables in the follow- 
ing nouns, and you are to pronounce them long ; viz. 



Agonia, 

Albagia, 

Amnistia, 

Anagogia, 

Analogia, 

Anania, 

Anarckia, 

Anatomia, 

Anfania, 

Anfibologia, 



Antologia, 

Antinomia, 

Antipatia, 

Apologia, 

Apoplessia, 

Apostasia, 

Aristocrazia, 

Armonia, 

Arpia, 

Astrologia, 



Astronomia, 

Badia, 

Balm, power, or 

authority. 
Balio* 
Baronia, 
Bastia, 
Befania, or epifa- 

nia. 



* This name is given in some parts of Tuscany to the 
person who, at Rome, is called Cursore, a Serjeant or 
bailiff. 

Brio, 



184 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



Brio, 

Bugia, 

Calpestio, 

Carestia, 

Castellania, 

Codardia, 

Chiromanzia, 

€hiro?iia, 

Chirurgia, 

Compagnia, 

Cortesia, 

Cronologia, 

Dio or Iddio, 

Democrazia, 

Diafania, 

Desio, 

Economia, 

Elegia, 

Elia, 

Energia, 

Eresia, 

Etimologia, 

Eucaristia, 

Fantasia, 

Fellonia, 

Filologia, 

Filosofia, 

Fisonomia, or fi- 

sionomia, 
Fio, 
Follia, 
Frenesia, 
Gagliardia, 
Gelosia, 
Genealogia, 
Gengia, 
Genia, 
Geografia, 
Geomanzia, 
Geomelria, 
Gerarchia, 
Geremia, 



Golia, 

Idrofobia, 

Idrografia, 

Idromanzia, 

Idropisia, 

Infimgardfia, 

Ipocrisia, 

Ironia, 

Lebhrosia, 

Leggio, 

Liscia, or Lescia, 
lye to wash with. 

Litanie, 

Litar gia, or letar- 
gia,^ 

Liturgia, 

Lombardia, 

Lucia , 

Magia, 

Malacchia, 

Malattia, 

Mali a, 

Malvasia,orMal- 
vagia, Malm- 
sey wine. 

Malinconia, or 

Maninconia, 

Mattia, 

Melanconia, 

Melodia, 

Mercanzia, 

Messia, 

Mo, 

Monarchia, 

Mormorio, 

Natio, 

Negromanzia, 

Normandia, 

Notomia, 

Qbblio, 

Omilia, or umilia, 

Ortogrqfia, 



Paralisia, 

Pavia, 

Pazzia, 

Pestio, 

Peripezia, 

Picardia, 

Pio (but empio is 

pronounced 

short.) 
Piromanzia 
Poesia, 

Polizia, \ 

Prigionia> 
Prosodia, 
Puttania, 



Pestio, 

Ricadia, 

Rio, 

Ritrosia, 

Romania, 

Rosalia, 

Saettia, 

Sagrestia, or sa- 

gristia, 
Schiranzia, or 

scheranzia, 
Schiavonia, 
Scoppiettio, 
Simonia, 
Simpatia, 
Sinfonia, 
Sodomia, 
Sofia, 
Spia, 
Stallio, 
Stantio, 
Tentinnio, 
Teologia, 
Tipografia, 
Tirannia, 
ToMa, 

Traversia, 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



185 



Traversia, 


Via, 


Zacchia, 


Turchia, 


Villania, 


Zio. 


Vallonia, 







We likewise give a long pronunciation to all those 
nouns which terminate in ria ; as, allegria, idolatria, 
osteria. 

Except feminine nouns derived from short mascu- 
lines, only by changing the last vowel into a ; as, vit~ 
torio, vittoria ; fulminatorio, fulminatoria ; because 
these are reducible to the rule of No. IV. 

The following are also pronounced short. 



A'dria, 


Feria, 


Mdndria, 


Anguria, 


Fimbria, 


Materia, 


A'ria, 


Furia 


Memoria, 


Arteria, 


Gloria, 


Miseria, 


JBaldoria, 


I'dria, 


Mitria, \ 


Boria, 


Industria, 


Penuria, 


Caldbria, 


Ingiuria, 


Piria, 


Curia, 


I'stria, 


Stiria, 


Ddria, 


Lussuria, 


Storia. 



Frddicio, mudicio, sudicio, which several Tuscans 
use instead of frdcido, mucido, and sucido, are nouns 
out of all rules; because, besides the conjunction of 
the two last vowels, they have the syllable di short. 

In fine, all nouns that have for their penultima the 
letter i, forming one syllable with the final, as deside- 
rio, propizio, make the penultima long. 

L. 

Nouns that have the letter I for their penultima, are 
short, 

Except 



Acquamele, 


Candela, 


Crudele, 


Araceli, 


Caprarola, 


Fedele, 


Asilo, 


Carmelo, 


Idromele, 


Batticulo, 


Car 61a, 


Loquela, 
Mezzule, 


JBestiola, 


Cautela, 


Cammello, 


Corruttela, 


Michtle, 



Ossimele, 



186 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



Ossimele, 


Raffatle, 


Strozzule, 


Paralello, 


Segdla, (some 


Tordela, 


Parentela, 


pronounce it 


Vangelo, 


Par via , 


short). 


Varola, or verola, 


Pirolo, 


Sequela, 


Viola y 


Pistbla, a pis 


tol. Soggolo, 


Uriele. 



Querela, Sosamele, 

And all nouns terminating in ale ; as, candle, funer die , 

guancidle, without reckoning Annibale, Asdrubale, and 

fonfale. 

You are likewise to pronounce all nouns long that, 
before the final syllable, have the letter o preceded by 
a vowel, here called accidental, which ki verse is seldom 
used, but frequently in prose, though it is scarcely ever 
sounded ; &s,Jigliu6lo, Romagnuolo, vignajuolo. In like 
manner, nouns terminating in He ; as, Aprile, gentile, 
vedovile : but of the latter there are fourteen short, viz, 
Acqudtile, Fertile, Sterile, 

A'gile, Frdgile, Voldtile, 

Docile, Futile, U'mile, 

Difficile, Grdcile, Utile. 

Facile, Portdtile, 

All adjectives in bile, which express possi- 
bility or impossibility of doing any thing, are also 
short ; as, correggibile, invincibile, scibile, &c. 

N. B. Atrabile is pronounced long ; but all the 
other nouns in He, as amdbile, nobile, stabile, &c. fol- 
low the rule of the letter l. 
M. 
Pronounce all nouns short, which have the letter m 
for their penultima, 

Except 

Guaime, 

Idioma, 

Lattime, 

Maddma, 

Opinio, 

Poema, 



Abrdmo, 

Addmo, 

Cinamomo, 

Cognome, 

Concime, 

Diadema, 

Estremo, 

Except also, all nouns terminated in ame and 
ume ; as, bestidme, legndme f costume, legume, 

N. Pronounce 



Problema, 

Richidmo, 

Soprannome, 

Stratagemma, 

Sublime, 

Supremo, 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



187 



N. 

Pronounce all nouns long, whose penultima is the 
letter n, 

Except 



Abrotano, 


Garbfano, 


ging up of the 


Abruscino, or ar 


• Gemino, 


vineyard. 


bustino, 


Germine, 


Pldtano, 


A'cino, 


Gibvane, or gib 


• Pldtina, 


Amdzzone, 


vine, 


Polesine, 


Antifona, 


Gomejia, 


Poligono, 


A'rgine, 


Integina, 


Pristino, 


A'sino, 


Lacedemone, 


Prbdano, 


Cdnone, 


Ldmpana, 


Rdfano, 


Cdrmine, 


Lesina, 


Rdgano, 


Cdrpine, 


Libano, 


Rimini, 


Cofano, 


Limbsina, or ele- 


Rbdano, 


Cristofano, 


mbsina, 


Sdtana, 


Daino, 


Mdcchina, 


Stdggina, 


Didcono, 


Macina, 


Stdgina, 


Didfano, 


Mdngano, 


Stefano, 


Dibgene, 


Modena, 


Straggina, 


E'bano, 


Oceano, 


Termini, 


E'glino, 


O'rfano, 


Timpano, 


Elcino, 


O'rgano, 


Train a, 


Esdmine, 


Origano, 


Trdpano, 


Femmina, 


Pdgina, 


Turbine, 


Ferrdina, 


Pdmpana, 


Vimine, 


Fiorina, 


Patina, 


Ubmini, 


Fiocine, 


Pettine, 


Zdino, 


Fidmine, 


Pdstino, a dig- 


Zingdno. 


Grdnfano, 






You are likew 


ise to pronounce 


all nouns short that 


terminate in gine 


; as, balorddggine 


, origine, piantdgine ; 


and all those which end in dine 


in the singular ; as, 


amaritudine, rbndine. 





0. 

There are not more than four nouns, having the 
letter o for their penultima, in regard to which there 

could 



188 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



could be any doubt of tbeir pronunciation : these are 
Aloe, Siloe, Noe, Erbe : the three first are pronounced 
with some rapidity, as if they had a grave accent on 
the letter e, which indeed is used by some : but the 
fourth is long. 



You are to pronounce all nouns short, that have the 
letter p for their penultima, 

Except 

Antipdpa, archetipo, Cantalupo, Ciclopo, dirupo, Eu- 
ropa, Esopo, Isopo, Oroscopo ; the following three are 
better short than long, Piropo, Pelipo, Priapo. 

R. 

Pronounce all nouns long whose penultima is the 
letter r, 



Albero,'ov drbore, 

Anitra,oidnatra, 

Ancora, anchor. 

Anfora, 

Arbitro, 

A'saro, 

Augure, 

Austro, 

Bdratro, 

Bdrbaro, 

Bdvaro, 

Bischero, 

Bulgaro, 

CdncherOf 

Cdnfora, 

Cdniaro, 

Cdpparo, 

Cdtedra, 

Celebre, 

Cerebro t 

Chare, 



Except 




Cki&vari, the 


Meteor a, 


name of a 


Nettare, 


country. 


Neutro, 


Cldustro, 


Niceforo, 


Co ller a, 


O'ngaro, 


E'piro, 


Pdparo, 


Esd metro, 


Pecora, 


Feretro, 


Pentdmetro, 


Fdnfaro, 


Pesaro, 


Fblgore, 


Piffero, 


Gdmbaro, 


Pitdgora, 


Gdsparo, 


Porfiro, 


Geometro, and 


Porpora, 


geometra, 


Remora, 


I'caro, 


Sdtiro, 


Interprete, 


Scheletro, 


Ldzzaro, 


Spdlatro, 


Logoro, 


Sugaro, 


Mar tire, 


Superi, 


Mdrtora, 


Tdrtaro, 


Mdschera, 


Tenebre, 




T6rtora f 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 189 

Tortora, Zdccara, Zingaro, 

U'ngaro, Zdzzara, Zucchero. 

You are likewise to pronounce all nouns short, that 
terminate in era, ere, and ero, and have not the letter i 
before the antepenultima e; as, lettere, Cerere,numero ; 
but we must except austero, chimera, emisfero, galera, 
ingegnero or inyegnere, lusinghiero, menzognero,messere, 
Omero, pantcra primavera, severo, sincere*, statera, 
which conform to the rule : as do likewise almost all 
verbal nouns : as, ilpiacere, il par ere, and some other, 
which are derived from the infinitives contained in the 
exception to the rule of the second number in the next 
chapter. And the abbreviated nouns preserve the same 
sound as they had before their abbreviation ; for in- 
stance, we pronounce altero long, because it is 
abridged from altie.ro, inter o from intiero, magistero 
from magistiero, monastero from monastiero, &c. 

The word chidechiera is pronounced short, though 
it has the i before the e. 

S. 

All nouns are pronounced long which have the let- 
ter s for their penultima, 

Except 



Andlisi, 


E'feso, 


Pardfrasi, 


A'niso, 


E'nfasi, 


Plakso, 


Brindisi, 


E'stasi, 


Sinderesi, 


Citiso, 


Genesi, 


Sinteti, 


Didgnosi, 


Metamorfosi, 


Tunisi. 


Diocesi, 







Pronounce those nouns long, having the letter t for 
their penultima, 

Except 

A'bito, name, and a pre- A'ndito, 

Accolito, cious stone. Anelito, 

Adito, A'lito, Antidoto, 

A'gata, a christian A'mbito, Antistite, 

Apostata, 



190 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 



Apostata, 


Fortuito, 


Proposito, 


Ariete, 


Fremito, 


Pulpito, 


Attonito, 


Gdlata, 


Ricdpito, 


Automata, 


Gemito* 


Recbndito, 


Cognito, 


Genito, 


Rendita, 


Comito, 


Gomito, 


Sdbato, 


Compito, theworl 


> Implicito, 


Seguito, 


of a day, or a 


Tnclito, 


Soccita, 


task. 


Interprete, 


Socrate, 


Computo, 


Intuito, 


Solito, 


Credit o } 


Ipocrate, 


Sollecito, 


Ciibito, 


Ipocrito, 


Spirito, 


Debito, 


Ippolito, 


Stimmate, or StU 


Decrepito, 


Lectio, 


mate, marks of 


Dedito, 


Libito, 


wounds. 


Deposito, 


Lievito, 


Stipite, 


Di sputa, 


Limite, 


Strepito, 


Domito, 


Merito, 


Subito, 


E'mpito, for Tm- 


Ndscita, 


Suddito, 


peto, 


Olocdusto, 


Tdcito, 


Epiteto, 


0' spite, 


Trdnsito, 


Esdusto, 


Pdlmite, 


Tremito, 


Esercito, 


Perdita, 


Vegeto, 


E'sito, 


Pldcito, 


Vendita, 


Esplicito, 


Premito, 


Veneto, 


Fegato, 


Prestito, 


Visita, 


Fomite, 


Preterito, 


Vomito. 



u. 

Pronounce all nouns short that have the vowel u for 
their penultima : example, drduo, perpetuo, residua, 
assiduo, &c. 

Except 

Altrui, bde due, and its compounds, as, ambidue, 
ventidue, &c. colui, costui, cut, lui, ski, tui. 



* When it is a noun adjective, it is pronounced almost 
always short ; but when a supine, it is long. 

V. You 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 191 

V, 

You are to pronounce those nouns short that have 
v for their penultima; examples, concavo, Genova, 
tritavo, vescovo : 

Except 
Bisdvo, diciannove, and the other numbers of the 
same termination ; Ginevra, incdvo, sodve, ottdvo, and 
all the nouns terminating in ivo and iva ; as, sostan- 
tivo, motivo, gengiva, invettiva. 

Z. 

Pronounce all nouns long which have the letter z 
for their penultima, except the noun polizza. 



CHAP. III. 
Of the Pronunciation of Verbs and Adverbs. 

No. I. 

DISSYLLABLES, whether verbs or adverbs, ob- 
serve no rule, because they are pronounced indiffer- 
ently. See the preceding chapter, No. II, and with 
regard to words of two or more syllables, that have a 
grave accent on the last vowel, I refer to what has 
been said in the same chapter No. Ill, p. 180. 

No. II. 

The infinitive of the verbs is terminated in are, ere, 
and ire. Those which terminate in are and ire are pro- 
nounced long, without any exception ; and such as end 
in ere short, the following excepted : avere, cadere, 
dissuadere, dolere, dovere, giacere, godere, parere, per- 
suadere, piacere, potere, rimanere, sapere, sedtre, solere, 
tacere, temere, tenere, valere, vedere, volere, and all 
their compounds ; as, accadere, ottenere, provvedere, 
&c. it being a general maxim, that the derivatives fol- 
low the rale of their primitives. 

No. III. 



192 Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 

JNo. Ill, 

All third persons plural are pronounced short, ex- 
cept in the future tense, because of the two consonants 
which precede the final vowel; in like manner, the 
first person plural of all the preterimperfect subjunc- 
tive, which in the first person singular terminate in ssi, 
must be pronounced short ; as amdssi, amdssimo, leg- 
gessi, leggessimo, &c. 

No. IV. 

All other persons, of whatever tense or number, are 
made long, except those of some verbs of the first 
conjugation, which, in the first person of the indicative, 
have the penultima short, and preserve this shortness 
in the other persons, not only of the indicative, but of 
the imperative and subjunctive moods ; for instance, 
ricdpito, the first person indicative of the verb ricapi- 
tdre, has the syllable pi short : and the same quantity 
is preserved in ricdpiti and ricdpita. Farther, this, 
and other like verbs, receive, by way of augmentation, 
in the third persons plural of the said moods, another 
syllable, which is sounded as short as the penultima : 
for instance, ricdpito, ricdpitano, ricdpitino ; dissimulo? 
dissimulano, dissimulino ; and since there are several 
who mispronounce these third persons plural, I have 
thought fit to give a particular description of them in 
the two following numbers. 

No. V. 

In the first place, all verbs, whose infinitive termi- 
nates in care, without any other consonant before c, 
as aule?iticdre, glorificdre, masticdre, make the first 
person of the present indicative short, and of course 
the other persons just now mentioned in the exception 
to the preceding number, except, affiocdre, arrocdre, 
and such as you will find excepted in the following 
numbers. 

2. All verbs, whose infinitive terminates in oldre as, 
immoldre, stimoldre, brancoldre. 

3. All verbs formed of nouns which have the penul- 

tima 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT, 



im 



tima syllable short; for example, regoldre, formecFof 
regola ; generdre, of genero ; sollecitdre, of sollecii&r 
To the three foregoing numbers you must add the fol-- 
lowing verbs, which are contained therein, viz. 



Affocdre, 

A git are, 

A Iter are, 

Anfandre, 

Annichildre, 

Assiderdre, 

Bucherdre, 

Calcitrdre, 

Capitdre, 

Commemordre, 

Compr&re, 

Confederdre, 

Consider are, 

Contamindre, 

Decifrdre, 

Desindre, 

Dissipdre, 

Domindre, 

Dubitdre, 

Eccettudre, 

F elicit dre, 

Gratiddre, 

Imitdre, 



Incorpordre, 

Insolferdre, 

Interrogdre, 

Investigdre, 

Irritdre, 

Is tig dre, 

Iter dre, 

Litigdre, 

Lumindre, 

Meditdre, 

Moderdre, 

Mormordre, 

Munerdre, ' 

Navigdre, 

Necessitdre, 

Nomindre, 

N over dre, 

Occupdre, 

Palpitdre, 

Penetrdre, 

Precipitdre, 

Procrastindre, 

Pulluldre, 



Rammemor&re? 
Recitdre, 
Refrigerdre, 
Ricuperdre, 
Robordre, 
Rumindre, or 
Rumigdre, 
Scalpitdre, 
Schiccherdre? 
Seguitdre, 
Semindre, 
Sgombrdre, 
Simuldre, 
Smemordre, 
Spettordre, 
Superdre, 
Suppeditdre, 
Suscitdre, 
Tollerdre, 
Tumultudre, 
Ventildre, 
Vigildre, 
Vituperdre.- 



To the above we may also add the verb offrire f 
belonging to the conjugation of verbs in isco.. There 
are some who pronounce the foregoing third 'person 
indifferently, short or long, in the verbs migliordre? 
peggiordre, and riputdre; but they are pronounced 
short in the verbs concitdre, eccitdre, incitdre. 

No. VI. 

From the whole we may conclude, that infinitives 

of two or three syllables, as, fdre, cecdre, with their 

compounds, as, disfdre, accecdre, do not shorten the 

first person indicative, nor the other persons, nor evert 

K tW 



194 Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 

the infinitives derived from nouns whose penultima is 
long ; example, avventurdre, derived from ventiira : 
intricdre, from intrico ; minchiondre, from mincki6no ; 
contrastdre, from contrdsto ; architettdre, from archi- 
tetto, &c. But I am very sure, that persevero, I per- 
severe, is oftener pronounced short, though it comes 
from severo, which is long ; perhaps to distinguish it 
from the Latin verb persevero, which is sounded long. 

No. VII. 

With regard to the conjunctive pronouns, mi, ti, si, 
&c. the four relatives, lo, la, li, le, and the particle ne, 
if they happen to be at the end of infinitives terminated 
in ere short, scrivermi, risponderti, venderne, and at 
the end of the third person singular of the preterper- 
fect simple, marked with the grave accent, as also at 
the end of the first and third person singular of the 
future ; as, rimproverolli, racconterovvi, racconterdssi, 
&c. ; there arises from thence no change at all in the 
pronunciation, though this union is productive of two 
consonants before the final vowel ; since the foregoing 
words, being placed after the said persons are always 
reduplicated, according to what has been observed, 
p. 170, and as may be seen in the above examples. 
If the said particles happen to be united to other per- 
sons, as parldtegli, temevatni, invidndolo, they cause 
the last verbal syllable, which is the penultima of the 
word, to be pronounced short. 

No. VIII. 

When two of the said particles happen to be united 
together, at the end of a person which, without this 
union> is not pronounced short, as parldtegliene, invidn- 
domene, portdvameli, then you shorten only the penul- 
tima syllable of the word, which is the first of the two 
particles : but when they are joined together at the end 
of infinitives, and of the persons marked at the be- 
ginning of No. VII, you make no change, as I have 
already observed in the pronunciation ; and the first 
of the two particles, being the penultima of the word, 

is 



Of the ITALIAN ACCENT. 195 

is made short ; examples, scrivermelo, vendergliene, 
rimproverommela, racconterassene, &c. 

No. IX. 

With regard to adverbs, you must follow the rules 
and exceptions of the preceding chapter, especially as J 
they are derived for the most part from nouns : for 
instance, all' improvviso, un tantino, see under the letter 
s for the former, and under n for the latter, and you 
will find that both of them have the penultima syllable 
long. As for such as have two consonants before their 
final vowel, as allegramente, incontanente y the rule 
mentioned in the preceding chapter, No. II, must be ob- 
served, and with respect to compounds, remember the 
rule, which says, that compounds follow the nature of 
their simples. 

No. X. 

Here I shall observe, that when the adverb ecco is 
joined to the conjunctive or relative particles, as eccoci, 
eccoli, eccole, the penultima syllable, thus united, is to 
be pronounced short : and it retains the same quantity 
when joined to the two aforesaid particles ; for in- 
stance, eccotene, eccovene, eccotelo : you are moreover 
to observe, that the penultima, which is the first of the 
articles, is also pronounced short. 

The adverb altresi, and the interjection cap-pita, have 
the penultima short ; but in altrove, ancora, assdi, 
dappoi, giammdi, insieme, and ovvero, it is long. 

In the two adverbs adagio and poscia, the vowel i 
forms a syllable with the final vowels o and a. 



k 2 THIRD 



( 196 ) 

THIRD TREATISE. 

OF THE ITALIAN SYNTAX. 
v — 

CHAP. I. 

Of the Division of Syntax. 

SYNTAX is a Greek word, by the Latins called 
constructio ; and signifies the right placing and con- 
necting of words in a sentence. It is divided into 
three parts; the first of order or arrangement, the 
second of concordance, the third of government. The 
syntax of order or arrangement, is, the right disposi- 
tion of words in a sentence. The syntax of concord- 
ance is, when the parts of speech agree with one ano- 
ther, as the substantive with the adjective, or the no- 
minative with the verb. The syntax of government is, 
when one part of speech governs another; or, as some 
grammarians express it, when one part of speech is 
dependent on another. 

The rules of syntax are much the same in Italian as 
in English ; but, for the sake of those who have not 
a grammatical knowledge of their own language, I 
shall lay down some general rules respecting Italian 
construction. 

I. Of the Order of Words* 

1. The nominative is that to which we attribute the 
action of the verb, and is always arranged in the first 
place ; it is generally a noun, a pronoun, or an infinitive 
put for a noun ; as, Tommdso scrive, Thomas writes; io 
pdrlo, I speak ; il dormire giova, sleeping does one 
good. 

* See Bottarelli's Exercises, on the Order of 
Words, p. 12. 

2. When 



Of the ITALIAN SYNTAX. 197 

2. When the action of the verb is attributed to many- 
persons or things, these all belong to the nominative, 
and are ranged in the first place together with their 
conjunction ; as, Pietro e Pdolo leggono, Peter and 
Paul read. 

3. The adjectives belonging to the nominative sub- 
stantive, to which the action of the verb is attributed, 
are put after the substantive, and before the verb ; as, 
gli scoldri morigerdti e diligenti studiano, mannerly and 
diligent scholars study. 

4. If the nominative has an article, this article always 
takes the first place, that being its natural situation. 

5. Sometimes a verb with its case stands for a no- 
minative ; as, umdna cosa e avere co?npassione degli af~ 
fiitti, to have compassion on the afflicted is an act of 
humanity. 

6. The nominative is sometimes understood, as, amo, 
where you understand io ; and so of the other persons 
of the verb. 

7. After the nominative you put the verb ; and if 
there is an adverb, it is to be placed immediately after 
the verbs, whose accidents and circumstances it ex- 
plains ; as, Pietro ama ardentemente la gloria, Peter 
ardently loves glory. 

8. The cases governed by the verb are put after it; 
they may be one or many, according to the nature of 
the action ; as, io amo Pietro, I love Peter ; io dono 
un libro a Paolo, I make a present of a book to Paul. 

9. The preposition is always put before the case it 
governs : as, vicino a cdsa, near the house. 

10. The relative is always placed after the antece- 
dent ; as, Pietro, il quale studia, Peter, who studies. 

II. Of Concordance. 

1. Adjectives agree with their substantives, in 
gender, number, and case ; as, un ubmo virtuoso, a 
virtuous man ; sontuosi paldzzi, sumptuous palaces ; 
bella donna, a handsome woman. 

2. When two or more substantives singular come 
together, the adjective, or participle, belonging to them 
must be put in the plural ; as, Perdiccone, e ' I pddre, e 

la 



198 Or the ITALIAN SYNTAX. 

la mddre della Lisa, ed ella altresi, contenti, grandis- 
sima fesia fecero ; Perdiccone, and the father and. 
mother of Lisa, and she likewise, contented, made 
great rejoicings. 

3. If the substantive happens to be one in the sin- 
gular and the ether in the plural, the adjective or par- 
ticiple may then agree with either ; as, essendosi I)io- 
neo, con gli dltri gibvani messo a giuocdre a tavole ; 
Dioneo, with the other young men, having sat down 
to play at tables : il re co? suoi compdgni, rimontati a 
cavdllo, alia redle osteria sene torndro ; the king and 
his companions, having mounted their horses again, 
returned to the royal inn. 

4. Every personal verb agrees with its nominative, 
expressed or understood, both in number and person. 

5. If the nominative be a collective noun, the verb 
may be in the plural, though the nominative is in the 
singular ; as, il popolo comiine erano ignordnti del vero 
Dio ; the common people were ignorant of the true 
God. But if in the collective noun, the multitude of 
the persons composing is not attended to as much as 
the whole ; and if the action expressed by the verb 
cannot be done by many distributively, but only col- 
lectively, the verb must then agree with the number 
of the nominative : example, we must say, il senate- de- 
cretb, not decretarono, because a decree cannot be is- 
sued from the senators distributively, but by all toge- 
ther, forming only one moral body. But we may say, 
il comune popolo erano ignoranti, because ignorance is 
not exclusively attributed to the people, composing 
only one moral body, but to the individuals, each of 
which and all are ignorant. 

6. When there happen to be two nominatives, one 
masculine and the other feminine, the preterite and par- 
ticiple of the verb agree with the masculine, if speaking 
of persons ; but if any thing else is meant, it may agree 
with the feminine ; as, convitdti le donne e gli uomini 
alle tdvole, the men and women being invited to table; 
ella avrebbe cosz Valtra gamba, e Vdltro piefuor manddto, 
she would have put out the other leg, and the other foot. 

7. The relative qudle, with the article, agrees en- 
tirely with the antecedent ; but without the article, 

and 



Of the SYNTAX of ARTICLES. 199 

and denoting an absolute quality or likeness, it agrees 
with what follows ; as, quel cuore il qudle, that heart 
which ; seco pensdndo qudli infra piccel termine dovean 
divenire, thinking within himself what was shortly to 
become of them. Except persona, which, though of 
the feminine gender, yet, when applied to a male, re- 
quires a masculine relative ; as, alcuna persona la 
qudle, some person who. 

8. The question and answer always agree in every 
thing ; as, cavalierc, a qua/, donna se y tu ? ed egli rispose, 
sono alia regina, what lady do you belong to, sir knight? 
and he answered, I belong to the queen. 

III. Of the Dependance of the Parts of Speech on 
each other. 

1. The nominative being the basis of the sentence, 
the verbs depend on it, as the other cases depend on 
the verb. The adjective depends on the substantive 
which supports it ; and the adverb on the verb whose 
accidents it explains. 

2. The genitive depends on a substantive expressed 
or understood, by which it is governed. 

3. The accusative depends either on a verb active, as 
io dmo la virtu, I love virtue ; or on an infinitive, as 
disse se in cib avere errdto, he owned himself to have 
been mistaken in that ; or on a preposition, as vddo 
verso la chiesa, I go towards the church. 

4. The ablative depends on a preposition, by which 
it is governed ; as, pdrto da Roma, I go from Rome. 

5. The dative and vocative have, strictly speaking, 
no dependence on the other parts. The dative is com- 
mon, as it were, to all nouns and verbs. The vocative 
only points out the person to whom one speaks. 

And so much for syntax in general. I proceed now 
to the construction of the several parts of speech. 

CHAP. II. 

Of the Syntax of Articles.* 
BEFORE we come to the Syntax of the Articles, 
remember that lo, la, li, le, gli, before the verb, and 

* See Exercises on the Articles, p. 14. 

the 



200 Of the SYNTAX of ARTICLES. 

the word ecco, are no longer articles, but pronouns re- 
lative. 

Those who understand Latin will quickly perceive 
the difference, if they take notice, that every time they 
fender lo, la, li, le, gli, by ilium, Mam, Mud ; or by 
eum, earn, id ; illos, Mas, Ma ; eos, eas, ea ; they are 
relative pronouns. 

The particles in and to, before the names of cities, 
are expressed by in and a; examples, in or at Rome, 
in Roma; to Rome, a Roma. 

* i * The best authors often use the infinitives with 
the article il instead of substantives ; as, singing re- 
joices me, il cantdre mi rallegra, instead of il canto mi 
rallegra. 

Note, the article il is put before the word signor, 
sir, or my lord, speaking of all qualities, dignities, and 
relations, for the masculine ; examples, my lord the 
president, il signor presidente ; my lord duke, il signor 
d&ea; the gentlemen, i signori ; of the gentlemen, dei 
signor i. 

We must omit the article in the singular before the 
possessive pronoun (or, to say more properly, the pos- 
sessive adjective), which precedes a noun of relation : 
as, mio pddre mi ama, my father loves me, instead of il 
mio pddre, &c. But in the plural we ought to say, 
i miei fratelli, instead of miei fratelli. 

The same rule must be observed respecting the fe- 
minine article la, which is to be prefixed to signora, 
speaking of or to the ladies ; as, la signora principessa. 

If the Italians express madam by maddma, they put 
the article la after it; as, madam the princess, maddma 
la principessa ; of madam the, &c. di maddma la, &c. 

* # * Sometimes the English particle to, befo<re infini- 
tives, is rendered in Italian by the article il or lo ; 
example, it is easy to say, to see, to study ; e fdcile il 
dire, il vedere, lo studidre : with the latter we use the 
article lo, because studidre begins with an s followed 
iby a consonant. 

We generally use the article when the Latins express 
the infinitive by the supine in u; as, facile dictu, facile 
ztisu. 

We may also make use of the indefinite article a; as, 

e fdcile 



Or the SYNTAX or NOUNS. 201 

^ fdcile a dire, a vedere, a studi&re; it is easy to say, 
to see, to study. 

See farther, in the syntax of verbs, when it is proper 
to express the articles del, dello, delta, delle, degli, &c 
after the verbs, and when not. 

It is also to be observed, that the Italians frequently 
make use of the masculine articles plural del, di, ddi, 
with the apostrophe, before possessive pronouns, and 
before all indeterminate nouns ; for example, 
De* miei libri, Of my books. 

A' tuoi parenti, To thy relations. 

DcC suoi amici, From his friends. 

La libertd, de* popoli, The liberty of the people. 

& permesso' a viaggiatori, Travellers are permitted. 
Si scrive da paesi lontdni, They write from distant 
countries. 



CHAP. III. 

Of the Syntax of Nouns.* 

THE adjectives, as we have before observed, agree 
with their substantives in geuder, number, and case : 
example, uomo virtuoso, donna bellissima, cdsa nuova. 

The Italians sometimes use a noun adjective instead, 
of a substantive ; as, il cdldo del fuoco, for il colore; 
V dlto delle mura for V altezza, &c. 

*j.* The comparatives govern a genitive ; and the 
particle than, which is after them, is expressed by di, 
or del, or dello, &c. as you may see in the first part. 

We have taken notice, in the chapter of Compa- 
ratives, p. 55, that the particle than is rendered by 
che, when it is before a noun adjective, a verb, or an 
adverb. 

%* If the comparison is made between two substan- 
tives, than must also be rendered by che : example, 

Virgil pleases me more than Ovid, Virgilio mi pidce 
piil che Ovidio. 

He is a better soldier than captain, e miglibr soldato 
che capitdno. 

* See Bottarelli's Exercises on the Syntax of 
Nouns, p. 15, 

k 5 Rome 



202 Of the SYNTAX of PRONOUNS. 

Rome would please me more than Paris, mi piace- 
rtbbe piu Roma che Parigi. 

*.* When the comparison is made by as muck as 7 
so as, they must all be rendered by qudnto; example, 

The prince is not so powerful as the king, il principe 
non £ potente qudnto il re. 

My book is as handsome as yours, il mio libro e bello 
qudnto il vostro. 

You shall have as much of it as you please, me avrete 
qudnto vorrete. 

The poor are as much despised as the rich esteemed, 
sono vilipesi i poveri qudnto sono stimdti i ricchi. 

CHAP. IV. 

Of the Syntax of Pronouns. 

I DO not intend to treat here of the personal pro- 
nouns ; they have been sufficiently explained already 
in the first part, from p. 62 to p. 65 : to avoid any far- 
ther repetition, I shall only give the following rule: 

The English make use of the verb to be, put imper- 
sonally through all its tenses in the third person, before 
the personal pronouns thou, he, she, we, you, they ; it is 
I, it is he, &c. In Italian, the verb to be, on this occa- 
sion, is not impersonal; and they express, it is I, by sono 
io; it is thou, sei tu; it is he, e egli; it is we, sidmo noi; 
it is you, siete voi; it is she, e ella; it is they, mas. sono 
eglino, or sono essi; it is they, fern, sono elleno, or sono 
esse; and in like manner through all the tenses ; as, it 
was I, era io; it was we, eravdmo noi, &c. 

*%* To express in Italian, it is mine, it is thine, it is 
his, it is ours, it is yours, we must say in the singular 
number, 

Masculine. Feminine. 

It is mine, £ mio, or £ mia. 

It is thine, £ tuo, or e tua. 

It is his, or hers, e suo, or e sua. 

It is ours, e nostro, or e nostra. 

It is yours, £ vostro, or e vostra. 

In the plural we must say, sono miei, or mie ; sono 
tubi, ovtue; sono suoi, or sue; sono nostri, or nostre; 
sono vostri, or vostre. 

Me, 



Of the SYNTAX of PRONOUNS. 203 

Me, thee, him, to him, &c. are always expressed by 
the conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, si, gli, &c. when they 
are before or after a verb. See p. 65. 

* # * The conjunctive pronoun gli requires a particular 
remark, namely, that whenever it is found before the 
pronouns lo, la, le, or ne, it takes an e at the end to 
join the following participle : examples, 

To give it to him, per ddrglielo, and not ddrglilo: 
the vowels i and e ought to be pronounced as one syl- 
lable. 

To give it to her, per d&rgliela. 

You shall return them to him, glieli renderite. 

You shall ask him for some, gliene domanderete* 

You shall speak to him of it, gliene par lerete. 

%* When the conjunctive pronouns happen to meet 
with the particle si, they must be transposed, and si 
placed next to the verb : example, 

They tell me, mi si dice, and not si mi dice. 

They tell thee, ti si dice, and not si ti. 

They tell him, or her, gli or le si dice. 

* # * The pronouns conjunctive mi, ti, si, ci, vi, change 
i into e when they are before lo, la, le, gli, or the adverb 
ne; example, 

He returns it to me, melo rende. 

The following words, me some or of it, thee some or 
of it, him some or of it, us some, you some, &c. are ren- 
dered in Italian by mene, tene, sene, gliene, csne, vene, 
as we have already observed in the chapter of conjunc- 
tive pronouns, p. 67. 

Loro, their, before a noun, is a pronoun possessive 
indeclinable ; as, 

Their book, II loro libro. 

Their room, La loro camera. 

Their goods, / loro beni. 

Their swords, Le loro spade* 

When Uro is a possessive pronoun, put an article 
before it. 

Loro after a verb is a conjunctive pronoun ; as, the mas- 
ter teaches them, il maestro insegna loro. Loro is gene- 
rally made to follow the verb, with whatever tense it be. 

*3* To render the expression in Italian more agree- 
able and polite, use the third person instead of the 

second ; 



£04 Of the SYNTAX of VERBS. 

second; thus, you are in the right of it, is expressed by 
V. S. ha ragidne, instead of ' avete ragione, pronouncing 
vossignoria, which is always marked by V. S. And to 
prevent the frequent repetition of V. S. they use in con- 
versation, the pronoun ilia, in the nominative. 
Examples, 



Nom. 


Ella, 


or V. Si 


Gen. 


di lei, 


di V. S. 


Dat. 


a lei, 


a V.S. 


Ace. 


lei, 


V.S. 


Abl. 


da lei, 


da V. S. 



Vossignoria, or V. S. literally translated, means your 
lordship. 

In the plural we say, le signorie loro, delle signorie 
§6ro; dlle signorie loro, dalle signorie loro. 

** That is always expressed by che ; examples, the 
book that I read, il libro che leggo; what do you want? 
£he volete, or che vuole, V. S. ? 

Che often denotes because; especially when it fol- 
lows the negative particle non; example, do not drink it, 
tsecause it will hurt you, non lo bevete, che vifara mdle. 

-*£* Chi is frequently made use of to express he who, 
and is more elegant than quello che : example, chi dice 
questo ha ragione, who says this, is in the right, for 
tquello che dice, &c. 

* # * The particle it is never expressed in Italian be- 
fore the third person of the verb to be : examples, 

It is well said, e ben ditto. 

It shall be well done, sard benfdtto. 

The poets frequently make use of dltri for dltro : 
example, dltri fu vdgo di spidr tra le stelle, dltri di 
seguir V brme di fuggitiva fera, dltri aV atterrar or so, 
Cruarini in the Pastor Fido. 

CHAP. V. 
Of the Syntax of Verbs.* 
THE verbs, through every tense and mood (except 
the infinitive) ought, as we have already observed, to 

* See Bottarelli's Exercises on the Verbs, p. 
33 & seq. 

be 



Of the SYNTAX of VERBS. 205 

be preceded by a nominative case, either expressed or 
understood, with which they should agree in number 
and person. The nominative is expressed when we 
say, io dmo, tu canti, Pietro scrive : understood when 
they say, cdnto, andidmo, dico, ridono. 

The Italians as well as the English, use the second 
person plural, though they address themselves but to 
a single person : example, 

Fratello, avete torto ; brother, you are in the wrong. 

Pietro, avete ragione ; Peter, you are in the right. 

And if we would speak in the third person, we must 
say, V. S. or ella ha ragione. 

The verb active governs the accusative: as, studio 
la lezione, ama la virtil. 

The verb passive requires an ablative after it ; as, 
the learned are esteemed by tlje ignorant, i dotti sono 
stimdti dagV ignordnti. 

The verbs, to take away, to separate, to he distant 
from, to receive, and obtain, govern also an ablative 
and accusative ; as, 

To take something from the hands, levdre quulche 
cosa dalle m&ni. 

To take from, is also translated in Italian by prendere 
a ; example, mi presero il ddnaro, or presero al mio 
compdgno qudnto avea seco. 

To separate one from the other, separdre Vun ddlV 
dltro. 

Get away from me, scostdtevi da me. 

I have received a letter from my father, ho ricevuto 
una lettera da mio padre. 

I have obtained leave from the king, ho ottenuto 
Jicenza dal re. 

*** The verbs to come out, to depart, to come, to 
return, govern, a genitive and an ablative. The geni- 
tive, when the nouns have the indefinite article before 
them ; as I go, esco ; I depart, par to ; I come, vengo ; 
I return, torno ; from Paris, di Parigi; from France, 
di Frdncia, &c. 

The ablative, when the nouns are preceded by the 
definite article ; as, I go, I depart, I come, I return, 
from the garden, from the meadow, from the church ; esco 
pdrto, vengo, torno, dal giardino, dalprdto* ddlla chiesa. 

You 



206 On the SYNTAX of VERBS. 

You must always put the particle a or ad after the 
verbs of motion ; as, anddre, manddre, invidre, venire, 
when they precede an infinitive ; example, 

Let us go to see, andidmo a vedere. 

Send to look for, manddte a cercdre. 

Come to ask for, venite a domanddre. 

They do not say, andidmo vedere, manddte cerc&re, 
venite domanddre. They make use of ad when the 
following- verb begins with a vowel ; as, let us go and 
give notice, andidmo ad avvisdre, &c. 

After verbs, we must express yes and no by di si and 
di no ; and not by che st and eke no : examples, 

I believe yes, credo di si. 

I believe not, credo di no. 

I say not, dico di no. 

I think not, penso di no. 

I lay it is, scommetto di si. 

Have you a mind to lay it is not ? volete scommettere 
di no ? 

I have observed in the first part, p. 90, that when 
we find the particle if, which in Italian is expressed by 
se, before the imperfect indicative, we must use the 
imperfect subjunctive in Italian : example, if I had, se 
avessi ; if we could, se potessimo ; and not se aveva, se 
potevamo. 

This rule is not general, because we frequently are 
obliged to put the imperfect indicative after se, and not 
the imperfect subjunctive. 

* % * When we find in English if before a preterim- 
perfect, it is to be observed, that we speak either of a 
time past, or a time to come ; as, if I had riches, I was 
not master of them; if I studied, it was to become 
learned: in these two examples we speak of a time 
past; for which reason we must use the imperfect in- 
dicative, and say, se aveva beni, non n'era padrbne : se 
studidva, era per diventar dbtto. But if we happened 
to speak of a future time, if I studied, I should become 
learned; if I had riches, I would give something to the 
poor ; then we must make use of the imperfect sub- 
junctive, and say, se studidssi, diventerei dotto ; se 
avessi beni, ne darei ai poveri ; because in the latter 
examples, we speak by wish, and therefore we place 

the 



Of the SYNTAX of VERBS. 207 

the verbs in the optative ; and in the former we do not 
express ourselves either by wish or desire, but merely 
concerning a thing or time past. 

\* The English are apt to place the first imperfect 
of the subjunctive, where the Italians make use of the 
second : example, 

He had done me a kindness ; the Italians will not say 
m'avesse fdtto piacere, but m'avrebbe fatto un piacere ; 
because one may say, he would have done me a Mild- 
ness. 

1 had been in the wrong, avrei avuto torto, and not 
avessi avuto torto ; because one may say, I should have 
been in the ivrong. 

You had been blamed, sareste stdto biasimdto, and 
not foste stdto biasimdto : because you had been may 
be turned by would have. 

£j^f Note, that, to express in Italian though that should 
be, we must say qudndo do fosse, and not sarebbe. 

N. B. Because the phrase, though that should be, 
may be rendered by, if that was ; and as often as you 
can turn the second preterimperfect by the imperfect 
subjunctive, or the second preterpluperfect by the 
pluperfect subjunctive, you ought to do it ; and then 
those second preterimperfects are put in the subjunc- 
tive mood in Italian ; for example, if I had been at 
Rome ox if I were at Rome, I should endeavour to live 
with the Romans. <i^ Here you may turn the phrase, 
and say, if I were at Rome ; in Italian you must say, 
sefossi stdto a Roma, o se fossi a Roma, procurerei di 
viver co' Romdni. 

%* The Italians use the future tense after the con- 
junction if, when they speak of a future action ; but 
the English, the present : example, to-morrow, if I 
have time, domdni se avrb tempo, and not se ho ; if he 
comes we shall see him, se verrd lo vedremo, and not 
se viene. 

CCj* When they speak of visiting a person at his house, 
they use the verb venire instead of anddre : example, I 
will go to-morrow to your house, verrb da voi domdni. 

*** When we forbid a person, to whom we say thee 
and thou, to do a thing, we ought to use the infinitive 
and not the imperative : examples, do not thou do that, 

non 



208 Of the SYNTAX of VERBS. 

•non far qutsto ; say thou 'nothing, non dir niente ; do 
not thou stay, non ti fermare. 

A conjunction between two verbs obliges the last to 
be of the same number, person, and tense, as the first ; 
example, the king wills and commands, il re vuole e 
comdnda : I see and 1 know, vedo e conosco. 



To know when to make use of the Subjunctive, read 
attentively the following remarks : 

*£* 1. The conjunction che generally requires the 
subjunctive after it : example, bisogna che Pietro cdnti, 
creda, senta, esca, &c. 

(£j- 2. Take notice, that che makes all the words to 
which it is joined become conjunctions, as, acciochb, 
to the end that ; prima che, avdnti che, before that ; 
benchk, although; ddto che, swpposto che, suppose that ; 
which govern the subjunctive ; example, acciochd, 
prima che, benche, supposto che, io pdrli, io esca, &c. 

*,* 3. In order, therefore, to know when to put the 
verb which comes after che, that, in the indicative, and 
when in the subjunctive, take particular notice of the 
following examples : that I may speak, that I may 
love, that I may sing. 

Now these verbs speak, love, sing, which are after 
che, that, are in one sense in the indicative, and in 
another in the subjunctive mood. 

The way, then, of not mistaking the one for the other 
is, to suppose that the verb fdre, to make, or to do, 
stands in the place of the verb that follows che. 

The verb fdre makes, in the present of the indica- 
tive fo,fdi, fa ; faccidmo, fate, fdnno. 

The same verb /^remakes, in the subjunctive,/<£ccm, 
fdccia, fdccia ; faccidmo, f accidie, faccidno. 

To know whether the above examples, speak, love, 
sing, are in the indicative or subjunctive, put the verb 
fdre in their stead ; example, mio fratello vuol ch'io 
pdrli : if, instead of the verb pdrli, you put the verb 
fdre, you will say, mio fratello vuol ch'io fdccia ; the 
verb fdccia is in the subjunctive, consequently pdrli 
will be in the same mood. 

I shall give another example, in which the verb that 

follows 



Of the SYNTAX ot VERBS. 209 

follows che will be in. the indicative, and not in the sub- 
junctive : mio fratello crede ch'io pdrlo. Instead of pdrlo, 
put the verb fare, you will say, mio fratello crede ch'io 
fo : the verb iofo is in the indicative, therefore pdrlo must 
be in the indicative also : and so of the rest of the verbs. 

Hence, according to the first example, you will say, 
mio fratello vuol ch'io pdrli ; and according to the 
second, mio fratello crede ch'io pdrlo : pdrlo in the in- 
dicative, and pdrli in the subjunctive. 

Observe, that, to speak Italian correctly, you should 
make use of the subjunctive in both cases : as, vuol 
ch'io pdrli, and crede ch'io pdrli. The difference be- 
tween these two examples is, that in the latter you 
may sometimes make use of the indicative, though not 
so properly ; in the former you must always employ 
the subjunctive; you therefore may say, mio fratello 
crede che pdrli or pdrlo ; and vuol che pdrli, and not 
pdrlo. In order rightly to know whether you are to 
make use of the indicative, or of the subjunctive, 
attend to the following remarks : 

* # * 4. The verbs which signify will, desire, command, 
permission, incertitude, and fear, followed by the con- 
junction che or se, require the subjunctive after them: 
examples, I will, I desire, I command, I permit, my 
brother to love, speak, see, go out, &c. voglio, desidero, 
comdndo, permetto, che mio fratello dmi, pdrli, veda, 
esca, &c. I fear he may not sing, he may not say, &c. 
temo che non cdnti, che non dica, &c. 

When the verb expresses an operation of mind, 
which consists in being certain of any thing, the verb 
which follows ought to be put in the indicative : so 
che siete reo, I know you are guilty ; but we ought to 
sayi, dubito se sia vero o no, I doubt whether it is 
true or not, instead of se e vero. 

%* 5. After the conjunction although, the English 
sometimes use the subjunctive ; as, although he be an 
honest man, although he may do that. 

In Italian you must take care how you express 
though or although ; if it is by benchd, you must put 
the subjunctive after it; example, though he is an 
honest man, benche sia galdntuomo ; though he does 
this, benche fdccia questo. 

Hf But 



210 Of the SYNTAX of VERBS. 

fit Bat if you render although or though by sebbene, 
then you must not use the subjunctive, but the indi- 
cative : example, though he is an honest man, sebben 
e galdntuomo, and not sia; though he does this, sebben 
fa questo, and not fdccia. 

f-J 6. When you meet with two verbs, the former 
of which is preceded by the particle non, and the 
second by che, you must put the latter in the sub- 
junctive ; examples, I did not know you loved, non 
sapeva che amdste ; I do not believe he studies, non 
credo che studj ; I do not think he walks, non penso 
che cammini. 

* # * 7. When the pronoun qual precedes a verb, and 
you do not speak by an interrogation, you must put 
the following verb in the subjunctive: example, not 
knowing which was the season proper for sowing, non 
sapendo qual fosse la stagione propria da semindre ; I 
do not see which is his intention, non vedo qual sia Vin- 
tenzione sua; I do not know which are your books, 
non so qudli siano i vostri libri. 

But if we speak by interrogation, you must put the 
verb in the indicative : example, which is your's ? qudl 
£ 'I vostro ? 

*^f The articles del, dello, delta, degli, &c. coming 
after a verb, are apt to perplex those who learn Ita- 
lian : but to explain the matter : 

\* Observe, that the Italians often put the genitive 
after a verb active : example, give me some, or of, the 
bread, ddtemi del pdne ; eat some, or of, the pie, man~ 
gidte del pasticcio. You observe, by these examples, 
the genitive is put after a verb active; but observe,, 
at the same time, we are not speaking of a whole, but 
only of a part, for, give me some pie, some bread, some 
wine, some meat, denotes only a bit, or some of the pie, 
bread, wine, or meat. 

If we would speak of a whole, we must not express 
the articles del, dello, delta, &c. ; example, I have eaten 
petty patties, ho mangidto pasticcetti ; I have seen men, 
ho veduto uomini ; you owe me a hundred crowns ; 
give me bread, wine, and meat in payment ; mi dovete 
cento, scudi; ddtemi pdne, vino, e came in pagamento. 

In the last examples, the articles del, dello, della, 

&c. 



Of the SYNTAX of PARTICIPLES. 211 

&c. are not expressed, because we speak of a sum, a 
quantity, a whole, that is not separated, and which has 
no regard or relation but to the person who speaks. 

*y* Note also, that after the particle si, it is, or they, 
we. must not express the articles del, dello, delta &c. ; 
example, they see men, si vedono ubmini ; they tell 
bad news, si dicono cattive nuove. 

You must not express the articles del, dello, delta, 
degli, &c. after the prepositions, as the French express 
du, de la, de V , des : example, avec des soldats, Fr. con 
solddti, with soldiers ; pour des paysans, Fr. per conta- 
dini, for peasants ; dans des paniers, Fr. in canestri, 
in baskets ; sur des chevaux, Fr. sopra cavdlli, upon 
horses. 

* # * But if the articles del, delli, delta, signify con- 
cerning ; as, they speak of your affairs, that is to say, 
concerning your affairs, the article must then be ex- 
pressed ; example, they speak of you, si pdrla di voi; 
they treat of war, si trdtta delta guerra ; they talked of 
affairs of state, si parldva degli affdri di stdto. 

It is therefore true, that there are particular cases, 
in which the articles are not expressed ; nay, it is even 
elegant to omit them. 

N. B. We may add to the above rule, that in ge- 
neral when the article is omitted in English, it is also 
omitted in Italian. 

The verb impersonal there is, there was, there will 
be, has been explained at length, among the imper- 
sonal verbs, in the first part, p. 151. 



CHAP. VI. 
Of the Syntax of Participles.* 

EVERY participle in the Italian language ends in 
to or so ; as, amdto, creduto, fimto, drso, preso, sceso, 
rimdso, solito. 

The participles active that follow the verb avere, 
must end in o; as, 



* See Exercises, p. 67. 

I have 



2*3 Or the SYNTAX of PARTICIPLES. 

I have seen the king, ho veduto il re. 

I have seen the queen, ho veduto la regina. 

I had loved books, aveva amdto i libri. 

I had carried the letters, aveva portdto le lettere. 

"We meet with authors who sometimes make the 
participles agree with the thing of which they are 
speaking ; as, the sun had lost his rays, il sole aveva 
perduti i suoi rdggi. 

If the substantive is before the participle, they ought 
to agree together : examples, the books that I have com- 
posed, i libri che ho composti ; the letter that I have 
written, la letter a che ho scritta. One may also say, 
il sole aveva perduto i suoi rdggi, &c. ; i libri che ho 
composto ; la lettera che ho scritto. But it is more ad- 
visable to follow the above rule. 

*y* If it be a verb neuter, the participle ought always 
to terminate in o ; example, the king has dined, il re ha 
pranzdto ; the queen has supped, la regina ha cendto ; 
the soldiers have trembled, i solddti hdnno tremdto ; 
my sisters have slept, le mie sorelle hdnno dormito ; 
your friends have laughed, i vostri amid hdnno riso. 

When the active participle happens to precede an 
infinitive, it must be terminated in o ; examples, il giu- 
dice gli hafdtto taglidre la testa, the judge has caused 
his head to be cut off; mia sorella ha creduto partire 9 
my sister had like to have gone. 

The participles passive, which are joined to the tenses 
of the verb essere, agree with the antecedent ; that is 
to say, those participles must be put in the same gen- 
der and number as the preceding substantive: exam- 
ple, the captain is praised, il capitdno e loddto; virtue 
is esteemed, la virtu e stim,dta ; the idle will be blamed, 
i pigri sardnno, biasimdti ; your jewels are sold, le 
vostre gioje sono vendute. 

* # * Take notice, it is more elegant in Italian to use 
the tenses of the verb venire, instead of those of the 
verb essere, before a participle ; examples, he is esteem- 
ed, viene stimdto, for £ stimdto ; he shall be praised, 
verra loddto, for sard loddto ; they shall be blamed, 
verrdnno biasimdti, for sardnno biasimdti ; and so of 
^11 the tenses, and all the persons. 

We generally suppress the gerunds, having and being, 

before 



Op the SYNTAX of ADVERBS, &c. 213 

before the participles : example, having said so, detto 
questo; the sermon being ended, jinita la predica. 

* # * In attempting to explain or translate an Italian 
book into English, we must remember that the partici- 
ples frequently occur without any tenses of the verbs 
avere or essere before them : as, il qudle, inteso 7 di- 
segno: maraviglidtisi i consoli. Then it is a sure 
sign that the gerunds avendo or essendo are sup- 
pressed : and to explain it properly, we must render 
it as if it were., il qudle, avendo inteso 7 disegno : 
essendosi maraviglidti i consoli. 

We must also observe, that although avendo and 
essendo are suppressed before the particles, we must 
not suppress the conjunctive pronouns, nor the mono- 
syllables that ought to follow the gerunds avendo and 
essendo, but we should put them after the participles : 
example, having seen it, avendolo veduto : in suppres- 
sing avendo, we must say, vedutolo ; being aware of it, 
essendosene accorto: in suppressing essendo, we trans- 
pose sene after the participle, and say accortosene. 

It is better to place the nominative after the gerund 
than before ; as, the king being a hunting, essendo 7 re 
alia edecia ; the soldiers fighting valiantly, combattendo 
valor osamente i solddti. 

If after the verb there is an accusative, or any other 
case, we must put the nominative before the verb ; for 
instance, the soldiers being afraid of the enemy; in 
Italian we must say, i solddti temendo gV inimici ; and 
not temendo i solddti gV inimici. 



CHAP. VII. 
Of the Syntax of Adverbs and Prepositions. 

A T is expressed in Italian by da, or in edsa. 

When at is expressed by da, we put the pronouns 
personal after it : examples, at our house, da noi; at 
your house, da voi ; at my house, da me; at thy house, 
da te; at his house, da lui ; at her house, da lei; at 
their house, masc. da loro; at their house, fern, da 
esse. 

* * When 



214 



Of the SYNTAX of 



*^* When at is expressed by in cdsa, instead of the 
personal pronoun, we must use the possessive pro- 
nouns ; as, at our house, in cdsa nostra ; at your house, 
in cdsa, vostra ; at his or her house, in cdsa sua ; at 
thy house, in cdsa tua; in their house, in cdsa loro. 

*^* If after at there be an article or a possessive 
pronoun, you must render at by dal, ddllo, ddlla, da', 
ddi, ddgli, dalle, or else by in cdsa, with the articles of 
the genitive ; examples, 



At the prince's, 
At the scholar's, 
At the sister's, 
At the men's house 
At my friend's, 
At his relation's, 
At the abbe's, 



dal principe. or in cdsa 
del principe. 

ddllo scoldre, or in cdsa 
dello scoldre. 
\ ddlla sorella, or in cdsa 
I delta sorella. 
{ ddgli uomini, or in cdsa 
I degli uomini. 
{ dal mio amico, or in cdsa 
I del mio amico. 
^ da' suoi parenti, or in 
£ cdsa de' suoi parenti 
% dal signor abate, or in 
\ cdsa del signor abdte. 

The indefinite article di is not expressed after the 
adverbs of quantity, how much, how many, much, little, 
as much as, more, &c. ; but these adverbs are made to 
agree with the following noun, as if they were adjec- 
tives : examples, 



How much time, 

How much meat, 

How many soldiers, 

A great deal of pleasure, 

A great deal of pain, 

A great many men, 

A little time, 

A little fever, 

So much patience, 

As much courage, 

A great many persons, 

How many coaches, 

I have no more hope, 



qudnto tempo, 
quanta came, 
qudnti solddti, 
molto piacere. 
mblta pena. 
molti uomini. 
poco tempo, 
pocafebbre. 
tdnta pazienza. 
tdnto dnimo. 
molte persone. 
qudnte carrozze. 
-non ho piil sperdnza. 



ADVERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 215 

* # * A great deal of, is frequently expressed in Ita- 
lian by gran : example, 

I have had a great deal of 7 / , • 

° ho avnto qran pena. 

pain, *> r 

A great deal of rain, gran pioggia. 

A great deal of time, gran tempo. 

A great deal of pleasure, gran piacere. 

*** A little of, is rendered in Italian by poco di; as, 
a little bread, un poco di pane ; a little of compassion, 
un poco di pietd. 

Qui and qua, signify here. Qua is joined with verbs 
of motion : example, venite qua, passdte qud, come 
here, pass here. 

The Italians frequently use cost} and costa, to point 
out the place where the person is, to whom we speak 
or write ; as, V. S. mi scr'tva da costi or da costa. See 
Lodovico Dolce, nel capitolo digli avvirbj locdli ; yet I 
should prefer costl to costd. The best writers have 
often followed this rule. 

*,* The Italians frequently use the adverb oggi to 
express afternoon, or after dinner ; example, come and 
see me after dinner, vinite oggi a vedermi, venite oggi 
da me. 



Important Remarks on the Particle si, it is, or 
they, &c. # 

SI, used with a verb impersonal, signifies it is, or 
they : example, si dice, it is said, or they say ; they 
speak, sipdrla. 

They not is expressed by non si: as, non si dice, 
they do not say ; non si parla, they do not speak. 

We of it, they of it, is expressed by sine : as, sine 
saprot qudlche cosa, they will know something of it. 

They not of it, is expressed by non sine : as non 
sine pdrla, they do not speak of it. 

*** Note, learners are greatly at a loss how to ex- 
press in Italian, they us of it, they you of it, they him 
of it, they me of it, they thee of it, &c. ; yet there is 
nothing more easy, if you but turn the phrase by the 

* See Bottarelli's Exercises, p. 67. 

tenses 



216 Of the SYNTAX of the 

tenses of the verb essere, to be ; example, to render 
they will speak to us of it, we must turn it and say, it 
will be spoken of to us, cene sard pdrldto. 

( will write to you of it, vene sard scritto. 

They < speak to him of it, gliene vim parldto. 

{write to us of it, cene viene scritto. 

They promise me some, mene sono promessi, or mene 
vien promesso, or mene vengono promessi. 

By these last examples you find that it is more ele- 
gant to use the verb venire than the verb essere. 

Remember that the pronouns lo, la, li, le, are not 
expressed after the particle si; example, they say so,. 
si dice, and not si lo dice ; it will be known, si conoscerd r 
or si saprd ; they are seen frequently, together, sono 
veduti spesso insieme. See at p. 211, what has been 
said concerning the articles del, della, degli, delle, &c. 

Observe, nevertheless, that the best writers have 
often, and even with elegance, expressed these pro- 
nouns ; but at present they are laid aside except by 
poets, who use them sometimes to help the measure 
of their verse. Hence we no longer say e' si dice, but 
simply si dice ; e' si conoscerd, or la si conoscerd, but si 
conoscerd. Here are the letters, they will be read, 
ecco le letter e, si leggerdnno. 

The conjunctive pronouns must be transposed when- 
ever the particle si comes before them, as I have 
already observed, p. 203. 

* # * Yet this rule for transposing the conjunctive 
pronouns, when the particle si comes before them, is 
not general ; for there are some phrases in which the 
conjunctive pronouns must by no means be expressed, 
but the phrase must be changed. 

When the conjunctive pronouns are placed after the 
particle si, and there is neither a noun nor a case after 
the verb that follows, you must then change the phrase 
without ever expressing the particle si; as, they ask 
for me, sono domanddto,\ am asked for; they seek you, 
siete cercdto, you are sought for ; they will praise us, 
saremo loddti, we shall be praised. 

But if there happen a case after the yerb, as they ask 
me for a crown, you should express the conjunctive 
pronoun, and say, mi si domdnda uno scudo, or mi viene 

domanddto 



ADVERBS a*d PREPOSITIONS. 217 

domanddto uno scudo ; they ask some bread of you, vi 
si domdnda pane ; they will commend virtue to us, ci 
sard loddta la virtu. 

* # * If the conjunctive pronouns, that come after the 
particle si, be followed by a verb in the preterperfect 
definite, the phrase must be turned by the verb essere, 
and you must put the preter-definite fit or furono, 
according as you are speaking in the singular or the 
plural ; as, they gave me a book, mi fit ddto un libro ; 
they sent me letters, mi furono manddte lettere ; they 
wrote us a letter, cifu scritta una letter a. Sometimes 
the phrase is turned thus, they sent us to Rome, fiimmo 
manddti a Roma; they blamed you, foste biasimdto, or 
ellafu biasimdta. 

When the third persons of the verb avere, to have, 
are preceded by the particle si, and after those third 
persons there follows a particle, you are to render the 
third persons of the verb to have, by those of the verb 
essere, to be ; putting them in the same number with 
the thing mentioned ; as, if they said so, se si e detto 
questo ; if they had read the letters, se si fossero lette 
le lettere. 

When they shall have taken the town, qudndo la 
cittd sard presa. 

See at page 149, the remarks on impersonal verbs, 
with the particle si. 

But when the tenses of the verb to have, are pre- 
ceded by the particle si, and there is no particle after 
the verb to have, we must use the tenses of the verb 
avere, instead of those of the verb essere : example, 
they have some bread to eat, si ha del pane, or pdne da 
mangidre; they have servants to wait, si hdnno servi- 
tori per servire : but it is much better to omit the par- 
ticle si in both cases, and say hanno. 

For the better explanation of the foregoing important 
remarks on the particle si, it will be proper, I appre- 
hend, to add the following observations: 

The first is, that this particle si must not be used 
with reciprocal verbs, but the phrase should be turned, 
otherwise you would have two si's joined together, 
. which would be disagreeable. Thus you do not say, 
si si serve delle creature per offender Bio, thev make use 
L of 



218 Of the SYNTAX of the 

of the creatures to offend God ; but uno si serve, or 
Vuomo si serve, &c. 

The second is, that constai experience shows it to 
be extremely difficult for those who are beginning to 
learn Italian, to express, they me of it, they thee of it 9 
they him of it, they us of it, they you of it, they him of 
it, joined to a verb in the compound preterite. I shall 
therefore give here the indicative entire, which may 
serve as a general rule for all the other moods and 
tenses; therefore I shall say, 

Indicative -present. 
They write to me of it me ne viene, or men b scritto 
They write to thee of it te ne viene, or ten! e scritto 
They write to him of it glicne viene, or glien e scritto 
They write to us of it cene viene, or cen* e scritto 
They write to you of it vene viene, or ven e scritto 
They write to them of it ne viene, or n'e scritto loro 

In the other tenses, I shall only put the first person 
singular, as it is easy to know the rest by means of 
the present indicative, which is conjugated entire. 

Imperfect. 
They write to me of it, mene veniva, or men 9 era 
scritto, &c. 

Preter-definite. 

They wrote to me of it, mene venne, or mene fu scritto, 

&c. 

N. B. In the compound tenses we do not make use 
of the terb venire, but of essere. Thus, 

Preterperfect. 
They have written to me of it, men* e stdto scritto, &c. 

Pluperfect. 
They had written to me of it, men* era stdto scritto, &c. 

Future. 
They will write to me of it, mene sard scritto, &c. 
I shall insert here another indicative, to clear up the 

difficulty 



ADVERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 219 

difficulty of mi si, ti si, gli si, &c. they me, they thee, 
they him; and I will s&g thus, 

Indicative present. 

They ask me, or I am Mi si domdnda, or eft- 
asked for an Italian or mtinda, or mi viene doman- 
French Grammar printed ddta una grammdtica Ita- 
at London. licina o Francese, stampdta 

in Londra. 

f Ti si domdnda, &c. or H 
They ask thee, fyc. < viene domanddto, or do- 

[manddta. 

C Gli si domdnda, &c. or 
They ask him, fyc. <9^ viene domanddto, or 

I domanddta, &c. 

C Ci si domdnda, &c. or 
They ask us, fyc. < ci viene domanddto, or do~ 

£ manddta, &c. 

C Vi si domdnda, &c. or 
They ask you, fyc. <J vi viene domanddto, or do- 

I manddta, &c. 

f Si domdnda loro, &c. or 
They ask them, fyc. < viene domanddto, or do- 

l_manddta loro, &c. 

Imperfect. 

They did ask me, or they <S ** ^domanddm, or mi 
were asking me, fa j vemv* domandato, or do- 
° ' v £ mandata. 

Preter-definite. 

C Mi si domandb, or mi 
They asked me, fyc. < venne domanddto, or do- 

£ manddta. 

Preter '-perfect. 

C M' v i s^zfo domandato, 

rp, , , , S ) stdta domanddta. 

They have asked me, < 5 , ^a, 

r ' } w " $ domandato, or 

^ £ domanddta. 

l 2 Pluperfect, 



220 Of the SYNTAX or the 



They had asked me, 



Pluperfect. 

r m> ' £ stdto domandato , 
) \ stdta domanddta. 

I Mis ha \ dom <™ d f^ or do- 
I mandata. 

Future. 

f Mi si domanderd, or mi 
They will ask me, 1 verrd domanddto, or doman~ 

[data. 

*<,.* Observe, that in using the verb venire instead 
of tssere, you do not express the particle si. 

The prepositions govern some cases, as may be seen 
in the seventh chapter of the first part, where we 
treated of prepositions. 

The Italians frequently use the particle pure } only as 
an ornament of speech ; as, dite pure quel che vi pia- 
cerd, say what (or) whatever you please. 

It is customary for them to use pur or pure when 
the English repeat the verb in the imperative mood ; 
as, go, go then, anddte pure; give, give then, date 
pure. 

Not is always rendered by non : example, non dite 
niente, do not say any thing. , 

In before a noun, is expressed by in ; example, in 
Frdncia, in France. 

Some or any before a verb, is expressed by ne ; as, 
will you have some or any? ne volete? 

In before the article the, singular and plural, as also 
before pronouns possessive, is expressed by nel, nello, 
nella, nei, &c. as I have already remarked, p. 42 : 
example, in his book, nel suo libro. 

However, in is generally expressed by in ; as, in 
Paris, in Parigi ; in me, in me. 

%* Observe, that as often as in comes before nume- 
ral nouns to mark the time, it must be expressed by 
trd or frd: examples, in two hours, frd due ore ; in 
three months, frd tre mesi. 

*a* -But if in precedes numeral nouns, without 
marking the time, it must be expressed by in; exam- 
ple, 



ADVERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 221 

pie, in three bottles, in tre bottiglie ; in a garden, in 
un giardino. 

Very is expressed by molto, &c. ; examples, 
He is very merry e molto allegro 

It is very hot fa molto cdldo. 

%* A great deal of, or much, is rendered by gran 
or grande : example, there is a great deal of folly, V & 
grdn pazzia; he has a great deal of vivacity, ha grande 
spirito. 

CCj" More, or more of, is expressed by maggiore 
whenever you can turn more by greater or more great ; 
example, we must have more courage, bisogna avere 
maggior cordggio ; it may be turned thus, we must have 
greater courage; with more boldness, con maggior 
ardire ; it may be turned, with greater boldness. 

%* When more denotes a great number or quantity, 
it is expressed in Italian by maggior numero di, or 
maggior quantita di\ as, we must have more soldiers, 
more men, more wine, bisogna avere maggior numero, 
or maggior quantity di solddti, d'uomini, di vino. 

* # *' When more than happens to precede a word of 
time, you may put piu at the end or at the beginning 
of the phrase ; example it is more than ten years, sono 
died dnni e piu ; it is more than an hour, e un' bra e 
piil; you may likewise say, sono piu di died dnni, 8 piU 
d y un* bra. 

* # * The conjunctive so, before adjectives and ad- 
verbs, is rendered in Italian by cost or si, with a grave 
accent: example, so great, cosi grande; cosi tdrdi; or, 
si grande, si tdrdi; si fdtto, masc. sifdtta, fem. signi- 
fies such; they likewise use cosh as, come, siccbme. 



FOURTH 



( 222 ) 



FOURTH TREATISE 



Remarks on some Verbs and Prepositions, which have 
different Significations. 

THE following Phrases contain great part of the 
Italian Idioms, which constitute the chief elegance and 
beauty of that language^ 

Different significations of andare. 

We may use the verb anddre, through all its tenses, 
to express all the actions of the verbs of motion, by 
putting the same verbs of motion in the gerund, and 
the verb anddre in the tense and person that the verb 
of motion ought to be in ; as, 

He runs, instead of, corre, va correndo* 

They take a walk, spasseggiano or vdnno spasseg- 



He will tell every where, andra dicendo da per tutto. 
They must run, bisogna che vddano correndo. 



Make use of the verb anddre, through all the tenses, 
for the following phrases. 

[a person 
Anddr dietro, signifies to follow, to press, or to solicit 

- - mate, to perish 

- - via, to go away 

- - in estasi, to be in an ecstacy 

- - in collera, to put one's self in a passion 

[reason 

- - cercdndo il pelo nelV novo, to censure without 

- - a gdlla, to float upon the water 

- - in buon' ora, to go in peace 

Andar 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



223 



Andar in maV or a, 

- - avdnti, 

- alia lunga, 

- - alle corte, 

- - inndnzi, 

- - attorno, 

- - altiero, 



- - dietro ad una cosa, 

- colla peggio, 

- in semenza, 

- - per la mente, 

- - di mal in peggio, 

- per vible, 
A lungo anddre, 
Ci va della vita, 
Andar mal in arnese, 

- - a gdmbe levdte, 
-a cavdllo, 

- - a diletto, 
-a diporto, 

- - a soldzzo, 

- - a spdsso, 

- - a girone, 

- - afilo, 

- - a Idto, 

- - all' area, 

- -alia busca, 

- - alia mdzza, 

- - alV oscuro, 

- - a monte, 

- - a onde, 

- - apelo, 

- - a ruba, 

- - a riwta, 

- - a sdeco, 

- - a seconda, 

- - a scosse, 

- - a sinistra, 

- - a soldo, 

- - a sparviere, 
« - a vdnga, 



to perish, to be ruined 

to go before 

to be tedious 

to make haste 

to advance, improve, or go farther 

to go about 

to be proud, or stately 

[thing 

to stand trifling with any 

to be worse 

to run to seed 

to come into one's mind 

to go on from bad to worse 

to speak impertinently 

at long run 

life is at stake 

to be ill dressed 

to squander 

to ride on horseback 

to go to be merry 

to go sporting 

to go merry-making 

to go to take a walk 

to ramble about 

to march in order 

to go aside 

to put in pawn 

to go a plundering 

to go to the slaughter 

to walk in ignorance 

to prove vain 

to go waving 

to succeed in one's wishes 

to go a stealing 

to go a wheeling, or to hover 

to be plundered 

to go down the tide 

to go a reeling 

to miscarry by the way 

to go for a soldier 

to go a fowling 

to thrive well 

Andar 



224 



REMARKS on some 



Andar a vela, to sail 

- - a verso, to succeed well 

- - a zonzo, to lie rolling, as a ship 

- - a bdndo, to be published by proclamation 
• - barcolone, to go staggering 
4 - carpbne, to go crawling 

- - col calzdre di plombo, to go cautiously 

- - con le belle, to go handsomely to work 

[the stake 

- - come la biscia alV incdnto, to go as a bear to 

- - con la plena, to be on the strongest side 

- - di pdlo in frdsca, to leap from bough to bough 
to set willingly about a thing 

to publish or report 



di buone gdmbe, 

- dicendo, 

- f alii to il pensiero, 

- gattolone, 

- g rosso, 

r in bestia, 

- in busca, 

- in cerca, 

- in corso, 

- infdscio, 

- in cosa materidle, 

- in negbzio, 

- in rotta, 

- in sincope, 

- in succhio, 

- in trdccia, 

- in volt a, 

- la ronda, 

- per il mondo, 

- per la pesta, 

- per la plana, 

- per J "do, 

- pidggla a pidggia. 

- ramingo, 

- rattenuto, 

- spdnto, 

- sopra le parole, 

- stretto, 



to fail in one s purpose 

•to go groping 

to look big 

to fall into a passion 

to go a seeking 

to search up and down 

to go a cruising 

to go to work 



tentone, 



to be routed 

to fall into a swoon 

to have one's mouth water 

to go a tracing 

to go ranging about 

to walk the rounds 

to travel up and down the world 

to follow the vulgar fashion 

to go the strait forward way 

to be forced to do a thing 

to sail close to the shore 

to be wandering 

to go warily to work 

to be extravagantly dressed 

to believe fair words 

to go about a thing sparingly 

to go a begging 

to grope about 

Andar 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



225 



Andar vuoto, to miss one's aim 

- - sene preso alle grida, to believe every idle report 

Questo non mi va t that does not please me 



d'occhio, 



Different significations of dare. 

DA'RE, signifies, to give, to fight, to strike 

to cast one's eyes on 

[one 

to throw one's self upon any 

to run away 

to fall into the snare 

to deal or give the cards 

to give courage, or encourage 

to have courage 



Dare adosso ad uno, 

- - a gdmbe, 

- - nella rete, 

- - le carte, 
- dnimo, 

- - si y l cuore, or V dnimo, 

- - fide, 

- - ad intendere, 

- - del tu, 

- - in nulla, 

- - si V dcqua a piedi, 

- - in luce, 
~ - si a fare, 

- - si pensiero, 

- - del signore, 

- - delfurfdnte, 

- - parola. 



to believe 

to make one believe 

to thee and thou one 

not to succeed 

to praise one's self 

to publish 

to set about a thing 

to take care for 

to call one a gentleman 

to call one a rogue 

to promise 



ne ladri, to fall into the hands of thieves 

- la burla ad uno, to laugh at a person 



- - leva, 

- - inprcstito, 

- - fuoco, 

- - sicurtd, 

- - in istravagdnze, 

- - nel mdtto, 

- - la quadra, 

- - la cdccia, 

- principio, ox fine, 

- - conto, 

- - si alio studio, 



to provoke 

to tend 

to set on fire 

to give bail 

to talk nonsense 

to play the madman 

to criticise 

• to put to flight 

to begin or end 

to give an account 

to apply one's self to study 

[shadow 

- - cdlci al vento } e pugm all 7 aria, to fight with one's 

l 5 Dare 



226 



REMARKS on some 



v [every one's business 
Dare di bocca da per tutto, to concern one's self with 

[make people speak 

- da rider e, da parldre, to make people laugh, to 

[one's self 

- - si la zappa svUlpiede e la mtizza in cdpo, to wrong 

- - si bel tempo, to divert one's self 

- - da beccdre, to feed poultry 

- a credenza, to sell upon credit 

- - addie tro, to give back 

- ddito, to give access to 

- - alia mdno, to bribe 

- all' drme, to cry out for help 

- - a pigione, to let out for rent 
<■ - a ruba, to give up to plunder 

- - assunto, to give charge of 

- - a tdglio, to strike with the edge 

- - a tr aver so, to hit across 

- a vedere, to give one to understand 

[vain hopes 

baggidne, or gonfidre alcuno, to puff one up with 



- - balddnza, 

- - bdndo, 

- _ bastondte, 

- - briga, 

- - cagione, 

- - cdmpo, 

- - capo, 

- - cdpo mdno, 

- - carote, 

m - che pensdre, 

- - compimento, 
m - credenza, 

• - crollo, 

" - da bere, 

" - da dormire, 

" - da mangidre, 

" - da ridere, 

" - de cdlci, 

* - delle bo tie, 

- delle calcdgna, 

- - delle coltellate, 



to embolden 

to banish by proclamation 

to beat with a stick 

to trouble one 

to give cause 

to give liberty 

to come to the end of the matter 

to go beyond reason in a business 

to make one believe any thing 

to give cause of suspicion 

to finish 

to give credit to 

to shake 

to give drink 

to give one a night's lodging 

to give one some food 

to give cause of laughter 

to kick 

to beat 

to spur one, to kick 

to stab with a knife 

Dare 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



227 



Dare delle mdni, 

- delle pug na, 

- - dentro, 

- - di brocca, 

- di cozzo, 

- - di grdppo, 

- - di mdno, 

- - di mira, 

- - da parldr di se, 

- - di penna 

- - di petto, 

- - dipidtto, 

- - dipiglio, 

- - dipunta, 

- - di stoccdta, 

- - fastidio, 

- - fnocchio, 

- - fondo, 

- - fondo alia roha, 

- - forma, 

- - il battesimo, 

- il buon anno, 

- - il buon giornOj 

- - il buon vidggio, 

- - il buon arrivo, 

- - ilcdne, 

- - ilcompito, 



to strike with one's hands 

to cuff 

to fall to 

to hit the nail on the head 

to butt as sheep do 

to snatch at 

to lay hold of 

to take aim at 

to give occasion to be talked of 

to cancel a writing 

to hit with one's breast 

to strike flat 

to catch hold suddenly of 

to hit with a thrust 

to give a thrust 

to molest 

to give fair words 

to sink 

to waste one's property 

to shape 

to baptize 

to wish a happy new-year 

to bid one good-morrow 

to wish one a good journey 

to bid one welcome 

to watch one 

to give an end to 



il cuore ad una cosa, to apply one's self to a thing 



il dosso, 

il motto, 

il pdsso, 

il viso, 

imprestdnza, 

indugio, 

in serbo, 

in su la voce, 

in terra, 

in uno, 

la bdla, dar la berta, 

la ben veniita, 

bubna mdno, 



to turn one's back 

to pass one's word 

to give free passage 

to turn one's eyes on any thing 

to lead to 

to put off time 

to give in keeping 

to bid one speak lower 

to run a-ground 

to meet with one by chance 

to mock one 

to bid one welcome 

to give for drink 



- la Qorda, to give the strappado, to be troublesome 

Dare 



228 



REMARKS on some 



Dare lafdva, 
— la mdla pdsqua, 



to give one's consent 
to vex one sadly 



to coax, to flatter, to give fair words 



- - la mdla ventura, 

- - la mdno, 

- - la mdno, 

- - passo, (depecker), 
I)ar si spasso, 

Dare V anello, 

- - lapdlma, 

- - la pariglia, 

- - la spinta, 

- - la posta, 

- - la sdlda, 



to wish a man ill luck 
to give a helping hand 
to marry- 
to dispatch 
to amuse one's self 
to marry 
to yield the victory 
to give as good as he brings 
to push one 
to appoint the time or place 
to stiffen or starch 



- - la stretta a qualcuno, to overreach one 

- la trdtta, to give leave to export goods 

- - la voce, to raise a report 

- - la vblta, to turn as milk does, to overturn 



- - la vblta al cdnto, 

- - le calcdgna, 

- - le mosse, 

- - le spdlle, 

- - leprese, 

- - V ultimo crolhf 

- - martelloj 

- - menda, 

- - modo, 

- - nel bersdglio, 

- - nell' idropico } 

- - nelle mdni, 
~ - nelle scattdte, 

- - nel vino, 

- - nqja, 

- - nome, 

- norma, 

- - bglio, 

- - ornbra, 

- opera, 

- - parte, 

- - passu to, 



to lose one's wits 

to run away 

to give a racer the start 

to take to one's heels 

to let one take his choice 

to fall down dead 

to make one jealous or suspicious 

to find fault 

to help or support one 

to hit the mark 

to fall into a dropsy 

to fall into the hands 

to fall into bad company 

to find out the design of a thing 

to tire one 

to spread a report 

to prescribe a rule 

to soothe one 

to give suspicion 

to endeavour at a thing 

to share or acquaint 

to omit 

Dare 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



229 



Dare pdsto, 

- - per Dlo, 

- - ricdpito, 

- sesto, 

- - spdlla, 

- - stento, 

- - un carpino, 

- - vista, 

- - vita, 

- - unafinta, 

- '* una gira volta, 

- - uri occhidta, 

- - un grifone, 

- - un pax tecum, 

- la vinta, 

- si a, 

- - si a die si sia, 



to feed one 
to give for God's sake 
to deliver safety 
to put in order 
to abet 
to give cause of sorrow 
to beat one soundly 
to seem to do a thing 
to give time or life 
to make a feint 
to take a turn 
to cast an eye on 
to strike one in the mouth 
to stun one with a blow 
to yield the victory 
to apply one's self to 
to be for any thing 
si a qualche cosa to give one's self up to any thing 
si a credere, to believe 

si a diletti, to give one's self up to pleasure 

si ad intendere, to flatter one's self 

si ad uno, to give one's self up to one 

si attorno, to go the round 

si briga, nqja,fastidio, to trouble one's self 



- - 5' in preda, 

- - s' in uno, 

- - si maraviglia, 

- - si martello, 

- - si pace, 

- si vdnto, 

Different 
FAR animo, 

- - si dnimo, 

- - aproposito, 
Fatto a proposito, 
Far motto, 

- • del bravo, 

- - scelta, 

- - pbmpa, 

- - il muso, 

- - dandri, 



to yield one's self as a prey 

to refer one's self to one 

to wonder at 

to vex one's self 

to live quietly 

to brag, to boast 



significations of fare. 

to give courage 

to take courage 

to do on purpose 

to be proper or fit 

\ to make a sign 

to brag of bravely 

to choose 

to boast 

to pout at one 

to make money 

Far, 



230 



REMARKS on some 



Far gente, or solddti, 
II far delta lima, 
Al far del giorno, 
Su'lfar delta notte, 
Far di mestieri, 

- guaddgni, 

- - due volte Vdnno, 

- si inndnzi, 

- - si in qud, 

- - si in Id, 

- - si in dietro, 



- - capoltno, 

- - la spia, 

- - pace, 
Fate pdce, 
Far a bottino, 

- - a capelli, 

- - accoglienza, 

- - a compdsso, 

- a concorrenza, 

- - acquisto,' 

- - credere, 

- - a gdra, 

- - aggudti, 

- - a pugni, 

- - all' amore, 

- - alle coltelldte, 

- - alle pugna, 
m - alto, 

- - a mdno, 

- - a malcuore, 

- - a metd, 

m - a pennello, 

- appresto, 

- - a regatta, 

- - afdrsela, 

- - arrosto, 
m m sapere, 

- a sdssi, 

- - iacere, 
• - avdnzo, 



to raise soldrers 

the new moon 

at the break of day 

towards the evening 

to be necessary 

to win 

to bear fruit twice a year 

to come forward 

y ' : to approach or advance 

to go back 

to retire 

to toast a health 

to deceive or ensnare 

to be spying 

to agree 

agree among yourselves 

to share alike 

to pull one another by the hair 

to show kindness to one 

to work by the compass 

to strive, to vie 

to gain 

to make one believe 

to strive for the victory 

to lay ambushes 

to box 

to make love 

to fight with knives 

to box 

to halt 

to come to blows 

to do against one's will 

to do by halves 

to do a thing exactly 

to make preparation 

to struggle, or scramble 

to take one's revenge 

to roast meat 

to make one know 

to fight with stones 

to make one be silent 

to thrive 

Far 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 231 

Far bdco bdco, to play at bo-peep 

- - bdndo, to proclaim 

- - beffe, to flout at 

- - bellin bellino, to soothe or fawn upon 

- - bisogno, to be needful 

- - broglio, to make a hurly-burly 

- - buona riuscita, to come to a good effect 

- - buona vicindnza, to keep fair with one's neighbours 

- - buonjidnco, to be merry and jovial 

- - buon partito, to make a good offer 

- - cantdre, to make one yield 

- - cappelldccio, to beat a man with his own weapons 

- - cdpo, to grow to a head 

- - cdpo ad uno, to have recourse to one for help 

- - cdpo in un luogo, to meet in some appointed place 

- - caselle, to pump a man of his secrets 

- cdso, to make account of, or esteem 

- - cerca, to seek after 

- - cerchio, to make a ring 

- - cervello, to call his wits together 

[mugger 

- - eke che si sia alia mdechia, to do things in hugger- 
* - cipiglioy to look frowningly 

- - colezione, to breakfast 

- - collezione to make a collection 

- - comparsa, to make a show 

- - compra, to buy a bargain 

- come lo sparviere, to live from hand to mouth 

- - congiura, to conspire 

- - conserva, to lay up in store 

- conto, to reckon 

- - copia, to make a copy 

- cordoglio, to lament 

- - corteggio, to fawn upon one 

- - cose difuoco, to do wonderful things 

- - cuore, to encourage 

- - da cena, to get supper ready 

- - del grdnde, to take state upon one 

- - del cappello f to pull off one's hat 

- - di meno> to do without 

- - divieto, to prohibit 

- d'occhio, to wink upon one 

Far 



232 



REMARKS on some 



[the world says 
Far dosso di buffone, to do a thing, and not care what 

[pence 

- - d' una Idncia unfuso, to bring a noble to nine 

[stone 

- - due chiodi in una c&lda, to kill two birds with one 

- - fdccia, to set a good face on things 

- - fdgotto, to pack up and be gone 

- - fildre uno, to make one do any thing 

- - forte, to strengthen 

- fretta, to make haste 

- - fronte, to face 

- - gdbbo, to flout at 

- gala, " to be gay and merry 

- - galloria, to show signs of joy 

- - gente, to raise men 

- - giornata, to fight a battle 

- - grdzia, to do a favour 

- - grcppo, to make mouths as a child 

- - grida, to cry out 

- -gruzzolo, to hoard up money 

- onterta, to set up an inn 

- - ifdttisuoi, to mind one's ow r n business 

- - il balordo, to play the simpleton 

[streets 

- - il bello in pidzza, to show one's fine clothes in the 

- - il buon pro to do one good when one eats 

- il compito, to end one's task 

- - il didvolOf to play the devil 
il gattone, to pretend not to see, or know 



- - il giorgio, 

- - il Latino a cavdllo, 

- - il rombo, 

- - il sdnto, 

- - il verno, 

- - il seme, 

- - istdnza, 

- - far la ad uno 9 

- - la busca, 

- - la festa ad uno, 

- - lafschidta, 

- - la gdtta morta, 



to strut in fine clothes 

to be put hard to it 

to make a rumbling noise 

to play the hypocrite 

to pass away the winter 

to come to perfection 

to be urgent with one 

to play any one a trick 

to scramble for 

to kill one 

to make a whistling noise 

to play at bo-peep 

Far 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



233 



Far la ninfa, 

- - la notte, 

- - la ronda, 

- - la Scarpa , 

~ - la scoperta, 

- - la scorta, 

- - le carte, 

- - le parole, 

- - la lepre vecchia, 

- - le spdlle gobbe, 

- - lasica, 

- - le spese, 

- - le stimdte, 

- - levdta, 



to mince it 

to pass the night 

to walk the round 

to cut a purse 

tp keep a watch 

to be a guide 

to deal at cards 

to speak at large 

to avoid a danger that's seen 

to shrug up one's shoulders 

to flirt at one 

to bear one's charges 

to esteem one greatly 

to raise men 



le volte del leone, to continue walking in one place 



- - lo spasimdto, 

- - lo spaventdcchio, 

- - luogo, or piazza, 

- - mala riuscita, 

- - mala vicindnza, 

- - mal oV occhio, 

- - mal pro, 

- - mdsckera, 

- mercdto, 

- - merce, 

- - merenda r 

- - motto, 

- - motto ad uno, 

- - natdle, 

- - occhio, 

- - ogni possibile, 

- - opera, 

- - orecchio di mercdnte, 

- - paragone, 

- - partito, 
* - passdggio, 

- - passdta, 

- - pdsto, 

- - pdtto, 

- - peduccio, 

- - ponta, 

- - ponta fdlsa, 



to over-play the lover 
to brag much 
to give place 
to have ill luck 
to be a bad neighbour 
to have sore eyes 
to do one no good 
to be masked 
to cheapen 
to show mercy 
to eat one's luncheon 
to give notice of 
to salute or send word 
to keep Christmas 
to wink at 
to do one's utmost 
to do the same 
to pretend not to hear 
to compare together 
to make a match or bargain 
to pass over slightly 
to get easily through a business 
to eat a meal 
to make a bargain 
to soothe one 
to make an end 
to make a false thrust 
Far 



234 



REMARKS on some 



?a 


r popolo, 


to make one amongst the rest 


- 


- prezzo, 


to make much of 


- 


- prestito, 


to lend 


- 


- pro, 


to do good 


- 


- questione. 


to question 


- 


- rabuffo, 


to chide 


- 


- ragione, 


to do right or pledge one 


- 


- ricredente, 


to make one change his opinion 


- 


- richidmo, 


to appeal unto 


. 


- roba, 


to heap up riches 


. 


- rubta, 


to wheel or hover about 


- 


- sdcco, 


to hoard up 


- 


- saccomdno, 


to sack or ravage 


» 


- salvo, 


to give a volley of shot 


- 


- sdngue, 


to bleed 


- 


- sapere, 


to let one know 


- 


- scdla, 


to come to a landing place 


- 


- scommessa, 


to lay a wager 


- 


- sconto, 


to make an abatement 


- 


- se la, 


to go away 


- 


- sembidnte, or 


vista, to make a show of 


_ 


- sfoggi, 


to make a fine show 


. 


<- sicurtd, 


to be bound 


- 


- spdlla, 


to back one 


- 


- stare, 


to over-reach one 


- 


- stdr forte, 


to over-reach one cunningly 


- 


- stdre a segno 


to keep one under 


. 


- stdre a stecchetto, to force one to his obedience 


- 


- tantdra, 


to be gay and merry together 


- 


- tavoldccio, 


to prepare for good cheer 


- 


- tempone, 


to live a merry life 


- 


- testa, 


to make head 


- 


- trebbio, 


to live merrily in good company 


" 


- il tribolo, 


to cry for money 
[bottom 


- 


- tutte le uova in un paniere, to venture all in one 


- 


- valere, 


to cause to prevail 


- 


- veduta, vista 


tfinta, to make a show 


. 


- veduta 


to make one believe what is not 


- 


- vela, 


to sail 


- 


- velo, 


to make resistance 


~ 


- vezzi, 


to caress 
Far 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



235 



Far una bravdta, 

- un cavalletto ad uno, 

- - una trincdta, 

- - una giostra ad uno, 

- - una predica ad uno, 

- - un farfdllone, 

- - uno sfregio ad uno, 

- - un manichetto, 

- - un marrone, 

- - un passer otto, to 

- - un penzolo, 

- - uno smdcco ad uno, 

- - uno stdglio, 

- - un tiro, 

- vuotdre la sella, 

- - uova, 



to make a bravado 

to cheat one 

to make a merry drinking 

to put a jest upon one 

to admonish one fairly 

ta make some mistake 

to mark one in the face 

to point at one in scorn 

to commit a great error 

do a thing hand over head 

to be hanged by the neck 

to affront one 

to fix 

to shoot or play a prank 

to supplant a man 

to lay eggs 



Different significations of stare. 

We use the verb stare to mark an action of repose, 
by putting the verb which follows in the gerund, or 
infinitive, with a or ad. 



he studies 

they write 

[together 

you will read 



Sta studidndo, or sta a studidre, 
Stdnno scrivendo, or stdnno ascrivere, 

Starete leggendo, or a leggere insieme, 

Stare has several other significations ; as, 

Star inpiedi. to stand upright 

- - bene o mdle, to be well or ill 

- - su, to rise ; state su, rise. 

- - giil, to sit down 
Stdte giil, sit down 
Star a sentire, to listen ; sto a sentire, I listen 

- - a sedere, to be sitting 
Stdte a sedere, sit down 
Sta bene, it is well, it is very well 
Star per uscire, to be just going out 

- - bene a cavdllo, to sit well on horseback 

- - in cdsa, to stay at home 

- - lesto, to be upon one's guard 

Star 



'236 



REMARKS on some 



Star su le burle, 



- - per cadere, 

- - per morire, 

- - in dubbio, 

- - a vedere, 

- - con le mdni alia cintura, 

- - su la sua, 
Questo vi sta bene, 
Questo non mi sta bene, 
Star a bdda, 

- - a bottega, 

- - a crepa cuore, 

- ad alcuno, 

- - ad ascoltdre, 

- - in disdgio, 

- - a dormire, 

- - u dozzina, 

- - a fare, 

- - afronte, 
r - agdla, 

- - a giactre, 

- - al ditto, 

- - alia posta, 

- air erta, 

- - alle vedette, 

- - allegro, 

- - al mondo, 

- - a locdnda, 

- - al pardgone, 

- a martillo, 

- in pericolo, 

- a petto, 

- - apigione, 

- " appoggidto, 

- appresso, 

- - a segno, 

- - in sperdnza, 

- - aspettdndo, 

- - a stento, 

- - attbrno, 

- - a tu per tu, 



to jest, or banter 

to hold out stoutly 

to be ready to fall 

to be like to die 

to be in doubt 

to expect the issue 

to stand idly 

to look grave 

that becomes you well 

that does not become me 

to linger or expect 

to mind one's shop 

to live at heart's grief 

to be at any man's turn 

to hear 

to be uneasy 

to lie sleeping 

to board 

to be doing 

to out-face 

to float 

to be lying down 

to rely on a person's word 

to watch for an opportunity 

" to look needfully about 

to stand centinel on a tower 

to live or be merry 

to live in the world 

to live in a hired room 

to bear the touchstone 

to live in anxiety 

to be in danger 

to be opposite 

to live in a rented house 

to lean upon 

to stand or dwell near 

to stand near the mark 

to live in hopes 

to expect 

to live in distress 

to stand about 

to be free and easy 

Star 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



237 



Star a uno, 

- - bene a cdsa. 

- - buona pezza. 

- - cdldo, 

• - cheto, 

- - con dltm, 

- - del debito, 

- - di buona voglia, 

- - di mala voglia, 

- - di supra, 

- - di sotto, 

- - fresco, 

* - in aggudto, 

- - in bildncia, 

- - inndnzi, 

- - in a r mi, 

- - in cervello, 

- - in letio, 

- - in orecehio, 

- - in pendente, 

- - in rischio, 

- - 2tt se, 

- - zn sew^ore, 

- - in sospetto, 

- - in su Ipuntigho, 

- - in villa, 

- - £« zurlo, 

- - lontdno, 

- - per, 

- - sopra di se, to 

- - sdno, 

- - su' I avviso, 

- - su' I duro, 

- - su' I ritroso, 

- - su I tirdto, 

- - tra I si e'l no, 

- - vicino, 

- - vigilante, 

- - z$tfo, 

- - sulla caccia. 



to depend upon one 

to be well at home 

to stand a good while 

to lie warm 

to be hushed 

to live with others 

to answer for a debtor 

to be merry 

to be sad 

to lie over 

to lie under 

to be badly off 

to lie in wait 

to stand in doubt 

to stand before 

to be in arras 

to have a care, or to be wary 

to be a-bed 

to hearken ; 

to be in suspense 

to be in danger 

to be positive, 

to listen with suspicion 

tQ be suspected 

to stand upon punctilios 

to live in the country 

to stand in a maze 

to live far 

to stand for, to be about 

presume too much on one's self 

to be in health 

to be prepared 

to be obstinate 

to be coy 

to stand upon strict points 

to be in suspense 

to be neighbours 

to be watchful 

to be silent 

to be very fond of hunting 



Different 



238 



REMARKS on some 



Different significations of avere. 
AVER delV uomo da bene, to appear as an honest man 



to look as a miracle 

to be well pleased 

to approve of 

to like or consent 

to disapprove of 

to dislike 

to have at heart 

to think of other things 

to be busy 

to esteem 

to hate 

to be wont 

[believe him ignorant 

signifies to believe ; as, Vho per ignordnte, 



del miracolo, 

- cdro, aver a cdro, 

- a bene. 

- per bene, 

- per mdle, 

- a male, 

- a cubre, 

- il cdpo altrbve, 

- dafdre, 

- in pregio, in istima, 

- in odio, 

- per costume, 



- - il vizio, nelle ossa, 

- a capitate, 

- - a cur a, 

- - da dare, 

- a dispetto, 

- - a dispiacere, 

- - fastidio, 

- - dgio,^ 

- a grddo, 

- - alle mdni, 

- - a mdni, 

- - a mente, 

- - dnimo, 

- - a noja, 
a petto, 

- - ardire, 

- a scherno, 

- - a schifo, 

- - a vile, 

- - bel tempo, 

- - buona voce, 



to be very vicious 

to esteem much 

to be intrusted with 

to have to give 

to have in despite 

to be displeased with 

to loath 

to be at ease 

to like 

to have in hand 

to have ready at hand 

to remember well 

to have courage or a mind to 

to dislike 

to have at heart 

to dare 

to scorn 

to loath 

to hold very cheap 

to live a merry life 

to be well spoken of 

[for a trifle 

che si sia per un pezzo di pdne, to have a thing 
cimiere ad ogni elmetto, to be ready for any thing 

Aver 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



239 



Aver da torndre, 

- del tondo, 

- destroy 

- - di che, 

- - dietro, 

- - di grdzia, 

- - fdccia, 
Non aver faccia, 
Aver fatica, 

- - fede in, 

- freddo in piedi, 

- - fretta, 

- - fiimo, 

- - gola, 



to be about to return 

to have little sense 

to have fit occasion 

to have wherewith 

to contemn 

to take it as a favour 

to dare 

to blush for shame 

to have trouble 

to confide in 

to be in great want 

to be in haste 

to be proud 

to have a longing desire 



il capo a grilli, to have one's wits wool-gathering 

- - il cavello, a oriuoli, to be fickle 

- grand' opinione, to presume much on one's self 

to have need 

to have a roving head 

to have a whim in one's head 

to have one's full allowance 

to be in the wrong 

to have in trust - 

to have esteem of 

to keep 

to be careless 

to have in readiness 

to have at one's finger's ends 

[hands 

to have the law in one's own 

- V asso net ventriglio, to have an itching for gaming 

- - lingua, to have notice of a thing 

- V occhio al pennello, to mind one's business 

- V osso del poltrone, to have a bone in one's leg 

- - le campdne grosse, to be deaf 

- - le mdni ad uno, to hold one fast at his pleasure 

- - le traveggole, to take one thing for another 

- - luogo, to be expedient 

- mala gdtta da peldre, to have an ill crow to pluck 

- mala voce, to be ill spoken of 

- - mdle campdne r to be deaf 

- - mangidto nod, to have the absent ill spoken of 

Aver 



- ~ di uopo, 

- - il cervello che voli 

- - il cimurro, 

- - il suo pienOf 

- - il torto, 

- - in consegna, 

- - in conto, 

- - in gudrdia, 

- - in negligenza, 

- in or dine, 

- sidle dita, 

la pdlla in mdno, 



240 



REMARKS on some 



Aver martello, 


to be passionately jealous of 


- 


- mezzo, or modo, 


to be able, or have means 


. 


- nelV idea. 


to bear in mind 


- 


- obbligo, 


to be obliged 


. 


- occhio, 


to have a fair outside 


.- 


- occhio d* aquila, 


to have a sharp look 


_ 


- odore, 


to have an idea of a thing: 


- 


- cmbra, 


to be suspicious of 


. 


- paura, 


to be afraid 


- 


- pensiere, 


to be full of care, or thoughtful 


- 


- per scusdto, 


to excuse one 


- 


- piede, 


to get footing 


- 


- poco sale in zucca 


, to have but little sense 


- 


- ragione da vender e, to have reason to spare 


- 


- sdegno, 


to disdain 


- 


- sonno, 


to be sleepy 
[crime 


- 


- toccdto la coda di trial pelo, to be tainted with some 


- 


- sulla pimta della 


lingua, to have at one's tongue's 
[stake 




tut to 7 suo in su' 


' tavoliere, to have one's all at 



Different significations of essere. 



E'SSERperfdre, 

- - da qudlche cosa, 

- -da poco, 

- - da niente, 
t .., - a cavdllo, 

Non hser da tdnto, 
Esser di giovamento, 

- - di buona ndscita, 

- - per la mdla via, 

- - per lefrdtte, 

- - fuor di Bologna, 



to be just going to do 

to be good for something 

to have but little sense 

to be good for nothing 

to be out of trouble or pain 

[able 

not to be capable of, not to be 

to help, to assist 

to come of a good family 

[condition 

to be ruined, to be in a bad 

to be undone or ruined 

to be ignorant 

Esser 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



241 



E'sser a Jerri, 

- - a grddo, 

- - a mal partito, 

- -a parte, 

- - 272 questione, 

- - ben veduto, 
« - d'avviso, 

- - bene in gdmbe, 

- - brillo, 

- - ddnno, 

- - di poca levdta, 

- - di testa, 

- -forza, 

- - in detto, 

- - in assetto, 

- - in detto, 

- - in disgrazia, 

- - in essere, to be 

- - injacenda, 

- - injiori, 

- - injbrtuna, 

- - z« piega, 

- - in predicamenio, 

- - fo?*o-0 cfr bocca 9 

- - luogo, 

- -rmala lingua, 

- - jwd/ veduto, 

- - ;;dc<?, 

- - tenuio, 

- - ?<m cqp;%£ of oro, 



to lie close together 

to be acceptable 

to be in a bad taking 

to be partaker of 

to squabble 

to be kindly entertained 

to deem 

to be strong and lusty 

to be tipsy 

to be pitied 

to be of small worth 

to be harebrained 

to be constrained 

to have good luck at play 

to be prepared 

to be agreed 

to be in disgrace 

in state, quality, and condition 

to be busy 

to be in one's prime 

to be lucky 

to be bending 

to be in consideration 

to be a great talker 

to be convenient 

to sow distrust among friends 

to be unwelcome 

to be quits at play 

to be beholden to 

to be one in a thousand 



Different significations of sapere 

SAPE'RE, 

- - a mente, 



- - a mena dito, 

- - male, 
Questo mi sa male, 
Saper di buono, saper bubno 

- - di cattivo, 



signifies to know or perceive , 

to know by heart 

to have at one's fingers' ends 

to displease, to smell ill 

that displeases me- 

to smell welt 

to smeM ill 



di muffo, or di mucido, to have a mouldv smelt 
M . * Saper 



242 



REMARKS on some 



Saper di niente, to have no smell, to smell of nothing 

- — troppo di povero to appear poor 

[sharp 

- - trovdr il pelo nelV novo, to be cunning, to be 
Ti so dire, I can tell thee 
Saper di lettere, to have a smattering of learning 

- - di muschio, to taste or smell of musk 

- - di secco, to smell of the cask 

- - meglio, to take in better part 

- - per il senno, to know by rote 
* - grddo di checchessia, to be pleased with any thing 



Different significations of tenere. 

TENE'RE da uno, to be of one's side 

- - a bada, to amuse one 

- - in contrdrio, to be of a contrary opinion 

- - per gdlanf uomo, to believe one honest 
Lo tengo per radtlo, I take him to be mad 
Tenere le Idgrime, to forbear weeping 
Non ho potuto tener le risa, I could not forbear laughing 
Tenere le risa, to forbear laughing 

» - alia trdccia, to pursue 

[a person 

-. - conto ad uno, to make an account of, to esteem 

- # la per se, to keep a thing to one's self 

Tenet ela per "o6i 9 keep it for yourself 

Tener a mente, to call to mind 

- lajavella ad uno, to hinder one from speaking 

to stand godfather 

to be accessory to a theft 

[vants 

to keep a coach and ser- 

take this (in the imperative) 

to hold the bag 



Tener a battessimo, 
- - mano alfurto, 



-m - carrozza e servitori, 
Wieni guestoy 
Tener il &acco r 
Tenere la battuta, 

„ r invito, 

m a dieta, 

• a cimento, 

« a stento, 

- corte bandila, 



to beat time in music 

to accept what is proposed 

to keep low in diet 

to hold to a trial 

to keep in pain 

to keep open house 

Tener 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 



243 



Tener dozzina, 

- - a bdda, 

m - il bordone, 

- - fermo, 

i> - in bocca, 

- - le poste, 

- - mdno, 

- - mente, 

- - mercdto, 

- - ragione, 

- - parlamento, 

- - in sospeso, . 

- - perfede, 

- - trattdto, 



to keep a boarding house 

to hold in suspense 

to be still in one's mind 

to keep one's word 

to keep a secret 

to hold stakes 

to lend a hand 

to heed 

to bargain 

to judge according to law 

to hold a parley 

to hold in suspense 

to take upon trust 

to hold correspondence with 



Different significations of vole re. 



VOLE' RE, ^ 

Vogliono alcrini, 
Volerla con uno, 
Voler bene, 

- - male, 

m - piic tosto, 

- - qualsivoglia, 

Le cose vogliono essere cosi, 
Si vudle, 
Voler dire, 

- - meglio, 

- - la baja, 

- - la gotta, 

- - male a morle, 
Volessepnr Dio, 



signifies to believe; as 

some believe 

to have a spite against one 

to love 

to hate 

to have rather 

whatsoever 

things must be so 

they will, or will have 

to mean 

to have rather 

to affect mocking 

to pick a quarrel with one 

to hate deadly 

oh ! would to God 



Different significations of venire. 

[faint 
VENTR meno, venir mdnco, to fall into weakness, or 

- - in succhio, to have one's mouth water 

- - in sorte, to fall to one's lot 

- - sotto il nome, to go by the name of 

m 2 Venir 



244 



REMARKS on some 



Venir stimdto, 

- - biasimato, 

- - alle strette, 
Non mi vien bene, 
Questo vi vien bene, 
Qudnti vene vengono ? 
JMene vengono due, 
Mi viene voglia, 
Venir adosso, 

- - al di sopra, 

- - alle prese, 

- - alle brutte, 

- - a battdglia^ 

- - a bene, 

- - a dire, 

m m alle mdni, 

- - detto, 

- - posti gli occhi, 

- -fallito, 

- - scontrdto, 

- - a tdglio, 

- - trovdto, 



to be esteemed 

to be blamed 

to come to a conclusion 

it does not please me 

that becomes you well 

how many must you have 

1 must have two of them 

I have a mind 

to fall upon 

to have the upper hand 

to come to close fight 

to come to foul words 

to fight a battle 

to come to good 

to import or mean 

to come to blows 

to be said 

to fix one's eyes on 

to miss one's aim or purpose 

to meet withall 

to suit well 

to happen to find 



Of the Particles ci and vi. 

CI signifies us ; he speaks to us, ci pdrla, &c. Vi 
signifies you ; he speaks to you, vi pdrla ; he gives 
you, vi da, 

Ci and vi are adverbs of place ; as, 

Ci siamo, we are here, there, or at it. 

Vi andremo, we will go there. 

Ci and vi are conjunctive pronouns, when they sig- 
nify us and you ; and when ci and vi signify there, at 
it, &c. they are adverbs of place. 



Different significations of che. 

CHE signifies that, tvho, whom, that he, that she t 
that they, 'which, xvhat f 

Che 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 245 

Che signifies what ; mas. what man is that ? che 
uomo c ? Che ? what ? fem. what house ? che cdsa ? 

Che ? what ? plural mas. what books have they ? che 
libri hanno ? 

Che, plural fem. what lessons ? che lezioni ? 

Che signifies because; che la donna net desiar e 
hen di noi piic frdle, because a woman is much more 
weak in her desires than we are. Guarini nel Pastor 
Fido. 

Che signifies so that, or in that manner. I will do 
it, so that, or in that manner, that you shall be con- 
tented, faro che sarete contento. 



Different significations of via. 

VTA signifies the way ; example, by the way of 
Paris, per la via di Parigi. 

Via is put after the verbs an dare, passdre, condurre, 
fuggire, gettare, and then these verbs have more force 
and elegance ; as, 

Anddr via, to go away. 

Va* via, get thee away, 

Pdssa via, furf ante, get thee gone, scoundrel. 

Condur via, to take away. 

Fuggir via, to run away. 

Gettdte via questo, throw this away. 

Via signifies much : as, much more learned, via piic 
ddtto. 

Via signifies come ; as, come, come, gentlemen, do 
not fear, via, via, signori, non temete. 

Via is sometimes taken for vblta ; example, ire via. 
ire sono nove, three times three make nine ; qudttro 
via qudttro sono sedici, four times four make sixteen. 

Via signifies the means ; as, by the means of the 
passages in the holy fathers, per via de testi de santi 
pddri. 



Different 



246 REMARKS on some 



Different significations of da. 

DA is oftentimes the ablative of the indefinite article, 
and signifies in English^ow .* example, ho ricevuto da 
Pietro, I have received from Peter. * - ■>•'* 

Da* with an apostrophe is the ablative of the defi- 
nite article, and signifiesyrom the, or by the : example, 
e stimdto d(C Francesi, he is esteemed by the French. 

Da signifies he gives; example, mi da buona spe- 
rdnza, he gives me good hopes, &c. 

Da signifies upon the faith ; example, da galdnt- 
uomo, upon the faith of an honest man. 

Da signifies like; example, ha traitdto da galdnV 
uomo, he has acted like an honest man. V. S.pdrla 
da amico, you speak like a friend. 

Da signifies of, or to put ; example, una scdtola da 
iabdcco, a snufl-box, or a box to put snuff in. 

Da signifies about ; example, un uumo attempato da 
cinqudnt* mini, a man about fifty years old. 

l)a signifies, from ; example, from Rome to Paris, 
da Romafino a Parigi. Da chevi vidi, since I saw you. 

Da beiore infinitives signifies to be ; example, Jt is 
easy to be seen, e facile da vedere. 



Different significations of per. 

PER signifiesjftr ; example, for me, per me. 

Per signifies through, or all over ; example, through 
or all over the city, per tutia la citta. 

Per signifies during ; as, during a year, per un anno. 

Per signifies to fetch, and seek after ; example, go 
fetch some wine, anddte per vino ; go for a physician, 
andate per un medico. 

Per signifies hotv ; example, how good soever it be, 
per bubno die sia. 

Per signifies each or every ; example, one in each 
hand, uno per mdno. 

Per signifies just or ready to ; example, he is just 
going away, he is ready to go, t' per partire. 

Per 



VERBS and PREPOSITIONS. 247 

Per signifies every one ; example, every one, un per 
uno. 

Per signifies depending on ; example, it does not de- 
pend on me, now rest a per me. It signifies, as Jar as ; 
example, as far as I see, per quel che vedo. 

Per signifies as for ; example, as for me, io per me. 

Per dnche signifies not yet ; example, I have not 
seen him yet, non l 9 ho per dnche veduto. 



Different significations of si, ne, and pur or pure. 

THOUGH the following particles si, ne, pur or pure, 
are not prepositions, yet their vast extent and signifi- 
cation in Italian has induced me to insert the different 
acceptations of them here, for the greater ease and 
advantage of the learner. 

SI 

Signifies it is, they, men, the tvorld, yes, so, so as, as 
much, as well, until, nevertheless, himself, &c. 

Examples., 

Si dice, it is said, 

Si dma, or si dmano, they love. 

Si dira, the world, or people will say. 

Si, signore, yes, sir. 

Cavaliere si avventurdto nonfu mdi, never was there 
so fortunate a gentleman. 

Si per il mio, quanto, per il vostro inter esse, as well 
for my interest as your's. 

Si la moglie come il manto, as well the wife as the 
husband. 

Si vi dmo, perche, nevertheless I love you, because. 

Egli si ricordb, he or she remembered. 

* # * Note, that when si is accented, it is always an 
adverb. 

NE 
Signifies nor, neither, in the, with, hence, thence, away, 
at it, of it, us, from us, none, any, some, thereof, else, &c. 

Examples, 



248 REMARKS on some VERBS, &c . 

Examples. 

Ne guesto, ne quello vi concedo, I grant you neither 
this nor that. 

Spasseggidndo ne campi, walking in the fields. 

M' Hncontrdi me miei amid, I met with my friends. 

Vdttene pe Jatti tuoi, get thee hence about thy busi- 
ness. 

Egli sene viene alia volta nostra, he is coming to- 
wards us. 

Egli ne ha tolto il nostro riposo, he has taken our 
rest from us. 

Jo mene vado, I am going away. 

Sene ride, he laughs at it. 

Sene lamenta, he complains of it. 

Egli ci diede il buon di, he bade us good morrow. 

Jo non ne ho, I have none. 

Se ne avessi, if I had any. 

Venejarei parte, I would give you some. 

Voi ne potrete disporre, you may dispose of it. 

%* Note, that when ne is accented, it is always an 
adverb. 

Pur or pure 

Is a particle of great use and elegance in the Italian 
language, and signifies in English, yet, although, more- 
over, besides, notwithstanding all conditions, in the end, 
'when all is said and done, so much as, not only, in case, 
surely, even, at least, needs, or of force : as it would be 
tedious to give examples of all the different significa- 
tions of this extensive particle, I shall only mention 
the following phrases : 

m Example, 
Pur adesso, even now. 

Pur 6ra, just now. 

Pur mo, at this instant. 

Pur allora, even then. 

Pur assdi, too, too much. 

Pur parole ? what ; nothing but words ? 

Pur pure, yet, for all that. 

\* Note, that the following particles, di, e egli, sib- 
hen, ne gid, pur me, che, il, have often no signification 

at 



Of ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 24,9 

at all, but are used as expletives by way of embellish- 
ing the discourse. See the eighth Treatise, chapter 1, 
of Expletives. 



FIFTH TREATISE. 

Of Composition, and Rules for Writing and Speaking 
Italian, contained in a Jew Themes.* 

AFTER we have learned the auxiliary verbs, and 
the three conjugations, we may begin to translate Eng- 
lish into Italian, and observe the rules of concordance : 
and, if we think proper, we may compose the following 
themes, upon the principles of the Italian language, 
without looking at the Italian that is put after the 
English, except it be to compare it with the transla- 
tion. 

The first is upon the articles. 

The second upon the verb avere. 

The third upon the verb essere. 

The fourth upon the pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, gli. 

The fifth upon the particle si. 

The sixth upon there is, there tvas, there mill he % 
there has been. 

The seventh upon the articles of the, of, &c. 

Be careful in composing these themes, as they con- 
tain a great many niceties in the Italian tongue. I 
have put them in Italian, word for word, to render 
them the more easy. The words marked with a 
number, show that there are some rules to be observed, 
as appears by the page which follows the Italian 
theme. 

* The student is also recommended to consult Bot- 
tarelli's Exercises upon the-.various parts of Ita- 
lian speech, andjreferring'to the rules of this grammar. 

m 5 THEME 



250 Of ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 

THEME 

On the Articles, 

My brother's fancy and desire for the study of the 
Italian language, are the cause that the passion he had 
for hunting, gaming, and musical instruments, is at 
present much abated ; if he had believed the advice 
you gave him in the President's garden, when he spoke 
to us of the wit of that gentleman, who was much 
esteemed by the king, he would then have begun to 
h^ie studied the principles of it, he would at present 
have known part of the difficulties, and would have 
made a great many journeys with the nephew of a 
great prince, who would have had him. 

12 3 

LA voglia, e 7 desiderio, di mio fratello, per lo studio 

4 
delta lingua Italidna 9 sono cagione, che gli ardori che 

5 6 7^ 

aveva per la cdccia, i giuochi, e gli stromenti di musica, 

8 9 

sono adesso motto moderdti : se avesse creduto agli avvisi 

10 11 12 13 

che gli davdte net giardino del signor Presidente, quando 
14 15 16 

ci parldva delV ingegno di quel gentiluomo ch'era idnto 

17 18 19 

stimato dal re, avrebbe allora comminciato a studi&rne i 

20 21 

principj, saprebbe adesso una pdrte delle dijjicoltcL, ed 

22 23 24 

worebbe fdtto molti viaggi col nipote dhtn gran prmcipe 

25 
che lo voleva avere. 

This theme, and those which follow, are translated 
word for word. 

The number 1 shows that 7 is in the place of il ; see 
page 171. 

Number 



Of ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 251 

Number 2 teaches that we must say di mio, and 
not del mio ; see page 69. 

3. lo, and not il, p. 36. 

4. gli, and not gP, p. 38. 

5. i is better than li, p. 38. 

6. giuochi, and not giuoci, p. 49. 

7. g&j and not /z, p. 38.. 

8. se avesse, and not se aveva, p. 90. 

9. agli avvisi, and not g£' avvisi, p. 38. 

10. g/i ? and not lui, p. 64. 

11. net, and not «» il, p. 41. 

12. cte/, and not dello, p. 36. 

13. signor Presidente, and not signdre, p. 173. 

14. ci, and not noi, p. 66. 

15. dell 9 ) and not cfe/, p. 38. 

16. quel, and not quello, p. 56. 

17. ddl, in the ablative, p. 95. 

18. studidme, and not ne studidre, p. 67. 

19. i for li, p. 37. 

20. princzpj, and not principi, p. 50. 

21. difficolth, and not difficolte, p. 44. 

22. vidggi, and not viaggii, p. 50. 

23. co/, and not cow z7, p. 43. 

24. o-rarc, and not grande % p. 56. 

25. /o, and not il, p. 73. 



THEME, 

In vohick all the tenses of the Verb avere are inserted* 

I have the curiosity to know if you have done the 
business I had recommended to you ? 

If I had had time, I would have done it; but not 
having had it, I have not been able to do it. 

You would have had it if you had been willing, and 
if you had not played so much. 

I have quitted play altogether, to have my mind at 
rest. 

I shall therefore have some hopes that you will work 
for me. 

It 



252 Of ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 

It is reasonable that I take care of your affairs, 
since you take care of mine. 

Have some of mine, and I will have some of yours, 

1 * 2 

Ho la curiositii di sapere se avete Jatto Vqffdre che 
3 
v* avevo raccommanddto ? 

4< 5 6 

Se avessi avuto it tempo, I 9 avrei Jatto, ma non aven- 

-! 
I 

dolo avuto, non V ho potirto fare. 
8 
L 9 avriste avuto, se aveste voluto, e se non aveste 
giuocato tdnto. 

9 
Holascidto il giuoco affdtto, per avere lo spirito in 
ripbso. 
10 
Avro dunque qudlche sperdnza, che lavorerete per me, 

11 12 

JL' ragionevole ch 9 abbia aura de 9 vostri (tffari, giacche 
13 
n 9 avete de 9 miei. 

14 15 

Abbidtene de 9 miei, e n 9 avro de 9 vostri. 

1. curiosita with an accent, p. 176. 

* se avete, we use the plural, though we speak but 
to one person, p. 253. 

2. /' affdre, and not lo affare, p. 36. 

3. v avevo for vi avevo, p. 172. 
4>. avessi, and not avevo, p. 90. 

5. I 9 avrei, for lo avrei, p. 172. 

6. avendolo, and not lo avendo, p. 41. 

7. V ho, for lo ho, p. 172. 

8. aveste, and not avevdte, p. 90, 91. 

9. avere, without an h, p. 29. 

10. avro, with an accent, p. 177. 

11. cK dbbia, and not che abbia, p. 172. 

12. de' is better than delli, p. 37, 172. 

13. n' avete, instead of ne avete, p. 172. 
I4t. de 9 is better than delli, p. 37, 172. 
15. n 9 avro for ne 9 avro, p. 172. 

THEME 



Of ITALIAN COMPSITION. 258 

THEME 
On the Tenses of the Verb essere. 

I am much pleased in being received as tutor to 
those gentlemen who have been in the country where 
you have been. 

You have reason to be pleased, for they are very 
generous gentlemen. 

I should be yet more glad if they had not been in 
Italy, because I should have made that journey with 
them. 

It seems that you were there for some months last 
year. 

I should have been there, it is true, if my brother 
had been here when those gentlemen were with you 
in the army ; but not being here, I was obliged to stay 
at Paris. 

* # * Before you compose this theme, remember that 
the verb essere is formed or conjugated by itself; and 
that you must never put any tense of the verb avere 
before the participle stdto : for we say sono stdto, sidmo 
stdti, and not ho stdto abbidmo stdti. 

You must use stdto in speaking of a single person 
only, by you ; example, you have been my friend, siete 
stdto mio amico, and not siete stdti. 
1 2 

Sono molto contento <T essere stdto ricevuto pergoverna- 
3 
tore di que* signcri, die sono stdti nelpaese dove siete stdto, 

4 5 

Avete ragione d' essere contento perche sono gentiluo- 
mini molto gencrosi. 

6 

Sarei ancora piii contento, se non fossero stati in Ita- 
7 8 

Jia, perche avreijatto quel vidggio con toro, 
9 10 

Mi pare che vifoste per alcuni mesi Vdnno passdto. 



254 Of ITALIAN COxVIPOSITION. 

11 

Vi sarei anddto, e vero, se mio J rat ello fosse stdto qui, 
12 
qudndo quel signori erano con voi all* armata ; ma non 

13 
essendoci,Jui obbligdto di restdr in Parigu 

1. essere stdto, and not avere stdto, p. 84. 

2. essere stdto, and not esser stdto, p. 174. 

3. nel, and not in il, p. 42. 

4. We do not express they, p. 205, 206. 

5. uomo, in the plural uomini, p. 48. 

6. se, before the imperfect, p. 90. 

7. quel and qaello, p. 1 72. 

8. con loro, and not co£ loro, because loro is a pro- 

noun conjunctive, p. 203. 

9. vi, and not ci, p. 151. 

10. alcuni, and not qudlche, p. 75. 

11. se mio, and not se il mio, p. 69. 

12. quei or quelli, p. 70. 

13. essendoci, and not a essendo, p. 67. 



THEME 

Oft £Ae Pronouns conjunctive mi, ti, ci, vi, gli, le. 

You had promised me that you would send us the 
book which he had asked of you, and you have not sent 
it to us. 

I had promised it to you, it is true, I remember it ; 
but you should have sent to ask it of me, and I would 
have sent it to you. 

Do not put yourself to any more trouble about it. I 
know that my sister has one of them : here is my ser- 
vant, I will bid him go to her house to ask it of her. 
Go directly to my sister's, do not stay any where; 
thou,'vhalt tell her, that I beg her to lend me her ma- 
nuscript ; that I will send it her back in an hour : you 
will give my service to my brother-in-law; and if you 
see any roses in his garden, you will ask him for some 
of them. 

1ST avevate 



Of ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 255 

1.2 3 4 

M 9 avevdte promesso che cinviereste il libro che v 9 ave- 
6 7 
vdmo domanddto, e non ce V avete manddto. 
8 9 10 

Ve V avevo promesso, e vero, mene ricordo ; ma biso- 
11 12 13 

gnava mandar a domandarmelo, e ve I 9 avrei invidto. 
14 15 16 

Non vene piglidte piujastidio, so che mia sorella riha 
17 18 19 

uno ; ecco 'I mio servitore, gli diro d 1 anddr da lei per 

20 
domandarglielo. 

21 
Va' quanto prima da mia sorella, non ti fermar in 
22 23 24 

nissun luogo, le dirdi che la prego di prestdrmi H suo 

25 26 

manoscritto, che le rimandero Jra un 9 ora, fardi imiei 

27 28 

complimenti a mio cognato, e se vedrdi or vedi rose nel 

29 30 

suo giardino, gliene domanderai alcune. 

1. m'avevate, in the plural, p. 205. 

2. m 'avevdte, for mi avevdte, p. 172. 

3. promesso, and not promisso, or promettuto, p. 138. 

4. c\ and not ci, p. 66. 

5. vi avevdmo, or vavevamo, p. 65. 

6. ce V avete, or celo avete, p. 172. 

7. ce I' avete, and not celo avete, p. 65, 

8. ve V avevo, and not vi V avevo, p. 65* 

9. mene, and not mine, p. 66. , 

10. of it, before a verb is expressed by mene, p. 65. 

11. manddre a, p. 205. 

12. damanddrmelo, p. 66. 

1 3. ve 'I avrei, p. 65. 

14. vene, p. 65. 

15. mia sorella, and not Z# mia, p. 67. 

16. wVzfif, and not ne ha 9 , with an apostrophe, p. 168. 

17. uno, and not un, p. 172. 

18. gli, and not lui, p. 64. 

19. d' anddr 



256 Of ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 

19. d' anddr, with an abbreviation, p. 172, 173. 

20. domanddrglielo, and not lui, p. 64. 

21. wow tij'ermdr, and not wow tiferma, p. 207. 

22. fe &><&, p. 64. 

23. prestdrmi, and not wzi prestar, p. 67. 

24. # swo, and not swo, p. 68. 

25. fe, and not /wj, p. 64. 

26. i miei, p. 68. 

27. se vedrdi, or se vedi, p. 88. 

28. we/, and not zw, p. 42. 

29. gliene, p. 67. 

30. alcune, and not qudlche, p. 75. 

%* In order to write and speak Italian fluently, it 
will be absolutely necessary to go over this, and the 
three following themes, more than once. 



THEME 



Containing all the difficulties of the Particles si, it is, 
they, voe, &c. 

It is said that you do not know if we have received 
the letters which we expected the last post ; and that in 
case we have not received them, or do not receive them 
to-day, they will send fifty men into the forest, w r here 
it is thought they have robbed the courier, because 
they knew we had given him letters of great conse- 
quence ; and it is not doubted but they are enemies 
that have detained him, because we have had certain 
advice that they have some of our letters in their 
hands ; we have sent a spy to inform himself of what 
they say, and we promise him two hundred crowns if 
we can have any tidings of them. 

I do not put the number which refers you to the rules 
upon these two last themes, because to make this, it 
will be sufficient to read the pages 211, 212. 

Si dice che non sapete se sono state ricevute le lettere 
(or se si sono ricevute le lettere ) , che s aspettdvano 
V ordindrio passdto* e che in cdso che non sidno state rice- 

vute, 



Of ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 257 

vute, o che non si ricevano oggi, manderdnno cinqudnta 
ubmini nella selva, 6ve si crede che sia stdto svaligidto 7 
corriere, per che si sa che gli erano state (or gli s^ erano) 
consegndte letter e di gran conseguenza ; e come non si ha 
dubbio che siano i nemici, che Phdnno ritenute, giacche 
si hdnno avvisi certi. che sono stdte viste alcune delle 
nostre lettere nelle loro mani ; si e invidta una spia per 
informdrsi segretamente di quanto (or di quel che si 
pdssa, or rather di quanto si dice) e gli si promettono 
dugento sciidi, se sene potra aver nuo-cay ( or se potrdnno 
averne nuove). 



THEME 

On the Phrases there is, there was, there be. 

Before you compose this theme, refer to the pages 
150, 151. 

Remember also, that you must express there is of it 
or them, there was of it or them, by coi'e, or cene sono, 
cene fii, or vene furono, and not by ci ne, vi ne. See 
p. 153, 154. 

There is a man in the street, who says, that yester- 
day there was a riot opposite the palace, where there 
were three men killed ; and he swears that if he had 
been present, there would have been a great many 
more, because he has heard there had been two of his 
friends wounded, and that two women and three chil- 
dren have also been maimed. They talk likewise of 
several merchants whom the passengers report to have 
been cruelly beaten ; and that of the ten soldiers who 
are in prison, four of them will be hanged, and the six 
others are condemned to the galleys. 

V'e (ore' e) un uomo ?iella strdda, che dice cheviju 
jeri un gran rumore dirimpetto al paldzzo ove furono 
uccisi tre uomini ; e giura che, se vifosse stdto, vene sa- 
rebbero stati molto piu : perciocche ha sapido che *o erano 
stdtiferiti due amici suoi, e che due dvnne e trefanciulli 
vi sono stati storpidti. Si pdrla dnche di moiti mercdnti, 
che i vianddnti dicono essere stdti atrocemente battuti, 
e che di died solddti che sono in prigione, vene sardnno 

qudttro 



258 Of ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 

gudttro impiccdti, e che gli altri set sono condannati 
alia galera. 

Observe, that, according to the rule in p. 150, one 
might leave out «' or c f of the first line, and only put e 

un uomo nella strdda. 



THEME 



To learn when to express, and when to omit, in Italian, 
the Articles the, of the, of. 

See pages 210, 211, &c. where you will find 
all the difficulties explained. 

There are men and women that look on the pic- 
tures, who say that they are paintings much esteemed 
by all the connoisseurs, and the ignorant themselves. 

Do not come here with persons of your country, to 
talk of the affairs of your brother. 

You will have time to write letters to all your friends. 

We must separate them from the rest, and give no- 
thing to them but bread and water. 

I received yesterday news of the prince, and of 
madam the princess. 

I have received a hundred crowns from the prince, 
and fifty from the princess. 

Talk to me of philosophy, and of the affairs of the 
times. 

He labours for ungrateful people, that give pain and 
sorrow to all their relations. 

You will be praised by the soldiers, but you will be 
blamed by the captains, and the chief officers of the 
army. 

You have had a great deal of pain, and little profit. 

We have eaten for dinner partridges, quails, and 
young pigeons. 

1. Give us some bread, some wine, and some meat. 

2. Give us bread, wine, and meat. 

Your brothers are arrived from the Indies; they 
have brought pearls, diamonds, and a great many 
other goods, in deal boxes, upon horses and camels. 

* # * I have put the phrase give us bread, wine, and 

meat 



Of ITALIAN COMPOSITION. 259 

meat, twice, that you may consider when to express, 
and when to omit, the article of the. 

A Translation according to the Rules. 

E'cco uomini, e donne, eke considerano i quadri, e 
che d!icono, che sono pitture molto stimdte da tutti i dotti } 
e dagV ignordnti medesimu 

Non venite qua con persone del vostro paese, per par- 
lar degli qffari di vostro fratello. 

Avrete tempo per iscrivere letter e a tutf i vostri 
amid. 

Bisogna separdrli dagli altri, e non dar loro die 
pane ed dequa. 

Riceveijeri nuove del signor principe, e della signora 
principessa. 

Ho ricevhto cento scudi dal principe, e cinqudnta 
dalla principessa. 

Parldtemi della Jilosofia, e degli qffari del tempo. 

Lavora per ingrdti, che ddnno pena, e fastidio a tutf 
i loro parenti. 

Sarete loddto ddi solddti, ma sarete biasimato ddi ca~ 
pitani) e ddi principali dell 9 armdta. 

Avete avuto grand' incomodo, e poco prqfitto. 

Abbidmo mangidto a pranzo pernici, qudglie e pic- 
cioncini. 

1. Ddteci del pane, del vino, e della came. 

2. Ddteci pane, vino e came. 

I vostri fratelli sono arrivdti dalle Indie, hanno por- 
tdto perle, diamanti, e molte dltre mercanzie, in iscatole 
di abete, sopra cavdlli e cammelli. 



THE 



( 260 ) 



SIXTH TREATISE. 

Of Poetical Licences, and the Synonymous 
Names of the Heathen Gods. 

THE principal difficulties of the Italian poetry con- 
sist in the poetical licences, and in the different syn- 
onyma ; which shall constitute the two chapters of this 
treatise. 



CHAP. I. 

Of Poetical Licences, 

POETICAL licences are certain diminutions or 
augmentations at the end of words, which frequently 
occur in poetry ; as, 



alma 




' dnima 


the soul 


dltri 




dltro 


one, and some 


andaro 




anddrono 


they went 


anddr 




andarono 


they went 


andidnne 




andiamocene 


let us go away 


amdro 




amarono 


they loved 


augei 




augelli 


birds 


appo 




appresso 


near to 


hacidnne 




baciamoci 


let us kiss 


bea 


- for J 


beva 


let him drink 


bevve 




bevette 


he drank 


beea 




beveva 


he did drink 


bee 




beve 


he drinks 


bei 




belli 


fair, beautiful 


cdggio 




cddo 


I fall 


caggidmo 




cadidmo 


we fall 


capei 




capelli 


hairs 


cavdi 




cavalli 


horses 



cadeo 



Of the POETICAL LICENCES. 



261 



cadto 




' cddde 


eele 




cela 


celan 




celano 


ce V han 




ce V hdnno 


chere 




chiede 


china 




chindta 


china 




chindto 


coltei 




coltelli 


cor 




cogliere 


correm 




coglieremo - 


costdro 




costdrono 


costdr 




costdrono 


crederia 




crederebbe 


de 1 or dee 




deve 


deggio 




devo 


deggi, or del 




devi 


deggia 




debba 


deggidmo 




dobbidmo 


deggiano 




debbano 


deggidte 




debbiaie 


deggio 
degg'io f 


- for- 


debbo 
debV io? 


deggiono 




debbono 


denno 




debbono 


deo 




debbo, or devo 


deono 




devono 


die 




diede 


diero \ron 




diedero 


dier and di'e- 




diedero 


dieronsi 




si diedero 


dicestu 




dicesti tu 


disser 




dissero 


domo 




domdto 


ei, e 




egli 


empio 




empi 


face 




>-, 


fa-dan 




facevano 


p 




fede 


fe 




fece 


fea 




faccva 


fei 


1 


feci 



he fell [conceals 
he, or she hides or 
they hide 
they have it to us 
he demands 
a bending down 
bent down 
knives 
to gather 
we shall gather 
they cost 

they cost [believe 
he should or would 
he owes 
I owe 
thou owest 
he may owe 
we may owe 
they may owe 
3'ou may owe 
I owe 
do I owe ? 
they owe 
they owe 
• I owe 
they owe 
he gave 
they gave 
they gave 
they gave or applied 

themselves to 
saidst thou 
they said 
tamed 
he 

he filled 

he does, or makes 
they did, or made 
faith 

he did, or made 
he did, or was doing 
I did, or made 

felli 



262 Of the POETICAL LICENCES. 



jm 

femmo 

fenne 

ferno 

fero 
fera 

fere 

feron 

ferono 

feste 

Jia 

Jian 

jie 

fieiw 

fi 

fora 

for an 

fossino 

fra 

fee 

fur' 

furo 

giro, or gir 

gite • 

giva 

hdggio 

hdlle 

hdlmi 

hdn 

ami 

avia 

avian 

have 

avia 

avria 

havvi 

holle 

honne 

£ 

ir 



for 



r lifece 


he made them 


facemmo 


we made [them 


nefece 


he made some, or of 


fecero 


they made 


fece 


he made 


fecero 


they made 


ferisca 


he may strike 


ferisce 


he strikes 


fecero 


they did, or made 


fecero 


they did, or made 


faceste 


you did, or made 


sard 


he shall be 


sardnno 


they shall be 


sara 


he shall be 


saran.no 


they shall be 


sii 


be thou 


sarebbe 


he should be 


sarebbero 


they should be 


fossero 


they were, or might 


frdte 


a brother £be 


A 


he was 


furono 


they were 


fkrono 


they were 


anddva 


he did go 


anddrono 


they went s 


anddte 


go you 


anddva 


he did go 


ho 


I have 


le ha 


he has them 


me V ha 


he has it to me 


hdnno 


they have 


avrei 


I should have 


avrebbe 


he should have 


avrebbero 


they should have 


ha 


he has 


aveva 


he had 


avrebbe 


he should have 


vi ha 


there is 


le ho 


I have to herorthem 


ne ho 


I have some or of it 


10 


I 



^ and are 



to go 



ite 



Of the POETICAL LICENCES. 



263 



Ue 




' anddte 


go ye _ [going 


roan 




anddvano 


they did go or were 


lave 




la ove 


there where 


len 




gliene 


to him of it 


loddro 




loddrono 


they praised 


loddr 




loddrono 


they praised 


me 




meglio 


better 


men' 




mene 


me some, or of it 


men 




m en o 


less 


morio 




morz 


died 


ne 7 




ne il 


neither the 


no sco 




con noi 


with us 


pdga 




pagdta 


contented 


pdgo 




pagdto 


contented 


par 




pare 


it seems 


par 




porre 


to put 


pie 




piede 


a foot 


ponno 




possono 


they can 


puote 




puo 


he can 


potria 




potrebbe 


he should be able 


que 1 


- for - 


quelli 


these 


ritor 


ritogliere 


to retake 


sdllo 




lo sa 


he knows it 


sdlsi 




sdlii 


I went up 


sdlse 




sail 


he went up 


sditi ? 




tisa? 


dost thou find I 


salti buo?io? 




ti sa buouo ? 


dost thou like ? 


se' 




sei 


thou art 


seggo, seggio 




sedo 


I sit down 


seggono seg- 




sedono 


they sit down 


set \_giono 




selo 


to himself it 


si 




cost 


so, as much 


siede 




sede 


he sits 


sic don 




sedono 


they sit 


sien 




siano 


they be 


sollevaro 




sollevdrono 


they raised up 


sollevar 




sollevdrono 


they raised up 


spene 




speme 


hope 


spirt o 




spirito 


a spirit 


sta 




questa 


this 


ste' 




stette 


he stood or dwelt 


stel 




^sUlo 


the stalk or stem 

sulla 



264* Of the POETICAL LICENCES. 



sulla, 




" sopra la 


upon the 


tdi 




tali 


such 


t err alio 




lo terra 


he will hold it 


tiello 




tieni lo 


hold it thou 


totnmi 




toglimi 


take me away 


tor 




togliere 


to take away- 


tronche 




troncdte 


cut 


tronco 




troncdto 


cut 


ti 




one 


where 


vdlso 




valuto 


worth ("ness 


vanne 




vattene 


go about thy busi- 


ve 9 




vkli 


see thou 


veggie, veggo 




vedo 


I see 


veggiono,veg- J- for - 


vedono 


th»ey see 


veglio \_gono 




vecchio 


an old man 


vMle 




vedile 


see thou them 


velli 




vedili 


see thou them 


•villi 




eccoli 


there they are 


vello 




eccolo 


there he is 


ven. 




vene 


you some, or of it 


ver 




verso 


towards 


t)o' 




voglio 


I will 


volto 




voltato 


turned 


vosco 




con voi 


with you 


usczano 




uscivano 


they were going out 


nscio 




usci 


he went out 


vsciro 




^uscirono 


they went out 



%* Observe, that the third person plural of the pre- 
terperfect definite terminating in drono, as, legdrono, 
amdrono, scolordrono, negdrono, are generally to have 
their poetical terminations in dro; thus they say, legdro. 
amdro, scolordro, negdro. See Petrdrca, Tasso, Gua- 
rini, and all the other poets. 

The poets generally retrench an / from the articles 
dello, delta, delli, dclle ; dlli, alle, &c. and from nella, 
nelli, nelle; cdlla, colle, hence they put, de lo, de la, de li, 
&c, ne la, ne li, ne le ; co la, co le, &c. ; example, de 
lajutura cdccia, 

They use sometimes il before verbs instead of lo ; 
as il vedo for lo vedo ; il dicea for lo diceva. 

Remember also, that the poets more frequently use 

the 



Or THE DIFFERENT SYNONYMA. 



265 



the verbs in gio, than those in do, when they have two 
terminations; thus they write veggio oftener thass 
vedo ; veggendo more usually than vedendo. 



CHAP. II. 

Of the different Synonyma of the Heathen Gods and 
Goddesses, 

THE poets make use of different Synonyma to ex- 
press the names of the Heathen Gods and Goddesses* 
which I have inserted in this chapter in their alphas 
betical order. 



They use as Synonyma for 
APOLLO, 

II divin musico 

Febo 

II biondo Dio, che in Tes- 

sdglia S* adora 
L 1 ordcolo di Delfo 
II rettore del Parndsso 
II Dio d } Elicona 

BA'CCO, 

II giovinetto Dio che 7 

Gdnge adora 
II Dio nutrito dalle Nirtfe 

di Nisa 
II Dio due volte ndto 
Libero 

CICLO'PI, 

I trefratelli d* un sol ccchio 
in front e 



I gigdnti di Vulcano 
IJabbri di Vulcano 

The names of the Cyclops* 

Bronte, Ste'rope, Ps- 

RAMMONE. 

CIE'LO, 

Eterea mole. Regione siet~» 

lata 
La magione degli Dei 

CERE'RE, 

Inventrice delle prime 

bidde 
Mddre di Proserpina 
Dea d* Eleusi 

CIBE'LE, 

La Dea Dindimena 
La Dea Berecenzia 
La moglie di Saturno 
Rea 
N CU'PIDO, 



266 



Of the different SYNONYMA. 



CUPI'DO, 

L'amore, II vincitor degli 

mi 

Valdto Dio, Uarciero vo- 
lant e 

II faretrdto Arciero. II 
nudo Arciero 

II cieco Dio 

II vagabondo aldto 

II nudo pargoletto 

Garzon sovra V etdde astuto 

Vagofiglio di Ciprigna, di 
Citerea, di Vetiere 

Fanciul bendato e nudo 



DIA'NA, 



La 



Cinzia. La Luna. 

sorella di Febo 
Delia, La Dea delle selve, 

de* monti 

E'OLO, 

Dio de venti 

FLO'RA, 

Dea de' Fiori. Dea arnica 
di Giunone 

GIA'NO, 

Amico di Saturno, II Dio 

bifronte 
II Dio die porta due 

chidvi 

GIO'VE, 

Rettore delle stelle 
Primofiglio di Saturno 
II gran motore 
Altitonante 



GIUNO'NE, 

La moglie di Giove. La 

Dea Lucina 
La Dea gelosa. La re- 

gina degli Dei 
L y orgogliosa Diva 

INFERNO, 

Bolgia ardente 
Bdratro puzzolente, Aver- 
no 
Nero speco 

LUCI'FERO, STE'LLA, 

Foriera del giorno 
Stella nunzia del giorno 

LU'NA, 

Diana, Cinzia, F'cate 
Regina della notte 

MA'RE, 

Pelago, Oceano, Reggia 

Cristallina 
Regno umido. II padre 

de jiumi 

MARTE, 

Dio della guerra 

MERCURIO, 

Messo, interprete degli De* 
Inventor della lotto, II 

divin Citarista 
II Dio de 1 ladroni. Cilli~ 

nio 

MINERVA, 

Pdllade 

Dea 



Of the different SYNONYMA. 



267 



Dea ricamatrice 
La Dea che Atene adora 
La Dea di Sdmo 
Inventrice delle prime ulive 

NETTUNO, 

II regnator canuto de 9 

Jtiitti 
II gran rettore delle acque 
II Tirdnno del mdre 
Ilfr'eddo ed umido Marito 

di Teti 

PALLADE, 

Quella che senza mddre dal 
gran Giove ndcque 

Bellona, Minerva, Dea 
della guerra 

Dea che trovb I 9 uso dell' 
olio e della lana 

Inventrice delle prime ulive 

PLUTO'NE, 

Dio delle tenebre 
Dio dell 9 oscuro regno 
L'autore della sepoltura 
II prima che onorb con 
esequie i morti 

PROSERPI'NA, 

Lafiglia di Cerere 

La moglie di Plutone 

La regina delle grotte Tar- 

idree 
Dea del cupojondo 

SATU'RNO, 

17 tempo, il Dio del tempo 



L'aldto vecchio, or veglio, 
il vecchio eddce 

SO'LE, 

II principe delle ore 
II gran mondrca de' tempi 
Illuminoso auriga, Apollo 
Febo t il Fratello di Diana 
II pianeta eterno 

TE'RRA, 

La mddre comune de 9 mor- 

tdli 
Vantica mddre 
II suolo 

TETI, 

Regina de 9 Jlutii 
Dea del mdre 

VE'NERE, 

Citerea, Ciprina, Ciprigna 

La Dea Ericina 

Verticordia 

Figlia del mare 

Dea che per Adone ardeva 

Dea di Pdfo 

D6a d' Amatunta 

Dea, or donna del terzo 

giro 
Leggiadro onor delC acque 

VULCA'NO, 

Zoppo Dio 
Fdbbro adusto 
II divin artista 
II genilor d'amore in Len~ 
no 

2 SEVENTH 



( 268 ) 



SEVENTH TREATISE. 

Of Improper mid Obsolete Words. 

THE Italian, as well as other languages, has a great 
many improper words, which are used only by the 
vulgar and illiterate. 

It is a mistake to think that the Italian tongue is 
spoken and pronounced best at Florence, for this is one 
of the places where the pronunciation of it is the most 
harsh and uncouth. The Court and the Academies, 
indeed, speak well there ; but all the rest have a bad 
accent, and pronounce through the throat and nose. 

The writings of the Florentine authors, both an- 
cient and modern, are in a beautiful style ; hence it is 
that the Italian proverb says, in regard to their pro- 
nunciation, 

Lingua Toscdna in bbcca Romana. 

It is most certain the inhabitants of Rome and 
Siena speak the best Italian ; therefore we say, 

Per ben parldr Italidno, 
Bisogna parldr Romano. 

Nevertheless, the vulgar at Rome generally commit 
a mistake in the preterperfect-definite, by making it 
end in the first person plural, in ssimo instead of mmo: 
example, 

We loved 1 Camdssimo 

We went f . .„ exnrpssed bv J anddssimo 
We believed f 1S i]1 ex P ressed W \ credhsimo 
We wrote J [scrivessimo 

We should say, amdmmo, anddmmo, credemmo, scri* 
vemmo ; and so of all the rest of the verbs. 

Neither must we say, amaressimo, crederessimo, and 
the like, to express we should love, we should believe ; 
but ameremmo, crederemmo ; and the same with regard 
to all verbs in the second imperfect. 

The 



Of Improper and Obsolete Words. 269 

The first person plural of the present tense ought to 
terminate in iamo, in all verbs without exception, as 
well in the indicative as the imperative and subjunctive ; 
so that we must absolutely say, ami&mo, and che ami- 
dmo, to express we love, and that we may love ; and 
in like manner, abbidmo, sidmo, parlidmo, credidmo, 
vedidmo, dormidmo, concepidmo, &c. and not avemo, 
semo, parldmo, credemo, vedemo, dormimo, capimo, con- 
cepimo, which are Calabrian and Neapolitan words de- 
rived from the Spanish : for by adding an 5 at the end 
of them, we should find, avemos, semos, parlamos, dor- 
?nimos, &c. words entirely Spanish. 

Avoid saying, as the Florentines do, voi dicevi, voi 
amdvi, voi credevi, voi anddvi, and the like, instead of 
voi dicevdte, voi amavdte, voi credevdte, voi andavdte, 
because the termination in vi is never used but with tu 
in the singular ; as, tu amdvi, tu dicevi. 

* # * Read those authors who have written on the 
purity of the Italian language, whom I have quoted at 
the end of this treatise ; and all those who have written 
since the origin of that language to the present time, 
and you will see they disapprove of voi avevi, voi amdvi, 
which is a great error made by the Florentines, and 
illiterate persons. 

The reason of it is indisputable, for there must be 
a difference between the second person singular and 
the second person plural. 

To convince those who say voi amdvi, instead of voi 
amavdte ; voi dicevi, instead of voi dicevdte ; voi vedtvi 
instead of voi vedevdte, &c. I shall only refer them to 
the remarks of Giacomo Pergamini, who, in his book 
intituled Trattdto della lingua Italidna, says, in page 
173, La seconda persona deW imperfetto net numero del 
piu t deve esser termindta in vale : as, cantavdte, dice- 
vdte. E contra questa terminazione ricevuta universal' 
mente da* regoldti dicitori, hdnno alcuni moderni usdto 
di scrivere, cantavi, vedevi, il che c un manifesto errore. 

Ferrante Longobardi, in his book intituled, II Torto 
ed il Dritto, condemns this manner of speaking, voi 
cantavi, as improper. 

For the same reason as that above given, you must 

not 



270 Of Improper and Obsolete Words. 

not say voi amdsli, voi credesti, voi vedesti, but voi 
amdste, voi credeste, voi vedeste. 

To express tve read, tve remain, toe say, xve go out, 
you must say, leggidnw, rimanidmo, dicidmo, uscidmo ; 
and not leghidmo, rimanghidmo, dichiamo, e&chidmo, and 
that for two incontestible reasons : 

First, because there are none but verbs terminated 
in the inf.nitive in care and gare, as cercare, pagdre, 
&c. that take an h in the tenses and persons, where 
the letter cor g precedes an e and an i, as I have said 
before. So that the verbs in ere and ire are not in- 
cluded in this rule. 

Secondly, because leghidmo comes from legare, sig- 
nifying to tie, and so of the rest. 

Neither must you say, as those of Lucca do, io 
direbbi, io Jarebbi, io sarebbi, to express I should say, 
I should do, 1 should be, instead of io direi, iojarci, io 
sarei. 

You must neither say nor write dmono, cantono, bal- 
lono, in the third person plural of verbs of the first con- 
jugation, when all terminate in ano ; therefore write and 
speak dmano, cdntano, ballano ; because there are none 
but the verbs in ere and in ire that end in ono in the 
third person plural of the indicative. 

Before we finish this second part, it will be proper to 
mention three things worthy of attention. The first 
relates to the letter h, the second to the letter z, when 
used instead of ti ; and the third to the conjugating of 
all verbs in the first person singular of the imperfect 
indicative. So begin with the first. 

The dispute concerning the letter h is of no small 
consequence. The question is, whether it ought to 
be retrenched in those words in which it is not pro- 
nounced ? Some pretend that it ought not to be re- 
trenched, because this will occasion ambiguity in se- 
veral words, and the reader will thereby be led into 
mistakes ; for instance, if we leave out the h in the 
words hdnno, they have, and hdmo, a hook, there is no 
distinguishing them from anno, a year, and amo, I 
love. The same difficulty occurs in a great many 
other words, which, for the sake of brevity, we omit. 

See page 27, concerning the use of the letter h. 

Others 



Of Improper and Obsolete Words. 271 

Others (of which number are members of the Aca- 
demy of La Crusca) maintain, that it ought absolutely 
to be retrenched. Their reason is, that they look upon 
it as altogether superfluous in words where it is not 
pronounced : and moreover, by using it without neces- 
sity, it becomes a stumbling block to foreigners, espe- 
cially to the Germans and Swiss, who, being accus- 
tomed in their own language to pronounce it wherever 
they find it written, do the same in Italian, which is 
wrong. 

The second point I have to mention relates to the 
letter z, when used for t. followed by two vowels, the 
first of which is i s in words derived from the Latin, 
as, gratia, vitio, which at present are written with a 
z; example, grdzia, vizio* There are a great many 
who condemn this change of orthography, and insist 
that these words ought to be spelled with a t, as in 
Latin ; yet I think it is right to make use of the z, for 
otherwise it will be impossible to give a just and true 
pronunciation to those words. It may be said, there is a 
rule which teaches, that the syllable ti is sounded be- 
fore a vowel, as if there was an s in the middle ; but 
how shall I know that I am not to pronounce this syl- 
lable in the same manner in the words natio, native « 
simpatia, sympathy ; partio, he went away ; and several 
others ? How comes it that we do not say, natsio, 
simpatsia, partsio ? Doubtless the common reason of 
this difference may be assigned, namely, that those 
words are not derived from the Latin, or if they be, 
they are still of Greek derivation, and that even in 
Latin they are pronounced differently from words of 
Latin origin. This reason perhaps is good in itself, 
but is of no use to those who are not acquainted with 
the Latin tongue, and consequently incapable of 
tracing the etymology of words. 

I shall now proceed to the third difficulty, concerning 
the first person singular of the imperfect indicative of 
all verbs. In regard to this article, one might impli- 
citly follow the rule which commonly prevails at 
present; that is, to terminate it in a and not in o ; for 
example, we might say aveva instead of avevo ; yet, 
to give my opinion freely, I can see no reason for 

making 



272 Of Improper and Obsolete Words. 

snaking this alteration, which I apprehend ought rather 
to be considered as an abuse than as a rule. If it is 
owing to examples which occur in good authors, these 
.eKamples, I make no doubt, are owing to the mistakes 
of typographers. And, indeed, I can never imagine 
that Boccaccio, Villdni, and several others, to whom a 
great many pay a degree of veneration bordering 
opon idolatry, should make use of the third person 
Instead of the first. I can never believe they would 
attempt to introduce such an abuse, except by chance, 
and in poems, where the rhyme and measure of the 
verse will plead excuse for a multitude of words, 
which would never be tolerated in prose. Convinced 
of this, I maintain that we ought ever to make use of 
the termination o, and not that of a, till I see a better 
reason to justify this alteration. Hitherto I have met 
with none among the best writers on this subject; 
and they who pretend that we should say amdva, 
aveva, &c. instead of amdvo, avevo, &c. are able to 
assign no other reason than this, viz. that we some- 
times meet with the expression in the best authors; 
tapon which they take upon them boldly to pronounce, 
that amdvo, avevo, &c. are low words, and only used 
by the common people. 

For my part, I think quite the contrary, and am con- 
vinced that the words amdva, aveva, &c. are more 
suitable to the vulgar than to polite persons and people 
of education, because I cannot eompreherfd how those 
who ought naturally to surpass others so much in 
knowledge, should attempt to defend an expression in 
usany respects repugnant to good sense. Besides, I 
Jhave three reasons for being of this opinion. The first 
is, that in all verbs, and-in what sense soever, I never 
could *ind that the third person was used instead of 
the first. The second is, that this change is productive 
of ambiguity in discourse, which ought always to be 
avoided. The third and last reason, which to me 
appears altogether definitive in regard to those who 
pay so great a deference to the authority of writers 
of the first order is, that since we often meet with 
both terminations in their works, and it will not be 
granted us, that either of them is owing to the mis- 
takes 



Of EXPLETIVES. 273 

takes of printers, this is a demonstration, that these 
writers looked upon both the one and the other termi- 
nation as equally good, since they could not make use 
of amdvo, which some moderns absolutely prescribe, 
without thinking of amdva, which they would surely 
have adopted, had they thought it more elegant than 
the other. The best argument, however, in favour of 
the latter termination is, that it may deserve the pre- 
ference in phrases where a great number of words 
terminating in o might be disagreeable to the ear ; 
but even then it will be proper to make use of the 
pronoun personal, in order to avoid the ambiguity I 
have mentioned. 



EIGHTH TREATISE. 

Of Expletives, Compound Words, Capitals, and 
Punctuation, 



CHAP. I. 

Of Expletives, 

EXPLETIVES are certain particles which, though 
not absolutely necessary for the grammatical construc- 
tion, add great strength and elegance to discourse. 

There are three sorts of Expletives. First, those 
which give energy to speech, so as to represent the 
thing, as it were, to your sight. Secondly, those which 
add grace and ornament. Thirdly, those which the 
Italians call accompdgna Jiomi, and accompdgna verbi, 
and are certain particles added to nouns or verbs, re- 
dundant indeed in sense, but peculiar to the Italian 
idiom. 

1. Of the first sort are the following ; ecco, behold, 
or see now, in the beginning of a sentence ; as, ecco, io 
non so dir, behold, I cannot tell. 

n 5 Bene 



2745 Of EXPLETIVES. 

Bene, well, is used in the beginning of a sentence 
before an interrogation : bene, chefdi tu qui 1 ? well, what 
dost thou here ? or in answering in the affirmative, 
bene, io lo fa.ro> well, I will do it ; sometimes the par- 
ticle si is added to it ; disse Calandrino, si bene, Calan- 
drino said, yes, indeed : sometimes ora is prefixed to it, 
as, ora bene, come far emo? well, what shall we do? 

Pur is equivalent to the English word indeed, and 
adds evidence and clearness : la cosa andb pur cod, 
the thing went so indeed : when it is prefixed to a par- 
ticle of time, it signifies exactly ; perciocche pur all6ra> 
n'erano smontati i signori, because the gentleman had 
then exactly dismounted. 

Gia has also sometimes the force of indeed; ora 
fossero essi pur gia disposti a venire, now if they were 
really disposed to come ; sometimes the particle mdi is 
added to it, and then it signifies never: non usdva 
giammai, he never used. 

Mdi either prefixed to or put after sempre, gives it 
great force ; io sempre mdi faro cib, I will always do 
this ; che si giace mdi sempre in ghidccio 9 that is always 
covered with ice. 

Mica and punto strengthen negatives ; no mica 
d'uomo di poco ajfare, a man of no small consequence ; 
il re non e punto morto ma vivo, the king is not dead, 
but alive. 

Tutto gives strength; la gentil giovane tutta timida 9 
the genteel young woman quite afraid. 

Via, joined to verbs, increases their force ; via a 
casa del prete ne portdrono, they carried us away to the 
priest's house. 

II. Of the second sort of Expletives are the following : 
TL'gli is sometimes used for ornament, without re- 
gard to gender or number : egli e il vero, it is true ; 
egli non sono ancora molti anni passdti, it is not many 
years since ; egli e ora di desindre a cdsa, it is dinner 
time at home. 

E'lla is therefore used as an ornamental Expletive ; 
comincib a dire 9 ella non andra cosi, she began to say, 
it shall not go so. 

E'sso is used in both genders and numbers, with the 
particle con before some pronouns, and even without 

the 



Of EXPLETIVES. 275 

the pronouns ; ella voleva con esso lui digiundre, she 
was willing to fast with him ; rise con esso lei, he laughed 
with her ; comincib a cantare con esso loro, he began to 
sing with them ; che venga a desindre con esso noi, let 
him come and dine with us ; la disavventura era tdnta, 
e con esso, la discordia de* Fiorentini, the disaster was 
so great, and withal the discord of the Florentines. 

Ora is used in resuming or continuing a discourse, in 
the same manner as now in English ; ora io ve I'ho udito 
dire mille volte, novo I heard you say it a thousand 
times. Sometimes it gives a force to interrogations ; 
disse alV ora, ora che vorra dir questof he then said, 
novo, what does this mean ? 

Si has a particular beauty as an expletive; 6ltre,a 
quello cJi egli fu ottimo Jilosofo, si fu egli leggiadris- 
simo e costumato, for besides his being an excellent 
philosopher, he was moreover very courteous and man-, 
nerly. / 

Di is used in a manner peculiar to the Italian lan- 
guage; e di giorno e di notte, both day and night. 

Non is often used as an expletive; quesio fanciullo 
appena ancora non ha quattordici anni, this child is 
hardly fourteen years old. This is worth observing, 
because we find thereby that in Italian non does not 
always imply a negative. 

Altrimenti is also used merely as an ornament : senza 
saper altrimenti che egli si fosse, without knowing who 
he was. 

III. Of the third sort are the following words : 

Uno and una, not as numeral nouns, but as particles 
whose office it is to accompany nouns, without adding 
any thing to the signification, for which reason the Ita- 
lians call them accompagnanomi : io credo che gran noja 
sia ad una bella e delicdta donna aver per marito un 
mentecdtto, I believe it is very disagreeable for a fine 
sensible woman to have a fool for a husband. 

Alcuno is sometimes used instead of uno ; erano legati 
in alcun luogo pubblico, they were tied in a public place. 

The particles that accompany verbs without adding 
any thing to the signification, are mi, ci, ti, vi, si, and ne. 

Mi : io mi credo, che le donne sien tutte a dormire, 

I believe 



276 Of COMPOUND WORDS. 

I believe the women are all asleep. Sometimes the 
particle ne is added to it ; but then we say me, and 
not mi: sommene venuto, I am come. 

Ci : la donna e Pirro dicevano not ci seggidmo, the 
woman and Pyrrhus said, let us sit down. With the 
pronominal article, it makes ce ; e poscia eel godremo 
gui, and afterwards we will enjoy it here. In like 
manner with the particle ne ; vogliamcene noi anddre 
ancora? shall we go yet? 

Ti : eke tu con noi ti rimdnga per questa sera, stay 
with us this evening. Before the pronoun relative they 
say te: tu te ne pentirdi, thou wilt repent it; and with 
ne they also sayte: wentene meco, come along with me. 

Vi : io non so se voi conosceste il cavaliere, I know 
not whether you were acquainted with the gentleman. 
With ne they say ve : noi potrete tornarvene a edsa ; 
you may go home. 

Si del paldgio s'usci, e Juggissi a edsa sua, he went 
out of the palace, and ran home. With the pronoun 
relative, and with ne, it makes se : se gli mangio, he 
ate them, Jece vista di bersela, he pretended to drink 
It; i ire giovani se n anddrono, the three young men 
went away. 

Ne; chetamente n ando, he went away quietly; 
andidnne la, let us go there., 



CHAP. II. 

Of Compound Verbs. 

THE Italians, for the sake of elegance and strength 
pf expression, have often recourse to compound words ; 
concerning which it is impossible to give any general 
rule ; the surest way is to make use of those which are 
established by custom ; as, 

Ognuno every one 

Gentiluomo a gentleman 

Sottovoce whispering 

Sottomdno 



Of CAPITALS and PUNCTUATION. 277 

Sottomdno, underhand. 

Nondimeno, nulladimeno, nevertheless. 

Trcntotto, thirty-eight. 

Quardnta cinque, forty-five. 

Sottosopra, topsy-turvy. 

However, we shall make a few remarks on this sub- 
ject, which may be of use to the learner. 

When the first of the compounding words ends with 
a vowel, and the second begins with a consonant, the 
Italians are accustomed to pronounce them with greater 
emphasis, and therefore they repeat the first consonant 
of the second word, as dello, colassu y laggiu, appie, &c. 
We except from this rule the verb ridirizzdre. 

The first of the compounding words sometimes loses 
the lastfvowel, whatever consonant it precedes ; and 
the first consonant of the second word is repeated, as, 
sotterra, seggiola, soppamio, sozzopra, &c. 

When one of the compounding words is a pronoun, 
and the last syllable of the word is accented, the con- 
sonant of the particle is repeated, unless it happens 
to be followed by another consonant ; for example, we 
say dimmi, tell me ; dirotti, I will tell thee ; dirogli t I 
will tell him. But if the word to which the particle is 
joined, loses its final vowel in the junction, the conso- 
nant of the particle is not repeated; for which reason 
dirai Jardi, and the like, with the junction of the par- 
ticle, makes dirdloyfardne^ &c. 

In some words, for the facility of utterance, and more 
agreeable sound, a consonant is changed : thus, for in- 
stance, before the letters b, c, I, we put an n instead of 
an m, as panbollito, amia?wi 9 Jarerilo, &c. instead of 
pa?nbollzto, amidmci 9 Jare7nlo, &c. 



CHAP. III. 

Of Capitals and Punctuation* 
1. Of CAPITALS. 

IN regard to Capital Letters, the following rules are 
established by the Italians : 

1. Over 



278 Of CAPITALS and PUNCTUATION. 

1. Over capitals you are never to put any mark of 
accent or apostrophe. 

2. Proper names always begin with a capital 

3. Names of nations taken substantively, begin with 
a capital ; as, i Francesi fecero guerra, the French 
made war ; but taken adjectively they require a small 
letter, and therefore they write, mercdniefrancese. 

4. The expressing of a genus or species requires a 
capital, hence they write I* U6mo e la piii nobile delle 
inferiori creature, Man is the noblest of the inferior 
creatures ; il Cavdllo e utile alia guerra, the Horse is 
useful for war ; but the capital is dropped when they 
are applied to individuals ; quest' e un buon uomo, this 
is a good man ; ecco un bel cavallo, there is a fine horse. 

5. Those appellatives which are used instead of proper 
names, require a capital ; hence they write il Padre, il 
Medico, il Maestro, the Father, the Physician, the 
Master, when speaking of some particular person. 

6. All names of dignities, degrees, and honours, re- 
quire a capital ; thus they write Papa, Imperalore, Re y 
Vescovo, &c. Pope, Emperor, King, Bishop, &c. 

7. At the beginning of a period, the first letter is 
always a capital. 

II. Of Punctuation. 

The use of stops or points is to distinguish words 
and sentences, so as to express the sense with clear- 
ness. The Italians have five stops, or pauses. 

1. The punto fermo, the same as our period, or full 
stop (.), is used at the end of a period, to show that 
the sentence is completely finished. 

2. The mezzo punto, which is our colon (:), is the 
pause made between two members of a period, that is, 
when the sense is complete, but the sentence not ended. 

3. The piinto e virgola, our semicolon (;), denotes 
that short pause which is made in the subdivision of 
the members or parts of a sentence. 

4. The point of interrogation, thus (?), or the point 
of admiration, thus (!). 

5. The virgola, the same as our comma (,) is the 
shortest pause of resting in speech, being used chiefly 

to 



Of PUNCTUATION. 279 

to distinguish nouns, verbs, and adverbs, as also the 
parts of a shorter sentence. 

The use of these stops is much the same among the 
Italians as the English ; if the former have any particu- 
larity, it is in regard to the virgole, or commas ; con- 
cerning which we shall make the following remarks : 

Whenever a word or a preposition is inserted in a 
period, of which it does not form a part, it is put be- 
tween commas: as, faccidm dunque a cotesto m6do> 
ma con questo, vedi, die tic non parta da me, let us 
proceed in this manner, but with this condition, take 
care, that you do not leave rae. 

The conjunction e, and the disjunctions o or ne. re- 
quire a comma before them ; yet when these particles 
are repeated, and the first stands as an expletive, it 
ought to have no comma before it ; as, quanta egli, neW 
una, e 7ieW dltra interpreiazione si segnaldsse, non fa 
d'uopo ch' io vi ridica, how much he distinguished 
himself both in one and the other explanation, there 
is no necessity for my telling you. In like manner, 
jpesdndolo o colla stadera, o colla bildncia : perciocche 
ne nelV uno, ne neW dltro. 

The relatives die, and quale, require a comma before 
them, as they suppose some kind of pause, though very 
small ; but when die signifies what, it requires no 
comma, as attento a vedere che di lui avvenisse, atten- 
tive to see what became of him ; avvegnane che puo 7 
let what will happen. 

A comma is always to be prefixed to conjunctions, 
even when those conjunctions are not expressed, but 
understood : as, non sia ubbridco, ne taverniere, non 
giuocatore, non masnadiere, the conjunction e is under- 
stood. 

When conjunctions and adverbial expressions are 
repeated, and correspond to one another, the first does 
not require a comma : era Cimone si per la sua forma y 
e si per la nobilta, e ricdiezza del pddre, quasi noto a 
ciascuno del paese. Cymon was known almost to every 
man in the country, as well on account of his person, 
as for the nobility and wealth of his father. 

THE END OF THE SECOND PART. 

THE 



THE 

ITALIAN MASTER. 

PART III. 

CONTAINING, 

I. A Vocabulary of Words most necessary to be 

knotvn. 
II. The Words most used in Discourse. 

III. Familiar Dialogues. 

IV. A Collection of Italian Phrases, in which the 

Delicacy of that Language consists. 
V. Several little Stories, Jests, Sentences of divers 
Authors, and a Collection of the choicest 
Italian Proverbs. 
VI. An Introduction to Italian Poetry. 
VII. Fine Thoughts from the Italian Poets. 
VIII. Different Inscriptions and Titles used in Italian 
Letters. 
IX. Letters of Business and Compliment. 

A VOCABULARY OF WORDS 

NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN. 



Del Cielo e degli Ele- Of the Heavens and the 
menti. Elements. 

DFO, Iddio GOD 

Gesii Cristo Jesus Christ 

lo Spirito Sdnto the Holy Ghost 

la Trinita the Trinity 

gli dngeli the angels 

un prof eta a prophet 

il cielo heaven 

il cielo the sky 

il paradiso paradise 

V inferno hell 

il mondo the world 

ilfuoco 



VOCABULARY. 



281 



iljuoco 

Varia 

la terra 

il mare, V dcqua 

il sole 

la luna 

le stelle, gli astri 

i rdggi 

le nuvole 

il vento 

la pioggia 

il tuono 

il balcnoy il lampo 

la grdndine 

ilfulmine 

la neve 

il gelo 

il ghidccio 

la brina 

la rugidda 

la nebbia 

il terremoto, il tremuoto 

il diluvio 

il cdldo, or colore 

ilfreddo 



the fire 

the air 

the earth 

the sea, the water 

the sun 

the moon 

the stars 

the rays 

the clouds 

the wind 

the rain 

the thunder 

the lightning 

the hail 

the thunderbolt 

the snow 

the frost 

the ice 

the glazed frost 

the dew 

a fog or mist 

the earthquake 

a deluge or flood 

the heat 

the cold 



Del Tempo, e dSlle Stagioni. Of the Time and Seasons. 



II giorno 

le notte 

il mezzo giorno 

la m'ezza notte 

la mattina 

la sera 

2i n' or a 

un quarto d'ora 

una mezz ora 

tre quarti d'ora 

j'en 



the day 

the night 

noon or mid-day 

midnight 

the morning 

the evening 

an hour 

a quarter of an hour 

half an hour 

three quarters of an hour 

to-day 

yesterday 

domdni, 



282 



VOCABULARY. 



domdni, dimani 


to-morrow 


jer Paltro, l y dltrojeri 


the day before yesterday 


posdomani) domdn I* altro 


the day after to-morrow 


questa sera 


this evening 


questa mattina 


this morning 


dopo prdnzo 


after dinner 


dopo cena 


after supper 


una settimdna 


a week 


un mese 


a month 


un dnno 


a year 


un minuto 


a minute 


un istante 


an instant 


un momento 


a moment 


la primavera 


the spring 


la state, I 'estate 


the summer 


Vautunno 


autumn 


Vinwrno, il verno 


the winter 


giorno difesta 


a holiday 


giorno di lavoro 


a working-day 


il levar del sole 


the sun-rising 


il tramontdr del sole 


the sun-setting 


Valba, l* aurora 


the dawn, aurora 


I Giorni della Settimdna. 


The Days of the Week. 


Lunedl Monday 


Venerdl Friday 


Martedi Tuesday 


Sdbato Saturday 


Mercoledl Wednesday 


Domenica Sunday 


Giovedi Thursday 




IMtsi. 


The Months. 


Genndjo January 


Luglio July 


Febbraje February 


Agosto August 


Mdrzo March 


Settembre September 


Aprile April 


Ottobre October 


Mdggio May 


Novembre November 


Giugno June 


Dicembre December 




Le 



VOCABULARY. 



283- 



Lefeste delV anno, 

■ II capo d' dnno 
il giorno dei Re 
la Quaresima 
le Quattro tempora 
la Dominica delle pdlme 
la settimana santa 
il Ve?ierdi santo 
il giorno di Pdsqua 
le Pentecoste 
il giorno de 9 Morti 
Naidle 
la vigilia 

la mietitura, messe, raccolta 
le vendemmie 



The holidays of the yeaiv 

New-year's day 

Twelfth-day 

Lent 

the Ember-weeks 

Palm-Sunday 

Passion-week 

Good-Friday 

Easter-day 

Whitsuntide 

All-souls day 

Christm as-day 

the eve 

the harvest 

the vintage 



Regni d'Europa e loro 
Capitali. 



The Kingdoms of Europe 
and their Capital Cities* 



Spagna 

Francia 

Inghilterra 

Scozia 

Irlanda 

Boemia 

Norvegia 

Polonia 

Russi 

Danimarca 

Svezia 

Turchia 

Ungheria 

Napoli 

Sicilia 

Sardegna 

Piemonte 



Spain 

France 

England 

Scotland 

Ireland 

Bohemia 

Norway 

Poland 

Russia 

Denmark 

Sweden 

Turkey 

Hungary 

Naples 

Sicily 

Sardinia 

Piedmont 



Madrid 


Madrid 


Parigi 
Londra 


Paris 
London 


Edinburgo 
Dublino 


Edinburgh 
Dublin 


Praga 

Bergen 
Varsavia 


Prague 
Bergen 
Warsaw 


5 Pietroburgo 
\ Mosca 


Petersburg 
Moscow 


Copenaghen 
Stockholm 


Copenhagen 
Stockholm 


Costantinopoli Constantinople 


Presburgo 

Napoli 

Palermo 


Presburg 

Naples 

Palermo 


Cagliari 
Torino 


Cagliari 
Turin 



Delle 



284 



VOCABULARY. 



DelleDignitaEcclesidstiche. 

II papa, il pontefice 

un cardindle 

un arcivescovo » 

un vescovo 

un nunzio 

un preldto 

un rettore 

un vicdrio 

un vicdrio generdle 

un decdno 

un canonico 

un prete 

un cappellano 

un elemosiniere cappellano 

un curdto, un pdrroco. 

un piovdno 
un predicatore 
un sagristdno 
un cherico 
un musico, un suonatore 



i 



Of EcclesiasticalDignities. 

the pope 
a cardinal 
an archbishop 
a bishop 
a nuncio 
a prelate 
a rector 
a vicar 

a vicar-general 
a dean 
a canon 
a priest 
a chaplain 
an almoner 

a curate 

a preacher 
a sexton 
a clerk 
a musician 



Names of' some 

Pane 

dcqua 

vino 

birra 

came 

pesce 

alesso 

arrosto 

un boccone di pane 

un pasticcio 

unafetta di pasticcio 

una minestra 

un brodo 

utC insalata 

una salsa 

un intingolo 

dillejrutta 

delformdggio 



Articles of Food. 

bread 

water 

wine 

beer 

meat or flesh 

fish 

boiled meat 

roast meat 

a mouthful of bread 

a pie 

a slice of pie 

a soup 

a basin of broth 

a salad 

the sauce 

a ragout 

fruit 

cheese 

V Apparecchio. 



VOCABULARY. 



285 



VApparecchiodella Tdvola. The Covering of the Table. 



La tdvola 
una sedia 

la tovaglia 

una salvietta 
un coltello 
unaforchetta 
un cucchidjo 
un tondo 
un pidtto 
una satiera 

un acetdjo 

una zuccke- 
riera 

un candeliere 

una candela 
lo smoccola- 
tojo 



the table 

the chair 

the table- 
cloth 

a napkin 

a knife 

a fork 

a spoon 

a plate 

a dish 

a salt-cellar 

a vinegar- 
bottle 

a sugar-dish 

a candle- 
stick 
a candle 

the snuffers 



uno scalda- 



un bacile 
un bicchiere 
unjidsco, 
una bottiglia 
una tazza 
una sotto- 

coppa 
uno sciugar 

mdni 

un servizio 

una cesta, un 

cestone 
■unafoglietta 
una pinta 
un boccale 
una bottiglia 
un cavasu- 

ghero 



a chafing- 
dish 
a basin 
a glass 
a flask 
a bottle 
a cup 



a towel 

a service or 
course 

a basket 

a half- pint 
a pint 
a jug 
a bottle 

a corkscrew 



Quel che si mdngia a Ta- 
vola per V Alesso. 

Bue, mdnzo beef 
castrato mutton 

vitello veal 



What is eaten at Table i 
boiled Meat. 

agnello lamb 

una gallina a hen 
un pollastro a fowl 



Per gli Antipdsti. 

Un guazzetto 

unajricassea 

una stufdto 

un' animella di vitello 

una crostdta, una torta 

dei pasticcetti 

del presciutto 



For the first Course. 

a ragout 
a fricassee 
stewed meat 
sweet bread 
a tart 

petty patties 
some ham 



delle 



286 



VOCABULARY. 



■delle salsicce 

un salame di Bologna 

del sanguindccio 

delfegato 

delle radici 

, popone 



sausages 

a Bologna sausage 

black pudding 

liver 

radishes 

a melon 



Quel che si fa arrostire. 


What is roasted 


Un cappone 


a capon 


polldstri 


pullets 


picciofii 


pigeons 


le heccdcce 


woodcocks 


le pernici 


partridges 


i tordi 


thrushes 


le lodole 


larks 


le qudglie 


quails 


ijagi&ni 


pheasants 


un gallindccio 


a turkey 


un ''oca 


a goose 


un papero 


a gosling 


un dnitra 


a duck 


un daino 


a deer 


-Ana lepre 


a hare 


un coniglio 


a rabbit 


un porco, un majale 


a pig 


un porchetto 


a roasting pig 


un cinghidle 


a wild boar 


salvaggina 


venison 


testuggine di mare 


turtle 


un cervo 


a stag 


un cosciotto 


a leg of mutton 


un lombo di vitello 


a loin of veal 


una spalletta di castrdto 


a shoulder of mutton 


-una braciuola 


a steak 


del selvaggiume, dell'uc- 7 
celldme \ 


game 



Per condire le Vivande. 
Del sale salt 

del pepe pepper 



dell' olio 



oil 



To season Meat with. 
delP aceto vinegar 
delV agresto verjuice 
della mostarda mustard 



dei 



VOCABULARY. 



287 



del garbfani 


cloves 


dell' dglio 


garlick 


della cannella 


cinnamon 


del lardo 


bacon 


dei cdpperi 


capers 


dei meldngoli, 


oranges 


del lauro 


laurel 


degli aranci 


deifunghi 


mushrooms 


dei limoni 


lemons 


dei tartufoli 


trufles 


del persemolo 


parsley 


delle cipolle 


onions 


delle cipollette young onions 


degli scalogni 


shalots 


delle uova 


eggs 


Per V Insalata. 


For a 


Salad. 


DelV erbe 


herbs 


de selleri 


cellery 


dell* indivia 


endive 


del cerfoglio 


chervel 


della lattuga 


lettuce 


del crescione 


cresses 


Per i Giorni di Mdgro. 


For Fish Days. 


Del butirro 


butter 


delle ostriche 


oysters 


del latte 


milk 


del salmone 


salmon; 


delle uova da 


eggs in the 


del merluzzo 


cod-fish 


here 


shell 


delle alici 


anchovies 


delle uova qf- poached 


un gdmbero 


a lobster 


fdgate 


eggs 


dei piselli 


peas 


unajrittdta 


an omelet 


delle fdve 


beans 


dei gdmberi 
un luccio 


crawSsh 


degli spindci 


spinage 


a pike 


dti carciofoli 


artichokes 


una cdrpa 


a carp 


degli spdragi 


asparagus 


una trot a 


a trout 


dei cdvoli 


cabbages 


una sogliola 


a sole 


dei broccoli 


sprouts 


un' anguilla 
una tinea 


an eel 
a tench 


dei cdvoli ji- 
6ri 


cauliflowers 


uno storione 


a sturgeon 


delfinbcchio 


fennel 


mi' aringa 


a herring 






Per le Frutta. 


For the Dessert. 


Delle mele, dei pomi 


apples 




delle pere 




pears 




delle persiche 




peaches 




dei bricoccoli 




apricots 




delle cerdse 




cherries 




delle uvespine 




goosebc ries 





dei 



288 



VOCABULARY. 



deifichi 

delle susine 

dei lamponi 

delV uva 

delle frit elle 

una torta, una crostata 

dei zuccherini 

dei confetti 

delle noci 

delle nocciuole 

delle castdgne 

delle mdndorle 

delle nespole 

delle more nere 

delle mela cotogne 

delle melagrdne 

delle ardnce 

delle ulive 

delle more di gelso 

dei meloni, poponi 

cocomeri 



figs 

plumbs 

raspberries 

grapes 

frittars 

a tart 

sugar-plums 

sweet-meats 

nuts 

filberts 

chesnuts 

almonds 

medlars 

blackberries 

quinces 

pomegranates 

oranges 

olives 

mulberries 

melons 

water-melons 



Grddi di Parentado. 

II padre 

la mddre 

fdvo, il nonno 

F dva, la nonna 

il bisdvo 

la bisdva 

ilfiglio 

lafiglia 

ilfratello 

la sorella 

il primogenito 

Vultimo nato 

lo zio 

la zia 

il nipote 

la nipote 

il pronipole 

la pronipote 



Degrees of Kindred, 
the father 
the mother 
the grandfather 
the grandmother 
the great-grandfather 
the great-grandmother 
the son 
the daughter 
the brother 
the sister 
the eldest son 
the youngest son 
the uncle 
the aunt 
the nephew 
the niece 
the nephew's son 
the niece's daughter 



il 



VOCABULARY. 



2S9 V 



il cugbio 


the cousin 


la cugina 


the female cousin 


il cognato 


the brother-in-law 


la cogndta 


the sister-in-law 


il suocero 


the father-in-law 


la suocera 


the mother-in-law 


il genero 


the son-in-law 


la nuora 


the daughter-in-law 


il nipotino 


the grand- son 


la nipotina 


the grand-daughter 


i geniiori 


the parents 


lo sposo 


the spouse, masc. 


la sposa 


the spouse,/em. 


consorte, masc. and fem. 


a consort 


il gemello 


the twin-brother 


iljiglioccio 


the god-son 


lafiglioccia 


the god-daughter 


padrino 


the god -fat her 


matrina 


the god-mother 


la bdlia 


the nurse 


un parente 


a relation, a relative 


la parente 


the female relation, rela- 


Vamico 


the friend [live 


V arnica 


the female friend 


v.n nem'ico 


an enemy, masc. 


una nemica 


a female enemy 


un vedovo 


a widower 


una vedova 


a widow 


un erede 


an heir 


una erede, una rede 


an heiress 


unpupillo 


a pupil, masc. 


una pupilla 


a female pupil 


un parent ado 


an alliance 


un matrimonio 


a marriage 


uno sposalizio 


' a wedding 


Degli Stati dell' Uomo e 


Of the Conditions of Man 


delta Donna. 


and Woman. 


Un uomo 


a man 


una donna 


a woman 



290 



VOCABULARY. 



«« uomo attempdto 

dna donna attempdta 

un vecchio 

una vecchia 

un giovane 

una giovane 

un marito 

una moglie 

un bambino, masc. 

una bambina, fem. 

un ragdzzo,fanciullo 

un ragazzino,Janciullino 

una fanciullina 

una zitella 

it padrone 

la padrona 

il servitore 

la serva 

il cittadino 

il contadino 

un forestiero 

un barone 

un monello, unfurbo 

un Iddro 



an aged man 
an aged woman 
an old man 
an old woman 
a young man 
a young girl 
a husband 
a wife 

an infant 

a boy 

a little boy 

a little girl 

a maid 

the master 

the mistress 

the man servant 

the female servant 

the citizen 

the countryman 

a stranger 

a rogue 

a sharper, a knave 

a thief 



Quel che bisogna per 
vestirsi. 

Un vestito, un abito 

un cappello 

una perucca 

una cravdtta 

unjerrajuolo 

un abito, un vestito 

le calzette, calze 

le sottocalzette y le sottocalze 

gli scarpini 

le scdrpe 

lepianelle 

una camicia 



What is necessary for 
dressing oneself. 

a suit of clothes 
a hat 
a wig 
a cravat 
a great coat 
a coat 
stockings 
under stockings 
the pumps 
the shoes 
the slippers 
a shirt 



una 



VOCABULARY. 



291 



una camiciola } 

una sottoveste £ 

una mdnica 

i manichetti 

una berretta 

una zimdrra 

una tasca, una saccoccia 

it borsellino 

pantaloni 

calzoni lunghi 

mutande 



a waistcoat 

a sleeve 

the ruffles 

a cap 

a night-gown 

a pocket 

the fob 

pantaloons 

trowsers 

drawers 



Coi Vestiti, bisogna 


With Clothes, we 


Delle fettiicce 


ribbons 


dei merletti 


lace 


dei bottoni 


buttons 


delle bottoniere 


button-holes 


dellafr&ngia 


fringe 


dei gudnti 


gloves 


unjazzoletto 


a handkerchief 


un oriuolo, orologio 


a watch 


un manicotto 


a mutt* 


delle fibbie 


buckles 


delle legdcce 


garters 


un anello 


a ring 


un pet tine 


a comb 


una tabacchiera 


a snuff-box 



Per quei che montano 
a Cavdllo. 

Un pendone 
una cintura 
le pistole 
una brzglia 
una sella 
lestaffe 



o 2 



For those who ride on 
Horseback. 

a belt 
a girdle 
the pistols 
a bridle 
a saddle 
the stirrups 



la 



292 



VOCABULARY. 



lajrusta 



the whip 
the boots 



gli speroni 


the spurs 


la ginocchiera 


the top of the boot 


la rotella 


the rowel of the spur 


la gdmba 


the leg 


la suola 


the sole 


il calcdgno 


the heel 


Per le Signore. 


For the Ladies. 


Una cuffia 


a cap, or head-dress 


una gonn&tta, una soft ana 


a petticoat 


il busto 


the stays 


il gremhidle 


the apron 


una mdschera 


a mask 


un velo 


a veil 


gli orecchini 


ear-rings 


i ricci 


the curls 


tin ventdglio 


a fan 


una stecca 


a busk 


gli smanigl'i 


bracelets 


l' apparecchiatojo 


the toilet 


le spiile 


pins 


un torsello 


a pincushion 


un pajo di forbid 


a pair of seissars 


un ditdle 


a thimble 


un ago 


a needle 


ilfilo, il refe 


thread 


il liscio 


paint 


le mosche 


patches 


acque odorose 


sweet waters 


della polvere 


powder 


lo spillone di testa 


a bodkin 


I 9 acconciatura di cdpo 


a head-dress 


la scdtola 


a box 


le gioje 


jewels 


una gioja, un ginjello 


a jewel 


un diamante 


a diamond 


uno smerdldo 


an emerald 


un rubino 


a ruby 



una 



VOCABULARY. 



293 



una per la 




a pearl 




tin zqffiro 




a sapphire 




uno stuzzicadenti 


a tooth-pick 




delta tela 




linen 




una conocckia, rocca 


a distaff 




ilfuso 




the spindle 




la seta 




silk 




la Idna 




wool 




dell 9 dmido 




starch 




del sapone 




soap 




lo stuccio 




a case 




Delle Parti del Corpo. 


Of the Parts of the Body. 


La testa, il 
capo 


the head 


le hraccia 
il gomito 


the arras 
the elbow 


il viso, la 
Jaccia 


the face 

1 


it pugno 
la mdno 


the fist 
the hand 


lafronte 


the forehead 


il dito 


the finger 


gli occld 


the eyes 


il pollice 


the thumb 


le ciglia 


the eyebrows 


le unghie 


the nails 


le palpebre 


the eye-lids 


lo stbmaco 


the stomach 


la papilla 


the eye-ball 


il petto 


the bosom 


le orecchie 


the ears 


le zinne 


the breasts 


i capelli 


the hair 


le caste 


the ribs 


le tempia 


the temples 


le cosce 


the thighs 


le gudnce 


the cheeks 


le ginocchia 


the knees 


il ndso 


the nose 


la gdmba 


the leg 


le narici 


the nostrils 


la polpa della the calf ol 


la bdrba 


the beard 


gdmba 


the leg 


la bocca 


the mouth 


la noce del 


the ancle- 


i denti 


the teeth 


piede 


bone 


la lingua 


the tongue 


il collo del 


the instep 


le Idbbra 


the lips 


piede 


il paldto 


the palate 


il piede 


the foot 


le basette, i 
baffl 


the whiskers 


il calcdgno 
la ciera 


the heel 
the mien 


il menlo 


the chin 


la comples- 


the complex 


il collo 


the neck 


sione 


ion 


la gola 


the throat 


V aria 


the air 


le spdlle 


the shoulders 







294 



VOCABULARY. 



il portamenti 


the demean- 
our 


ilfegato the liver 
il pulmone the lungs 


la grassezza 


the fatness 


la tosse cough 


la magrezza 


the leanness 


il catdrro the rheum 


la statura 


the stature 


iljidto the breath 


V andatura 


the gait 


la voce the voice 


il ghto 


the gesture 


la parola the speech 


il cervello 


the brain 


un sospiro a sigh 


il sdngue 


the blood 


la vista the sight 


le xsene 


the veins 


V udito the hearing 


le arierie 


the arteries 


/' odordto the smell 


i nervi 


the nerves 


il gusto the taste 


i muscoli 


the muscles 


il tdtto the feeling 


la pelle 
il cuore 


the skin 
the heart 


il sentimento. Al . . 
,, • •• the opinion 
I opimone r 


Per Istudiare. 


For Study. 


La libreria 




the library 


il gabinetto 




the closet 


un libro 




a book 


uno zibaldone 


a common-place book 


la carta 




the paper 


unfoglio 




a leaf 


una pagina 




a page 


la coperta d\ 


in libro 


the cover of a book 


una penna 




a pen 


Vinchiostro 




ink 


un calamajo 




an ink-stand 


un lemperinc 




a pen-knife 


lo spago 


[bia 


packthread 


la polvere, I 


arena, la sab- 


sand 


il polverino 




the sand-box 


la cera 




the wax 


un sigillo 




a seal 


una letter a 




a letter 


tm biglietto 




a note 


la scrittura 




the writing 


il ricordo, il taccuino 


the pocket-book 


la cartapecora,lapergamena 


parchment 



VOCABULARY. 



295 



il pennello 

il lapis 

una lezione 

una traduzione 

un iema 

un portqfoglio 



the pencil or brush 

the pencil (blacklead) 

a lesson 

a translation 

a theme 

a case for paper 



Strumenti di Musica, fyc. 


Instruments of M 


Un violino 


a violin 


(ma viola 


a bass-viol 


un cbrno 


a horn 


unjlautoj un traversiere 


a flute 


uno zuffblo 


a flageolet 


una zampogna 


a bagpipe 


una piva, un oboe 


a hautboy 


una chitdrra 


a guitar 


un cembalo 


a harpsichord 


un pianoforte 


a piano-forte 


un liuto 


a lute 


uri > drpa 


a harp 


un drgano 


an organ 


una trbmba 


a trumpet 


un tamburo 


a drum 


un piffero 


a fife 


un orchestra 


an orchestra 


una bdnda 


a band 


il basso 


the bass 


il soprano 


the treble 


il tenor e 


the tenor 


il contra tenore 


the counter-tenor 



D'una Cdsa e delle sue 
parti. 

La cdsa 
la porta 
il portbne 



Of a House and its 
parts. 

the house 
the door 
the gate 



la 



296 



VOCABULARY. 



la camera, la stanza 

la sella 

la sella da pranzare 

la sdla bassa 

I'anticdmera 

la sdla 

il gabinetto 

lajinestra 

le invetridte 

la cucina 

il cor tile 

il pozzo 

la stdlla 

la cantina 

la scdla 

le scale 

il giardino 

lajontdna 

la dispensa 

il prima piano 

il secondo piano 

il terrdzzo 

la saffitta 

il tetto 

le iegole 

le gronddje 

il m uro, la murdglia 

il camino 

i mattoni 

il pdlco, il tax>oldto 

la rimessa 

iljorrio 

la trdve 

i travicelli 

le tdvole 

Vinsegna 

la pigione, iljitto 

il gesso 

la calcina 

il mdrmo 

la pietra 



the room 

the drawing-room 

the dining-room 

the parlour 

the anti-chamber 

the hall 

the closet 

the window 

the panes of glass 

the kitchen 

the yard 

the well 

the stable 

the cellar 

the stair-case 

the stairs 

the garden 

the fountain 

the pantry 

the first floor 

the second floor 

the terrace 

the garret 

the roof 

the tiles 

the gutters 

the wall 

the chimney 

the bricks 

the floor 

the coach-house 

the oven 

the beam 

the joists 

the planks 

the sign 

the rent ' 

the plastering 

the lime 

the marble 

the stone 



VOCABULARY. 



297 



la colomhaja 


the pigeon-house 


il polldjo 


the hen-house 


il comodo 


the water-closet 


I Mobili della Camera, 


The Furniture of a Roon 


La tapezzeria 


the tapestry 


lo specchio 


the looking-glass 


il letto 


the bed 


le lenzuola 


the sheets 


il materdsso 


the mattress 


la coltrice 


the feather-bed 


il paglidccio 


the straw-bed 


il capezzdle 


the bolster 


il sopraccielo del letto 


the tester of the bed 


le cortine 


the curtains 


la bandinella 


the head-curtain 


la coperta 


the counterpane 


il guancidle 


the pillow 


le verghe 


the curtain-rods 


la sponda del letto 


the bed-side 


i quddri 


the pictures 


tin orologio 


a clock 


la cornice 


the frame 


le sedie 


the chairs 


una sedia d 1 appoggio 


an arm-chair 


la tdvola 


the table 


il tappeto 


the carpet 


il sofa 


the sopha 


la credenza 


the cupboard 


un paravento 


a screen 


una scdtola 


a chest 


una cassetta 


a box 


unJbrziSre 


a strong-box 


la ricamatiira 


embroidery 


la pittura 


the painting 


V indoratura 


the gilding 


la scultura 


the carving, or sculpture 


V intagliatura 


carving on wood 


unafigura 


a figure 



o 5 



298 



VOCABULARY. 



una statu a 
una colonna 
un piedestdllo 



a statue 
a pillar 
a pedestal 



Quel die si trova intorno 
at Cammzno. 
La porcelldna 
un urna 
un vaso 
iljuoco 
il carbone 
le ceneri, la cenere 
ilfocoldre 
un pezzo di legna 
unajascina di legna grossa 
un S(>ffietto 
la paletta 
le mollette 
iljbrcone 
zolfanelli 
iljucile 

la pietrajbcaja 
V esca 
lajiamma 
il parqfuoco 
ilfumo 

la caligine, lajuligine 
il piarabrace 



What we find about the 
Chimney. 

the China ware 

an urn 

a vase, a vessel 

the fire 

coals 

ashes 

the hearth 

a log of wood 

a faggot 

a pair of bellows 

the shovel 

the tongs 

the poker 

the matches 

the steel 

the flint 

the tinder 

the flame 

the screen 

the smoke 

the soot 

the fender 



Quel che si trova nella 
Cucina* 
Lo spiedo 
il girarrosto 
il voltaspiedo 
il calddro 
una padella 
un treppiede 

una graticola, una gratella 
una brocca 



"What we find in the 
Kitchen. 

the spit 
the jack 
the jack 
the kettle 
a frying-pan 
a trivet 
a gridiron 
a pitcher 



VOCABULARY. 



299 



una secchia, un secchio 


a pail 


una corda 


a rope 


una girella 


a pulley 


un catino 


an earthen pan 


una pigndtta 


a pot 


una pentola 


a great pot 


una cucchiajo 


a spoon 


una mestola 


a ladle 


unajbrcina,forchetia 


a fork 


uno scaldavivdnde 


a chafing-dish 


lo scaldaletto 


the warming-pan 


un rampino 


a hook 


la catena 


the pot-hanger 


una gratuggia 


a grater 


una tortiera 


a pudding-pan 


un mortdro 


a mortar 


un pistello 


a pestle 


uno sciacquatore 


the sink 


una scop a 


a broom 


uno strdccio 


a rag 


uno sirojjinaccio 


a duster 


Quel che si trova nella 


What we find in the 


Cantlna* 


Cellar. 


Una bolte 


a butt 


un barile 


a barrel 


un imbottatojo 


a funnel 


un cerchio 


a hoop 


la feccia 


the dregs 


del vino 


wine 


della birr a 


beer 


del sidro 


cider 


mn vecchio 


old wine 


vin nuovo 


new wine 


vi?i rosso 


red wine 


vin bianco 


white wine 


vin chiaretto 


claret 


vino gudsto 


sour wine 


aceto 


vinegar 


vin dolce 


sweet wine 


mbsto 


must 



300 



VOCABULARY. 



un martello 


a hammer 


metier mdno ad una botte 


to tap a butt 


cavdr vino 


to draw wine 


tirar un sughero 
un cava sughero 


to draw a cork 


a corkscrew 


Quel die si trova intorno 


What is found about a 


alia Porta, 


door. 


La chidve 


the key 


la serralura 


the lock 


il catenaccio 


the bolt 


il saliscendi 


the latch 


il chiavistello 


the bolt 


i riscontri 


the wards of a lock 


il battitojo 


the knocker 


la campanella 


the bell 


la stdnga 


the bar 


il soglio 


the threshold 


i gdngheri 


the hinges 


Quel eke si trova nella 


What we find in the 


St alia. 


Stable. 


Deljieno 


hay 


della bidda 


oats 


della pdglia 


straw 


una rastellicra 


a rack 


■una mangiatoja 


a manger 


la semola 


the bran 


il pettine 


the comb 


la striglia 


the CLirry-comb 


un vaglio 


a sieve 


la briglia 


the bridle 


la sella 


the saddle 


ilpettordle 


the breast-plate 


le cinghie 


the girths 


il cavicchio 


the peg 


V arcione 


the saddle-bow 


una cavezza 


a halter 



VOCABULARY. 



301 



il mozzo di stdlla 


the groom 


i cavalli 


the horses 


la carrozza 


the coach 


il calesso 


the chariot 


carrozza per due per son e 


the chaise 


un cdrro 


a waggon 


una carretta 


a cart 


Quel che si trova nel 


What is found in the Gar- 


Giardino> i Jiori, e gli 


den, the flowers and the 


dlberi. 


trees. 


Una spalliera 


a row of wall-trees 


una pergola 


an arbor 


una rota 


a rose 


un gelsomino 


a jessamin 


del gdrqfani 


pinks 


del geranio 


geraniums 


delle tidipe, dei tulipdni 


tulips 


del gigli 


lilies 


delle viole 


violets 


delle gio?ichiglie 


jonquils 


un pomaro, or porno 


an apple-tree 


un pero 


a pear-tree 


un ciregio 


a cherry-tree 


un susino 


a plum-tree 


un dlbero d* albicocco 


an apricot-tree 


un persico 


a peach-tree 


un moro 


a mu.'berry-tree 


unfico 


a fig-tree 


un ulivo 


an olive- tree 


il bos so 


the box-tree 


il lauro 


the laurel-tree 


V abete 


the fir-tree 


la querela, il rdvere 


the oak 


tifaggio 


the beech-tree 


V olmo 


the elm 


V uva spina 


the gooseberry-tree 


V ardncio 


the orange-tree 


un rosdjo 


a rose-bush 


il semenzdjo 


the nursery 



302 



VOCABULARY. 



la vile 


the vine 


la vigua 


the vineyard 


V edera 


ivy 


un rdmo 


a branch 


un mandorlo 


an almond-tree 


un male 


an avenue 


un boschetto 


a little wood 


V ombra 


the shade 


it fresco 


the cool 


lajontana 


the fountain 


i candli 


the canals 


un cespuglio 


a bush 


un mirto 


a myrtle 


la verdura 


verdure 


un mcizzo dijiori 


a nosegay 


Dignita temporali. 


Temporal Dign 


Un imperatore 


an emperor 


una imperatrice 


an empress 


un re 


a king 


una regina 
il delfino 


a queen 


the dauphin 


la delfina 


the dauphiness 


ilprincipe 


the prince 


la principessa 


the princess 


il gran due a 


the grand-duke 


la granduchessa 


the grand-duchess 


V arciduca 


the arch-duke 


T arciduchessa 


the arch-duchess 


il duca 


the duke 


la duchessa 


the duchess 


il marchese 


the marquis 


la marchesa 


the marchioness 


il conte 


the earl 


la contessa 


the countess 


il visconte 


the viscount 


la viscontessa 


the viscountess 


il bar one 


the baron 


la baronessa 


the baroness 



/' am~ 



VOCABULARY. 



SOS- 



V ambasciadore 

V ambasciadrice 

un incaricdto d y affari 

un segretario di legazione 

un baronetto 

un cavaliere 

il govematore 

la govematrice 

un invidio 

un residente 

un agente 

un console 



the ambassador 

the ambassadress 

the charge d'affaires 

a secretary of legation 

a baronet 

a knight 

the governor 

the governor's lady 

an envoy 

a resident 

an agent 

a consul 



Cdriche ed Ufficidli di 
Giustizia. 

II cancelliere 

il custode de* sigUli 

il segretario di sidto 

V intendente 
il tesoriere 
il presidcnte 
il consigliere 

il maestro delle suppliche 

il maestro de conti 

il giudice 

il luogotenente civile 

il luogotenente crimindle 

il podesta 

uno schiavino 

V avvocdto 

il procuratore 

il procurator jiscdle 

un sostituto 

un notdjo 

un segretario 

un sollecitatore 

uno scrivdno 

un copista 

I 9 usciere 

il sergente, il cursore 



Officers and Offices of 
Justice. 

the chancellor 

the keeper of the seals 

the secretary of state 

the surveyor 

the treasurer 

the president 

the councillor 

the master of requests 

the master of accounts 

the judge 

the civil magistrate 

the criminal magistrate 

the mayor 

an alderman 

the advocate 

the attorney 

the attorney-general 

a deputy 

a notary 

a secretary 

a solicitor 

a clerk 

a hackney-writer 

the door-keeper, usher 

the Serjeant 



304 



VOCABULARY. 



un carceriere a jailor 

un litigatore, or litigante a pleader 
un prigioniere a prisoner 



', campo 



Ufficidli di Guerra. 
II generate 

V ammirdglio 
il luogotenente generate 
un marescidllo di I 
un brigadiere 
il colonnello 

tenente colonnello 
il maggiore 

V ajutdnte maggiore 
il capita" no 

il luogotenente, il tenente 
il cometta 

V alfiere 
il ser genie 
il capordle 

un sottocapordle 

un quartier maestro 

un commissdrio 

un cavaliere 

unjantaccino 

il cavalleggero 

un dragone 

un moschettiere 

la bdnda 

un trombettiere } trombetta 

un tamburino 

ilpifaro 

la sentinella 

la ronda 

lapattuglia 

un guastatore 

un cannoniere 

un minatore 

gli avventwieri, i volmtarj 

ifdnti perduti 

un ingegnere 



Officers of War. 

the general 

the admiral 

the lieutenant-general 

a major-general 

a brigadier 

the colonel 

the lieutenant-colonel 

the major 

the adjutant 

the captain 

the lieutenant 

the cornet 

the ensign 

the Serjeant 

the corporal 

the under-corporal 

a quarter-master 

a commissary 

a horse-man 

a foot-soldier 

the light-horseman 

a dragoon 

a musqueteer 

the band 

a trumpeter 

a drummer 

the fifer 

the sentinel 

the round 

the patrole 

a pioneer 

a gunner 

a miner 

volunteers 

the forlorn hope 

an engineer 



L 9 Armata 



VOCABULARY. 



305 



V Armata, 

Un' armata 

unajlotta 

una squadra 

il corpo di battdglia 

la vangudrdia 

la retrogudrdia 

il corpo di riserva 

una line a 

un cdmpo volante 

la cavalleria 

lajanteria 

uno squadrone 

un battaglione 

la prima fila, or schiera 

la seed n da fila 

il bagaglio 

i cannoni 

le tende 

il padiglione 

un reggimento 

una compagnia 

un presidio, or una guar- 

nigione 
una brigdta 
una suddivisione 



The Army. 

an army 

a fleet 

a squadron 

the main-body 

the van-guard 

the rear-guard 

the body of reserve 

a line 

a flying camp 

the cavalry 

the infantry 

a squadron 

a battalion 

the first rank 

the second rank 

the baggage 

the guns 

the tents 

the pavilion 

a regiment 

a company 

a garrison 

a division 

a sub-division 



Le Fortificaziom, 

Una citth 

la cittadella 

un forte 

unafortezza 

un castello 

le mura 

ilfosso 

una palizzdta, uno stecedto 

la cortina 

la mezza luna 

la casamdtta 



The Fortifications* 

a city 
the citadel 
a fort 
a fortress 
a castle 
the walls 
the ditch 
a pallisado 
the curtain 
the half-moon 
the casemate 



la 



306 



VOCABULARY. 



la strdda coperta 

unfortino 

le trinciere 

una mina 

una contramina 

una torre 

un -parapet to 

il terrapieno 

una pidtta forma 

un cavalier e 

un bastione 

provvisioni da bocca 

provvisioni da guerra 

munizioni 
un assedio 
le capitolazioni 
i soccorsi 
una sortita 
un assdlto 



the covered way 
a small fort 
the trenches 
*a mine 

a counter-mine 
a tower 
a parapet 
the rampart 
a platform 
a cavalier 
a bastion 
provisions 

ammunition 

a siege 

the capitulations 

succours 

a sally 

a storm 



Professioni, e Mestieri. Professions, and Trades. 



Un aid ore 

un editore 

un traduttore 

un librajo 

uno stampatore 

un legatore di libri 

un medico 

un cerusico 

uno speziale 

un barbiere 

unjbrndjo 

un pasticciere 

un rosticciere 

un macellajo 

un oste 

un mercdnte, un negozidnte 

un sdrto, un sartore 

un calzoldjo 

un ciabattino 



an author 

an editor 

a translator 

a bookseller 

a printer 

a bookbinder 

a physician 

a surgeon 

an apothecary 

a barber 

a baker 

a pastry-cook 

a cook that roasts 

a butcher 

an innkeeper 

a merchant 

a taylor 

a shoemaker 

a cobler 



VOCABULARY. 



307 



un cappelldjo 

un mercidjo 

un sellajo 

un maniscdlco 

un incisor e 

un intagliatore 

un pittore 

un ricamatore 

un falegndme 

un mar an gone 

un muraiore 

un magndno, un chiavajo 

un molindjo, un mugn6jo 

una lavandaja 

un orologidjo 

un giojeiliere 

un argentiere 

un orefice 

un tapezziere 

un rigattiere 

un guantdjo 

un commedi&nte 

un suonatore 

uno spadajo 

una scuffiaja, una modista 

unfacchino 

un vetrajo 



a hat-maker 

a mercer, haberdasher 

a sadler 

a farrier 

a copper-plate engraver 

a carver 

a painter 

an embroiderer 

a joiner 

a carpenter 

a mason 

a locksmith 

a miller 

a washer-woman 

a watchmaker 

a jeweller 

a silversmith 

a goldsmith 

an upholsterer 

a broker 

a glover 

a player 

a musician 

a sword-cutler 

a milliner 

a porter 

a glazier 



Ufficidli di Cdsa. 

Un lacche 

uno staffiere, un servitore 

it pdggio 

il cocc hier e 

il palajreniere 

la serva 

la cameriera 

il cameriere 

i portantini 

ilportindjo 

lo scudiere, il cavallerizzo 

lo scdlco 



Officers of the House. 

a running footman 

a footman, a man, a servant 

the page 

the coachman 

the groom 

the maid-servant 

the chamber-maid 

the valet 

the chairmen 

the porter 

the gentleman of the horse 

the carver 

il 



308 



VOCABULARY. 



il coppiere 
il cantiniere 
il credenziere 
il maestro di cdsa 
il segretdrio 
il cappelldno 
il gentiluomo 
V intendente 
il cuoco 
il giardiniere 
il mgnaiuolo 
il padrone 
la padrona 



the cup-bearer 

the butler 

the cupboard-keeper 

the steward 

the secretary 

the chaplain 

the gentleman 

the intendant 

the cook 

the gardener 

the vins-dresser 

the master 

the mistress 



Qualita, Difetti, Imperfez- 
zioni e malattie dell 9 
Uomo. 



Qualities, Defects, Imper- 
fections, Diseases, &c. 
of man. 



Un guercio 
un cieco 
un gobbo 
uno zoppo 
■uno storpidto 
un mancino 
un mdnco 
un sordo 
un muto 
uno scilii 
un cdlvo 
un ?idno 
un ladro 



unfurfdnte 
un rndgo, 
uno stregone 
una strega 
un cattivo 
huonafortuna 
disgrdzia 
lafortuna 
un ammaldto 



a one-eyed man 

a blind man 

a hunch-backed man 

a lame man 

a cripple 

a left-handed man 

a one-handed man 

a deaf man 

a dumb man 

a stammerer 

a bald man 

a dwarf 

a thief 

a rascal 

a rogue 

a magician 

a sorcerer 

a witch 

a wicked fellow 

good luck 

bad Juck 

fortune 

a sick person 



la 



VOCABULARY. 



S09 



la malattia 

unafebbre 

una terzdna 

una quartdna 

il tr emtio 

unaferita 

una contuzione 

la podagra, la gotta 

i dolori colici 

la rosolia 

il vajuolo 

V infreddatura, il catdrro 

il renmatismo 

la tosse 

la rognuzza, la scdbbia 

il pizzicore 

un apostema 

una sgrafignaiura 

una caduta 

un biiffetto 

uno schiqffb 

un pugno 

un cdlcio 

una stoccdta 

una pistolsttdta 

un archibugidta, una 3 
Juccilata, una schiop- > 
pettata 3 

uno svenimento 

la morte 



sickness 

fever 

a tertian ague 

a quartan ague 

the cold fit 

a wound 

a contusion 

the gout 

the cholic 

the measles 

the small-pox 

the cold 

the rheumatism 

the cough 

the itch 

an itching 

an imposthume 

a scratch 

a fall 

a fillip 

a box on the ear 

a cuff 

a kick 

a thrust with a sword 

a pistol-shot 

a gun-shot 

a swooning 
death 



Degli Uccelli. 



Of Birds. 



Un aquila 
un uccello 
un uccellino 
un cardello 
unfanello 
, un canarmo 
un verzellmo 
un lucarino 



an eagle 

a bird 

a little bird 

a goldf.nch 

a linnet 

a canary-bird 

a yellow-hammer 

a goldfinch 



310 



VOCABULARY. 



una rondine 

un usignolo 

uno siorno 

unjringuello 

una passera., un passerbtto 

un pappagdllo 

un merio 

unagdzza 

una ghiandaja 

un tortorello, una tortorelia 

un allbdola 



a swallow 
a nightingale 
a starling 
a chaffinch 
a sparrow 
a parrot 
a blackbird 
a magpye 

a J a y 

a turtle dove, masc. fyfen 
a lark 



De Quadrupedi. 

Un cane 

un cagnolino 

una cagnolina 

un gdtto, una gdtta 

un sorcio 

un topo, un sorcio 

una scirnia 

una pecora 

tin porco 

un porch'etto 

una sctofa, una trqja 

una volpe 

un lupo 

un toro 

una vdcca 

un mtello 

un mulo, una mula 

un cammello 

una cdpra 

un elejdnte 

un leone 

un leopdrdj 

una tigre 

un cavdl/o 

una cavdlla 

un asino 



Of Quadrupeds. 

a dog 

a little dog 

a little she dog 

a cat, a she cat 

a mouse 

a rat 

an ape, a monkey 

a sheep 

a pig 

a sucking pig 

a sow 

a fox 

a wolf 

a bull 

a cow 

a calf 

a mule, masc, and Jem. 

a camel 

a goat 

an elephant 

a lion 

a leopard 

a tyger 

a horse 

a mare 

an ass 



Degli 



VOCABULARY. 



311 



Vegli Animdli rettili, ed 
Insetti 
a toad 



Un rospo 
una ran6c- 

chia, rdna 
una lucertola 
una lumdca 
una chiocciola a beetle 
uno scorpione a scorpion 
un rdgno 
un serpente, 

una biscia 
una Jarf alia 



a frog 

a lizard 
a snail 



a spider 
a serpent 
a butterfly 



Quel che si vede nella 
Campdgna. 

La strdda 

la strdda maestra 

una ptanura 

una vdlle 

una montdgna 

un poggio, un cdlle 

un bosco 

unajbresta, una selva 

una siepe 

un cespuglio, unafrdtta 

un dlbero 

un rdmo 

del grdno 

dcljormento 

4eW orzo 

delta bidda, dell' avena 

una vigna 

un giardino 

un viale 

un castello 

un campanile 

tin prdtu 

un Idgo 

uno stdgno 

un dirupo 9 uno scoglio 



Of Reptiles and Insects. 



una mosca 
una zanzdra, 

zanzdla 
un bruco 
un verme, un 

lombrico 
un pidocchio 
una pulce 
un cimice 
una formica 



a fly 

a gnat 

a caterpillar 

a worm 

a louse 
a flea 
a bug 
an ant 



una tartaruga a tortoise 



What one sees in the 
Country. 

the road 

the high-way 

a plain 

a valley 

a mountain 

a hill 

a wood 

a forest 

a hedge 

a bush 

a tree 

a branch 

corn 

wheat 

barley 

oats 

a vine 

a garden 

an alley, or walk 

a castle 

a steeple 

a meadow 

a lake 

a pond 

a rock 



312 



VOCABULARY. 



unjosso a ditch 

un ruscello a brook 

unjiume a river 

un ponte a bridge 

una bdrca a bark 

una palude, un pantdno a marsh 

una laguna a slough 

una terra^ un villdggio a village 

un borgo t un paese a town 



Quel die si vcde nella Citta. 


What we see in a City 


11 ponte 


the bridge 


la porta 


the gate 


la strdda, la via 


the street 


la cdsa 


the house 


il paldzzo 


the palace 


la chiesa, la cappella 


the church, the chapel 


il convento 


the convent 


lo speddle 


the hospital 


il mercdto 


the market 


lajiera 


the fair 


la piazza a" drme 


the place of arms 


la bottega 


the shop 


la dogdna 


the custom-house 


la prigione, la carcere 


ihe prison 


lajbntdna 


the fountain 



I Colori. 



II bianco 

il nero, il ne- 
gro 

il rosso 

il verde 

il gidllo 

il turchino, 
ilblu 

il bigio 

il pnvondzzo 

V in earn at 'o 

il color di 

fnoco 



white 
black 

red 
green 
yellow- 
blue 

grey 

violet-colour 

carnation 

fire-colour 



Colours. 
/' olivdstro olive- colour 



il color di 
pdglia 
il cremeszno 
il leondto 
scarlattino 



straw-colour 

crimson 

dun-colour 

scarlet 



il color dicarne pink 



porpora 
azzurro 
color di lilla 
colore d y a- 

rdncio 
color bruno 



purple 

sky-blue 

lilac 

orange 

brown 

I Metdlli. 



VOCABULARY. 



SIS 



.L' oro 

V argento 
ilferro 
il piombo 
il brhnzo, 
V ottone 
Vaccidjo 
il rame 
lo stdgno 



I Metallu 
gold 



silver 

iron 

lead 

brass 

steel 

copper 

tin, or pewter 



Of Metal? 
il mercurio, 
V argento 

vivo 
la calamita 
la latta 
lo zolfo 



quicksilver 

a loadstone 

tin 

brimstoner 



il verderdme verdigrise 
il vetro glass 



Delle Nazioni. 


Of Nations. 


Italidno 


an Italian 


Francese 


a Frenchman 


TedSsco 


a German 


Spagnuolo 


a Spaniard 


Portoghese 


a Portuguese 


Svedese 


a Swede 


IngUse 


an Englishman 


Poldcco 


a Polander 


Irlandese 


an Irishman 


JJ'ngaro 


a Hungarian* 


Scozzese 


a Scotchman 


Danese 


a Dane 


Olandese 


a Dutchman 


Maltese 


a Maltese 


Russo 


a Russian 


Turco 


a Turk 


Borgognone 


a Burgundian 


Flamingo 


a Fleming 


Europeo 


a European 


Lorenese 


a Lorrainer 


Africano 


an African 


Tdrtaro 


a Tartar 


Cinese 


a Chinese 


Asidtico 


an Asiatic 


Giapponese 


a Japanese 


Americano 


an American 


Svizzero 


a Swiss 


Egizidno 


an Egyptian 


Piemuntese 


a Piedmontese 


Lappone 


a Laplander 



La Data delle Letter e. 
II primo 
' due, di due 

tre, di tre 

quattro, ai quattro 

cinque, ai cinque 

s'ei, ai sei 

sette, ai sette 
gli otto, dgli otto 
i nove, ai nove 

died, ai died 
gli undid, dgli undid 
' dodici, ai dodici 
i tridedy ai tredeci 



The Date of Letters^ 
the first 
the second 
the third 
the fourth 
the fifth 
the sixth 
the seventh 
the eighth 
the ninth 
the tenth 
the eleventh 
the twelfth 
the thirteenth 
P i quattordici 



314, 



VOCABULARY. 



i quattordici, ai quattordici 


the fourteenth 


i quindici, ai quindici 


the fifteenth 


i sedici, ai 16 


the J 6th 


i diecisette, ai 1 7 


the 17th 


i dieciotto, ai 18 


the 18th 


i diecinove, ai 19 


the 19th 


i venti, ai 20 


the 20th 


i ventf lino, ai 21 


the 2 1 st 


i venti due, ai 22 


the 22nd 


i venti tre, ai 23 


the 23rd 


i venti qudttro, ai 24 


the 24th 


f venti cinque, ai 25 


the 25th 


i venti sei, ai 26 


the 26th 


i venti sette, ai 27 


the 27th 


i venti otto, ai 28 


the 28th 


% venti nove, ai 29 


the 29th 


i trenta, ai trenta 


the 30th 


i trent* uno, ai trenf iino, 




or /' ultimo 


the 31st 


We may put, i or a di, primo, due, tre, qudttro, &c. 


/ Giudchi. 


The several Games. 


La pallacorda 


tennis 


il biglidrdo 


billiards 


a f dadi 


at dice 


alle carte 


at cards 


aW bmbra 


at ombre 


alia bassetta 


at basset 


alia bestia 


at loo 


dgli sedechi, d > sedechi 


at chess 


alle ddme 


at draughts 


alle trichetrdche 


at tick-tack 


dlle piastrelle 


at quoits 


alle bucce 


at bowls 


a chid ma V oste 


an Italian game 


at votdnte, alia racchetta 


at shuttlecock 


Mia cieca 


at blind-man's buff 


uW oca 


at the game of goose 


quadnglidti 
tavolino da gmocdre 


quadrille 


card-table 


tavo/iere 


draught-board 


scacch'dre 


chess-board 




A COL* 



( 315 ) 

A 
COLLECTION 

OF 

VERBS, 

Most necessary to be first learnt. 



Per lo Studio. 

Stitdidre 

impardre 

impardr a mente 

leggere 

scrivere 

sottoscrivere 

piegdre 

sigilldre 
Jdre il soprascritto 

correggere 

scassdre, scancelldre 

tradurre 

comincidre 

cnntinudre 
fcnire 

ripetere 
Jdre 

sapere 

potere 

volere 

ricorddrsi 

dimenticdre, scorddrsi 

compardre 



Per Pari are, 

Pronunzidre 
accent u are 



For Study. 

to study 

to learn 

to learn by heart 

to read 

to write 

to sign or subscribe 

to fold up 

to seal 

to put the superscription 

to correct 

to blot out 

to translate 

to begin 

to go on 

to make an end 

to repeat 

to do, to make 

to know 

to be able 

to be willing 

to remember 

to forget 

to compare 



To Speak. 



to pronounce 
to accent 



p2 



proferire 



316 



VERBS. 



prqferire 

dire 

ciarlare 

cicaldre 

griddre 

sgriddre 

aprire la bocca 

serrdre la bocca 

tacere 

chiamdre 

rispondere 



Per Bere, e Mwgiare. 

Masticdre 
inghiottire 
taglidre 

provdre 9 gustdre 
sciacquare 
here 

mangidre 
digiundre 
far colezione 
merenddre 
pranzdre, desindre 
cenare 
aver fame 
aver sete 
aver appetito 



Per anddr a dormire. 

Anddr a letto 

dormire 

veglidre 

riposdre 

addormentdrsi 

sogndre 

russdre 

sveglidrsi, destdrsi 

levdrsi 



to utter 

to say 

to prattle 

to chat 

to cry out 

to scold 

to open one's mouth 

to shut it 

to be silent 

to call 

to answer 



To Drink and Eat. 

to chew 

to swallow 

to cut 

to taste 

to rinse 

to drink 

to eat 

to fast 

to breakfast 

to lunch 

to dine 

to sup 

to be hungry 

to be thirsty 

to have an appetite 



To go to sleep. 

to go to bed 
to sleep 
to watch 
to rest 
to fall asleep 
to dream 
to snore 
to wake 
to rise 



Per 



VERBS. 



317 



Per vestirsi, 

Vestirsi 
spoglidrsi 
calzdrsi 
scalzdrsi 
pettindrsi 
acconcidrsi 7 cdpo 
metier si la polvere 
Jarsi i ricci 
mettersi H cappello 
coprirsi 
abbottondrsi 
allaccidrsi, qffibbi&rsi 



To dress one's self. 

to dress one's self 
to undress one's self 
to put on one's shoes 
to pull off one's shoes 
to comb one's head 
to dress one's head 
to powder one's head 
to curl one's hair 
to put on one's hat 
to be covered 
to button one's self 
to lace one's self 



Azioni ordindrie all 9 
Uomo, 

Jtidere 
pidngere 
sospirdre 
siernutdre 
sbadiglidre 
sqffiare 
Jischidre 
ascoltdre 
odordre 
sputdre 
snffidrsi 7 ndso 
uscir sdngue dal ndso 
gli esce sangue dal ndso 
asciugdre 
tremdre 
gonfidre 
tossire 

essere infreddato 
guarddre, mirdre 
pizzicdre 
grattdre 
solleticdre 



The ordinary Actions of 
Men. 

to laugh 

to weep 

to sigh 

to sneeze 

to gape 

to blow 

to whistle 

to hearken 

to smell 

to spit 

to blow one's nose 

to bleed at the nose 

he bleeds at the nose 

to dry or wipe 

to tremble 

to swell 

to cough 

to have a cold 

to look 

to pinch 

to scratch 

to tickle 

Azioni 



518 VERBS. 


Azioni d* A 'more, e 


Actions of Love and 


d' Odio, 


Hatred. 


Amdre 


to love 


accarezzdre 


to caress 


lusingdre 


to flatter 


far carezze 


to show a kindness 


abbraccidre 


to embrace 


bacidre 


to kiss 


salutdre 


to salute 


insegndre 


to teach 


nudrire 


to nourish 


corrcggere 


to correct 


punire 


to punish 


casiigdre 


to chastise 


Jrustdre 


to whip 


loddre 


to praise 


biasimdre 


to blame 


dare, concedere 


to give, to grant 


negate 


to deny 


proibire 


to forbid 


sirappazzdre 


to use ill 


bdttere 


to beat 


odidre 


to hate , 


scaccidre, manddr via 


to drive away, tosendaway 


perdondre 


to pardon 


disputdre 


to dispute 


contrastdre 


to quarrel 


litigdre 


to plead 


proteggere 
abbandondre 


to protect 


to forsake 


benedire 


to bless 


maledire 


to curse 


Per gli Esercizj, 


For Diversion or Exercise. 


Cantdre 


to sing 


correre 


to run 


balldre 


to dance 


saltdre 


to jump 


giuocdre 


to play 



son&rc 



VERBS. 3 


sondre la childrra 


to play on the guitar 


sondre '/ violino 


to play on the violin 


tirdr di spdda 


to fence 


cavalcdre, montdr a cavdllo 


to ride on horseback 


giuocdr alia patlacoida 


to play at tennis 


giuocdr alle carte 


to play at cards 


giuocdr a picchetto 


to play at picquet 


giuocdr all' ombra 


to play at ombre 


giuocdr alia bassetta 


to play at basset 


giuocdr a* dddi 


to play at dice 


guadagndre, vincere 


to win 


perdere 


to lose 


scommettere 


to lay a wager 


risicdre 


to venture 


esser pace 


to be quits 


scar tare 


to lay out 


mescoldre 


to shuffle 


alzdre 


to lift up 


tra-stulldrsi, divert ir si 


to divert one's self 


scherzdre 


to joke 


burldrsi 


to laugh at 


motteggidre 


to make one laugh 


star in piedi 


to stand up 


inchindrsi 


to stoop downwards 


girdre 


to turn 


fermdrsi, trattenSrsi 


to stop 


Per Comprare. 


For Buying. 


Domanddre il prezzo 


to ask the price 


qudnto vale ? 


how much is it worth I 


qudnto casta ? 


what does it cost ? 


prezzoldre, fare H prezzo, 
mercantdre 


to haggle 


misurdre 


to measure 


comprdre 


to buy 


pagdre 


to pay 


qfferire 


to bid or offer 


sopraffdre, far una domdn- 
da esor bit ante 


to exact 



319 



vender 



320 



VERBS. 



vender cdro 

vender a buon mercdto 

prestdre 

torre in prestito, piglidr 

in prestito 
impegndre 
disimpegndre 
dare 
inganndre 



to sell dear 
to sell cheap 
to lend 

to borrow 

to pawn 

to take out of pawn 

to give 

to cheat 



Per la Chiesa. 


For the Church. 


Anddr alia chiesa 


to go to church 


pregdr Iddio 


to pray to God 


comunicdrsi 


to receive the sacrament 


predicdre 


to preach 


orndre 


to adorn 


battezzdre 


to baptize 


confermdre 


to confirm 


son are le campane 


to ring the bells 


seppellire 


to bury 


sotterrdre 


to inter 


cantdre 


to sing 


inginocchidrsi 


to kneel 


rizzdrsi, alzdrsi 


to rise 



Per le Azioni di Movi- 
mento. 

Anddre 
stare ', dimordre 
venire 
torndre 
Jermdrsi 
cammindre 
correre 
seguitdre 
fuggire 
scappdre 
partire 



For the Actions of Mo- 
tion. 

to go 

to stand, to dwell 

to come 

to return 

to stop or stay 

to walk 

to run 

to follow 

to fly 

to escape 

to depart 

anddr 



V E R B S. 



321 



n 



anddr inndnzi, avanz&re 
anddr in dietro, rinculdre 
allontandrsi 
avvicindrsi, appressdm 

accostdrsi 
voltdre 
cascdre, cadere 
sdruccioldre 

fdrsi mdle,ferirsi 

giungere, arrivdre, or j 
giugnere \ 

incontrdre, anddr all' in" j 
contro \ 

entrdre 

uscire 

salire, montdre 

scendere 

trattenersi, stdr a bada, 

sedere 

spasseggidre 

anddr a spasso, anddr a J 
cammindre, a spasseg- > 
gidre ] 

affrettdrsi 



to advance 
to stand back 
to be distant 

to come near 

to turn 

to fall down 

to slide 

to hurt one's self 

to wound ones self 

to arrive 

to go, to meet 

to go, or come in 
to go t or come out 
to go, or come up 
to go, or come down 
to stand idle 
to sit down 
to take a walk 

to go a walking 

to make haste 



Azioni ManudlL 

Lavordre 

toccdre 

maneggidre 

legate 

sciorre, slegdre } sciogliere 

attaccdre ' 

staccdre 

allentdre 

levdre, togliere, torre 

piglidre, prendere 

rubdre 

raccogliere 

straccidre, strappdre 



Manual Action?. 

to work 
to touch 
to handle 
to tie or bind 
to untie 
to tie 
to untie 
to let loose 
to take away 
to take, 
to steal 
to gather up 
to tear 



p 5 



pment&rCf 



VERBS. 



presentdre, dondre 
regal are 
ricevere 

strhigere, strignere 
tenere 

rompere^ spezzdre 
nascondere 
coprire 

scoprire, manifestdre 
sporcdre, insuciddre 
nettdre, pulire,forbire 
stroffindre, stroppicidre, 7 
fregdre \ 

tastdre 

additdre, mostrdr a dito 
pizzicdre 

solleticdre [tare 

sgrqffidre 9 graffidre y fygrat- 



Azioni di memoria e 
d'immaginazione. 

Ricorddrsi 

dimenticdrsi, scorddrsi 
pensdre 
credere 
dubitdre 
sospettdre 
osservdre 
avvertire 
conoscere, sapere 
Jigurdrsi, immagindrsi 
bramdre, desiderdre 
sperdre 
tern ere 
assicurdre 
giudicdre 
conchiudere 
risolvere 
J"mgere 
intestdrsi 
ostindrsi 



to present, to give 
to make a present 
to receive 
to crowd 
to hold 
to break 
to hide 
to cover 
to discover 
to dirty- 
to clean 

to rub 

to feel 

to point with one's 6nger 

to pinch 

to tickle 

to scratch 



Actions of the memory 
and imagination. 

to remember 

to forget 

to think 

to believe 

to doubt 

to suspect 

to observe 

to take care 

to know 

to imagine 

to wish 

to hope 

to fear 

to assure 

to adjudge 

to conclude 

to resolve 

to feign 

to be conceited of 

to be obstinate 

adirdr 



VERBS. 



323 



adirarsi, anddr in collera 

pacificdrsi 

inganndrsi 

perdere la tramontane/, 7 

imbrogli&rsi \ 

aver per certo 
aver sulla punta dclle > 

dita \ 

esser geloso 



Per le Arti ed i Mestieri. 

JDipingere 

intaglidre, scolpire 

disegndre,Jur un disegno 

abbozzdre 

ri cam are 

smaltdre 

indordre 

inargentdre 

incassdre 

invernicidre 

stampdre 

legdr un libro 

lavordre 



to fly into a passion 
to be appeased 
to mistake 

to embroil one's self 

to be certain of 

to have it at one's finger's 

end 
to be jealous 



For Arts and Trades. 

to paint or draw 

to engrave 

to design 

to draw a sketch 

to embroider 

to enamel 

to gild 

to silver over 

to enlay 

to varnish 

to print 

to bind a book 

to work 



Per V Armdta. 

Far solddti 

toccdre, bdttere '/ tamburo 

sondre la trombetta 



accamparsi 
alloggidre 
montdr a cavdllo 
smontdre 

Jar giornata, dar battaglia 
riportdre la vittoria 
scompigli&re, disordin&re 
sbaraglidre, sconfiggere 
svaligidre 



For the Army. 

to raise soldiers 

to beat the drum 

to sound the trumpet 

to march 

to encamp 

to lodge 

to get on horseback 

to alight 

to give battle 

to gain the victory 

to put in disorder 

to rout 

to plunder 



324 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



saccheggidre 
ddre 'Igudsto 
circonvalldre, stringere 
assediare 
dar un assdlto 
prender d' assdlto 
jar volar la mina 
spar tire 
capitoldre 
rendersi a pdtti 

caeciar mano alia spdda 

ammazzdre, uccidere 
dar quartiere 
Jerire 

aprire la trinciera 
sondr la raccolta 
incalzdre 7 nemico 



to sack 

to lay waste 

to blockade 

to besiege 

to storm 

to take by storm 

to spring a mine 

to fire 

to capitulate 

to surrender on terms 

to clap one's hand on one's 

sword 
to kill 

to give quarter 
to wound 

to open the trenches 
to sound a retreat 
to pursue the enemy 



SHORT and FAMILIAR PHRASES, 

IN ITALIAN AND ENGLISH. 



I beg of you I 
Give me. 
Do not give me. 
Bring me. 
Do not bring me. 
Some toast. 
Some rolls. 
Some butter. 
Some milk. 
Some cream. 
Some tea and coffee. 
Some chocolate. 
Some water. 
Some wine. 



Vi prego ? 

Ddtemi. 

Non mi date. 

Portatemi. 

Non mi portdte, 

Del pane arrostito. 

Dei panelti. 

Del burro, or butirro, 

Del latte. 

Delia ere ma. 

Del te e del caffe, 

Delia cioccoldta. 

DeW acqua. 

Del vino. 



Some 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



Some beer. 
Some meat. 
My hat. 
My cane. 
My shoes. 
His boots. 
My books. 
Yes, sir. 
No, madam. 
Good morning. 
Good evening. 



Delia birra. 
Delia came. 
II mio cappello. 
II mio bastone. 
Le mie scarpe. 
I suoi stivdli. 
I miei libri. 
Si, signore. 
No, sign or a. 
Buon giorno. 
Buona sera. 



II. 



I am not ready. 

After you. 

It is true. 

It is so. 

Here I am. 

Here we are. 

Here she is. 

Here he is. 

Believe me. 

Do not believe me. 

Lend me. 

Some money. 

Do me. 

This favour. 

This pleasure. 

Permit me. 

Where are you going ? 

Where do you come from ? 

I am going home. 

I come from church. 

I am going. 

Come (or go) up stairs. 

Go down. 

Come up. 

Wait for me here. 

Come here. 

Come (or go) down. 



Non son pronto. 
Dopo di voi. 
E vero. 
Cost e. 
Eccomi. 
E r ccoci. 
E'ccola. 
E'ccolo. 
Credetemi. 
Non mi credete. 
Prestatemi. 
Del dandro. 
Fdtemi. 
Questojavore. 
Quest o piacere. 
Permettetemi. 
Dove anddte f 
Di dove venite ? 
Vado a casa. 
Vengo di chiesa. 
Me ne vado. 
Salite le scale. 
Anddte giu. 
Venite su. 
Aspettdtemi qui. 
Venite qua. 
Scendete. 



III. How 



326 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



III. 



How do you do? 

Well, I thank you. 

Not very well. 

What ails you ? 

I have a cold. 

I have a head-ache. 

I have a pain in my heart. 

That makes me ill. 

I have the tooth-ache. 

How long since ? 

Since this morning. 

Since yesterday. 

I have a sore throat. 

You must keep in bed. 

And your sister? 

She has a head-ache. 

She has the gout. 

I am sorry for it. 

She is better. 

I am very glad of it. 

Is she at home ? 

I think not. 

I think so. 



Come state ? 
Bene, grdzie. 
Non trdppo bene. 
Che cosa avete ? 
Sono infreddato. 
Mi duole il capo* 
Mi sento male. 
Questo mi fa nausea. 
Ho dolor di denti. 
Da quando in qua ? 
Da questa mattina. 
Dajeri in qua. 
Ho male alia gola. 
Bisogna star in letto. 
E vostra sorella ? 
Ha mal di testa. 
Ha la gotta. 
Me ne dispidce. 
St a meglio. 
Me ne rallegro. 
E" ella in casa '? 
Credo di no. 
Credo di si. 



IV. 



I thaDk you. 

Your most humble servant. 

I am yours. 

Your servant. 

Without compliments. 

Sit down. 

You are very civil. 

You are very obliging. 

Go and play. 

Come, come. 

Presently. 

O how tiresome you are ! 

You are very naughty. 

Leave me in peace. 

Let me alone. 



Vi ringrdzio. 
Servitor e umilissimo. 
Padrone stimatissimoe 
Serva vostra. 
Senza cerimonie. 
Accomod&tevi. 
Siete molto civile. 
Siete molto compito. 
Anddte a divertirvi. 
Via* via. 
Ora. ora. 
SH pur nojbso. 
Siete molto cattivo. 
Lascidmi in pace. 
Lascidtemi stare. 



Don't 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



wr 



Don't stun me. 
Don't plague me. 
Go about your business. 
I come from there. 
Go away then. 
O ! thank God. 



Non mi st or dire. 

Non mi stordite. 

Andate a spasso. 

Ne vengo. 

Andate via dunque. 

Oh J sia ringrazidto IddiOc 



V. 



Have you dined ? 

Not yet.' 

At what o'clock do you 

sup ? 
At nine o'clock. 
I dine at five. 
And I at half past four. 
It is a convenient hour. 
Prepare breakfast. 
Eat something. 
I have no appetite left. 
I am very thirst}'. 
Drink a glass of water. 
Have you breakfasted? 
It is too soon. 
You are still sleepy. 
Rise up quickly. 
Do not take the trouble. 
Shut the door. 
Open the window. 
It is open. 
Shut it then. 
You are in the right. 
He is in the wrong. 
Make haste. 
Go to bed. 



Avete pranzato? 

Non ancbra. 

A che ora cenate ? 

A lie nove delta sera. 

Desino a cinque ore. 

Ed io alle quattro e mizza* 

E y un 9 ora comoda. 

Prepardie la colezione. 

Mangtdte qualche cosa. 

Non ho piu appetito* 

Ho gran sete. 

Bevete un bicchiir d'acqua. 

AvUeJuttn colezione? 

E s tropp'i presto. 

Siete ancora addormenl&to* 

Levatevi subito. 

Non v incomodate. 

Chiudete la porta. 

Aprite iajinestra. 

E" aperta. 

Serrdtela dunque. 

Avete ragione. 

Egli ha torto. 

Spicciatevi. 

Andate a letto. 



VI. 



What is it o'clock. 

Tell me what it is o'clock. 

Do you know what o'clock 

it is ? 
I do not know exactly. 



Che ora e ? 
Ditemi che ora e. 
Sapete che ora e ? 

Non so precisamente* 



Look 



328 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



Look at your'watch. 
It is almost one o'clock. 
It has struck one. 
It is a quarter past one. 
It is almost two. 
It is half past two. 
It has just struck two. 
It is three quarters past 

two. 
It is not three o'clock yet. 
What weather is it ? 
It is fine. 
It is bad weather. 
It is gloomy weather. 
The wind is changed. 
It will rain. 
See the sun appears. 
Let us go and take a walk. 



Guardate at vostro oriuolo. 
E x quasi un y ora. 
E x un* ora sonata. 
JE X un ora e un quarto* 
Son quasi le due. 
Sono le due e mezza. 
Son due ore passdte. 
Son le due e tre quarti. 

Non sono ancora le tre. 
Che tempo fa f 
Fa Ml tempo. 
Fa cattvoo tempo. 
Fa un tempo tristo. 
E s cambidto il vento. 
Vuol piovere. 
Ecco eke esce il sole. 
Andiamo a spasso. 



VII. 



Hear me. 

Hear him. 

Hear her. 

Look at them. 

Tell him, her. 

Show it me. 

Let him know it. 

Tell it him (or her). 

Do not look for it. 

Do not speak to him. 

Tell her nothing. 

Remember. 

Do you remember ? 

Take care of yourself. 

Stop. 

Dress yourself. 

Help me. 

Go away. 

I repent it. 

Thou shalt go 

He will be angry at it. 

He will speak to us about it. 



Ascoltdtemi. 

Ascoltdtelo. 

Ascoltdtela. 

Guarddteli. 

Dzte-gli (m.) le (f.). 

Mostrdtemelo. 

Fdteglielo sapere. 

Diteglielo (m. ou f.). 

Non lo ceredte. 

Non gli (m.) par late, 

Non le ( t\ ) kite niente. 

Ricorddtevi. 

Vi ricorddte voi ? 

Baddte a voi. 

Fermdtevi. 

VestUevi. 

Ajutdtemi. 

Anddtevene. 

Me ne pento. 

Tu te n* andrdi. 

Ei se ne sdegnerh. 

Egli ce ne parlera. 



He 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



329 



He gave him two of them. 

He wrote it to him. 

He sent for them for him. 



Gliene diede due, 
Glielo scrisse, 
Glielifece venire. 



VIII. 



What are you doing ? 
I am writing some letters. 
Have you been at the 

play ? 
I have not been there. 
What did they perform 

yesterday ? 
Look at the bill. 
Do you like tragedy. 
No, I like comedy. 

Do you like operas ? 

O yes, very much. 

Did you amuse yourself 

well? 
Who is the first singer ? 
And the first actress ? 
What parts did they play ? 
Who is the first violin ? 
He plays well on the flute. 
He plays like a professor. 
Have you heard Catalani ? 
What do you think of 

Pasta? 



Che state Jacendo ? 

Stb scrivendo delle letter e, 

Siete stato al tedtro ? 

Non vi sono stato, 

Che si rappresentbjeri ? 

Guarddte al cartello, 
Vi pidcciono le tragedie ? 
No, mi pidcciono le com' 

medie divertevoli. 
Vi pidcciono le Opere in 

musica ? 
Oh y si, moltissimo, 
Vi siete ben divertito ? 

Chi e il prinio uomo ? 
E la prima donna ? 
Che parte Jacevano ? 
Chi e il primo violino. 
Suona bene iljlauto, 
Lo suona da maestro. 
Ha ella sentito la Catalani? 
E come le piace la Pasta ? 



IX. 



Where do you dine to-day? 
I dine out. 
With much pleasure. 
There are so many things. 
There were so many peo- 
ple. 
My father will be there. 
My friend is not there. 
Send him word. 



Dove pranzate oggi ? 
Pranzojuori di casa. 
Con molto piacere, 
Vi sono tante cose, 
V 9 era tanta gente. 

Vi sarh mio padre. 
II mio amico non v' e. 
Fateglielo dire. 

I think 



330 



FAMILIAR PHRASES. 



I think he is gone out. 
I shall go to your house. 
If I had known it yester- 
day. 
If you knew that. 
I would if I could. 
I could if I would. 
You need not tell it me. 

I cannot help it. 

You may stay at home. 
I will tell you. 
I am going to write. 
I have just been eating. 
Who does this belong to? 
It is mine, it is his, &c. 
It is our turn to speak. 
It is my turn to deal. 



Credo che siajuori. 
Verro da voi. 
Se lo sapevajSri. 

Se sapeste che. 

Vorrei se potessi. 

Potrei s J to volessi. 

Non occorre che me lo di- 
ddle. 

Non posso Jarci nulla ou 
non saprei chefarci. 

Bisogna restdre in casa, 

Vi diro. 

Stavo per iscrivere. 

Ho gia mangidtq.' 

JDi chi e questo ? 

E K mio 9 e suo, fyc, 

Tocc a noi a parldre, 

Tocc 9 a me ajar le carte* 



You are more learned 

than I. 
Do not be angry (or sorry) 

for it. 
I am rather poor than rich. 
It is better to laugh than 

to cry. 
It is better late than never. 
He is taller than him. 
He is very clever. 
Every body says so. 
They were near fifty. 

Stay with me. 

Tell him from me. 

Let us have a game. 

Cut a part. 

He is of a very strong 

party. 
Draw near the fire. 



Voi stile piu sapiente di 

me, 
Non tie ne dispidecia, - 

Son piu povero che ricco, 

E x meglio ridere che pidn- 
gere. 

JET meglio tardi che mdu 

Egli e m-aggior di lui. 

Ha motto ingegno. 

Ognun lo dice. 

Erano da cinqudnta in 
circa. 

Restdte meco. 

Ditegli da parte mza, 

Giuochidmo una partita. 

Taglidtene una parte, 

Egli e d 9 un partito fortis- 
simo. 

Avvicindtem aljuoco 

They 



DIALOGUES. 



331' 



They say so. 

One says what one thinks. 

They do not say so. 

Speaking of you. 

1 think I see you. 

It seems to me so natural. 

He did all that was bid 

him. 
I saw my parents. 
I saw them this morning*. 
I wanted to tell them. 
You know as much about 

it as I. 
You speak as I do. 
I know it as well as you. 

The prince is not so pow- 
erful as the king. 

How does Mr. N do? 

He is just gone out. 

As for Mr. N he is 

not well. 
Yesterday he was perfectly 

well. 



Si dice cosi. 

Si dice quel che si pensa* 

Nor. si dice questo. 

Parlando di voi. 

Par mi di vedervi. 

Mi par tanto naturdle. 

Fece quanto giifu d tto. 

Ho vcduto i miii genitori. 
Gli ho veduti stamattina. 
Volevo dir loro. 
Ne sapite quanto me. 

Voi parlate come me. 

Io to so bene quanto voi, or 

al par di voi. 
Non e tanto potente «» 

prtncipe, quanto un re* 
Come st a il Sign or N.f 
K uscito di casa in questo 

momento. 
In quanto al Signor N*. 

non ista bene. 
Jeri siava a maravigliav 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 
DIA'LOGHI F AMIGLI A' RI» 



DIALOGUE I. 

GOOD morrow, sir. 
Good night, sir. 
How do you do, sir? 
Well ; not very well ; 
so. 



DIALOGO I. 

BUON giorno, signore 
Bubna sera, signore 
Come sta, signore 
Bene ; non troppo bene / 
cosi cosi 

Very 



332 



DIALOGUES. 



Very well to serve you. 

At your service 

I am obliged to you, sir. 

I thank you. 

How does yourbrother do? 

He is well. 

He will be glad to see you. 

I shall have no time to see 
him to-day. 

Be pleased to sit down. 

Give a chair to the gentle- 
man. 

There's no occasion. 

I must go to pay a visit in 
the neighbourhood. 

You are in great haste. 

I will be back presently. 

Farewell, sir. 

I am glad to see you in 
good health. 

I am your servant. 

Your mosthumble servant. 

Your servant. 

Your most humble servant. 

DIALOGUE II. 

To make a Visit in the 
Morning. 

WHERE is your master 1 

Is he asleep still ? 

No, sir, he is awake. 

Is he up ? 

No, sir, he is in bed. 

What a shame 'tis to be in 
bed at this time of day ! 

I went to bed so late last 
night I could not rise 
early this morning. 

What did you do after 
supper ? 



Benissimo per servzrla. 

Al suo servizio. 

Le sono obbligato, signore* 

La ringrdzio. 

Come sta suojratello. 

Sta bene. 

Avrd gusto di vederla. 

Non avrb tempo di vederlo 

oggi. 
Segga, signore. 
Date una sedia al signore. 

Non e necessario. 
Bisogna che vada a Jar 

una visita qui vicino. 
JB X mblto ajfrettata> signore. 
Tomer o adesso adesso. 
Addio, signore. 
Ho gran gusto di vederla 

in buona salute. 
Servo suo. 

Umilissimo servo suo ? 
Serva sua. 
Umilissima serva sua. 

DIALOGO II. 

Per Jar una Visita la 
Mattina. 

DOV'eiltuo padrone? 

Dorme ancora ? 

Signor no> e sveglidto. 

E" egli levato ? 

Signor no, sta ancora a 

letto. 
Che vergogna di star a letto 

a quest 9 or a ! 
Anddi jeri a letto tdnto 

tardi, che non ho potuto 

levdrmi a buon or a. 
Che si fece qui dopo cena ? 

We 



DIALOGUES. 



333 



We danced, we sang, we 
laugh'd, we play'd. 

At what game ? 

We play'd at picquet with 
the knight. 

What did the rest do ? 

They play'd at chess. 

How grieved am I, I did 
not know it. 

Who won ? who lost ? 

I won ten pistoles. 

Till what hour did you 

play ? 
Till two in the morning. 

At what o'clock did you 

go to bed? 
At three, half an hour 

after three. 
I don't wonder at your 

rising so late. 
What's o'clock? 
What do you think it is ? 
Scarcely eight, I believe, 

yet. 
How ! eight ! It has struck 

ten ! 
Then I must rise with all 

speed. 

DIALOGUE III. 

To dress one's self. 

WHO is there? 

What will you please to 

have, sir ? 
Be quick, make a fire, 

dress me. 
There is a fire, sir. 
Give me my shirt. 



Si ballb, si canto, si rise, si 

giuocb. 
A che giuoco f 
Giuocdmmo a picchetto col 

signor cavaliere. 
Che fecero gli dltri ? 
Giuocdrono a scdcchi. 
Quanto mi dispi&ce di nort 

averlo saputo. 
Chi ha vinto ? Chi ha per- 

dttto? 
Ho guadagndto died dop- 

pie. 
Fin a che ora avete giuo- 

cdto? 
Fin dlle due dopo mezza' 

notte. 
A che ora siete anddto a 

letto ? 
AUe tre, alle ire e mezza. 

Non mi maraviglio che vi 

levidte cosi tardi. 
Che ora e ? 

Che ora credit e che sia ? 
Credo che non siano ancora 

le otto. 
Come le otto ! sono suondte 

le died I 
Bisogna dunque che mi levi 

quanto prima. 

DIALOGO III. 
Per vestirsi. 

CHI 2B? 

Che comdnda, signore? 

Sit su, presto, fate fuoco 

vestitemi. 
II fuoco e acceso, signor e. 
Ddtemi la mia camicia. 

It 



334 



DIALOGUES. 



It is here, sir. 

'Tis not warm, 'tis quite 

cold. 
If you please, sir, I'll warm 

it. 
No, no; bring me my silk 

stockings. 
They are torn. 
Darn them a little, or get 

them mended. 
I have given them to the 

stocking- mender. 
You have done right — 

Where are my slippers ? 
Where is my night-gown ? 
Comb my hair. 
Take another comb. 
Give me my handkerchief. 
There's a clean one, sir. 
Give me that which is in 

my pocket. 
I gave it to the washer- 
woman, it was dirty. 
Has she brought my linen? 

Yes, sir, there wants no- 
thing. 

What clothes will you wear 
to-dav ? 

Those I wore yesterday. 

The tailor will bring your 
cloth suit presently. 

Somebody knocks, see 
who it is. 

Who is it. 

It is the tailor. 

Let him come in. 



E'ccola, signore. 

Non e cdlda, e ancdra 

fredda. 
Se vuole, la scaldero. 

No no ; portdtemi le mie 

calzelte di seta. 
Sono rotte. 
Dated tin punto, o fdtele 

acconcidre. 
Le ho date alia c.nciacal- 

zette. 
Avete fdlto bene. Dove 

sono le mie pianelle ? 
Dov e la mia zimdrra ? 
Pettindtemi. 

Pigliote un altro pettine. 
Ddtemi V miofnzzolttto. 
Ffccone unopulito, signore. 
Ddtemi quel ch' e nella mia 

saccoccia. 
& ho dato alia lavanddja 9 

era sporco. 
Ha portdto la mia bian~ 

cheria % 
Signor si, non ci mdnca 

niente. 
Che vestito metterd V. S. 

Sggi ¥ 
Quello ch? avevajeri. 
II sartore deve portdr presto 

quello di pdnno. 
Si picchia % vedete chi e. 

Chief 

jE x '/ sartore. 

Fatelo entrdre. 



DIA- 



DIALOGUES. 



335 



DIALOGUE IV. 

The Gentleman and the 
Tailor. 

DO you bring my suit of 

clothes ? 
Yes, sir, here it is. 
You make me wait a great 

while. 
I could not come sooner. 

It was not finished. 

The lining was not sewed. 

Will you be pleased to try 

the coat on ? 
Let's see whether it be 

well made. 
I believe it will please you. 

It seems to me to be very 
long. 

They wear them long now. 

Button me. 

It is too close. 

To fit properly it ought to 
be close. 

Are not the sleeves too 

, wide \ 

ISIo, sir, they fit very well. 

This suit becomes you ex- 
tremely well. 

It is too short, too long, 
too wide, too narrow. 

Pardon me, sir, it fits very 
well. 

How do you like my trim- 
ming? 

^Tis very fine and rich. 

What did these ribbons 
cost a-yard ? 

I paid a crown. 



DIALOGO IV. 

II Gentiluomo ed il 
Sartore. 

PORTA'TEforse il mlo 

vestito? 
Si, signore, eccolo qui. 
Vifdte aspettdr motto. 

Non ho potuto venir piu 

presto. 
Non erajinito. 
hafodera non era cucita. 
Vuole provdre il vestito, 

signore ? 
Vedidmo s* e benfdtto. 

Credo che V. S. ne sarci 

contenta. 
Mi pare mblto lungo. 

Si portano lunghi addesso. 

Abbottondtemi. 

Mi stringe troppo. 

Per esser ben fdtto bisogna 

che sin giusto. 
Le mdnicke non sono troppo 

larghe ? 
Signorno, stanno benissimo. 
Quest' dbito le sta benis- 
simo. 
JET troppo corto, troppo 

liingo, troppo largo, 

troppo stretto. 
V. S. mi perdoni, le sta 

bene. 
Che dite del mio forni- 

mento ? 
1? bellissimo, e ricchissimo. 
Qudnto costano al brdccio 

questi ndstri f 
Li ho pagdti una scudo. 

That's 



336 DIALOGUES. 

That's not too much, 'tis Non e troppo, non son 
cheap. cart. 

Where is the rest of my Dov 9 e H resto del mio 
cloth ? pdnno ? 

There is not a bit left. Non v'e* niente qffatto 

d'avdnzo. 

Have you made your bill ? Avetefdtto 7 vosiro conto ? 

No, sir, I had not time. Signor no, non ho avuto 7 
tempo. 

Bring it to-morrow, I will Portdtelo domani, vi pa- 
pay you. gherb. 

DIALOGUE V. DIALOGO V. 

To go to Breakfast. Per far Colezione. 

BRING us something for PORTA'TECIqualche 

breakfast. cosa da far colezione. 

Yes, sir, here is tea and Signor si ; ecco ie e cajfe, 

coffee. 

Do you choose some bread Comanda signore che porti 

and butter ? pane e butirro. 

Yes, bring it, we will cut Si, portatene ; ne taglieremo 

some slices of it. dellefette. 

Bring some cold meat, Portate della carnefredm, 

and some eggs. e delle uova. 

Set the ham on the table. Mettete del prosciutto in 

tdvola. 

Lay a napkin on the table. Mettete una sahie'tta sopra 

la tavola. 

Give us plates, knives, and Dated tondi, coltelli, efor- 

forks. chette. 

Give the gentleman a chair. Ddte una sedia al signore. 

Sit down, sir ; sit by the Segga, signore ; si metta 

fire. vicino alfuoco. 

I am not cold, I am very Non i ho freddo, sto benis- 

well here. simo qui. 

Let us see whether the tea Vediamo se 7 te e buono. 

is good. 

Give me that cup. Ddtemi quella tazza. 

Taste that coffee, pray. Di grazia, assdggi questo 

cq0. 

How do you like it ? what Che gliene pare ? che ne 

say you to it ? dice? 

It 



DIALOGUES. 



337 



It is not bad, it is very 
good. 

Here is the toast, take 
away this plate. 

Eat some toast. 

I have eaten some, it is 
very good. 

Give me some more cof- 
fee, sir. 

Sir, I thank you. 

Give the gentleman some 
tea. 

I had some just now. 

The toast was very good. 

It was toasted a little too 

much. 
You do not eat. 
I have eaten so much, I 

shall not be able to eat 

any dinner. 
You only jest, you have 

eaten nothing at all. 
I have eaten very heartily 

both of the bread and 

butter, and toast. 
DIALOGUE VI. 
At dinner. 
AT what o'clock do you 

dine ? 
Dinner is generally on ta- 
ble at six. 
I think that hour is fitter 

for supper than dinner. 

Yes, it is true ; but it is 
a very convenient hour 
for gentlemen and mer- 
chants. 

Shall you have much com- 
pany to-day? 



Non e cattivo, e squisito. 

Ecco il pan tostato, levdte 

questo pidtto. 
Mdngi del pan tostato. 
Ne ho mangidto, e buonis- 

simo. 
Mi dia delV altro caffe, 

La ringrdzio, signore,- 
Ddte del te at signore* 

Ne ho avuto adesso. 

II pan tostato era ononis-' 

simo. 
E'ra un tantino troppo 

cot to, 
V. S. non mdngia. 
Ho mangidto tdnto, che 

non potrb pranzdre. 

V. S. burla, ha mangidta 

niente. 
Ho mangidto benissimo del 

pane e butirro, e del pan 

tostato. 

DIALOGO VL 

Pranzo. 
A CHE or a pranza ella? 

Generalmente il pranzo e 

in tdvola alle sei. 
Mi par che a quelV ora sia 

piuttesto tempo da cena 

che da pranzo. 
Si, e verb ; ma d un ora 

molto comoda pei &"- 

gnori ed i negozianti. 

Vi sard molta gente oggi a 
pranzo ? 
Q No, 



338 



DIALOGUES. 



No, there will be only 
you, my wife, the doc- 
tor, and I. 

Have you always a doctor 
to dine with you % 

No, sir; it is only through 
friendship. 

I have more appetite to- 
day than usual. 

Well, we are going to have 
dinner served up imme- 
diately, 

Francis, lay the cloth. 

Put on a cleaner cloth. 

Bring up the plates, knives, 

and forks. 
Rinse the glasses, 
Prepare some napkins too. 

Where are the silver salts ? 

Dust that sideboard : don't 
you see that it is quite 
covered with dust? 

Make haste, tell the cook 
to send up the dinner 
as soon as it is ready. 

First, put some chairs 
round the table. 

Ladies and gentlemen, 
dinner is on table. 

Please to sit next to the 
lady. 

Much obliged to you. 

Do you like rice soup with 
fowl broth ? 

Yes \ but I like it much 
better in the Venetian 
way, with parmesan 
cheese. 



No ; non vi sard, altri che 

lei, mia mo g lie, il medico 

ed io. 
Usa ella forse di pranzar 

sempre in cornpagnia oV 

un medico! 
No, signore ; e solamente 

per amicizia. 
O'ggi mi sento appetito piw 

del solito. 
Ebbene, or a faremo portdr 

in tdvola. 

Francesco, apparecchidte. 
Mettete una tovdglia piit 

pulita. 
Portdte su tondi, coltelli e 

forchette. 
Sciacqudte i bicchieri, 
Prepardte anche delle sal- 

viette. 
Dove son le saliere eP ar- 
gent o ? 
Ripultte quella credenza: 

non vedete cK e tutta 

coperta di polvere ? 
Presto, dite al cuoco che 

mandi in tdvola subito 

che sard pronto. 
Mettete prima delle sedie 

intorno alia tdvola. 
Signori, ilpranzoh servito, 

or & in tdvola. 
Favorisca sedere qui ac- 

canto alia Signora. 
Grdzie infinite. 
Le piace la minestra di 

riso cotto nel brodo di 

pUlol 
Si ; ma mi piace molto piU 

alia Veneziana col cdcio 

parmigidno. 

I will 



DIALOGUES. 



339> 



I will give you a slice of 
this boiled beef, which 
seems very tender. 

I do not think it is done 
enough. 

But, my dear friend, when 
meat is too much done, 
it loses its flavour ; it 
becomes like tow. 

No matter, I will eat some 
roast beef. 

There is also some fried 
fish, if you do not like 
meat. 

Favour me rather with 
some of that pigeon pie. 

Immediately : here is some 
salad too. 

O ! what a flue lettuce ! 

Will you have an anchovy 
in it? 

Willingly, your oil is ex- 
cellent ; where do you 
get it? 

An Italian merchant, a 
friend of mine, furnishes 
it to me in small boxes 
of thirty bottles each. 

To make a good salad, it 
is absolutely necessary 
to have oil of the best 
quality, and vinegar 
made from wine, as I 
perceive your's is. 

But, sir, you do not drink. 

! yes, I had forgot it ; 
I will take a glass of 
wine, with all my heart. 

Will you have red or 
white ? 

1 will first take a glass of 

beer. 

Q 



Le darb unafetia di questo 
lesso, che mi par molto 
tenero. 

Non mi par cbtto abba- 
stanza. 

Ma, caro amico, quando 
la came e troppo cotta, 
nonka piil gusto, diventa 



Non importa, mangerb del 

manzo arrosto. 
V* e anche del pesce fritto, 

se la came non le piace. 

Mi favorisca piuttosto di 
quel pasticcio dipiccionL 

Subito ; ecco qui anche 
delV insaldta. 

Oh che bella lattuga ! 

Vuole metiervi uri alice ? 

Volontieri : il suo oglio b 
eceellente ; dove lo fa 
prendere f 

Me lofornisce per cassette 
di trenta Jiaschetti ca- 
duna uno spedizioniere 
Italiano mio amico. 

Per fare una buona insa- 
lata e indispenshbile che 
Volio sia delta miglior 
qualita e che Vaceto sia 
di vino, come m'avvedo 
che e 7 suo. 

Ma> signore, ella non beve. 

Oh ! st, me n ero scorddto ; 
beverb volentieri un bic- 
chier di vino. 

Vuol ella del rosso o del 
bianco ? 

Prenderb prima un bicchier 
di birra. 

2 Help 



340 



DIALOGUES. 



Help yourself 

please. 
Your health, sir. 



as you Si serva come vuole. 



Thank you, sir. 

"What do you think of it? 

What do you say to this 

wine ? 
It is not bad : on the con- 
trary, it is excellent, 
Taste now a glass of this 

other. 
O ! this is delicious, and 

it is much older than 

the other. 
It is so : I have had this 

more than ten years in 

my cellar. 
It cannot be denied that 

Port is a very good wine. 

Now we will have on table 
a fine roasted bird, which 
I do net know how to 
name in Italian. 

In Italian they call it gal- 
linaccio, or polio d' In- 
dia, and in Tuscany, 
tacchina. 

Help yourself, for I know 
that you carve very well. 

ISTo, indeed ; I am not ex- 
pert at it. 

Will you give me leave to 
assist you ? 

If you please ; but I beg 
of you to attend to the 
lady first. 

Shall I help you to a bit 

• of the breast ? 

I beg your pardon, if 



Bevero alia sua salute ; 

evviva. 
JEvviva, grdzie. 
Che gliene pare? cosa dice 

di questo vino? 

Non e cattivo ; anzi squi- 

sito. 
Assdggi adesso un bicchier 

di quest 1 altro. 
Oh questo si cK e una de- 

lizia, ed e molto piu vec- 

chio delV altro. 
E x vero; son piu di died 

anni che Vho in cantina. 

Non si pub negdre che il 
vin di Porto non sia un 
gran buon vino. 

Or or a porter anno in tdvo- 
laun belVuccello arrosto, 
che non saprei come chia- 
mare in Italidno. 

In Itdlia lo chidmano gal- 
linaccio, o polio d'India, 
e in Toscdna, tacchina. 

Si serva da se, perche so 
che ella trincia a mar a- 
viglia. 

No, davvtro ; io non ci ho 
troppo buona mano. 

Mi permette di servirla ? 

Mi far d, grazia; ma la sup- 
plico di servir prima la 
signora. 

Vuol che le dia un pezzo 
di petto ? 

Scusi, poiche vuol favo- 
since 



DIALOGUES. 



341 



you will favour me, I 
will beg of you to cut 
me a wing. 

"With pleasure : I will also 
give you a little of the 
stuffing. . 

You will oblige me ; but 
give me also a little of 
the gravy. 

James, a spoon ; bring 
also a salt-cellar ; don't 
you see that we have 
neither salt nor pepper? 

Change these plates, and' 
bring the second course. 

Bring the fruit. 

Here are some fine cher- 
ries. 

They are beautiful ; I 
would rather eat some 
of-- those strawberries 
and raspberries. 

Take some of these cur- 
rants, some gooseber- 
ries, and one of these 
fine peaches. 

At this season apples are 
no longer good. 

That is a winter fruit. 

Oranges, however, are al- 
ways good, when juicy. 

In England fruit is not so 
plentiful as in Italy. 

Pray do not bring it to my 
memory ; for, when I 
think on those figs, those 
grapes, and above all, 
the water-melons, my 
mouth waters. 

Well, let us not think any 



rirmi, la preghero di 
taglidrmi un' ala. 

Con piacere : le darb a?i- 
che un poco del ripieno. 

Mi farct grdzia ; ma mi 
dia anche un po' oV in- 
tinto. 

Giacomino, un cucchidjo ; 
portdte anche una sali- 
era : non vedete che non 
abbidmo ne sale ne pepe? 

Cambidte questi pidtti, e 
portdteilsecondoservizio. 

Portdte in tdvola lefrutta. 

Ecco qui delle belle ciriege. 

Son bellissime ; mangerb 
piuttosto quattro di 
quelle frdgole e di quel 
lamponi. 

Prenda anche del ribes, 
delV uva spina, ed una 
di queste belle pesche. 

Le mele in questa stagione 
non sono piii buone. 

E s unfrutto d' inverno. 

Le arance, per altro, son 
sempre buone tutto V an- 
no quando son sugose. 

In Inghilterra le frutta 
non sono cost abondanti 
come in Italia. 

Per carita, non me ne rin~ 
freschi la memoria ; ckb 
quando pens o a queifichi 
e a quelV uva, e soprattut- 
to ai cocomeri, mi viene 
V acquolina in bocca. 

Via, non vi si pensi pi& 9 
more 



342 



DIALOGUES. 



more about it; let us go 
and take a turn in the 
garden. 

DIALOGUE VII. 

To speak Italian. 

HOW goes on your Ita- 
lian 1 

Are you much improved 
in it now ? 

Not much ; I know scarcely 
any thing. 

It is said, however, you 
speak it very well. 

I wish it were true. 

Those that say so are much 

mistaken. 
I assure you I was told so. 

I can say a few words 
which I have learnt by 
heart. 

And so much as is neces- 
sary to begin to speak. 

The beginning is not all, 
you must make an end. 

Be always speaking, whe- 
ther well or ill. 

I am afraid of making 
mistakes. 

Never fear ; the Italian 



I know it ; and that it pos- 
sesses many graces. 

It is true ; and especially 
from the mouth of a lady. 

How happy should I be, 
if I were master of it. 

Application is the only 
way of learning it. 



andidmo a far una pas- 
seggiata nel giardino. 

DIALOGO VII. 

Per parlar Italiano. 
COME va V Italiano ? 

V. S. vi ha quesf orafatti 

molti progressi ? 
Non troppa, non so quasi 

niente. 
Si dice, perb, die V. S. parli 

benissimo. 
Iddio volesse che fosse 

vero ! 
Quei che lo dicono iingdn- 

nano molto. 
La assicuro che tyC e stato 

detto. 
Posso dir alcune parole 

che so a mente. 

E qudnto bdsta per comin- 

cidr a parldre. 
II cornincidre non e il tutto, 

bisognafnzre. 
Parli sempre, o bene o 

mdle. 
Temo difar errori. 

Non tenia, signore ; la 

lingua Italidna non $ 

difficile. 
Lo so, e so che ha molta 

leggiadria. 
E x vero, e particolarmente 

nellaboccadelle Signore. 
quanto sarei contento se 

la sapessi. 
Per impardrla bisogna stu- 

didre. 

How 



DIALOGUES. 



343 



How long have you been 
learning? 

Scarcely a month yet. 

What books do you use? 

I have Veneroni's Italian 
and English Grammar ; 
and Biagioli's in Italian 
and French. 

What Dictionaries? 

Bottarelli's in Italian, 
French, and English ; 
Baretti's Italian and 
English ; and Graglia's 
small Dictionary. — I 
also use Bottarelli's Ex- 



What Authors do you read ? 
At present I read Goldo- 

ni's Select Comedies ; 

Soave's Moral Tales ; 

and Metastasio. 
What is your master's 

name ? 
His name is — « 
I have known him a great 

while. 
He has taught several 

friends of mine. 
Does not he tell you that 

you must constantly 

speak Italian ? 
Yes, he often tells me so. 
Why do you not talk then ? 
Who will you have me talk 

with? 
With those that shall talk 

to you. 
I wish to talk, but dare 

not. 
You must not be afraid, 

you must be bold. 



Qudnto tempo e die V. S. 
la studia? 

Non e ancora un mese. 

Di die libri si serve ? 

Ho la grammatica Italiana 
ed Inglese di Verier oni ; 
e cpiella di Biagioli in 
Italiano e Francese, 

Che Dizionarj ? 

Quelli di Boitarelli in Ita- 
liano, Francese ed In- 
glese ; quello di Baretti, 
in Italiano ed Inglese ; 
ed il piccolo Dizionario 
di Graglia. — Mi servo 
degli Esercizj di Boita- 
relli. 

Che Autari legge ? 

Adesso leggo le Commedie 
Scelte di Goldoni ; le 
Novelle Morali di Soave, 
e Metastasio. 

Come si chidma 7 suo mae- 
stro ? 

Si chidma 7 signor 

-E" un pezzo die lo conosco. 

Ha insegndto a molti de' 

miei amici. 
Non le dice eke bisogna 

parldr sempre Italiano ? 

Signor s\, melo dice spesso. 
Perche dunque non pdrla? 
Con chi vuol diio pdrli ? 

Cofi quei che le parlerdnno. 

V or rei parldr e, ma non ar- 
disco. 

Non bisogna temere, biso- 
gna csser ardito. 

DIA- 



3U 



DIALOGUES. 



DIALOGUE VIII. 

Of the Weather. 

WHAT sort of weather is 

it? 
It is fine weather. 
It is bad weather. 
Is it cold ? is it hot ? 
Is it not cold? is it not 

hot? 
Does it rain ? does it not 

rain ? 
I do not believe it. 
The wind is changed. 
We shall have rain. 
It will not rain to-day. 
It rains, it pours. 
It snows. 
It thunders. 
It hails. 
It lightens. 
It is very hot. 
Did it freeze last night ? 
No, sir, but it freezes now. 
It appears to me to be a 

great fog. 
You are not mistaken, it is 

true. 
You have caught a violent 

cold. 
I have had it this fortnight. 

"lis the fruit of the season. 

What's o'clock. 

'Tis early, 'tis not late. 

Is it breakfast time ? 

'Twill be dinner-time im- 
mediately. 

What shall we do after 
dinner? 

We'll take a walk. 



DIALOGO VIII. 
Del Tempo. 
CHE tempo fa? 

Fa bel tempo. 
Fa cattivo tempo. 
Fafreddo? facaldo? 
Non fa freddo ? non fa 

cdldo ? 
Piove ? non piove f 

Non lo credo. 

II vento e cambidto. 

Avremo delta pioggia? 

Non pioverd oggi. 

Piove. diluvia. 

Nevica. 

Tuona. 

Grdndina. 

Lampeggia. 

Fa motto cdldo. 

Ha geldto sta notte? 

Signor no, ma gela adesso. 

Mi par chefaccia una gran 

nebbia. 
V. So non s ingdnna, e 

vero. 
V. S. e molto infredddta. 

Sono quindici giorni che 

sono infredddto. 
Sono frutti delta stagione. 
Che or a e ? 

jET di buon' 6ra, non e tdrdL 
E" tempo di far colezio?ie ? 
Sard presto tempo di desi- 

ndre. 
Che faremo dopo prdnzo f 

Andremo a spdsso. 

Let's 



DIALOGUES. 



345 



Let's take a turn now. Andidmo a far un giro 



We must not go abroad 
this weather. 

DIALOGUE IX. 

Of the Charms of a young Delle Bellezze d'una $i- 
Lady. gnorina. . 



Non bisogna uscir per que? 
to tempo. 

DIALOGO IX. 



THERE'S a beautiful 

young lady. 
She is finely shaped. 
She is charming, she is 

pretty. 
Do you know her ? 
I do not know her. 
She has fine eyes. 
I never saw a better shape. 

She has an easy carriage. 
She has a noble mien. 
The shape of her face is 

well proportioned. 
Her cheeks are plump and 

delicate. 
Her mouth is little, and 

red. 
Her nose well made. 
Have you taken notice of 

her complexion ? 
It is the finest in the world. 

A complexion fair, and 

lively. 
What white hands she has ! 
The white and vermilion 

of her cheeks shame the 

lilies and the roses. 
She has teeth as white as 

snow. 
It may be said that she's 

a fair beauty. 

Q 



E'CCO una bella signo- 

rina. 
£J S benfdtta. 
E s vezzosa, c leggiddra. 

La conoscete ? 

Non la conosco. 

Ha begli occki. 

Non ho mdi veduto una piu 

bella vita. 
.E" disinvolta. 
Ha tin aspetto nobile. 
II contorno del suo viso e 

benfdtto. 
Le sue gudnce sonopienotte 

e delicate. 
La sua bocca e picciola, e 

vermiglia. 
II ndso benfdtto. 
Avete osservdto la sua car- 

nagione ? 
E s 'I piil bel colore del 

mondo. 
Una carnagione bidnca, e 

vivdce. 
Che belle mdni che ha ! 
II bianco e vermiglio del suo 

viso f anno, senza dubbio 9 

torto ai gigli ed due rose. 
Ha i denti bidnchi come la 

neve. 
Si pub dire ch' e una bella 

biondina. 
5 She 



346 



DIALOGUES. 



She is the finest brown 
woman one can see. 

She has a noble gait. 

She has a sprightly coun- 
tenance. 

She has exquisite features. 

She is greatly extolled for 
her beauty. 

I think she has a great 
deal of wit. 

Beauty may be seen, but 
not wit. 

They say her wit is equal 
to her beauty. 

Then she is an epitome of 
all perfections. 

DIALOGUE X. 
To inquire after news. 

WHAT news is stirring? 
Do you know any ? 
I have heard none. 
What is the talk of the 

town? 
There's no talk of any 

thing. 
Have you heard no talk of 

war ? 
I have not heard any thing 

of it. 
There's a talk however of 

a siege. 
It was reported so, but it 

is not true. 
On the contrary, there's a 

talk of peace. 
Do you think we shall have 

peace ? 
I believe so. 
What say they at court ? 



E" la piu bella brunetta che 

si possa vedere. 
Cammina con bel gdrbo. 
Ha unajisonomia spiritosa. 

Ha fattezze vdghe. 

E x molto commenddta* per 
la sua belle zza. 

Credo che dbbia molto spi- 
rit o. 

Ben si pub vedere la bel" 
lezza, ma lo spirito no. 

Si dice che sia altrettanto 
spiritosa che bella. 

E y dunque un compendio di 
tutte le perfezioni. 

DIALOGO X. 

P 

er domanddr quel che si 

dice di Nuovo. 

CHE si dice di nuovo f 
Sapete niente di nuovo f 
Non ho inteso niente. 
Di che si pdrla ? 

Non si pdrla di niente. 

Avete sentito dire che avre- 

mo la guerra ? 
Non ne ho inteso parldre. 

Si pdrla perb oV un assedio. 

Si diceva, ma non £ vero, 

Al contrdrio f si parla di 

pace. 
Credete che avremo la, 

pdce? 
Credo di si. 
Che si dice in corte ? 

They 



DIALOGUES, 



347 



They talk of a secret ex- 
pedition. 
When do they think the 

king will set out? 
'Tis not known. They do 

not say when. 
Where do they say he'll 

go? 
Some say into Flanders, 

others into Germany. 
And what says the Ga- 
zette ? 
I have not read it. 
Is what is reported of Mr. 

true ? 

What of him ? 

They say he's mortally 

wounded. 
I should be sorry for that ; 

he's a worthy man. 
Who wounded him? 

Mr. in a duel. 

Is it known why? 

The report is, a quarrel at 

the Opera. 
I do not believe it. Nor I 

neither. 
However, v/e shall soon 

know the truth. 
Is the newspaper come in ? 
Does it mention the duel? 
No — not a word about it. 
Then let us hope there is 

no truth in the report. 

DIALOGUE XL 

To inquire after one. 

WHO is that gentleman 
that spoke to you a lit- 
tle while ago ? 



Si pdrla d' una spedizione 

segreta. 
Qudndo si crede che partira 

il re ? 
Non si sa. Non si dice. 

Dove si diee che andra? 

Chi dice in Fiandra, chi in 

Ger??idnia. 
E la Gazzetia che dice ? 

Non V ho letta* 

Sarebbe vero quel che si 

dice del Sig. ? 

Che sene dice ? 

Si dice che sia ferito a 

morte. 
Mi dispiacerebbe, perche 

e un galantuomo. 
Chi V ha ferito? 

II Sig nor in un duello. 

Si sa perche 9 

Corre voce che sia per una 

disputa all' Opera. 
Non to credo. Nemmen io. 

Comunque sia, si saprd 

presto. 
E s arrivata la gazzetta? 
Parla del duello ? 
No — non ne dice parola. 
Dunque speriamo che sia 

unfalso rapporto. 

D1ALOGO XL 

Per domanddre d'uno. 

CHI e quel signore che vi 
parldva pocofa? 

He 



348 



DIALOGUES. 



He is a German. 
1 took him for an English- 
man. 
He came from Saxony. 
He speaks French very 

well. 
He speaks French like the 

French themselves. 
The Spaniards take him for 

a Spaniard, the English 

for an Englishman. 
It is difficult to be conver- 
sant in so many different 

languages. 
He has been a long time 

in those countries. 
Have you known him for 

any time ? 
About two years. 
He has a noble air, he has 

a good mien. 
He is a genteel person. 
He is neither too tall, nor 

too short. 
He is handsome, he is well 

shaped. 
He plays upon the flute, 

the guitar, and several 

other instruments. 
I should be very glad to 

know him. 
I will bring you acquainted 

with him. 
Where does he live? 
He lives just by. 
When will you have us go 

and wait on him? 
Whenever you please, for 

he is my intimate friend. 
It shall be when you have 

leisure. 



E" un Tedesco. 
Lo credeva Inglese. 

jE n della parte di Sassonia. 
Pdrla benissimo France.se. 

Pdrla Francese come un 

Francese. 
Gli SpagnuoWlo prendono 

per uno Spagnuolo, e gV 

Ingle si per un Inglese. 
jE x pur difficile d'esser prd- 

tico in tdnte lingue cosi 

differ enti. 
E s stdto un pezzo in quel 

paesi. 
E s un pezzo che lo cono- 

scete ? 
Sono due anni incirca. 
Ha un aspetto nobile, ha 

unacieradagalantuomo. 
E s di bella presenza. 
Non e ne troppo grdnde, 

ne troppo piccolo. 
E s ben fdtto, ed ha un bel 

portamento. 
Suona 'Iflauto, la chitdrra, 

e molti dltri strumenti. 

Avrei a euro di conoscerlo, 

Vene procurero la co?io- 

scenza. 
Dove sta di edsa ? 
Sta costi vicino. 
Qudndo volete che andidmo 

a riverirlo ? 
Qudndo vipiacerd,perche e 

amico mzo intrinseco. 
Sard quando avrete tempo. 



We'll 



DIALOGUES. 



349 



We'll go to-morrow morn- V andremo domattina. 

ing, 
I shall be obliged to you. Ve ne sarb obbligdto. 



DIALOGUE XII. 

To write. 

GIVE me a sheet of paper, 
a pen, and a little ink. 

Step into my closet, you'll 
find on the table what- 
ever you want. 

There are no pens. 
There are a great many in 

the ink-stand. 
They are good for nothing. 
There are some others. 
They are not made. 
Where is your penknife ? 
Can you make pens ? 
I make them my own way. 
This is not bad. 
While I finish this letter, 

do me the favour to 

make a packet of the 

rest. 
What seal will you have 

me put to it ? 
Seal it with my cipher or 

coat of arms. 
What wax shall I put to 

it? 
Put either red or black, no 

matter which. 
Have you put the date? 
I believe I have, but I have 

not signed it. 
What day of the month is 

this? 



BIALOGO XII. 

Per iscrivere. 

DA'TEMI un foglio di 
cdrta, una penna ed un 
poco d' inchiostro. 

Entrdte nel mio gabinetto, 
troverete sopra la tdvola 
qudnto vi fara di biso- 
gnx>. 

Non vi sonopenne. 

Vene sono molte nel cala- 
mdjo. 

Non vdgliono niente. 

E'ccone delle dltre. 

Non sono temperate. 

Dov' el vostro temperino ? 

Sapete temper dr le penne ? 

Le tbnpero a modo mio. 

Questa non I cattiva. 

Mhitre Jinisco questa let- 
tera, favoritemi di far 
un piego di quelle dltre. 

Che sigillo volete che ci 

metta ? 
Sigilldtele colla mia cijra, 

ovvero colle mie drmi. 
Che cera ci mettero ? 

Mettetevi delta rossa o 
delta nera, non importa. 

Avete messo la ddta ? 

Credo di si, ma non ho sot- 
toscritto. 

Quantin abbiamo delmese f 

The 



350 



DIALOGUES. 



The eighth, the tenth, fif- 
teenth, twentieth. 

Put the direction. 

Where is the powder ? 

You never have neither 
powder nor sand. 

There is some in the sand- 
box. 

There's your servant ; will 
you let him carry the 
letters to the post-house ? 

Carry my letters to the 
post-office, and don't 
forget to pay postage. 

I have no money. 

Hold your hand, there's a 

pistole. 
Go quickly and return as 

soon as possible. 

DIALOGUE XIII. 



Sidmo oggi agli otto, ai 
dieci,ai quindici,aiventi. 

Metteteci la soprascritta. 

Dov' £ la polvere ? 

Non avete mat nk polvere, 
ne arena. 

Veri k nel polverino. 

E'cco 'I vostro servo ; volete 
eke porti le lettere alia 
posta ? 

Portdte le mie lettere alia 
posta, e non vi dimenti- 
cdte dipagdrne ilpbrto* 

Non ho quattrini, signore, 
non ho dandri. 

Piglidte, ecco una doppia. 

Anddte presto, e t ornate 
qudnto prima. 

DIALOGO XIIL 



To buy. 
WHAT do you want, sir ? 

What would you please to 

have ? 
I want a good fine cloth 

to make me a suit of 

clothes. 
Be pleased to walk in, sir, 

you'll see the finest in 

London. 
Show me the best you have. 

There's a very fine one, 
and what's worn at pre- 
sent. 

'Tis a good cloth, but I 
do not like the colour. 



Per comprdre. 

CHE brdma, signore, che 

cerca ? 
Cosa comanda, signore ? 

Vorrei un pdnno hello e 
buono da farmi un ve- 
stito. 

V. S. entri, vedra qui ipiib 
hex pdnni di Londra. 

Mostrdtemi 'I migliore che 

avete. 
E'econe uno bellissimo, e 

come si usa adesso. 

E buono, ma 'I color non 
mi pidce. 

There's 



DIALOGUES. 



351 



There's another lighter 

piece. 
I like that colour well, but 

the cloth is not strong, 

'tis too thin. 

Look at this piece, sir, 

you'll not find the like 

any where else. 
What do you ask for it an 

ell? 
Without exacting 'tis 

worth thirty shillings. 

Sir, I am not used to stand 

haggling ; pray tell me 

your lowest price. 
I have told you, sir, 'tis 

worth that. 
'Tis too dear, I'll give you 

twenty-five. 
I can't bate a farthing. 
You shall not have what 

you ask. 
You ask'd me the lowest 

price, and I have told 

you. 
Come, come, cut off two 

ells of it. 
I protest, on the word of 

an honest man, I don't 

get a crown by you. 
There are four guineas, 

give me the change. 
Be pleas'd, sir, to let me 

have another, this is too 

light, it wants weight. 
Here's another. 
Sir, your servant. 



E'ccone un tiltra pezzapixi 

chidra. 
II colore mi pidce, mal 

pdnno non £ forte ab- 

bastdnza, £ troppo sot- 
tile. 
Veda V. S. questa pezza> 

non ne troverd cost bella 

altrove. 
Qudnto lo vendete il br&c- 

do 9 
Senza dire a V. S. un soldo 

di troppo, vdle trenta 

scellini. 
Signore io non sono avvez* 

zoaprezzoldre, ditemi di 

grazia V ultimo prezzo. 
GlieV ho detto; questo b il 

prezzo ristretto. 
_E X troppo cdro, vene darb 

venti cinque. 
Non ve un soldo da levdre. 
Non avrete quanto avete 

domanddto. 
V. S. mha domanddto V ul- 
timo prezzo, glieV ho 

detto. 
Via via, taglidtene due 

brdccia. 
Le giuro da galantuomo 

che non guaddgno una 

sciido con lei. 
E'cco qudttro ghinee, ddte- 

mi 7 res to. 
Di grdzia V. S. mi dia urC 

dltra ghinea, questa £ 

leggiera, non e di peso. 
E'ccone un* dltra. 
Sono servitor di V, S. 



DIA- 



352 



DIALOGUES. 



DIALOGUE XIV. 
To play. 

LET us play a game at 

picquet. 
What will you play for ? 
Let us play for half a-crown 

to pass away the time. 
Give us cards. 
Let us see who shall deal. 

You are to deal ; I am to 

deal. 
Shuffle the cards, all the 

court cards are together. 
They are shuffled enough. 
Cut, sir. 

Have you all your cards ? 
I belive I have. 
How many do you take ? 
I take all. I leave one. 

I have a bad game. 

Deal again. 

Not this time. 

Have you laid out ? 

No, sir, my game puzzles 

me. 
You must have good cards. 

for I have nothing. 
Tell your point 
Fifty, sixty. 

It is not good ; it is good. 
A quint major, a quint to 

a king, a small quint, 

four by queens, a tierce 

to a knave. 
I have as much. 
Fourteen by kings, three 

aces, three queens. 
Play. 



DIALOGO XIV. 

Per giuocdre. 

GIUOCHIA'MO una 

partita a picchetto. 
Qudnto volete giuocdre ? 
Giuockidmo mezza. corona 

•per passatempo. 
Dated delle carte. 
Vedidmo a chi toccherd a 

fdre. 
Tocca a vbi, tocca a me. 

Mescoldte le cdrte, tutte le 
figure sono insieme. 

Sono mescoldte abbastdnza. 

Alzdte, signore. 

Avete le vostre cdrte? 

Credo di si. 

Qudnte ne pig lid te ? 

Piglio tutto, or le piglio 
tutte. Ne Idscio una. 

Ho un cattivo giuoco. 

A monte. 

Signor?ib, per questavolta. 

Avtte scartdto f 

Signor no, il mio giuoco, 
wl imbarrdzza. 

Dovete aver bel giuoco, 
poichk io non ho niente. 

Contdte 7 vostro punto. 

Cinqudnta, sessdnta. 

Non vale ; e bu6no. 

Quintamaggi6re,quintaal 
re, quinta bdssa, qudrta 
dlladdma, terzaalfdnte. 

Ne ho altrettdnto, 
Quattordici di re, tre dssi, 

tre ddme. 
Giuocdte. 

Hearts, 



Hearts, spades, clubs, dia- 
monds. 

The ace, the king, the 
queen, the knave, the 
ten, the nine, the eight, 
the seven. 

I have lost, you made a 
picque^ a re-picque. 

You have won. 

You owe me half a crown. 

You owed it me, pardon 
me. 

We are quits, or even, then. 

DIALOGUE XV. 
For a Journey. 

HOW many miles is it 

from this place to N? 
It is eight miles. 
We shall not be able to 

get thither to-day, it is 

too late. 
It is not more than twelve 

o'clock, you have time 

enough yet. 
Is the road good ? 
So, so; there are woods 

and rivers to pass. 
Is there any danger upon 

that road ? 
There is no talk of it ; it 

is a highway, where you 

meet people every mo- 
ment. 
Do they not say there are 

robbers in the woods ? 
There is nothing to be 

feared, either by day or 

night. 
Which way must one take ? 



DIALOGUES. 353 

Cuori, picche,Ji6ri, quddri. 



L'dsso, il re, la ddma, il 
fdnte, il died, il nove, 
lotto, il sette. 

Ho perduto, avetefdtto un 

picco, repicco. 
Avete quadagndto. 
Mi dovete mezza corona. 
Scusdtemi, mela dovevdte. 

Sidmo pace, or pari. 

DIALOGO XV. 

Per un Vidggio. 

QUANTE miglia vi sono. 

da qui a Nf 
Vi sono otto miglia. 
Non vi potremo arrivdr 

oggi, e troppo tdrdi. 

Non £ piil di mezzo giorno 9 

vi arriverete ' ancdr di 

buon' ora. 
JET bella la strdda ? 
Non troppo, vi sono boschi, 

ejiumi da passdre. 
V'h pericolo per quella 

strada ? 
Non sene pdrla ; e una 

strdda maestra dove si 

trova genie ad ogni mo- 

mento. 
Non si dice che vi siano 

Iddri nei boschi ? 
Non ve nulla da temere, 

nh di giorno, ne di nbtte. 

Chestrddabisognapiglidre? 
When 



354 



DIALOGUES. 



When you come near the 
hill, you must turn to 
the right. 

Is it not necessary to as- 
cend a hill then ? 

No, sir, there is only a little 
hill in the wood ? 

Is the way difficult through 
the wood ? 

You cannot lose your way. 

As soon as you are out of 
the wood, remember to 
keep to the left hand. 

I thank you, sir, and am 
much obliged to you. 

Come, come, gentlemen, 
let us take horse. 

Where's the marquis ? 

He's gone before. 

He will wait for you just 
out of town. 

What do we stay for now ? 
come, come, let's be- 
gone, let's have done. 

Farewell, gentlemen, fare- 
well. 

I wish you a good journey. 

DIALOGUE XVI. 

For Supper and Lodg- 
ing. 

SO ; we are arrived at the 

inn. 
Let us alight, gentlemen. 
Take these gentlemen's 

horses, and take care of 

them. 
Now let's see what you will 

give us for supper. 
A capon, a half dozen of 



Qudndo sarete vicini alia 

montdgna, piglierete a 

man dritta. 
Non bisognerd dunquesalir 

la montdgna ? 
Signor no, non v'£ che un 

picciol colle nel bosco. 
ff difficile la strdda nel 

bosco ? 
Non potete smarrirla. 
Qudndo sarete fuori del 

bosco, ricorddtevi di pi- 

glidr a mano mdnca. 
Vi ringrdzio, signore, e vi 

resto molto obbligdto. 
Via via, signori ; montidmo 

a cavdllo. 
Dov' el signor marchese ? 
& anddto inndnzi. 

V aspetterd fuori delta 
cittd. 

Che aspettidmo ? partidmo, 
andidmo, via,finidmola> 

Addio, signori, addio. 

V augur o unfelicevidggio. 

DIALOGO XVI. 

Delia Cena e delV Alloggi- 
amento. 

E f CCOCI giunti alV oste- 

ria. 
Smontidmo, signori. 
Piglidte i cavdlli di questi 
ed abbidtene 



Or su vedidmo che ci darete 

da cena. 
Un cappone.unamezsa doz- 
pigeons, 



DIALOGUES. 



355 



pigeons, a salad, six 
quails, and a dozen of 
larks. 

Will you have nothing 
else ? 

That's enough, give us 
some good wine and 
some fruit. 

Let me alone, I'll please 
you 1 warrant ye. 

Light the gentlemen. 

Let us have our supper as 
soon as possible. 

Before you have pulled 
your boots off, supper 
shall be upon the table. 

Let our portmanteaus and 
pistols be carried up 
stairs. 

Pull off my boots, and 
then go and see whe- 
ther they have given 
the horses any hay. 

You shall conduct them to 
the river, and take care 
they give them some 
oats. 

I'll take care of every 
thing, do not trouble 
yourself. 

Gentlemen, supper is rea- 
dy ; it is upon the ta- 
ble. 

We'll come presently. 

Let us go to supper, gen- 
tlemen, that we may go 
to bed in good time. 

Give us water for our 
hands. 

Letus sitdown, gentlemen, 
let us sit down at table. 

Give us some drink. 



zina di piccioni, uix! in- 
saldta, sei qudglie, ed 
una dozzina di lodole. 

Non vogliono dltro loro, 
signori ? 

Questo bdsta, ddteci del 
buon vino e delle frutta. 

Ldscino far a me, sardnno 

contenti. 
Fdte lame a questi signori, 
Fdtecicenar qudnto prima. 

Prima che si siano cavdti 
gli stivdli, la etna sard 
in ordine. 

Si portino sopra le nostra 
valigie, e le no stre pistole, 

Cavdtemi gli stivali, ed an- 
drete dopo a veder se 
hdnno ddlo del Jieno at 
cavdlli. 

Li condurrete al fiiime ed 
avrete cura che sia loro 
data la bidda. 

Avrb cura di tiitto : V. S. 
non si piglifastidio. 

Signori, la cena e in ordine, 
e in tdvola. 

Adesso, adesso, veniamo. 

Andidmoa cendre, signori; 
acciocche possidmo an" 
ddr a letto di buon ora, 

Ddteci dequa alle mdni, 

Sedidmo, signori, andidmo 

a tdvola, 
Ddteci da bere. 

Health 



356 



DIALOGUES. 



Health to you, gentle- 
men. 

Is the wine good ? 

It is not bad. 

The capon is not done 
enough. 

Give us some oranges, with 
a little pepper. 

Why don't you eat of these 
pigeons ? 

I have eaten one pigeon 
and three larks. 

Go call for a chafing dish. 

Tell the landlord we wish 
to speak with him. 

DIALOGUE XVII. 



Alia loro salute signori. 

jE" bubno 'I vino ? 

Non e cattivo. 

II cappone non e cotto ah- 

bastdnza. 
Dated dei meldngoli con 

un poco di pepe. 
Per che non mangidte di 

questi piccioncini ? 
Ho mangidto un piccione, e 

tre lodole. 
Anddte a domanddr uno 

scaldavivdnde. 
Dite all* oste che venga a 

parldrci. 

DIALOGO XVII. 



To settlewith the Landlord. Per far i conti colV Oste. 



A GOOD evening, gen- 
tlemen, are you satisfied 
with your supper ? 

We are, and we will sa- 
tisfy you too. 

What's the charge ? 

The charge is not great. 

See what you must have 
for us, our men, and our 
horses. 

Reckon yourselves, and 
you will find it comes 
to seven crowns. 

Methinks you ask too 
muchr 

On the contrary, I am very 
reasonable. 

How much do you make 
us pay for the wine ? 

Five shillings a bottle. 

Bring us another, and to- 



BUONA sera, signori, 
sono contend delta cena ? 

Siamo contend, e vogliamo 

che lo siate voi pure. 
Qudnto importa il conto ? 
La spesa non h grdnde. 
Vedete qudnto vi viene, per 

not, per i nostriservitori, 

e per i nostri cavdllL 
Facciano il conto loro 

stessi } e vedrdnno che 

sono sette scudi. 
Mi pdre che dornandidte 

troppo. 
Anzi lo fo a buonissimo 

mercdto. 
Qudnto ci fdte pagdr per 

il vino ? 
Cinque scellini la bottiglia. 
Portdtene un dltra, e 



D I ALO G-U'ES. 



357 



morrow morning we will 
pay you seven crowns, 
with breakfast included. 

Methinks the gentleman is 
not well. 

I am very well, but weary 
and fatigued. 

You must take courage. 

It would be better for me 
to be in bed than at 
table. 

Get your bed warmed, and 
go to bed. 

Bid my man come and un- 
dress me. 

He waits for you in your 
chamber. 

Good night, gentlemen, I 
wish you merry. 

Do you want any thing ? 

Nothing at all but rest. 

Order them to give us 

clean sheets. 
The sheets you shall have 

are whitened, and well 

aired. 
Let us be called to-morrow 

very early. 
I will not fail. Farewell, 

gentlemen ; good night. 

DIALOGUE XVIII. 



vi darhno domattina 

sette scudi, facendo perb 

colezione. 
Pare che 7 signbre non 

istia bene. 
Stb bene, ma sono affaticdto 

e stdnco. 
Bisogna fdrsi dnimo. 
Certo che sarei meglio in 

letto che a tdvola. 

Fdccia scalddre 7 suo letto, 

e vdda a dormire. 
JQite al mio servitbre che 

venga a spoglidrmi. 
L'aspetta nella sua cdmera. 

Buonanotte, signori,stiano 

allegramente, 
Avete bisogno di qudlche 

cosa? 
Di niente affdtto, che di 

riposdre. 
Date or dine che ci diano 

lenzuola pulite. 
he lenzuola che avrdnno 

sono pulite, e ben seccate. 

Fdteci sveglidre domdni a 

bubn bra. 
Sardnno serviti. Addio, 

signori, buona sera. 

DIALOGO XVIII. 



To mount on Horseback. 



Per montdr a Cavdllo. 



THIS horse I think looks 

very bad. 
Give me another horse, I 

will not have that. 
He cannot go. 



QUESTO cavdllo mi pare 

cattivo. 
Ddtemene un dltro, non 

voglio questo. 
Non pub cammindre. 

He 



358 



DIALOGUES. 



He is broken winded ; be is 

foundered. 
Are you not asbamed to 

give me sucb a hack as 

this? 
He has no shoes, he's 

pricktin his foot. 
You must lead him to the 

farrier's. 
He is lame, he is maimed, 

he is blind. 
This saddle will gall me. 
The stirrups are too long 1 , 

too snort. 
Let them out, then, shorten 

them. 
The girths are rotten. 
"What a wretched bridle is 

here I 
Give me my whip. 
Tie on my portmanteau, 

my cloak. 
Are your pistols loaded ? 
I forgot to buy powder 

and ball. 

Let us put on, let us get 

on faster. 
I never saw a viler beast. 

He will neither go forward 

nor backward. 
Let go the bridle a little. 
Hold the reins shorter. 
Spur him stoutly, make 

him go on. 
I may spur, but it is of no 

use. 
Alight, I will make him 

go. 
Take care he don't kick 

you. 



E s bolso f e rappreso. 

Non avete vergogna di ddr- 
mi una rozza di quella 
sbrte ? 

JET sferrdto, b inchioddto, 

Bisogna condiirlo dal ma- 

niscdlco. » 

Zoppica, £ stroppidto £ 

cieco. 
Quest a sella mi far a male, 
Le stdffe sono Iroppo 

lunghe, troppo corte. 
Allungdte le stdffe, tirdte 

su le stdffe. 
Le cinghie sono mdrcie. 
Che cattiva briglia ! 

Ddtemi la mia frusta. 
Attaccdte la, valigia, il 

mantello. 
Sono caricdte le sue pistole ? 
Mi sono dimenticdto di 

comprdr delta pblvere, e 

delle pdlle. 
Spronidmo, andidmo pill 

presto. 
Non ho mdi veduto unapiil 

cattiva bestia. 
Non vuol andar nk inndn- 

zi, ne indie tro. 
Rammolldtegli la briglia. 
Tenete le redini piil corte. 
Sprondte con vigore,fdtelo 

anddr inndnzi. 
Posso bene sprondre, non 

ne posso venir a cdpo. 
Scendete, che lo faro ben 

anddre. 
Badate che non vi tiri un 

cdlcio. 

He 



DIALOGUES. 



359 



He kicks, then, I fincL Tira cdlci dunque a quel 

che sento. 
See if I have not tamed Vedete se Vho saputo do- 
him. mdre. 



DIALOGUE XIX. 



DIALOGO XIX. 



To visit a Sick Person. Per visitdr un Ammaldto. 



HOW have you passed the 

night ? 
Very badly, I have net 

slept at all. 
I have had a fever all 

night. 
I have pains all over my 

body. 
Yon must be let blood. 
I have been bled twice. 

Where does your apothe- 
cary live ? 

What physician attends 
you. 

Go bid the surgeon come 
and dress me. 

I cannot imagine why the 
doctor does not come. 

We do not know what 
health is, till we are ill. 

You must have a good 
heart; it will be no- 
thing. 

My wound pains me ex- 
tremely. 

How much physic have 
you taken? 

I am tired of physic. 

I am fearful of being deli- 
rious. 

Drink some toast and 
water. 



CO' ME avete passdta la 

nbtte f 
Malamente, non ho dormU 

to niente. 
Ho avuto lafebbre tutta la 

notte. 
Sento dolori per tutta la 

vita. 
Bisognafdrvicavdrsdngue. 
M'e stdto cavdto sdngue 

due volte. 
Dove sta cli edsa il vostro 

spezidle ? 
Che medico viene a visi- 

tarvi ? 
Anddte a dir al cerusico 

che venga a medicdrrni. 
Non so per che 7 medico 

non viene. 
Non si sa cosa sia salute 

che qudndo si sta male. 
Bisogna fdrsi dnimo, non 

sard niente. 

Sento un gran dolore nella 

mia pidga. 
Qudnte medicine avete 

prese ? 
Sono stufo di medicine. 
Temo di dar in delirio. 



Bevete dequa cbtta. 



Take 



360 



DIALOGUES. 



Take nothing but broth. 
The doctor has ordered me 

some whey. 
I am not able to move. 
Give me a pillow. 
Put my bolster right. 

Draw the curtains. 

They want to bleed me in 

the foot. 
Every thing I take seems 

bitter to me. 
How my mouth's out of 

taste ! 
It is a long sickness. 

How tired I am of lying- 
in bed ! 

How happy are you in the 
enjoyment of health ! 

DIALOGUE XX. 

On Civility. 

I AM happy, sir, to meet 
you here, I intended to 
wait upon you. 

You do me too much 

honor, far beyond any 

thing I can possibly 

merit. 
But what is your pleasure, 

sir ? lay your commands 

on me. 
All [ wanted, sir, was to 

assure you of my most 

humble respects. 

And at the same time to 
beg a favour of you 



Nonpiglidte dltroche brodi. 
II medico m'ha ordindto 'I 

siero. 
Non mi posso muovere. 
Ddtemi un guancidle. 
Accommoddtemi il capez- 

zdle. 
Tirdte le cor tine. 
Mi vogliono cavar sdngue 

dalpiede. 
Tutto cib die prendo mi 

par amdro. 
qudnto sono svoglidto ! 

Questa e una malattia 

lunga. 
Qudnto sono stufo di star 

in letto I 
Bedto voi che stdte bene ! , 



DIAIOGO XX. 

Delia Civiltd. 

GO' DO, signore, di tro- 
vdrla qui per accidente, 
perchb contava di venire 
in questo momento da lei. 

V. S. mi fa troppa grdzia, 
ed un onore che non me- 
riio. 

Ma che comdnda, signore ? 
in che posso obbedirla ? 

Altro non voleva, padrbn 

mio, se non assicurdrla 

' de' miei umilissimi ri- 

spetti. 
E net medesimo tempo 
fdrle una preghiera ; cioe 
which 



DIALOGUES. 



361 



which was, to recom- 
mend me to your mo- 
ther's protection. 

You may rest assured that 
my mother and myself 
are entirely at your ser- 
vice. 

I may therefore expect 
your mother and you 
will, on this occasion, 
favour me with your in- 
terest? 

Make not the least doubt 
of that ; and believe 
me, that both my mo- 
ther and myself will re- 
ceive a particular plea- 
sure in serving you. 

By these noble expressions 
I am enabled to form a 
judgment of your gene- 
rosity. 

And from your cordial pro- 
fessions of friendship, 
1 perceive, that you are 
the worthy offspring of 
so worthy a mother. 

No more compliments, sir, 
I beg ; the events will 
afford you a sufficient 
proof of the sincerity of 
our friendship. 

I will be silent now, but 
when I have obtained the 
favour, I shall wait upon 
you with my thanks. 

Do me the favour to pay 
my respects to your 
mother. 



di raccommanddrmi alia 
protezione della sua si- 
gnora madre. 

Ella pub viver sicura che 
tdnto mia mddre, qudnf 
to vividmo dipendenti da* 
suoi cenni. 

Dunque posso sperare che 
ella e la sua signora md- 
dre mi favorirdnno in 
quest 1 occasione della 
loro efficacissima inter- 
posizione ? 

Non ne dubiti punto , signor 
mio, e creda pure che 
mia mddre edio, ci fare- 
mo un sensibilissimo pia- 
cere di servirla. 

Conosco in vero dalle nobih 
sue espressioni, quanta 
generosa sia : 

E ben m'accorgo, da suoi 
cordidli sentimenti, esser 
V. S. degno fig Ho della 
degnissima sua geni- 
trice. 

Non piu complimenti, si- 
gnbre ; gli effetti le da- 
rdnno prove sicure delta 
nostra servitil. 

Tacerb adesso ; ma, otte- 
nuto che avrb la grdzia, 
verrb da lei per ringra- 
ziarla. . 

Mi favorlsca di riverire 
distintissimamente per 
parte mia la sua signora 
mddre. 



DIALOGUE 



362. 



DIALOGUES. 



DIALOGUE XXI. 

Of the Seasons, Weather, 
&c. 

SPRING is of all seasons 

the most agreeable. 
Then every thing in nature 

smiles. 
The country looks like a 

vast garden. 
The meadows resemble a 

large green carpet. 
The weather is mild and 

serene. 
The air is temperate. 
Tke trees are full of leaves. 

The melody of the birds 
enraptures me. 

The weather is neither too 
hot, nor too cold. 

It is very healthy. 

Jill living creatures are 
then cheerful. 

Mature seems to revive. 

We have no Spring this 
year. 

The Spring is backward. 

It is like Winter. 

I am fond of the country 
in Summer-time, and of 
the town in Winter. 

We have a very hot Sum- 
mer. 

The heat makes me both 
dull and idle. 

The harvest will be very 
plentiful. 

It would be still more fer- 
tile, if we had a little 
a-ain.. 



DIALOGO XXL 

Delle Stagioni, del Tempo, 

«& 

LA primavera £ la piil 
grata di tutte le stagibni. 

Tutto ride allora nella ria- 
tura. 

La camp&gna e come un 
gran giardino. 

I prdti somigliano ad un 
gran tappeto verde. 

II tempo e molto dolce e 
molto sereno. 

Vdria e temper a ta. 

Gli dlberi sono coperti di 

fog lie, 
II canto degli uccelli m'in- 

namora. 
II tempo non e ne troppo 

cdldo, ne troppo freddo. 
E" molto sdno. 
Tiitti gli animdli allora 

sono pieni di vivacitd. 
La natiira par eke rindsca. 
Quest' anno non abbidmo 

punto primavera. 
La primavera e tardiva. 
E K un piccoV inverno. 
A r mo la campdgna nelV 

estate, e la citta nelV in- 
verno. 
Abbidmo una state hen 

cdlda. 
II calbre mi rende pesdnte 

e pigro. 
La raccolta sard m&lto ab- 

bonddnte. 
Lo sarebbe ancbr piit, se 

avessimo un pbco di piog- 

gia. 

There 



DIALOGUES. 



363 



There is a great plenty of 

fruit. 
We want a little rain. 

Rain would be very bene- 
ficial. 

They begin to cut down 
the corn. 

Summer is gone. 

Summer did not last long. 

Autumn has taken its 

place. 
Autumn is the season of 

fruits. 
Wine will be good this 

year. 
We shall drink good wine. 
The vines are very fine. 
They are loaded with large 

grapes. 
The days are very much 

shortened. 
We shall soon use candle 

at five o'clock. 
The mornings are cold. 
We shall soon be obliged 

to make a fire. 
Winter comes on. 
Winter draws near. 
The mornings are short. 
The evenings are long. 
The trees are divested of 

their leaves. 
Nature appears benumbed. 

Winter does not please me. 
It pleases nobody. 
Nevertheless it is pleasing 

to walk in the sun. 
It is soon night. 
The days are very short. 



V'eunagrandeabbonddnza 

difrutta. 
Abbidmo bisogno oVun po f 

di pioggia. 
La pioggia cifarebbe molto 

bene. 
Si comincia a taglidr il 

grdno. 

V Estate e passdta. 

U Estate non ha durdto 

molto. 
VAutknno ha preso il suo 

luogo. 

V Autxinno e la stacf'one 
deifriitti. 

II vino sard buono quest? 

anno. 
Beveremo buon vino. 
Le vigne sono belVissime. 
Sono cariche di grosse 

uve. 
I giorni sono molto accor- 

cidti. 
Accenderemo qudnto prima 

la candela a cinque ore, 
Le mattindte sono fredde. 
Saremo ben tosto costretti 

d' avere delfuoco. 
L'Inverno vitne. 
Ulnvirno s'approssima. 
Le mattindte sono corte. 
Le serdte sono lunghe. 
Gli dlberi sono spoglidti 

delle lorofoglie. 
La natura sembra intor- 

mentita. 
L'Inverno non mi pidce. 
Pidce a nessuno. 
Nulladimeno passeggidre 

al sole fa piacere. 
E" presto notte. 

1 giorni sono molto corti. 

2 We 



364 



DIALOGUES. 



We have scarcely eight 
hours day -light. 

Twilight does not make its 
appearance before seven 
o'clock in the morning. 

They light candles at five 

in the afternoon. 
It is not day-light the next 

day before eight o'clock. 

The days are somewhat 

lengthened. 
Thn.t foretells the return 

of Spring. 
Its return will exhilarate 

Nature. 

DIALOGUE XXII. 

Short and Idiomatic. 

WHENCE do you come? 

I come from the city, 
where I met your bro- 
ther. 

Whither are you going? 

Whither do you run so 
fast? 

Which way do you go? 

Which way do you take? 

Can I go with you ? 

Stay a little, I will go with 
you. 

Will you wait for me ten 
minutes? 

I shall be ready in less 
than ten minutes. 

Tell me where you are 
going. 

I am going into the coun- 
try. 

Come up in mv room, I 



Abbidmo appena otto ore 

di giorno. 
II crepusculo non comincia 

mdi ad apparire avdnti 

le sette ore delta mat- 

tina. 
A cinque ore pomerididne 

s'accendono le candele. 
II giorno non ritorna a 

comparire avdnti le otto 

ore del giorno dopo. 

I giorni sono alqudnto al- 
lungdti. 

Questo ci annunzia il ri- 
torno delta Primavera. 

II suo r it or no rallegrerd, la 
Natura. 

DIALOGO XXIL 

Corto ed Idiomatico, 

D'ONDEvieneUla? 
Vengo ddlla cittd, ove in- 
contrdi suo fratello. 

Dove va? 

Ove corre cosi infretta? 

Da che pdrte va ? 
Che via prende 1 
Posso io anddr con lei? 
Aspctti, che V accompa~ 

gnerb. 
Vorrebbe aspettdrmi died 

minuli? 
Sarb pronto in meno di 

died minuti. 
Mi dica ove va. 

Vddo alia campdgna. 

Monti nilla mia camera, ho 
have 



DIALOGUES. 



365 



liave something to tell 

you. 
Come in, and sit down. 
Do not you stir from 

thence. 
Stay there. 

Now, you may go out. 
Come down with me. 
Adieu, I wish you a happy 

journey. 
But, stop, come hither. 
Wait a little. 
Stop, that I may speak to 

you. 
Do not go so fast. 
You go too fast. 

What do you stop me for? 

Do not touch me. 

You make me lose my 

time. 
My time is too precious 

for me to mis-spend it. 
Leave that alone. 
Don t touch that. 
Touch nothing. 
Why do you recommend 

me that, Sir, or Madam ? 
Because I recommend it to 

every body. 
I am well here. 
I find myself very well 

here. 
The door is shut. 
Who has shut the door ? 
I can't open it. 
I can't turn the key. 
The lock is not good. 
Open the door. 
It is open. 
Shut the door. 
It is shut. 



qualche cosa da dirle. 

E'ntri, e si segga. 
Non si muova di Id. 

Stia Id. 

Pub usdre adesso. 

Scenda meco. 

Addio, le auguro un buon 

vidggio. 
Ma, aspetti, venga qui. 
Aspetti un pbco. 
Sifermi, ch'io le pdrli. 

Non vdda cost presto. 

V. S. va troppo di buon 

passo. 
Perchk miferma ella ? 
Non mi tocchi. 
Mi fa perder il mio tempo. 

II mio tempo e troppo pre' 
zioso per perderlo cosl. 

Ldsci quello. 

Non tocchi quello. 

Non tocchi niente. 

Perche mi r accomenda ella 
questo % 

Perche lo raccomdndo a 
tutti. 

Sto bene qui. 

Mi trovo molto bene qui. 

La porta e chiusa. 

Chi ha chiuso la porta ? 

Non posso aprirla. 

Non posso voltdr la chidve. 

La serratura non e buona. 

A'pra la porta. 

E x aperta. 

Chiiida la p orta. 

E s chiusa. 

Open 



366 



DIALOGUES. 



Open the window. 
Shut the window. 
What do you look for? 
What have you lost? 
If you have lost any thing, 

I have not found it. 
I never find any thing-. 
Speak loud. 
Speak distinctly. 
Open your mouth. 
You speak too low. 
Why do you speak so low? 
Do not be bashful. 
To whom do you speak? 
Do you speak to me? 
Say, is it to me that you 

are speaking? 
Speak to me, then. 
Speak to him, speak to her. 
Speak to us. 
Speak to them. 
Do you speak French? 
I speak it a little. 
What do you say ? 
Do you say any thing? 
I say nothing. 
What have you said? 
I have said nothing. 
I don't believe it. 
What does he say ? 
He says nothing. 
Does he not speak? 
I thought he had spoken. 
What has he told you? 
Has he told you nothing ? 
What does she say? 
She does not speak. 
What has she told you? 
She said nothing to me. 
Don't tell her that. 
I will tell it her. 
I won't tell it her. 



A' pro, lafinestra. 

Serri lafinestra. 

Che circa ella ? 

Che ha perdu to? 

Se ha per ditto qualche eosa 

io non Vho trovdta. 
Non trovo mai niente. 
Pdrli forte. 
Pdrli distintamente. 
A'pra la bocca. 
V. S. parla troppo pidno. 
Perchepdrla ellacosipidno 
Non sia timido. 
A chi parla ella ? 
Parla a me? 
Dica, e a me ch'ella pdrla ? 

Mi pdrli dunque. 

Gli pdrli, le parli. 

Ci pdrli. 

Pdrli loro. 

Pdrla ella Francese? 

Lo pdrlo un poco. 

Che dice? 

Dice ella qualche cosa? 

Non dico nulla. 

Che ha ella detto ? 

Non ho detto niente. 

Non lo credo. 

Che dice egli? 

Non dice nulla. 

Non pdrla egli? 

Credeva che avesse parldto. 

Che le ha detto 1 

Non le ha detto niente ? 

Che dice essa? 

Non pdrla. 

Che le ha essa detto ? 

Essa non m'ha detto niente. 

Non le dica questo. 

Glielo dirb. 

Non glielo dirb. 

Don't 



DIALOGUES. 



3m 



Don't tell it to them. 
Have you said that? 
No, I have not told it. 
If I had said it, I would 

not deny it. 
What are you doing ? 
I am doing nothing. 
What have you done ? 
I have done nothing. 
Have you done your work? 
No; I have been idle. 
Shall you soon have done? 
Yes, in half an hour. 
Have you not done ? 
I thought you had done. 
You go very slow. 
You are very long. 
What does he do ? 
Is he doing nothing? 
Has he nothing to do ? 
Has he no business ? 

How does he spend his 

time? 
What is she doing? 
What is her amusement? 
Is she fond of music ? 
Does she write ? does she 

read? 
Does she go to the play? 
What do you ask ? 
Do you ask for any thing ? 
Say what you ask. 
If you want any thing, 

speak. 
Answer me. 
Why do you not answer 

me? 
Are you afraid, or do you 

scorn to answer me? 
If you do not answer me, 

I'll speak to you no more. 



Non lo dica loro. 

Ha ditto quello? 

No, non Vho detto. 

Se V avessi detto, nan %* 
negherei. 

Che fa ella? 

Nonfo nulla. 

Che ha fat to? 

Non ho fdtto niente. 

Ha ella fdtto il suo lavorm 

No, sono stdto pigro. 

Avrd ella fnito presto f 

Si, in una mezz' bra, 

Non ha ellafmito? 

Credeva che avesse finite 

Va motto adagio, 

E s molto Unto. 

Che fa egli? 

Non fa egli niente t 

Non ha egli niente da faref 

Non ha egli alcuna occupa*- 
zidne ? 

Come pdssa egli H suo tem- 
po? 

Che fa essa? 

In che si diver te ? 

A'ma essa la musica f 

Scrive essa ? Legg' essarl 

Va essa al tedtro 1 
Che dimdnda ella ? 
Dimdnda ella qudlche cos^f 
Dica cib che dimdnda. 
Se ha bisogno di qudleks 

cosa, pdrli. 
Mi risponda* 
~Perchl non mi rispondef 

Teme, o sdegna ella di r*» 

spondermi ? 
Se non mi risponde, non le 

parlerb piu. 

DIALOGUE 



368 



DIALOGUES. 



DIALOGUE XXIII. 



DIALOGO XXIII. 



On Italy. 

Courage, Miss, we now 
are at the top of the 
highest of these hills. 

I assure you I can go no 
farther: my breath fails 
me : this ascent is too 
steep. 

Now that we are arrived, 
we may rest ourselves. 

Yes, let us rest, for I need 
it much. 

What do you think ? Did 
I not tell you that we 
should enjoy a beautiful 
sight ? 

O yes; I admire it much. 
What a fine landscape 
all around ! 

You, who have travelled 
in Italy, I suppose, must 
have found some charm- 
ing prospects in that 
country. — How long is 
it since you came from 
thence ? 

It is almost three years. 

Have you been always in 
the same place ? 

No : I have travelled con- 
tinually, from town to 
town. 

What do you think of that 
climate ? 

Charming! The country 
is so well cultivated, 
that it seems a collec- 
tion of gardens. 



SulF Itdlia. 

Coraggio, signora. sidmo 
gid alia cima delta piil 
alia di queste colline. 

Le assicuro che non ne 
posso piil ; mi manca il 
jftdto ; questa salita e un 
po' troppo erta. 

Ora che sidmo arrivate, 
possidmo riposarci. 

Si, riposidmoci pure, chk 
ne ho gran bisogno. 

CSsa le pare ? non le ho 
detto che si sarebbe go- 
duta una bella veduta. 

Oh, si; V ammiro molto. 
Che bel paese tutt* in- 
torno ! 

Ella, che ha viaggidto in 
Itdlia, avra, mi figiiro, 
veduto de bei colpi oV bc- 
chio in quel paese. — 
Quanto tempo e ch' ella 



Son quasi tre anni adesso. 

£ x stata sempre nello stesso 
luogo ? 

No: ho viaggidto continua- 
mente, ora in una cittd 
ed ora in un y altra. 

Che le pare di quel clima ? 

Stupendo ! Le campagne 
son cosi ben coltivdte che 
pdjon tanti giardini. 

I am 



DIALOGUES. 



369 



I am told, however, that 
there are many lands 
which lie uncultivated. 

Very true. The Italians 
have attended more to 
the embellishment of 
their cities, than to the 
cultivation of the coun- 
try. 

Without doubt there are 
very beautiful works of 
architecture ? 

Yes, all master-pieces : 
but uncultivated fields 
on all sides reproach 
the inhabitants with 
their indolence. 

By which road did you 
entei* Italy? 

By the road of Venice, a 
city which is exactly 
like an immense fleet, 
resting quietly on the 
midst of the waters, and 
to which there is no ap- 
proaching but by boats 
or ships. — In this re- 
spect, Venice is a unique 
city. 

In that town are there 
neither horses nor car- 



Mi si dice per altro che 
vi siano molti terreni 
incolti. 

Verissimo. Hanno gV Ita- 
Hani atteso piu alV ab~ 
bellimento delle cittd, che 
alia coltura delle cam- 

■ pagne. 

Vi sardnno bellissime opere 
d' architettura, mimmd- 
gino ? 

$i, tutti capi d'opera : ma 
le inculte campagne rim- 
proverano agli abitanti 
la loro injingarddggine. 

Da qual parte e ella entrd- 
ta in Italia? 

Dalla parte di Venezia, 
citta la quale e appunto 
come una vasta Jlotta, 
che si riposa tranquilla- 
mente sulle acque, ed a 
cui non si approda che 
per mezzo di barche, o 
navi. — Su questo punto, 
Venezia e unica. 



In questa cittd non vi sa- 
rdnno dunque ne cavdlli 
ne carrozze? 
Niente affatto. Le car- 
rozze dei Veneziani soil 
le gondole, e i gondolieri 
son uomini per lo piu, 
molto eloquently e i loro 
concetti son pieni di sali 
full 

* The Gondola is a flat and very long boat, which. 
goes only by oars. The boatmen are generally called 
Gondolieri ; but at Venice Barcarioli. 
n 5 



riages ( 
None at all. The car- 
riages for the Venetians 
are the Gondolas,* and 
the Gondoleers are ge- 
nerally very eloquent, 
and their repartees are 



370 



DIALOGUES. 



full of the most pleasing 
attic salt. 

Did you stay much at Ve- 
nice. 

Only five months, which 
is the time the carnival 
lasts, during which one 
goes always masked, 
with the greatest liberty, 
to all sorts of diver- 
sions. 

"Which is the principal 
place in Venice ? 

St. Mark's Place ; on the 
east side of which stands 
St. Mark's Church. 

Have you been at Bologna? 

Yes, madam, but first I 
passed through Ferrara, 
which in its walls will 
show you a fine and 
extensive solitude, al- 
most as much so, as the 
monument of Ariosto, 
who rests there. 

I have heard that at Bo- 
logna there is a greater 
abundance of provisions 
than in any other place 
in Italy. 

It is true, and for that 
reason it is named the 
Fat, There the sciences 
are familiar also to the 
fair sex ; and the conver- 
sation of the inhabitants 
is very entertaining. 

What road did you take 
on quitting Bologna? 

That of Rimini, along the 
sea-coast of the Adria- 
tic, as far as Ancona, 



argutissimi. 

E s stette molto tempo in 
Venezia ? 

Cinque mesi solamente ; 
quanto ivi dura il car- 
novate, in cui siva sempre 
in mdschera con la may- 
gior liberta ad ogni 

* sorta di divertimenti. 

Qual e la principal piazza 
di Venezia? 

La piazza di San Marco ; 
dalV lato orientale vi e 
la Chiesa di San Marco. 

E K stata mai a Bologna ? 

St, signora, ma son pas- 
scita prima per la cittd 
di Ferrara, che nel suo 
recinto le fara vedere 
una bella e vasta solitu- 
dine, silenziosa quasi 
quanto la tomba delV 
Ariosto, che ivi riposa. 

Ho sentito dire che in Bo- 
logna vi h piil abbon- 
danza di viveri che in 
qualunque altra parte 
d' Italia. 

F s vero, e per questo vien 
cognomindta la Grassa. 
Quivi le scienze sonfami- 
lidri anche al Ml sesso ; 
e la conversazione degli 
abitanti rallegra moltis- 
simo. 

Che strada ha ella preso 
partendo di Bologna? 

Quella di Rimini, lungo la 

riva del mare Adridtico, 

fino ad Ancona, e quindi 

and 



DIALOGUES. 



v 371 



and from thence to Lo- 
retto, a pilgrimage, once 
famous for the concourse 
of strangers, and the 
superb treasures with 
which its church was 
enriched. 

I should be very glad to 
hear something of Rome 
too. 

On returning from Lo- 
retto, crossing the Ap- 
penines, and a great 
number of small towns, 
we atlast arrive at Rome, 
formerly the queen and 
capital of the world. 

To see all the curiosities 
of that famous city, I 
have heard that it was 
necessary to employ a 
Cicerone : what does 
that mean ? 

It signifies, perhaps, 
speaker; because such 
persons accompany 

strangers every where, 
informing and explain- 
ing to them all that is 
to be seen. 

What was Rome, when the 
French took from it all 
that was most precious ? 

Exactly what it was before. 
The churches, the pa- 
laces,the public squares, 
the pyramids, the obe- 
lisks, the columns, the 
galleries, the fronts, the 
theatres, the fountains, 
the prospects-*, the gar- 
dens, all will show you 



a Loretto, pellegrindggm 
famoso una volta pel 
concorso del forestiiri, 
epei grandiosi tesori y de* 
quali era arriccMto ii 
sno tempio. 

Sarebbemi molto carosenitr 
anche qualche cosa di 
Roma. 

Parte.ndo da Loretto op- 
punto, attraversando gli 
Appennini e una molti- 
tiidine di piccole citta y si 
arriva finalmente a Ro- 
ma, anticamente regma 
e capitdle del mondo* 

Pe,r vedere tutte le rariti 
di questa famosa citify 
hosentito dire che bisogna 
far uso di un Cicerone : 
Cosa vuol egli dire ? 

Cicerone, vorrd dir parla- 
t6re, perche questi tali 
accompdgnano i Jhre- 
stieri da per tutto, infor- 
mctndoli,espiegando tor® 
quanto v e da vedere* 

Cosa e Roma, se i Fran- 
ce si le tolsero quanto ■< 
vera di piu prezioso f 

Intieramente quel cli era* 
prima. Le chiese? i 
palazzi, le piazz& pub- 
bliche, le pirdmidi y gli 
obelischi, le colonne 9 ie 
gallerie, le f accidie^ £ 
tedtri, le fontdne y le ve- 
dute t i giardini, tutm le 
indicherfc la grandezzm 
the 



372 



DIALOGUES. 



the grandeur of a city, 
which always was, and 
always will be, above 
others, universally ad- 
mired. 

Are the modern Romans 
as warlike as the an- 
cient ? 

Certainly not: but in the 
quarter of the town 
called Trastevere, we 
observe even now coun- 
tenances resembling the 
ancient busts. 

I have heard much about 
the famous Appian way ; 
does it still exist ? 

Yes, madam, but not in 
the same state it was at 
the time of the ancient 
Romans. 

Do you remember at what 
time that famous road 
was made 1 

It was in the year of Rome 
four hundred and forty- 
one, by order ,of Appius 
Claudius, the Censor, 
and it was one of the 
finest works of Roman 
magnificence. It leads 
from Rome to Brundu- 
sium at the farthest end 
of Italy towards the 
east. 

Doubtless you have tra- 
velled as far as Na- 
ples, one of the finest 
cities of Italy, as they 
tell me ? 

Yes, madam. And ex- 
actly by that famous 



(Tuna citta eke e stata 
simpre e sard, con pre- 
ferenza universale am- 
mirdta. 

So?io i nuovi Romdni gente 
bellicosa quanto gli an- 
tichi ? 

No sicuramente : ma nel 
quartiere detto Traste- 
vere osservansi anche 
oggijisonomie similiagli 
antichi busti. 

Ho sentito tanto parldre 
dellafamosa via Appia ; 
sussiste ancora ? 

Si, signora, ma non gid 
nel medesimo stato, in 
cui era al tempo de' 
Romdni. 

Si ricorda ella a qual tempo 
fu costruita questa fa~ 
mosa strada ? 

Fu neW anno di Roma 
quattrocento quarantu- 
no, per ordine del Cen- 
sore Appio Cldudio, efu 
uno de* piii bei lavori 
delta Romdna magnifi- 
cenza. Conduceva essa 
da Romajino a Brindisi 
all' estremitd delV Itdlia 
verso levdnte. 

Mi figuro cK ella dbbia 
viaggiato jino a Ndpo- 
li, cittd delle piil belle 
d' ltd Ha, a quel che mi 
d'icono ? 

Si, signora. Ed appunto 

per questa famosa via 

Appian 



DIALOGUES. 



373 



Appian road we arrive 
at that Parthenope, 
where rest the ashes of 
Virgil; upon which is 
seen a laurel growing, 
which cannot be better 
placed. 

Have you not been afraid 
of living in a city where 
they often feel earth- 
quakes, and where fire 
descends from the moun- 
tains? 

No, my dear ; it is not so 
terrible as it is said; nay, 
Mount Vesuvius on one 
side, and the Elysian 
fields, on the other, offer 
prospects which are very 
delightful. 

Did you ever see any 
eruption of this Vesu- 
vius ? 

Yes, I have seen it once 
in a great rage, and 
then I .saw it throw 
outtorrents of fire, which 
majestically spread over 
the country. 

They say, that the Neapo- 
litans are lively and 
witty, but too much in- 
clined to pleasure and 
idleness, to be what 
they might be. 

Very true, and certainly 
Naples might be an in- 
comparable city, if one 
did not meet a crowd 
of plebeians, otherwise 
called Lazaroni, who 
look like wretches and 



Appia si arriva a quella 
Partenope, ove riposano 
le ceneri di Virgilio, 
sulle quali vedesi germo- 
glidre un Iduro, che non 
pub esser meglio col- 
locdto. 
Non ha avuto paura di 
restdre in una cittd dove 
sisentonospesso tremuoti, 
e dove scende giu fuoco 
dalle montagne ? 

No, cara ; non e tanto 
orribile quanta si dice; 
anzi il Monte Vesuvio 
da un lato, e i Campi 
Elisj dalV altro, presen- 
tano dei punti di vista 
singolarissimi. 

Ha ella mai veduto nes- 
siina eruzione di questo 
Vesuvio ? 

Si, V ho veduto una volta 
in gran furore, e vidi al- 
lora rigurgitare dal suo 
seno torrenii di fuoco die 
maestosamente si span- 
devan per le campagne. 

Si dice che i Napoletdni son 
vivdcie spiritosi,?na tr6p~ 
po inclindti at piacere 
ed alV infinga.rddggine 
per esser quel che potreb- 
ton essere. 

Verissimo, e al ctrto sarebbe 
Ndpoli una impareggid- 
bile cittd, se non vi s' in-. 
contrasse una folia di 
plebei, altrimenti detti 
Lazzaroni, che hanno 
aria di ribdldi e di ma- 
thieves 






374 



DIALOGUES. 



thieves, and often are 
neither. 

But whilst we are speaking 
of Naples, we have left 
behind us Florence and 
the other cities of Tus- 
cany which are so cele- 
brated. 

We may easily go back 
and travel three hundred 
miles (for that is the 
distancebetween Naples 
and Florence), with the 
same facility that we 
have made the others. 

Tell me then something 
of Florence, which is 
acknowledged as the 
mother of the fine arts, 
and then I will not 
trouble you any more. 

On the contrary, you give 
me pleasure. Florence 
is not very large, but it 
is noble and beautifully 
adorned : every where 
are seen traces of the 
grandeur and the good 
taste of the Medicis. 

Let us depart, as I fear 
it will soon rain. 



landrini, senza esser so- 
vente ne Vunone V altro. 
Ma, mentre parlidmo di 
Ndpoli abbiamo lasciato 
indietro Firenze e le altre 
citta delta Toscanatanto 
rinomdte. 

Possiamofacilmente torndr 
indietro, e far anche 
trecento miglia (che 
tante ve ne sono da Nd- 
poli a Firenze) con la 
medesima Jacilitd che 
abbiamo fatto le altre. 

Mi dica dunque qualche 
cosa di Firenze, che vien 
riguardata come madre 
delle belle arti, e poi non 
le darb piii incomodo. 

Anzi mi del piacere. Fi- 
renzenonemolto grande ,, 
ma e gentile e vagamente 
adorna : quivi scorgonsi 
dappertutto le trace delta 
splendidezza e del buon 
gusto dei Medici. 

Partiamo adesso, per che 
temo che voglia piovere. 



A COL- 



( 375 ) 

A 

COLLECTION 

OF 

ITALIAN IDIOMS 

Which constitute the peculiar Delicacy of that 
Language. 



THE following Collection, which contains the true 
Idioms, or modes of speaking, with the turns of the 
Italian Phrases, divided according to their respective 
subjects, will be found useful. 

Examples. 

To Pray or Exhort. 

DEAR sir, do me that CA'RO signore, mifaccia 

favour, questo favore. 

Pray ! I conjure you, deh ! vi scongiuro. 

I pray you, deh ! vi prego. 

I beseech you, in cortesia. 

Do me the favour. V. S. mifavorisca. 



To express Civility. 

Your servant, sir, Servitor sao, signore. 

I am entirely your's, sono tutto suo. 

I thank you, la ringrdzio. 

You may depend upon me, fdccia capitdle della mia 

persona. 
See if it is in my power to veda signore se son capdce 
serve you. di servirla. 

Command 



376 



IDIOMS. 



Command me, 

Do what you please with 

your servant, 
I wait for your commands, 
Since you will have it so, 
You are the master, 
At your service, 
I am obliged to you, 



I am infinitely obliged to 

you, 
I will not be guilty of that 

fault, 
Away with these titles and 

ceremonies, 
It is my business to serve 

you, 
You are very obliging, 
I know not how to make 

a proper return for so 

many favours. 



mi comdndi. 

disponga del suo servitore, 

aspetto i suoi comdndi. 

poich? ella comdnda cost. 

V. S. £ padrone. 

al suo comdndo. 

resto con obbligo appresso 
a V. S., son obbligdto a 
V. S.,or lesono obbligdto, 

le resto infinitamente obbli- 
gdto. 

non faro questo manca- 
mento. 

lascidmo questititoli, queste 
cerimdnie. 

tocca a me di servirla. 

V. S. e molto cor tese. 
non saprei come contrac- 
cambidre tdnte bonta. 



To Complain, Hope, or Despair. 

How unfortunate am I, if Gudi a me, se questo e > 

that be ! 
Poor miserable creatures poverettinoi! 

that we are ! 



How unfortunate I am ! 

Ah cruel fortune ! 

To what are we reduced ! 

We are undone ; we are 

ruined ! 
There only wanted that ! 
We are at last come to it, 
That was the cause of my 

grief, 



Qsventurdto, sciagurdto, 
< infelice. 
{ disgrazidto me ! 
ahi sorte avversa ! 
a che sidm giknti ; ridotti, 

condotti ! 
sidmo morti ; spediti; rovi- 

ndtiJ 
questo ci mancdva ! 
ci sidm pur giknti. 
ecco cib che causava il mio 
dolor e. 

There 



IDIOMS. 



377 



There is what completes 

our ruin, 
That is the misfortune, 
It is really a pity, 
G the poor child ! or fellow ! 
1 am the most unfortunate 

of men ! 
What is to be done ? what 

shall I do ? what shall 

we do ? 
We must have patience, 
We must conform our- 

selvesto thewill of God, 

Nothing farther can be 

done, 
I hope that God, I hope 

that heaven, 
We must swallow that, 
We must die, sooner or 

later, 



ecco V ultima nostra rovina. 

questo t'l mdle. 

£ peccdto veramente. 

o povero figliuolo ! 

w son pur il re dei disgra- 

zidtu 
die s'hadafdre ? chefarb f 

chefaremo? 

bisogna aver pazienza. 

bisogna conformdrsi, biso- 
gna rimettersi alia vo- 
lontd di Dio. 

non si pub fdr dltro. 

spero in Dio, spero nel 

Ciilo. 
forza h die cela bevidmo. 
ad ogni modo bisogna mo- 



To express Affirmation, Consent, Belief, or Refusal. 



However it is true, 

It is but too true, 

To tell you the truth, 

Indeed it is so, 

There's no doubt of it, 

I believe it is, 

I believe not, 

I bet it is, 

I bet it is not, 

I think so, I think not, 

Not to tell an untruth, 

Nobody would say so ridi- 
culous a thing, 

Say likewise that the snow 
is not white, 

I can tell you it is a very 
fine one, 



E s pur vero. 

e pur troppo vero. 

a dirvi 7 vero. 

infdtti e cost, cosl k. 

non v e dubbio. 

credo di si, 

credo di no. 

scommetto di si. 

scommitto di no. 

penso di si, penso di no. 

sdlvo 7 vero. 

nihno direbbe una strava- 

gdnza simile, 
dite dnche die la neve non 

e bidnca. 
vi so dire eh 1 ella e bellis- 

sima. 

I would 



378 



IDIOMS. 



I would lay a wager, 

you jest, sir, 

1 speak in earnest, 

You have guessed rightly, 
I believe you, one may 

believe you, 
Let it be then, let it be so, 
You shall be satisfied, 
Softly, not so fast, 
Nor that neither, 
I would not give you a 

%, 
Yes, truly, 
They are trifles, 
Do not make me giddy or 

deaf, 
Get thee to bed. 



scommetterti qudlche eesa. 

oh burla, signore. 

pdrlo da senno. 

V avete indovindta. 

le credo, le si pub credere. 

sia dunque, cost sia. 
V. S. resterd soddisfatta. 
addgio, addgio, a belV dgio. 
ne mdnco questo. 
non ti darei unfico. 

veramente si, senza dubhio* 

sono inezie. 

non mi star ad introndre 

le orecchie. 
va a dormire. 



To Deny, 



I say not, 

It is not true, 

It is not so, it is so, 

Positively I will not, 

I jested, 

I did it only by way of 
jest. 



Dico di no, 
non £ vero. 
questo no, questo si. 
non voglio in cbnto alcuno* 
in nissun mbdo, in nissuna 
' maniera, 
io burldva. 
lofaceva per ischerzo* 



To Consult, 



What is to be done ? 

Whatcourse shall we take? 

Let's do so and so, 

Let's do one thing, 

It will be better that, 

Stay a little, 

It would be better that, 

Let me do, 

I had rather, 

Were I in your place. 



Che c'edafdre? 
che partito piglieremo f 
faccidmo cost, 
faccidmo una cosa, 
sard rneglio che. 
sdldo unpoco. 
sarebbe meglio che. 
lascidtefar a me, 
vorrei piuttbsto. 
sefossi in lubgo vostro. 



To 



IDIOMS. 



379 



To wish well to a Person. 



Heavens preserve you, 
I wish you every thing 

that's good. 
God assist you, 
God forgive you, 
God be with you, 
May you be happy, 
I wish you true content, 

God grant you all the pros- 
perity you desire, 

Till I see you again, 

I am your most humble 

servant, 
You are welcome, 
Well met, 
Much good may it do you. 



II Cielo vi gudrdi. 

vi auguro ogni vero bene. 

Iddio v' ajuti. 

Iddio vi perdoni. 

anddte con Dio. 

siate felice. 

vi duguro ogni maggior 

contentezza. 
prego Dio die vi conceda 

ogni prosperitd piU desi- 

derdbile. 
a rivederci, 
la riverisco. 

ben venuto. 
ben trovdto. 
buon pro vifdccia. 



To assert solemnly. 



Upon my faith, 
In my conscience, 
Upon my life, 
Upon my honour, 
Upon my word, 
Upon my credit, 
I swear, as I am a gentle- 
man, 
As I am an honest man, 

As I am a man of honour, 
By Jupiter ! 



Allafe, per miafe. 
in coscienza mia. 
per la vita mia. 
sulV onor mio. 
sulla mia parola. 
in fide mia. 
vi giuro da cavaliere. 

da uomo dabbene, dagalan- 

tuomo. 
da uomo onordto. 
per Bdcco. 



To Threaten or Insult. 



I will give you a Rowland 
for your Oliver, 



Ti rendero pan per focdc- 
cia. 

Let 



380 



IDIOMS. 



Let me alone, I will see 

whether 
You shall pay it me, 
I vow you shall repent it, 

I will give it you, go, 

You will laugh at me, 
but.... 

If you put me in a pas- 
sion, 

If I put myself in a pas- 
sion, 

Do not stun me, 

Do not wake a sleeping 
lion, 

Softly, softly, 

Woe be to thee, 

Thou shalt not escape me, 

Hold your tongue, don't 
speak, 

'Tis enough, 'tis sufficient, 

Thou art undone, 

In spite of thee, 



lascia far a me, ch* io 



tu mela pagherdi. 

giuro al mondo che tene 

faro pentire. 
te la darb, va. 
tu vuoi burldr meco, ma . . . 

se tu mi fdi anddr in col- 

lera. 
se mi cominciaafumdre. 

nonmi stuzzicdr le orecchie. 
non destdre 7 can che dorme. 

plan, pid.no. 
gudi a te. 

tu non mi seapperdi. 
non piu parole, tdci. 

hdsta, tanto bdsti. 

sei morto, va ! 

a tuo mdrcio dispetto. 



To Admire. 



O God ! Good God ! 

Heavens ! 
Jesus Maria ! 
Is it possible ? 

Who ever saw the like ! 
Who would have thought, 

believed, said ! 
See now a little ! 

1 was wondering, 

strange ! 

1 don't wonder, 



Dio mio ! Dio buono 1 

Oh Cielo ! 

Gesil Maria f 

possibile ! 

chi vide mdi cose simili ! 

chi V avrebbe pensdto, ere- 

duto, detto I 
guarddte un poco ! 
Io mi maraviglidvo. 
che maraviglia ! 
non mi maraviglio. 

How 



IDIOMS. 



3&I 



How can that be ? 
So goes the world. 



come pub essere ? com* £ 

possibile ? 
cost vdnno le cose del mbndo,, 

cosi val mbndo. 



To express Joy, 
What a pleasure ! 
What glory ! 
What joy ! 
How pleased I am ! 
O how happy am I ! 
O happy day ! 
What happiness ! 

how happy are you ! 

1 am sorry for it, 

That touches my very 

soul, 
It pierces me to the heart, 



or Displeasure. 
che gusto ! 
o che gloria ! 
o che allegrezza ! 
che contento I 'I mio ! 
o me felice ! 
o gibrno felice! 
o che for tuna ! 
bedto vbi! bedta lei ! 
mi dispidce, mi rincresce. 
mi dispidce fin alV dnima+ 

mi trafigge H cubre. 



To Reproach. 



Is this the way to deal with 
gentlemen ? 

Ought not you to be 
ashamed ? 

To aftront me thus I 

To such a man as I am. 

To me, is it not ? 

Do you deal thus ? 

Ah, is it so ? 

So, is it not? 

What a fine way of pro- 
ceeding ! 

O, that is fine ! 

You ought not to treat 
me thus, 

Do you think that is well ? 

We shall see immediately, 

What the deuce has he 
done ? 

What, obstinate still 1 



Cost si trdtta cq' galdnt- 

uomini ? 
non ti dovrestivergogndre? 

far a me questo affronto ! 
ad un pari mio. 
a me, eh ? 

a questo modo si trdtta ? 
a questo modo, eh ? 
cost, eh ? 
che bel modo di procedere ! 

bel modo certo ! 
non dovresti usdr simili ter- 
mini meco. 
pdrti che stia bene ? 
adesso si vedrd. 
che diamine hafdtto? 



ancor ostindto ? 



To 



382 



IDIOMS. 



To Call. 



Hark, 

Listen, 

Where are you ? 

Hark ye, 

Hear you, 

Hark ye a little, 

A word, 

I will speak but two words 

to you, 
Stay, 
Stay you, 



Ascolta, ascoltate. 

udite. 

dove sei ? dove siete ? 

sentite una parola. 

sentite, udite. 

sentite un poco. 

una parola. 

due parole solamente. 

ferrnati. 
fermdtevi. 



To express Uneasiness, Trouble, or Sorrow. 



I am sorry, 
Leave me alone, 

Prithee get thee gone, 
Do not stun me, 
Away, away, I beg of thee, 
Get you out of my sight, 
Get you gone from hence, 
Go, mind your own busi- 
ness, 
Do not stun me, 
Do not split my ears, 
How tiresome you are, 
You have told it me a hun- 
dred times already, 



Mi displace, mi rincresce. 
Idsciami in pdce or lascid- 

temi. 
va via, ti prego. 
non mi rompere 7 capo, 
via via, ti prego. 
levdtevimi oV inndnzi. 
levdtevi di quel, 
anddte afar ifdtti vostri. 

non mi stordire* 
nonm! introndr le orecchia. 
o che sei noioso ! 
me V hdi gid, detto cento 
volte. 



Cheer up, sirs, 

Come on, gentlemen, come 

on, 
Com,e, let's set to work, 
Let's give over, 



To s excite Courage. 

A'nimo, signori. 
su su, signori. 



or su, a noi, alle mdni. 
jinidmola. 



To 



IDIOMS. 

To Ask. 



383 



What news 1 

What's that ? 

Where are you going ? 

Whence come you ? 

What means ? 

To what purpose ? 

What do you think ? 

To what end ? 

Why do you make such 

a stir ? 
Tell me, may one know ? 
Tell me, may one ask 

you? 
Who has been so bold ? 



Che si dice di nuovo ? 

che'c' e f 

dove si va; dove anddte ? 

donde si viene ? 

che vuol dire ? 

a che serve $ 

che vi pare f 

a che proposito? a che fine ? 

a che ttinte storie y perchh 

tante smbrjie f 
ditemi se si pub sapere ? 
ditemi s' e lecito di doman- 

d&rvi ? 
chi ha avuto cota nto ardire ? 



To Forbid. 



Let that alone, 

Do not touch, 

Say not a word, 

Do not stir from hence, 

In the name of Heaven, 

do not do it, 
Have a care, 
Take care, 
I forbid it. 



Lasciate stare. 

non toccdte. 

non dir niente. 

non ti partir di quci, 

non lo fdre, in nome del 

Cielo. 
guarddtevi bene, 
avvertite. 
lo proibisco. 



IDIOMS, 8cC. OF DIFFICULT TRANSLATION, 

even with the help of a Dictionary. 

TO make an appointment DAR convegno, or dar 

with a person. posta ad uno. 

To have somebody in one's Averlo inpugno. 
power. 

He liked the proposal. La cosa gli entrb. 

He came to live with me Si allogb meco per servi- 

as a servant. tore. 

He 



384 



IDIOMS. 



He is a busy-body. 

We do not know what he 

means. 
He does not go there with 

a good grace. 
To propose deliberating 

upon an affair. 

To look tenderly. 

To play the fop. 

To play the prude. 

To new-cast a work. 

To owe some one a spite. 

At all hazards. 

To look big. 

His table was like a king's. 

With a firm look. 
At the worst. 
Make no ceremony. 
Without ceremony. 
Toleavesomebodypleased. 
Made with exactness. 
In spite of wind and tide. 
Keeping always on the 

left. 
It was unlucky for us. 
He has lost his reputation. 

To impose upon somebody. 

He asked him what was 
become of his friend. 

She is not handsome, but 
she is engaging. 

To drive some one mad. 

To rack one's brains. 

To make idle schemes. 
To cry bitterly. 



E" un commetti male,- or un 

teco meco. 
Non si sa dove ei voglia 

uscire. 
Non ci va di buone gambe. 

Intavoldre un affdre, or 
metterlo in cdmpo, or 
in trattdto. 
Far V occhiolino. 

it zerbino. 

la mononesta. 

Hifdre un libro di pianta. 
Star grosso con uno. 
A qualunque costo. 
Stare in sul grande, or 

grandeggidre. 
La sua tdvola era messa 

alia redle. 
Con viso fermo. 
Alia piii trista. 
Non fate complimenti. 
Cost alia domestica. 
Lascidre a bocca dolce. 
Fatto a sesta. 
Adispettodimareedivento. 
Tenendosi sempre verso la 

sinistra. 
Piglioccene male. 
Ha perduto la sua ripuia- 

zione. 
Get tar della polvere negli 

oceki. 
Domandollo che fosse dive- 

nuto V amico suo. 
Non ebella, ma ha un certo ' 

g Motto. 
Fare uscire uno dei gdn- 

gheri, 
Lambiccdrsi, or stilldrsi U 

cervello. 
Far dei lunar j. 
Pidngere amaramente. 

I think 



IDIOMS, 



38£ 



I think you will suit him. 

Dinner is served up. 

We diverted ourselves very 

well. 
My honour is at stake. 
He drew his sword. 
Secretly. 

We must come to blows. 
He is near fifty. 
Let us see how he sets 

about it. 
To clear the house. 

I am out of the scrape. 

He is a sad fellow. 

Make a fair copy. 

It will be the worst that 
can happen to me. 

At the worst, I risk no- 
thing. 

I will hold out. 

Go and clean my room. 

To find it difficult to live. 

To play the devil. 

He (or it) is good for no- 
thing. 

He run away as fast as he 
could. 

He suspects my intention. 

He looks like an honest 
man. 

It did not stop there. 

We (or) they spoke of 
you. 

I shall be much obliged to 
you. 

She has no pretensions to 
learning. 

He never gives over speak- 
ing. 

This gown fits you well. 



Credo che f accidie per luu 

II pranzo e in tdvola. 

Ci sidmo ben ben diver titu 

Si tratta del mio onore. 

Snudb la spada. 

Di soppidtto. 

Bisogna venire alle mam. 

Manca poco ai cinquanta. 

Vedidmo come ci si accinge. 

Piglidr la grandta, or 

manddr via tutti di casa~ 
Sono fuori d' impdccio. 
E y un cattivo soggettq. 
Mettetelo in pulito. 
Gli e ilpeggio che mi possa 

toccdre. 
Al peggio anddre non ar- 

rischio nulla. 
Mi terrb fermo. 
Anddte a r asset tar la mia 

stanza. 
Stent dre a vivere. 
Fare il didvolo. 
Non val niente affdtto. 

Si salvo a tuite gambe. 

D libit a del mio disegno. 
Ha ciera di galantuomo. 

La cbsa non fini cos). 
Si parlb di voi. 

Ve ne sono molto tenuto, 
or ven saprb grado. 

Ella non ha pretensione 
alle scienze. 

Non la Jinisce mai. 

Cotesta veste vi sta bene. 
S She 



386 



IDIOMS. 



She is a woman of quality. 

A gentleman. 

It was very near. 

What do you asE for this ? 

Let it be as it will. 

Face to face. 

His head is giddy. 

It is a pun. 

He is going to meet him. 

I guessed his meaning. 

He began to write. 

He whispered to me. 

This is one of your tricks. 

To drink a good draught. 

In a moment. 

At once. 

"Without doubt. 

When the time is over. 

Once more. 

To get out of the scrape. 

He delivered me from 

prison. 
He draws no profit from 

it. 
To draw a bill of exchange. 
He fired a shot. 
He pointed at me. 
There is a villain, 
He pumped him (or) her. 

He was born lucky. 

He looks with an ill eye 

upon me. 
He spoke at random. 

Without coming to vio- 
lence. 

It (or) he is just what I 
want. 



E s una dama,OY una signora 

di rango. 
Un ubmo di garbo. 
C e mancdto poco. 
Cosa pretendete di questo ? 
Comunque siasi. 
A quattr occhi. 
Gli gira il capo. 
E s un bisticcio. 
Va ad incontrdrlo. 
Penetrdi le sue idee. 
Si mise a scrivere. 
Mi disse alV orecchio. 
Questo e una de' vostri 

tratti. 
Fare una gran bevuta* 
In un istante. 
Ad un tratto. 
Senzafallo. 
Dopo ilfatto. 
Ancora una volta. 
Cavarsi d' impdccio, or 

uscir d' intrigo. 
Mi ha liberato daprigione. 

Non ne ricdva utile. 

Far tratta. 

Sparb un archibugidta. 

Mi accennb. 

Ecco un avanzo diforca. 

Gli cavb di bocca il se- 

greto. 
E K nato vestito. 
Mi g%iarda bieco. 

Egli par lava sconsiderata- 

mente. 
Senza ventre afatti. 

Gli I appunto quel che mi 
ci vuole. 

It 



IDIOMS. 



387 



It was in vain for me to 

tell him. 
He lives by his wits. 

To-morrow is a fast-day. 

They are slight of hand 

tricks. 
He writes a good hand. 
He put his hands upon him. 
To treat with severity. 
He has a great wish to do 

something. 
1 made a mistake. 

He has spent all his pro- 
perty. 
It is a good league off. 

Do you think it good 1 

Make him come up. 

He becomes always more 

idle. 
He is equal to him in rank. 
I think it is true. 
To conduct one's self well. 
He will not yield to him. 
She is perfectly well made. 
He put the garrison to the 

sword. 
On the way. 
Do not take it ill. 
He took that seriously. 
You take my words ill. 

He has been made a doctor. 

He knows how to take 

things as they come. 
Mind it well. 
Take care of yourself. 
Take care of him. 



Ebbi be I dirgli, 

E s uno scroccone, or bin- 

dolo. 
Domdni e giorno di di- 

giuno. 
Son qiuochi di mdno. 



Ha un buon caratfere. 
Gli pose le mdni adosso. 
Trattdr sever amente. 
Gli pizzicano le mdni. 

Ho preso sbdglio, ho preso 

un equivoco. 
Ha consumdto tutto il suo. 

E K una buona lega lontdno 

di qui. 
Vi sembra biwno ? 
Fatelo venir su. 
Diventa sempre piic pol- 

trone. 
Va del pari con lui. 
Lo credo vero. 
Regoldrsi bene. 
Non gliela cederd. 
E s fatta apennello. 
Mise la guarnigione a fil 

di spa da. 
Strada facendo. 
Non lo prendete a male. 
La prese sul serio. 
Interpretdte male le mie 

parole. 
Ha preso la laurea dotto- 

rdle. 
Sa pig liar il mondo com' e' 

viene. 
Baddteci bene. 
Baddte a voi. 
Guarddtevi ben da lui. 
i 2 He 



388 



IDIOMS. 



He was lucky in having 
been warned. 

He took leave. 

He dismissed him. 

He is much interested in it. 

Come, decide. 

The business is settled. 

He flatters him shame- 
fully. 

As rich as they are. 

Come friend, give me your 
hand. 

I whispered to him. . . . 

Gently, if you please. 

No, I won't give it up. 

It is ready money. 

He is rather tipsy. 

They ran after him. 

This sets him (or) it off a 
little. 

My late father. 

Persons of quality. 

He is a military man. 
His hair is well dressed. 
He has three rooms on a 

floor. 
Is the cloth laid ? 
He is clever in every 

thing. 
The business goes on well. 

You are well disposed to 



Let him say what he will, 
I do not believe it. 

They think only of mis- 
chief. 



Buon per lux d'essere stato 

avvertito. 
Prese commidto. 
Lo licenzib. 
Vi s'interessa motto. 
Via, decidete. 
L' affdre e fin'ito. 
Lo adida sfacciatamente. 

Ricchi come sono. 

Animo, amico, ddtemi la 

tndno. 
Gli dissi sotto voce. 
Adagio, in grdzia. 
No, non vo' darla vinta. 
Ella e bro lampante. 
E K un po' brillo. 
Gli si messero dietro. 
Questo lo rimette un pbco. 

II defunto mio padre. 

La nobilta, or le persone 

di rango. 
E K un militdre. 
E s benpettindto. 
Ha tre stanze per piano. 

jET apparecchidto ? 
E x dbile in tutto. 

V affdre e ben incammi- 

ndto. 
Siete in buona disposizio?ie 

di parldre. 
Dica pur quel che vuole, 

non ne credo niente. 
Non pensano che a far del 

male. 



A COL- 



PROVERBS. 



389 



COLLECTION 



RACCO'LTJ 



ITALIAN PROVERBS. PROVERBJ ITALIA'NL 



TO expect, and not to 
come ; to lie in bed, 
and not to sleep ; to 
serve, and not to please, 
are three things enough 
to kill one. 

A house built, and a vine 
planted, are never sold 
for what they cost. 

There is no one happy in 
this world, but he that 
dies in his cradle. 

To travel post requires 
the purse of a prince, 
and the strength of a 
porter. 

It is better going alone, 
than in bad company. 

Misfortunes and pleasures 
never come single. 

Fine to fine is not good to 
make a lining. 

Love and greatness will 
not associate. 

A good stomach needs no 
sauce. 

We think no more of vows, 
when the danger is past. 

Old sin, new penance. 

The beast once dead, the 
venom dies also. 



ASPETTA'RE e non ve- 
nire; star in letto e non 
dor mire ; ben servire, e 
non gradire, son tre cose 
da morire. 

Cdsa fdtta, vigna pbsta, 
non sipaga qudnto costa. 

Nel mondo non e felice, se 

non quel che mubre in 

fa see. 
La pbsta e una spesa da 

principe, ed un mestiere 

da facchino. 

JE X meglio anddr solo, che 

mal accompagndto. 
Le sciagure, c le allegrezze 

non vengono mai sole. 
D'uro con duro, non fa buon 

muro. 
Amor, e signoria non vo- 

glion compagnia. 
Appetito non vuol salsa. 

Passdto 'IpericolOj gabbdto 

7 sdnto. 
Ficcdto vecchio, penitenza 

nuova. 
Morta la bestia, morto 7 

veleno. 

Fair 



390 



PROVERBS. 



Fair words are very power- 
ful, and cost nothing. 

A hundred pounds of sor- 
row will not pay an 
ounce of debt. 

He who goes to bed with- 
out his supper, will toss 
and tumble all night. 

Ravens never pluck out 
each other's eyes. 

Tell me your company, 
and I shall know what 
you do. 

He has fallen out of the 
frying-pan into the fire. 

Every bird likes his own 
nest. 

A barking dog never 
bites. 

Do not wake a sleeping 
lion. 

He who is fonder of you 
than usual, either has 
cheated you, or designs 
it. 

To ask better bread than 
is made of corn. 

To ask a landlord if his 
wine is good. 

Good wine needs no bush. 

It is better one's foot slip 

than one's tongue. 
Wine brings out the 

truth. 
He who buys land, buys 

trouble. 
He who cheats is often 

cheated. 
Fair words and foul play 

cheat both the young 

and the old. 



Un bel parldre, di bocca 

assdi vale, poco costa. 
Cenf ore di malinconia 

nonpagdnoun quattrtno 

di debit o. 
Chi vd a letto senza cena, 

tutta la notte si dimena. 

Corvi con corvi non si c&- 

vclk nidi gli bcchi. 
Dimmi con chi vai, saprb 

quel chefai. 

E" caduto ddlla padella 

sulla brace. 
Ad ogni uccello suo nido 

par bello. 
Can che abbdja non mbrde. 

Non destdre il can che 
dorme. 

Chi ti fa carezze piii che 
suole, o t'ha inganndto, 
o inganndr ti vuole. 

Cercdr miglior pane che di 

fromento. 
Domandar alV oste se ha 

buon vine. 
Al buon vino non bisogna 

frdsca. 
E s meglio sdruccioldr coi' 

piedi che colla lingua. 
II vino e una mezza cor da. 

Chi compra terra, compra 

guerra. 
Chi cerca d'inganndr, resta 

inganndto. 
Belle 'parole, e cattivifdtti 

ingdnnano savj, e mdtti. 

There 



PROVERBS. 



391 



There are no roses with- 
out thorns. 

With artifice and deceit 
they live half the year ; 

With deceit and artifice 
they live the other half. 

He who serves the public, 
obliges nobody. 

A good friend is worth a 
hundred relations. 

Fevers in autumn are long 
or mortal. 

To sell bladders for lan- 
terns. 

Every country has its 
fashions. 

To mind two things at 
once. 

To be on both sides. 

To have tw*o strings to 

one's bow. 
To cheat two at once. 

We must love the dog for 
the sake of its master. 

We must hide nothing 

from our physician and 

our lawyer. 
Short reckonings make 

long friends. 
Eggs of an hour, bread of 

a day, wine of a year, 

and a friend of thirty. 
Bread that sees, wine that 

sparkles, cheese that- 

weeps. 
A salad ought to be well 

salted, to have a little 

vinegar, and plenty of 

oil. 



Non si pub aver la rosa. 

senza le spine. 
Con arte e con ingdnno, si 

vive mezzo V anno ; 
Con ingdnno e con Arte, si 

vive V dltra parte. 
Chi serve al comune, non 

serve a nissuno. 
JET meglio un buon amico 

eke cento par enti. 
Febbre autunndle, e lunga, 

o mortdle. 
Vender lucciole per lan- 

terne. 
Tal paese, tale usdnza. 

Aver un occhio alia pen- 
tola, e 7 dltro alia gdtta. 

Dar un colpo alia butte, ed 
un dltro al cerchio. 

Tener il piede in piu stdffe. 

Pig liar due colombi ad una 
Java. 

Bisogna portdr rispetto al 
cane per amor del pa- 
drone. 

Al medico ed all' avvocdto 
non tener e' I ver celdto. 

Pdtto chidro, amico cdro. 

Vbvo d' un! ora, pane d' un 
di, vino d* un anno, 
amico di trenta. 

Pan che veda, vin die salti, 
formdggio che pidnga. 

Insaldta ben saldta, poco 
aceto, bene oglidta. 



It 



392 



PROVERBS. 



It is better to be a bird in 
a field, than in a cage. 

A bird in the hand is 
worth two in the bush. 

It is better to be friends at 
adistance, than enemies 
near at home. 

When it is fair weather, 
take thy cloak ; when it 
rains, wear it if you 
please. 

If you would be revenged 
of your enemy, govern 
well yourself. 

He is a fool, who gives a 
quail ^nto a sparrow- 
hawk in keeping. 

A solitary man is either a 
brute or an angel. 

Men meet, when moun- 
tains cannot. 

Do not judge by laws or 
writ, before thou hearest 
the one and the other 
party. 



JE X meglio esser uccello di 

campdgna, che digdbbia. 
E s meglio unuovo oggi, che 

una gallina domdni. 
E K meglio esser amici da 

lontdno, che nemicid'ap- 

presso. 
Ne di stdte, n£ d' interna, 

non anddr senza ?~naji- 

tello. 

Vuoi far vendetta del tuo 
nemico, governati bene. 

Stolto e chi da la qudglia 
in gudrdia alio spara- 
viero. 

L 1 uomo solitdrio e o bestia 

dngelo. 

Gli uomini s' incontrano e 

le monldgne nb. 
Non giudicdr per leggi ne 

per carte, se non ascolti 

1 'una e V altra parte. 



A COt.- 



( 393 ) 



A COLLECTION 



DIVERTING STORIES, &c. 



Parini* ammaldto. 

ESSE'NDO Parini ammalato, vennero due medici 
a visitarlo; diceva 1'uno e duopo dar tuono alia fibra; 
I* altro conviene scemarle tuono ; ed egli costoro ad 
ogni raodo mi vo^-liono far morire in musica. 



Lo stesso Parini nel Municipio di Milano. 

Esse'ndo Parini membro del Municipio di Milano, 
acremente un giorno perseguitava coll' indagiue certi 
quali, cheaveano rubato a nome dello stesso Municipio, 
e trovandovisi, chi con ismoderato garrito cercava di 
travolgere la verita, l'arguto Pietro Verridisse a Parini," 
II ladro alia fine siete vol che qui rubate il soggetto 
d'una bella sutira. 



Di Papa Giulio Secondo. 

Un nobile Romano, amico intrinseco di Papa Giulio 
Secondo, gli disse che si lagnavano molto che sua 
santita. attendesse con troppo calore alia guerra contro 
i Francesi : giacehe Iddio gli aveva data le chiavi 

della 

* One of the most celebrated and modern Italian 
Poets. 

s 5 



394 ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 

della sua chiesa, per serrare le porte della discordia, 
ed aprire quelle della reconciliazione. II Papa rispose 
al nobile: Quei tali che dicono simili cose, non sanno 
forse che san Pietro e san Paolo sono stati compagni, 
& ambidue principi della chiesa. I predecessori raiei 
si sono serviti della chiave di san Pietro, adesso io 
voglio adoperare la spada di san Paolo. II nobile 
replico : Vostra santita sa pero che Cristo disse a 
Pietro : rimetti la tua spada nel fodero. E vero, sog- 
giunse '1 Papa, ma ricordatevi che Cristo non lo disse 
prima, ma dopo che Pietro ebbe ferito. 



Menecrdte Medico. 

Vene'ndo fatto al Medico Menecrate di guarire 
certe infermita disperate ed essendo per cio appellato 
Giove, con gran fasto faceva uso egli stesso di questo 
nome, e osato avendo di scrivere ad Agesilao in questa- 
maniera : Menecrate Giove al re Agesilao salute. Age- 
silao gli rescrisse in. quest' altra : 11 re Agesilao a 
Menecrate sanita. 



Socrate. 



Socrate percosso nella pubblica piazza d' un calcio 
d' un mascalzone, e stimolato a dimandarne eastigo, 
rispose di non poterlo fare, perche i calci dell' asino 
non erano stati mai chiamati in giudizio. 



Marc' Antonio e Botton da Cesena. 

Ave'ndo maestro Marc' Antonio composto una molto 
lunga commedia, e di varii atti, Botton da Cesena gli 
disse, A far la vostra commedia bisogneranno per lo 
apparato quanti legni sono in lschiavonia. Rispose 
Maestro Marc' Antonio : E per l'apparato della tua 
tragedia basteran tre solamente. 

II 



ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 395 



II Predicatore di poca Memoria. 

Un Predicatore dovendo fare il panegirico di S. 
Luca, subito che fu in pulpito, perde talmente la me- 
moria, che non pote dir altro che il testo del suo 
discorso, Lucas medicus salutat vos, Luca medico vi 
saluta. Ripete tarite volte queste parole, senza potersi 
ricordar d'aitra cosa, che gli uditori stanchi s' alzarono 
tutti e nelP andarsene, tino di loro disse al Predicatore : 
Padre, salutatelo altresi da nostra parte. 



II Missiondrio. 

Un giorno predicava in una parrocchia di Madrid un 
celebre Missionario ; tutti gli uditori piangevano, meno 
uno ; della qual cosa meravigliatosi il predicatore, a 
quello si rivolse dicendogli, e perche nonpiangitu? 
Fadre rispose: Io non devo piangere; questa non e la 
mia parrocchia. 



I)' uno Scultore. 

Disegna'ndo i consoli di Firenze di far una statua, 
chiamarono Donatello, famoso ed eccellente Scultore, 
il quale inteso *1 disegno, domando per la fattura cin- 
quanta scudi. I consoli senza proferirgli nulla, la 
diedero a far ad un aitro Scultore mediocre. Costui 
fatta che F ebbe, il meglio che seppe, ne domando 
ottanta scudi. Maravigliatisi i consoli, gli dissero che 
questo era un burlarsi di loro, giacche Donatello, 
nomo tanto illiistre, non aveva domandato per farla 
piu di cinquanta. In somma non potendosi accordare, 
rimisero la causa ad esso Donatello, il quale sentenzio 
che i consoli dovessero pagare settanta scudi. Del che 
alteratisi, ricordandogli ch'egli medesimo di cinquanta 
s'eravolutocontentare; Donatello graziosamente disse; 
e vero, mi potevo contentare, perche avrei fatto la 
statua in meno d' un mese : ma questo povero uomo 
che a pena potrebbe esser mio scolare, vi ha lavorato 
piu di sei mesi. Cos! Donatello si vendico argutamente 
dell' ingiuria ricevuta dai consoli. 

Amor 



396 ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 



Amor Materno. 

Nell* anno 1259 fu al comune del popolo di Firenze 
presentato un bellissimo e feroce leone, il quale era 
^inchiuso nella piazza di S. Giovanni. Avvenne, che 
per malaguardia di colui che il custodiva, usci il leone 
dalla sua stia, correndo per la terra, onde la terra fu 
cornmossa a paura. Accade che arrivo in orto 
S. Michele, e quivi prese un fanciullo, e tenealo fra le 
branche. Udendo cio la madre del fanciullo, che non 
avea pin che lui, si mosse come disperata con gran 
pianto, scompigliata, e ando incontro al leone, e prese 
il fanciullo dentro le branche del leone, e menolsene di 
che il leone ne alia madre, ne al fanciullo non fece 
nulla novita, se non che la riguardo, e stettesi fermo 
nel luogo suo. II fanciullo vivendo fi\ poi chiamato 
Orlanduccio del Leone. 



Una Parola mat intesa. 

Gli O'ddi fuorusciti di Perugia, e capi della parte 
avversa a Baglioni, entrarono una notte colle genti 
loro furtivamente in Perugia, e con tanto spavento de' 
Baglioni, che gia perduta la speranza del difendersi, 
cominciavano a mettersi in fuga ; e non dimeno 
perderono per uno inopinato e minimo caso quella 
vittoria, che noo poteva torre piu loro la possanza 
degli inimici, perche essendo gia pervenuti senza 
ostacolo a una delle bocche della piazza principale, e 
volendo uno di loro, che a questo efietto avea portato 
una scure, spezzare una catena, la quale secondo 1' uso 
delle citta faziose, attraversava la strada, impedito a 
distendere le braccia da' suoi medesimi, che calcati gli 
erano intorno grido con alta voce Addietro, accioche 
allargandosi gli dessero facolta di adoperarsi, la qual 
voce replieata di mano in mano, da chi lo seguitava, e 
intesa dagli altricomeineitamento afuggire,messe senza 
altro impedimento in fuga tutta la gente; non sapendo 
alcuno da chi cacciati, o per qual ragione si fuggissero, 

dal 



ORE DI RECREAZIONE. 397 

dal qual disordine preso animo, e rimessisi insieme gli 
avversari, fecero di loro grandissima carneficina. 



Astuzia d'un Sacerdote egizidno. 

I Caldei si elessero per Tcklio il fuoco, e dicevario 
tutti gli altri Dei essere di nessun valore appresso di 
lui, ed i Sacerdoti portando quelloper i paesi circonvi- 
cini, voleano che gli altri Dei gli dessero tributo, o 
venissero seco in prova, laonde tutti perdevano ; 
perciocche essendo i simulacri d'oro, d'argento, di 
bronzo, di legno, o d'altro, venivano dal fuoco consu- 
mati e guasti; talche lo Dio clei Caldei era il piu ricco 
per le molte ofierte, che gli erano fatte, ed il piu 
potente per le moite vittorie avute, che altro Dio che 
fosse in quei tempi. Ultimamente portando il loro 
Dio, se ne andarono i Caldei in Egitto per far la guerra 
agli Dei del paese. La qual cosa considerando un 
Sacerdote del Tempio di Canopo, e che egli era in 
pericolo di perdere, 1'ofTerte le ricchezze e la riputa- 
zione, s'immagino una bella astuzia per difendersi dal 
fuoco dei Caldei. Egli prese un grande iimaffiatojo 
di terra, di quelli che son pieni di piccioli pertugi, con 
cui s'innafnano i giardini, ed empitolo d'acqua, colla 
cera rituro i pertugi, e di sopra 1' adorno e dipinse di 
pii\ colori, accomodandovi la testa d' un vecchio simu- 
lacro di Menelao. Venendo poi i Caldei, ed accostando 
il loro Dio a quello di Canopo liquefacendo il fuoco la 
cera, usci fuori Y acqua in gran copia, talmente che 
spense tutto il fuoco, e cosi rimase vittorioso il 
sacerdote di Canopo, e d'allora innanzi quel loro Iddio, 
il quale avea spento il fuoco e superato lo Iddio de 
Caldei, onorarono. 



A SHORT 



( 398 ) 

A SHORT 
INTRODUCTION 

TO 

ITALIAN POETRY. 



THE Origin of the Italian Language and Poetry, 
together with a Treatise on the different Species of 
Italian Verses and their Combinations. 

HAVING row to speak of the different measures 
adopted in Italian Poetry, it may not be displeasing to 
the reader to find here some idea of the origin of the 
Italian Language and Poetry. It is, according to the 
most general opinion, derived from the alteration and 
total corruption of the Latin idiom, and the immediate 
co-operatiou of the dialects of the barbarians, who 
successively inundated Italy. There have also been 
many words obtained from the Celtic languages of 
Italy, the ancient Teutonic, the French, the Spanish, 
and some few from the Arabic, and the Greek. 

Various documents prove, that at the commencement 
of the eleventh century, the writers of Italy began to 
make use of the new language in poetry. It was then 
called Romance, to indicate that it was spoken in the 
country of the ancient Roman empire. 

The Tuscan people were the first who began to use 
the new language of Italy, and the first works composed 
in it were poetic. It was indeed poetry itself which 
freed the nation from barbarism, and at the same time 
the Italian Language from obscurity. 

The commerce of the thirteenth century had raised . 
Italy to the apex of greatness. Its riches were 
immense, and the beneficence of princes toward 
literary men and artists were suitable to their power. 
At this fortunate period, Dante, Boccaccio, and 

Petrarch, 



ITALIAN POETRY. 399 

Petrarch, with their divine talents, and their learning 1 , 
raised the Italian Language, Poetry, and Literature, to 
the highest pitch of perfection. 

The Commedia of Dante, which is a treatise of 
profound philosophy, has long preserved the highest 
rank in the most enlightened Universities. The 
Decameron of Boccaccio became the model of the 
Italian language from its elegance of style, and 
purity of diction. At last the Canzoniere of Petrarch 
revived the Muses of Pindar, of Anacreon, of Catullus, 
and of Ovid. 

These few remarks may suffice, with respect to the 
origin of the Italian language and poetry ; as a longer 
examination would exceed the necessary limits in 
treating an object entirely devoted to literature. 

I. Of Italian Versification. 
Italian verse consists of a certain number of 
syllables and rhyme. But they have also their blank 
verse. 

There are eleven syllables in the heroic verse, which 
is used in Epic poems, theatrical pieces, sonnets, &c. 
Varcar ti converra Vondafunesta. 
Beside the heroic, there are lesser verses, consisting 
•of ten syllables, as 

Sazierete la fame de corvi 
Mercenarie falangi di schiavi. 
Or of nine, as 

Ben mi rivolgo al dolce loco. 
Or of eight, as 

I pensier mandiamo in bando. 
Or of seven, as 

Innamorato spirto. 
Or of six, as 

Lefede giiirdta. 
Or of five, as 

Chi pub mirarvi. 
Or of four, as 

In due modi. 
The Italian verse, of whatever number of syllables it 
consists, has always the accent on the penultima, ex- 
cept it be what they call versi sdruccioli, or slippery 

verses 



400 A SHORT INTRODUCTION 

verses, which are accented on the an tepen ultima ; but 
then they have a syllable more than the ordinary sort 
of verse. Thus if the ordinary sort of verse has eleven 
syllables, the sdrucciola belonging to it has twelve ; as, 

V arco ripiglia ilfanciullin di Venere. 
If the ordinary verse has eight syllables, the sdrucciola 
will have nine, and so on. 

The verso tronco is of ten syllables ; as, 

Monte Pulciano d' ogni vino e il Re. 
The heroic verse, or that of eleven syllables, is 
divided into two parts ; the place where this division 
is made, is called the cesura. The cesura is not always 
equal, that is, the first hemistich or half verse does not 
always contain the same number of syllables; for this 
depends gu the predominating accent, as the cesura is 
always at the end of the word on which you find this 
accent. Now this accent may be either on the fourth, 
or on the sixth syllable of the verse; which occasions 
several sorts of cesuras ; the best are those on the 
fifth or seventh syllable. 
On the fifth. 

Giunger gia pdrmi, e dirle, o fida Clori. 
On the seventh. 

Qudlche nuovo sospiro, imparerdi. 
Whenever a word ends with a vowel, and the next 
word begins also with a vowel, this admits an elision, 
as 

Presso e il di, che cangidto H destin rio. 
Sometimes a concurrence of syllables forms but one 
syllable, whether in the same, or in different words, as 
Disse, e ai venti spiegb vele, ed andonne. 
Diphthongs form but one syllable in the middle of a 
verse, and two in the end, as 

Ed io del mio dolor ministro fui, 
where io and mio form each but one syllable, and fui, 
two. Whereas in the following verse, 

Favola fui gran tempo, onde sovente, 
fui, on account of its being in the middle of the verse, 
makes but one syllable ; so in the following verse, 

Odo 7 risponder dolce : Tirsi mio : 
mio, as being at the end of a verse, makes two syllables. 
This is to be particularly observed. 

Verses 



to ITALIAN POETRY. 401 

Verses consisting of ten syllables are accented on 
the third and sixth syllables, as 

Almo sole die in Citlo risplendi 
Col settemplice rdggio fecondo. 
Verses of nine syllables have the accent on the 
third and sixth, as 

Col nemico sul mo.r s'affr6?ita. 
Or on the second and fifth, as 

Non vi vede ognora ascoso. 
Or on the fourth and sixth, as 

Hen mi rivolgo al do Ice loco. 
Verses of eight syllables are accented on the third, as 
Qudndo accende un nobil -petto 
JE' innocente un puro affetto. 
Verses of seven syllables, besides the accent on the 
penultima, have not other regular accents ; but if the 
accent is on the fourth, the verse will be harmonious, as 
Ninfa di corferoce. 
Verses of six syllables are accented on the second, as 
Delle Api ingegnose 
II Hondo licor. 
Verses of five syllables have the accent on the first, 
sometimes on the second, or on the third, as 
Sei fra i perfetti 
Bei bamboletti. 
Verses of four, three, and two syllables, are accented 
on the penultima. 

II. Of the Rhyme. 

The Italian rhyme begins from the vowel of the 
penultima : hence amdnii does not rhyme to dirti, but 
to sernbidnti, and so on. 

The Italians do not rhyme, as we clo, in couplets, but 
make several combinations of their rhymes : and 
these form their different compositions in verse. 

III. Of the different Compositions in Verse. 

The Italians compose their heroic poems of stanzas 
of eight verses, which they call octaves. In these 
the first verse rhymes to the third and fifth, the 

second 



402 A SHORT INTRODUCTION 

second to the fourth and sixth, and the seventh to the 
eighth; as, 

Cinta di vivofonte, onde discende 
Onda mormoratrice in suo vidggio, 
S' erge foresta, che del sol contende 
Nell' dnno ardente ivi V entrdta al rdggio ; 
Doppio sentier che s'interseca fende 
In qudttro pdrti il bell* orror selvdggio 
E di belV deque cristalline e chidre 
Ha ciascuna nel grembo un picciol mdre. 

Chiabre'ra. 

There are other sorts of stanzas, called sestine, con- 
sisting of six verses, the first of which rhymes to the 
third, the second to the fourth, and the two last to 
each other; as, 

Dive che 'I sdcro ed onordto fonte 
Dove gloria si beve in gudrdia avete, 
Dal vostro ombroso e solitdrio monte 
Un tempio meco afabbricdr scendete, 
Un tempio ov y immortal poscia s' adori 
Questa donna de* Gdtti, e dea de cori. 

Mari'no. 

The Italians have a third manner of disposing their 
heroic verse, which they call terza rima, or terzetti. 
They put three verses in every stanza, the first and 
third rhyme to each other ; the second rhymes to the 
first and third of the second stanza ; and the second of 
the second stanza, to the first and third of the third 
stanza. But at the end of the canto or poem there 
must be a stanza of four verses, in order that every 
verse may have its rhyme, as 

Gli dnni son al voldr si lievi e presti, 

Ck 7 alfine dltro non e ck' un volver oV occhi 
Questo che poi vi lascia offiitti e mesti. 

Perb pria che V offesa in noi trabbechi, 
Armdte 7 petto incontro dlla fortuna, 
Che vdno h V aspettdr che H colpo scocchi. 

Cosi 



to ITALIAN POETRY. . 403 

Cost dicendo, al raggio de la luna, 
Che gli Scchi miferia, rivolse il viso, 
Poi salutb le stelle ad una ad una; 
E lieto se n andb nel paradiso. 

Sannazar. 

There are also terza rima in verse, called sdruc- 
violo, or slippery ; as, 

Quantunque Opico mio sii vecchio, e c&rico] 
Di senno e di pensier, cKin te si covano, 
Deh pidngi or 7neco, e prendi il mio rammdrico : 

Nel mbndo oggi amid non si trovano, &c. 

A fourth manner of arranging heroic verse in Ita- 
lian, is what they call qudrta rima, when the first 
rhymes to the fourth, and the second to the third. 

Example. 

Contra gli assdlti di Nettun spumdnti, 

Qudndo Austro a sdegno ed Aquilone il move ; 
E contra i lampi e 'Ifulmindr di Giove 
Ha V ingegno 7iiortdle, onde si vdnti : 

Ma contra i cblpi dellafdlce oscura. 
Che drma di mbrte V implacdbil mdno, 
Invdno ingegno s' affatica, invdno 
Stdme di vita contrastdr procura. 

Chiabre'ra. 

But the Sonnet is the favourite composition of the 
Italians : it is divided into two quaderndrj, consisting 
each of four verses ; and two terzetti, each of three 
verses. The two quaderndrj are ranged two different 
ways: the first and most usual is, when the first 
rhymes to the fourth, fifth, and eighth, and the second 
to the third, sixth, and seventh. The other, less 
usual, when the first rhymes to the third, sixth, and 
eighth ; the second to the fourth, fifth, and seventh. 

There are also two different sorts of arrangement, in 
regard to the two terzetti, or the six last verses ; one 
is, to make the three verses of the first terzetto, of three 

different 



404 A SHORT INTRODUCTION 

different rhymes; and the last terzetto answering to 
those three rhymes in whatever order you choose ; as 

Solo e pensoso i piic deserti cdmpi 
Vo misurdndo a pdssi tdrdi e lenti, 
E gli occhi porto per fuggire inienti, 
Dove vestigio umdn V arena stdmpi. 

A'ltro schermo non trovo, die mi scdmpi 
Dal manifesto accorger de le genti : 
Perche ne gli dtti d' allegrezza spenii, 
Difuor si legge, com' io dentro avvdmpi. 

Si ch'io credo omdi, die monti e pidgge, 
EJiumi e selve sdppian di che thnpre 
Sia la mm vita, ch? e celdta altrui. 

Ma pur si dspre vie, ne st selvdgge 

Cercdr non so, che amor non venga sempre. 
Ragiondndo con meco, ed io con lui. 

Petrarca. 

The other arrangements of the two terzetti are, to 
make the first verse rhyme to the third and fifth, and 
the second to the fourth and sixth ; as, 

Qudndo il grdn Scipio dalV ingrata terra 
Che gli fit pdtria e 7 cener suo non ebhe 
Esule egregio si pariia, qual debbe 
Uom che in suo cor m.dschio valor rinserra; 

Quei che seco pugndndo andar 'sotterra, 
Ombre famose onde si Italia crebbe, 
Arser di sdegno, e il duro esempio increbbe 
Ai Genj delta pace e delta guerra. 

E seguirle fur viste in atto altero 
SulV indegna fremendo ojfesa atroce 
Le virtu antiche del Latino Impero. 

E allor di Stige sulla nigra f bee, 
Di lui che V Alpi superb primiero 
Rise V invendiedta ombra feroce. 

Frugoni. 

In the two preceding sonnets the two quademdrj are 
arranged alike, that is, the first verse rhymes to thefourth, 
fifth, and eighth. We shall give here an instance of 

the 



to ITALIAN POETRY. 405 

the other sort of quaderndrj, where the first verse 
rhymes to the third, sixth, and eighth ; the second to 
the fourth, fifth, and seventh. 

Example. 

Gittb Vinfame prezzo e disperato - 
U albero ascese il venditor di Crista, 
Strinse il laccio, e col corpo abbandonato 
DdlV irto ramo penzolar fu visto. 

Cigolava lo spirto serrato 

Dentro la strozza in suon rabbioso e tristo t 
E Gesii bestemmiava e il suo peccato, 
Cti empia Vaverno di cotanto acquisto. 

Sboccb dal varco alfin con un ruggito, 
Allor giustizia Vafferrb, e sul monte 
Nel sangue di Gesil tingendo il dito. 

Scrisse con quello al maledetto infronte 
Sentenza di mortal piunto hifinito 
E lo piombb sdegnosa in Acheronte. 

Monti. 

There are likewise other compositions, consisting of 
an intermixture of larger and smaller verses, which 
maybe infinitely varied ; some stanzas consisting of 
twelve or thirteen, some of seven, eight, or eleven 
verses. The most common are of twelve, which fre- 
quently consist of two sorts of verse, •viz. those of 
eleven or seven syllables. 

Sul punto di mia morte, 

O'cchi, d'un gudrdo non mi sidte avdri, 

E sia di quei che sono a voi men cdri. 

Con solltcito studio amor non terga 

I rdi di sua beltdte, 

E col riso, e col gioco, e col diletto, 

Ne di quella dolcezza egli V asperga, 

Ne di quella pietdte, 

Che alirki ragiona ifreddi cor nel petto ; 

Solo un giro negtttto, 

Ne flan morendo i miei sospir amdri. 

Chiabr. 
There 



406 A SHORT INTRODUCTION 

There is also a singular beauty in stanzas of seven, 
eight, or eleven verses ; examples of which may be 
seen in the Lyric Poets. Chiabre'ra particularly 
abounds with a great variety in his canzonette. 



Examples. 

O'cchi armdti di splendore, 

O'nde ambre 

Per bedre drde le genti, 

Se la gioia del mirdrvi 

Giusto pdrvi 

Che costdr debba tormenti. 



Or, 

Poiche amor fra V erbe e ifibri 
Tra dolcezze, e lieti cdnti, 
Per temprdr del cor gli ardori, 
Scorti avca gli accesi amdnti ; 
Ne' sembidnti 

Lieto dncJi ei, con lor sasside 
SulV erbetta, e, scherza e ride. 



Or, 

Core diselcealpestra, 

Fervido ad innasprir gli altrui tormenti, 

Con nuova crudeltdte ! 

Omdi stdnca e mia destra 

In sulla lira ad iterdr gli accenti 

U'si a sveglidr pietdte ; 

Ne femminil beltdte 

Spera, pregio sembidnte in Elicona, 

Se di quei vdghijior tesse corona 

Per tuo gentil valore. 



Or, 



TO ITALIAN POETRY. 407 

Or, 

Vdni desiri 

Co* rei martiri 

Non piil ci stieno intorno ; 

Che pompa, ed ostro ? 

II viver nostro 

Puossi chiamdr un giorno. 

Cingiti Clori di bel mirto adorno, 

JE di rubini 

Cospergi i crini, 

Via piu die lucid' oro, a mirdr cdri. 



Or, 

Qadndo V A'lba in oriente, 
L' dlmo sol s'appresta a scorgere, 
Su dal mdr la veggidm sorgere, 
Cinta in gonna rilucente, 
O'nde lam-pi si diffondono, 
Che le stelle in cielo ascondono. 

The Italians are celebrated for their madrigals 
and epigrams, which are composed of all sorts of 
verse, long and short, according to the fancy of the 
poets ; as, 

Di se stessa invaghita, e del suo hello 
Si specchidva la rosa 
In un limpido e rdpido ruscello 
Quando oV ogni suafoglia 
Un aura impetuosa 
La bella rosa spbglia. 
Cddder nel rio le spoglie ; il riofuggendo, 
Se la porta correndo, 
E cost la beltd, 
Rapidissimamente — oh ! Dio sen va. 

Lemene. 
Fdbio, 



408 A SHORT INTRODUCTION 

Fdbio, se qudndo in pubblico ragioni 
Una spietdta tosse ti molesta, 
Non ti prenda timor de J tuoi polmoni, 
Che la sede del male t nella testa, 

Bertola. 

They have also their verso sciolto, or blank verse, of 
eleven syllables, where the measure is observed, with- 
out rhyme, as the following : 

Ahi, die al solo pensdrlo entro le vene 
Difoco un fiiime mi trabocca, e tuiti 
Tremano ipolsi comhaituti e Vossa ! 

Monti. 

This verse is used in tragedy, and often in Epic 
poems. 

IV. Of the Poetical Licences. 

The Italians use very great liberties in their versifi- 
cation ; not only their poets adopt several words which 
are not allowed in prose, but they likewise make fre-' 
quent use of elisions ; these elisions are introduced for 
the sake of variety, but are never permitted at the end 
of a verse. 

They not only drop the final vowel before words 
beginning with a vowel, but even before those that 
commence with a consonant, as jier draconi, for fieri ; 
and sometimes they drop the consonant that precedes 
this final vowel animdi for animdli. 

They likewise lengthen a great many words that 
have a grave accent on the final, by adding an e or an 
o, as jft/e for fu,feo fovfe', poteo for poih. It is custo- 
mary with them also to have recourse to contractions 
and syncopes, as porre for po?iere, ponno for possono, 
vo' for vogliono, u for 6ve, and others, which may be 
learnt by 1 reading the Poets. They write some words 
in a particular manner, as sui for suoi nut for noi, 
ferute for ferite, faro for faro, spene for speme, &c 
In short, there is hardly a language, not even except- 
ing the Greek, that uses more figures or changes of 
words in their poetry, than the Italian. 

A COLLECTION 



( 409 ) 
A COLLECTION 

OF 

BEAUTIFUL PASSAGES 

FROM THE 

MOST CELEBRATED ITALIAN POETS. 

CE'RBERO 
- Descritto dal Dante. 

Ce'rbero, fiera crudel, e diversa, 
Con tre gole, caninamente latra 
Sovra la gente che quivi e so'ramersa. 

Gli occhi ha vermigli, e la barba unta ed atra, 
E'l ventre largo, ed unghiate le mani : 
Grafria gli' spirti, gli scuoja, ed isquarta. 



Bellezza di Laura. Petrarca. 

In qual parte del Ciel, in quale idea, 

Era T esempio, onde natura toise, 

Quel bel viso leggiadro, in che ella volse, 

Mostrar quaggiu, quanto lassu potea ? 
Qual nirifa in fonti, in selve mai qual Dea, 

Chiome d'oro si fino all' aura sciolse? 

Quando un cor tante in se virttrti accolse? 

Benche la somma e di mia morte rea. 
Per divina bellezza indarno mira, 

Chi gli occhi di costei giammai non vide 

Come soavemente ella gli gira. 
Non sa come amor sana e come ancide, 

Chi non sa come dolce e]la sospira, 

E come dolce parla, e dolce ride. 

T La 



410 



CONCETTI POETICI. 



La Vergine Ariosto. 

La verginella e simile alia rosa, 

Che 'n bel giardin, sulla nativa spina, 

Mentre sola e sicura si riposa, 

Ne gregge ne pastor se le avvicina ; 

L' aura soave e 1' alba rugiadosa,_ 

L' acqua, la terra al suo favor s'inchina 

Giovani vaghi e donne innamorate, 

A'mano avere e seni e tempia ornate. 

Ma non si tosto: dal materno stelo 
Rimossa viene, e dal suo eeppo verde, 
Che quanto avea dagli uornini, e dal cielo 
Favor, grazia, e beliezza tutto perde, 
La vergine che '1 tior, di che piu zelo 
Che de' begli occhi e della vita aver de, 
Lascia altrui corre, ii pregio che avea innanti, 
Perde nel cor di tutti gli altri amanti. 



Soliloquio d' Amarilli, nel Pastor Fido di Guari'ni. 

O Mirti'llo, Mirtillo, anima mia, 
Se vedesti qui dentro, 
Come sta il cor di questa 
Che chiami crudelissima Amarilli; 
So ben, che tu di lei 
Quella pieta che da lei chiedi, avresti. 
O anima in amor troppo infelice ! 
Che giova a te, cor mio, l'esser amato ? 
Che giova a me l'aver si caro amante ? 
-Perche crudo destino, 
Ne disunisci tu, s'amor ne stringe ? 
E tu perche ne stringi, 
Se ne parte il destin, perfido amore ? 
O fortunate voi fere selvagge, 
A cui 1'alma natura 
Non die legge in amar se non d'amore. 
Legge umana inumana, 
Che dai per pena dell' amar la morte! 



CONCETTI POE'TICI. 411 

" Se'l peccar e si dolce, 

" E'l non peccar si necessario, o troppo 

" Imperfecta natura, 

** Che repugni alia legge ! 

il O troppo dura legge, 

" Che la natura offendi !" 

Ma che? poco ama altrui, chi'l morir teme ; 

Piaeesse pur al ciel, Mirtillo mio, 

Che sol pena al peccar fosse la morte! 

Santissima onesta, che sola sei 

D'alma ben nata inviolabil Nume, 

Quest' amorosa vo^lia, 

Che svenata ho col f'erro 

Del tuo santo rigor, qua! innocente 

Vittima a te consacro. 

E tu, Mirtillo, anima raia, perdona 

A chi t'& cruda sol dove pietosa 

L'esser non puo : perdona a questa sola 

Ne' detti, e nel sembiante 

Rigid a tua nemica ; ma nel core 

Pietosissima amante. 

E se pur hai desio di vendicarti, 

Deh ! qnal vendetta aver puoi tu maggiore 

Del tuo proprio dolore ; 

Che se tu se' '1 cor mio, 

Come sei pur malgrado 

Del cielo, e della terra, 

Qualor piangi, e sospiri, 

Quelle lagrime tue sono il mio sangue, 

Que' sospiri, il mio spirto, e quelle pene, 

E quel dolor che senti, 

Son miei, non tuoi tormenti. 



II Mattino. Pari'ni. 

Sorge il mattino in compagnia dell' alba, 
Innanzi al Sol che di poi grande appare, 
Su l'estremo orizzonte a render liete 
Gli animali e le piante e i campi e i'onde. 
Allora il buon villan sorge dal caro 
Letto, cui la fedel sposa e i minori, 

t 2 Suoi 



412 CONCETTI POETIC1. 

Suoi figlioletti intiepidir la notte ; 

Poi sul collo recando i sacri arnesi, 

Che prima ritrovar Cerere e Pale, 

Va col bue lento innanzi al campo e scuote, 

Lungo il picciol sentier da' curvi rami 

II rugiadoso umor, che, quasi gemma, 

I nascenti del Sol raggi rifrange. 

Allora sorge il fabbro, e la sonante 

Officina riapre, e all' opre torn a 

1/ altro di non perfette. ... 



A Dante* Alfie'ri. 

O GRAif padre Alighier, se dal ciel miri, 
Me tuo discepol rion indegno starmi, 
Dal cor traendo profondi sospiri, 
Prostrato inanzi a' tuoi funerei marmi. 

Piacciati deh! propizio ai be' desiri 
D'un raggio di tua luce illuminarmi ; 
Uom che a primiera eterna gloria aspiri, 
Contro invidia e vilta de' stringer Y armi ? 

Figlio i le strinsi, e assai men duol, ch' io diedi 7 
Nome in tal guisa a gente tunto bassa 
Da non pur calpestarsi co' miei piedi ! 

Se in me fidi, il tuo sguardo a che s' abbassa? 
Va, tuona, vinci : e se fra' pie' ti vedi 
Costor, senza mirar sovr' essi passa. 



Descrizione cC un Crisio legato alia Colonna. 
Madrigale. 

Di marmo e la Colonna, 
Di marmo son gli empj ministri, e rei ! 
E tu pure, Signor di marmo sei ! 
Marmo ella e pur natura, 
Marmo quei per durezza, 
Tii marmo, per constanza e per fortezza ; 
Ed io, che di pietade, e di cordogiio 
Spettator ne rimango, 
Marmo son, se non piango. 

Begli 



CONCETTI POE'TICI. 413 



Begli Occki. Guari'ni ne suoi Madrigdlu 

O'cchi, stelle mortali, 
Ministri cle' miei mali ; 
Che'n sogno anco mostrate, 
Che'i mio morir bramate ; 
Se cbiusi m' uccidete, 
Aperti che farete ? 



Amore. Lui'gi Alama'nni. 

Chi vuol dar legge all' amoroso nodo 
Non sa ben qual sia la sua natura : 
L'un d'tina cosa, ed io dell' altra godo, 
Chi am a lo spirto, e chi sol la %ura, 
Chi diletta la vista, chi F udire, 
Chi sf6s:a 6°;ni desir solo in servire. 



Amdnte Perfido. Ariosto. 

L'am ante per aver quel che desia, 
Senza guardar che Dio tutt'ode, e vede, 
Avviluppa promesse, giuramenti ; 
Che tutti spargon poi per l'aria i venti. 



Amdnte Timido. Ta'ssoS 

Ei che modesto e si, com' essa e bella, 
Brama assai, poco spera, e nulla chiede, 
Ne sa scoprirsi o non ardisce : ed ella 
O lo sprezza o no 'i vede, o non s'avvede, 
Cos! sin' ora il misero ha servito, 
O non visto, o mal noto, o mal gradito. 



La 



414 CONCETTI POETICI. 

La Lusinga. Bondi. 

Da gran tempo i mali miei, 
Col morir tinito avrei ; 
Ma la credula speranza 
Mi tien vivo, e sempre dice, 
Che men triste ed infelice, 
Sara forse il nuovo di. 

Ma il dj nuovo, che succede 
Infelice ancor mi vede, 
E la speme che mi avanza 
Non mi lascia nel patire, 
Ne il coraggio di morire 
Ne* di vivere cosi. 



Donna Timida. Ariosto. 

Con cor tremante, e con tremante piede 
Fugge la tapinella, e non sa dove : 
In cio ch'intorno ascolta, in cio che vede, 
Vede di nuovo orror sembianze nove ; 
Lieve arboscel, cui debil aura fiede, 
Lieve foglia che cade, o che si scote, 
Di terror doppio, il dubbio cor percote. 



Guari'ni nel Pastor Fido. Atto I> scena 4. 

La misera tacendo 
Per soverchio desio lutta si strugge ; 
Cosi perde belta, se'l foco dura, 
E perdendo stagion, perde ventura. 



II Simulacro d' 'Amove Scolpito da Canova. 

GlIERARDO DE ROSSI. 

Fu bugiardo, o Canova il tuo scalpello, 
Effigiando Am ore 

Se avesse il volto si gentile e bello, 
Avria si crudo il core ? 

GiuSco 



CONCETTI POETICI. 415 



Giuoco di Parole. 

Nel mio primiero ci si vede cbiaro, 
Gurva il secondo e piu nol troverai ; 
L* intero e sacrossanto a tutti caro, 
Ne parlan sempre e non si vede mai. 



Amore assomiglidto all' A'pe. Ta'sso nelt Aminta, 

Pi'cciola e 1' A'pe, e fa col picciol morso 
Pur gravi, e pur moleste le ferite ; 
Ma qual cosa e piu picciola d'amore 
Se in ogni breve spazio entra, e s'asconde 
In ogni breve spazio? or sotto all' ombra 
Delle palpebre, or tra minuti rivi 
D'un biondo crine, or dentro le pozzette, 
Che forma un dolce riso in bella guancia; 
E pur fa tanto grandi, e si mortali, 
O cosi immedicabili le piaghe. 



Guarini nel Pastor Fido. Atto 4, scena 2. 

Se le parole mie 
Fosser anime tutte, 
E tutte al vostro onore 
Oggi le consecrassi, alle dovute 
Grazie, non basterian di tanto dono. 



Donna Picciola. Ta'sso. 

Picciojle'tta "Isabella, 
Picciola o grande nominar degg' io 
La tua belta en' innamma il mio desio? 
Che picciola la fronte, il crin, le ciglia, 
Piccioletta hai la man, la bocca, il piede ? 
I passi, le fattezze, i bei sembianti 
Gli abiti, il velo, i guanti, 



La 



416 CONCETTI POETICI. 

La cameretta, il letticeiuol, la sede ; 

Ma pur gran maraviglia! 

Fra tante cose picciole si vede 

Che quel che rimirando io sento al core, 

Non e picciolo ardore. 



Descrizione d'un Cespuglio. Ariosto. . 

E / cco non lungi un bel Cespuglio vede, 
Di spin fioriti, e di vermiglie rose, 
Che de le liquid' onde a specchio siede, 
Chiuso dal sol fra 1'alte querce ombrose : 
Cos! voto nel mezzo, che concede 
Fresca stanza fra l'ombre piu nascose, 
E la foglia coi rami in modo e mista. 
Che'l sol non v'entra, non che minor vista. 
Bentro letto vi fan tenere erbette, 
Ch'invitano a posar chi s'appresenta. 



A Diana. Fan ton i. 

Ve'rgin dall' arco nella caccia forte 
Face del Cielo, quando Febo dorme, 
Speme di spose, che rapisci a morte, 

Diva triforme. 
A te consacro questo pin, che inalza 
Fra 1'ardue nubi la chiomata fronte, 
E i negri lecci della curva balza 

Figlia del monte. 
Strage del gregge, e dei pastor spavento, 
Schiera s'annida d'afFamati lupi, 
Che van predando cento capre e cento 

Per queste rupi. 
Le mai di vita il braccio tuo le priva 
Se nelP insidie tu a cader gli adeschi, 
Appender voglio alia magion votiva, 

Gli orridi teschi. 
II 



CONCE'TTI POETICI. 417 



II Sogno. VlTTORELLI. 

Ascolta, o infida, un sogno, 

Delia trascorsa notte 

Parevami le grotte 

D' Alfesibeo mirar : 
D' Alfesibeo che quando, 

Alza la verga brtina 

Fa pallida la luna, 

Fa tempestoso il mar. 
Padre, io gridai, nel fianco 

Ho una puntura acerba. 

Con qualche magic' erba, 

Sanarai per pieta. 
Rise il buon vecchio e disse; 

Fuggi colei che adori ; 

E r rbe per te migliori 

Alfesibeo non ha. 



/ Castelli in Aria. Bertola. 

Una sera al focolare, 

Si sedean Dorillo e Nina : 

Ei dicea : veder regina, 

Ti vorrei di terra e mar : 
Di superbe vesti adorna, 

E di gemme preziose. . . . 

Ma perche, Nina rispose, 

L' impossibile bramar ? 
Se formar desiri godi, 

Brama il prato ognor piu erboso, 

Brama il gregge numeroso ; 

Lello al fin che aver si puo. 
A che pro V altro rispose, 

Se provai fmor bramando 

Che il piacer vien meno quando 

L' alma ottien quel che bramo. 

t Belle 






418 CONCETTI POETICI. 

Belle Gudncie. Chiabrera. 
Be'lla guancia che disdori 

GH aimi onori, 

Che sul viso ha P alma Aurora; 

Onde il pregio ad ogni volto 

Ella ha tolto, 

Che sul Cielo oggi s'onora. 
Te vo' dir guancia fiorita, 

Colorita 

Del pill bel ch' ebbe natura : 

Te vo* dir, che non hai fiore, 

Che nel core 

Sappla darrai una puntura. 
Che fai tu, se mi dai segno 

Di disdegno? 

Mi ti mostri piu verrniglia, 

Per tal modo sei cortese. 

Nelle ofifese 

D'una nobil meraviglia. 
Nevi candide cosparte, 

Con bell 1 arte 

Infra porpora si bella ; 

Ben vorrei lodarvi appieno, 

Ma vien meno 

La virtu della favella. 
Vostra gloria da' miei detti 

Non s'aspetti, 

Chi cio brama in van desira : 

Come no ? se per dolcezza, 

Di bellezza 

Divien muto chi vi mira. 



Le donne che non invecchiano. Gherardo de Rossi. 
Io so ben che le pudiche, 
Bonzellette a Cintia amiche 
Ad Amor tagliando P all, 
S' involarono a' suoi strali ; 
Di Ciprigna a#e le amate 
Vaghe ancelle innamorate, 
Per non crescer negli anni, 
Han tarpato al tempo i v&nni. 

JEpitajffb 



CONCETTI POE'TICI. 419 

Epitaffio per un Parascito. G. de Rossi. 

Il cener freddo del cantor Melitto 

Questa, brev' urna in se racchiuder pud, 
Appena una Piramide d' Egitto, 
Racchiudere potria quanto mangio. 



ARIA 
Del METASTASIO. 
Speranza. 
Perche x gli son oompagna, 
L' estivo raggio ardente 
V agricoltor non sente, 
Sucla, ma non si lagna 
Dell' opra e del sudor ; 
Con me nel career nero 

Ragiona il prigioniero, 
Si scorda affanni e pene, 
E al suon di sue catene 
Cantando va talor. 



ODE TRIONFALE. 
Del METASTASIO. 

CORO. 

Lodi al gran Dio, che oppresse 
Gli empj nemici suoi, 
Che combatte per noi 
Che trionfo cosi. 

Giuditta. 

Venne Y Assiro, e intorno 
Con le falangi Perse 
Le valli ricoperse, 
I fiumi inaridl. 

Parve oscurato il giorno, 
Parve con quel crudele 
Al timido Israele 
Giunto 1' estremo di. 

Coro, &c. 



Giuditta 



420 .CONCETTI POETICI. 



GlUDITTA. 

Fiamme, catene e morte 
Ne minaecio feroce ; 
Alia terribil voce 
Betulia impallidi ! 

Ma inaspettata sorte 

L' estinse in un momenta 
E come nebbia al vento, 
Tanto furor span. 

Coro, &c. 

GlUDITTA. 

Dispersi abbandonati 

I barbari fuggiro ; 

Si spavento Y Assiro, 

II Medo inorridi : 
Ne fur giganti usati 

Ad assalir le stelle ; 

Fu Donna sola, e imbelle, 

Quella ehe gli atterri. 

Coro, &c. 



EFFETI della PACE 

ARIA, 

Del METASTASIO. 

In prato, in foresta, 

Sia 1' alba, o la sera, 
Se dorrne talor, 
Non turba, non desta 
La tromba guerriera 
Dal sonno il pastor. 



Le 



CONCETTI POETICI. 421 

Le madri sicure 

D' insidie, e perigli, 
Se i teneri figli 
Si stringono al petto, 
Impulso e d' affetto, 
Non piu di timor. 



ARIA 

Del METASTASIO. 

Nella face, che risplende, 

Crede accolto ogni diletto, 
Ed anela il fanciulletto 
A quel tremulo splendor ; 

Ma se poi la man vi stende, 
A ritrarla e pronto invano, 
Che fuggendo allor la mano, 
Porta seco il suo dolor. 



ARIA 
Del METASTASIO. 

Saro qual madre amante, 
Che la diletta prole 
Minaceia ad ogni istante, 
E mai non sa punir. 

Alza a ferir la mano, 

Ma il colpo gia non scende, 
Che amor la man sospende 
Nell' atto del ferir. 



ARIA 



422 CONCETTI POETICI. 

ARIA 
Del METASTASIS 

Amor Timido. 

Placido zeffiretto, 

Se trovi il caro oggetto, 
Digli che sei sospiro, 
Ma non gli dir di chi. 

Limpido ruscelletto 

Se mai t'incontri in lei, 
Dille che pianto sei, 
Ma non le dir qual ciglio 
Crescer ti fe' cosi. 



Dello Stess-o. 

Leon piagato a morte 

Sente mancar la vita, 
Guarda la sua ferita, 
Ne s' avvilisce ancor. 

Cosi fra 1' ire estreme 

* Rugge, minaccia, e freme, 
Che fa tremar morendo 
Talvolta il cacciator. 



ARIA 
Del METASTASIO. 

Leon ch' errando vada 
Per la natia contrada, 
Se un agnellin rimira, 
Non si commove ad ira 
Nel generoso cor. 

Ma se venir si vede 

Orrida tigre in faccia, 
L' assale, e la minaccia, 
Perche sol quella crede 
Degna del suo furor. 



CANTATA 



CONCE'TTI POETICI. 423 

CANTATA 

Del METASTASIO. 

Contro T Ingratittjdine. 

Benche' di senso privo 

Fin 1' arboscello e grato 

A quell' amico rivo, 

Da cui riceve urnor : 
Per lui di frondi ornato 

Bella merce gli rende 

Quando dal sol difende 

II suo benefattor. 



ODE sopea la VIRTIP 
Del METASTASIO. 

Se bramate esser felici, 

Alme belle, e in questa schiera 
L' innocente la sincera 
La fedel felicita. 

Quel piacer fra noi si gode, 

Che contenta, e non ofFende, 
Che resiste alle vicende 
Delia sorte, e dell' eta. 

Qui la sferza del rimorso, 

Qui Y insulto del timore, 
Qui P accusa del rossore, 
Come affligga, il cor non Sa. 

Del piacer, che i folli alletta, 
E x il sentier fiorito e verde ; 
Ma tradisce, e vi si perde 
Di tornar la liberta.— 



A Col- 



( 42'4 ) 



A Collection of Superscriptions of 

T T 

Italian Letters. 



IT is not my design to instruct in the epistolary art, 
for in this every one follows his fancy, but to make 
the learner acquainted with the titles and honourable 
appellations given to persons with whom we preserve 
an epistolary correspondence ; and as they are written 
in abbreviation, I have here arranged them at length 
in alphabetical order, that they may be the more easily 
understood. 



Aff ™. 


Affezionatissimo. 


Affettuo™' 


Affettuosissimo. 


Affettuo te - 


Affettuosissimamen te. 


Aff»: 


Affezionato. 


A. 


Altezza. 


Amat mo - 


Amatissimo. 


V. A Ser ma - 


Vostra Altezza Serenissima. 


V. A. R. 


Vostra Altezza Reale. 


Beat™-' 


Beatitudine. 


V. B. 


Vostra Beatitudine. 


Beat™' 


Beatissimo. 


Beat™- P* 


Beat'issimo Padre. 


Car™- 


Carissimo. 


Car ma ~ 


CarUsima. 


Col™ : 


Colendissimo. 


Crist™- 


Cristianissimo. 


Crist ma - 


Cristianissima. 


Divot™' 


Divotissimo. 


Ecc te - 


Eccellente. 


Ecc™- 


Eccellentissimo. 


Ecc a ' 


Eccellenza. 



V. Ecc :a 



Of Titles and Distinctions, &c. 425 



Vostra Eccellenza* 

Eminentissimo. 

Eminenza. 

Vostra Eminenza. 

Illustre. 

Illustrissima. . v 

Illustrissimo. 

Maesta. 

Sua Maesta, 

Maesta Britannica. 

Magnijico. 

Molto. 

Nostro. 

Obbligatissimo. 

Onordndo. 

Osservandissimo. 

Paternita. 

Vostra Paternith, 

Vostra Paternita Reverendissima. 

Particolarissimo. 

Padre. 

Padrone. 

Padrona. 

Reverendo 

Reverendissimo. 

Reverendissima. 

Riveritissimo. 

Santitct. 

Vostra Santitct. 

Santissimo. 

Santissimi. 

Serenissimo. 

Serenitd. 

Servitore. 

Signore, ra. sing. 

Signore, m. sing. 

Signora. 

Signori. 

Signore, f. plur. 

Vossignoria. 

Vossignoria Illustrissima. 

Venerdndo. 



Of 






426 Of Titles and Distinctions, &c. 

Of TITLES and Honorable Appellations used in 
Italian Letters. 

Observe that the Italians put the date in the last 
line of the letter, and none but merchants and trades- 
men put it at the top. 

To the Pope, — Alia Santitd di nostro Signore Pio set- 
timo — In the beginning of a letter, and in the 
discourse, V. Santitd, or V. Beatitudine. — In the 
conclusion, e con ogni umiltci le bdcio i santissimi 
piedi. Di V. Std, Umilissimo, Divotissimo, ed 
Ossequiosissimo Servo.- 

Di Parigi, ilprimo di Genndjo, 1823. 

To a Cardinal. — AlV Eminentissimo, e Reverendissimo 
Signor Cardinal O'rsi. — Eminentissimo Sign6?-e, e 
Padrone Colendissimo. — In the middle of the 
letter, V. Eminenza. — E per fine a V. Eminenza 
bdcio la sdcra porpora, e da Dio le prego ogni mag- 
gior grandezza, e felicita ; or, per fine le bdcio 
umilissimamente le mdni. Di V. Eminenza, Umi- 
lissimo, Divotissimo, ed Obbligatissimo Servitore. 
Di Parigi, i 3 Mdrzo, 1826. 

- Observe, that when the Princes Cardinals are at 
Rome, they are called by the title of Eminence, and not 
Highness; pope Innocent X. having so ordered it. 

To a Patriarch, an Archbishop, a Bishop, a Nuncio, a 
Prelate. — AlV Illustrissimo e Reverendissimo Si- 
gnore Prone mio Colendissimo, Monsignore di 
Beaumont, Arcivescovo di Parigi. 

AW Illustrissimo e Reverendissimo Signor Prone mko 
Colendissimo Monsignbr di Choiseuil, vescovo di 
Chalons. 

Illustrissimo Rev. Signore, Prone mio Colendissimo. 

E con profondo rispetto, e sommessa riverenza le bdcio 
le sdcre vesii. Di V. S~ Ille e Rev. Umilissimo, 
Divotissimo, ed Obbligatissimo Servitore. 
Di Parigi, i 6 Mdggio, 1826. 

If it be a cardinal that is a bishop or archbishop, you 

are 



Of Titles and Distinctions, &c. 427 

are to make use of titles belonging to such cardinals 
as are not princes. 

To a Regular Abbot. — Al Reverendissimo Pddre Prone 
mio Colendissimo il Pddre D. Anselmo N. Abate 
di N. — In the beginning, Reverendissimo Pddre, e 
Prone Colendissimo. — At the .end, Reverentemente 
bacidndo le mdni a V. P. R ma - la prego per sin- 
goldr grdzia volersi ricorddr di me ne* siioi colloquj 
con Dio. Di V. P. Rev., Umilissimo, ed Obbliga- 
tissimo Servitore. 

Di Parigi, i 7 Giiigno, 1826. 

To a Canon, a Curate, a Priest. — Al molto Illustre e 
molto Reverendo Signore, e Prone Colendissimo il 
Signore V. canonico, or arciprete di, fyc. 

If it be a person of distinction you must say, alV III™- e 
Rev™ 4 Sig re ' Padrone Colendissimo. 

To a Vicar General. — Al Reverendissimo Pddre mio 
Osservandissimo il Pddre N. iV. Generdle de* 
P. P. — In the beginning, Reverendissimo Pddre, e 
Prone Osservandissimo. — At the conclusion, Di V. 
P. Rev., Umilissimo ed Obbligatissimo Servitore. 

To a Prior, Rector, Guardian, or Superior. — Al molto 
Reverendo Pddre e Prone Osservandissimo il 
Padre N, Priore, Rettore, or Guardidno, &c. de y 
P. P. N.— In the beginning, Molto Reverendo e 
Prone Osservandissimo. — At the conclusion, E le 
bdcio umilissimamente le mdni. Di V. P. molto 
Rev., Umilissimo ed Obbligatissimo Servitore. 
Di Parigi, gli 8 Agbsto, 1826. 

To a Friar Priest. — Al molto Reverendo Pddre, or Al 
molto Rev do - Pddre e Prone Osservandissimo, il 
Pddre N. dell ' or dine di San N. — In the beginning, 
Molto Reverendo Pddre. — At the conclusion, E 
per fine a V. P. bdcio con ogni affetto le mdni, e 
mi raccomdndo alle sue orazioni. Di V. P. molto 
Rev., Umilissimo ed Obbligatissimo Servitore. 

To a Lay Brother. — Al molto onordndo Fratello in 
Cristo fra' Agostino N. or dine di N. or nel Con- 
vento de P. P. di, &c. — In the beginning, Molto 
Onordndo Fratello in Cristo. — At the conclusion, E 

per 



428 Of Titles and Distinctions, &c. 

per fine vi bdcio affettuosissimamente le mam. 
Mblto Onordndo Fratk.Uo in Cristo. Divotissimo 
ed Affeituosissimo Servitore. 

Di Parigi, i 9 di Settembre, 1826. 

To the Emperor. — Alia Sacra Cesdrea ed Impcridle 
Maestd delV Imperatbre — Sdcra Cesdrea Maestd. — 
In the course of the letter, Vostra Maestd. — At 
the end, E per fine a V. M. bdcio umilissimamente 
le mdni, pregdndo Dio, che la colmi di tutte le 
maggibri e piii desiderdbili felicitd. Di V. Cesdrea 
Maestd Umilissimo, Divotissimo, ed Ossequiosissimo 
Servitore. 

Di Parigi, i 10 Luglio, 1826. 

To the King of France. — Alia Sdcra Real Maestd del 
lie Cristianissimo. Ox, Alia Cristianiss.ima Maestd 
del Re di Frdncia. Or, Alia Sdcra Maestd del Re 
di Frdncim. — In the discourse, Vostra Maestd, or 
Sire. — x4t the end, Colmi Dio N. Signore le 
felicitd presenti della Maestd Vostra, oVdltre nuove 
(a piil grdndi) nelV avvenire. Di Parigi, gli 1 1 
Novembre, 1826. — Or, Conservi Iddio lungamente 
V. M. a quelle prosperitd, che sbtto ilfelicissimo, e 
gloriosissi?no suo governo, Ella fa godere a'-suoi 
popoli. D. V. M. Crist. ; Umilissimo, Divotissimo, 
ed Ossequiosissimo Servitore. 

To the King of Spain. — In the beginning, Alia Sdcra 
Cattolica Real Maestd del Re di Spdgna. — SIRE. — 
At the end, E per fine prego Iddio cli a V. M. 
conceda ogni grandezza, e felicitd maggiore Di V. 
M. Cattolica ; Umilissimo, Divotissimo, ed Osse- 
quiosissimo Servitore. 

Di Parigi, i 2 Dicembre, 1826. 

To other Kings. — Alia Sdcra Redl Maestd del Re d f 
Inghilterra,diPortogdllo, di Svezia,di Danimdrca, 
di Sardegna, di Prussia. — In the beginning, 
Sl'RE.— At the end, as above. 

To the Dauphin of France. — Al Serenissimo Principe 
Delfino di Francia. — At the beginning, Serenis- 
simo 



Or Titles and Distinctions, &c. 429 

simo Principe. — In the middle, V. A. R. — At the 
end, Conservi Iddio per lunghissimo tempo quelbene 
alia Frdncia, eke le ha ddto in ddr la Serenissima 
di lei Persona, a cut con profonda riverenza m in- 
chino. Serenissimo Principe, or di V. A. R. ; Umilis- 
simo, Divotissimo, ed Obbligatissimo Servitore. 
' Di Parigi, gli 8 Mdggio, 1826. 

To a Prince of the Blood. — AW Altezza Serenissima del 
Signor Duca d' Orleans. — AW Altezza Serenissima 
del Signor Principe di Conde. Or, Al Serenis- 
simo Principe SignSre, e Prone mio Colendissimo, 
il Principe di Conde. We may also write, AlV 
Altezza Serenissima, &c. as above. 

To Reigning Dukes. — AW Altezza Serenissima del 
Duca. di Parma. Di Modena. — In the beginning, 
Serenissimo Principe, or S. A — At the conclusion, 
E per fine a V. A. Serenissima bdcio rispettuosissi- 
mamente le mdni, pregdndole dal Cielo bgni vera 
contentezza. Di Parigi, &c. 

I shall give no more conclusions of letters; a number 
of them will be found at the end of this collection. 

To Secular Electors of the Empire. — AW Altezza Se- 
renissima Elettordle del Signor Duca di Baviera., 
Principe Elettordle del Sdcro Romdno Imperio. 

To Ecclesiastical Electors of the Empire. — AW Altezza 
Serenissima Elettordle del Signor Arcivescovo di 
Colonia, Principe Elettordle del Sdcro Romdno 
Imperio. 

To Dukes who are not Sovereigns. — AlV Illustrissimo 

ed Eccellentissimo Signor e e Prone Colendissimo 

il Signor Duca, fyc. 
To Embassadors. — A sua Eccellenza il signor N. Am- 

basciatore di sua Maestd Britannica. 
To an Earl, a Marquis, or Baron. — AW Illustrissimo 

Signor Prone mio Colendissimo il Signor e Cbnte 

N. Marchese N. Bar one N. 

To a Governor. — If he is an ecclesiastic, as those of 
Italy ,-^-Al Illustrissimo e Reverendissimo Signore 

Prone 



430 Of Titles and Distinctions, &c. 

Prone Colendissimo Monsignbr N. Governatore di 
Roma. — If he is not an ecclesiastic, AlV Illustris-^ 
simo Signore e Prone mio Colendissimo il Signore 
N. Governatore di N. 

To a Privy Counsellor. — AlV Illustrissimo Signore e 
Prone mio Colendissimo il Signore N. del Consi- 
glio di Stdto di sua Maesta Cristianissima. — In the 
beginning, Illustrissimo Signore Prone mio Colen- 
dissimo. — At the end, Di V. S. Ill" 1 "- 

To a President. — AW Illustrissimo Signore e Prone 
Colendissimo il Signor N. Presidente nella Corte 
Sovrdna del Parlamento di Parigi. 

To an Ecclesiastical Counsellor in Parliament. — AlV 
Illustrissimo e Reverendissimo Signore, il Signor 
Abate N. Consigliere nella corte Sovrdna del Par- 
lamento di Parigi. 

To a Counsellor of Parliament. — AlV Illustrissimo Si' 
gnbre Padrone mio Colendissimo il Signor N. Con- 
sigliere nella corte Sovrdna del Parlamento di 
Parigi. 

To a Counsellor of the Court of Aids. — AlV Illustris- 
simo Signore Padrone mio Colendissimo, il Signor 
N. Consigliere nella camera de sussidj di Parigi, 

To a Doctor of Law or Physic. — Al molto Illustre ed 
'Eccellentissimo Signore N. Dottbre di Legge ; or 
Dottor di Medicina in Parigi. • 

To a Professor, or Language Master. — Al molto Il- 
lustre, e molto Eccellente Signore il Signore N. — 
Lettbre di Teologia nel collegio di N. — If he is a 
Language Master, Maestro di lingua Italidna, 
virtuoso di liuto, di chitdrra, di scherma, maestro 
di hallo, Sfc. 

To an Advocate, an Attorney. — Al molto Illustre Si- 
gnore Padrone Colendissimo il >ignbre N. Avvocdto, 
or Procuratbre del I'arlamcnto di Parigi. 

They 



Of Titles and Distinctions, &c. 431 

They write, all' Illustrissimo Signore, to a Gentle- 
man ; il Signor, to a Secretary. 
To a Tradesman. — Al Sig?i6r N. sartore,forndjo, ma- 

celldjo, &c. 
To a Servant, or any other Domestic. — A Francesco 

N. Ortol&no che Dio gudrdi.— At the,end, E sarb 

sempre dispostissimo a compiacervi. 



Different Form's of Concluding Letters. 

THE following are the Forms, which, in Epistolary 
collections, most frequently occur. 

E per fine a V { . S. or a V. S. Illustrissimo,, or a V. Ec~ 

cellenza, or V. A. or a V. Eminenza, or a V, 

Maesta bdcio umilissimamente le mdni. 
E qui per fine le bdcio con ogni piil riverente affetto 

le mdni. 
E le bdcio affettuosamente le mdni. 
E bacidndole affettuosissimamente le mdni, le prego ogni 

bene, e contento. 
E per fine le bdcio con ogni maggior riverenza le mdni. 
E per fine a V. S. bdcio con ogni affetto le mdni. 
E per fine a V. 5. bdcio le mdni e le desio ogni vero bene. 
E per fine le bdcio river entemente le mdni. 
E le bdcio umilissimamente le mdni. 
E per fine a V. S. bdcio le mdni. 
E per fine a V. S. bdcio mille volte le mdni. 
E le bdcio le mdni. 
E con questo a V. S. bdcio le mdni, ed al Signor Pietro 

suo zio. 
E con pari, e congiuntissimo affetto le bacidmo, ed a 

tutti di cdsa sua, le mdni. 
Mantengami V. S. il luogo nclla sua grdzia che io le 

bdcio le mdni di cuore. 
E le bdcio le mdni salutdndo la signora sua consorte. 
E per fine nella buona grdzia di V. S. mi raccomdndo, 

e le bdcio le mdni. 
E mi vi raccomdndo cordialmente. 

Eper 



432 DIFFERENT FORMS, &c. 

E per fine a V. P. mi raccomdndo pregdndola aver 

memoria di me ne' suoi sdnti sacrifizj. 
E bacidndole le mdni, alle site orazioni mi raccomdndo. 
Ed a V. S. bdcio umilissimamente le mdni come ancora 

fo al Signor Antonio. 
E per fine saliito V. S. ed ella si compiacerd, a nome 

mio bacidre le mdni di Giovanni mio cugino, ed 

alia Signora Caterina sua consorte. 
E riverentemente a V. Eccellenza bdcio le mdni. 
Ed a V. Eccellenza fo umilissimo inchino. 
Ed a V. Eminenza riverentemente m inchino. 
Ed alle sue orazioni mi raccomdndo. 
E le bdcio con la doviita riverenza le mdni. 
E resto facendole umilissima riverenza. 
To a person in humble life, they write — E sono al ser- 

vizio .... affettuosissimo per servirvi vostro 

amorevole a vostri piaceri. 

The forms most used at present are, 
E rassegndndole la mia servitu, fo a V. S. umilissima 

riverenza. 
E con tutta la stima mi dico. 
E con tutto V ossequio mi do V onore d' assicurdrla del 

mio profondo rispetto. 
E pregdndola de' di lei stimatissimi comandi mi pregio 

<f essere. 
E resto con tutto 7 desiderio dipoter incontrare qudlche 

occasione di servirla. 
Sono con tutta la stima ed il rispetto che le devo. 
E per fine mi do V onore d' ojfrirle la mia debolissima 

servitu. 
E sia persudsa che sono e sarb sempre disposto ad ob- 

bedirla, &c. 



LETTERE 



( 433 ) 

LETTERE MERCANTTLI. 



Venezia, al Sigr. N. N. 

Amsterddmo, 
i 2 d' Agosto, 1826. 
Stimatissimo Signore ; 
AVE'NDO risoluto col nome di Dio d'erigere easa 
di negozio in questa Citta (Piazza) sotto '1 nome mio,, 
con facolta e governo tale di poter intraprendere qua- 
lunque onorevole negozio, e tenendo voi nel nuraero- 
de' piu cari e parziali Amici, vene do avviso con 
questa mia, accio nelle vostre occorrenze possiate 
valervi dell' opera mia si per provvisione o mercanzie, 
per le quali ho modo di farvi goder ogni vantaggio,. 
come in Cambj ed altro cbe vi possa di qua bisognare. 
Sicuro di riportarne ottimi e leali trattamenti, esiben- 
dovi la mia servitu, colle solite e consuete prowisionr, 
con che vi dicbiariate pronto ad una reciproca corri- 
spondenza. In tanto farete nota di non prestar fede cbe 
alia mia firma, colla quale sara la presente sortoscritta, 
e mi direte come dovro contenermi per voi, per isfug- 
gire gli errori. Attendo Ponore de* vostri stimatissimi 
comandi, per farvi sperimentare '1 piacere particolare 
cbe bo delta vostra grata corrispondenza, accertandovi 
cbe alle occasioni saro per ricorrer a' vostri favori, 
mentre afFettuosamente salutandovi, vi bacio le mani. 



Verona, JV. N. 

Amsterddmo. 

Per mancanza d' occasioni non vi abbiamo piu 

scritto ; servira questa ora per caramente salutarvi, e 

dirvi, cbe per crdine del Signor N. N. di Roma vi ab- 

U biamo 



434 LE'TTERE MERCANTI'LI. 

biamo in Condotta di questi SS. N. N. spedita franca, 
e ben condizionata una Balla con fuori marca, e numero 
contenente Panni d' Olanda, che vi piacera in tempo 
debito procurarla, per disporne a voglia del detto 
amico di Roma, dal quale vi varrete delie vostre spese 
con avvisare 1 seguito. Con questa occasione v' offe- 
riamo la servitu nostra in tutto cio che vi potesse oc 
correre, che prontissimi sempre ci avrete, e B. L. M. 



Roma. 

Amsterdamo. 

Se'nza le carissime vostre si sono provviste le Pezze 
otto Panni cbe avete ordinate di perfettissima qualita, 
ed una Balla della fuori marca e numero resta spedita 
a vostra disposizione in condotta di questi SS. N. N. ai 
SS. N. N. di Verona, che sarete a procurarlada' mede- 
simiperdarceneasuotempolaricevuta, esoddisfazione, 
come non dubitiamo, avendovi procurato fior di roba, 
ed avantaggiatovi al possibile tanto nella compra, che 
nelle spese, il che sara motivo di continuarciin abbon- 
danza i vostri impieghi ; e come dall' ingiunto conto 
vedrete, ove abbiamo dato debito per il costo e spesa 
di f. . . Beo. che di tanti ci darete credito, attendendo 
che celi rimettiate al maggior nostro vantaggio, e sopra 
di voi, alia ricevuta del conto colla solita vostra pun- 
tualita ; e favoriteci di nuovi, e maggiori vostri comandi, 
che prontissimi ci avrete con tutto 1' affetto, col quale 
caramente salutandovi, B. L. M. 



Amsterda7no, SS. N. N. 

Roma. 
Colla gratissima vostra dei ... ho ricevuto '1 conto 
delle Pezze 8. Panni d'Olanda che m'avete provviste, 
e spedite in Balla N . . . . ai SS. N. N. di Verona a mia 
disposizione, che la procurero da' medesimi. 

Non ho dubbio che saranno della perfetta qualita che 
dite, ed a suo tempo vi diro la ritrovata. In tanto per 
farvi valere '1 vostro avanzo ho ordinato al Sigr. N. di 
Veneziadi provvedervi subito f . . Bco. importare della 

detta 



LETTERE MERCANTTLI 435 

detta Balla, che Teffettuera con ogni puntualita, atten- 
dendo da voi avviso che sia seguito, 6 che mene ab- 
biate dato credito a fronte di detta partita ; nel menire 
vi piacera far nota di provvedermi Pezze due Panni di 
Berri per Tabarri che potrete pagare f. 5 incirca il 
braccio in bianco, e farli tingere scarlatto come la 
mostra; ed in appresso vi daro nuovo ordine per corxi- 
pfre una balietta, raccoraandandovi che detti Paoni 
siano di buon corpo, buon lanaggio e ben coperti per 
darmi animo alia continuazione de' miei impieghi che 
non saranno scarsi, se mi trovero ben favorito, ed 
offerendomi a'" vostri comandi prontissimo, vi saluto^ 
e B. L. M. 



Amsterddmo, SS. N. N. 

Venezia* 

Per ordine, e conto del Signore N. N. di Roma vi 

rimetto a uso D Banco da N. N. lettera N. N. a 

grossi ducato che ne procurerete promessa, e 

pagamento in tempo intendendovene con detto Amico, 
avvisando '1 seguito, e pregandovi de' vostri comandi 
vi saliito caramente, e B. L. M. 



Roma, N. N. 

Amsterddmo. 

Colla vostra carissima dei Corrente ci rimet- 

tete da questo N. N. f. Banco ad uso lettera vostra ; 
sene procurera accettazione, ed a suo tempo ne 
cercheremo '1 pagamento per creditarvene contro la 
Balietta tele d' Olanda mandatavi, e quando altro in 
contrario non sentiate, tenete l'affare terminate Noa 
ci resta, che pregarvi della continuazione de' vostri 
stimatissimi comandi per i quali prontissimi sempre ci 
avrete, salutandovi caramente vi B. L. M. 



Firenze* 



436 LE'TTERE MERCANTTLI. 



Firenze, N. N. 

Amsterddmo. 

E molto tempo che non v'ho scritto per marcanza 
d' occasioni : servira questa per salutarvi caramente, e 
dirvi che a persuasione del S. N. N. di Livorno, horiso- 
luto fare una piccola pruova della vostra fabbrica, com- 
mettendovi due casse drappi o mantini di buona qualita 
e de' colori che vi mostra 1' ingiunta fattura. Vi pia- 
cera fame nota per inoltrarli questa volta colla mag- 
giore celerita possibile per la solita Condotta, facen- 
domi alia spedizione Tratta dell' importo, che '1 vostro 
carico incontrera il dovuto ricovero : raccomandandovi 
che i colori siano ben vivaci, di buon peso e di perfetta 
qualita, cosi che mi facciate vantaggio nel prezzo e 
risparmio nelle spese, se desiderate la continuazione 
de' miei irnpieghi che saranno di qualche somrna, se 
•mi vedro ben trattato, come non dubito del vostro 
afletto ; ed offerendovi la mia servitu in tutto cio che 
qui possa occorrervi afFettuosamente vi B. L. M. 



Raccommandazione d\in Amico passeggiere, ed Asse- 
gnazione fdttagli de dandri necessdrj, Sfc. 

Mio Signore ; 

Se'nza cara vostra, mi rapporto sopra la mia ante- 
cedente che fu ai 10 del passato. Questa serve sola- 
mente per pregarvi, che se '1 signor N. che parte oggi 
di qui per N. venisse a riverirvi da parte sua e nostra, 
con ricercar i vostriconsigii ed ajuti, d' assisterlo nelle 
sue occorenze ; s' egli avesse bisogno di danari, di 
fornirgliene sin alia somma di fl 1,000 moneta corrente 
contro quittanza, e di mettermeli a conto senza dar- 
mene avviso. Vi restero con obbligo per questo, e per 
gli altri favori che avrete la bonta di far al detto Sig- 
nore, ch' e molto nostro amico. Raccomandandovi '1 
ricapito dell' inclusa, caramente vi B. L. M. 

Senza cara vostra la presente sara per dirvi ch* at- 

tendo abbiate riscossa da' Signori N. di costi fl 

e datomene credito ed avviso. In questo mentre vi 

rimetto 



LETTERE MERCANTI'LI. 437 

rimetto altri fl — , sopra "1 Signor N. pur di costi per 
lettera di questi Signori N. N. di cui vi piacera di pro- 
curer l'accettazione, e pagamento a suo tempo, ed im- 
borsati che gli avrete mene darete parimente credito? 
ed avviso. In, tanto farete nota di provvedermi le 
sotto notate nierci e di spedirmele in due Barili, quando 
pero mele vogliate dare al prezzo avvisatovi : in difFetto^ 
tralasciate anco di riscuotere suddetta rimessa con. 
rimandarmene la lettera: ma quando avrete risoluto 
di spedirmi i detti Barili al prezzo accennato, sarete 
rimborsato subito del vostro avanzo, e sara causa di 
darvi Commissioni di maggior sostanza. Marcberete 
i Barili, di Num. 10. 11. colla solitamia marca avanti, 
e per grazia non vi dimenticate della fede di sanita 
sopra cotesti Barili, dove si attesti cbe la roba siastata 
cost! fabbricata, e resto — 

Per risposta della cara vostra de' 22 passato, godo 
di sentire cbe abbiate ricevuto ed imborsato la ceclola di 

cambio di fl da me rimessivi sopra cotesti Signori 

N. N. Di grazia, s'e-gli e possibile senza vostro pregiu- 

dizio, compiacetevi con sudetti fl saldarne la 

partita, mentre, come ben sapete, avete posto la roba 
pin cara a me cbe non avete fatto ad altri di qui, avendo 
cio visto con gli occbi miei proprj, e v'assicuro, cbe se 
mi farete godere qualche vantaggio, non mancberete 
mai di Commissioni dalla parte mia, ed in breve vene 
ordinero 2 Barili ; ma saldate s' e possibile la partita 
suddetta, quando pero non lo vogliate fare, avvisate- 
mene, cbe subito vi faro pagare quel poco avanzo~che 
pretendete ; ma poi le mie Commissioni saranno 
scarse, percbe non e di ragione ch' io pagbi piu degli 
altri ; e caramente vi B. L. M. 



Risponde'ndo alia gratissima vostra de'6stante; vi 
diremo, cbe in questa nostra fiera gia terminata, ab- 

biamo fatto fine de' due primi Barili e di Barili sei 

cbe ci provvedeste per conto a meta ; del tutto sene 

formera '1 conto per manclarvelo con altra. Vediamo 
ora per detto conto a meta cbe avete provvisto e spe- 
dito per Bolzano al Signor N. a nostra disposizione 

altri 



438 LETTERE MERCANTI'LI. 

altri due Bariii . . . . e Barili otto .... dei quali come 
anco di quelli che restano. procureremo lo spaccio, il 
quale seguito, vene daremo ragguagliocon mandar- 
vene '1 conto; come per tanto I' abbiamo ricevuto del 
loro irnportare, che rivedremo per scritturarlo, in man- 
canza di errori (di vostra conformiia) abbiamo fatto 
nota che de' fl. 682 che avanzate per la nostra meta di 
suddette merci, cene sara fatta tratta in fiera prossima 
di Bolzano dai Signori N. N. di N. laonde vi faremo 
le disposizioni necessarie, acciocche resti puntualmente 
eompita e secondoche s'andra esitando, s' ordineranno 
ouove provviste, come intenderete, e nel resto in che 
vagliimo a servirvi, comandateci liberamente e per 
floe vi B. L. M. 



Signor mio ; 
Sopra la copia della nostra ultima del primo Set- 
ternbre scaduto, e per adesso vi diamo avviso che '1 
Signor N. v' ha indrizzato pel' Carrettiere N. una cassa 
No« F. che abbiamo commessa per proprio conto, sen- 
dovi dentro mille nove cento settanta sette marchi 
d'argento con altre robe di prezzo, come vedrete dalla 
nota qui sotto unita, e vi preghiamo di fame celere 
inoltrazione e colla minore spesa che si potra. Ser- 
vavi Favviso, e comandate dove ci troverete capaci per 
renderviservizjgraditi, non dubitate che saremo sempre 
disposti ad effetuarli con tutta quell' attenzione che 
meritate, e nella stessa maniera, con cui ci favorite 
sempre, mentre caramente vi salutiamo, ed auguran- 
dovi un felice viaggio, ed ogni vantaggio possibile 
alia prossima fiera di N. dove forse qualcuno di noi 
avra '1 piacere di vedervi, restiamo. 



Il fallimento del Signor N. seguito in Parigi i 19 
del corrente, ci ha quasi rovinati, perche ci ha fatto 
perdere dodici mil a scudi da qualche tempo gia s pi rati, 
oltre un' altra partita diquattro mila otto cento florini, 
che dovra maturare al Natale di quest' anno. Ma pa- 
zienza ; Idclio ha voluto cosi, cosi sia. Vi diremo, che 

tempo 



LETTERE MERCANTTLI. 439 

tempo fa, demmo ordine al Signor N. d'addrizzarvi un 
Colle, quello che anco ci scrive d'aver fatto. Vi piac- 
cia dunque andarlo procurando a suo tempo ben con- 
dizionato, e celo rispedirete quanto prima per Lindo a 
nostra disposizione. Vi preghiamo di restringere 
quanto mai sara possibile V aggravio della Condotta, 
non dimenticando d' unirvi (o d' aggiimgervi) la bol- 
letta di sanita. Avrete visto colla nostra antecedente 
un.Barile di CafFe all' indrizzo del Signor N. e mentre 
siamo entrati nel nuovo anno, v'auguriamo felicissimo 
capo d'esso colmo d'ogni bene e bramata prosperita. 
L'istesso facciamo a quelli che v'appartengono, e 
siamo di cuore. 



Prima Lettera di Cdmbio a due mesi di data, 
Pisa. Gennajo, 1826, per mille Piastre. 

A due mesi di data pagate per questa prima di 
Cambio all' ordine del Signor N. mille Piastre valore 
ricevuto contante dal detto Signore, e li passerete 
secondo Y ordine di 

Al Signor N. Romulino. 

a Cddice. 



Prima Lettera a Vista. 

Lione i 10 Marzo, 1826, per 330 Ducati di Banco. 

A visTA pagate per questa prima lettera di Cambio 
all' ordine de' Signori N. N. Fratelli, trecento Ducati 
di banco, valore ricevuto da' cletti Signori, che passe- 
rete secondo i* avviso di 

Al Signor N. Cristoforo Pa'uli. 

a Venezia. 



Formula d Assegnazione. 

Signor Filippo N. vi preghiamo di pagare contra 
nostra Assegnazione al Signor Daniele N. ad Ordine, 

dugento 



440 LE'TTERE MERCANTTLI. 

clugento Scudi quaranta cinque Cruciferi in moneta, 
che passerete come per avviso di 

Francoforte, i 4 Agosto t Ca'rlo N. 

1826. 



Scudi 200. 45, Cruciferi Moneta. 



Formula di Quittdnza. 

Conee'sso e dichiaro per la presente d' aver rice- 
vuto oggi dal Signor N. N. di N. la Somma di 
quaranta cinque Scudi, che mi doveva dopo la Fiera 
passata per diverse mercanzie. 

Lipsia, i 9 Novembre, Ferdina'ndo N. 

1826. 



Formula di Ricevuta. 

Ho ricevuto dal Signor N. N. mille fiorini a Conto 
di quanto mi deve. 

Argentina, Antonio N. 

gli otto Decembre, 
1826. 



Altra Ricevuta. 

Ho ricevuto dal Signor N. N. un plico di N. per il 
Signor Principe N. che m' obbligo di fargli tener in 
mani proprie a mio risico e pericolo. 

Augusta. Anse'lmo N. 



LHtera di Vettura per Terra. 

Francoforte, i 15 Giugno, 
1826. 

Signore ; 
Alla guardia di Dio e condotta di Michele 

Carrettiere 



LETTERE di CIVILTA\ 441 

Carrettiere di questa Citta, riceverete una Balla 
di Mercanzie marcata come in margine, pesante 
quattro cento cinquanta libbre, la quale avendo 
ricevuta ben condizionata, ed in tempo dovuto 5 
gli pagherete per la sua Vettura a ragione di due 
Scudi per Quintale, come per avviso del 

Vostro umil mo Servo 
N.N. 



Lettera di Vettura per Acqua. 

Amsterddmo i 20 d' Agosto\ 
1826. 

Signore ; 
Vi mando per la Nave (o barca) di Giovanni 
N. Barcaruolo di N. quattordici Casse di Zuc- 
chero marcate come in margine, le quali avendo 
ricevuto i 25 del corrente in buono stato, gli 
pagherete per la sua Vettura a ragione di due 
fionni per Cassa, ma solamente la meta, se 
non le consegna al detto tempo. Sono 

Vostro umil m0 Servitore,. 
N. N. 



LE'TTERE DI C I V I L T A\ 



Lettera civile ad uno. 
Illustrissimo Signore ; Padrone mio Colendissimo. 

Le rendo mille distintissime grazie per tutt' i favori 
usati verso mio figlio, mentre e stato Collegiale in 
questa sua regia Accademia, dove mi pare abbia fatto 
non mediocre profitto. Puo esser ben assicurata V. S. 
Illustrissima, che mi faro sempre gloria di servirla in 
tutte le occasioni, nelle quali vorra onorami de' suoi 
pregiatissimi Comandi, per testificarle l'indelebile gra- 
titudine che conservar debbo verso P innata di lei 
U 5 gentilezza 7 



442 LE'TTERE di CIVILTA\ 

gentilezza, ed in mancanza mia lo stesso mio figlio, 
che si dichiara da lei favoritissimo, non manchera mai 
di compire 1'obbligo suo per non rendersi immeritevole 
della di lei continuata protezione. Gradi^ca frattanto 
in segno della mia servitu e divozione un fornimento di 
bottonideli'ultima moda, venuta solainente la settimana 
scorsa da Lonclra, ne voglia far attenzione alia qualita 
del dono al di lei merito in nissun modo proporzionato, 
ma al cuor del Donatore fin alie Ceneri. 

Di V. S. Ill™ ; 

Ndpoli, i 7 Agosto, 1826. Divot™ Umii m0 ed 

Ossequiosissimo 
Servitore. 



Lettera civile ad una Signora. 

Illostrissima Signora; Padrona mia Colendissima. 

Per fade vedere quanto slimo V onore de' di lei 
pregiatissimi Cenni, al ricevimento dell' ultima sua in 
data dei 15 Maggio, ho piegato '1 Giudice di questa 
nostra Citta, Amico mio stretto, affinche spedisca la sua 
causa ventilante nel suo Tribunale, e m' ha promesso 
che lo far a. il mese piossiroo, di maniera tale che spero 
ehe V. S. IU ma sara servita senza dubbio, e le dico per 
suo riposo, ehe le mandero a suo tempo Copia della 
sentenza, con che potra elia interarnente assicurarsi, 
che vivo impazientissimo d'obbedivla, • e renderla 
persuasa e certificata del rispetto, della venerazione, e 
delta stima con cui ho 1' onore di protestarmele, 
Di V. S. Ill™, 

Firenze, i 14 Luglio, Divotissimo ed obbligatissimo 
1826. Servitore. 

Sempronio N. 

P.S. 

Sua Figlia gode assai buona salute, grazie al Cielo 
e per esser degna figlia d'una degnissima Madre, viene 
sfeimata ed amata non solamente da tutte queste Reli- 
giose 



LETTERE di CIVILTA\ 443 

giose che quasi 1' adorano, ma da tutti quelli che hanno 
!a bella sorte di conoscerla. 



Lettera del Serenissime Principe Leopoldo al 
Signor Egidio Mendgio. 

Signor Menagio ; Gli arao- 

revoii sentiment che V. S. mi significa di compati- 
mento e di duolo per la morte del Serenissimo Prin- 
cipe Mattias, mio fratello, di felice memoria, sono 
proprj dell* animo suo cortese, esperimentato da me in 
tante occasioni : onde li recevo io con afFettuosa parzia- 
lita ; e le rendo grazie ben grandi : desiderando di poter 
corrispondere allacordialitadi V.S. collapienezza della 
mia, in tutto cio che sia di suo gusto. Ed in tanto le 
auguro dal Cielo tutte quelle prosperita piu perfette 
che ella sappia bramare. Di Firenze, ai 25 Novembre. 



Amorevole di V. S. 



Il Principe Leopoldo. 



Lettera del Sig r Mena'gio (ilia Signora Contessa della 
Fae'tta. 

Sono obbligatissimo alia gentilezza di V. S. IU ma 
della grazia singolare che s'e compiaciuta di farmi 
colla sua cortesissima lettera. Che veramente e fare 
una grazia singolare agli assenti, avergli in memoria in 
cosi ameno luogo, qual' e la Villa di Fresne ; ed in 
compagnia di cosi amabili persone, quali sono Madama 
du Plessis e Madamigella le Gendre : tutte cose capa- 
cissime d'occupare interamente F animo suo, per 
grande che sia. Quant' a me, non diro gia a V. S. Ill ma 
che ogni di spesse fiate anch' ella mi torn a a mente, 
non essendone mai partita ; le diro bene che sono a 
Vitn, luogo altresi ameno, dove fra dotti Pastori e 
vaghe Pastorelle si fanno tutt' i balli e giuochi che si 
scrivono del paese di Caledone e d' Astrea : ma che 
-ogni luogo m'attrista dov' io non vedo V. S. IU m % e che 



444 LE'TTERE di CIVILTA\ 

in questo amenissyno luogo vo fuggendo tutt' i piaceri 
e passatempi di cosi riguardevoli Pastori e Pastorelle. 

Solo e pensoso, i piil deserti cdmpi 
Vo misurdndo a pdssi tdrdi e Unti. 

Quindi puo ben conoscere V. S. Ill ma ch'io non son 
meno adesso delle di lei virtu e gentilezze invaghito, 
ch'io n'era allora che dimorando ella in Angiii nella deli- 
ziosissima Villa di Ciampire. Tornero a Parigi, subito 
che elia vi sara tornata. Fra tanto le mando il Madri- 
gale Italiano, da me fatto per Madama di Sevigne, ad 
imitazione di quello del Guarini, Occhistelle mortdli, fyc. 
tanto stimato e tanto lodato da V. S. Illustrissima. E 
per fine le pr6go ogni piu desiderata felicita. 

MADRIGA'LE DEL MENA'GIO. 

Pianto di bella Donna. 

Ah ! del Regno d* Amor prodigio triste ! 
Sparger Idgrime amdre 
Que 7 dolci lumi ho visto ; 
La tra le Grdzie assiso 
Solea scherzdre il rise. 

Spargean di pianto que 7 begli occhi un mare; 
Ma pur co' raggi ardenti 
Spargean fidmme cocenti: 
E quel fatdle ardore 
Tosto m' > accese il core. 
misera mia vita ! 
O'cchi, lumi immortdli, 
Deh qual per i miei mdli 
Posso sperdre dita? 
Se nubilosi ardete, 
Sereni che f arete? 



FINIS. 



T. C. Hansard, 

Printer, 

Faternoster-row-Press. 



NEW AND CORRECT EDITIONS 

OF THE FOLLOWING 

ELEMENTARY BOOKS, 

IN THE 

ITALIAN, FRENCH, SPANISH, AND 
PORTUGUESE LANGUAGES, 

ARE PRINTED FOR THE PROPRIETORS, AND TO BE HAD OF 
J. COLLINGWOOD, IN THE STRAND. 



THE NEW ITALIAN, ENGLISH, AND 
TRENCH POCKET DICTIONARY, carefully com- 
piled from the Dictionaries of La Crusca, Dr. S. John- 
son, the French Academy, and others of the best 
authority ; having the Parts of Speech properly distin- 
guished, and each Word accented according to its true 
Pronunciation. A new Edition, very greatly augmented, 
and much improved, by a union of the respective Works 
of F. Bottarelli and G. Polidori, in three volumes, 
square duodecimo, price 1/. Is. boards. 

N. B. As this work is much used by Travellers, as 
well as Students, a short abstract of the relative 
value of Italian, French, and English Money has 
been prefixed. 

THE COMPLETE ITALIAN MASTER ; con- 
taining the best and easiest Rules for attaining that 
Language. By Signor Veneroni ; with a short Intro- 
duction to Italian Versification, Extracts from the 
Italian Poets, and the Italian words properly accented 
to facilitate the Pronunciation to Learners. A new 
edition, carefully corrected, and very considerably im- 
proved, 12mo. 6s. bound. 

EXERCISES UPON THE DIFFERENT 
PARTS OF ITALIAN SPEECH, with References to 
Veneroni's Grammar, and an abridgment of the Roman 
History, intended at once to make the Learner ac- 



Elementary Boohs in Italian, 

quainted with History,, and the Idioms of the Italian 
Language, by Mr. Bottarelli. New edition, much 
improved, 12mo. 3s. 6d. bound. 

A KEY TO BOTTARELLFS EXERCISES, 

with a few Extracts in Prose and Verse, with English 
Translations, for the use of beginners, by P. It. Rota, 
new edition, 12mo. 2s. 6d. bound. 

A NEW DICTIONARY of the Italian and 
English Languages, in Two Parts; — 1. Italian and Eng- 
lish ; — 2. EngKsh and Italian. By Joseph Baretti, a 
new edition, corrected and greatly improved, in two 
large volumes, 8vo. lL 4>s. boards. 

THE RUDIMENTS of the Italian Lan- 
Guage, wherein the Parts that are fundamental and re- 
quisite for Beginners are regularly displayed ; and illus- 
trated with Remarks, and a Variety of useful Tables, 
&c. to expedite those who attempt to learn this Lan- 
guage without the Assistance of a Master, 5s. 

COMMEDIE SCELTE, DI CARLO GOL- 
DONI, Avvocato Veneto, nuova Edmone, 3 vols. 12mo. 
10s. 6d. 

PAMELA, and The Father or a Family; 

two Comedies, by Carlo Goldoni, translated into Eng- 
lish, with the Italian Original, 8vo. 5s. boards. 

GRAGLIA'S POCKET DICTIONARY, Ita- 
lian and English, and English and Italian, a new 

edition, corrected, and very neatly printed, 7s- 

SCELTA DI NOVELLI DI GIOV. BOC- 
CACCIO, 12mo. 3s. 6d. 

TASSO GERUSALEMME LIBERTA, nuova 
ediz. 2 vols. 12mo. 10s. 6d. 

LEGATO D'UN PADRE ALLE SUE FI- 
GLIE, sopra la Religione ; la Condotta ; il Contegno ; i 
Divertimenti ; l'Amizia ; FAmore, ed il Matrimonio, 
tradotto dalT Inglese del' Dottore Gregory, 12mo. 3s. 

The same Work in Italian and French, 12mo. 3s. 6d. 



French, Spanish, and Portuguese. 

ECONOMIA, BELLA VITA UMANA, tra- 
dotta dalT originale Inglese, 12mo. 3s. 

COMMON PRAYER in the Italian Lan- 
guage, neatly printed in a pocket size, 5s. 6d. 

GIL BLAS DI SANTILLANO, tradotta dal 
Francese dal Dottore P. Crocchj, 4 vols. 12mo. ll.ls. 
boards. 

LE'TTERE D'U'NA PERUVIANA, trad6tte 
dal Francese in Italiano, di cui si sono accentate tutte le 
voci, per facilitar agli stranieri il modo d'iniparar la pro- 
sodia di questa lingua. Dal Signor Deodati. Nuova 
edizione, 12mo. 3s. 6d. 

LE DIABLE BOITEUX, par M. Le Sage, 
nouvelle edit, corrigee, avec la Vie de Le Sage, &c. 
12 mo. 4<s. 6d. 

LES AVANTURES DE TELEMAQUE, nou- 
velle edit. 4*. 

The same Book in French and English, 2 vols. 8<y. 

LE GOUVERNEUR, ou Essai sur l'Education, 
par M. de la Fare, 12mo. 3^. 

SYLLABAIRE FRANCOISE, or a French 

Spelling Book, calculated to lead young Beginners, with 
ease, from the Knowledge of single Letters to the Read- 
ing of the longest and most difficult Polysyllables ; to 
which is annexed, an Introduction to French Grammar, 
a Vocabulary, &c. The whole in French and English. 
12mo. 19th edit. 2s. 

THE PRACTICAL FRENCH GRAMMAR, 

containing all that is necessary to be learned to acquire 
a thorough Knowledge of the constituent Principles of 
that Language ; comprised in a rational and clear Method. 
12mo. 15th edit. 4«s. 

GRAMMATICAL EXER CISES, showing how 
the fundamental Rules of French Syntax are to be ap- 
plied in every part of its Construction, digested in a 
plain, easy, and progressive Order. 12mo. 14th edit. 
2s. 6d. 



Elementary Books in Italian, 

ANALYSE DES SONS, &c. or Principles of 
the French Pronunciation and Orthography, in which 
all the single and combined Sounds of the French Lan- 
guage are described, and alphabetically exhibited. 12mo. 

%S. 

The above Four by Mr. Porny, late French Master 
to Eton College- 

Spanish and Portuguese. 

BARETTI AND NEUMANNS DICTIONARY 
of the Spanish and English Languages ; wherein the 
Words are correctly explained, agreeably to their different 
meanings, and a great variety of Terms relating to the 
Arts, Sciences, Manufactures, Merchandise, Na- 
vigation, and Trade, elucidated. A new edition, care- 
fully Revised and Enlarged by the addition of many 
Thousand Words extracted from the Writings of the 
most Classical Spanish and English Authors, many of 
which are not to be found in any other Dictionary of 
those Languages ; and also great additions from the 
Dictionaries of Connelly and Higgins, the Royal 
Spanish Academy, &c. &c. in Two Volumes, large 8vo. * 
ll. 4s. in boards. 

An Abridgment of the same, in a Pocket Volume, 
very neatly printed, Qs. 

FERNANDEZ'S NEW PRACTICAL GRAM- 
MAR of the Spanish Language ; a new edition, consi- 
derably enlarged with Vocabularies, Naval and Military 
Terms, Words of Command, Dialogues, Extracts from 
the best Spanish Writers, and a Grammar for Spaniards 
to learn English. A new edition, carefully Revised and 
much Enlarged, with an Appendix ; containing, ' the 
new System of Orthography, Accentuation, &c. 
as recently authorised and determined by the Royal 
Academy, and now in general use. 8vo. 6s. 6d. 

EXERCISES upon the Rules of Construc- 
tion of the Spanish Language ; with references to the 
above Grammar. By Mr. Fernandez. A new edition, 
greatly improved, corrected, and much enlarged, with 
several Additional Exercises, illustrative of the Or- 
thography and Accentuation as recently established, and 



French, Spanish, and Portuguese. 

referring to the Appendix of the Grammar, with Ex- 
tracts in Prose and Verse from the best modern Writers. 
12mo. 3s. 6d. 

A KEY TO FERNANDEZ'S EXERCISES, 

2s. 6d. 

FERNANDEZ'S SPANISH AND ENGLISH 
DICTIONARY, in one large vol. 12mo. 12s. 

A NEW SPANISH GRAMMAR; or, The 

Elements of the Spanish Language; with Vocabularies, 
Naval and Military Terms, Dialogues, and Selections 
from the most popular Spanish Authors, &c. &c. By 
Mr. Delpino. A new edition, improved by Delpueyo, 
8vo. 7s. 

LAS AVENTURAS de GIL BLAS de SAN 
TILLAN A ; Restituidas al Castellano, por el Sapientissimo 
Padre Isla, y en esta Nueva Edicion, revisadas por el 
Rev. Don Felipe Fernandez. 4 vols. 12mo. 18s. 

DON QUIXOTE de la Mancha, compuesto por 

Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra. Nueva edicion, por M. 
Fernandez. 4 torn. 12mo. 21s. 

RASELAS, PRINCIPE be ABISINIA, trad, 
del Doctor Johnson, por F. Fernandez. 12mo. 4s. 

A DICTIONARY of the Portuguese and 
English Languages, in Two Parts, Portuguese and 
English, and English and Portuguese : by Anthony 
Vieyra. In two large volumes, 8vo. a new edition, 
carefully^revised, and greatlv improved, by Mr. Aillaud. 
1/. I6s. 
An Abridgment op the above, in a pocket Volume. 

A NEW GRAMMAR of the Portuguese 
and English Languages. By Mr. Vieyra, Svo. A 
new edition, greatly improved by Mr. Aillaud, with 
the Portuguese W ords properly accented. 7<?« 6d. 

EXERCISES upon the Rules of Construc- 
tion of the Portuguese Language, referring to 
Vieyra's Grammar, new edit, improved, Ss. 6d. 

NOVA GRAMATICA INGLEZA, a qual 



Elementary Books in Italian, 

serve para Instruir aos Portuguezes na Lingua Ingleza, 
8vo. Nova Edi^ao revista, 8vo. 4*. 

HISTORIA de PORTUGAL, por Antonio 
de Moraes Silva, natural do Rio de Janeiro, e conti- 
nuada ate os ncssos tempos, por Hippolyto Jose da Costa, 
8 torn. 12mo. 14*. 

HISTORIA de GIL BLAS de SANTILLANA, 
traduzida em Portuguez, 4 torn. 12mo. l6s. 

N. B. A full allowance made to Schools and 
private Teachers. 

SAGGIO DEL TEATRO ITALIANO MO- 
DERNO ; ossia Commedie e Tragedie Scelte de migliori 
Scrittori Recenti : con Versioni degli Idiomi per le 
Commedie, ed Illustrazioni Storiche alle Tragedie di 
G. Rqlandi, in due Tomi, 1 6s. 

ALFIERI, TRAGEDIE SCELTE, Corredate 
di Argomenti con Annotazioni di Lingua ed Illustrazioni 
Istoriche da G. Rolandi, in due Tomi, 12s. 

French. 

A NEW FRENCH DICTIONARY, in Two 
Parts. The First, French and English ; the Second, 
English and French. Containing, 

I. Several, hundred Words not to be found in any of 
the Dictionaries hitherto published. — II. The various 
Meanings of Words often explained by French or 
English Sentences. — III. The Genders of Nouns, 
Adjectives, and Pronouns, and the Conjugations of Verbs. 
> — IV. The Irregularities of the Parts of Speech. To 
which is prefixed, a French Grammar, by Thomas 
Deletanville, in one large vol. 8vo. 5th edit. 14s. 

A NEW SET OF EXERCISES, upon the 
various Parts of FRENCH SPEECH, calculated for the 
use of such as are desirous of making French without 
the help of any Grammar or. Dictionary, by T. Dele- 
tanville, 12mo. 7th edit, revised and corrected, 3s. 

FABLES CHOISIES a Pusage des Enfans, 
&c. avec un Index Alphabetique de tous les Mots 



French, Spanish, and Portuguese. 

traduit en Anglais, par Lewis Chambaud, 12 mo. A 
new edition, with very considerable Additions, Improve- 
ments, and Corrections, with a short Introduction ex- 
plaining and illustrating the nature and object of Fable. 
By D. Boileau, 2s. 

THE IDIOMS OF THE FRENCH AND 
ENGLISH LANGUAGES, being equally necessary 
to the French, and other Foreigners understanding 
French to learn English ; and the best, if not the only 
help extant to attain a Knowledge of that Tongue, by 
Lewis Chambaud, 12mo. / A new and improved 
edition, 3s. 6d. 

LA LITURGIE, ou Formulaire des Prieres 
Publiques, selon 1'usage de 1'Eglise Anglicane, 4?. 6d* 

This is the only translation strictly conformable 
with the English Common Prayer, as used in the 
Established Church. 

LA SAINTE BIBLE, 12mo. Nouvelle edit. 
14?. boards. 

LA NOUVEAU TESTAMENT de N. S. 
Jesus Christ, nouvelle edition, corrigee, 12mo. 4?. 

SONNETS CHRETIENS sur divers Sujets, 
par Laurent Drelincourt, choises a 1'usage de la 
Jeunesse, nouvelle edit, revue et corrigee, 12mo. 2s. 

M. RESTAURS FRENCH GRAMMAR 

abridged, byLE Camus, 12mo. New edition, corrected, 2s. 

NEW AND FAMILIAR PHRASES AND 
DIALOGUES in French and English, by Arnoux. 
12mo. Fifth edit. 2s. 6d. 

A NEW ROYAL FRENCH GRAMMAR; 

containing, Rules for the pronouncing and writing of the 
French Tongue; some Familiar Phrases, Dialogues, 
Fables ; and Three Vocabularies. 12mo. 20th edit, 
revised and corrected, 4*. 

A SHORT TREATISE UPON ARTS AND 



Elementary Books in Italian, fyc. 

SCIENCES, in French and English, by Question 

and Answer, 12 mo. 4s. 

N. B. This new Edition has been carefully cor- 
rected, and very considerably improved by addi- 
tions drawn from the most recent discoveries in 
the Arts and Sciences. 

NOUVELLE METHODE pour apprendre a 
BIEN LIRE et a BIEN ORTHOGRAPHIER ; en 
Deux Parties, nouvelle edit. 12mo. 

AN ELEMENTARY AND METHODICAL 
ATLAS, on 32 copper plates, the 2nd edition, greatly- 
improved and carefully coloured, large folio, ll. 

The above four by Mr. Palairet, late French 
Master to their R. H. the Duke of Cumber- 
land, &c. 

MAGASIN DES ENFANS, ou Dialogues 
entre une sage Gouvernante, et plusieurs de ses Eleves 
de la premiere Distinction, par Madame de Beaumont ; 
nouvelle edit. 2 vols. 12mo. 8s. 

INSTRUCTIONS pour les jeunes Dames qui 
entrent dans le Monde, se Marient, leurs Devoirs dans 
cet Etat, et envers leurs Enfans, pour servir de Suite 
aux Magasin des Adolescentes, par Madame de Beau- 
mont, 4 vols. 12mo. 

EDUCATION COMPLETE ; ou, Abrege de 
l'Histoire Ancienne, mele de Geographie et de Chrono- 
logie ; avec des Notions Geographiques et Chronologiques, 
&c. par Mad. de Beaumont ; nouvelle edition, 2 vols. 
12mo. 9s. 

TRAITS DE'TACTE'S, ou a RACONTER, 

de l'Histoire Ancienne, et Universelle, pour lTnstruction 
de la Jeunesse ; faisant suite a TEducation Complete, 
par M. Beaumont. 

N. B. English Translations for the use of Schools, 
§c. of these useful and popular Works of Madame 
de Beaumont. 

HISTOIRE de GIL BLAS de SANTILLANE, 

par M. Le Sage, 4 torn, nouvelle edit. avec. fig. 12s. 



ESTABLISHED 

SCHOOL BOOKS, 



July 1827. 



PRINTED FOR 

LONGMAN, REES, ORME, BROWN, AND GREEN, 
LONDON. 



ART OF READING. 



FIRST BOOK for CHILDREN. 

Seventeenth Edition. Price 6d. sewed. 

By the same Au 

INTRODUCTION to the ENG- 
LISH READER; or, a Selection of 
Pieces, in Prose and Poetry, &c. 23rd 
Edit. Price 3s. bound. 

THE ENGLISH READER ; or, 

Pieces in Prose and Poetry, selected 
from the best Writers. Designed to 
assist young 1 Persons to read with Pro- 
priety and Effect; to improve their 
Language and Sentiments ; and to in- 
culcate some of the most important 
principles of Piety and Virtue. With 
a few preliminary Observations on the 
Principles of good Reading. Eighteenth 
Edition. Price 4s. 6d. bound. 



By LINDLEY MURRAY. 



SEQUEL to the ENGLISH 
READER; or, Elegant Selections in 
Prose and Poetry. Designed to improve 
the higher Class of Learners in Read- 
ing; to establish a Taste for just and 
accurate Composition ; and to promote 
the Interests of Piety and Virtue. Sixth 
Edition. Price is. 6rf. bound. 

An ENGLISH SPELLING- 
BOOK; with Reading Lessons adapted 
to the Capacities of Children; in Three 
Parts, calculated to advance the Learn- 
ers by natural and easy Gradations; and 
to teach Orthography and Pronuncia- 
tion together. 34th Edit. Is. 6d. bound. 

THE ENGLISH MASTER, or, Student's Guide to Reasoning 

and Composition: exhibiting an analytical View of the English Language, of the 
Human Mind, and of the Principles of Fine Writing. By WILLIAM BANKS, 
Private Teacher of Composition, Intellectual Philosophy, &c. 8vo. 10*. 6d. Bds. 

THE ENGLISH SPELLING BOOK, accompanied by a progres- 
sive Series of easy and familiar Lessons, adapted to the Capacities of Children, and 
embellished with a Variety of Engravings ; the whole intended to furnish, for the 
use of Schools, an improved introductory Book to the first Elements of the English 
Language. By WILLIAM MAVOR, LL.D. The 321st Edition. Price 1*. 6d. 

READING EXERCISES for SCHOOLS, on a New and very 

>opular Plan, being a Sequel to MAVOR's SPELLING, and an Introduction to the 
31ass Book, similar in Arrangement to Brown's Testament. By the Rev. DAVID 
SLAIR. A new Edition, corrected. Price 2s. bound. 

By the same Author, 



THE CLASS - BOOK; or, 
rHREE HUNDRED and SIXTY-FIVE 
[LEADING LESSONS for SCHOOLS of 
either SEX: combining the Elements of 
ill Knowledge, with a greater Number 
)f Reading Exercises, from the best Au- 



thors, than are to be found in any other 
Work of the same Description ; every 
Lesson having a clearly defined Object, 
and teaching some Principle of Science 
or Morality, of some important Truth. 
Anew Edition, printed on good Paper, 
and in a clear Type. Price 5s. bound. 



AN ENGLISH VOCABULARY, in which the Words are arranged 

ndiscriminately ; designed as a Sequel to the Scholar's Spelling Assistant, for the 
•urpose of grounding young Persons more effectually in SpeUing and Pronunci- 
Ltion. To which are added, Miscellanies on the most useful and interesting Sub- 
ects. By THOMAS CARPENTER. New Edit. In 12mo. Price 2s. bound. 

By the same Author, 



THE SCHOLAR'S SPELL- 

NG ASSISTANT. Intended for the 
Jse of Schools and private Tuition. A 



new Edition, corrected and improved. 
Price is. 6d. bound. 



2 SCHOOL BOOKS, PRINTED FOR LONGMAN AND CO. 

THE BOOK of MONOSYLLABLES; or, an Introduction to the 

Child's Monitor, adapted to the Capacities of young' Children. In Two Parts, cal- 
culated to instruct by familiar Gradations in the first Principles of Education and 
Morality. By JOHN HORNSEY, 1*. Gd. bound. 

By the same Author, 



THE PRONOUNCING EX- 
POSITOR; or, A NEW SPELLING 
ROOK. In Three Parts. 9th Edit. In 
12mo. 2s. bound. 

THE CHILD'S MONITOR; or, 
Parental Instruction. In Five Parts, 
containing- great Variety of Progressive 
Lessons, adapted to the Comprehension 



of Children: calculated to instruct them 
in Reading, in the Use of Stops, 
Spelling, and in dividing Words ir. 
proper Syllables ; and at the same time 
to give them some Knowledge of Na- 
tural History, of the Scriptures, and of 
several other sublime and important 
Subjects. A new Edition. Price is. 
bound. 



PRACTICAL ORTHOGRAPHY; or, the Art of teaching Spell- 

ing by Writing: containing an improved Method of Dictating, with Exercises for 
practice; and Collections of Words of difficult, irregular, and variable Spelling. 
Intended for the use of Teachers, and of such private Persons as are desirous of 
improving themselves in the Orthography of the English Language, and the prac- 
tice of Composition. By WILLIAM BEARCROFT, Late Master of the Academy, 
Kirby Moorside. In 12mo. 3s. Gd. in red. » 

POETRY for CHILDREN ; consisting of Selections of easy and 

interesting Pieces from the best Poets, interspersed with Original Pieces; adapted 
to Children between the Age of Six and Twelve. By Miss AIKIN. New Edit. 2s. 

CLASSICAL ENGLISH POETRY, consisting of from Three to 

Four Hundred of the best short Pieces in the Language, selected for the Use of 
Schools and young Persons, from the Works of the British Poets, with some original 
Pieces. By Dr. MAVOR and Mr. PRATT; with a Preface, indicating the several 
Species of Poetry, and their best Modes of Recitation. Closely printed in Duode- 
cimo. A New Edition. Price bs. Gd. bound. 

SELECT WORKS of the BRITISH POETS, with Biographi- 
cal and Critical Prefaces. By Dr. AIKIN. 3d Edit. In One large Volume of 
812 Pages, Medium 8vo. Price 18s. extra boards. 

The object of this Work, which is entirely new, is to comprise, within a single 
volume, a Chronological Series of our Classical Poets, from Ben Jonson to Beattie, 
without mutilation or abridgment, with Biographical and Critical Notices. The 
Work may be termed a "Library of Classical English Poetry," and may safely 
be recommended to the heads of Schools in general, and to the Libraries of 
Young Persons. 



HORT'S COURSE OF EDUCATION. 

An EASY COURSE of DOMESTIC EDUCATION ; compris- 
ing a Series of Elementary Treatises on the various Branches of Juvenile Instruc- 
tion; together with Advice to Parents and Tutors for conducting the Education 
of Children. Designed for the Use of Families and of Schools. By WILLIAM 
JILLARD HORT, Author of the New Pantheon, &c. 22 Vols. 18mo. sold together, 
in a Case, Price 31. 13s. Gd. or separately, as follows: — 

s. d. 

1. Advice to Parents and Tutors, 3 

2. English Spelling Book 1 6 

3. Introductory Reading Book ..2 6 

4. English Reading Book, Prose.. 3 6 
5. Verse.. 3 

6. English Grammar 2 6 

7. Exercises to Ditto 2 

8. Key to Ditto 2 

9. English Dictionary 2 6 

10. Epitome of the Holy Bible 2 6 

11. Geography 2 6 

12. Arithmetic .... .r.... 2 G 



13. Universal History .*...... 4 6 

14. History of England 2 fi 

15. Sciences and Arts, 2 Vols 8 

16. Natural History 6 

17. French Grammar 4 

18. Exercises 3 6 

19. Key to Ditto 2 6 

20. Conversations, and Vo- 
cabulary 2 6 

21. Pleading Book, Prose 

and Verse 4 C 



ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 

FIRST LESSONS in ENGLISH GRAMMAR, adapted to the 

'apacities of Children, from Six to Ten Years old. Designed as an Introduction 
o the Abridgment of Murray's Grammar. A new Edition. Price 9d. sewed. 

An ABRIDGMENT of MURRAY'S ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 

A'ith an Appendix, containing Exercises in Parsing, in Orthography, in Syntax, 
iml in Punctuation. Designed for the younger Classes of Learners. Eighty-ninth 
Edition. Price Is. bound. 

ENGLISH GRAMMAR, adapted to the different Classes of 

learners. With an Appendix, containing Rules and Observations for assisting the 
nore advanced Students to write with Perspicuity and Accuracy. By LINDLEY 
MURRAY. Thirty-ninth Edition. Price is. bound. 
By the same Author, 
An ENGLISH GRAMMAR, I Fifth Edition. Price U. Is. in boards. 
:omprehending t!\e PRINCIPLES and >> \Ve are of opinion, that this edition of Mr 

RULES of the LANGUAGE, illustrated Murray's work on English Grammar deserves a 

jy appropriate Exercises, and a Key P !ac %, in . libraries, and will not fad to obtain 
,o the Exercises. In 2 vols. Svo. The I u, " — Bnt ' CnU 

ENGLISH EXERCISES, adapted to MURRAY'S ENGLISH 

JRAMMAR; consisting of Exemplifications of the Parts of Speech, Instances of false 
Orthography, Violations of the Rules of Syntax, Defects in Punctuation, and Vio- 
ations of the Rules respecting Perspicuity and Accuracy. Designed for the Benefit 
)f private Learners, as well as for the Use of Schools. Thirty-fourth Edition, 
'rice 2s. 6d. bound. 

A KEY to the ENGLISH EXERCISES; calculated to enable 

private Learners to become their own Instructors in Grammar and Composition. 
Seventeenth Edition. Price 2s. 6d. bound. The Exercises and Key may be had 
together. Price is. 6d. 

GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS, adapted to the Grammar of 

LdNDLEY MURRAY, with Notes. By C. BRADLEY, A. M. Price 2s. 6d. bound. 
Fhe Sixth Edition, considerably improved. 

RULES for ENGLISH COMPOSITION, and particularly for 

rhemes. Designed for the Use of Schools, and in aid of Self-Instruction. By JOHN 
[UPPINGHAM, Private Tutor at Westminster School. Filth Edit. In 1 vol. 12mo. 
Price is. boards. 

By the same Author, 

THE ART of EXTEMPORE | and Oral Discussion : designed for the 

PUBLIC SPEAKING, including a Course Use of Schools, and Self-Instruction, 

of Discipline for obtaining the Facul- Third Edition. Price 6*. boards, 

ties of Discrimination, Arrangement, | 

A SHORT GRAMMAR of the ENGLISH LANGUAGE, sim- 

plified to the Capacities of Children. In Four Parts. 1. Orthography. 2. Analogy. 
i. Prosody, i. Syntax. With Remarks and appropriate Questions. — Also, an Ap- 
pendix, in Three Parts. 1. Grammatical Resolutions, &c. 2. False Syntax, &c. 
i. Rules and Observations for assisting young Persons to speak and write with 
Perspicuity and Accuracy. By JOHN HORNSEY. A new Edition, corrected and 
greatly improved. Price 2s. bound. 

By the same Author, 
ENGLISH EXERCISES, Or- original Reflections, &c. designed fo 
thographical and Grammatical, in Two improve the Juvenile Mind in Spelling 
Parts: being a Selection of choice and Grammar. In ISmo. Price 1*. 
Pieces in Proseand Verse. With many bound. 

An ABRIDGMENT of HORxNSEY'S ENGLISH GRAMMAR : 

designed for the Use of Children, from Six to Ten Years of Age; with anAppendix, 
containing lx;7 Questions appropriate to the Text. The 2d Edit. Price 9d. 

THE CLASSICAL ENGLISH LETTER WRITER; or, EPIS- 
TOLARY SELECTIONS : designed to improve Young Persons in the Art of Letter- 
writing, and in the Principles of Virtue and Piety. With Introductory Rules and 
Observations on Epistolary Composition ; and Biographical Notices of the Writers 
from whom the Letters are selected. By the Author of LESSONS for YOUNG 
PERSONS in HUMBLE LIFE, &c. &c. 2d Edit, in 12ino. Price 5*. bound. 



SCHOOL BOOKS, PRINTED FOR LONGMAN AND CO. 



FRENCH AND ITALIAN LANGUAGES. 



An UNIVERSAL FRENCH GRAMMAR, being an accuri 

System of French Accidence and Syntax, on an improved Plan. By NICHOj t 
HAMEL.. A New Edition. Price 4*. bound. 



By the s 

GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES 
upon the FRENCH LANGUAGE, com- 
pared with the English. A new Edition, 
with great Improvements. Price 4s. 
bound. 

CLEF, ou THEMES TRA- 
DUITS de la GRAMMAIRE. D'apres 
1'Edition stereotype, in 12mo. Price 3s. 
bound . 



a ; 



THE WORLDin MINIATURE, 

containing' a curious and faithful Ac- 
count of the Situation, Extent, Produc- 
tions, Government, Population, Dress, 
Manners, Curiosities, &c. &c. of the 
different Countries of the World : com- 
piled from the best Authorities; with 
proper References to the most essen- 
tial Rules of the French Language. A 
New Edit. 4*. 6d. bound. 

INTRODUCTION AU LECTEUR FRANCOIS; ou, Recueil 

de Pieces choisies: avec l'Explication des Idiotismes et des Phrases difficiles, qui 
s'y trouvent. Par LINDLEY MURRAY. 4th Edit, in 12mo. Price 3*. 6d. bound. 

By the same Author, 
LECTEUR FRANCOIS; ou, dans la Lecture; a etendre leurCon- 



Recueil de Pieces, en Prose et en Vers, 
tirees des Meilleurs Ecrivains, pour 
servir a perfectionner lesjeunes Gens 



noissance de la Langue Franchise ; et a 
leur inculquer des Principes de Vertu 
etdePiete. Fifth Edit. Price Ss.bound. 



A KEY to CHAMBAUD'S EXERCISES ; being a correct Trans- 

lationof the various Exercises contained in that Book. By E. J. VOIS1N. Fourth 
Edition. Price 4*. bound. 

An EXPLANATORY PRONOUNCING DICTIONARY of the 

FRENCH LANGUAGE, in French and English ; wherein the exact Sound and Arti- 
culation of every Syllable are distinctly marked (according to the Method adopted 
by Mr. Walker in his Pronouncing Dictionary). By L'ABBE TARDY, late Master 
of Arts in the University of Paris. A new Edition, revised. In 12mo. 6s. bound. 

A SEQUEL to the EXERCISES of Chambaud, Hamel, Perrin, 

Wanostrocht, and other Grammars, being a Practical Guide to translate from 
English into good French on a new Plan with Grammatical Notes. By G. H. POP- 
PLETON, in 12mo. Price 3s. bound. 

By the same Author, 
A KEY TO POPPLETON'S I lation of the various Exercises contain- 
FRENCH EXERCISES; being a Trans- I ed in that Book. 12mo. 2s. 6d. bound. 

A NEW ITALIAN GRAMMAR, in English and Italian, on a 

Plan different from any hitherto published; pointing out, in a clear concise Man- 
ner, the best Rules and the easiest Method for the Attainment of that Language. 
By GAETANO RAV1ZZOTTI. In 12mo. Price 9s. bound, the 5th Edit, consider- 
ably improved. 



LATIN LANGUAGE. 

WARD'S LATIN ACCIDENCE. Price Is. bound. 
WARD'S LATIN GRAMMAR. Price 2s. 6d. bound. 
EXERCISES to the ACCIDENCE and GRAMMAR; or, an 

Exemplification of the several Moods and Tenses, and of the principal Rules of Con- 
struction. By WILLIAM TURNER, M. A. late Master of the Free School at Col- 
chester. Price Ss. bound. 

TERMINATIONES et EXEMPLA DECLINATIONUM et 

CONJUGATIONUM ITEMQUE PROPRIA QlUE MARIBUS. QU.E GENUS et AS 
IN PR^ESENTI, englished and explained, for the Use of young Grammarians, 
Opera et studio CAROLI HOOLE, M. A. E. Col. e Oxon. Scholarchae olim Rothra- 
rniensis egro Ebor. In 18mo. Price Is. 6rf. bound. 



SCHOOL BOOKS, PRtNTED FOR LONGMAN AND CO. 



An ALPHABETICAL KEY to PROPRIA QILE MARIBUS 

QU^E GENUS, and AS IN PRiESBNTI, containing- all the Examples declined 
and translated, with the Rules quoted under each, and Numerical Ref rences to 
the Context. A new Edition, with Additions. By J. CAREY, LL.D. 3s. bound. 

By the same Author, 

LATIN PROSODY MADE 
EASY. The Third Edition, enlarged, 
materially improved, and accompa- 
nied with the Poetical Treatise of 
Terentianus Maurus de Metris. In 
12mo. Price 7*. Bds. 



THE ETON LATIN PRO- 
SODY, illustrated with English Expla- 
nations of the Rules and Authorities 
from the Latin Poets. 12mo. 1*. Gd. Bd. 

A METRICAL GUIDE to the 

right Intelligence of Virgil's Versifica- 
tion. 12mo. 1*. Gd. 



LATIN TERMINATIONS made 
EASY; a CLUE for YOUNG LATIN- 
ISTS and NON-LATIN ISTS, to trace 
the Original Forms and Signification of 
Nouns and Verbs, from their Termina- 
tions, alphabetically arranged, with 
Explanatory References to the Gram- 
mar. 12mo. 2s. 

SCANNING EXERCISES for 
YOUNG PROSODIANS, containing the 
first two Epistles from the Electa? ex 
Ovidio, scanned and proved by the 
Rules of the Eton Grammar. Price 4s. 
bound. 



immediately under the same Rule. 
Arranged under Models. 3s. Gd. bound. 
A Key to the same, 2s. Gd. bound. 

SELECT LATIN PHRASES 
taken from the best Authors. In 12mo. 
Price Is. Gd. bound. 



INTRODUCTORY LATIN EXERCISES to those of CLARKE, 

ELLIS, and TURNER; designed for the younger Classes of Learners. By N. 
HOWARD, Author of a Latin and Greek Vocabulary. In 12mo. Price 2s. Gd. bound. 

By the same Author, 

A SERIES of LATIN EXER- 
CISES, selected from the best Roman 
Writers, and adapted to the Rules in 
Syntax, particularly in the Eton Gram- 
mar: to which are added, English Ex- 
amples, to be translated into Latin, 

An ETYMOLOGICAL and EXPLANATORY DICTIONARY 

of Words derived from the Latin, being a Sequel to the Student's Manual, with 
amusing Illustrations from eminent Writers. By R. H. BLACK, LL.D. 2nd Edit. 
In 18mo. Price 5s. 6d. Bds. 

A PRAXIS on the LATIN PREPOSITIONS, being an Attempt 

to illustrate their Origin, Signification, and Government, in the Way of Exercis •, 
for the Use of Schools. By SAMUEL BUTLER, D.D. E.R.S.&c. &c. Archdeacon 
of Derby, and Head Master of Shrewsbury School. In Svo. Price 6s. Gd. Bds. 

MAITTAIRES CLASSICS. 
C. J. CJESARIS COMMENTARII, 12mo. Price 5*. 6d. bound. 
C. NEPOS, 12mo. Price 1*. 6d. bound. 
SALLUST, 12mo. Price 2s. 6d. bound. 
VIRGIL, 18mo. Price 3s. 6d. bound. 
OVIDII EPISTOLiE, 18mo. Price 3s. 6d. bound. 



GREEK LANGUAGE. 

WARD'S GREEK GRAMMAR. Price 2s. Gd. bound. 

A GRAMMAR of the GREEK LANGUAGE, on a new and im- 
proved Plan, in English and Greek. By JOHN JONES, Member of the Philological 
society at Manchester. Neatly printed in 12mo. Third Edit. Price 6s. Gd. Bound. 

A VOCABULx\RY, English and Greek, arranged systematically, 

:o advance the Learner in scientific as well as verbal Knowledge. Designed for the 
Jse of Schools. By NATHANIEL HOWARD. A new Edition. In 18mo. 3s. bound, 
" The Greek language is so copious that lew persons ever master the vocabulary. The present work 
i well calculated to expedite the knowledge of those terms of natural history, of art, and science, 
'hich are commonly the last learned, and the first forgotten." 
By the same Author, 

INTRODUCTORY GREEK I dels, to assist the Learner. Inl2mo. 
SXERCISES, to those of Neilson, Dun- Price bs. Gd. Bouud. 

>ar, and others ; arranged under Mo- | 



SCHOOL BOOKS, PRINTED FOR LONGMAN AND CO. 






The GREEK TERMINATIONS (Including- the Dialects an< 

Poetic Licences), alphabetically arranged, and grammatically explained. 
JOHN CAREY, L.L.D. Inlgmo. Price 4s. in Sheep. 

GREEK EXERCISES, in Syntax, Ellipses, Dialects, Prosody, 

and Metaphrases, (after the Manner of Clarke's and Man's " Introduction to the 
making of Latin,") adapted to the Grammars of Eton, Wettenhall, Moore, Bell, 
and Holmes. To which is prefixed, a concise but comprehensive Syntax. By the 
Rev. WILLIAM NEILSON, D. D. Minister of Dundalk, Ireland. The Seventh 
Edit. In I vol. 8vo. Price 5s. in Boards, and with the Key, Price 8s. 
By the same Author, 

A KEY to the GREEK EXERCISES. In 8vo. Price 3s. in Boards. 
DELECTUS SENTENTIARUM GK^CARUM ad USUM TI- 

RONUM ACCOMMOD ATUS ; cum Notulis et Lexico, on the Plan of Dr. Valpy's 
Latin Delectus. Seventh Edition. In 12mo. Price 4s. Bound. 

The STUDENT'S MANUAL; or, an Appendage to the English 

Dictionaries, being 1 an Etymological and Explanatory Vocabulary of Words de- 
rived from the Greek. In Two Parts, the 3d Edit, greatly augmented. By R. H. 
BLACK, LL.D. 2s. 6rf. bds. 

MAITTAIRE'S HOMER'S ILIAD, 12mo. Price 7s, hound- 



GEOGRAPHY. 

An ATLAS of MODERN GEOGRAPHY; consisting of 22 

coloured Maps, from a new set of Plates, corrected to 1826, with a complete Index 
of all the Names. By Dr. BUTLER. Price 12s. half-bound. 

By the same Author, 



An ATLAS of ANCIENT GEO- 
GRAPHY, consisting of 21 coloured 
Maps, with a complete accentuated In- 
dex. Price 12s. half-bound. 



OUTLINE MAPS of AN- 
CIENT GEOGRAPHY, being a Selec- 
tion, by Dr. Butler, from D'Anville's 
Ancient Atlas, intended as Practical 
Exercises for the Pupil to fill up, on 
Drawing Colombier. In folio. Price 
10s. 6d. 



A SKETCH of MODERN and 
ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY, for the use 
of Schools. In Svo. the 7th Edition, 
Price 9s. Bds. 

In the present edition of this little work, the 
Author has made some very important additions, 
chiefly in the Modern part of it. 

A GENERAL ATLAS of AN- 
CIENT and MODERN GEOGRAPHY, 

consisting of -13 coloured Maps. and two 
Indexes. Price 11. 4s. half-bound. 

*** The Indexes, now for (he first time ap- 
pended to these Atlases, contain the latitude 
and longitude of all the places; and in that of 
the Ancient Atlas, the quantities are also marked. 

An EASY GRAMMAR of GEOGRAPHY, being- an Introduction 

and Companion to the larger Work of the same Author, published under the Title 
of " Geography on a popular Plan," and esteemed the most practical Work of 
this Kind extant. By the Rev. J. GOLDSMITH. A new Edition, improved. Illus- 
trated with Views of the principal Capitals of the World, and a Variety of Maps, 
&c. Price 3s. ed. bound. 

By the same Author, 



OUTLINE GEOGRAPHICAL 

COPY-BOOKS, in 4to. with the Lines 
of Latitude and Longitude only, in- 
tended as Practical Exercises for the 
Pupil to fill up, from Dr. Butler's At- 
lases of Antient and Modern Geogra- 
phy, and designed as an Accompani- 
ment. Price is. each, sewed; or, 7s. 6d. 
together. 



GEOGRAPHY ona POPULAR 
PLAN, for the Use of SCHOOLS and 
YOUNG PERSONS, containing all the 
interesting and amusing Features of 
Geographical Knowledge, and calcu- 
lated to convey Instruction by Means 
of the striking and pleasing Associa- 
tions produced by the peculiar Man- 



ners, Customs, and Characters of all 
Nations and Countries. A new Edition, 
considerably enlarged and improved, 
illustrated with beautiful Engravings, 
representing the Dresses, Customs, and 
Habitations of all Nations, with nume- 
rous Maps, &c. Price 14s. bound and 
lettered. 



PINKERTON'S SCHOOL ATLAS, containing; 21 Maps neatly 

coloured. Price 12s. half- bound. 



SCHOOL BOOKS, PRINTED FOR LONGMAN AND CO. 



A New TREATISE on the USE of the GLOBES ; or, a Philoso- 
phical View of the Earth and Heavens; comprehending an Account of the Figure, 
Magnitude, and Motion of the Earth; with the natural Changes of its Surface, 
caused by Floods, Earthquakes, &c. designed for the Instruction of Youth. By 
THOMAS KEITH. In 1 vol. 12mo. with Plates. Sixth Edition. Price 6*. Boards. 
By the same Author, 

A SYSTEM of GEOGRAPHY, | tions in the Division of the Continent 
for the Use of Schools on an entirely ^re carefully attended to. 12mo. 6s. 

new Plan, in which the recent Altera- I Boards. 

An INTRODUCTION to the GEOGRAPHY of the NEW TES- 

TAMENT; comprising a summary Chronological and Geographical View of the 
Events recorded respecting the Ministry of our Saviour : with Questions for Exa- 
mination, and an accented Index ; principally designed for the Use of Young Per- 
sons, and for the Sunday Employment of Schools. By LANT CARPENTER, LL. D. 
In 1 vol. 12mo. with Maps. bs. Bds. The Fifth Edition, considerably improved. 

INSTRUCTIVE RAMBLES through London and its Environs. 

By Mrs. HELME. The Sixth Edition, complete in one vol. Price is. 6d. bound. 

A COMPENDIUM of GEOGRAPHY, for the Use of Schools, 

Private Families, and those who study this necessary Science. By PJCHMAL MANG- 
NALL, Author of " Historical Questions." 2nd Edit, in 12mo. corrected to the 
present Time, 9s. bound. 

GEOGRAPHY for YOUTH, adapted to the different Classes of 

Learners. By the late Rev. JOHN HARTLEY. In 12mo. (the Third Edition), 
Price is. 6d. bound. 

By the same Author, 

OUTLINES of GEOGRAPHY, I an Introduction to the Geography for 
the First Course for Children. Being I Youth. 9d. 



HISTORY, &c. 

ANNALS of the REIGN of GEORGE the THIRD, brought 

down to the Period of his Majesty's Decease. By JOHN AIKIN, M.D. Abridged 
for the Use of Schools and young Persons. In 12mo. 4s. 6d. bound. 

HISTORICAL and MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS for the 

Use of Young People; with a Selection of British and General Biography, &c. By 
RICHMAL MANGNALL. A New Edition, in 12mo. Price 5*. bound. 

An ABRIDGMENT of UNIVERSAL HISTORY. Adapted to the 

Use of Families and Schools, with appropriate Questions at the End of each Section. 
By the Rev. H. I. KNAPP, A. M. In 1 vol. 12mo. Fifth Edit. Price 4s. 6d. bound. 

An ABRIDGMENT of the HISTORY of SCOTLAND, from 

the Invasion of tha Romans till the Union with England: with a Supplementary 
Narrative of the Rebellions in 171ft and 1745; together with Sketches illustrative 
of the National Institutions of the Scots, the Progress of Education and Literature, 
Agriculture, Manufactures, and Commerce. With Six Hundred Questions as 
Exercises. By DANIEL MACINTOSH. In 12mo. the 2d Edition, revised and en- 
larged. Price 65. bound 

THE HISTORY of ENGLAND, related in Familiar Conversa- 
tions, by a Father to his Children. By ELIZABETH HELME. Sixth Edition. 
In 2 vols. 12rno. 9*. bound. 

LETTERS on FRENCH HISTORY, from the Earliest Period to 

the Battle of Waterloo, and re-ejtablishment of the House of Bourbon : for the Use 

of Schools. By J.BIGLAND. A new Edition, continued to 1826. In 12mo. 6s. Bds. 

By the same Author, 

TORY; containing Observations and 
Reflections on the Causes and Conse- 
quences of those Events which have 
produced conspicuous Changes in the 
Aspect of the World, and the general 
State of Human Affairs. Fifth Edit. 
ISmo. Price Rs. Boards. 



LETTERS on ENGLISH HIS- 
TORY, from the Invasion of Julius Cae- 
sar to the Battle of Waterloo: for the 
Use of Schools. In 12ino. Price 6s. bds. 



LETTERS on the STUDY and 
USE of ANCIENT and MODERN HIS- 



SCHOOL BOOKS, PRINTED FOR LONGMAN AND CO. 



The BRITISH CONSTITUTION; or, an Epitome of Black- 
stone's Commentaries on the Laws of England. By VINCENT WANOSTROCHT 
LL.D. In One thick Volume, 12mo. Price 12s. Bds. 

" To possess a knowledge of the form of that government under which we live, and be versed in 
the laws which we are lequired to obey, are confessedly of great importance to every British 
member or society; and it may be confidently asserted, that were the institutions of our country 
better known, the"advantages of our constitution would be the more highly estimated."— Preface. 

An INTRODUCTION to the STUDY of CHRONOLOGY and 

UNIVERSAL HISTORY. By WILLIAM JILLARD HORT. ISmo. 2d Edit. is. bd. 



By the same Author, 



An INTRODUCTION to MO- 
DERN HISTORY, from the Birth of 
Christ to the present Time, in Conti- 
nuation of an Introduction to Chrono- 
logy and Ancient History. In 2 Vols. 
ISmo. Price 10s. 6d. bd. 

The NEW PANTHEON ; or, an 
Introduction to the Mythology of the 



Ancients, in Question and Answer. Corn- 
piled principally for the Use of Fe- 
males. The Fifth Edition, considera- 
bly enlarp-ed. With 17 Plates. Price 
5s. 6d. bound and lettered. 

"TheNew Pantheon is scrupulously delicate; it 
is also well arranged, ana well written."— Eclec. 
liev. " It would be unjust not to recommend this 
work as an elegant and useful companion to 
young persons of both sexes."— Gent. Mag. 



An EPITOME of ROMAN ANTIQUITIES ; or, an Account 

of the Civil Government, Judicial Proceedings, Religion, Games, Military and 
Naval Affairs, Dress, Entertainments, Marriages, Funerals, Money, Weights, 
Measures, &c. &c. of the Romans: to which is prefixed, an Abridgment of Roman 
History. By C. IRVING, LL.D. & F.S.A. In 12mo. 5s. bound. 

A COMPENDIOUS CHART of ANCIENT HISTORY and 

BIOGRAPHY, designed principally for the Use of Young Persons. By Mrs. JOHN 
HURFORD, of Altrinchain, and dedicated by Permission to the Rev. Archdeacon 
Butler. Neatly engraved on a Plate, Two Feet Six Indies, by Two Feet, and 
carefully coloured, Price 8s. 6d. in Sheets; 10s. 6d, folded in Boards; or 12s. on 
Canvas and Roller, or in a Case. 

" This Chart is constructed with great ingenuity. ... It in some measure combines the advan- 
tages of both Dr. Priestley's Charts, the Biographical and Historical."— Monthly Review. 

By the same Author, 

A BRIEF SUMMARY of AN- I above. To which is added, a Catalogue 



CIENT HISTORY, arranged 

riods; intended as a Companion to tlie 



of all the Names inserted in the Chart. 
18mo. 3s. half-bound. 



BIOGRAPHY. 



THE UNIVERSAL BIOGRAPHICAL DICTIONARY; or, 

nn Historical Account of the Lives, Characters, and Works of the most eminent 
Persons of every Age and Nation. By JOHN WATKINS, LL.D. A New Edition, 
corrected to the present Time, and enlarged with 1200 additional Lives, in 1100 
Pages Brevier Octavo. Price 25s. in Bds. 

THE BRITISH NEPOS, consisting of Select Lives of the illus- 

trious Britons who have been the most distinguished for their Virtues, Talents, or 
remarkable Advancement in Life, interspersed with practical Reflections; written 
purposely for the Use of young Persons, on the obvious and important Principle — 
that example is more powerful and more seductive than precept. By WILLIAM 
MAVOR, LL. D. A new Edition, enlarged. Price bs. bound. 

By the same Author, 
A SELECTION of the LIVES I taining Accounts of the most illustrious 
of PLUTARCH, abridged for the Use and estimable Characters of Anti 
of Schools. Price 6s. Gd. bound, con- I 1 uit y« 



RELIGION AND MORALS. 

TRUE STORIES; or, Interesting Anecdotes of Children, designed 

through the medium of Example, to inculcate Principles of Virtue and Piety. Third 
Edition. In ISmo. Price 2s. 6d. in Boards. 



By the same Author, 



TRUE STORIES; or, Interest- 
ing Anecdotes of Young Persons, de- 
signed through the medium of Exam- 
ple, to inculcate Principles of Virtue 
and Piety. InlSmo. 4s. 6d. Boards. 

A FRIENDLY GIFT for SER- 
VANTS and APPRENTICES; contain- 
ing the Character of a good and faith- 
ful Servant, Advice to Servants of 
every Denomination; Letter from an 



Uncle to his Nephew, on taking him 
Apprentice ; and Anecdotes of good and 
faithful Servants. The Sixth Edition. 
Price 9rf. 

LESSONS for YOUNG PER- 
SONS in HUMBLE LIFE, calculated to 
promote their Improvement in the Art 
of Reading, in Virtue and Piety, and 
particularly in the Knowledge of the 
Duties peculiar to their Stations. The 
Fifth Edition. Price 4s. Boards. 



LETTERS addressed to a YOUNG MAN, on his first Entrance 

into Life ; and adapted to the peculiar Circumstances of the present Times. By 
Mrs. WEST. A New Edition. In 3 vols. 12ino. Price U. Is. Boards. 



REFLECTION. A Tale. By Mrs. Hofland. In 1 Vol. 12mo. 

Price 6*. Bds. with a Frontispiece from a Design by Corbould. 



By the same Author, 

Price 



INTEGRITY. A Tale. Frontis- 
piece, Price Gs, Bds. 

MODERATION. ATale. Fron- 
piece, Price 6*. Bds. 



DECISION. A 

Boards. 

PATIENCE. ATale. Frontis- 
piece, Price 6*. Bds. 

SERMONS for SCHOOLS, containing one for every Sunday in the 

Year; and also for Christmas-Day, Good-Friday j Easter-Sunday, and Fast-Days ; of 
lengths and on Subjects adapted to Young Persons of either Sex : selected and 
abridged from Home, Blair, Gisborne, Zollikofer, Palev, Porteus, Jortin , Enfield, 
Horsley, Seed, &c. &c. A New Edition. By the Rev. S. BARROW, 7s. bound and 
lettered. 

THE POWER of RELIGION on the MIND, in Retirement, 

Affliction, and at the Approach of Death ; exemplified in the Testimonies and Ex- 
perience of Persons distinguished bv their Greatness, Learning, or Virtue. By 
LINDLEY MURRAY, Author of English Grammar, &c. The Seventeenth Edition. 
In one Volume 12mo. Price 5*. bound ; or in 8vo. Price 12s. Boards. 

By the same Author, 



The DUTY and BENEFIT of a 
DAILY PERUSAL of the HOLY SCRIP- 
TURES in FAMILIES. 2d Edit. Price 
Is. sewed. 



A SELECTION from BISHOP 
HORNE'S COMMENTARY on the 
PSALMS. In 1 vol. 12mo. Price 5s. 
boards. 



THE HISTORY of ALL RELIGIONS, with Explanations 

of the Doctrines and Order of Worship, as held and practised by all the Denomina- 
tions of professing Christians: containing much Information on Biblical Litera- 
ture at this Day unknown. By JOHN BELLAMY. In 12mo. Price Os. and in 
Svo. fine Paper, and hot-pressed, Ids. 6d. Boards, the Second Edition. 



10 SCHOOL BOOKS, PRINTED FOR LONGMAN AND CO. 

ARITHMETIC, BOOK-KEEPING, TRADE, 
COMMERCE, &c. 
THE ARITHMETICIAN'S GUIDE; or, a Complete Exercise 

Book, for the Use of public Schools and private Teachers. By WILLIAM TAYLOR, 
Teacher of the Mathematics, &c. A New Edition, l2mo. Price 2s. 6d. bound. 

A KEY to TAYLOR'S ARITHMETICIAN'S GUIDE: con- 

taming Answers to all the Questions in that Work; with Solutions at fulllength 
wherever there is the Appearance of Difficulty. By W. H. WHITE, Head Master 
of the Commercial and Mathematical School, Bedford, 4s. bound, 

An INTRODUCTION to PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC, in Two : 

Parts, with various Notes and occasional Directions for the Use of Learners. By 
THOMAS MOLINEUX, many years Teacher of Accounts, Short-hand, and the 
Mathematics, at the Free Grammar School in Macclesfield. The Twelfth Edit, 
in l2mo. Parti. Price 2s. 6d. bound Part II. Fourth Edit. 2s. ed. bound. 

ELEMENTS of PRACTICAL BOOK-KEEPING, by SINGLE 

and DOUBLE ENTRY; according' to present practice. To which are ad tied, a 
Series of Practical Exercises for the improvement of the student, and an Explana- 
tion of Commercial Terms. By JAMES MORRISON. In 8vo. a new Edit, improved 
and enlarged, price 8s. half-bound. 

Also may be had, 

MORRISON'S SETS OF BLANK BOOKS, ruled to correspond with the four sets 
contained in the work itself. 

By the same Author, 



COMMERCIAL ARITHMETIC, in 
which are given the Mode of Arrange- 
ment, and Solution of every Question 
and Exercise proposed in that Work. 
In 12mo. Price 6s. Bds. 



A CONCISE SYSTEM of COM- 
MERCIAL ARITHMETIC, adapted to 
modern Practice. In 12mo. 4s. &d. 
bound. 

A KEY TO MORRISON'S 

THE ARITHMETIC of REAL LIFE and BUSINESS, adapted 

to the practical Use of Schools, including a complete Reformation of all the Tables 
of Weights and Measures; the Calculation of Annuities, Leases, Estates, Lives, 
Stocks, Exchanges, &c. ; and more numerous Examples under every Rule, than are 
to be found in any other Book of this Kind. By the Rev. J. JOYCE. Price 3s. 

A KEY to DITTO, for the Use of Teachers ; to which is subjoined, 

a System of Mental Arithmetic. A New Edition. Price 3s. bound. 



the eye. 

I. ARITHMETIC for CHILDREN. The Scholar's Book. 2s. Bd. 

II. ARITHMETIC for CHILDREN. The Teacher's Book. 

4s. Bd. By the Author of " LESSONS for YOUiNG PERSONS in HUMBLE LIFE." 

A GENERAL COMMERCIAL DICTIONARY, comprehend- 

ing Trade, Manufactures, and Navigation; as also Agriculture, so far as it is 
connected with Commerce ; with brief Abstracts of the Laws relating to the Re- 
gulation and Protection of Trade and Tradesmen ; exhibiting their prest nt State, 
and their Connexion in these Kingdoms with those of other Parts of the World. 
By THOMAS MORTIMER, Esq. with considerable Alterations and Additions, by 
WILLIAM DICKENSON, Esq. A new Edit, corrected, and brought down to 1827. 
In One large Vol. 8vo. Price If. 5s. Bds. 

UNIVERSAL STENOGRAPHY ; or, a Complete and Practical 

SYSTEM of SHORT-HAND. By WILLIAM MAVOR, LL.i). A New Edition, ill 
bvo. Price Gs. Boards. 



SCHOOL BOOKS, PIUNTED FOR LONGMAN AND CO. H 

GENERAL SCIENCE. 

THE LITTLE WORLD OF KNOWLEDGE, arranged mime- 

rically: designed for exercising the Memory, and as an Introduction to tbe Arts 
and Sciences, History, Natural Philosophy, Belles Letters, &c. &c. By CHAR- 
LOTTE MATILDA HUNT. In 12mo. Price 7s. Bds. 

" Novel in its plan, excellent in its principle, and most praiseworthy in its execution, this ' Little 
World of Knowledge' is truly wh-tt it professes to be, or r.ither more,— for beyond being- a mere intro. 
duction, it is an ab'e instructor in arts, sciences, history, natural philosophy, and literature — 
ry Gazplle, Julv 1. 1826. 

SYSTEMATIC EDUCATION, or ELEMENTARY INSTRUC- 

TION in the various Departments of Literature and Science, with Practical Rules 
for studying each Branch of Useful Knowledge. By the Rev. W. SHEPHERD the 
Rev. J. JOYCE, and the Rev. LANT CARPENTER, LL.D. Third Edition. In 
3 thick vols. Svo. (closely printed, and illustrated with nine Plates by Lowry, &c ) 
Price lf.Ws.6d. Boards. 

PRINCIPLES of EDUCATION, Intellectual, Moral, and Phy- 
sical. Bv the ttev. LANT CARPENTER, LL.D. In Svo. Price 1 2s. Boards. 

CONVERSATIONS on NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, in which 

the Elements of that Science are familiarly explained, and adapted to the Com- 
prehension of Young Pupils. By the Author of " Conversations on Chemistry," 
Fourth Edit. Price 10s. 6d. Bds. Illustrated with 22 Engravings by Lowry. 
By the same Author, 
CONVERSATIONS on POLI- I plained. The Fifth Edition, improved, 
TICAL ECONOMY; in which the Ele- "» °'} e lar S e volume 12mo. Price 9s. 
ments of that Science are familiarly ex- | boards. 

A FAMILIAR INTRODUCTION to the ARTS and SCIENCES, 

for the Use of Schools and Young Persons; containing a General Explication of the 
Fundamental Principles and Facts of the Sciences; divided into Lessons, with Ques- 
tions subjoined to each, for the Examination of Pupils. By the Rev. J. JOYCE, 
Author of Scientific Dialogues, &c. Third Edition. In one vol. 12mo. Price 6s.' 
Boards, illustrated with Copper-plates bv Lowry, and wood-cuts by Branston. 

LECTURES on ASTRONOMY ; illustrated by the ASTRONO- 

MICON, or a series of moveable Diagrams, exhibiting a mo<*e familiar and natural 
elucidation of the real and apparent motions of the Heavenly Bodies, than is to be 
met with in any other work on this valuable Science. By VV. H. PRIOR. Dedi- 
cated, by permission, to Dr. Birkbeck. 

The Diagrams are so constructed as to act upon one common centre, screwed 
into aboard, upon which the other figures referred to in the Lectures are also deli- 
neated. To this centre a moveable Planisphere is likewise adapted, upon which, 
from the peculiarity of its construction, all the most important problems usually 
performed by the Celestial Globe, maybe worked with much m«re facility than 
upon that instrument. A very curious and complete Astronomical Machine is thus 
formed, which, uniting in itself most of the advantages of the Orrery and the Ce- 
lestial Globe, becomes a cheap and elegant substitute for them both. 

Price of the Astronomicon, 31. 13s. Gd.— Lectures, 10s. Rd. 

PHILOSOPHY in SPORT made SCIENCE in EARNEST; beine; 

an Attempt to illustrate the First Principles of Natural Philosophy by the aid of 
Popular Toys and Sports. 3 Vols. 12mo. With Engravings on Wood from Designs 
by George Cruikshank. Price 11. Is. Bds. 



PRACTICAL MATHEMATICS. 

An INTRODUCTION to the THEORY and PRACTICE of 

PLANE and SPHERICAL TRIGONOMETRY,and the Stereographic Projection of the 
Sphere including the Theory of Navigation; comprehending a Variety of Rules, 
Formula?, &c. with their practical Applications to the Mensui ation of Heights and' 
Distances, to determine the Latitude by two Altitudes of the Sun, the Longitude by 
the Lunar Observations, and to other important Problems on the Sphere, and on 
Nautical Astronomy. By THOMAS KEITH, lu 8vo. Price 14s. Bds. The Fourth 
Edition, corrected and improved. 

By the same Author, 

THE ELEMENTS of PLANE 

GEOMETRY; containing the First Six 
Books of Euclid, from the Text of Dr. 
Simpson, Emeritus Professor of Mathe- 
matics in the University of Glasgow, 
with Notes, Critical and Explanatory. 
To which are added, Book VII. includ- 



ing several important Propositions 
which are not in Euclid; and Book 
VIII. consisting of Practical Geome- 
try; also Book IX. of Planes and their 
Intersections; and Book X. of the 
Geometry of Solids. 2d Edition. lit 
Svo. Price \0s.6d. Boards. 



12 SCHOOL BOOKS, PRINTED FOR LONGMAN AND CO. 

CONVERSATIONS in ALGEBRA ; being an Introduction to 

the First Principles of that Science ; in a Series of Dialogues designed for those 
who have not the Advantage of a Tutor, as well as for the Use of Students in 
Schools. By WILLIAM COLE. 12ino. Price Is. boards. 

THE ELEMENTS of LAND-SURVEYING, in all its Branches, 

practically adapted for the Use of Schools and Students; and including Practical 
Geometry, Trigonometry, Land Measuring by the Chain, Plane, Table, Theodolite, 
and other instruments : the entire Practice of Hilly Ground ; the Division of Land ; 
Plotting and Mapping, complete Tables of Sines and Tangents, Logarithms, &c. 
&c. By ABRAHAM CROCKER, Frome. With Copperplates, and upwards of 
One Hundred Woodcuts. New Edit, corrected in January 1825. Price 9s. bound. 

THE ELEMENTS of ASTRONOMY : with Methods for deter- 
mining the Longitudes, Aspects, &c. of the Planets for any future Time; and an 
extensive Set of Geographical and Astronomical Problems on the Globes. By S. 
TREEBY, Teacher of the Mathematics and Classics, &c. &c. With upwards of 
700 Questions. In l8mo. with Plates, 3*. 6d. bound. 

ELEMENTS of ALGEBRA ; compiled from Garnier's French 

Translation of Leonard Euler, and arranged so as to form a complete System of 
Elementary Instruction in the First Part of Algebra. To which are added, So- 
lutions of several Miscellaneous Problems, with Questions and Examples for the 
Practice of the Student. By CHARLES TAYLER, Downing College, Cambridge. 
Svo. 10s. 6d. boards. 



NATURAL HISTORY, BOTANY, CHEMISTRY, &c. 

THE ELEMENTS of NATURAL HISTORY, for the Use of 

Schools. Founded on the Linnaean Arrangement of Animals, with popular Descrip - 
tions, in the manner of Goldsmith and Buffon. By WILLIAM MAVOR, LL.D. A 
New' Edition. Price ~ts. 6rf. bound, illustrated by Fifty Engravings. 

An INTRODUCTION to the STUDY of BOTANY. By Sir J. E. 

SMITH, M.D. F.R. S. P. L. S. Fifth Edition. In V vol. 8vo. with Fifteen Plates. 
14s. Bds. *** A few Copies are coloured, 11. 8s. Bds. 

The Plan of this Work is to render the Science of Botanical Arrangement as well 

as the general Structure and Anatomy of Plants accessible, and in every Point 

eligible for Young Persons of either Sex, who may be desirous of making this elegant 

and useful Science a Part of their Education or Amusement. 

By the same Author, 

A GRAMMAR of BOTANY. I Figures of Plants. Price 12*. plain; or 
In 8vo. with 31 Plates, containing 277 ' coloured, U. Us. Grf.Bds. 

CONVERSATIONS on CHEMISTRY. In which the Elements 

of that Science are familiarly explained and illustrated by Experiments. In this 
Edition a Conversation has been added on the Steam Engine. In 2 vols. 12mo. 
with Plates by Lowry. Tenth Edition, improved. 14*. Bds. 

" This work may be strongly recommended to young students of both sexes. The perspicuity of the 
s*« le the regular disposition of the subject, the judicious selection of illustrative experiments, and the 
elee-a'nce of the plates, are so well adapted to the capacity of beginners, and especially of those who 
do not wish to dive deep into the science, that a more appropriate publication can hardiy be desired." 

CONVERSATIONS on BOTANY, with Twenty Engravings, 

Fifth Edition. In one vol. 12mo. Price Is. 6d. plain, or 12s. coloured. 

The object of this Work is to enable young Persons to acquire a knowledge of the 
Vegetable Productions of their Native Country ; for this purpose tbe arrangement 
of Linnseus is briefly explained, and a Native Plant of each Class (with a few ex- 
ceptions) is examined, and illustrated by an Engraving; and a short Account is 
added of some of the principal Foreign Species. 

CONVERSATIONS on MINERALOGY : with Plates, en- 
craved by Mr. and Miss LOWRY, from Original Drawings, comprising upwards of 
400 Figures of Minerals, including 12 beautifully coloured Specimens. 2nd Edit. 
In 2 Vols. l2mo. Price 14s. Bds. 

FIRST STEPS to BOTANY, intended as popular Illustrations 

of the Science, leading to its Study as a Branch of general Education. By JAMES 
L. DRUMMOND, M.D. Professor of Anatomy and Physiology in the Belfast Acade- 
mical Institution. In 12m0. with 100 Woodcuts, comprising 200 Figui'es, 9s. Bds. 

CONVERSATIONS on MYTHOLOGY. 1 Vol. 12mo. 5s. Bds. 



A COMPE?> 

By RICHMAL M, 

corrected to the pre 

A SYSTEM 

entirely new Plan, 
carefully attended t< 
Plates. Price 6*. I 

A N EW TR 

sophical View of th 
THOMAS KEITHJ 

Aii INTRO] 

PLANE and SPH 
the SPHERE; incl 
Us. Bds. The 5th 

% The ELEM 

First Six Books of 
matics in the Univ 
are added, Book V. 
and Book VIII. co 
Intersections; and 
2d Edit, in 8vo. P 

The COM P] 

ing several New an 
Tuition. ByTHO] 

ELEMENT! 

Translation of Lec 
Elementary Instruc 
Downing College, ( 

ANNALS of 

to the Period of His 
of Schools and Youi 

CONVERSE 
CONVERSE 

in which the leadij 
nected with each otn 
12ino. Price 8s. Bd 

CONVERSE 

of that Science are f! 
a Conversation has b 
in 2 Vols. 12mo. wit 

CONVEKSA 

the Elements of thai 
of Young Pupils 

CONVERT 

the Elements of tha 
COWRRS. 



JL. G. 0. (E. B.),. 



jjar gipm 




•%,;• 

i w / 



Atdiisoii, 

lopeka 
£ and Santa Fe 

I * v-x Railroad. 






\ 



\ 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 

mi mil ii i inn inn mil n mi 



003 121 033 1 O 



